WO2017086341A1 - Broadcast receiving device - Google Patents

Broadcast receiving device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2017086341A1
WO2017086341A1 PCT/JP2016/083951 JP2016083951W WO2017086341A1 WO 2017086341 A1 WO2017086341 A1 WO 2017086341A1 JP 2016083951 W JP2016083951 W JP 2016083951W WO 2017086341 A1 WO2017086341 A1 WO 2017086341A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
broadcast
information
application
unit
descriptor
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2016/083951
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
橋本　康宣
吉澤　和彦
鈴木　基之
清水　拓也
益岡　信夫
Original Assignee
日立マクセル株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2015226588A external-priority patent/JP2017098656A/en
Priority claimed from JP2015227854A external-priority patent/JP2017098702A/en
Priority claimed from JP2015228489A external-priority patent/JP2017098736A/en
Application filed by 日立マクセル株式会社 filed Critical 日立マクセル株式会社
Publication of WO2017086341A1 publication Critical patent/WO2017086341A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04H—BROADCAST COMMUNICATION
    • H04H60/00—Arrangements for broadcast applications with a direct linking to broadcast information or broadcast space-time; Broadcast-related systems
    • H04H60/09—Arrangements for device control with a direct linkage to broadcast information or to broadcast space-time; Arrangements for control of broadcast-related services
    • H04H60/14—Arrangements for conditional access to broadcast information or to broadcast-related services
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04H—BROADCAST COMMUNICATION
    • H04H60/00—Arrangements for broadcast applications with a direct linking to broadcast information or broadcast space-time; Broadcast-related systems
    • H04H60/68—Systems specially adapted for using specific information, e.g. geographical or meteorological information
    • H04H60/72—Systems specially adapted for using specific information, e.g. geographical or meteorological information using electronic programme guides [EPG]
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43—Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/431—Generation of visual interfaces for content selection or interaction; Content or additional data rendering
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/43—Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
    • H04N21/435—Processing of additional data, e.g. decrypting of additional data, reconstructing software from modules extracted from the transport stream
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
    • H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
    • H04N21/47—End-user applications
    • H04N21/482—End-user interface for program selection

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a broadcast receiving apparatus.
  • One of the extended functions of the digital broadcasting service is data broadcasting that transmits digital data using broadcast waves and displays various information such as weather forecasts, news, and recommended programs.
  • Many television receivers capable of receiving data broadcasts are already on the market, and many techniques related to data broadcast reception have been disclosed, including Patent Document 1 below.
  • TV receivers are also required to expand various functions.
  • requests for distribution of content and cooperative applications using a broadband network environment such as the Internet and requests for high resolution / high definition of video content.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a broadcast receiving apparatus that can execute a function with higher added value.
  • a broadcast receiving apparatus capable of receiving a digital broadcast service of a broadcast system adopting a media transport method capable of executing an application in cooperation with a broadcast program, and receiving a broadcast wave of the digital broadcast service
  • a broadcast receiving unit a separation unit that separates at least a video about a broadcast program, electronic program guide information, and application-related information from the received broadcast wave, a broadcast video reproduction unit that reproduces a video about the broadcast program
  • An electronic program guide creation unit that creates an electronic program guide screen based on electronic program guide information
  • an application acquisition unit that acquires a predetermined application based on location information acquired with reference to the application related information, and the acquired Application execution video by executing a predetermined application
  • Whether or not a cooperative operation between an application executable in cooperation with a broadcast program and a portable information terminal can be further set for each broadcast program, and the electronic program guide creation unit displays a broadcast to be displayed on the electronic program guide screen
  • an application that can be executed in cooperation with the broadcast program is a display indicating that a presentation synchronization operation with the portable information terminal is possible, or an application that can be executed in cooperation with the broadcast program.
  • FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram of a broadcast communication system including a broadcast receiving apparatus according to Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. It is explanatory drawing of the component of the encoding signal in MMT. It is a block diagram of MPU in MMT. It is a block diagram of the MMTP packet in MMT. It is a conceptual diagram of the protocol stack of the broadcasting system using MMT. It is a hierarchical block diagram of the control information used with a broadcast system. It is a list of tables used in the TLV-SI of the broadcasting system. It is a list of descriptors used in the TLV-SI of the broadcasting system. It is a list of messages used in the MMT-SI of the broadcasting system.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram of a broadcast receiving apparatus according to Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram of the logical plane structure of the presentation function of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 1.
  • FIG. 1 is a software configuration diagram of a broadcast receiving apparatus according to Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram of a broadcast station server according to Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram of a service provider server according to Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram of a portable information terminal according to Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. 1 is a software configuration diagram of a portable information terminal according to Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. 1 is a system configuration diagram of clock synchronization / presentation synchronization of a broadcast receiving apparatus according to Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. It is a figure which shows the data structure of the NTP format of a broadcast system. It is a figure which shows the data structure of MH-TOT of a broadcast system. It is a figure which shows the format of the JST_time parameter of a broadcast system. It is a figure which shows the data structure of the time information of the TMCC extension information area
  • FIG. 3 is an operation sequence diagram at the time of channel selection of the broadcast receiving apparatus according to the first embodiment. It is a conceptual diagram explaining the reference of MPT of each package by PLT of a broadcasting system. It is a figure which shows the data structure of PLT of a broadcast system.
  • FIG. 1 is an external view of a remote control capable of controlling a broadcast receiving device according to Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. It is a figure which shows the data structure of the remote control key descriptor of a broadcasting system. It is a figure explaining the channel selection process of a multi organization channel. It is a figure explaining the angle selection process of a multi view corresponding program. It is a figure which shows the data structure of LCT of a broadcast system. It is a figure which shows the data structure of the MPU presentation area
  • FIG. It is a screen display figure of the EPG screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on Example 1.
  • FIG. It is a screen display figure of the EPG screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on Example 1.
  • FIG. It is a screen display figure of the EPG screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on Example 1.
  • FIG. It is a screen display figure at the time of the emergency alert broadcast display of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 1.
  • FIG. It is a figure which shows the data structure of the content copy control descriptor of a broadcasting system. It is a figure which shows the meaning of the copy control information of a content copy control descriptor. It is a figure which shows the data structure of the content utilization control descriptor of a broadcasting system.
  • 6 is a block diagram of a broadcast receiving apparatus according to Embodiment 2.
  • FIG. It is a figure explaining inconsistency of the present time display at the time of broadcast service switching. It is a figure explaining operation
  • FIG. FIG. 9 is an operation sequence diagram of current time information update processing according to the second embodiment. It is a screen display figure of the EPG screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on Example 2. FIG. It is a screen display figure of the EPG screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on Example 2.
  • FIG. It is a figure which shows an application transmission system. It is a figure which shows the kind of asset. It is a figure which shows the data structure of the location information of an asset acquisition destination. It is a figure which shows the meaning of the classification of an asset acquisition destination.
  • FIG. 10 is an operation sequence diagram of the broadcast receiving device according to the third embodiment when starting an application.
  • FIG. 10 is an operation sequence diagram of the broadcast receiving device according to the third embodiment when starting an application.
  • FIG. 10 is an operation sequence diagram of the broadcast receiving device according to the third embodiment when starting an application.
  • FIG. 10 is an operation sequence diagram of the broadcast receiving device according to the third embodiment when starting an application.
  • FIG. 10 is an operation sequence diagram when the portable information terminal according to the third embodiment is linked.
  • FIG. 10 is an operation sequence diagram when the portable information terminal according to the third embodiment is linked. It is an operation
  • It is a screen display figure of the basic screen of the cooperation control application of the portable information terminal which concerns on Example 3.
  • FIG. It is a screen display figure of the basic screen of the cooperation control application of the portable information terminal which concerns on Example 3.
  • FIG. It is a screen display figure of the basic screen of the cooperation control application of the portable information terminal which concerns on Example 3.
  • FIG. It is a screen display figure of the alerting
  • FIG. is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application launcher of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3.
  • FIG. It is a screen display figure of the data broadcast screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3.
  • FIG. It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application execution screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3.
  • FIG. It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application execution screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3.
  • FIG. It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application execution screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3.
  • FIG. It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application execution screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3.
  • FIG. It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application execution screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3.
  • FIG. It is a screen display figure of the error display screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3.
  • FIG. It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application execution screen of the portable information terminal concerning Example 3. It is a figure of the detailed information of the EPG display screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3.
  • FIG. It is a figure of the detailed information of the EPG display screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3.
  • FIG. It is a figure of the detailed information of the EPG display screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3.
  • FIG. It is a figure of the detailed information of the EPG display screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3.
  • FIG. It is a figure of the detailed information of the EPG display screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3.
  • FIG. It is a figure of the detailed information of the EPG display screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3.
  • FIG. It is an operation
  • FIG. It is an operation
  • FIG. 10 is an operation sequence diagram in terminal cooperation according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is an operation sequence diagram during terminal cooperation according to the fifth embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is an operation sequence diagram in terminal cooperation according to the sixth embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is an operation sequence diagram in terminal cooperation according to the sixth embodiment. It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application launcher of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 7.
  • FIG. It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application launcher of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 7.
  • FIG. is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application launcher of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 7.
  • FIG. It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application launcher of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 7.
  • FIG. is a screen display figure of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on Example 7.
  • FIG. is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application of the portable information terminal concerning Example 7.
  • FIG. 1 is a system configuration diagram illustrating an example of a broadcast communication system including a broadcast receiving apparatus according to the present embodiment.
  • the broadcast communication system of this embodiment includes a broadcast receiver 100 and an antenna 100a, a broadband network such as the Internet 200, a router 200r and an access point 200a, a radio tower 300t and a broadcast satellite (or communication satellite) 300s, a broadcast station A server 300, a service provider server 400, other application servers 500, a mobile telephone communication server 600, a base station 600b of a mobile telephone communication network, and a portable information terminal 700.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 receives the broadcast wave transmitted from the radio tower 300t via the broadcast satellite (or communication satellite) 300s and the antenna 100a. Alternatively, the broadcast wave transmitted from the radio tower 300t may be received directly from the antenna 100a without passing through the broadcast satellite (or communication satellite) 300s.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can be connected to the Internet 200 via the router apparatus 200r, and can transmit and receive data by communication with each server apparatus and other communication devices on the Internet 200.
  • the router device 200r is connected to the Internet 200 by wired communication, is connected to the broadcast receiving device 100 by wired communication or wireless communication, and is connected to the portable information terminal 700 by wireless communication.
  • a method such as Wi-Fi (registered trademark) may be used.
  • Wi-Fi registered trademark
  • each server device and other communication devices on the Internet 200, the broadcast receiving device 100, and the portable information terminal 700 can mutually transmit and receive data via the router device 200r.
  • the communication between the broadcast receiving device 100 and the portable information terminal 700 may be performed directly using a method such as BlueTooth (registered trademark) or NFC (Near Field Communication) without using the router device 200r.
  • the radio tower 300t is a broadcasting facility of a broadcasting station, and transmits broadcast waves including encoded data of broadcast programs, caption information, other applications, general-purpose data, and the like.
  • the broadcast satellite (or communication satellite) 300s receives the broadcast wave transmitted from the radio tower 300t of the broadcast station, performs appropriate frequency conversion, etc., and then broadcasts the antenna 100a connected to the broadcast receiving device 100 to the antenna 100a. It is a repeater that retransmits waves.
  • the broadcasting station includes a broadcasting station server 300.
  • the broadcast station server 300 stores metadata such as broadcast programs (video content, etc.) and program titles, program IDs, program outlines, performer information, broadcast date and time of each broadcast program, and the video content and each metadata are stored. Based on the contract, it can be provided to the service provider.
  • the provision of the moving image content and each metadata to the service provider may be performed through an API (Application Programming Interface) included in the broadcast station server 300.
  • Service provider server 400 is a server device prepared by a service provider, and is capable of providing various services linked to broadcast programs distributed from broadcast stations.
  • the service provider server 400 also stores, manages, and distributes video content and metadata provided from the broadcast station server 300, various contents and applications linked to broadcast programs, and the like.
  • it in response to an inquiry from a television receiver or the like, it also has a function of searching for available contents and applications and providing a list.
  • the storage, management and distribution of the content and metadata and the storage, management and distribution of the application may be performed by different server devices.
  • the broadcasting station and the service provider may be the same or different.
  • a plurality of service provider servers 400 may be prepared for different services.
  • the function of the service provider server 400 may be provided by the broadcast station server 300.
  • Other application server 500 is a known server device that stores, manages, and distributes other general applications, operation programs, contents, data, and the like. There may be a plurality of other application servers 500 on the Internet 200.
  • the mobile telephone communication server 600 is connected to the Internet 200, and is connected to the portable information terminal 700 via the base station 600b.
  • the mobile telephone communication server 600 manages telephone communication (call) and data transmission / reception via the mobile telephone communication network of the portable information terminal 700, and each server device and other communication devices on the portable information terminal 700 and the Internet 200. Data can be sent and received through communication with the.
  • the communication between the base station 600b and the portable information terminal 700 is W-CDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access) (registered trademark) method, GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) (registered trademark) method, LTE (LongTerm Term) method. Alternatively, it may be performed by other communication methods.
  • the portable information terminal 700 has a function of telephone communication (call) and data transmission / reception via a mobile telephone communication network and a function of wireless communication by Wi-Fi (registered trademark) or the like.
  • the portable information terminal 700 can be connected to the Internet 200 via the router device 200r and the access point 200a, or via the mobile phone communication network base station 600b and the mobile phone communication server 600. It is possible to send and receive data by communication with each server device and other communication devices.
  • the access point 200a is connected to the Internet 200 by wired communication, and is connected to the portable information terminal 700 by wireless communication. For the wireless communication, a method such as Wi-Fi (registered trademark) may be used. Communication between portable information terminal 700 and broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is performed via access point 200a and Internet 200 and router apparatus 200r, or through base station 600b and mobile telephone communication server 600, Internet 200 and router apparatus 200r. It may be carried out via.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 shown in FIG. 1 is defined by the MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group) -2 system, which is widely adopted in conventional digital broadcasting systems, as a media transport system for transmitting data such as video and audio. It is assumed that the television receiver is compatible with MMT (MPEG Media Transport) instead of TS (Transport Stream) (hereinafter referred to as MPEG2-TS). It may be a television receiver that can support both MPEG2-TS and MMT.
  • MPEG2TS Transmission Stream
  • MPEG2-TS is characterized in that components such as video and audio constituting a program are multiplexed into one stream together with a control signal and a clock. Since it is handled as one stream including a clock, it is suitable for transmitting one content through one transmission path in which transmission quality is ensured, and has been adopted in many conventional digital broadcasting systems.
  • the function of MPEG2-TS in response to environmental changes related to content distribution such as recent diversification of content, diversification of devices that use content, diversification of transmission paths for content distribution, diversification of content storage environment, etc. Therefore, MMT is a newly developed media transport system.
  • FIG. 2A shows an example of an outline of the encoded signal in the MMT of the present embodiment.
  • the MMT of this embodiment has an MFU (Media Fragment Unit), an MPU (Media Processing Unit), an MMTP (MMT Protocol) payload, and an MMTP packet as elements constituting the encoded signal.
  • MFU Media Fragment Unit
  • MPU Media Processing Unit
  • MMTP MMT Protocol
  • MFU is a format when transmitting video or audio, and may be configured in units of NAL (Network Abstraction Layer) units or access units.
  • the MPU includes one or more access units, and can perform video and audio decoding processing by the MPU alone.
  • the MPU may be composed of MPU metadata including information on the configuration of the entire MPU, movie fragment metadata including information of encoded media data, and sample data that is encoded media data. A plurality of movie fragment data and sample data may exist in one MPU. Further, it is assumed that MFU can be extracted from the sample data.
  • FIG. 2B shows an example of the configuration of the MPU.
  • any MPU can be distinguished from other MPUs by the asset ID for identifying the asset and the MPU sequence number.
  • the presentation time and decoding time may be specified in units of MPUs or access units.
  • the MMTP packet includes a header part and an MMTP payload, and transmits MFU and MMT control information.
  • the MMTP payload includes a payload header corresponding to the content (data unit) stored in the payload portion.
  • FIG. 2C shows an example of the outline from the construction of the MFU from the video / audio signal, further storing it in the MMTP payload, and configuring the MMTP packet. Note that, in a video signal that is encoded using inter-frame prediction, it is desirable to configure the MPU in GOP (Group Of Pictures) units. Further, when the size of the MFU to be transmitted is small, one MFU may be stored in one payload part, or a plurality of MFUs of the same type may be stored in one payload part.
  • GOP Group Of Pictures
  • one MFU may be divided into a plurality of payload parts and stored. Further, the MMTP packet may be protected using a technique such as AL-FEC (Application Layer Forward Error Correction) or ARQ (Automatic Repeat Request) in order to recover the packet loss on the transmission path.
  • AL-FEC Application Layer Forward Error Correction
  • ARQ Automatic Repeat Request
  • MPEG-H HEVC High Efficiency Video Coding
  • MPEG-4 AAC Advanced Audio Coding
  • MPEG-4 ALS Audio Lossless
  • Coding is used.
  • the encoded data such as video and audio of the broadcast program encoded by the above-mentioned methods is in the MFU or MPU format, is further carried on the MMTP payload, is converted into an MMTP packet, and is transmitted as an IP (Internet Protocol) packet.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • data contents related to a broadcast program may be in the MFU or MPU format, further MMTP packetized on the MMTP payload, and transmitted by IP packet.
  • the data content transmission method includes (1) a caption / text super transmission method used for streaming data synchronized with broadcasting, (2) an application transmission method used for data transmission service asynchronous with broadcasting, and (3) from a broadcasting station.
  • UDP / IP User Datagram Protocol / Internet Protocol
  • UDP / IP or TCP / IP Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol
  • TLV Type Length Value
  • FIG. 1 An example of the protocol stack of the broadcasting system of the present embodiment is shown in FIG. In the figure, (A) is an example of a protocol stack in a broadcast transmission path, and (B) is an example of a protocol stack in a communication line.
  • MMT-SI MMT-Signaling Information
  • TLV-SI TLV-Signaling Information
  • time information is transmitted in order to provide absolute time.
  • MPEG2-TS indicates the component display time based on a different clock for each TS
  • MMT indicates the component display time based on the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
  • UTC Coordinated Universal Time
  • the control information includes the TLV-SI related to the TLV multiplexing method for multiplexing IP packets and the MMT that is the media transport method. Prepare the relevant MMT-SI.
  • the TLV-SI provides information for the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 to demultiplex the IP packet multiplexed on the broadcast transmission path.
  • the TLV-SI is composed of a “table” and a “descriptor”. The “table” is transmitted in the section format, and the “descriptor” is arranged in the “table”.
  • the MMT-SI is transmission control information indicating information related to the configuration of the MMT package and the broadcast service.
  • MMT-SI is composed of three levels: “message” for storing “table” and “descriptor”, “table” having elements and attributes indicating specific information, and “descriptor” indicating more detailed information. Shall. An example of the hierarchical structure of the control information used in the broadcasting system of the present embodiment is shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 5A shows a list of “tables” used in the TLV-SI of the broadcasting system supported by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment.
  • the following table is used as a “table” of TLV-SI.
  • TLV-NIT The network information table for TLV (Network Information Table for TLV: TLV-NIT) represents information on the physical configuration of the TLV stream transmitted by the network and the characteristics of the network itself.
  • AMT Address Map Table
  • FIG. 5B shows a list of “descriptors” arranged in the TLV-SI of the broadcasting system to which the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment corresponds. In this embodiment, the following are used as “descriptors” of TLV-SI.
  • Service list descriptor The service list descriptor provides a list of services according to service identification and service type.
  • Satellite distribution system descriptor The satellite distribution system descriptor indicates the physical conditions of the satellite transmission path.
  • System management descriptor The system management descriptor is used to identify broadcast and non-broadcast.
  • the network name descriptor describes the network name using character codes.
  • Remote control key descriptor The remote control key descriptor is used to set a service to be assigned to the one-touch channel selection button of the receiver remote control.
  • FIG. 6A shows a list of “messages” used in the MMT-SI of the broadcast system supported by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment.
  • the following message is used as a “message” of MMT-SI.
  • PA message The Package Access (PA) message is used to transmit various tables.
  • M2 section message The M2 section message is used to transmit the section extension format of MPEG-2 Systems.
  • CA message The CA message is used to transmit a table for identifying the conditional access system.
  • M2 short section message is used to transmit the section short format of MPEG-2 Systems.
  • the data transmission message is a message for storing a table relating to data transmission.
  • FIG. 6B shows a list of “tables” used in the MMT-SI of the broadcast system supported by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment.
  • the table is control information having elements and attributes indicating specific information, and is stored in a message and transmitted by an MMTP packet.
  • the message for storing the table may be determined according to the table.
  • the following table is used as the “table” of MMT-SI.
  • MPT MMT package table
  • the MPT may be stored in the PA message.
  • PLT Packet List Table
  • LCT Layout Configuration Table
  • ECM Entity Control Message
  • EMM Entity Management Message
  • the Entity Management Message transmits individual information including contract information for each subscriber and key information for decrypting ECM (common information).
  • the EMM may be stored in the M2 section message.
  • CAT Supplemental Access Table: CAT (MH) is used to store a descriptor for identifying a conditional access system.
  • CAT (MH) may be stored in the CA message.
  • DCM Download Control Message
  • the Download Control Message transmits key related information including a key for decrypting a transmission path cipher for downloading.
  • the DCM may be stored in the M2 section message.
  • DMM Download Management Message transmits key-related information including a download key for decrypting DCM.
  • the DMM may be stored in the M2 section message.
  • MH-EIT MH-Event Information Table: MH-EIT
  • MH-EIT is time-series information regarding events included in each service.
  • the MH-EIT may be stored in the M2 section message.
  • MH-AIT MH-Application Information Table
  • the MH-AIT stores all information related to the application, an activation state required for the application, and the like.
  • the MH-AIT may be stored in the M2 section message.
  • MH-BIT An MH-Broadcaster Information Table (MH-BIT) is used to present information on broadcasters existing on the network.
  • the MH-BIT may be stored in the M2 section message.
  • MH-SDTT The MH-software download trigger table (MH-Software Download Trigger Table: MH-SDTT) is used for download notification information.
  • the MH-SDTT may be stored in the M2 section message.
  • MH-SDT MH-Service Description Table (MH-Service Description Table: MH-SDT) has a sub-table representing a service included in a specific TLV stream, and information related to the organization channel such as the name of the organization channel and the name of the broadcaster. Is transmitted.
  • the MH-SDT may be stored in the M2 section message.
  • MH-TOT The MH-Time Offset Table (MH-TOT) transmits JST time and date (modified Julian date) information.
  • the MH-TOT may be stored in the M2 short section message.
  • MH-CDT The MH-Common Data Table (MH-CDT) is used to transmit the common data to be stored in the non-volatile memory in a section format for all receivers that receive the MH-Common Data Table (MH-CDT).
  • the MH-CDT may be stored in the M2 section message.
  • the data directory management table (Data Directory Management Table: DDM table) provides a directory structure of files constituting an application in order to separate the file structure of the application from the structure for file transmission.
  • the DDM table may be stored in the data transmission message.
  • DAM table The data asset management table (Data Asset Management Table: DAM table) provides the configuration of the MPU in the asset and version information for each MPU.
  • the DAM table may be stored in the data transmission message.
  • DCC Table The data content management table (Data Content Configuration Table: DCC table) provides file configuration information as data content in order to realize flexible and effective cache control.
  • the DCC table may be stored in the data transmission message.
  • EMT Event Message Table
  • FIG. 6C, FIG. 6D and FIG. 6E show a list of “descriptors” arranged in the MMT-SI of the broadcasting system to which the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment corresponds.
  • the descriptor is control information that provides more detailed information and is arranged in a table. Note that the table in which the descriptor is arranged may be determined according to the descriptor. In this embodiment, the following are used as “descriptors” of MMT-SI.
  • Asset group descriptor provides asset group relationships and priorities within groups.
  • the asset group descriptor may be located in the MPT.
  • Event package descriptor provides a correspondence between an event representing a program and a package.
  • the event package descriptor may be arranged in the MH-EIT transmitted in the M2 section message.
  • the background color specification descriptor provides the backmost background color in the layout specification.
  • the background color designation descriptor may be arranged in the LCT.
  • the MPU presentation area designation descriptor provides a position for presenting an MPU.
  • the MPU presentation area designation descriptor may be arranged in the MPT.
  • MPU time stamp descriptor indicates the presentation time of the first access unit in the presentation order in the MPU.
  • the MPU timestamp descriptor may be located in the MPT.
  • the dependency descriptor provides an asset ID of an asset having a dependency relationship.
  • the dependency descriptor may be arranged in the MPT.
  • Access control descriptor provides information for identifying the conditional access system.
  • the access control descriptor may be located in MPT or CAT (MH).
  • the scramble method descriptor provides information for identifying the type of encryption target and encryption algorithm at the time of scrambling.
  • the scramble method descriptor may be arranged in MPT or CAT (MH).
  • the message authentication scheme descriptor provides information for identifying the message authentication scheme when performing message authentication.
  • the message authentication scheme descriptor may be arranged in MPT or CAT (MH).
  • the emergency information descriptor (MH) is used when emergency alert broadcasting is performed.
  • the emergency information descriptor (MH) may be located in the MPT.
  • the MH-MPEG-4 audio descriptor describes basic information for specifying an encoding parameter of an ISO / IEC 14496-3 (MPEG-4 audio) audio stream. Use for.
  • the MH-MPEG-4 audio descriptor may be located in the MPT.
  • MH-MPEG-4 Audio Extension Descriptor The MH-MPEG-4 audio extension descriptor is used to describe the profile and level of the MPEG-4 audio stream and the settings specific to the encoding method.
  • the MH-MPEG-4 audio extension descriptor may be located in the MPT.
  • the MH-HEVC video descriptor is an ITU-T recommendation H.264 standard. H.265
  • the MH-HEVC video descriptor may be located in the MPT.
  • the MH-Link Descriptor identifies a service provided when a viewer requests additional information related to a certain thing described in the program sequence information system.
  • the MH-link descriptor may be arranged in MPT, MH-EIT, MH-SDT, etc.
  • MH-event group descriptor is used to indicate that these event groups are grouped when there is a relationship between a plurality of events.
  • the MH-event group descriptor may be located in the MH-EIT.
  • the MH-Service List Descriptor provides a service list according to service identification and service type.
  • the MH-service list descriptor may be located in the MH-BIT.
  • MH-short format event descriptor represents an event name and a short description of the event in a text format.
  • the MH-short form event descriptor may be located in the MH-EIT.
  • the MH-extended format event descriptor is used in addition to the MH-short format event descriptor to provide a detailed description of the event.
  • the MH-extended event descriptor may be located in the MH-EIT.
  • Video Component Descriptor indicates parameters and explanations related to the video component, and is also used to represent an elementary stream in a character format.
  • the video component descriptor may be located in MPT or MH-EIT.
  • the MH-stream identification descriptor is used to label the component stream of the service and to refer to the description content indicated by the video component descriptor in the MH-EIT. .
  • the MH-stream identification descriptor may be arranged in the MPT.
  • the MH-content descriptor indicates the genre of the event.
  • the MH-content descriptor may be located in the MH-EIT.
  • the MH-Parental Rate Descriptor represents viewing restrictions based on age, and is used to extend based on other restriction conditions.
  • the MH-parental rate descriptor may be located in MPT or MH-EIT.
  • the MH-voice component descriptor indicates each parameter of the voice elementary stream, and is also used to represent the elementary stream in a character format.
  • the MH-voice component descriptor may be located in MPT or MH-EIT.
  • the MH-target area descriptor is used to describe a target area for a program or a part of streams constituting the program.
  • the MH-target area descriptor may be located in the MPT.
  • the MH-series descriptor is used to identify a series program.
  • the MH-series descriptor may be located in the MH-EIT.
  • the MH-SI transmission parameter descriptor is used to indicate a transmission parameter of SI.
  • the MH-SI transmission parameter descriptor may be arranged in the MH-BIT.
  • the MH-Broadcaster name descriptor describes the name of the broadcaster.
  • the MH-Broadcaster name descriptor may be located in the MH-BIT.
  • the MH-Service Descriptor represents the organization channel name and its operator name with a character code together with the service type.
  • the MH-service descriptor may be located in the MH-SDT.
  • IP Data Flow Descriptor provides information on the IP data flow constituting the service.
  • the IP data flow descriptor may be located in MH-SDT.
  • the MH-CA activation descriptor describes activation information for activating a CAS program on the CAS infrastructure.
  • the MH-CA activation descriptor may be located in MPT or CAT (CA).
  • the MH-Type descriptor indicates the type of a file transmitted by the application transmission method.
  • the MH-Type descriptor may be placed in the DAM table.
  • the MH-Info descriptor describes information related to the MPU or item.
  • the MH-Info descriptor may be placed in the DAM table.
  • the MH-Expire descriptor describes the expiration date of an item.
  • the MH-Expire descriptor may be placed in the DAM table.
  • MH-Compression Type descriptor means that the item to be transmitted is compressed, and indicates the compression algorithm and the number of bytes of the item before compression.
  • the MH-Compression Type descriptor may be placed in the DAM table.
  • the MH-data encoding scheme descriptor is used to identify a data encoding scheme.
  • the MH-data encoding scheme descriptor may be arranged in the MPT.
  • UTC-NPT Reference Descriptor The UTC-NPT reference descriptor is used to convey the relationship between NPT (Normal Play Time) and UTC.
  • the UTC-NPT reference descriptor may be located in the EMT.
  • Event message descriptor conveys information related to event messages in general.
  • the event message descriptor may be located in the EMT.
  • the MH-local time offset descriptor is used to give a certain offset value to the actual time (for example, UTC + 9 hours) and the display time to the human system during the daylight saving time.
  • the MH-local time offset descriptor may be located in the MH-TOT.
  • the MH-component group descriptor defines and identifies a combination of components in an event.
  • the MH-component group descriptor may be located in the MH-EIT.
  • the MH-logo transmission descriptor is used to describe a character string for a simple logo, pointing to a CDT format logo, and the like.
  • the MH-logo transmission descriptor may be located in the MH-SDT.
  • MPU extended time stamp descriptor provides the decoding time of the access unit in the MPU.
  • the MPU extended timestamp descriptor may be placed in the MPT.
  • MPU download content descriptor is used to describe attribute information of content downloaded using the MPU.
  • the MPU download content descriptor may be arranged in MH-SDTT.
  • the MH-Network Download Content Descriptor is used to describe attribute information of content downloaded using the network.
  • the MH-network download content descriptor may be located in the MH-SDTT.
  • the MH-application descriptor describes application information.
  • the MH-application descriptor may be located in the MH-AIT.
  • the MH-Transmission Protocol Descriptor is used for designating a transmission protocol such as broadcasting or communication and indicating location information of an application depending on the transmission protocol.
  • the MH-Transmission Protocol Descriptor may be located in the MH-AIT.
  • MH Simple Application Location Descriptor
  • the MH is described to indicate details of an application acquisition destination.
  • the MH-simple application location descriptor may be located in the MH-AIT.
  • the MH-application boundary authority setting descriptor is described in order to set an application boundary and to set a broadcast resource access authority for each area (URL).
  • the MH-application boundary authority setting descriptor may be arranged in the MH-AIT.
  • the MH-activation priority information descriptor is described for designating the application activation priority.
  • the MH-activation priority information descriptor may be arranged in the MH-AIT.
  • MH-cache information descriptor The MH-cache information descriptor is described to be used for cache control when the resources constituting the application are cached and held when the application is assumed to be reused. .
  • the MH-cache information descriptor may be located in the MH-AIT.
  • the MH-Probabilistic Application Delay Descriptor is used to delay the application control timing by a stochastically set delay amount assuming load distribution of server access for application acquisition. Describe in.
  • the MH-stochastic application delay descriptor may be placed in the MH-AIT.
  • Link destination PU descriptor describes another presentation unit that may transition from the presentation unit (PU).
  • the link destination PU descriptor may be arranged in the DCC table.
  • Lock cache specification descriptor describes the specification of a file to be cached and locked in the presentation unit.
  • the lock cache designation descriptor may be arranged in the DCC table.
  • Unlock cache specification descriptor describes the specification of the file to be unlocked among the files locked in the presentation unit.
  • the unlock cache specification descriptor may be arranged in the DCC table.
  • the MH-Download Protection Descriptor describes the location information and transmission information of the MMTP packet that transmits DCM and DMM.
  • the MH-download protection descriptor may be located in MPT or MH-SDTT.
  • Application service descriptor describes entry information of an application related to the service.
  • the application service descriptor may be located in the MPT.
  • MPU node descriptor indicates that the MPU corresponds to a directory node specified in the data directory management table.
  • the MPU node descriptor may be placed in the DAM table.
  • the PU configuration descriptor indicates a list of MPUs constituting the presentation unit as mapping information between the presentation unit and the transmission unit.
  • the PU configuration descriptor may be placed in the DCC table.
  • the MH-hierarchical coding descriptor describes information for identifying a video stream component subjected to hierarchical coding.
  • the MH-hierarchical coding descriptor may be located in the MPT.
  • the content copy control descriptor indicates information for controlling the copy generation in the digital recording device for the entire service.
  • the broadcast station (copyright) Used by the user) to communicate information about the copy or the maximum transmission rate to the digital recording device.
  • the content copy control descriptor may be arranged in MPT, MH-EIT, MH-SDT, etc.
  • the content usage control descriptor indicates information related to copy control and remote viewing control when a program is stored in a hard disk or when a video / audio signal is output from a receiver. Used for.
  • the content usage control descriptor may be arranged in MPT, MH-EIT, MH-SDT, or the like.
  • a component is defined as an asset, and in the following, the component may be expressed as an asset.
  • data transmission can be performed through a plurality of paths such as a TLV stream via a broadcast transmission path and an IP data flow via a communication line.
  • the TLV stream includes a TLV-SI such as TLV-NIT or AMT, and an IP data flow that is a data flow of an IP packet.
  • the IP data flow includes video assets including a series of video MPUs and audio assets including a series of audio MPUs.
  • a subtitle asset including a series of subtitle MPUs, a character super asset including a series of character super MPUs, a data asset including a series of data MPUs, and the like may be included in the IP data flow.
  • MPT MMT package table
  • the association may be performed by describing a package ID for identifying a package in the MPT and an asset ID for identifying each asset included in the package.
  • FIG. 7B shows an example of the data structure of MPT.
  • the “MMT_package_id_byte” parameter in the figure corresponds to the package ID
  • the “asset_id_byte” parameter corresponds to the asset ID.
  • Assets that make up the package can be only assets in the TLV stream, but as shown in FIG. 7A, assets transmitted in the IP data flow of the communication line can also be included. This is because the location information of the asset is described in the MPT together with the asset ID for identifying each asset included in the package so that the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment can grasp the reference destination of each asset. realizable.
  • the location information is specified by “MMT_general_location_info ()” in the MPT data structure shown in FIG. 7B.
  • FIG. 7C shows an example of the data structure of the location information.
  • the broadcast receiving device 100 can refer to various data transmitted through various transmission paths.
  • (1) is, for example, an IP data flow included in a TLV stream of a digital broadcast signal received by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment via the antenna 100a.
  • the reference destination in (1) may be an IP data flow received via the communication line.
  • (2), (3), (5), and (6) are IP data flows received by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment via a communication line.
  • (4) for example, a receiving function for receiving a digital broadcast signal using the MMT method and a digital broadcast signal using the MPEG2-TS method are received as in the broadcast receiving device 800 of Example 2 described later.
  • MPEG2-received by a reception function for receiving a digital broadcast signal using the MPEG2-TS system based on MPT location information included in the digital broadcast signal using the MMT system can be used when referring to data multiplexed in a TS.
  • presentation time and decoding time can be specified in units of MPUs and access units.
  • Information regarding the presentation time and the decoding time is described in the MPT as an MPU time stamp descriptor or an MPU extended time stamp descriptor.
  • FIG. 7D shows an example of a data structure of an MPU time stamp descriptor describing information on the presentation time.
  • the presentation time information of each MPU is specified by the “mpu_presentation_time” parameter of the MPU time stamp descriptor.
  • the MPU to be designated can be identified by the “mpu_sequence_number” parameter.
  • a plurality of MPUs designated by the MPT are presented (displayed and output) in conjunction with a clock based on NTP, which is time information expressed in UTC. Etc.).
  • NTP time information expressed in UTC. Etc.
  • the information related to the decoding time is described by the MPU extended time stamp descriptor, but detailed description thereof is omitted.
  • the presentation control of various data using a clock based on the NTP will be described later.
  • a series of data in units of “packages” corresponds to “services” of digital broadcasting.
  • the “service” is a series of “programs” sent according to a schedule.
  • the “program” is treated as an “event” in the MMT system.
  • Each event has a start time and duration specified by MH-EIT.
  • the ID of the MMT package corresponding to each event is specified by the event package descriptor arranged in the MH-EIT.
  • FIG. 7E shows an example of the data structure of MH-EIT.
  • the start time is specified by the “start_time” parameter in the figure, and the duration is specified by the “duration” parameter.
  • FIG. 7F shows an example of the data structure of the event package descriptor.
  • Correspondence between each event and the MMT package can be designated by the “MMT_package_id_byte” parameter of the event package descriptor arranged in the MH-EIT.
  • the MH-EIT performs various processes in units of the “event” in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment (for example, electronic program guide generation processing, recording reservation and viewing reservation control, copyright management processing such as temporary storage, etc. ) And the like.
  • FIG. 8A is a block diagram illustrating an example of an internal configuration of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 includes a main control unit 101, a system bus 102, a ROM 103, a RAM 104, a storage (storage) unit 110, a LAN communication unit 121, an expansion interface unit 124, a digital interface unit 125, a tuner / demodulation unit 131, and a separation unit 132.
  • Video decoder 141 Video decoder 141, video color gamut conversion unit 142, audio decoder 143, character super decoder 144, subtitle decoder 145, subtitle synthesis unit 146, subtitle color gamut conversion unit 147, data decoder 151, cache unit 152, application control unit 153, A browser unit 154, an application color gamut conversion unit 155, a sound source unit 156, a video synthesis unit 161, a monitor unit 162, a video output unit 163, a voice synthesis unit 164, a speaker unit 165, a voice output unit 166, and an operation input unit 170. Is done.
  • the main control unit 101 is a microprocessor unit that controls the entire broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to a predetermined operation program.
  • a system bus 102 is a data communication path for transmitting and receiving data between the main control unit 101 and each operation block in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • a ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 is a non-volatile memory in which a basic operation program such as an operating system and other operation programs are stored. For example, a rewritable ROM such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) or a flash ROM is provided. Used. The ROM 103 may store operation setting values necessary for the operation of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • a RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 serves as a work area for executing a basic operation program and other operation programs. The ROM 103 and the RAM 104 may be integrated with the main control unit 101. Further, the ROM 103 may not use an independent configuration as shown in FIG. 8A but may use a partial storage area in the storage (accumulation) unit 110.
  • the storage (accumulation) unit 110 stores an operation program and an operation setting value of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, personal information of the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, and the like. Further, it is possible to store an operation program downloaded via the Internet 200 and various data created by the operation program. It is also possible to store content such as moving images, still images, and audio obtained from broadcast waves or downloaded via the Internet 200. All or some of the functions of the ROM 103 may be replaced by a partial area of the storage (storage) unit 110. Further, the storage (accumulation) unit 110 needs to hold stored information even when power is not supplied to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 from the outside. Therefore, for example, a device such as a nonvolatile semiconductor element memory such as a flash ROM or SSD (Solid State Drive), a magnetic disk drive such as an HDD (Hard Disc Drive), or the like is used.
  • a nonvolatile semiconductor element memory such as a flash ROM or SSD (Solid State Drive), a magnetic disk drive such as an HDD (Hard Disc Drive), or
  • each operation program stored in the ROM 103 or the storage (accumulation) unit 110 can be added, updated, and expanded in function by download processing from each server device on the Internet 200.
  • a LAN (Local Area Network) communication unit 121 is connected to the Internet 200 via the router device 200r, and transmits / receives data to / from each server device and other communication devices on the Internet 200. It is also assumed that an MMT data string (or a part thereof) of a program transmitted via a communication line is acquired.
  • the connection with the router device 200r may be a wired connection or a wireless connection such as Wi-Fi (registered trademark).
  • the LAN communication unit 121 includes an encoding circuit, a decoding circuit, and the like.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may further include other communication units such as a BlueTooth (registered trademark) communication unit, an NFC communication unit, and an infrared communication unit.
  • the tuner / demodulator 131 receives the broadcast wave transmitted from the radio tower 300t via the antenna 100a, and tunes (tunes) to the channel of the service desired by the user based on the control of the main controller 101. Further, the tuner / demodulator 131 demodulates the received broadcast signal to obtain an MMT data string.
  • FIG. 8A a configuration with one tuner / demodulation unit is illustrated. However, for the purpose of simultaneous display of a plurality of screens, back program recording, and the like, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 includes a tuner / demodulation unit. It is good also as a structure mounted in multiple numbers.
  • the separation unit 132 is an MMT decoder, and a video data sequence, an audio data sequence, a character super data sequence, a caption data sequence, etc., which are real-time presentation elements based on a control signal in the input MMT data sequence, are respectively converted into a video decoder 141.
  • the voice decoder 143, the character super decoder 144, the subtitle decoder 145, etc. are distributed.
  • the data input to the demultiplexing unit 132 includes an MMT data sequence transmitted through a broadcast transmission path and demodulated by the tuner / demodulation unit 131, or MMT data transmitted through a communication line and received by the LAN communication unit 121. It can be a line.
  • the separation unit 132 reproduces the multimedia application and file system data that is a component of the multimedia application, and temporarily stores them in the cache unit 152.
  • the separation unit 132 extracts general-purpose data and outputs the data to the data decoder 151 for use in streaming data for use with a player that presents data other than video / audio subtitles or data for an application.
  • the separation unit 132 may perform error correction, access restriction control, and the like on the input MMT data string based on the control of the main control unit 101.
  • the video decoder 141 decodes the video data sequence input from the separation unit 132 and outputs video information.
  • the video color gamut conversion unit 142 performs color space conversion processing on the video information decoded by the video decoder 141 as needed for video synthesis processing by the video synthesis unit 161.
  • the audio decoder 143 decodes the audio data sequence input from the separation unit 132 and outputs audio information. Further, even when streaming data obtained from the Internet 200 via the LAN communication unit 121, for example, MPEG-DASH (MPEG-Dynamic Adaptive Streaming HTTP) format or the like is input to the video decoder 141 and the audio decoder 143. good.
  • a plurality of video decoders 141, video color gamut conversion units 142, audio decoders 143, and the like may be provided in order to simultaneously decode a plurality of types of video data sequences and audio data sequences.
  • the character super decoder 144 decodes the character super data string input from the separation unit 132 and outputs character super information.
  • the caption decoder 145 decodes the caption data string input from the separation unit 132 and outputs caption information.
  • the superimposing information output from the character super decoder 144 and the subtitle information output from the subtitle decoder 145 are subjected to the synthesizing process in the subtitle synthesizing unit 146, and further, the subtitle color gamut converting unit 147 performs the synthesis in the video synthesizing unit 161. For the video composition process, a color space conversion process is performed as necessary.
  • subtitles those related to the content of the video are referred to as subtitles, and other services are referred to as character supermarkets. To do. If they are not distinguished, they are collectively referred to as subtitles.
  • the browser unit 154 transmits the multimedia application file acquired from the server device on the Internet 200 via the cache unit 152 or the LAN communication unit 121 and the file system data that is a component of the multimedia application file to the control information or LAN included in the MMT data string.
  • the control information acquired from the server device on the Internet 200 via the communication unit 121 is presented according to an instruction from the application control unit 153 that interprets the control information.
  • the multimedia application file may be an HTML (Hyper Text Markup Language) document, a BML (Broadcast Markup Language) document, or the like.
  • the application information output from the browser unit 154 is further subjected to color space conversion processing in the application color gamut conversion unit 155 as necessary for the video composition processing in the video composition unit 161.
  • the browser unit 154 also plays the application audio information by acting on the sound source unit 156.
  • the video composition unit 161 receives the video information output from the video color gamut conversion unit 142, the caption information output from the subtitle color gamut conversion unit 147, the application information output from the application color gamut conversion unit 155, and the like. Processing such as selection and / or superposition is performed.
  • the video composition unit 161 includes a video RAM (not shown), and the monitor unit 162 and the like are driven based on video information and the like input to the video RAM.
  • the video composition unit 161 is based on the control of the main control unit 101, and an EPG (Electronic Program Guide) created based on information such as scaling processing and MH-EIT included in the MMT-SI as necessary. Electronic program guide) Superimposes screen information.
  • EPG Electronic Program Guide
  • the monitor unit 162 is a display device such as a liquid crystal panel, for example, and provides video information selected and / or superimposed by the video composition unit 161 to the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • the video output unit 163 is a video output interface that outputs the video information that has been selected and / or superimposed by the video composition unit 161.
  • the presentation function of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment has a logical plane structure in order to display the multimedia service as intended by the provider.
  • FIG. 8B shows an example of the configuration of the logical plane structure provided in the presentation function of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment.
  • a character super plane for displaying a character super is arranged on the foreground
  • a subtitle plane for displaying a subtitle is arranged on the next layer.
  • a multimedia plane for displaying a broadcast video, a multimedia application, or a composite video thereof is arranged, and a background plane is arranged on the backmost surface.
  • the caption synthesizing unit 146 and the video synthesizing unit 161 drawing of the character super information on the character super plane, drawing of the subtitle information on the subtitle plane, and drawing on the multimedia plane such as video information and application information are performed.
  • the background color is drawn on the background plane based on LCT included in the MMT-SI. Note that a plurality of multimedia planes in the third layer can be prepared according to the number of video decoders 141. However, even when there are a plurality of multimedia planes, the application information and the like output from the application color gamut conversion unit 155 is output only to the foreground multimedia plane.
  • the voice synthesizer 164 inputs the voice information output from the voice decoder 143 and the application voice information reproduced by the sound source unit 156, and performs processing such as selection and / or mixing as appropriate.
  • the speaker unit 165 provides the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 with the audio information that has been selected and / or mixed by the voice synthesis unit 164.
  • the audio output unit 166 is an audio output interface that outputs audio information that has been selected and / or mixed by the audio synthesis unit 164.
  • the extension interface unit 124 is an interface group for extending the function of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • the extension interface unit 124 includes an analog video / audio interface, a USB (Universal Serial Bus) interface, a memory interface, and the like.
  • the analog video / audio interface performs input of analog video signals / audio signals from external video / audio output devices, output of analog video signals / audio signals to external video / audio input devices, and the like.
  • the USB interface is connected to a PC or the like to transmit / receive data.
  • a broadcast program or content may be recorded by connecting an HDD.
  • a keyboard or other USB device may be connected.
  • the memory interface transmits and receives data by connecting a memory card and other memory media.
  • the digital interface unit 125 is an interface for outputting or inputting encoded digital video data and / or digital audio data.
  • the digital interface unit 125 can output the MMT data sequence obtained by demodulation by the tuner / demodulation unit 131, the MMT data sequence acquired via the LAN communication unit 121, or the mixed data of the MMT data sequences as they are. Shall. Further, the MMT data string input from the digital interface unit 125 may be controlled to be input to the separation unit 132. Output of digital content stored in the storage (accumulation) unit 110 or storage of digital content in the storage (accumulation) unit 110 may be performed via the digital interface unit 125.
  • the digital interface unit 125 is a DVI terminal, an HDMI (registered trademark) terminal, a Display Port (registered trademark) terminal, or the like, and outputs or inputs data in a format compliant with the DVI specification, the HDMI specification, the Display Port specification, or the like. It may be a thing. It may be output or input in the form of serial data conforming to the IEEE 1394 specification or the like. Further, it may be configured as an IP interface that performs digital interface output via hardware such as Ethernet (registered trademark) or wireless LAN. In this case, the digital interface unit 125 and the LAN communication unit 121 may share the hardware configuration.
  • the operation input unit 170 is an instruction input unit that inputs an operation instruction to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • a remote control receiving unit that receives a command transmitted from a remote controller (not shown) and a button switch are arranged. It shall consist of operation keys. Either one may be sufficient.
  • the operation input unit 170 may be replaced with a touch panel arranged on the monitor unit 162.
  • a keyboard connected to the extension interface unit 124 may be substituted.
  • the remote controller (not shown) may be replaced with a portable information terminal 700 having a remote command transmission function.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is a television receiver or the like, the video output unit 163 and the audio output unit 166 are not essential components of the present invention.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may be an optical disk drive recorder such as a DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) recorder, a magnetic disk drive recorder such as an HDD recorder, an STB (Set Top Box), or the like. It may be a PC (Personal Computer), a tablet terminal, a navigation device, a game machine or the like having a digital broadcast receiving function or a broadcast communication cooperation function.
  • the monitor unit 162 and the speaker unit 165 may not be provided.
  • FIG. 8C is a software configuration diagram of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, and shows a software configuration in the ROM 103, the RAM 104, and the storage (storage) unit 110.
  • a basic operation program 1001 and other operation programs are stored in the ROM 103
  • a reception function program 1002, a cooperation function program 1003, a recording / playback function program 1004, and other operations are stored in the storage (accumulation) unit 110.
  • the program is stored.
  • the storage unit 110 also stores a content storage area 1200 that stores content such as moving images, still images, and audio, and authentication information that is necessary when accessing an external mobile terminal device or each server device. It is assumed that an information storage area 1300 and various information storage areas for storing various other information are provided.
  • the basic operation program 1001 stored in the ROM 103 is expanded in the RAM 104, and the main control unit 101 executes the expanded basic operation program 1001 to constitute a basic operation execution unit 1101.
  • the reception function program 1002, the linkage function program 1003, and the recording / playback function program 1004 stored in the storage (accumulation) unit 110 are expanded in the RAM 104, and the main control unit 101 further expands the reception function program 1002 and By executing the linkage function program 1003 and the recording / playback function program 1004, the reception function execution unit 1102, the linkage function execution unit 1103, and the recording / playback function execution unit 1104 are configured.
  • the RAM 104 is provided with a temporary storage area that temporarily holds data created when each operation program is executed as necessary.
  • the main control unit 101 executes the basic operation processing to control each operation block by expanding the basic operation program 1001 stored in the ROM 103 into the RAM 104 and executing it.
  • the unit 1101 is described as performing control of each operation block. The same description is made for other operation programs.
  • the reception function execution unit 1102 controls each operation block of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 in order to reproduce components such as video and audio transmitted in the broadcast system of the present embodiment.
  • the transport processing unit 1102a mainly controls the MMT decoder function of the separation unit 132, and distributes the video data sequence, the audio data sequence, and the like separated from the MMT data sequence to the corresponding decoding processing units.
  • the AV decoding processing unit 1102b mainly controls the video decoder 141, the audio decoder 143, and the like.
  • the application processing unit 1102c mainly controls the cache unit 152, the application control unit 153, the browser unit 154, and the sound source unit 156.
  • the character super processing unit 1102d mainly controls the character super decoder 144.
  • the caption processing unit 1102e mainly controls the caption decoder 145.
  • the general-purpose data processing unit 1102f mainly controls the data decoder 151.
  • the EPG generation unit 1102g generates an EPG screen by interpreting description contents such as MH-EIT included in the MMT-SI.
  • the presentation processing unit 1102h is based on the logical plane structure, and the video color gamut conversion unit 142, the subtitle synthesis unit 146, the subtitle color gamut conversion unit 147, the application color gamut conversion unit 155, the video synthesis unit 161, and the audio synthesis unit 164. Is mainly controlled.
  • the cooperation function execution unit 1103 manages device authentication and connection, transmission / reception of each data, and the like when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 performs a cooperation operation with an external apparatus such as the portable information terminal 700.
  • the recording / playback function execution unit 1104 stores a broadcast program acquired from a digital broadcast wave of this broadcast system, content acquired from each server device on the network, the content storage area 1200 of the storage (storage) unit 110, and the extended interface unit 124. Control is performed when recording in an external storage or the like connected to or when reproducing the broadcast program or content.
  • the operation programs may be stored in advance in the ROM 103 and / or the storage (accumulation) unit 110 at the time of product shipment. It may be acquired from the other application server 500 on the Internet 200 via the LAN communication unit 121 after the product is shipped. Further, each operation program stored in a memory card, an optical disk or the like may be acquired via the expansion interface unit 124 or the like.
  • FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating an example of the internal configuration of the broadcast station server 300.
  • the broadcast station server 300 includes a main control unit 301, a system bus 302, a RAM 304, a storage unit 310, a LAN communication unit 321 and a digital broadcast signal transmission unit 360.
  • the main control unit 301 is a microprocessor unit that controls the entire broadcast station server 300 in accordance with a predetermined operation program.
  • a system bus 302 is a data communication path for performing data transmission / reception between the main control unit 301 and each operation block in the broadcast station server 300.
  • the RAM 304 serves as a work area when executing each operation program.
  • the storage unit 310 stores a basic operation program 3001, a broadcast content management / distribution program 3002, and a broadcast content transmission program 3003, and further includes a broadcast content storage area 3200 and a metadata storage area 3300.
  • the broadcast content storage area 3200 stores program content and the like of each broadcast program broadcast by the broadcast station.
  • the metadata storage area 3300 stores metadata such as the program title, program ID, program overview, performers, broadcast date and time, copy control information related to each program content, and the like of each broadcast program.
  • the basic operation program 3001, the broadcast content management / distribution program 3002, and the broadcast content transmission program 3003 stored in the storage unit 310 are expanded in the RAM 304, and the main control unit 301 further executes the expanded programs.
  • a basic operation execution unit 3101, a broadcast content management / distribution execution unit 3102, and a broadcast content transmission execution unit 3103 are configured.
  • the broadcast content management / distribution execution unit 3102 manages the program content and the like of each broadcast program stored in the broadcast content storage area 3200 and the metadata storage area 3300, the program content of each broadcast program, and the like. Performs control when providing metadata to service providers based on contracts. Furthermore, the broadcast content management / distribution execution unit 3102 provides a service provider based on the contract as necessary when providing the service provider with the program content of each broadcast program and each metadata. Authentication processing of the server 400 may be performed.
  • the broadcast content transmission execution unit 3103 displays the program content of the broadcast program stored in the broadcast content storage area 3200, the program title of the broadcast program stored in the metadata storage area 3300, the program ID, copy control information of the program content, and the like. Time schedule management and the like are performed when an MMT data string including the MMT data string is transmitted from the radio tower 300t via the digital broadcast signal transmission unit 360.
  • the LAN communication unit 321 is connected to the Internet 200 and communicates with the service provider server 400 on the Internet 200.
  • the LAN communication unit 321 includes a coding circuit, a decoding circuit, and the like.
  • the digital broadcast signal transmission unit 360 modulates the MMT data sequence composed of the video data sequence, the audio data sequence, the program information data sequence, etc. of the program content of each broadcast program stored in the broadcast content storage area 3200.
  • the digital broadcast wave is transmitted through the radio tower 300t.
  • FIG. 10 is a block diagram illustrating an example of the internal configuration of the service provider server 400.
  • the service provider server 400 includes a main control unit 401, a system bus 402, a RAM 404, a storage unit 410, and a LAN communication unit 421.
  • the main control unit 401 is a microprocessor unit that controls the entire service provider server 400 according to a predetermined operation program.
  • a system bus 402 is a data communication path for transmitting and receiving data between the main control unit 401 and each operation block in the service provider server 400.
  • the RAM 404 becomes a work area when each operation program is executed.
  • the storage unit 410 stores a basic operation program 4001, a video content management / distribution program 4002, and an application management / distribution program 4004, and further stores a video content storage area 4200, a metadata storage area 4300, an application storage area 4400, and user information storage.
  • An area 4500 is provided.
  • the video content storage area 4200 stores program content of a broadcast program provided from the broadcast station server 300 as video content.
  • the video content produced by the service provider is stored.
  • the metadata storage area 4300 stores each metadata provided from the broadcast station server 300, metadata about video content produced by the service provider, and the like.
  • the application storage area 4400 stores various applications for realizing a service linked to a broadcast program for distribution in response to a request from each television receiver.
  • the user information storage area 4500 stores information (such as personal information and authentication information) related to users who are permitted to access the service provider server 400.
  • the basic operation program 4001, the video content management / distribution program 4002 and the application management / distribution program 4004 stored in the storage unit 410 are expanded in the RAM 404, and the main control unit 401 further expands the basic operation program and the video.
  • a basic operation execution unit 4101, a video content management / distribution execution unit 4102, and an application management / distribution execution unit 4104 are configured.
  • the video content management / distribution execution unit 4102 obtains the program content and the metadata of the broadcast program from the broadcasting station server 300, the video content stored in the video content storage area 4200 and the metadata storage area 4300, and each metadata. And the distribution of the video content etc. and each metadata to each television receiver. Furthermore, the video content management / distribution execution unit 4102 performs authentication processing and the like of each television receiver as necessary when delivering each video content and each metadata to each television receiver. You can go.
  • the application management / distribution execution unit 4104 performs management of each application stored in the application storage area 4400 and control when each application is distributed in response to a request from each television receiver. Furthermore, the application management / distribution execution unit 4104 may perform authentication processing of each television receiver as necessary when distributing each application to each television receiver.
  • the LAN communication unit 421 is connected to the Internet 200 and communicates with the broadcast receiving device 100 via the broadcast station server 300 on the Internet 200 and the router device 200r.
  • the LAN communication unit 421 includes a coding circuit, a decoding circuit, and the like.
  • FIG. 11A is a block diagram illustrating an example of an internal configuration of the portable information terminal 700.
  • the portable information terminal 700 includes a main control unit 701, a system bus 702, a ROM 703, a RAM 704, a storage unit 710, a communication processing unit 720, an expansion interface unit 724, an operation unit 730, an image processing unit 740, an audio processing unit 750, and a sensor unit 760. , Is composed.
  • the main control unit 701 is a microprocessor unit that controls the entire portable information terminal 700 according to a predetermined operation program.
  • a system bus 702 is a data communication path for transmitting and receiving data between the main control unit 701 and each operation block in the portable information terminal 700.
  • the ROM 703 is a memory in which a basic operation program such as an operating system and other operation programs are stored. For example, a rewritable ROM such as an EEPROM or a flash ROM is used.
  • the RAM 704 serves as a work area when the basic operation program and other operation programs are executed.
  • the ROM 703 and the RAM 704 may be integrated with the main control unit 701. In addition, the ROM 703 does not have an independent configuration as illustrated in FIG.
  • the storage unit 710 stores an operation program and an operation setting value of the portable information terminal 700, personal information of the user of the portable information terminal 700, and the like. Further, it is possible to store an operation program downloaded via the Internet 200 and various data created by the operation program. In addition, contents such as moving images, still images, and audio downloaded via the Internet 200 can be stored. All or part of the functions of the ROM 703 may be replaced by a partial area of the storage unit 710. In addition, the storage unit 710 needs to hold stored information even when power is not supplied to the portable information terminal 700 from the outside. Therefore, for example, a device such as a nonvolatile semiconductor element memory such as a flash ROM or SSD, a magnetic disk drive such as an HDD, or the like is used.
  • operation programs stored in the ROM 703 and the storage unit 710 can be added, updated, and expanded in function by download processing from each server device on the Internet 200.
  • the communication processing unit 720 includes a LAN communication unit 721, a mobile telephone network communication unit 722, and an NFC communication unit 723.
  • the LAN communication unit 721 is connected to the Internet 200 via the router device 200r and the access point 200a, and transmits / receives data to / from each server device and other communication devices on the Internet 200. It is assumed that connection with the router device 200r and the access point 200a is performed by wireless connection such as Wi-Fi (registered trademark).
  • the mobile telephone network communication unit 722 performs telephone communication (call) and data transmission / reception by wireless communication with the base station 600b of the mobile telephone communication network.
  • the NFC communication unit 723 performs wireless communication when close to the corresponding reader / writer.
  • the LAN communication unit 721, the mobile telephone network communication unit 722, and the NFC communication unit 723 are each provided with a coding circuit, a decoding circuit, an antenna, and the like.
  • the communication processing unit 720 may further include another communication unit such as a BlueTooth (registered trademark) communication unit or an infrared communication unit.
  • the extended interface unit 724 is an interface group for extending the functions of the portable information terminal 700, and in this embodiment, is configured by a video / audio interface, a USB interface, a memory interface, and the like.
  • the video / audio interface performs input of video signals / audio signals from external video / audio output devices, output of video signals / audio signals to external video / audio input devices, and the like.
  • the USB interface is connected to a PC or the like to transmit / receive data. A keyboard or other USB device may be connected.
  • the memory interface transmits and receives data by connecting a memory card and other memory media.
  • the operation unit 730 is an instruction input unit that inputs an operation instruction to the portable information terminal 700.
  • the operation unit 730 includes a touch panel 730t arranged on the display unit 741 and an operation key 730k in which button switches are arranged. Shall. Either one may be sufficient.
  • the portable information terminal 700 may be operated using a keyboard or the like connected to the extension interface unit 724.
  • the portable information terminal 700 may be operated using a separate terminal device connected by wired communication or wireless communication. That is, the portable information terminal 700 may be operated from the broadcast receiving device 100.
  • the touch panel function may be provided in the display unit 741.
  • the image processing unit 740 includes a display unit 741, an image signal processing unit 742, a first image input unit 743, and a second image input unit 744.
  • the display unit 741 is a display device such as a liquid crystal panel, for example, and provides the image data processed by the image signal processing unit 742 to the user of the portable information terminal 700.
  • the image signal processing unit 742 includes a video RAM (not shown), and the display unit 741 is driven based on the image data input to the video RAM.
  • the image signal processing unit 742 has a function of performing format conversion, menu and other OSD (On Screen Display) signal superimposing processing as necessary.
  • the first image input unit 743 and the second image input unit 744 convert light input from a lens into an electric signal using an electronic device such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or a CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) sensor.
  • an electronic device such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or a CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) sensor.
  • a camera unit for inputting image data of surroundings and objects.
  • the audio processing unit 750 includes an audio output unit 751, an audio signal processing unit 752, and an audio input unit 753.
  • the audio output unit 751 is a speaker, and provides the audio signal processed by the audio signal processing unit 752 to the user of the portable information terminal 700.
  • the voice input unit 753 is a microphone, and converts a user's voice and the like into voice data and inputs the voice data.
  • the sensor unit 760 is a sensor group for detecting the state of the portable information terminal 700.
  • the portable information terminal 700 may further include other sensors such as a barometric pressure sensor.
  • the portable information terminal 700 may be a mobile phone, a smart phone, a tablet terminal, or the like. It may be a PDA (Personal Digital Assistant) or a notebook PC. Further, it may be a digital still camera, a video camera capable of shooting moving images, a portable game machine, a navigation device, or other portable digital devices.
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • notebook PC Portable Computer System
  • the configuration example of the portable information terminal 700 illustrated in FIG. 11A includes a number of configurations that are not essential to the present embodiment, such as the sensor unit 760, but the present embodiment may be configured without these components. There is no loss of effect. Further, a configuration not shown in the figure such as a digital broadcast receiving function and an electronic money settlement function may be further added.
  • FIG. 11B is a software configuration diagram of the portable information terminal 700 of the present embodiment, and shows a software configuration in the ROM 703, the RAM 704, and the storage unit 710.
  • a basic operation program 7001 and other operation programs are stored in the ROM 703, and a cooperation control program 7002 and other operation programs are stored in the storage unit 710.
  • the storage unit 710 includes a content storage area 7200 for storing contents such as moving images, still images, and audio, an authentication information storage area 7300 for storing authentication information necessary for accessing the television receiver and each server device, It is assumed that various information storage areas for storing other various information are provided.
  • the basic operation program 7001 stored in the ROM 703 is expanded in the RAM 704, and the main control unit 701 executes the expanded basic operation program to constitute a basic operation execution unit 7101.
  • the cooperative control program 7002 stored in the storage unit 710 is also expanded in the RAM 704, and the main control unit 701 executes the expanded cooperative control program to configure the cooperative control execution unit 7102.
  • the RAM 704 includes a temporary storage area that temporarily stores data created when each operation program is executed as necessary.
  • the main control unit 701 executes the basic operation execution by executing the basic operation program 7001 stored in the ROM 703 by expanding the basic operation program 7001 in the RAM 704 and executing it. It is described that the unit 7101 controls each operation block. The same description is made for other operation programs.
  • the cooperation control execution unit 7102 performs management such as device authentication and connection and transmission / reception of each data when the portable information terminal 700 performs a cooperation operation with the television receiver.
  • the cooperation control execution unit 7102 includes a browser engine function for executing an application that works in conjunction with the television receiver.
  • the operation programs may be stored in advance in the ROM 703 and / or the storage unit 710 at the time of product shipment. After the product is shipped, it may be acquired from another application server 500 on the Internet 200 via the LAN communication unit 721 or the mobile telephone network communication unit 722. Further, each operation program stored in a memory card, an optical disk, or the like may be acquired via the expansion interface unit 724 or the like.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment has two types of time management functions.
  • the first time management function is a time management function based on NTP
  • the second time management function is a time management function based on MH-TOT.
  • the two types of time management functions will be described.
  • FIG. 12A is an example of a system configuration for clock synchronization / presentation synchronization in a broadcast system supported by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment.
  • UTC is transmitted from the broadcast transmission system to a receiver (such as the broadcast receiving device 100 of the present embodiment) in the 64-bit NTP timestamp format.
  • NTP timestamp format “seconds or more” of UTC is represented by 32 bits, and “less than seconds” is represented by 32 bits.
  • a system clock for synchronizing the video system and a system clock for operating an NTP clock for example, as shown in the figure, “2 24” Hz (about 16.8 MHz)
  • the frequency may be used.
  • the number of “2 24” to “2 28” is about 2 It is desirable to employ a power frequency as the system clock.
  • the system clock is set to a power of 2 such as “2 24” to “2 28” as described above on the broadcast transmission system side or the receiver side, it is received from the broadcast transmission system side.
  • a PLL system On the broadcast transmission system side, when time information in NTP format is obtained from the outside, a PLL system is configured with a 32 + n-bit counter by a VCO (Voltage Controlled Oscillator) of “2 to the power of 2” Hz, and the time information given from the outside Realizing a synchronized sending system clock. Further, the entire signal processing system is operated in synchronization with a system clock of “2 to the power of n” Hz. Further, the output of the transmission system clock is periodically transmitted to the receiver side through the broadcast transmission path as time information in the NTP length format. In the time information in the NTP length format transmitted to the receiver side, the lower “32-n” bits may be fixed to “0” or “1” out of 32 bits representing “less than second”. That is, the system clock counter on the broadcast transmission system side is composed of 32 + n bits.
  • VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator
  • time information in the NTP length format is received via the broadcast transmission path, and the reception system clock is reproduced by a PLL system based on a VCO of “2n” Hz, similarly to the broadcast transmission system side.
  • the reception system clock becomes a clock synchronized with the broadcast transmission system side.
  • clock synchronization between the broadcast transmission system side and the receiver side is realized, and stable signal reproduction is possible.
  • the decoding time and presentation time for each presentation unit of the video / audio signal are set on the broadcast transmission system side based on the time information in the NTP format.
  • the decoding time is specified by an MPU extended time stamp descriptor (not shown) stored in the MPT.
  • the presentation time is specified by an MPU time stamp descriptor (see FIG. 7D) stored in the MPT.
  • the “mpu_sequence_number (MPU sequence number)” parameter in the MPU timestamp descriptor indicates the sequence number of the MPU describing the time stamp
  • the “mpu_presentation_time (MPU presentation time)” parameter indicates the MPU presentation time as a 64-bit NTP timestamp. Shown in format. In other words, the receiver can control the presentation (display, output, etc.) timing of each MPU such as a video / audio signal, subtitles, and character superimpose by referring to the MPU time stamp descriptor stored in the MPT. Become.
  • the video / audio signal is synchronized even with a clock of about "2 16" Hz (about 65.5 KHz).
  • a clock of about "2 16" Hz about 65.5 KHz
  • the lower 16 bits of the NTP timestamp format described in the MPU timestamp descriptor or the like when a clock of “2 to the power of m” generated by dividing the system clock is used to control the decoding timing and presentation timing, the lower order of the NTP timestamp format described in the MPU timestamp descriptor etc.
  • the “32-m” bit need not be referenced. Therefore, the lower “32-m” bits of the NTP timestamp format described in the MPU timestamp descriptor or the like may be fixed to “0” or “1”.
  • FIG. 12B shows an example of the configuration of time information transmitted in the NTP format in the time management function based on NTP described above.
  • the “reference_timestamp” parameter, the “transmit_timestamp” parameter, and the like in the NTP format are time data in a 64-bit NTP length format, and the “mpu_presentation_time” parameter in the MPU time stamp descriptor shown in FIG. 7D is also 64 bits long.
  • Time data in the NTP timestamp format The time data in the NTP length format and the time data in the NTP timestamp format are data in which “seconds or more” of UTC is represented by 32 bits and “sub-seconds” is represented by 32 bits.
  • time information up to “less than second” can be transmitted as time information in the NTP format.
  • time information in the NTP format is expressed in UTC, unlike the time management in the conventional digital broadcasting, as shown in FIG. 3, it is distributed via the data flow and communication line transmitted through the broadcast transmission path. By managing both of the data flows using the time information in the NTP format, it is possible to easily match both the data.
  • time information transmitted by MH-TOT is as follows.
  • Fig. 12C shows an example of the data structure of MH-TOT.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can acquire the current date and the current time from the “JST_time” parameter of the MH-TOT.
  • the “JST_time” parameter includes the lower 16 bits of the encoded data of the current date based on the modified Julian Date (Modified Julian Date: MJD) and six standard times (Japan Standard Time: JST). Assume that it includes 24-bit information expressed in binary-coded decimal (BCD). It is possible to calculate the current date by performing a predetermined operation on the 16-bit encoded data of MJD.
  • BCD binary-coded decimal
  • 4-bit binary-coded decimal numbers represent “hour” in two decimal digits by the first two 4-bit binary-coded decimal numbers, and 10 by the next two 4-bit binary-coded decimal numbers. “Minute” is represented by two decimal digits, and “second” is represented by two decimal digits by the last two 4-bit binary-coded decimal numbers.
  • the difference between the time management based on the NTP format and the time management based on the MH-TOT is that the time management based on the former NTP format can transmit time information up to “less than second” as described above. In the latter time management based on the MH-TOT, only time information up to “second unit” in JST can be transmitted.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 has a time management function based on NTP, which is time information in UTC notation, and decoding and display synchronization processing of video, audio, subtitles, text super, and other presentation data that are broadcast signal contents.
  • NTP time information in UTC notation
  • decoding and display synchronization processing of video, audio, subtitles, text super, and other presentation data that are broadcast signal contents.
  • video, audio, subtitles, text super, or other data which is content received as a broadcast signal
  • video, audio acquired through a communication line path by referring to information in UTC not the clock notation of the broadcasting station
  • a time management function based on “JST_time” including 24-bit information represented by 6 4-bit binary-coded decimal numbers of MH-TOT is provided.
  • the present invention may be used for the presentation processing or each processing for handling the MH-EIT shown in FIG. 7E.
  • accuracy to less than a second is rarely required.
  • Each time information described in the MH-EIT is 24-bit information represented by 6 4-bit binary-coded decimal numbers, like the EIT of the conventional digital broadcast transmitted by the MPEG2-TS system. Stored in “hour”, “minute”, and “second” in two decimal digits.
  • each process that handles the MH-EIT includes, for example, an electronic program guide generation process, a recording reservation / viewing reservation control, a copyright management process such as temporary storage, and the like. This is because the accuracy of subseconds is rarely required for any processing, and accuracy in units of one second is sufficient.
  • copyright management processing such as electronic program guide generation processing, recording reservation and viewing reservation control, temporary storage, and the like are also installed in a receiver of a conventional digital broadcasting system using the MPEG2-TS system. It is. Then, in the broadcasting system of the present embodiment as well, the conventional MPEG2-TS digital broadcasting system in processing such as electronic program guide generation processing, recording reservation and viewing reservation control, copyright management processing such as temporary storage, etc.
  • a broadcast receiving apparatus having both a conventional MPEG2-TS digital broadcast reception function and an MMT digital broadcast reception function. This eliminates the need to design processing algorithms separately in these processes (electronic program guide generation processing, recording reservation and viewing reservation control, copyright management processing such as temporary storage, etc.) Can be lowered.
  • a receiver having no conventional MPEG2-TS digital broadcast reception function and only an MMT digital broadcast reception function can generate an electronic program guide and control recording reservation and viewing reservation. Even if the algorithm for copyright management processing such as temporary storage is not completely newly created, the algorithm of the function installed in the receiver of the conventional digital broadcasting system using the MPEG2-TS system can be diverted. Can be developed at lower cost.
  • the time management function based on the “JST_time” parameter of MH-TOT is used for these processes (electronic program guide generation process, recording reservation and viewing reservation control, copyright management process such as temporary storage).
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 has a time management function using two types of time information with different accuracy. That is, the first time information is notation time information consistent with the conventional digital broadcasting system, and the second time information is time information with higher resolution than the first time information.
  • the second time information is time information with higher resolution than the first time information.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can achieve both higher-level information presentation processing and lower cost by providing the two types of time management functions described above.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is configured to use the information related to the estimated delay time to correct the system clock of the time management function based on NTP. Also good.
  • information on the estimated delay time is not in the TLV multiplexed stream of the protocol stack in the broadcast transmission path shown in FIG. 3A, but in the TMCC (Transmission and Multiplexing Configuration Control) area outside the TLV multiplexed stream. You may comprise so that it may transmit. If the transmission is performed in the TMCC area, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can extract information on the estimated delay time without going through a TLV multiplexed stream separation process (demux process). That is, it is possible to acquire information that is not easily affected by the delay caused by the separation process in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, and therefore it is possible to perform a highly accurate system clock correction process.
  • TLV multiplexed stream separation process tandem process
  • the time information may be stored in the TMCC extended information area and transmitted.
  • the “delta” parameter is an estimated value of transmission delay from a time management server that delivers UTC or a server device that creates a TMCC signal to a general broadcast receiving device. Expressed in 32-bit signed fixed point. The upper 16 bits describe the integer part and the lower 16 bits describe the decimal part.
  • the “transmit_timestamp” parameter is a transmission time stamp, and describes the time when the TMCC signal is transmitted from the server device in the NTP time stamp length format. The upper 32 bits represent the integer part, and the lower 32 bits represent the decimal part.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 includes information on the estimated delay time described in the time information stored and transmitted in the TMCC extended information area (for example, the above-described “delta”).
  • the system clock of the time management function based on the NTP used for the synchronization processing of each content data of the broadcast signal can be corrected with higher accuracy.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment has a time management function for acquiring the current date and the Japan standard time based on information transmitted by the MH-TOT and managing the time.
  • the current date and Japan standard time acquired by the information transmitted by the MH-TOT are superimposed on the video information, application information, and the like by the video composition unit 161 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, thereby being displayed on the monitor unit 162 and the video output unit 163. It can be output and provided to the user.
  • the MH-TOT has the data structure shown in FIG. 12C, and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can acquire the current date and the current time from the “JST_time” parameter of the MH-TOT.
  • the date after “April 23, 2038” is expressed by switching the calculation method between the case where the value of MJD is greater than or equal to the predetermined value and the case where it is less than the predetermined value. It shall be controlled as possible.
  • FIG. 12F shows an example of a first calculation method used when the MJD value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value and a second calculation method used when the MJD value is less than the predetermined value.
  • the predetermined value is “32768 (0x8000)”
  • the MJD is “32768” or more
  • the current date is calculated using the first calculation method
  • the MJD is less than “32768”.
  • the case where MJD is less than “32768” is equivalent to the case where the most significant bit of 16-bit data of MJD is “0”. Thereby, in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to represent dates after “April 23, 2038”.
  • the predetermined value can be arbitrarily set, and the predetermined value may be set to “16384 (0x4000)”, “49152 (0xC000)”, or the like.
  • the calculation method switching condition may be that the upper 2 bits of the 16-bit data of MJD are “00” and the upper 2 bits of the 16-bit data of MJD are not “11”.
  • the “reserved” parameter in the MH-TOT data structure shown in FIG. You may make it switch said 1st calculation method and said 2nd calculation method according to the flag which replaced a part or all, or the newly added flag. For example, when the most significant bit of MJD 16-bit encoded data is “0”, the flag is set to “1” if the MJD indicates “April 23, 2038” or later. If it does not indicate “April 23, 2038” or later, “0” may be set. When the flag is “1”, the second calculation method shown in FIG. 12F may be used, and when the flag is “0”, the first calculation method may be used. Alternatively, a descriptor having the same meaning as the flag may be newly prepared and placed in the MH-TOT.
  • the broadcast system of this embodiment transmits NTP format absolute time
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment has a time management function based on the NTP.
  • the decoding timing and presentation for each presentation unit of the video / audio signal are referred to by referring to the NTP timestamps described in the MPU timestamp descriptor set for each MPU.
  • the timing is controlled.
  • the time information in the NTP format has the configuration shown in FIG. 12B.
  • the MPU time stamp descriptor has the configuration shown in FIG. 7D.
  • the “reference_timestamp” parameter, the “transmit_timestamp” parameter, the “mpu_presentation_time” parameter, or the like is referred to, and the first reference is made according to the value of the referenced time data or the like.
  • the calculation methods and the second calculation method may be selected. That is, for example, when the most significant bit of the 64-bit time data in the NTP length format is “0”, the second calculation method is used, and when it is not “0”, the first calculation method is used. And so on.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can represent dates after “April 23, 2038”.
  • the AMT of the broadcasting system provides a list of multicast groups of IP packets for receiving IP packets transmitted by the TLV multiplexing method as distinctly as possible from IP packets transmitted through a communication line. Shall. It is possible to list a plurality of IP multicast groups in one service identification. In addition, an address mask can be used to efficiently describe successive IP addresses.
  • a list of services acquired from the TLV-NIT is stored in a nonvolatile memory such as the ROM 103 or the storage unit 110 at the time of channel scanning at the time of initial setting or at the time of rescanning for setting change.
  • a list of IP multicast groups corresponding to the services can be stored in the nonvolatile memory in association with the services as IP related information. To do.
  • FIG. 13A is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation sequence at the time of channel scanning (rescanning) in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment.
  • the reception function execution unit 1102 sets an initial frequency value to the tuner / demodulation unit 131 and instructs the tuner / demodulation unit 131 to perform tuning to the frequency value (S101).
  • the reception function execution unit 1102 next acquires TLV-NIT from the received signal (S103).
  • the reception function execution unit 1102 acquires information such as a TLV stream ID and an original network ID from the acquired TLV-NIT. (S105).
  • FIG. 13B shows an example of the data structure of TLV-NIT.
  • the TLV stream ID information can be acquired from the “tlv_stream_id” parameter, and the original network ID information can be acquired from the “original_network_id” parameter.
  • distribution system information regarding the physical conditions of the broadcast transmission path corresponding to each TLV stream ID / original network ID is acquired from the distribution system descriptor (S106), and a list of service IDs is acquired from the service list descriptor ( S107).
  • FIG. 13C shows an example of the data structure of the satellite distribution system descriptor.
  • FIG. 13D shows an example of the data structure of the service list descriptor. If the TLV-NIT has a plurality of different data such as a TLV stream ID, original network ID, distribution system information, and service ID list, the processes of S105 to S107 are repeated. Next, the reception function execution unit 1102 creates a service list based on data such as the TLV stream ID, original network ID, distribution system information, and service ID list acquired in the processes of S105 to S107. The service list is stored in the ROM 103 or the storage unit 110 (updated when rescanning) (S108).
  • the reception function execution unit 1102 acquires the AMT from the received signal (S109), and further acquires a list of IP multicast groups related to each service ID stored in the service list (S110).
  • FIG. 13E shows an example of the data structure of AMT. If the AMT has a list of IP multicast groups related to a plurality of service IDs, the process of S110 is repeated. If there are a plurality of AMTs having a list of IP multicast groups related to different service IDs, the processes of S109 to S110 are repeated.
  • the reception function execution unit 1102 stores the IP multicast group list acquired in the process of S110 as IP related information in association with the service ID in the ROM 103 or the storage unit 110 (updated when rescanning). (S111).
  • the tuner / demodulation unit 131 has not succeeded in locking to the set frequency value in the process of S102 (S102: No), and the TLV-NIT acquired in the process of S103 is not valid data. In the case (S104: No), the processing of S105 to S111 is not performed.
  • the reception function execution unit 1102 ends the processing if the frequency value set in the tuner / demodulation unit 131 is the final frequency value in the channel scan range (S112: Yes). On the other hand, if the set frequency value is not the final frequency value in the channel scan range (S112: No), the frequency value set in the tuner / demodulator 131 is increased (S113), and the processing of S102 to S111 is performed. repeat. Note that if one TLV-NIT can acquire service IDs for all the services constituting the broadcast network and further can acquire an AMT having a list of IP multicast groups related to the service IDs, S112 to S113 No processing is required.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can store a list of services (service list) constituting the broadcast network at the time of channel scanning at the time of initial setting or at the time of rescanning for setting change. Simultaneously with the creation / update, a list of IP multicast groups (IP related information) corresponding to each service can be created / updated, and further stored in a non-volatile memory such as the ROM 103 or the storage unit 110.
  • service list a list of services constituting the broadcast network at the time of channel scanning at the time of initial setting or at the time of rescanning for setting change.
  • IP multicast groups IP related information
  • the rescan for changing the setting is automatically performed when it is detected that the information in the table has changed by referring to the “version_number” parameter of TLV-NIT or AMT. May be.
  • the “version_number” parameter of one of TLV-NIT and AMT is detected, only information relating to the table in which the change in the parameter is detected may be automatically updated.
  • the above-described automatic update it is desirable to notify the user that the rescan has been automatically performed.
  • the user may be notified that information in the table has changed, and the user may be allowed to select whether or not to perform the rescan.
  • FIG. 14A is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation sequence at the time of channel selection (channel switching) in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment.
  • reception function execution unit 1102 interprets the command transmitted from the remote controller and designates the service ID of the target service (S201). Next, reception function execution section 1102 starts acquiring AMT from the received signal of tuner / demodulation section 131. If acquisition of the AMT is successful within a predetermined time (S202: Yes), information on a list of IP multicast groups corresponding to the service ID is acquired from the acquired AMT (S204). On the other hand, if acquisition of the AMT is not successful within a predetermined time (S202: No), the IP corresponding to the service ID is referred to by referring to the IP related information stored in the ROM 103 or the storage unit 110 (S203). Information on the list of multicast groups is acquired (S204). Note that the IP-related information stored in the ROM 103 or the storage unit 110 may be always referred to without performing the determination process in S202.
  • the reception function execution unit 1102 starts acquiring TLV-NIT from the reception signal of the tuner / demodulation unit 131.
  • distribution system information for acquiring an IP data flow corresponding to the service ID is acquired from the acquired TLV-NIT (S207).
  • the service ID stored in the ROM 103 or the storage unit 110 is referred to (S206), and the service ID is supported.
  • Distribution system information for acquiring an IP data flow is acquired (S207). Note that the service list stored in the ROM 103 or the storage unit 110 may always be referred to without performing the determination process of S205.
  • the reception function execution unit 1102 When the distribution system information is acquired in the process of S207, the reception function execution unit 1102 next controls the tuner / demodulation unit 131 with the frequency value indicated by the acquired distribution system information, and the service ID (S208), an MMT data string is extracted from the received IP data flow and output to the separation unit 132.
  • the transport processing unit 1102a acquires an MMTP packet with a packet ID “0” from the input MMT data string (S209), and further acquires an MPT included in the acquired MMTP packet. (S210). Next, the transport processing unit 1102a refers to the “MMT_package_id_byte” parameter of the acquired MPT, and confirms whether the lower 16 bits of the “MMT_package_id_byte” parameter have the same value as the service ID. In the example of the MPT data structure shown in FIG.
  • the transport processing unit 1102a acquires the PLT again (S212), and checks the acquired PLT, thereby checking the packet ID of the MMTP packet that transmits the MPT having the “MMT_package_id_byte” parameter corresponding to the service ID. (X is assumed) is confirmed (S213).
  • the transport processing unit 1102a acquires an MMTP packet whose packet ID is “x” from the input MMT data string (S214), and acquires the MPT included in the acquired MMTP packet (S215). Furthermore, the MFU acquisition process is started based on the information that the acquired MPT has.
  • processing of S212 to S215 may always be performed without performing the processing of S209 to S211.
  • the processing time can be shortened.
  • the MMTP packet with the packet ID “0” indicates that a PA message is transmitted.
  • this PA message includes a PLT (package list table).
  • the PLT has a list of packet IDs of MMTP packets that transmit PA messages including MPTs of other packages, and by checking the PLT, the PA message including the MPT that is the entry point of each service from the package ID. It is possible to specify the MMTP packet that transmits.
  • FIG. 14C shows an example of the data structure of PLT. It is assumed that the location information for transmitting the PA message of the package indicated by the “MMT_package_id_byte” parameter is specified by “MMT_general_location_info ()”.
  • the transport processing unit 1102a refers to the MPT acquired in the process of S210 or S215, and acquires the IP address and packet ID of the IP data flow that transmits the desired MFU (S216). . Further, the MPU presentation time is obtained from the MPU time stamp descriptor arranged in the MPT, and the MPU layout number is obtained from the MPU presentation area designation descriptor arranged in the MPT (S217, S218). An MFU is acquired based on the IP address and packet ID of the acquired IP data flow (S219).
  • encoded video data, encoded audio data, and the like are extracted from the acquired MFU, video / audio decoding processing is performed based on the control of the AV decoding processing unit 1102b, and the acquisition is performed under the control of the presentation processing unit 1102h.
  • a presentation process based on information on presentation time and information on layout control is performed (S220).
  • the program output processing (that is, the processing of S216 to S220) based on the data of the MMTP packet with the packet ID “0” acquired in the processing of S210 may be performed. . In this case, a message indicating that the program corresponding to the service ID selected by the user could not be displayed may be displayed.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment can execute a channel selection (channel switching) operation.
  • a service list and IP-related information are created at the time of channel scanning at the time of initial setting or at the time of re-scanning for setting change, and the ROM 103 and the storage unit 110, which is stored in a non-volatile memory such as 110, and can always be referred to, and at the time of channel selection (channel switching), by referring to the service list and IP related information stored in the non-volatile memory such as the ROM 103 and the storage unit 110,
  • FIG. 15A shows an example of the appearance of a remote control (remote controller) 100R used for inputting operation instructions to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment.
  • the remote controller 100R includes at least a power key 100R1, a numeric keypad 100R2, a channel up / down key 100R3, a menu key 100R4, an EPG key 100R5, a cursor key 100R6, an enter key 100R7, and a color key 100R8.
  • a volume up / down key, a network switching key, an input switching key, a recording key, a playback key, and the like may be further provided.
  • the first method is to directly input and specify a service ID of a desired channel (service) by pressing the numeric keypad 100R2 a plurality of times.
  • the second method is a method of performing forward (or backward) channel transmission until a desired channel (service) is displayed by repeatedly pressing the channel up / down key 100R3 as necessary.
  • the third method is a method of performing so-called one-touch tuning, in which a predetermined channel (service) associated with each key of the numeric keypad 100R2 is called by pressing the numeric keypad 100R2 only once.
  • the one-touch channel selection which is the third method is an easy-to-use channel selection method, but it is necessary to set the association of a predetermined channel (service) to each key of the numeric keypad 100R2 in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 in advance. is there.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 corresponding to the broadcast system of this embodiment can automatically perform the association setting based on control information included in the digital broadcast wave received by the tuner / demodulator 131. And That is, the broadcasting system of this embodiment provides a remote control key descriptor as a TLV-SI descriptor. The association may be set by referring to the remote control key descriptor.
  • FIG. 15B shows an example of the data structure of the remote control key descriptor.
  • the “service_id” parameter in the figure is a service ID for identifying a channel (service).
  • the “remote_control_key_id” parameter is a recommended value of a remote control button number for assigning a channel (service) identified by the service ID.
  • the channel (service) identified by the “service_id” parameter may be associated with the key specified by the “remote_control_key_id” parameter value of the numeric keypad 100R2.
  • the channels (services) may be assigned to keys other than the numeric keypad 100R2.
  • a predetermined channel (service) is assigned to the color key 100R8.
  • a numerical value corresponding to the “remote_control_key_id” parameter may be assigned to each key of the color key 100R8 in advance.
  • the remote control key descriptor may be described as a TLV-NIT descriptor. Therefore, for example, when the TLV-NIT acquired in the processing of S103 in the operation sequence at the time of channel scanning shown in FIG. 13A is valid data, the description of the remote control key descriptor is combined with the processing of S105 to S107.
  • the association may be set by storing the contents in a ROM 103 or a non-volatile memory such as the storage unit 110 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • the user In addition to the method of setting the association according to the description content of the remote control key descriptor as described above, the user appropriately assigns a service of an arbitrary channel to each key of the numeric keypad 100R2 according to his / her preference. It may be done by. Further, both the association setting according to the description content of the remote control key descriptor and the association setting assigned by the user according to preference are stored in the nonvolatile memory of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 at the same time. Depending on the selection, only one setting may be used. In this case, the association setting assigned by the user according to preference may be preferentially used.
  • the association setting according to the description content of the remote control key descriptor is prioritized over the association setting assigned by the user according to preference. And may be used.
  • the priority flag may be set by using a part or all of the “reserved” parameter of the remote control key descriptor shown in FIG. 15B, or may be set by adding a new parameter. In this case, the priority flag value may be controllable for each service ID.
  • the association setting assigned by the user according to preference is stored in the nonvolatile memory
  • the association setting according to the description content of the remote control key descriptor is not stored in the nonvolatile memory. May be.
  • the nonvolatile memory of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 only the association setting assigned by the user according to the preference is stored, and when the remote control key descriptor is described in the receiving TLV-NIT. If the remote control key descriptor is not described in the receiving TLV-NIT using the association setting according to the description content of the remote control key descriptor, the association assigned by the user according to preference is used. You may make it use a setting.
  • the process of changing the association of a predetermined channel (service) with each key of the numeric keypad 100R2 according to the description content of the remote control key descriptor is described in the service list descriptor in the network specified by TLV-NIT. It may be performed for all services at the same time, or may be performed only for some services. When the above process is performed only for a part of services, the old setting may be held as it is for other services. Further, when the “service_id” parameter is a predetermined value (for example, 999), the setting designated by the “remote_control_key_id” parameter among the set contents stored in the nonvolatile memory of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 You may make it erase only about.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 it is possible to set association of a predetermined channel (service) to each key of the numeric keypad 100R2.
  • Multi-channel selection processing Also in the broadcasting system of the present embodiment, it is assumed that multi-organization in which a plurality of programs are broadcast in parallel on one channel (service) is possible.
  • simultaneous broadcasting of a plurality of programs by multi-organization is performed, it is conceivable that the above-described one-touch channel selection is possible only for a main channel of multi-organization and not for a sub-channel of multi-organization. That is, when selecting a multi-organization sub-channel, a method of directly inputting and specifying a service ID is used, or after selecting a multi-organization main channel by one-touch tuning, the channel up / down key 100R3 is used. It is necessary to use a method of selecting a desired subchannel by pressing, and there is a problem that the operation becomes complicated.
  • the one-touch channel selection function is expanded, and the numeric keypad 100R2 assigned with a predetermined service ID is repeatedly pressed within a predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to directly select multi-channel sub-channels.
  • the 011 channel service is assigned in advance to the “1” key of the numeric keypad 100R2 of the remote controller 100R.
  • the channel selection operation is in a state where multi-knitting is not performed (see (A) in the figure)
  • the 011 channel is selected regardless of the number of times the “1” key is pressed.
  • pressing the “1” key only once selects channel 011 and the first “1” key. If the “1” key is pressed again within a predetermined time from the pressing, the 012 channel is selected. Similarly, when the “1” key is pressed three times within a predetermined time, the 013 channel is selected. If the “1” key is pressed again after a predetermined time from the first pressing of the “1” key, the 011 channel may remain selected.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 By enabling the operation as described above, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment enables direct channel selection of subchannels during multi-organization with a simpler operation.
  • angle selection of a multi-view compatible program and selection of a predetermined video asset from a plurality of video assets may be performed by repeatedly pressing the ten key 100R2 a plurality of times.
  • the service ID of the multi-view compatible program is assigned to the “1” key of the numeric keypad 100R2 of the remote controller 100R
  • the multi-view compatible program is selected by pressing the “1” key only once. Assume that the main view is displayed. Further, when the “1” key is pressed again within a predetermined time after the first “1” key is pressed, the subview 1 of the multi-view compatible program is displayed.
  • the subview 2 of the multi-view compatible program is displayed. If the “1” key is pressed again after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first “1” key is pressed, the main view of the multi-view compatible program may remain displayed. Selection of a predetermined video asset from a plurality of video assets may be possible by the same operation as described above.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment can select the angle of a multi-view compatible program or select a predetermined video asset from a plurality of video assets with a simpler operation. It is said.
  • one or more programs at the time of multi-organization are multi-view compatible programs or programs having a plurality of assets
  • only one of the above-described operations may be validated and the other may be invalidated.
  • direct channel selection of sub-channels at the time of multi-organization is performed by pressing the same key multiple times within a predetermined time. To be assigned to the process. Which operation is valid or invalid may be determined in advance or may be selected by the user.
  • FIG. 17A shows an example of the data structure of LCT.
  • FIG. 17B shows an example of the data structure of the MPU presentation area designation descriptor.
  • the “left_top_pos_x” parameter and the “right_down_pos_x” parameter are the horizontal position at the upper left and the lower right when the left side of the full screen display is “0” / the right side is “100”.
  • the horizontal position is indicated by a ratio to the total number of pixels in the horizontal direction.
  • the “left_top_pos_y” parameter and the “right_down_pos_y” parameter indicate the vertical position at the upper left and the lower right of the area when the upper side of the full screen display is “0” / lower side is “100”. It shall be shown by the ratio with respect to the total number of pixels.
  • the “layer_order” parameter indicates the relative position in the depth direction of the region.
  • FIG. 17C shows a default layout setting of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, in which only one area is set on the entire screen.
  • FIG. 17D shows an example in which the entire screen is divided into three areas, and the areas are “area 0”, “area 1”, and “area 2”.
  • “area 0” has “left_top_pos_x” parameter of “0”, “left_top_pos_y” parameter of “0”, and “right_down_pos_x” parameter of “80” ”And“ right_down_pos_y ”parameters are“ 80 ”, and are set in the range of (0, 0) ⁇ (6143, 3455).
  • “area 1” is set in the range of (6144,0) ⁇ (7679,4319)
  • “area 2” is set in the range of (0,3456) ⁇ (6143,4319).
  • FIG. 17E is an example in which three areas are set in the same manner as FIG. 17D, but “area 0” is set in the range of (0,0) ⁇ (7679,4319), “area 1” and “area “2” is in the same range as described above, and is arranged in front of “area 0” according to the setting of the “layer_order” parameter.
  • FIG. 17F shows that “area 0” is set in device 0 (default device: broadcast receiving apparatus 100 in this embodiment), and “area 1” is set in device 1 (mobile information terminal 700 in this embodiment). This is an example of the case.
  • a predetermined background color designated by the background color designation descriptor described in the LCT may be displayed in an area where the program video or data screen is not displayed by the screen layout control described above. Further, when the background color designation descriptor is not included in the LCT, when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 cannot correctly obtain the background color designation descriptor, the predetermined background color designated by the background color designation descriptor is If the display is not possible due to hardware restrictions, the video display device 100 may display a predetermined pattern in the area. Further, the region may be used as a notification display region from the video display device 100 to the user. The notice may be arbitrary information.
  • fractions after the decimal point generated when the screen is divided according to the set value of the parameter such as “left_top_pos_x” may be rounded up or down. Rounding off (or rounding to zero in a binary number) may be used.
  • the number of pixels of the entire screen is 7680 pixels / vertical 4320 pixels
  • the “left_top_pos_x” parameter of “region 0” is “0”
  • the “left_top_pos_y” parameter is “0”
  • the “right_down_pos_x” parameter is “51”
  • “right_down_pos_y_ When the parameter is “51”, “Region 0” may be set in the range of (0,0) ⁇ (3916,2203) by rounding up processing, or (0,0) ⁇ (3915, 2202) may be set to “area 0”. Further, rounding up / down processing in units of 8 pixels or 16 pixels may be performed in consideration of a macroblock in video compression processing. By the processing, it is possible to efficiently perform region setting based on LCT and resolution conversion processing of multimedia content in the region.
  • the setting value of the parameter such as “left_top_pos_x” may be limited to “multiple of 5” or “multiple of 10” in the range of “0” to “100”. Also in this case, the region setting can be suitably performed.
  • the content displayed in each area is specified by the MPU presentation area specification descriptor shown in FIG. 17B. It is assumed that the content of the MPU whose sequence number is specified by the “mpu_sequence_number” parameter in the figure is related to the LCT description by the “layout_number” parameter and the “region_number” parameter.
  • FIG. 18A shows an example of the operation of exception processing for screen layout control based on LCT.
  • the screen layout control similar to that of FIG. 17D is performed by the description of LCT, the broadcast program video is displayed in “Area 0”, and the program linkage data linked to the broadcast program is broadcasted in “Area 1” and “Area 2”.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 describes the LCT description as shown in FIG. 18A (A).
  • the screen layout setting is returned to the default setting (that is, the screen layout control similar to that in FIG. 17C is performed), and the EPG screen is controlled to be displayed on the entire screen.
  • the screen layout control according to the description content of the LCT is re-executed.
  • the EPG screen can be displayed larger than the case where the EPG screen is displayed while maintaining the area control of the screen layout as shown in FIG. 18A (B). It is possible to improve visibility.
  • the broadcast content display area is changed from the entire screen to only the sub-screen portion at the lower right of the screen.
  • the broadcast content display area is changed from the entire screen to only the divided screen portion on the left side of the middle stage of the screen.
  • the display area for displaying the broadcast content is narrower than the case where the entire screen is used. Therefore, the area control of the screen layout is maintained in the display area (that is, the area division is performed). It is not preferable from the viewpoint of visual recognition that a plurality of broadcast contents are displayed at the same time.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 in the above situation, only the broadcast content of “area 0” is selected and displayed in the display area. Note that the broadcast content of “region 1” or “region 2” may be selected and displayed according to the immediately preceding region selection situation.
  • the aspect ratio of the video signal in the TV broadcasting service includes “4: 3” used in the conventional SDTV, “16: 9” used in the recent HDTV, and “21: 9” suitable for movie contents. ”, Etc.
  • Information on the aspect ratio of the video signal may be described by a video component descriptor in the broadcasting system of the present embodiment.
  • FIG. 19A shows an example of the data structure of the video component descriptor.
  • the “video_aspect_ratio” parameter is information relating to the aspect ratio of the video signal.
  • FIG. 19B shows an example of the meaning of the “video_aspect_ratio” parameter. An aspect ratio different from that shown may be further assigned.
  • the aspect ratio of the display unit of a television receiver (such as the broadcast receiving device 100 of this embodiment) that can receive the television broadcast service is generally “16: 9”. That is, when displaying video content with an aspect ratio of “4: 3” or “21: 9” on a general television receiver, an aspect ratio conversion process may be performed.
  • Whether or not to perform the aspect ratio conversion process may be determined by comparing the specification of the monitor unit 162 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 with the “video_aspect_ratio” parameter of the video component descriptor. For example, when the aspect ratio of the monitor unit 162 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is “16: 9” (3840 pixels ⁇ 2160 pixels, etc.), the value of the “video_aspect_ratio” parameter is “0”, “2”, “ If “3”, the aspect ratio conversion process is not performed, and if “1” or “5”, the aspect ratio conversion process is performed.
  • the aspect ratio of the monitor unit 162 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is “21: 9” (width 5040 pixels ⁇ length 2160 pixels, etc.)
  • the value of the “video_aspect_ratio” parameter is “0” or “5”. Then, the aspect ratio conversion process is not performed, and if “1”, “2”, or “3”, the aspect ratio conversion process may be performed.
  • FIGS. 19C and 19D An example of the aspect ratio conversion process when the aspect ratio of the monitor unit 162 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is “16: 9” and the value of the “video_aspect_ratio” parameter is “5” is shown in FIGS. 19C and 19D.
  • video content having an aspect ratio of “21: 9” is displayed on the monitor unit 162 having an aspect ratio of “16: 9”
  • the aspect ratio May be converted to “16: 9” (display A in the figure).
  • the entire area of the original video content can be displayed without distortion.
  • only the central portion of the video content having the aspect ratio “21: 9” may be cut out and displayed on the monitor unit 162 (display B in the figure).
  • a little black band may be added to the top and bottom of the video content having the aspect ratio “21: 9”, and the entire area may be displayed by further compressing the left and right ends (display E in the figure). In this way, the entire area of the original video content can be enlarged and displayed with less distortion at the left and right ends.
  • the aspect ratio “21: 9” includes an aspect ratio of approximately “21: 9” such as a so-called cinemascope “2.35: 1”. The same applies to other aspect ratio values.
  • EPG display of broadcast receiver In the broadcasting system of the present embodiment, it is assumed that time-series information regarding events (so-called programs) included in each service constituting the broadcasting network is transmitted by MH-EIT.
  • the MH-EIT shown in FIG. 7E is identified into two classes by the table ID (corresponding to the “talbe_id” parameter in the figure), and information on the current / next event of the own TLV stream and each event of the own TLV stream. It is possible to show schedule information.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment refers to the MH-EIT or the like, and performs identification by service ID (corresponding to the “service_id” parameter in the figure), so that information such as the start time and broadcast time of each event is obtained.
  • the EPG screen can be created by acquiring the EPG, and the created EPG can be displayed on the monitor unit 162 by superimposing the created EPG on the video information or the like by the video composition unit 161.
  • FIG. 20A is a diagram illustrating an example of an EPG screen in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment.
  • the EPG screen 162a has a matrix shape with the vertical axis representing time and the horizontal axis representing service ID (channel), and displays detailed information of broadcast programs broadcast on each channel in each time slot.
  • the detailed information 162a1 of each broadcast program is mainly composed of a title area 162a2 and a detailed description area 162a3.
  • the detailed information 162a1 of each broadcast program may display program information described in the MH-short format event descriptor or the MH-extended event descriptor and distributed.
  • the program title of the broadcast program symbols representing the attributes of the broadcast program, and the like are displayed.
  • the symbol or the like indicating the attribute of the broadcast program is, for example, a symbol / character indicating a new program, a symbol / character indicating a re-broadcast program, or the like.
  • it may be a sign or the like that symbolizes “data” meaning that it corresponds to data broadcasting by a broadcasting service.
  • the mark 162a4 etc. which symbolized "NetWork” which means that the content, application, etc. relevant to the said broadcast program are acquirable from a network may be sufficient.
  • symbols or the like representing the attributes of the broadcast program may be substituted.
  • each control information (message, table, descriptor, etc.) in the broadcasting system of the present embodiment indicates that content, application, etc. related to the broadcast program can be acquired from the network.
  • the mark 162a4 symbolized “NetWork” is used. Etc. may be controlled so as not to be displayed.
  • the broadcast program is a distribution program distributed via the Internet 200 and cannot be obtained only from the broadcast wave.
  • the broadcast receiving device 100 is connected to each server device on the network.
  • the detailed information 162b1 displayed on the EPG screen 162b may be grayed out as shown in FIG. 20B. That is, control is performed so as not to display the detailed information of the distribution program that cannot be viewed.
  • the background color of the detailed information 162b1 may be differentiated from the others to replace the grayout process.
  • a message such as “This program cannot be viewed” may be displayed in the detailed explanation area 162a3 of the distributed program.
  • the broadcast receiving device 100 When the detailed information 162b1 is selected by operating a remote controller (not shown), the broadcast receiving device 100 is in a state where it cannot access each server device on the network, or a distribution program associated with the detailed information 162b1 is viewed. You may make it alert
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can provide program information of each broadcast program in a format that is less uncomfortable to the user according to the network connection status.
  • FIG. 20C is a diagram illustrating another example of the EPG screen in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment.
  • “M1 TV”, “M2 Broadcast”, “M3 Channel”, “M4TV”, “TV M5”, etc. are broadcast station names of each channel. It is assumed that a broadcast program to be distributed and a distribution program distributed via the Internet 200 (frame information 162c1 indicated by “net broadcast” in the figure) are provided simultaneously.
  • the above-described controls make it possible for the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 to make it unnecessary to check information on channels that he / she cannot view.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 performs emergency alert broadcast reception processing when the emergency alert broadcast activation control signal bit of the TMCC signal included in the transmission data including the TLV stream changes from “0” to “1”. It shall be possible to do.
  • the emergency alert broadcast may be provided as a broadcast program of a dedicated channel (service ID), may be provided as a full-screen display application, or may be provided at a character supermarket as character information.
  • service ID service ID
  • the emergency alert broadcast is provided as text information at the text superimpose, it is preferable to display the text information of the text supermarket regardless of the state of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 immediately before receiving the emergency alert broadcast. That is, as shown in FIG. 21, when a user views a normal broadcast program and receives an emergency alert broadcast in a state where the program screen 162e of the broadcast program is displayed on the monitor unit 162, the emergency alert broadcast The character information 162e1 is displayed superimposed on the program screen 162e.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment even when the user selects and displays an EPG screen, various setting screens, a recorded program list screen, an Internet browser, etc., an emergency warning broadcast Is received, it is possible to avoid overlooking important text information based on the emergency alert broadcast. Note that this control may be performed on character information of a normal character supermarket that is not based on emergency alert broadcasting.
  • the emergency alert broadcast channel (service ID) is set regardless of the channel (service ID) of the currently viewed program. Automatic tuning may be performed.
  • an external portable terminal device (in this embodiment) is linked under the control of the linkage function execution unit 1103. , The emergency warning broadcast program or application may be distributed to the portable information terminal 700 or the like.
  • the broadcast receiving device 100 when the broadcast receiving device 100 is not turned on when the emergency alert broadcast is delivered, the broadcast receiving device 100 may be automatically turned on. Alternatively, control may be performed so as to transmit a notification that emergency warning broadcasting has started to the portable information terminal 700 that has a history of cooperation with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment can avoid overlooking display of important broadcast programs and application images based on the emergency warning broadcast.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may perform exception processing as described below, for example, when data transmitted through a route other than the TLV stream cannot be acquired among the data configuring the same package.
  • the data acquired from the TLV stream and the TLV stream based on the location information stored in the MPT (see FIG. 7C).
  • Data acquired from other routes can be included in the same package.
  • data transmitted via a data transmission path other than the TLV stream (for example, IPv4 data flow or IPv6 data flow of a communication line, MPEG2-TS of broadcasting, etc.) indicated by the location information has a TLV / MMT stream reception function. Is data acquired by another receiving function. Therefore, even when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is in operation, the reception function of these transmission paths is not operating, or the relay apparatus on the transmission path is operating even though the receiving function itself is operating. Data acquisition from these transmission paths, such as a situation where there is no wired or wireless connection of these transmission paths, or a situation where the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is installed in an environment where these transmission paths cannot be connected in the first place There may be situations where you can't.
  • the location information stored in the MPT receives an event indicating that data acquired from the TLV stream and data acquired from a route other than the TLV stream are associated with each other so as to be included in the same package.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may perform the following operation.
  • the LCT sets a plurality of areas in the screen, displays a program video based on the data acquired from the TLV stream in “area 0”, and displays “area 1” and
  • “area 2” is associated with content based on data acquired from a transmission path other than the TLV stream, other than the TLV stream to be displayed in “area 1” or “area 2”
  • the layout display of a plurality of areas designated by the LCT may be prohibited. Specifically, even if the LCT is received, the program video based on the data acquired from the TLV stream is displayed in “area 0” of the default layout display shown in FIG. What is necessary is just not to shift to the layout display of such multiple areas.
  • the default layout display illustrated in FIG. Switching to a data broadcasting screen may be performed so as not to shift to a layout display of a plurality of areas as shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E.
  • the LCT sets a plurality of areas in the screen, displays a program video based on the data acquired from the TLV stream in “area 0”, and displays “area 1” and When “area 2” is associated with content based on data acquired through a transmission path other than the TLV stream, other than the TLV stream to be displayed in “area 1” or “area 2”
  • the display frames of the plurality of areas shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E indicated by the LCT are temporarily displayed, and the background colors of “area 1” and “area 2” are displayed.
  • the default still picture shown in FIG. 17C is displayed. It may be subjected to a display switching back to the tray-out display of the state. In this case, the TLV stream is also transferred to “area 0” of each layout when the layout of FIG. 17C is changed to the layout of FIG. 17D or 17E and when the layout of FIG. 17D or 17E is changed to the layout of FIG. 17C. If it operates so that the program video based on the data acquired from can be continuously displayed, it is preferable because the user can continue watching the program video.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 since the data of the transmission path other than the TLV stream to be displayed in “area 1” or “area 2” cannot be acquired, the data acquired from the TLV stream in “area 0” of the default layout display illustrated in FIG.
  • the operation of various communication functions and various reception functions of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment is started when the program video based on the program is displayed, and the communication environment / communication status and various reception functions of the various communication functions are started.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment immediately switches from the default layout display shown in FIG.
  • the program video based on the data acquired from the TLV stream may be displayed, and the content based on the data acquired from the transmission path other than the TLV stream may be displayed in “area 1” or “area 2”.
  • the layout change may be executed after an instruction to change from the default layout to the layout indicated by the LCT is input from the operation input unit 170 without performing the layout change immediately. In this case, it is preferable to notify the user by OSD display or the like that the layout can be changed.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 stores the content in the storage (storage) unit 110, records it on a removable recording medium, outputs it to an external device, and sends it to an external device according to the copy control information. It may be configured to control copying, moving processing to an external device, and the like.
  • the target of the accumulation process is not only the storage (accumulation) unit 110 inside the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 but also a removable recording medium subjected to a protection process such as an encryption process that can be reproduced only by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100,
  • An external device etc. may be included.
  • an external recording device such as an HDD connected to the extension interface unit 124 that can be recorded and reproduced only by the broadcast receiving device 100 is included.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment accumulates in the storage (accumulation) unit 110, records in a removable recording medium, and externally.
  • the output to the device, the copy to the external device, the move process to the external device, etc. may be performed without limitation.
  • the control based on the copy control information is divided into “unlimited copy is possible and encryption processing is required for storage and output” and “unlimited copy is possible and encryption processing is not required for storage and output”.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 When the copy control information included in the MPT or the like indicates “copying is possible for only one generation”, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment stores encrypted data in the storage (storage) unit 110 or receives broadcast data. Recording on a removable recording medium that has been subjected to protection processing such as encryption processing that can be reproduced only by the apparatus 100 may be possible.
  • protection processing such as encryption processing that can be reproduced only by the apparatus 100
  • the stored content is output to an external device for viewing, the content is encrypted and output together with copy control information of “copy prohibited”.
  • a so-called move process to an external device (a process of copying content to the external device and making the content in the storage (storage) unit 110 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 unplayable by an erasure process or the like) is possible.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 When the copy control information included in the MPT or the like indicates “copying is allowed a predetermined number of times”, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment performs processing for encrypting and storing in the storage (storage) unit 110, Processing for recording on a removable recording medium subjected to protection processing such as encryption processing that can be reproduced only by the apparatus 100 may be possible.
  • protection processing such as encryption processing that can be reproduced only by the apparatus 100 may be possible.
  • the stored content is output to an external device for viewing, the content is encrypted and output together with copy control information of “copy prohibited”.
  • a predetermined number of times of copying and moving to an external device may be possible. In the case of so-called “dubbing 10”, it is possible to perform nine copies to an external device and one move process.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment prohibits accumulation (copying) in the storage (accumulation) unit 110 or the like.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 stores (accumulates) only for a predetermined time determined in advance or for a predetermined time specified by control information included in the broadcast signal (for example, according to an MH-Expire descriptor, a content use control descriptor, etc.).
  • It may be configured to have a “temporary storage” mode that enables holding in the unit 110 or the like.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can temporarily hold the content in the storage (storage) unit 110 or the like even when the copy control information included in the MPT or the like indicates “copy prohibited”.
  • the content is encrypted and output together with the copy control information “copy prohibited”.
  • the output for viewing to the external device described above is transmitted via the video output unit 163 and the audio output unit 166 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, the digital I / F unit 125, the LAN communication unit 121, or the like. Just do it.
  • the copying or moving process to the external device described above may be performed via the digital I / F unit 125, the LAN communication unit 121, or the like.
  • FIG. 22A shows an example of the data structure of the content copy control descriptor in the broadcasting system of the present embodiment.
  • the “digital_recording_control_data” parameter in the figure is digital copy control information, and indicates information for controlling the copy generation of the content.
  • FIG. 22B shows an example of parameter values of the digital copy control information and their meanings. For example, when the parameter is “00”, it indicates “unlimited copying is possible”, when the parameter is “01”, definition by the operator is possible, and when the parameter is “10” “Copying only one generation” is indicated, and when the parameter is “11”, “copy prohibited” is indicated.
  • FIG. 23 shows an example of the data structure of the content usage control descriptor in the broadcasting system of this embodiment. It is assumed that the “copy_restriction_mode” parameter in the figure is the copy restriction mode and indicates whether or not the number-limited copy is possible.
  • the digital copy control information is “01”, it is possible to execute a storage process that allows a predetermined number of copies to be made by a broadcaster in advance.
  • the digital copy control information is not “11” and the copy restriction mode indicates that the number-restricted copy is permitted, it is possible to execute a storage process that allows a predetermined number of copies to be made in advance determined by the broadcaster Also good.
  • the number of copies that can be made for each content may be specified by using a part or all of the “reserved_future_use” parameter of the digital content usage descriptor.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can realize the content copy control of “copying a predetermined number of times” described above.
  • the “retention_mode” parameter in the content usage control descriptor shown in FIG. 23 is a temporary storage control bit and the digital copy control information indicates “copy prohibited”, temporary storage of the target content is permitted. It indicates whether or not to do.
  • the “retention_state” parameter is a temporary storage allowable time, and the temporary storage allowable bit indicates a temporary storage allowable time when the target content is temporarily stored.
  • the temporary copy when the digital copy control information of each content indicates “copy prohibited” by referring to the information of the temporary storage control bit and the temporary storage allowable time. It is possible to control whether or not the data can be stored and its storage time.
  • the “image_constraint_token” parameter is a resolution restriction bit, and indicates whether or not image quality restriction is necessary when outputting content to an external device.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 performs image quality restriction on the target content when outputting the target content to an external device.
  • the image quality restriction is not necessary when storing in the storage (storage) unit 110 or the like.
  • the image quality limitation is, for example, converted from received (or accumulated) UHD (7680 pixels ⁇ 4320 pixels) video content to SHD (3840 pixels ⁇ 2160 pixels) video, or output HD (1920 pixels ⁇ 1080).
  • Pixel video is converted into SD (640 pixels ⁇ 480 pixels) video and output, and so on. It should be noted that to what extent the image quality of the target content is restricted, that is, to which resolution the image quality after the image quality restriction is to be specified is specified by using a part or all of the “reserved_future_use” parameter of the digital content usage descriptor. You may do it.
  • a frame rate limit bit and a pixel resolution limit bit are prepared using part or all of the “reserved_future_use” parameter, and when outputting content to an external device, the frame rate limit and the pixel resolution limit are set. You may make it control.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 limits the frame rate of the target content when outputting the target content to an external device. Assumed to be performed. For example, video content with a frame rate of 120 Hz is converted to a frame rate of 60 Hz and output.
  • each pixel of the target content when outputting the target content to the external device, each pixel of the target content.
  • the resolution is limited. For example, each pixel of video content in which each pixel is composed of 12 bits is converted into 8 bits and output.
  • a resolution limiting control flag, a frame rate limiting control flag, and a pixel resolution limiting control flag are prepared by using a part or all of the “reserved_future_use” parameter, and the resolution limiting control flag, the frame rate limiting control flag, the pixel Whether the image quality limitation, the frame rate limitation, or the pixel resolution limitation is performed may be controlled according to a resolution limitation control flag. For example, when the resolution restriction control flag indicates that the resolution restriction control is performed according to the interface specification, the image quality restriction is not performed if the interface for outputting the target content has a predetermined content protection technology. If the content protection technology is not provided, control may be performed so as to perform the image quality restriction.
  • the HDMI interface of the external device is HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital). (Content Protection) version 2.2 or later, the target content is output without performing the image quality restriction, and if the HDMI interface HDCP version of the external device is less than 2.2, the image quality restriction is performed.
  • HDCP High-bandwidth Digital
  • the target content is output without performing the image quality restriction, and if the HDMI interface HDCP version of the external device is less than 2.2, the image quality restriction is performed.
  • To output the target content that is, depending on whether the interface for outputting the target content is provided with a predetermined content protection technology, or depending on the version of the content protection technology if the content protection technology is provided. It is sufficient to control whether or not to limit the image quality of the target content.
  • the resolution restriction control flag does not indicate that the resolution restriction control is performed according to the interface specification
  • the presence / absence of the image quality restriction may be controlled according to only the resolution restriction bit. Similar processing may be performed for the frame rate limiting control flag and the pixel resolution limiting control flag.
  • the above-described copy control information indicates that content that indicates copy restrictions such as “copying is allowed for only one generation”, “copying for a predetermined number of times”, “copying prohibited”, etc., to the external device via the LAN communication unit 121.
  • Copy processing is possible only when the IP address of the external device that is the destination of the transmission packet from the broadcast receiving device 100 is in the same subnet as the IP address of the broadcast receiving device 100, and the IP address of the external device is broadcast. If the IP address of the receiving apparatus 100 is outside the same subnet, it may be prohibited.
  • Content whose copy control information is “unlimited copy is possible and encryption processing is required during storage and output” may be handled in the same manner.
  • the content in which the above-mentioned copy control information indicates copy restrictions such as “copying is possible for only one generation”, “copying is allowed a predetermined number of times”, “unlimited copying is possible and encryption processing is required during storage and output”, etc.
  • the IP address of the external device that is the destination of the transmission packet from the broadcast receiving device 100 is also used for the move processing and copy processing to the external device via the LAN communication unit 121. This is possible only when the address is within the same subnet as the IP address of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, and may be prohibited when the IP address of the external device is outside the same subnet as the IP address of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • viewing video output and audio output for content stored in the storage (storage) unit 110 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 are, in principle, the IP address of the external device that is the destination of the transmission packet from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, This is possible only when the IP address of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is within the same subnet, and is prohibited when the IP address of the external device is outside the same subnet as the IP address of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • Unit 110 may be configured to enable viewing video output and audio output for content stored in unit 110. In this case, the viewing video output and audio output are performed by encrypting the content.
  • the encryption process may be controlled according to the value of the “encryption_mode” parameter of the content use control descriptor shown in FIG. That is, when the value of the “encryption_mode” parameter indicates that the output protection of the IP interface output is required, the encryption process is performed, and the output protection of the IP interface output is not required
  • the viewing video output and audio output may be performed without performing the encryption process.
  • an encryption process is performed by using a part or all of the “reserved_future_use” parameter of the content usage control descriptor.
  • An IP address range of an external device that can perform the viewing video output and audio output without performing the above may be designated. That is, for a predetermined IP address determined in advance, even if the IP address is not in the same subnet as the IP address of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, it is possible to perform viewing video output and audio output.
  • a period during which the registration process (pairing) is valid may be specified by using a part or all of the “reserved_future_use” parameter of the content usage control descriptor. In this case, if the date and time when the external device registration processing (pairing) is performed is within the specified period, the external device is included even if the external device is outside the same subnet as the IP address of the broadcast receiving device 100. Control may be performed so that viewing video output and audio output to the device are allowed and not allowed outside the specified period.
  • the above-described move processing, copy processing, output processing, and the like of content to the external device via the LAN communication unit 121 may be controlled according to the value of the “remote_view_mode” parameter of the content usage control descriptor. . That is, if the value of the “remote_view_mode” parameter does not permit remote viewing of the target content, all of the content move processing, copy processing, output processing, etc. to the external device via the LAN communication unit 121 are performed. You may control to prohibit.
  • the first digital copy control information (the “digital_recording_control_data” parameter located immediately after “descriptor_length”) is copy generation control information related to the entire content.
  • the second digital copy control information (the “digital_recording_control_data” parameter located immediately after “component_tag”) is copy generation control information for each component constituting the content. Note that each component is specified by a “component_tag” parameter.
  • the broadcasting system of the present embodiment when the copy generation of the entire content (program) is controlled, only the first digital copy control information is described in the content copy control descriptor, and the first digital copy The copy generation is controlled by the control information.
  • the control information when performing copy generation control for each component constituting the content, describe both the first digital copy control information and the second digital copy control information in the content copy control descriptor, Control copy generation.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment may perform the following operation.
  • the copy generation control indicated in the first digital copy control information is performed. This is a method of performing control based on the above. In this case, simple copy generation control common to each component constituting the same content can be performed.
  • the copy generation indicated in the second digital copy control information is displayed.
  • control is performed so as to operate based on the control. In this case, even for components constituting the same content, different copy generation control is possible for each component, that is, more precise copy generation control is possible.
  • the stricter condition of the two different digital copy control information This is a method for performing control based on digital copy control information. For example, when one side is “unlimited copy is permitted” and the other is “only one generation can be copied”, the information of “one generation can be copied” is followed. Or, when one is “copying a predetermined number of times” and the other is “copy prohibited”, the information of “copy prohibited” is followed. Or, in the case of both “copying a predetermined number of times”, the information of the smaller number of times that can be copied is specified separately. In this case, stricter copy generation control is possible.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can operate favorably even when two different digital copy control information are described in the content copy control descriptor.
  • a path different from the data acquired in the TLV stream of the broadcast path is determined by the location information in the MPT (see FIG. 7C).
  • Data acquired by (IPv4, IPv6, MPEG2-TS, URL, etc.) can also be included in the same package and the same event as the data acquired by the TLV stream, but at this time, copy control information is included in the MPT etc.
  • the data included in the same package and the same event in the location information is different from the data acquired by the TLV stream of the broadcast route (IPv4, IPv6, MPEG2-TS, URL, Etc.) may be controlled according to the copy control information included in the TLV stream.
  • the copy control status of the specified content based on these copy control information is “Unlimited copy allowed” (“Unlimited copy allowed and encryption required during storage and output”) and “Unlimited copy allowed”
  • it may be divided into two types, “no encryption processing is required at the time of storage and output”), “copying is possible for only one generation”, “copying for a predetermined number of times” (for example, copying is possible 9 times + movement is allowed once) “Dubbing 10”), “copy prohibited”, etc. can be specified.
  • the MPEG2-TS data is associated with the copy control information even in another digital broadcast signal. Being broadcast. Then, according to which information the copy control of the MPEG2-TS data is performed (whether it follows the copy control information included in the TLV / MMT stream or the copy control information included in the MPEG2-TS) becomes a problem. .
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may perform any one of the following solutions.
  • ⁇ Operation example 1> when the copy control information is included in the MPT or the like, and the data included in the same package and location in the location information includes MPEG2-TS data transmitted by another digital broadcast signal, the MPEG2 -The copy control state indicated by the copy control information included in the TLV stream is controlled with priority over the copy control state indicated by the copy control information included in the TS.
  • the copy control status indicated by the copy control information included in the TLV stream is “1 generation copy is permitted”, and the copy control status indicated by the copy control information included in the MPEG2-TS is “predetermined to be copied a predetermined number of times”. If there is, even if the data is acquired through a different route (MPEG2-TS transmission format digital broadcasting) from the data acquired by the TLV stream, the copy control may be performed as the content of “one generation copy is possible”. For example, the copy control state indicated by the copy control information included in the TLV stream is “unlimited copying is permitted”, and the copy control state indicated by the copy control information included in the MPEG2-TS is “predetermined to allow multiple times of copying”. If there is, even if the data is acquired through a different route (MPEG2-TS transmission format digital broadcasting) from the data acquired by the TLV stream, the copy control may be performed as the content of “unlimited copying”.
  • the data acquired through a route other than the TLV stream can be set to a copy state that the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment wants to manage in the broadcasting system.
  • ⁇ Operation example 2> when the copy control information is included in the MPT or the like, and the data included in the same package and the same event in the location information includes MPEG2-TS data transmitted by another digital broadcast signal, the TLV The copy control state indicated by the copy control information included in the stream is compared with the copy control state indicated by the copy control information included in the MPEG2-TS, and the copy control state indicated by the copy control information included in the MPEG2-TS is compared. If this is stricter than the copy control state indicated by the copy control information included in the TLV stream, the storage process to the storage (storage) unit 110, the recording process to the removable recording medium, or the output process from the digital interface is performed. Process the MPEG2-TS data It operates to exclude the elephants content.
  • copying on the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment is performed while respecting the original copy control information set in the broadcast system that transmits the data. Duplicate control states can be eliminated.
  • copy control may be performed as content in the copy control state indicated by the copy control information included in the TLV stream.
  • copying on the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment is performed while respecting the original copy control information set in the broadcast system that transmits the data. Duplicate control states can be eliminated.
  • the copyright protection function of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment has been described as being performed based on the copy control information included in the MPT.
  • the table for arranging copy control information is not limited to MPT.
  • Example 2 of the present invention will be described. Note that the configuration, processing, effects, and the like in this embodiment are the same as those in the first embodiment unless otherwise specified. For this reason, below, the difference between a present Example and Example 1 is mainly demonstrated, and in order to avoid duplication about a common point, description is abbreviate
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus of this embodiment is a television receiver that supports both the MMT system and the MPEG2-TS system as the media transport system.
  • FIG. 24 is a block diagram illustrating an example of an internal configuration of the broadcast receiving apparatus 800.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 includes a main control unit 801, a system bus 802, a ROM 803, a RAM 804, a storage unit 810, a LAN communication unit 821, an expansion interface unit 824, a digital interface unit 825, a first tuner / demodulation unit 831, a second tuner / Demodulator 832, MMT decode processor 841, MPEG2-TS decode processor 842, video synthesizer 861, monitor 862, video output 863, audio synthesizer 864, speaker 865, audio output 866, operation input 870 , Is composed.
  • Main control unit 801, system bus 802, ROM 803, RAM 804, storage unit 810, expansion interface unit 824, digital interface unit 825, monitor unit 862, video output unit 863, speaker unit 865, audio output unit 866, operation input unit 870, Are the main control unit 101, system bus 102, ROM 103, RAM 104, storage (storage) unit 110, expansion interface unit 124, digital interface unit 125, monitor unit 162, video output unit 163 in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the first embodiment.
  • the speaker unit 165, the audio output unit 166, the operation input unit 170, and the like have the same functions, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
  • the first tuner / demodulator 831 receives a broadcast wave of a broadcast service that employs MMT as a media transport method via an antenna (not shown), and a service desired by the user based on the control of the main controller 801. (Tune to) the selected channel. Further, the first tuner / demodulator 831 demodulates the received broadcast signal to acquire an MMT data string, and outputs it to the MMT decode processor 841.
  • the second tuner / demodulation unit 832 receives a broadcast wave of a broadcast service that employs MPEG2-TS as a media transport method via an antenna (not shown), and receives a user's request based on the control of the main control unit 801. Tune in (tune to) the channel of the service you want to use. Further, the second tuner / demodulation unit 832 demodulates the received broadcast signal to obtain an MPEG2-TS data sequence, and outputs the MPEG2-TS data sequence to the MPEG2-TS decode processing unit 842.
  • the MMT decoding processing unit 841 receives the MMT data sequence output from the first tuner / demodulation unit 831 and, based on the control signal included in the MMT data sequence, a video data sequence, an audio data sequence, which are real-time presentation elements, Separation processing, decoding processing, and the like of the character super data sequence and the caption data sequence are performed.
  • the MMT decoding processing unit 841 includes a separation unit 132, a video decoder 141, a video color gamut conversion unit 142, an audio decoder 143, a character super decoder 144, a subtitle decoder 145, a subtitle synthesis unit 146, in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the first embodiment.
  • the MMT decoding processing unit 841 can perform various processes described in the first embodiment. The details of the various processes are the same as those described in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.
  • the MPEG2-TS decoding processing unit 842 receives the MPEG2-TS data sequence output from the second tuner / demodulation unit 832 and, based on the control signal included in the MPEG2-TS data sequence, video data that is a real-time presentation element Separation processing, decoding processing, and the like of columns, audio data sequences, character super data sequences, subtitle data sequences, and the like are performed.
  • the MPEG2-TS decoding processing unit 842 has the same function as an IRD (Integrated Receiver Decoder) unit of a conventional television receiver that receives broadcast waves of a broadcasting service that employs MPEG2-TS as a media transport method. Detailed description is omitted.
  • IRD Integrated Receiver Decoder
  • the video composition unit 861 receives the video information, subtitle information, and application information output from the MMT decode processing unit 841, and the video information, subtitle information, and application information output from the MPEG2-TS decode processing unit 842. Processing such as selection and / or superimposition is performed as appropriate.
  • the video composition unit 861 includes a video RAM (not shown), and the monitor unit 862 and the like are driven based on video information and the like input to the video RAM.
  • the video composition unit 861 performs scaling processing, EPG screen information superimposition processing, and the like as necessary based on the control of the main control unit 801.
  • the voice synthesis unit 164 receives the voice information output from the MMT decoding processing unit 841 and the voice information output from the MPEG2-TS decoding processing unit 842, and appropriately performs processing such as selection and / or mixing.
  • the LAN communication unit 821 is connected to the Internet 200 via the router device 200r, and transmits / receives data to / from each server device and other communication devices on the Internet 200. Also, an MMT data string (or part thereof) and an MPEG2-TS data string (or part thereof) of a program transmitted via a communication line are acquired, and the MMT decoding processing unit 841 and MPEG2-TS are appropriately selected. The data is output to the decoding processing unit 842.
  • the current date and the current time can be displayed on the EPG screen and various setting screens.
  • the information on the current date and current time is transmitted by MH-TOT or the like in a broadcast service that employs MMT as a media transport system, and MPEG- in a broadcast service that employs MPEG2-TS as a media transport system. 2 is transmitted by TOT (Time Offset Table) or the like provided in SI (Service Information) defined in the system.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 can acquire information on the current date and current time by referring to the MH-TOT and the TOT.
  • the video composition unit 861 mainly selects the video information output from the MMT decoding processing unit 841, the information on the current date and the current time acquired from the MH-TOT is displayed.
  • the video composition unit 861 mainly selects the video information and the like output from the MPEG2-TS decode processing unit 842, the information related to the current date and the current time obtained from the TOT is superposed on the video information. What is necessary is just to control so that it may superimpose on image
  • control is performed so that information relating to the current date and the current time acquired from the TOT is superimposed on the video information and the like. That is, control is performed so as to superimpose the current time information provided by the broadcast service adopting MPEG2-TS as the media transport method on the content of the broadcast service adopting MMT as the media transport method.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 of the present embodiment By performing the control, the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 of the present embodiment always displays the current time information acquired by referring to the TOT when displaying the current time. Therefore, even when switching between a broadcast service that employs MMT as the media transport method and a broadcast service that employs MPEG2-TS as the media transport method, the user feels a visual discomfort due to inconsistencies in the display of the current time. Can be prevented.
  • FIG. 26A shows an example of selection control of the current time information reference source in accordance with the reception status of each broadcast service in the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 of the present embodiment.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 of this embodiment when the broadcast service adopting MPEG2-TS as a media transport system is in a state capable of being received, the current time information is always obtained by referring to the TOT.
  • the MH-TOT can be used only when the broadcast service using MPEG2-TS as a media transport system cannot be received and when the broadcast service using MMT as a media transport system can be received. To obtain the current time information.
  • the current time information provided by the broadcast service adopting MMT as the media transport method is superimposed on the content of the broadcast service adopting MPEG2-TS as the media transport method. Even if controlled, the same effect as described above can be obtained.
  • the current time information can be corrected by referring to the “delta” parameter of the time information in the TMCC extended information area. Is possible.
  • the MH-TOT or TOT transmitted by each broadcast service constituting the network is There is a possibility that the transmission side system has an error due to a malfunction or a transmission error.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 of the present embodiment as a countermeasure against the error of the MH-TOT or TOT, when it is determined that the MH-TOT or TOT acquired from the service being received has an error, Has a function to update the time information of the built-in clock by acquiring the MH-TOT or TOT from any broadcasting service of any other network or referring to the current time information And
  • FIG. 26B shows an example of update processing of current time information when the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 of this embodiment receives a broadcast service that employs MPEG2-TS as the media transport method. Even when a broadcast service that employs MMT as the media transport method is being received, the same processing as that shown in FIG.
  • the MPEG2 of the broadcast service (the broadcast service adopting MPEG2-TS as the media transport system) currently being received by the reception function execution unit 1102 is received.
  • -A TOT is acquired from the TS data string (S301), and the current time information is acquired by referring to the acquired TOT (S302).
  • the reception function execution unit 1102 performs a process of comparing the current time information acquired in the process of S302 with the time information of the built-in clock.
  • the reception function execution unit 1102 When the difference between the current time information acquired in the process of S302 and the time information of the internal clock is within a predetermined value (for example, within 3 minutes) (S303: Yes), the reception function execution unit 1102 The time information of the built-in clock is updated using the current time information acquired in the process of S302 (S306).
  • the reception function execution unit 1102 acquires the TOT from the MPEG2-TS data sequence of another broadcast service in the same network, or any other network MH-TOT is acquired from the MMT data string of the broadcast service (broadcast service adopting MMT as the media transport system) (S304), and further, current time information is acquired from the acquired TOT or MH-TOT (S305). .
  • the reception function execution unit 1102 may perform the comparison process of S303 again using the current time information acquired in the process of S305.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 of this embodiment determines that the MH-TOT or TOT acquired from the service being received has an error, the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 receives another broadcast service from the same network or other By acquiring MH-TOT or TOT from any broadcasting service of the network and referring to the current time information, it is possible to update the time information of the built-in clock.
  • the current time information in which the difference from the time information of the built-in clock is within the predetermined range cannot be acquired by repeating the processing of S304 to S305, such as at the time of initial setting after factory shipment, it is acquired in the processing of S302.
  • the time information of the built-in clock may be set again with the current time information. In this way, it is possible to cope with a case where there is an error in the time information side of the built-in clock of the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 of this embodiment.
  • Event schedule information of a broadcast service that employs MMT as a media transport method is transmitted by MH-EIT or the like.
  • event schedule information of a broadcast service that employs MPEG2-TS as a media transport system is transmitted by an EIT (Event Information Table) included in SI defined in the MPEG-2 system. Therefore, in general, when displaying video information or the like provided by a broadcast service adopting MMT as a media transport method, event schedule information (MH-EIT) of the broadcast service adopting the MMT is displayed. ) Can be obtained, and when displaying video information provided by a broadcast service employing MPEG2-TS as a media transport method, event schedule information of the broadcast service employing MPEG2-TS is displayed. (EIT) can be acquired.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 displays the video information provided by the broadcast service adopting the MMT as the media transport system, or the MPEG2-TS as the media transport system. Even when displaying video information and the like provided by a broadcasting service that adopts the above, both the MH-EIT and the EIT can be acquired, improving usability for the user.
  • FIG. 27A shows an example of an EPG screen in the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 of the present embodiment.
  • an EPG screen 162i is an EPG screen created based on the MH-EIT of a broadcast service adopting MMT as a media transport system, and is “M1 TV”, “M2 broadcast”, “M3 channel”, “M4TV”. ”,“ TV M5 ”, and the like are broadcast station names of broadcast services that employ MMT as the media transport method.
  • the EPG screen 162j is an EPG screen created based on the EIT of a broadcast service that employs MPEG2-TS as a media transport system.
  • “T6 TV”, “T7 Broadcast”, “T8 Channel”, “T9TV” “TV TA” and the like are broadcast station names of broadcast services that employ MPEG2-TS as the media transport system.
  • an initial screen of the EPG screen (shown) (Omitted) is displayed.
  • the initial screen of the EPG screen is an EPG screen created based on the MH-EIT of a broadcasting service that employs MMT as a media transport method.
  • Detailed information on the broadcast program of each channel “Nearby current time” is displayed.
  • the user desires to check the detailed information of the broadcast program of each channel “October 9th” of “October 9, 2014”, and operates the remote controller (not shown) to instruct to update the EPG screen.
  • the EPG screen 162i is displayed.
  • the EPG A screen 162j is displayed.
  • the initial screen of the EPG screen created based on the EIT of the broadcast service adopting MPEG2-TS as the media transport system ie, “October 7, 2014 ”17: 00 ⁇ ” (detailed information on the broadcast program of each channel), but the same time zone as the EPG screen 162i displayed immediately before (ie, “October 9, 2014” ])
  • the EPG screen 162i displayed immediately before ie, “October 9, 2014”
  • the above-described control allows the user to continuously check detailed information regarding broadcast programs on the same day and the same time zone of a plurality of networks with different media transport methods by a simple operation. That is, the usability of the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 is improved.
  • FIG. 27B is a diagram showing an example different from the above-described EPG screen in the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 of the present embodiment.
  • the EPG screen 162k shows a state where the EPG screen 162i shown in FIG. 27A is scrolled in the channel direction (lateral direction) by operating the remote controller (not shown). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 27B, the channel information and media created based on the MH-EIT of the broadcast service adopting MMT as the media transport method by scrolling the EPG screen in the channel direction (lateral direction).
  • Channel information created based on EIT of a broadcast service that employs MPEG2-TS as a transport method is displayed seamlessly on the same time axis.
  • the user creates based on the EIT of the broadcast service adopting MPEG2-TS as the media transport method while the user confirms the channel information created based on the MH-EIT of the broadcast service adopting MMT as the media transport method. Even when it is desired to confirm the channel information, an instruction to switch the network by operating a remote controller (not shown) can be made unnecessary. Furthermore, the user can simultaneously confirm detailed information regarding broadcast programs in the same day and same time zone of a plurality of networks having different media transport methods. That is, the usability of the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 is improved.
  • Example 3 of the present invention will be described. Note that the configuration, effects, and the like in this example are the same as those in Example 1 or Example 2 unless otherwise specified. Therefore, in the following, differences between the present embodiment and the first embodiment or the second embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of common points will be omitted as much as possible to avoid duplication. In the present embodiment, a cooperative operation between the broadcast receiving device and the portable information terminal will be described.
  • a transmission system equivalent to a data carousel transmission system performed in general digital broadcasting is possible.
  • the receiver can acquire necessary data at an arbitrary point in the broadcast time by repeatedly transmitting data.
  • Data is encapsulated in an asynchronous MPU and transmitted on a file basis.
  • Control information related to application transmission may be transmitted using a data transmission message. It is assumed that a data directory management table, a data asset management table, and a data content management table are stored in the data transmission message.
  • the path name is specified in the application description such as HTML5 for the files that make up the application.
  • the path name may be described by a combination of a directory node name and a file name.
  • a node tag is defined as an identifier integrating a directory node and a file, and is applied as information for linking each table.
  • the receiver whose path name is specified by the application obtains the node tag of the file with the specified path name from the data directory management table in the data transmission message.
  • the component tag, download ID, MPU sequence number, and item ID of the asset to which the item having the obtained node tag is transmitted are also obtained from the data asset management table in the data transmission message.
  • the location information of the asset having the obtained component tag is obtained by referring to the MP table, and the asset to which the file is actually transmitted is specified.
  • the unit of repetitive transmission of the file corresponding to the carousel can be uniquely identified by the obtained download ID and the download ID described in the multi-extension header area of the MMTP packet that transmits the item.
  • the item having the obtained MPU sequence number and item ID can be acquired as a desired file.
  • the node tag is unique within the data transmission message, the MPU sequence number is unique within the asset, and the item ID is unique within the service provider.
  • the receiver can detect that the file constituting the application has been updated by constantly monitoring the data asset management table, and can always present the application in the latest state. Update detection may be possible at each stage: asset unit, MPU unit, file unit.
  • the component tag, MPU sequence number, and item ID of the updated file are obtained from the data asset management table. Similar to the above-described file acquisition, an asset can be specified by referring to the MP table, and an item having the obtained MPU sequence number and item ID can be acquired as a desired updated file.
  • the data content management table provides file configuration information as data content in order to realize flexible and effective cache control.
  • a unit (for example, a page) to be presented in the data content is defined as a presentation unit, and indicates information such as which item is related and which presentation unit is linked in that unit. With these pieces of information, it is possible to know other items included in the same presentation unit as the first requested item. It is also possible to obtain information such as cache control for each presentation unit. As a result, the receiver can reduce the acquisition time of the entire page and preferentially cache the next page.
  • asset_type As described above, applications and data are also transmitted as assets, but the asset type (asset_type) is described in the MP table (MPT: see FIG. 7B).
  • the types of assets are summarized in FIG.
  • the acquisition destination of the application or the asset of data used in the application may be a broadcast wave or via a communication line.
  • An example of the data structure of the location information (MMT_general_location_info) describing the acquisition source of the asset is shown in FIG. 30A. In this location information, the type (location_type) of the acquisition destination and the acquisition destination are described. The meaning of the type of acquisition destination is shown in FIG. 30B.
  • Application presentation is also performed in the area defined in the layout setting table (LCT: see FIG. 17A), similarly to broadcast video and audio. Which area is used is specified by a layout number (layout_number) and an area number (region_number) in the MPU presentation area specification descriptor (MPU_Presentation_Region_Descriptor).
  • layout_number layout number
  • region_number area number
  • MPU_Presentation_Region_Descriptor MPU presentation area specification descriptor
  • the application control information of the present embodiment is an application (hereinafter referred to as broadcast) that is linked to a broadcast service for a television receiver or the like (in the present embodiment, the broadcast receiver 100) in the broadcast communication cooperation function supported by the broadcast receiver 100. It is information intended to inform the existence of the application and sometimes to instruct its control. It is assumed that the application control information in this embodiment is transmitted in the format of the MH-application information table (MH-AIT: see FIG. 6B) in the broadcasting system.
  • MH-AIT see FIG. 6B
  • the broadcast cooperative application operates only in a broadcast reception state based on a control signal such as start / end included in a broadcast signal, and is a broadcast managed app that is allowed to access a broadcast resource based on the control signal.
  • MH-AIT is stored in the M2 section message (see FIG. 6A) and transmitted.
  • An example of the data structure of the MH-AIT is shown in FIG. 32A.
  • the format of the application to be controlled by the MH-AIT is indicated by the “application_type (application format)” parameter.
  • the application format assignment is shown in FIG. 32B.
  • a control code for controlling the state of the application is indicated by an “application_control_code (application control code)” parameter.
  • the application control code may be defined for each application format. When there is no specification for each application format, it is used in the meaning of FIG. 32C.
  • the application is identified by an application identifier (application_identifier).
  • application_identifier An example of the data structure of the application identifier is shown in FIG. 32D.
  • the application identifier is a value that uniquely defines each application and is defined for each application format.
  • the application identifier may be composed of an organization identification (organization_id) for identifying a business operator and an application identification (application_id) assigned to each business operator.
  • organization_id organization identification
  • application_id application identification
  • the same value may be reused for different applications by separating the time, but in this case, the expiration date of the cache of the application (MH-cache information descriptor: see FIG. 6D) is considered.
  • MH-cache information descriptor see FIG. 6D
  • FIG. 6C and FIG. 6D list the descriptors of this broadcasting system. Details of the main ones related to MH-AIT will be described below.
  • MH-application descriptor One MH-application descriptor is necessarily arranged for each application in the application information descriptor loop of MH-AIT.
  • An example of the data structure of the MH-application descriptor is shown in FIG.
  • the “application_profile (application profile)” parameter indicates an application profile of a receiver that can execute the target application. If the receiver implements this profile, it indicates that it has the ability to execute the target application. The contents of the profile are defined for each application format.
  • the MH-AIT Common Descriptor Loop or the MH-AIT Common Descriptor Loop is used for the purpose of indicating a transmission protocol such as broadcasting / communication and the location information of the application depending on the transmission protocol.
  • the same number of transmission protocol labels as application descriptors are arranged.
  • An example of the data structure of the MH-transmission protocol descriptor is shown in FIG. 34A.
  • the “protocol_id (protocol identification)” parameter sets the protocol for transmitting the target application.
  • the meaning of protocol identification is shown in FIG. 34B.
  • supplementary information defined for each protocol identification is stored in “selector_byte (selector area)”.
  • FIG. 34C An example of the data structure of the selector area in the case of HTTP / HTTPS transmission and MMT non-timed transmission is shown in FIG. 34C. It is assumed that information on the URL for acquiring the target application can be obtained by the “URL_base_byte (URL base)” parameter, the “URL_extension_byte (URL extension)” parameter, and the like.
  • the MH-Simple Application Location Descriptor is intended to indicate the details of the application acquisition destination, and is always one for each application in the MH-AIT Application Information Descriptor Loop. Shall be placed.
  • An example of the data structure of the MH-simple application location descriptor is shown in FIG.
  • the “initial_path_byte (application URL)” parameter indicates a URL that is an entry point of the target application. It may be indicated by a relative path whose root is a location where the target application can be acquired, described in the transmission protocol descriptor.
  • the MH-application boundary authority setting descriptor is for setting the application boundary and setting the broadcasting resource access authority for each area (URL).
  • One or more are arranged in the application information descriptor loop of the AIT. When this descriptor is not arranged, the application boundary is infinite, and access to all broadcast resources is permitted.
  • An example of the data structure of the MH-application boundary authority setting descriptor is shown in FIG.
  • the “permission_bitmap (access authority bitmap)” parameter whether or not each broadcast resource is accessible is configured by a bitmap for each function.
  • the “managed_URL_byte (access authority management area setting information)” parameter indicates the URL of the area to which the access authority setting indicated by the access bitmap is applied.
  • the access authority management area setting information is specified in the domain or its subdirectory.
  • the MH-Activation Priority Information Descriptor is intended to specify the application activation priority, and is arranged at most for each application in the MH-AIT application information descriptor loop. Shall. However, this descriptor may be arranged only in the application information description indicating that the application control code instructs the automatic activation of the application (such as “AUTOSTART”). Further, when this descriptor is not arranged, it may be considered that the priority is lowest including data broadcasting. An example of the data structure of the MH-activation priority information descriptor is shown in FIG. The “autostart_priority (activation priority)” parameter indicates the activation priority of the target application among the data broadcasting and all applications linked to the currently received service.
  • the MH-cache information descriptor is intended to be used for cache control when resources constituting an application are cached and held when application reuse is assumed. In the application information descriptor loop of MH-AIT, a maximum of one is arranged for each application. If this descriptor is not arranged, the receiver may delete the resource that does not hold the resource that constitutes the application when the application ends.
  • An example of the data structure of the MH-cache information descriptor is shown in FIG. 38A.
  • the “cache_priority (cache priority)” parameter indicates the priority for holding the cache of the target application. The higher the value, the higher the priority. When the cache capacity is exceeded, the cache is deleted in units of applications based on this information. If no priority is specified, this parameter is set to “0xFF”.
  • the “application_version (application version)” parameter indicates the version number of the target application.
  • the receiver stores the application version corresponding to the cached application, and if the application version is updated when the application is subsequently started, a new URL is specified from the specified URL without using the application stored in the cache.
  • the application is acquired and used, and the contents of the cache are rewritten.
  • the “expire_date (cache expiration date)” parameter indicates the cache expiration date of the target application as the date in the lower 16 bits of the MJD.
  • the receiver can cache the target application until this expiration date. When the time limit is exceeded, it is deleted from the cache. In the case of an indefinite period, this parameter is set to “0xFFFF”. If this cache expiration parameter is not set, the operation stability of the application may be emphasized, and retention of the cache after the end of the program may be prohibited. In consideration of the convenience of the viewer, an indefinite cache You may hold
  • FIG. 38B shows an example of the data structure of the MH-application expiration date descriptor that describes the expiration date for each application. If this time limit is exceeded, use of the application is prohibited. Although a long-term cache is not allowed, it is possible to permit a form that is re-obtained and used during a certain period of time, thereby enabling various forms of application usage.
  • the MH-Probabilistic Application Delay Descriptor delays application control timing by a stochastically set delay amount assuming load distribution of server access for application acquisition.
  • a maximum of one is arranged for each application.
  • the control operation indicated in the control code is performed at the timing when a specific version of MH-AIT is first received.
  • An example of the data structure of the MH-stochastic application delay descriptor is shown in FIG.
  • the “range (delay time width)” parameter indicates the maximum delay time from the current time until application of the control code in seconds.
  • the “rate (dispersion number)” parameter indicates the number of stages of delay time until the control code to be set stochastically.
  • the receiver calculates the delay time using the formula “N ⁇ range ⁇ rate” based on the value “N” randomly selected from the integers “0” to “rate”, and receives the MH-AIT.
  • the control code is applied after being delayed by the delay time.
  • the “randomization_end_time (probabilistic application end time)” parameter indicates a time limit for performing the stochastic application delay process. When MH-AIT is received after the time indicated by this parameter, the control code is applied immediately.
  • the date is encoded with the lower 16 bits of MJD, and the time is encoded with JST hours, minutes and seconds using BCD 24 bits.
  • the MH-AIT of the present embodiment may further include parameters, descriptors, and the like different from those described above.
  • the application control unit 153 confirms the MH-AIT stored in the M2 section message ( S1001). If MH-AIT is not stored in the M2 section message, the automatic activation process may be terminated assuming that there is no broadcast cooperation application related to the selected channel. Next, the application format and application control code of each broadcast cooperative application described in the MH-AIT are confirmed (S1002). As a result of the process of S1002, when there is no broadcast cooperation application having the application control code of “automatic start (AUTOSTART)” (S1003: No), the automatic start process may be terminated. In this case, launcher processing can be performed again. This launcher processing will be described later.
  • next-priority broadcast cooperation app S1008
  • the automatic activation process may be terminated. If there is a next-priority broadcast cooperation app, the next-priority broadcast cooperation app is selected (S1009), and the processing of S1006 to S1007 is repeated.
  • step S1007 If it is determined in step S1007 that the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 satisfies the application profile described in the MH-application descriptor, the MH-transmission protocol descriptor of the MH-AIT related to the selected broadcast cooperative application is set. Confirmation is performed (S1010). As a result of the processing of S1010, when the selected broadcast cooperation application can be acquired by HTTP / HTTPS transmission by the protocol identification described in the MH-transmission protocol descriptor (S1011: Yes), the selection is further performed. The MH-Simple application location descriptor of the MH-AIT related to the broadcast cooperation application is confirmed (S1012), and the URL of the entry point of the selected broadcast cooperation application is acquired.
  • the LAN communication unit 121 is a server specified by the URL on the Internet 200 (in this embodiment, the service provider server 400).
  • a broadcast cooperation application distribution request is made (S1013).
  • the service provider server 400 that has received the distribution request distributes the requested broadcast cooperative app after appropriately performing authentication processing of the broadcast receiving device 100 or the like (S1014).
  • the broadcast receiving device 100 activates the received broadcast cooperative app in the browser unit 154 based on the control of the application control unit 153. Execute (S1018).
  • the authentication process of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 performed by the service provider server 400 may be a known process, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
  • the application control unit 153 confirms the DDM table and the DAM table stored in the data transmission message (S1015, S1016), and the selected broadcast cooperation application is transmitted in the procedure described in [Overview of application transmission method]. Identify assets. Further, when the broadcast cooperative app is acquired from the specified asset of the broadcast wave (S1017), the broadcast receiving device 100 activates the received broadcast cooperative app in the browser unit 154 based on the control of the application control unit 153. Is executed (S1018).
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can automatically start the broadcast cooperative application based on the MH-AIT transmitted by the broadcast wave.
  • the MH-AIT confirmation process in each of the processes of S1004, S1006, S1010, and S1012 may be performed by acquiring the MH-AIT from the broadcast wave each time and confirming the MH-AIT acquired in the process of S1001.
  • the AIT may be cached and the cached MH-AIT may be confirmed.
  • the operation sequence is merely an example, and different processing procedures may be used.
  • the application control unit 153 confirms the MH-AIT stored in the M2 section message ( S1101). If MH-AIT is not stored in the M2 section message, the automatic activation process may be terminated assuming that there is no broadcast cooperation application related to the selected channel. Next, the application format and application control code of each broadcast cooperative application described in the MH-AIT are confirmed (S1102). As a result of the processing of S1102, when there is a broadcast cooperative app having an application control code of “automatic start (AUTOSTART)” (S1103: Yes), the automatic start processing shown in FIG. 40A is possible.
  • the launcher process may be terminated. If there is at least one broadcast cooperative app that satisfies the application profile described in the MH-application descriptor (S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to the next process.
  • the broadcast receiving device 100 enables launcher processing of a broadcast cooperative application based on the MH-AIT transmitted by broadcast waves.
  • the MH-AIT confirmation process in each process of S1105, S1111 and S1113 may be performed by acquiring the MH-AIT from the broadcast wave each time, or confirming the MH-AIT acquired in the process of S1101. It may be cached and the cached MH-AIT may be confirmed.
  • the order of the processes of S1104 to S1106 and the processes of S1107 to S1110 may be interchanged. In this case, the profile confirmation processing in S1104 to S1106 may be performed only for the broadcast cooperative app selected in the processing in S1110.
  • the list of broadcast cooperative apps displayed in the processing of S1108 may be displayed only for those that can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the status of the application profile, or regardless of the status of the application profile. All broadcast cooperative apps may be displayed, and those that cannot be executed by the broadcast receiving device 100 may be invalidated.
  • the operation sequence is merely an example, and different processing procedures may be used.
  • the application control unit 153 checks the MH-AIT stored in the M2 section message, It is confirmed whether there is a broadcast cooperation application having an application control code of “automatic start (AUTOSTART)” or “executable (PRESENT)” (S1201 to S1206). Note that the processing of S1201 to S1206 may be the same as the processing of S1101 to S1106 shown in FIG. 40B.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 has not yet executed the broadcast cooperation application after the processing of S1201 to S2106 has been completed, and the normal broadcast program video is displayed on the monitor unit 162.
  • the user issues a start instruction for the data broadcast screen using a remote control or portable information terminal that can operate the broadcast receiving device 100 (S1207), (if the data broadcast screen can be displayed,
  • the data decoder 151 acquires a BML document or the like from the data carousel of the MMT data string, creates a data broadcast screen by interpreting the acquired BML document or the like, and displays it on the monitor unit 162 (S1208).
  • the entry related to the broadcast cooperative app is displayed.
  • a button is displayed. If there is no broadcast cooperation app that satisfies the application profile confirmed in the processing of S1206, the entry button related to the broadcast cooperation app may not be displayed or may be displayed in an invalid state. good.
  • the application control unit 153 When the user operates the remote controller or the portable information terminal to instruct selection (activation) of an entry button of a desired broadcast cooperation application displayed on the data broadcast screen (S1209), the application control unit 153 The broadcast cooperative app is selected based on the user's instruction (S1210), and the selected broadcast cooperative app is acquired (S1211 to S1218). Note that the processing of S1211 to S1218 may be the same as the processing of S1010 to S1017 shown in FIG. 40A. When the acquisition of the selected broadcast cooperative app is completed in the processing of S1211 to S1218, the display of the data broadcast screen is terminated (S1219), and the application control unit 153 activates the selected broadcast cooperative app (S1220).
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can perform a process of starting a broadcast cooperative application based on the MH-AIT transmitted by broadcast waves from the data broadcast screen.
  • the MH-AIT confirmation process in each process of S1205, S1211, and S1213 may be performed by acquiring the MH-AIT from the broadcast wave each time, or confirming the MH-AIT acquired in the process of S1201. It may be cached and the cached MH-AIT may be confirmed. Further, the order of the processes of S1204 to S1206 and the process of S1207 may be interchanged. Further, the process of S1219 may be performed immediately after the process of S1209.
  • the broadcast cooperation application, the data broadcast screen, the broadcast program video, and the like may be simultaneously displayed in the respective areas obtained by dividing the display area of the monitor unit 162 based on the description of the LCT without performing the process of S1219. good.
  • the operation sequence is merely an example, and different processing procedures may be used.
  • the MH-AIT file may be acquired from the server device (such as the broadcast station server 300).
  • a message such as “Please wait for a while” is displayed on the monitor unit 162. It may be displayed. Alternatively, in this case, a message for inquiring the user to cancel the execution of the broadcast cooperative app may be displayed.
  • the activation sequence of the broadcast cooperative application is not limited to the above three patterns, and may be activated by a different sequence.
  • the function of the broadcast communication cooperation service can be expanded by the cooperative operation between the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700.
  • the portable information terminal 700 can be used as a high-function remote controller for the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • the broadcast cooperation application can be executed on the portable information terminal 700, and for example, a service linked to the broadcast program being displayed on the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can be displayed on the portable information terminal 700.
  • the cooperation control application is activated on the portable information terminal 700, and operates on the portable information terminal 700.
  • the broadcast cooperation app to be operated is controlled by the cooperation control app.
  • FIG. 41A is an operation sequence diagram illustrating an example of an operation when the cooperation control application is activated on the portable information terminal 700. This figure shows a series of flows from when the portable information terminal 700 performs an authentication process with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 until a cooperative operation is possible. It is assumed that the cooperation control application is installed in the storage unit 710 of the portable information terminal 700 in advance as the cooperation control program 7002. If the cooperation control program 7002 is not installed, the cooperation control program 7002 is first installed.
  • the cooperation control execution unit 7102 of the portable information terminal 700 first performs communication on the network (cooperation operation). ) A search for possible television receivers is performed (S1302), and the search results are displayed on the display unit 741 as a list of television receivers (S1303).
  • the list of TV receivers displayed may include a list of records that have been linked with the portable information terminal 700 in the past and a list of records that have not been linked. It is desirable to be able to determine whether or not there is. Further, when a communicable television receiver cannot be found, the fact may be displayed and the process may be terminated.
  • the broadcast receiving device 100 When the user operates the operation unit 730 of the portable information terminal 700 to select a predetermined television receiver (broadcast receiving device 100 of the present embodiment) from the television receiver list (S1304), the broadcast receiving device 100 In the case where there is a history of performing a linking operation with the portable information terminal 700 in the past (S1305: Yes), authentication information related to the broadcast receiving device 100 (by the broadcast receiving device 100) from the authentication information storage area 7300 of the storage unit 710. The designated login name and password are read out (S1306), and the process proceeds to the next process.
  • the cooperation control execution unit 7102 provides login screen information to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • a request is transmitted (S1307).
  • the cooperation control execution unit 7102 receives the login screen information and displays the login screen on the display unit 741 (S1309). ). If the cooperation control application has login screen information related to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 in advance, the processing of S1307 to S1308 may be omitted.
  • the user inputs authentication information to the displayed login screen (S1310), the input authentication information is stored in the authentication information storage area 7300 of the storage unit 710, and the process proceeds to the next procedure.
  • the presence / absence of the history of the cooperative operation is determined by checking whether the authentication information related to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is stored in the authentication information storage area 7300 of the storage unit 710. It is also possible to use other methods.
  • the cooperation control execution unit 7102 transmits the authentication information read out in the process of S1306 or the authentication information input in the process of S1310 to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S1311).
  • the transmission process of the authentication information to the broadcast receiving device 100 may be performed via the LAN communication unit 721 and the router device 200r, or may be directly performed to the broadcast receiving device 100 via the NFC communication unit 723. .
  • the authentication information transmitted from the portable information terminal 700 is compared with the authentication information stored in the authentication information storage area 1300 of the storage unit 110 to determine whether the received authentication information is correct. Is confirmed (S1312). If the received authentication information is confirmed to be correct by the processing of S1312, information that can identify the mobile information terminal 700 is stored in the authentication information storage area 1300, and the authentication result (authentication OK) is stored in the mobile information terminal. It transmits to 700 (S1313). If the received authentication information is confirmed to be incorrect by the processing of S1312, the authentication result (authentication NG) is stored in the authentication information storage area 1300 without storing information that can identify the mobile information terminal 700. It transmits to the information terminal 700.
  • the display unit 741 displays a basic screen (for example, a high-function remote control screen) of the cooperation control application ( S1314).
  • the authentication result authentication NG
  • the operation of the cooperation control application is terminated without displaying the basic screen of the cooperation control application. In this case, it is desirable to display an error message or the like for informing that the authentication is NG.
  • FIGS. 40A to 40C may be performed after the above-described processing.
  • FIG. 41B is an operation sequence diagram illustrating an example of an operation when the cooperation control application is activated on the portable information terminal 700. This figure shows a series of flow until the cooperative operation becomes possible when the broadcast receiving device 100 that executes the start sequence of the broadcast cooperative app requests the start of the cooperative control app on the portable information terminal 700. It is shown.
  • the application control unit 153 checks the MH-AIT stored in the M2 section message, It is confirmed whether there is a broadcast cooperative app having an “automatic start (AUTOSTART)” application control code, and the broadcast cooperative app profile having the “automatic start” application control code is checked (S1401). Note that the processing of S1401 may be the same as the processing of S1001 to S1009 shown in FIG. 40A.
  • the portable terminal device (the portable information terminal 700 of the present embodiment) having a history of performing the linking operation with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 in the past is selected (S1402).
  • the process is directly performed as shown in FIG. The same processing as that described above may be performed.
  • the selection of the portable information terminal 700 by referring to the authentication information storage area 1300 may be performed by selecting a portable terminal device having the latest cooperative operation history or a portable terminal device that is used most frequently.
  • information regarding a plurality of portable terminal devices having a cooperative operation history may be displayed on the monitor unit 162 to allow the user to select a portable terminal device to cooperate with.
  • the cooperative control application may be activated by an operation on the portable information terminal 700 side. The processing in this case is as shown in FIG. 41A.
  • the cooperation control execution unit (not shown) of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 transmits a cooperation control application activation request to the portable information terminal 700 selected in the process of S1402 (S1403).
  • the cooperation control execution unit 7102 When the main control unit 701 of the portable information terminal 700 activates the cooperation control application (cooperation control execution unit 7102) in response to the cooperation control application activation request transmitted from the broadcast receiving device 100 (S1404), the cooperation control execution unit 7102 reads out the authentication information related to the broadcast receiving device 100 from the authentication information storage area 7300 of the storage unit 710, transmits the authentication information to the broadcast receiving device 100, authenticates the portable information terminal in the broadcast receiving device 100, etc. A series of processing is executed (S1405 to S1408). Note that the processing of S1405 to S1408 may be the same as the processing of S1306 and S1311 to S1313 shown in FIG. 41A.
  • the display unit 741 displays a basic screen (for example, a high-function remote control screen) of the cooperation control application ( (S1409), a response to the activation of the cooperation control application is transmitted to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S1410).
  • the authentication result authentication NG
  • the activation failure response of the cooperation control application is transmitted to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 without displaying the basic screen of the cooperation control application, and the operation of the cooperation control application is performed.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 When receiving the activation success response from the portable information terminal 700, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 acquires and activates the broadcast cooperative app selected in the process of S1401 (S1411). Note that the processing of S1411 may be the same as the processing of S1010 to S1018 shown in FIG. 40A.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 does not have to acquire and activate the broadcast cooperative app selected in the process of S1401.
  • the broadcast cooperation application is capable of an operation form that does not require a cooperation operation with the mobile terminal device, it may be activated in the operation form.
  • the processing in FIG. 41C may be performed after the above-described processing.
  • FIG. 41C is an operation sequence diagram illustrating an example of an operation when the broadcast cooperative app (terminal side) is activated on the portable information terminal 700 based on transmission information from the broadcast receiving device 100.
  • the application control unit 153 of the broadcast receiving device 100 next stores the MH-transmission protocol descriptor of the MH-AIT related to the terminal-side broadcast cooperation application. Confirmation is performed (S1502).
  • the terminal-side broadcast cooperative app can be acquired by HTTP / HTTPS transmission by the protocol identification described in the MH-transmission protocol descriptor (S1503: Yes)
  • the terminal further The MH-AIT MH-simplified application location descriptor of the MH-AIT related to the side broadcast cooperative application is confirmed (S1504), and the entry point URL of the terminal side broadcast cooperative application is acquired.
  • the URL information is transmitted to the portable information terminal 700 (S1505).
  • the portable information terminal 700 that has received the URL information from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 then sends the LAN communication unit 721 to the server (in this embodiment, the service provider server 400) designated by the URL on the Internet 200.
  • a distribution request for the terminal-side broadcast cooperation application is made (S1506).
  • the service provider server 400 that has received the distribution request after appropriately performing authentication processing of the portable information terminal 700 or the like, distributes the requested terminal-side broadcast cooperative app (S1507).
  • the terminal-side broadcast cooperative app is received from the service provider server 400 via the LAN communication unit 721
  • the portable information terminal 700 uses the browser engine based on the control of the started linkage control app (cooperation control execution unit 7102).
  • the terminal-side broadcast cooperative application received is activated (S1512).
  • the authentication process of the portable information terminal 700 performed by the service provider server 400 may be a known process, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
  • the broadcast receiving device 100 confirms the DDM table and the DAM table stored in the data transmission message (S1508, S1509), and performs the terminal-side broadcast cooperation in accordance with the procedure described in [Overview of application transmission method]. Identify assets to which the app is transmitted. Further, when the terminal-side broadcast cooperative app is acquired from the identified asset of the broadcast wave (S1510), the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 transmits the acquired terminal-side broadcast cooperative app to the portable information terminal 700 (S1511). Further, in the portable information terminal 700, the terminal-side broadcast cooperative app transmitted from the broadcast receiving device 100 is executed by the browser engine based on the control of the started linkage control app (cooperation control execution unit 7102) (S1512). ).
  • the terminal-side broadcast cooperative app acquired in S1510 is stored in the content information storage area 1200 of the storage unit 110, and the URL of the content information storage area 1200 is substituted in place of the terminal-side broadcast cooperative application transmission process in S1511. , And causing the portable information terminal 700 to access the content information storage area 1200 to cause the portable information terminal 700 to acquire the terminal-side broadcast cooperative app. If the portable information terminal 700 has a digital broadcast receiving function, the portable information terminal 700 may acquire the terminal-side broadcast cooperative app from the broadcast wave.
  • processing of S1502 to S1512 is executed with a terminal side broadcast cooperative application transmission request (not shown) transmitted from the portable information terminal 700 to the broadcast receiving device 100 as a trigger after S1501. Also good.
  • FIGS. 41A to 41C can be partially combined as appropriate. Furthermore, some operation steps can be appropriately reordered with other operation steps, reordering, simultaneous operation, Etc. are possible.
  • FIG. 42A is a screen display diagram illustrating an example of a basic screen of the cooperation control app displayed by the process of S1314 of FIG. 41A, the process of S1409 of FIG. 41B, and the like.
  • the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application has a function as a high-function remote controller corresponding to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application includes a power key 741a1, a network selection key (terrestrial digital, BS, CS) 741a2, a numeric key (1-12) 741a3, a volume UP / DOWN key 741a4, a channel UP / DOWN key 741a5, an input Switch key 741a6, program guide key 741a7, data key 741a8, linkage application key 741a9, menu key 741aa, return key 741ab, cursor key (up, down, left, right) 741ac, enter key 741ad, color key (blue, red, (Green, yellow) 741ae. Other operation keys may be further displayed.
  • the above-mentioned operation keys are easy to use if the same key arrangement / operation as the dedicated remote control attached to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is used.
  • the power key 741a1, the network selection key 741a2, the numeric key 741a3, and the like have the same functions as the operation keys of a general television remote controller, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
  • the cooperation application key 741a9 is an operation key prepared for the broadcast communication cooperation function of the present embodiment.
  • the broadcast cooperative application launcher can be requested by selecting the cooperative application key 741a9.
  • a data broadcast activation request can be made by selecting the data key 741a8.
  • the executable broadcast cooperation application can be selected by operating the cursor key 741ac and the enter key 741ad.
  • each broadcast cooperative application used in the broadcast cooperative system of this embodiment can be easily selected / It becomes possible to start.
  • the cooperative application key 741a9 or another operation key having a similar function may be provided in a dedicated remote controller attached to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • FIG. 42B is a screen display diagram illustrating an example of a basic screen of the cooperation control application displayed by the processing of S1314 of FIG. 41A, the processing of S1409 of FIG. 41B, and the like, which is an example different from FIG. 42A.
  • the basic screen 741b of the cooperation control application includes a message 741b1 during cooperation control and a cooperation control application operation screen 741b2. Other objects may be further displayed.
  • the cooperation control in-progress message 741b1 is a message display for notifying the user that the portable information terminal 700 is operating in cooperation with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • the cooperation control application operation screen 741b2 is an area where arbitrary screen display is performed by the cooperation control application, and detailed description thereof is omitted in the present embodiment.
  • the configuration in the cooperation control application operation screen 741b2 may be the same as that of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control app described above.
  • a sub screen or the like of the broadcast program displayed on the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may be displayed.
  • the user of the portable information terminal 700 can easily grasp that the portable information terminal 700 is in cooperation with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100. It becomes like this.
  • the cooperative control in-progress message 741b1 is not limited to character display, but may be symbol display, graphic display, or the like.
  • the message 741b1 during cooperation control may be substituted for the background color difference or the like.
  • FIG. 43A is a screen display diagram illustrating an example of a notification screen for notifying the user that there is a startable broadcast cooperation app in the broadcast receiving device 100 of the present embodiment.
  • the display of the broadcast program video is continued without starting either the data broadcast by the broadcast service or the broadcast cooperative app.
  • an icon 162m0 as shown in FIG. 43A is displayed on the broadcast program screen 162m in order to notify the user that there is a broadcast cooperative app that can be activated, the usability of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is improved. To do. In other words, by displaying the icon 162m0, it is possible to prevent the user from overlooking the presence of the broadcast cooperative app that can be activated.
  • the display position of the icon 162m0 may be an arbitrary position on the screen, but it is desirable that the icon 162m0 be a place that does not interfere with the viewing of the broadcast program. For example, the four corners of the screen.
  • the display position may be controlled by a description of LCT.
  • the icon 162m0 may be a character display as shown in FIG. 43A, or may be a symbol, a figure, or the like.
  • the icon 162m0 may be always displayed, or may be displayed for a predetermined time after the power is turned on or after channel switching. Alternatively, the program information, channel number, etc. may be displayed at the same time.
  • FIG. 43B is a screen display diagram illustrating an example of the broadcast cooperative app launcher displayed by the process of S1108 of FIG. 40B.
  • three broadcast cooperative apps that is, the cooperative app A, the cooperative app B, and the cooperative app C
  • the broadcast cooperative app launcher 162n1 is displayed at an arbitrary position on the broadcast program screen 162n, and further, an entry button 162n2 of the cooperative app A, an entry button 162n3 of the cooperative app B, and a cooperative app C are included in the broadcast cooperative app launcher 162n1.
  • the entry button 162n4 and the return button 162n5 are displayed.
  • the position where the broadcast cooperation application launcher 162n1 is displayed may be controlled by the description of the LCT.
  • the entry button 162n2 In the state where the broadcast cooperation application launcher 162n1 as shown in FIG. 43B is displayed, using the cursor key 741ac and the decision key 741ad of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application, the entry button 162n2, the entry button 162n3, the entry button 162n4, Or the like, the linked application A, the linked application B, the linked application C, or the like may be activated under the control of the application control unit 153.
  • the return button 162n5 When the return button 162n5 is selected, the display of the broadcast cooperative application launcher 162n1 may be terminated.
  • the frame color, internal color, shape, font, size, etc. of each entry button when displaying the broadcast cooperation application launcher 162n1 on the broadcast program screen 162n, the frame color, internal color, shape, font, size, etc. of each entry button according to the type and security status of each broadcast cooperation application, You may make it change a blinking condition etc. suitably.
  • the frame color of the entry button 162n2 when the cooperative application A is a broadcast managed application, the frame color of the entry button 162n2 is blue, and when the cooperative application B is a non-broadcast managed application, the frame color of the entry button 162n3 is yellow. If the cooperative application C is a general application, the frame color of the entry button 162n4 is changed to red.
  • the frame color of the entry button 162n2 is blue, and when it is determined that the cooperative application B is not always reliable for security, the entry button For example, the frame color of 162n3 is set to yellow, and the frame color of the entry button 162n4 is set to red when it is determined that the cooperative application C is dangerous in terms of security.
  • each entry button depending on the function and genre of the broadcast cooperative app or the expiration date of use of each broadcast cooperative app May be appropriately changed.
  • the frame color, internal color, shape, font, size, blinking status, etc. of each entry button may be changed as appropriate. .
  • the frame color of the entry button 162n2 is blue, and if the cooperative app B is being acquired, the entry button The frame color of 162n3 is set to yellow, and the frame color of the entry button 162n4 is set to red when the cooperative application C has not been acquired.
  • the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can easily grasp the types of broadcast cooperative apps that can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, the security status, and the like.
  • the broadcast cooperative app launcher 162n1 may not be displayed. Alternatively, in this case, a message such as “There is no usable application” may be displayed in the broadcast cooperation application launcher 162n1.
  • FIG. 44 is a screen display diagram illustrating an example of a data broadcast screen displayed by the processing of S1208 in FIG. 40C.
  • three broadcast cooperative apps that is, the cooperative app A, the cooperative app B, and the cooperative app C
  • the entry button 162o2 of the cooperation application A, the entry button 162o3 of the cooperation application B, and the entry button 162o4 of the cooperation application C are displayed at arbitrary positions on the data broadcast screen 162o.
  • the display positions of the program video 162o1, the entry buttons 162o2 to 162o4, and other contents on the data broadcast screen 162o may be controlled according to the description of the LCT after being grouped for each area.
  • the entry button 162o2 When the entry button 162o2, the entry button 162o3, the entry button 162o4, etc. are selected using the cursor key 741ac and the enter key 741ad on the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application on the data broadcast screen 162o as shown in FIG. While the display of the screen 162o is terminated, the cooperative application A, the cooperative application B, the cooperative application C, and the like may be activated under the control of the application control unit 153.
  • the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can easily grasp the types of broadcast cooperative apps that can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, the security status, and the like.
  • FIG. 45A is a screen display diagram illustrating an example of a broadcast cooperative application execution screen displayed in the process of S1018 of FIG. 40A, the process of S1119 of FIG. 40B, the process of S1220 of FIG. 40C, and the like. It is assumed that the broadcast cooperative application of the present embodiment has graphics performance and effect performance based on HTML5 description, and can display an overlay on the broadcast program screen on the monitor unit 162.
  • a broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1 that displays information such as weather forecasts and news is displayed in an overlay at an arbitrary position on the broadcast program screen 162p.
  • the display position of the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1 may be controlled by the description of the LCT.
  • the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1 includes a first main object 162p2, a second main object 162p3, a third main object 162p4, a background object 162p5, and the like. Other objects may be further displayed.
  • the execution of the broadcast cooperation application is terminated and the data broadcast screen is displayed. It is possible to transition to Further, by selecting the cooperation application key 741a9 on the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application, it is possible to end the execution of the broadcast cooperation application and return to the display of only the broadcast program screen 162p.
  • the processing may be realized by different operation keys.
  • the transparency of the broadcast cooperative application unit 162p1 is changed by operating each operation key on the basic screen 741a of the cooperative control application in a state where the broadcast cooperative application unit 162p1 is displayed as an overlay on the broadcast program screen 162p. It shall be possible.
  • the change processing of the transparency may be performed collectively for the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1, or the first main object 162p2, the second main object 162p3, the third main object 162p4, and the background object 162p5 are respectively performed. It may be performed alone. It may be performed for each predetermined group (for example, a plurality of objects existing in the same graphics layer).
  • the transparency changing process For example, an object is selected using the cursor key 741ac of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application, and the transparency of the object is increased with the “blue” key of the color key 741ae. Use the “Yellow” key to decrease the transparency of the object.
  • the transparency changing process may be performed using different operation keys. If the entire broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1 is collectively set to 100% transparency, the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1 can be temporarily hidden. For example, when an emergency broadcast is distributed by a broadcast wave, it is possible to display only the broadcast program screen of the emergency broadcast on the monitor unit 162 with the entire broadcast cooperation application unit as 100% transparency.
  • the CM detection unit detects that the broadcast program has changed from the main video to the CM video, and the entire broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1 is collectively set to 100% transparency (or to clarify the broadcast program video). It may be controlled so that the transparency can be confirmed).
  • the “layer_order” parameter of the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1 is controlled to move the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1 to the back of the broadcast program screen 162p.
  • the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1 may be temporarily hidden.
  • the video display state on the monitor unit 162 is the same as that when the entire broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1 is set to 100% transparency.
  • FIG. 45B is a screen display diagram illustrating an example different from the above-described broadcast cooperation application execution screen displayed in the process of S1018 of FIG. 40A, the process of S1119 of FIG. 40B, the process of S1220 of FIG. 40C, and the like.
  • the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p6 that introduces the recommended program is displayed in an overlay at an arbitrary position on the broadcast program screen 162p.
  • the display position of the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p6 may be controlled by the description of the LCT.
  • the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p6 displays first recommended program information 162p7, second recommended program information 162p8, third recommended program information 162p9, and the like. Further, more recommended program information may be displayed by scrolling, switching pages, or the like.
  • Each recommended program information may be information on a program recommended in relation to a broadcast program being displayed (broadcast program screen 162p), or information on a program recommended based on a user's viewing history. It may be information on a program that is a hot topic on the Internet or the like. It may be information on a recommended program sent by a friend of the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 to the user. Further, the recommended program may be a program transmitted by a broadcast wave of a digital broadcasting service, or a VOD (Video On Demand) program distributed from each server device on the Internet 200. good. An information screen such as a homepage prepared in a server device on the Internet 200 may be used.
  • the first recommended program information 162p7 and the second recommended program are used by using the cursor key 741ac and the decision key 741ad of the basic screen 741a of the cooperative control application in a state where the broadcast cooperative application unit 162p6 is overlaid on the broadcast program screen 162p.
  • the information 162p8 By selecting the information 162p8, the third recommended program information 162p9, etc., the video of each program recommended by them is displayed on the monitor unit 162.
  • the transparency of the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p6 may be changed on the broadcast cooperation application execution screen shown in FIG. 45B as described above.
  • FIG. 45C is a screen display diagram illustrating an example of a case where a program video recommended by the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p6 that introduces a recommended program is displayed.
  • the first recommended program information 162p7 of the broadcast cooperative application unit 162p6 is selected using the cursor key 741ac and the enter key 741ad of the basic screen 741a of the cooperative control application, the first recommended program information 162p7 is recommended to the monitor unit 162.
  • the program video 162pa of the program to be played is displayed.
  • the program video 162pa may be capable of being paused, time-designated jumps, and the like by a user operating the operation terminal.
  • the original broadcast program screen 162p may be displayed at an arbitrary position in the PIP (Picture In Picture) format or the like.
  • the display position of the original broadcast program screen 162p in the PIP format or the like may be controlled by the description of the LCT. In this case, it may be possible to change which of the recommended program's program video 162pa and the original broadcast program screen 162p is the main screen by the user's operation on the operation terminal.
  • the size of the window of the original broadcast program screen 162p may be adjusted by a user operation on the operation terminal.
  • an icon display 162pb indicating that the program video 162pa of the recommended program is a video displayed by selecting any recommended program information displayed in the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p6 is displayed at an arbitrary position on the screen. If it is displayed, it is possible to improve user convenience.
  • FIG. 45D is a screen display diagram illustrating an example different from the above-described broadcast cooperation application execution screen displayed in the process of S1018 of FIG. 40A, the process of S1119 of FIG. 40B, the process of S1220 of FIG. 40C, and the like.
  • a broadcast cooperation application unit 162pc serving as a portal for an SNS (Social Networking Service) service is displayed in an overlay at an arbitrary position on the broadcast program screen 162p.
  • the display position of the broadcast cooperation application unit 162pc may be controlled by the description of the LCT.
  • the broadcast cooperation application unit 162pc displays an entry button 162pd for the first SNS service, an entry button 162pe for the second SNS service, an entry button 162pf for the third SNS service, and the like. Further, many SNS service entry buttons may be displayed by scrolling, switching pages, or the like.
  • the second SNS service entry button 162pd By selecting the entry button 162pe of the SNS service, the entry button 162pf of the third SNS service, etc., the functions assigned to the entry buttons such as the chat function, the bulletin board function, and the Internet telephone function are validated. Thereby, it is possible to enjoy the broadcast program being displayed (broadcast program screen 162p) while exchanging information with others.
  • the basic screen 741a of the cooperative control application on the portable information terminal 700 may be changed to a character input screen such as a software keyboard or a voice input screen for chatting or bulletin board writing by voice input. good.
  • a cooperation function between the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700 is used to further synchronize with CM broadcast timing.
  • the related CM application may be presented on both the broadcast receiving device 100 and the portable information terminal 700.
  • the broadcast cooperative app confirms whether the user of the broadcast receiving device 100 has subscribed to the pay service, and according to the result, the broadcast receiving device 100 and / or the portable information terminal 700 is used. It is also possible to change the display of.
  • the effects described with reference to FIGS. 45A and 45B can be obtained regardless of which broadcast cooperation application is executed.
  • FIG. 46 is broadcasted by confirming the application profile described in the MH-Application Descriptor of the MH-AIT obtained in S1007 in FIG. 40A, S1106 in FIG. 40B, S1206 in FIG. 40C, and the like. It is a screen display figure which shows an example of an error display screen when it is judged that execution of a cooperation application is not possible. This may be displayed when there is a shortage in the profile of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 or when acquisition of the MH-AIT has failed.
  • an error such as the confirmation result of the application profile that is not possible to execute the broadcast cooperative application is indicated.
  • the message 162q1 is displayed. For example, as a result of checking the application profile, if a predetermined optional function is insufficient on the television receiver side, the fact is displayed in the error message 162q1.
  • An error code and a guidance (URL, etc.) on the homepage of the television receiver manufacturer describing the error code may be displayed.
  • the connection status of the network is confirmed in advance.
  • the acquisition of the broadcast cooperation application may be performed due to incomplete LAN cable connection or the like. If not possible, this is displayed in the error message 162q1.
  • the error message 162q1 may be displayed even when the network connection is established but the error situation is inferior and the broadcast cooperative app cannot be acquired correctly.
  • the error message 162q1 may be displayed when the broadcast cooperative app is being acquired and the broadcast cooperative app is not yet ready to be executed.
  • the error message 162q1 may also be used when the reception status of the broadcast wave is not stable and information such as MH-AIT can be received in the middle, but information such as MH-AIT cannot be received midway. May be displayed. In such a case, if the broadcast cooperation application acquired from each server device is cached as it is, it can be used as it is after the reception state of the broadcast wave is recovered.
  • an error message 162q1 is displayed to confirm that the latest TV receiver firmware is to be checked or updated.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may automatically check or update the latest firmware.
  • the broadcast cooperative application can be executed by adding paid optional hardware or optional software to the television receiver, a guide to the paid optional hardware or optional software may be displayed. good.
  • the error message 162q1 may be displayed not on the broadcast receiving device 100 but on the portable information terminal 700.
  • FIG. 47 is a screen display diagram illustrating an example of a broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) execution screen displayed in the process of S1512 of FIG. 41C. 47 includes a main window 741c1, a sub window 741c2, a selection marker 741c3, cursor keys 741c4 and 741c5, an explanation display unit 741c6, and an end button 741c7. Other objects may be further added.
  • the broadcast cooperative app (terminal side) executed on the portable information terminal 700 is an application for confirming the details of the broadcast program being displayed on the broadcast receiving device 100.
  • the main window 741c1 displays the same video as the broadcast program screen displayed on the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, and the subwindow 741c2 displays an enlarged video at a position specified by the selection marker 741c3. It is assumed that the position of the selection marker 741c3 can be changed by selecting the cursor keys 741c4 and 741c5.
  • the comment display section 714c6 displays comment captions regarding the broadcast program being displayed on the main window 741c1, comments posted by other users regarding the broadcast program, and the like.
  • the end button 741c7 is a button for ending the operation of the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side).
  • FIG. 48A is a diagram showing an example of detailed information 162a1 of each broadcast program on the EPG screen 162a in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, which is different from the description of the first embodiment.
  • the program is a broadcast program for which a broadcast cooperation application that can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment is prepared.
  • a mark 162a5 or the like symbolized “Linkage” may be displayed.
  • information (such as an acquisition URL) regarding the broadcast cooperative app may be displayed in the detailed description area 162a3.
  • the mark 162a5 or the like symbolized “Linkage” displayed in the title area 162a2 indicates that, as a result of the confirmation of the application profile, even if a broadcast cooperative app is prepared for the broadcast program, If execution at 100 is not possible, it may not be displayed.
  • a mark 162a5 symbolized “Linkage” displayed in the title area 162a2 and indicating the broadcast program for which the executable broadcast cooperation application is prepared is further displayed on the mobile terminal device (the mobile information terminal 700). Etc.), the color, shape, font, etc. may be changed depending on whether or not the cooperative operation is possible.
  • a mark 162a7 symbolized “Mobile” may be displayed together with the mark 162a5 symbolized “Linkage” (FIG. 48B).
  • a mark 162a8 that symbolizes “Synchronization” is further added. You may make it display (FIG. 48C).
  • MH-EIT including detailed information of each broadcast program.
  • each broadcast program is a broadcast program for which a broadcast cooperative app that can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment is prepared, the executable broadcast cooperative app is portable. What is necessary is just to make it control by acquiring information, such as whether cooperation operation
  • asset presentation synchronization with an external device refer to information on whether the external device has an NTP format clock counter as shown in FIG. 12A or a counter having an equivalent function.
  • the information acquired from the program distribution information of the digital broadcast program prepared in a predetermined server device on the Internet 200 is added to the EPG created based on the program information data string acquired from the broadcast wave of the digital broadcast service. You may do it.
  • the EPG screen 162a can be linked to the sign 162a5, which symbolizes “Linkage” indicating that the executable broadcast cooperation application is prepared, and the portable terminal device.
  • the sign 162a5 symbolizes “Linkage” indicating that the executable broadcast cooperation application is prepared
  • the portable terminal device By displaying the mark 167a7 symbolizing “Mobile” and the symbol 162a8 symbolizing “Synchronization”, the user can easily determine the status of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 corresponding to the broadcast communication cooperation service. It becomes possible to grasp. Needless to say, a mark obtained by symbolizing a predetermined character representing the attribute of each broadcast program may be replaced with the character itself or a sentence. By changing the background color of the detailed information 162a1 of each broadcast program, the corresponding status of the broadcast program to the broadcast communication cooperation service may be indicated.
  • the mark 162a5 symbolized “Linkage”, the symbol 162a7 symbolized “Mobile”, the symbol 162a8 symbolized “Synchronization”, etc. are not normally displayed in the title area 162a2, and each broadcast program is displayed. A pop-up may be displayed only when selected.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 has a function of performing viewing reservation and / or recording reservation for each broadcast program from the EPG screen 162a. For example, in a state where the EPG screen 162a is displayed, the program selection cursor on the EPG screen 162a is moved using the cursor key 741ac of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application, and an arbitrary broadcast program is selected using the decision key 741ad. Thus, it is possible to make a viewing reservation and / or a recording reservation for the selected broadcast program.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can grasp the information on the acquisition destination of the broadcast cooperative app prepared for each broadcast program when the broadcast program is selected with the program selection cursor. Become. Therefore, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can start acquiring the broadcast cooperative app before the broadcast start time of the broadcast program is reached.
  • the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) prepared in the above may be started before the broadcast start time of the broadcast program by the same processing as described above. Further, as shown in FIG. 48B, a two-dimensional barcode 162a6 and the like indicating acquisition destination information (location information such as URL) of the broadcast cooperative app (terminal side) prepared for the mobile terminal device is displayed on the EPG screen 162a. It may be displayed in the detailed description area 162a3 so as to prompt the user to download the broadcast cooperation app (terminal side) prepared for the mobile terminal device.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 refers to the acquisition destination information of the broadcast cooperative application included in the MH-EIT or the like so as to start the acquisition of the broadcast cooperative application before the broadcast start time of the broadcast program is reached. By doing so, it becomes possible to distribute the load of the service provider server 400 that stores the broadcast cooperation application. Further, even when the network communication speed between the service provider server 400 and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is insufficient, the broadcast cooperative app can be effectively used immediately after the broadcast of the broadcast program starts. become.
  • FIG. 49A is an operation sequence diagram illustrating an example of an acquisition operation of the broadcast cooperative app when a broadcast program viewing reservation and / or recording reservation is made from the EPG screen 162a.
  • the EPG generation unit 1102g of the reception function execution unit 1102 stores the MH ⁇ stored in the M2 section message. EIT is acquired (S1601). Further, by interpreting the acquired MH-EIT, an EPG screen of the broadcasting service of this embodiment is generated (S1602). Note that the processing of S1601 to S1602 may be performed in the background while the broadcast program video of the channel for which the channel selection processing has been performed is displayed on the monitor unit 162.
  • the generated EPG screen is displayed on the monitor unit 162 as an OSD display.
  • the EPG screen displayed in the process of S1604 may have a format such as the EPG screen 162a as shown in FIG. 20A.
  • the user operates the remote controller or the portable information terminal to instruct selection of a desired broadcast program (S1605), and then makes a reservation for viewing and / or recording of the selected broadcast program.
  • the program reservation processing unit (not shown) of the reception function execution unit 1102 executes viewing reservation and / or recording reservation processing of the selected broadcast program (S 1607).
  • the viewing reservation and / or recording reservation processing may be performed by publicly known broadcasting, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
  • the application control unit confirms the MH-EIT related to the selected broadcast program (S1608), confirms whether there is a broadcast cooperation application related to the selected broadcast program, If there is a broadcast cooperation application related to the selected broadcast program, the acquisition destination (URL) of the broadcast cooperation application is confirmed (S1609). In the processing of S1609, the application profile of the broadcast cooperative app may be further confirmed.
  • the application control unit 153 sends a broadcast cooperation application to the server (in this embodiment, the service provider server 400) specified by the URL via the LAN communication unit 121.
  • the distribution request is made (S1610).
  • the service provider server 400 that has received the distribution request distributes the requested broadcast cooperative app after appropriately performing an authentication process or the like of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S1611).
  • the broadcast receiving device 100 caches the received broadcast cooperative app in the cache unit 152 based on the control of the application control unit 153. (S1612).
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment makes a broadcast program viewing reservation and / or recording reservation from the EPG screen 162a, it is possible to acquire a broadcast cooperation application.
  • the MH-EIT confirmation processing in the processing of S1608 may be performed by acquiring the MH-EIT from the broadcast wave every time, or by caching the MH-EIT acquired in the processing of S1601 The cached MH-EIT may be confirmed.
  • the operation sequence is merely an example, and different processing procedures may be used.
  • FIG. 49B shows a case where a mobile terminal device such as the mobile information terminal 700 uses a two-dimensional barcode 162a6 displayed in the detailed description area 162a3 of the EPG screen 162a to display a broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) prepared for the mobile terminal device. It is an operation
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 generates and displays an EPG screen by the same processing as S1601 to S1604 in FIG. 49A (S1701).
  • the user operates the operation unit 730 of the portable information terminal 700 to instruct the activation of the cooperation control application, activates the cooperation control application (S1702), and the EPG screen 162a as illustrated in FIG. 48 is displayed.
  • the two-dimensional barcode 162a6 displayed in the detailed description area 162a3 is photographed (S1703).
  • the acquisition destination (URL) of the broadcast cooperative application indicated by the two-dimensional barcode 162a6 is confirmed (S1704), and based on the acquired URL, via the LAN communication unit 721 or the telephone network communication unit 722.
  • a broadcast cooperation application distribution request is made to the server specified in the URL (in this embodiment, the service provider server 400) (S1705).
  • the service provider server 400 that has received the distribution request distributes the requested broadcast cooperative app after appropriately performing authentication processing of the portable information terminal 700 or the like (S1707).
  • the portable information terminal 700 caches the received broadcast cooperative app in the storage unit 710 or the like. (S1707).
  • Example 4 of the present invention will be described.
  • the configuration, effects, and the like in this example are the same as those in Example 3 unless otherwise specified.
  • the difference between a present Example and Example 3 is mainly demonstrated, and in order to avoid duplication about a common point, description is abbreviate
  • terminal cooperation a cooperation process between the broadcast receiving device and the portable information terminal.
  • this restriction is referred to as the same house restriction.
  • a broadcast cooperation application when the display screen of the broadcast receiving device 100 and the display screen of the portable information terminal 700 are closely related, 100 when the user of the portable information terminal 700 is surely viewing the advertisement video displayed on the screen.
  • the point that must be considered as a procedure is whether or not the target broadcast cooperation application imposes the same in-house restrictions. This judgment is not necessary if all broadcast-linked apps impose the same in-house restrictions, but if there are broadcast-linked apps that do not impose the same in-house restrictions, control information regarding the presence or absence of the same in-house restrictions is provided.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 needs to acquire and change the operation procedure.
  • the control information regarding the presence or absence of the same home restriction may be acquired from a broadcast signal (for example, described as a parameter or descriptor in MH-AIT, etc.) or acquired from a server designated by the broadcast station. Also good.
  • a “local_mode_flag” parameter is provided in the MH-application descriptor (FIG. 50), and if this parameter value is 1, the application has the same home restrictions If the parameter value is 0, it may be handled as having no same in-home restriction. In this way, it is possible to control the same in-house restriction for each application, and finer control is possible.
  • remote viewing may be prohibited with emphasis on copyright protection, or remote viewing is permitted with priority given to viewer convenience. Also good.
  • a mark 162a10 (FIG. 48E) in which “remote” is symbolized is displayed in the column of the program.
  • a mark such as 162a11 may be displayed (FIG. 48F).
  • the portable information terminal 700 is connected to the same local network as the broadcast receiving device 100, it can be determined that the portable information terminal 700 exists in the same home. Note that whether or not the target device is connected to the local network may be confirmed using a known method, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
  • the portable information terminal 700 Even if the portable information terminal 700 is not on the same local network as the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, the portable information terminal 700 that directly communicates with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 by NFC, BlueTooth, infrared communication, etc. It can also be determined that it exists. In this case, the communication for acquiring the broadcast cooperation application or the like may be performed by the direct communication or by mobile phone communication.
  • the mobile information terminal 700 exists in the same home until the end of the program, or a certain valid time (for example, 10 minutes) is provided, It is also possible to use a method in which it is assumed that it exists in the same house during the effective time, but after the effective time has passed, it is not assumed that it exists in the same house unless it is confirmed again.
  • the effective time may be described in, for example, MH-AIT and read by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • an event signal is set in the broadcast signal at an arbitrary time during the program, and the portable information terminal 700 is confirmed to exist in the same house every time the event signal is received. You can also Further, the above-described methods can be used in appropriate combination.
  • broadcast cooperation information There are two types: communication acquisition acquired from the station server 300 or the operator server 400, and broadcast acquisition acquired from broadcast waves.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 acquires once
  • the portable information terminal 700 acquires from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100
  • the portable information terminal 700 acquires directly from the broadcast station server 300 or the operator server 400 or the like.
  • the portable information terminal 700 acquires directly from the broadcast station server 300 or the operator server 400 or the like.
  • the portable information terminal 700 can be broadly divided into two cases: obtaining from the broadcast receiving device 100 and obtaining from the broadcast station server 300 or the operator server 400.
  • the portable information terminal 700 acquires broadcast cooperation information from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100
  • the case where the mobile information terminal 700 acquires from the broadcast station server 300 or the provider server 400 will be described in the following embodiment.
  • FIG. 51A shows the procedure of this example.
  • the mobile information terminal 700 and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 each activate a cooperation control application that is an application for controlling terminal cooperation (S10001, S10002).
  • the mobile information terminal 700 makes a terminal cooperation request to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S10003).
  • MH-AIT stored in the M2 section message of the broadcast signal is acquired (S10004). From this MH-AIT information, it is determined whether or not the target mobile information terminal application imposes the same in-house restriction (S10006). If the same in-house restriction is imposed, the procedure proceeds to S10008.
  • step S10009 it is determined whether or not the portable information terminal 700 for which the terminal cooperation request is made is in the same house as the broadcast receiver 100 (S10009). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that they are not in the same home, a response indicating that the cooperation is not permitted is sent to the cooperation control application on the portable information terminal side, and the process is terminated (S10011).
  • the determination in S10006 may be skipped. If there is both an application that imposes the same home restriction and an application that does not impose the same home restriction, the determination in S10006 is performed.
  • step S10009 If it is determined in step S10009 that the portable information terminal 700 is in the same house, or if it is determined in step S10006 that the application does not impose the same in-home restriction, the process proceeds to step S10012, and the broadcast cooperative application related service is provided. Do.
  • the broadcast cooperation application-related service S10012
  • the broadcast cooperation information distribution request (S10013) from the portable information terminal 700 is processed, and the broadcast cooperation information is distributed to the portable information terminal 700 (S10018).
  • the broadcast cooperation information includes information received by the broadcast receiving device 100 from a distribution server such as the broadcast station server 300 or the operator server 400 (S10014 to S10016), acquired from a broadcast signal (S10017), broadcast reception There may be stored in the apparatus 100 (cache).
  • the broadcast cooperative information receiving process (S10016 or S10017) by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is not only acquired in response to the broadcast cooperative information distribution request (S10013) from the portable information terminal 700, but the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 autonomously There may be a case of acquisition or acquisition based on the occurrence of an event from a broadcast signal. And broadcast cooperation information distribution (S10018) to the portable information terminal 700 may be spontaneous from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 side.
  • the process returns to the procedure of S10005, and in the case of an application that imposes the same in-home restriction, it is confirmed whether or not the portable information terminal 700 is in the same home (S10009). However, it is determined whether a preset valid time has passed since the previous confirmation or whether a broadcast signal or a confirmation request from the distribution server (S10007) has been generated since the previous confirmation (S10008). If neither condition is satisfied, confirmation of whether or not the user is in the same home (S10009) is not performed, and the next broadcast cooperation application related service (S10012) may be executed via S10010.
  • the confirmation request from the broadcast signal (S10007) is described as being acquired from the broadcast cooperation information, but here, the event message is also described as being included in the broadcast cooperation information. Further, this confirmation request may be described in the MH-AIT.
  • the procedure described above is a loop processing procedure for the broadcast signal, the broadcast receiving device 100, the portable information terminal 700, and the entire distribution server in the section indicated by the arrow in S10022.
  • the confirmation request in S10007 may be at any timing in the loop.
  • the authentication information described in the MH-AIT may be incorporated in the authentication key used for the authentication process (S10015) in the distribution server. Thereby, it can confirm that it is a legitimate authentication request.
  • the authentication information described in the MH-AIT is changed as the program progresses, and the distribution server does not perform authentication unless the authentication key incorporates information synchronized with the progress of the program. , You can confirm that you continue to watch the same program.
  • the MH-AIT information is appropriately read and updated (S10021).
  • the authentication information incorporated into the broadcast signal may be incorporated as broadcast cooperation information in addition to being described in the MH-AIT.
  • a method in which the URL of the distribution server itself is changed according to the progress of the program can be used.
  • the portable information terminal 700 receives a broadcast signal every time a preset valid time is executed or a confirmation request is received from a broadcast signal or a distribution server while executing the broadcast cooperation application related service (S10012).
  • the broadcast cooperation application related service S10012
  • the authentication information incorporated in the broadcast signal for authentication at the distribution server, the validity of the distribution request can be ensured, and if the authentication information of the broadcast signal is appropriately changed, the same program You can also confirm that you are watching
  • Example 5 In the present embodiment, a case where the portable information terminal 700 acquires broadcast cooperation information from a distribution server such as the broadcast station server 300 or the operator server 400 will be described.
  • FIG. 51B shows the procedure of this example.
  • the mobile information terminal 700 and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 each activate a cooperation control application that is an application for controlling terminal cooperation (S10101, S10102).
  • the portable information terminal 700 makes a terminal cooperation request to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S10103).
  • MH-AIT stored in the M2 section message of the broadcast signal is acquired (S10104).
  • Information such as a URL related to the distribution server is acquired from the MH-AIT information, and the acquired information is transmitted to the portable information terminal 700 (S10105).
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 transmits a time confirmation request to the distribution server. (S10106). Based on the time confirmation request, the distribution server transmits time information to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S10107).
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can synchronize the operation of the internal clock with the distribution server based on the time information acquired from the distribution server. In addition, this makes it possible to issue an authentication key in a later step (S10115) in accordance with the time of the distribution server. If the time difference between the distribution server and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is not a problem, the processing of S10106 to S10107 may be omitted. If the distribution server also operates in synchronization with UTC, the processing of S10106 to S10107 may be omitted. Further, the time information transmitted in the process of S10107 may be in the NTP format or in other formats. Thereafter, the loop control indicated by the arrow in S10127 is entered.
  • an authentication key issue request or a broadcast cooperation information distribution request is transmitted from the portable information terminal 700 to the broadcast receiving device 100 (S10109).
  • the authentication key is used in a broadcast cooperation information distribution request to the distribution server in the subsequent step (S10125).
  • the broadcast cooperation information distribution request is a distribution request for information acquired from a broadcast signal, and serves as a trigger for broadcast cooperation information distribution in a later step (S10126).
  • the broadcast receiving device 100 determines whether or not the application is a broadcast cooperation application that imposes the same in-home restriction (S10111), and broadcasts that impose the same in-home restriction. If it is a cooperative application, the process proceeds to the next step (S10112). If it is not a broadcast cooperative application that imposes the same in-home restriction, the procedure of S10112 is skipped and the process proceeds to the subsequent step (S10114). If all the broadcast cooperative apps impose the same in-house restriction, the determination in S10111 is not performed and the process proceeds to S10112. In S10112, it is determined whether or not the portable information terminal 700 that issued each request is in the same house.
  • terminal cooperation is terminated (S10113). If it is determined that the portable information terminal 700 is not in the same house, terminal cooperation is terminated (S10113). If it is determined that the portable information terminal 700 is in the same house, the next procedure according to each request, that is, acquisition of broadcast cooperation information from the distribution server (S10125) or acquisition of broadcast cooperation information from the broadcast signal (S10126) is performed.
  • either one of the processing in S10125 and the processing in S10126 may actually be executed, but the acquisition processing of the broadcast cooperation information is either acquisition from the distribution server or acquisition from the broadcast signal.
  • both procedures of the process of S10125 and the process of S10126 are illustrated simultaneously. First, the acquisition procedure (S10125) of the broadcast cooperation information from a delivery server is demonstrated.
  • the broadcast receiver 100 issues an authentication key to the information cooperation terminal 700 in accordance with the processing of S10109 (authentication key issuance request) (S10115). It is assumed that the issued authentication key includes time information at the time of issuance and is valid only within a predetermined valid time (for example, 10 minutes).
  • the portable information terminal 700 makes a broadcast cooperation information distribution request including the authentication key information to the distribution server (S10116).
  • the distribution server confirms the authentication information including whether it is an authentication key within the valid time (S10117), and if the authentication is OK, the distribution of broadcast cooperation information is permitted (S10118). Thereafter, the distribution of the broadcast cooperation information is permitted within the valid time, but the distribution of the broadcast cooperation information is stopped when the effective time has passed. Thereby, for example, it is possible to control the streaming video so that it cannot be viewed after the valid time has passed.
  • the effective time may be held in advance by the distribution server, or may be acquired from the broadcast signal (for example, MH-AIT) by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and incorporated as effective time information in the authentication key. Further, the mobile information terminal 700 is notified in advance of the information on the effective time, and requests the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 to issue an authentication key before the effective time expires. Alternatively, the effective time is managed by the broadcast receiving device 100, and it is automatically confirmed from the broadcast receiving device 100 after confirming that the portable information terminal 700 is in the same house before the effective time expires. An authentication key may be issued to 700.
  • the broadcast signal for example, MH-AIT
  • the valid time may be the same in one program or may be changed according to the progress of the program. Further, if there is no valid time setting, it may be handled that once authentication is performed, the authentication is valid during program viewing.
  • the authentication information described in the MH-AIT may be incorporated in the authentication key used for the authentication process (S10117) in the distribution server. Thereby, it can confirm that it is a legitimate authentication request.
  • the authentication information described in the MH-AIT is changed as the program progresses, and the distribution server does not perform authentication unless the authentication key incorporates information synchronized with the progress of the program. , You can confirm that you continue to watch the same program. In this case, the MH-AIT information is appropriately read and updated (S10124).
  • the authentication information incorporated in the broadcast signal may be incorporated as broadcast cooperation information in addition to being described in the MH-AIT.
  • a method for substantially changing the authentication information or the like a method in which the URL of the distribution server itself is changed according to the progress of the program can be used.
  • the URL change in this case may be a case where the distribution server is the same and only the URL is different, or may be a change to a new distribution server by changing the broadcast cooperation application or the like.
  • the procedure of distribution server information transmission (S10105), time confirmation request (S10106), and time information transmission (S10107) is performed.
  • S10126 a procedure for acquiring broadcast cooperation information from a broadcast signal
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 acquires broadcast cooperation information from the broadcast signal (S10119), and then acquires the acquired broadcast cooperation information as the portable information. Distribute to the terminal 700 (S10120).
  • a change notification may be issued from the broadcast signal (S10110), and the broadcast cooperation information may be acquired using the change notification as a trigger.
  • an authentication key will be issued to the portable information terminal 700 from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S10115), and it will be further notified that there was a change notification. If it is within the valid time, the authentication key issuance may be omitted and only the notification of the change notification may be given.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 acquires broadcast cooperation information (S10119) and distributes it to a portable information terminal (S10120).
  • the portable information terminal 700 In the case of acquisition from a broadcast signal, it may be confirmed that the portable information terminal 700 is in the same home for each change notification, and the confirmation is omitted if it is within the valid time as in the fourth embodiment. It doesn't matter.
  • the change notification from the broadcast signal (S10110) is described as being acquired from the broadcast cooperation information, but here, the event message is also described as being included in the broadcast cooperation information. Further, this change notification may be described in the MH-AIT.
  • the time information is included in the authentication key used for the authentication processing in the distribution server, and the validity time is managed, thereby confirming that the portable information terminal 700 is regularly in the same house as the broadcast receiving device 100. It is possible to execute a broadcast cooperation application that appropriately imposes the same in-house restriction. Furthermore, by using the authentication information embedded in the broadcast signal for authentication processing at the distribution server, the validity of the distribution request can be ensured. If the authentication information of the broadcast signal is appropriately changed, the same information can be obtained. You can also confirm that you are watching the program.
  • the portable information terminal cooperation technology according to the present embodiment described above, even when the portable information terminal that cooperates with the broadcast receiving apparatus acquires the broadcast cooperation information from the distribution server, it is possible to realize the same in-home restriction. .
  • Example 6 In the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment, the procedure for realizing the same in-home restriction in terminal cooperation has been described. However, depending on the broadcast cooperation application, use from outside the house may be permitted. In this embodiment, such a case will be described.
  • the program itself such as TV shopping is publicity / advertising
  • the use of the broadcast cooperative application may be permitted regardless of whether the portable information terminal 700 is in the house.
  • the streaming data may be encrypted by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 for copyright protection. Whether or not the broadcast cooperative app permits use from outside the home, including the distribution of broadcast video outside the home, may be described in the data (for example, MH-AIT) in the broadcast signal.
  • FIG. 51C shows a specific procedure of this example.
  • the description overlapping with the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment is appropriately omitted.
  • a cooperation control application that is an application for controlling terminal cooperation is activated (S10202).
  • the cooperation control application of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may be activated in advance (S10201), or triggered by reception of a terminal cooperation request from the portable information terminal 700 described later (S10203). It may be activated.
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 When there is a terminal cooperation request (S10203) from the portable information terminal 700 outside the home, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 first confirms the MH-AIT (S10204) to allow the broadcast cooperation app to permit use outside the home. If it is a broadcast cooperation application that is permitted to be used outside the house, it is confirmed whether the request source is the registered portable information terminal 700 (S10205), and then cooperation is permitted. Like that. On the other hand, if it is not a broadcast cooperation application that is permitted to be used outside the house, the process ends (S10206).
  • authentication is performed between the portable information terminal 700 and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 in order to protect the copyright of broadcast video and broadcast cooperative information, as necessary. Processing may be performed (S10207). Further, information such as a URL related to the distribution server is acquired from the MH-AIT information, and the acquired information is transmitted to the portable information terminal 700 (S10208).
  • the authentication process may be authentication at the distribution server.
  • Information on whether copyright protection is necessary or not and information on an authentication method for copyright protection are obtained from a broadcast signal (for example, described in MH-AIT, etc.), and control is performed accordingly. Just do it.
  • a predetermined method predetermined in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is followed. For example, a predetermined predetermined copyright protection process may be performed. Further, when such information is not stored in the broadcast signal, it may be determined in advance that the copyright protection processing is not performed in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • an encryption key for decrypting encrypted video data and the like is transmitted from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 to the portable information terminal 700.
  • This encryption key may be obtained from a broadcast signal (for example, described in MH-AIT or the like).
  • the portable information terminal 700 transmits an ID and a password to the distribution server, and acquires the encryption key.
  • location information of the distribution server (specifically, URL or the like) is acquired from a broadcast signal (for example, described in MH-AIT or the like), and the broadcast receiving device 100 sends the location information to the portable information terminal 700.
  • the security is further increased. Since the video or the like cannot be decrypted unless the portable information terminal 700 obtains the encryption key, it is possible to authenticate the copyright by requesting authentication from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 at the distribution server, or the portable information terminal 700. Authentication may be completed by notifying the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 that the encryption key has been acquired. Note that the distribution server may be charged.
  • the information stored in the broadcast signal in the process of S10207 indicates that copyright protection by a predetermined method is necessary, and the copyright protection authentication process by the predetermined method cannot be performed, Do not allow device linkage. Also, even if the broadcast signal is not specified for copyright protection and authentication processing is performed by the default method of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, if the copyright protection authentication processing cannot be performed by the default method, terminal cooperation is permitted. do not do.
  • the subsequent processing of S10221 and the processing of S10222 are executed.
  • the processing in steps S10212 to S10215 in the processing in S10221 may be the same as the processing in steps S10115 to S10118 in FIG. 51B.
  • the control that sets the valid time may not be performed.
  • the processing of each step of S10216 to S10217 in the processing of S10222 may be the same as the processing of each step of S10119 to S10120 in FIG. 51B.
  • processing in S10221 and S10222 may be performed according to a change notification (S10210) issued from a broadcast signal as the program progresses.
  • the processes of S10221 and S10222 may be executed by the spontaneous control of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • each step S10218 to S10220 following the processing of S10221 and S10222 may be the same as the processing of each step of S10121 to S10124 in FIG. 51B.
  • the portable information terminal 700 outside the home can acquire the broadcast cooperation information from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S10217). Alternatively, it can be acquired from the distribution server using the authentication key issued from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S10215). In addition, the authentication information obtained from the broadcast signal (for example, described in MH-AIT) is incorporated into the authentication key issued by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, and the distribution server authenticates the authentication information obtained from the broadcast signal. If access is permitted for a key, it is possible to further optimize use outside the home.
  • the portable information terminal 700 may not be registered in the broadcast receiving device 100.
  • FIG. 51D The specific procedure in this case is shown in FIG. 51D. Since this procedure is the same as that in FIG. 51C described above, the description of the overlapping portion is omitted.
  • the mobile information terminal 700 and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 each activate a cooperation control application that is an application for controlling terminal cooperation (S10301, S10302).
  • a cooperation control application that is an application for controlling terminal cooperation
  • the portable information terminal 700 makes a terminal cooperation request to the broadcast receiving device 100 (S10303).
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 confirms that the portable information terminal 700 is in the same home (S10305), and permits terminal cooperation.
  • an authentication process may be performed between the portable information terminal 700 and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 in order to protect the copyright of the broadcast video or the broadcast cooperation information (S10307).
  • the authentication process may be authentication in an external distribution server.
  • Information on whether copyright protection is necessary or not and information on an authentication method for copyright protection are obtained from a broadcast signal (for example, described in MH-AIT, etc.), and control is performed accordingly. Just do it.
  • a predetermined method predetermined in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is followed. For example, a predetermined predetermined copyright protection process may be performed. Further, when such information is not stored in the broadcast signal, it may be determined in advance that the copyright protection processing is not performed in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • an encryption key for decrypting encrypted video data and the like is transmitted from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 to the portable information terminal 700.
  • This encryption key may be obtained from a broadcast signal (for example, described in MH-AIT or the like). Authentication is performed by handing over this encryption key in the same house. Further, if the encryption key cannot be obtained from the broadcast signal only at a certain point in time of the program and the delivery of the encryption key to the portable information terminal 700 is limited to the same home, the restriction that the user must be at the same home at that time. Can be provided, and can also be used for providing premiums for viewing.
  • the portable information terminal 700 transmits an ID and a password to the distribution server, and acquires the encryption key.
  • location information of the distribution server (specifically, URL or the like) is acquired from a broadcast signal (for example, described in MH-AIT or the like), and the broadcast receiving device 100 sends the location information to the portable information terminal 700.
  • the security is further increased. Since the video or the like cannot be decrypted unless the portable information terminal 700 obtains the encryption key, it is possible to authenticate the copyright by requesting authentication from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 at the distribution server, or the portable information terminal 700.
  • Authentication may be completed by notifying the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 that the encryption key has been acquired.
  • Access to the distribution server may be performed inside or outside the house, but the location information of the distribution server can be acquired from the broadcast signal only at a certain point in time of the program, and the location information to the portable information terminal 700 can be obtained. If delivery is limited to the same home, a restriction that the user must be in the same home at that time can be set, and this can also be used for providing premiums for viewing. Note that the distribution server may be charged.
  • the encryption keys possessed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700 are mutually authenticated, and the copyright protection is authenticated by taking the confirmation. This authentication may be performed inside or outside the house.
  • the information stored in the broadcast signal in the process of S10307 indicates that copyright protection by a predetermined method is necessary and the copyright protection authentication process by the predetermined method cannot be performed, Do not allow device linkage. Also, even if the broadcast signal is not specified for copyright protection and authentication processing is performed by the default method of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, if the copyright protection authentication processing cannot be performed by the default method, terminal cooperation is permitted. do not do.
  • Example 7 In an actual usage situation, it is more desirable to easily know whether or not there is a terminal cooperation application based on a program and which terminal cooperation application can be used. In this embodiment, a method for displaying the availability status of the terminal cooperation application will be described. In addition, the said terminal cooperation application points out the broadcast cooperation application used by terminal cooperation.
  • FIG. 52A is a screen display diagram illustrating an example of a launcher screen of a broadcast cooperative app when there is a terminal cooperative app.
  • the broadcast cooperation application launcher 162r11 is displayed at an arbitrary position on the broadcast program screen 162r, and the broadcast cooperation application is displayed as a framed character icon.
  • a broadcast cooperation application (162r12 to 162r14) for the broadcast receiving device 100 and a broadcast cooperation application (162r15 to 162r17) for the portable information terminal 700 that are linked to the program being viewed are displayed. Further, a return button 162r18 for ending the broadcast cooperative application launcher 162r11 is also displayed.
  • the status of the application is indicated by the thickness of the frame line surrounding the character string and the color in the frame.
  • the main body applications A and B (162r12, 162r13) and the terminal applications A and B (162r15, 162r16) are available.
  • the main application C (162r14) and the terminal application C (162r17) are unavailable.
  • the state in which the terminal application cannot be used means that none of the portable information terminals 700 that are communicable with the broadcast receiving device 100 have a function of executing the application.
  • FIG. 52B is a screen after selecting the terminal application A on the launcher screen of FIG. 52A.
  • the state of each portable information terminal 700 regarding the terminal application A is shown.
  • the portable information terminal 700 displayed on this screen is assumed to be a terminal that has been linked or registered with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 in the past.
  • the mobile terminal 1 (162r22) and the mobile terminal 2 (162r23) whose icon frame line is a solid line are in a state where they can communicate with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, and the mobile terminal 3 (162r24) whose frame line is a dotted line
  • the mobile terminal 4 (162r25) is not in a communicable state with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
  • the mobile terminal 1 (162r22) and the mobile terminal 3 (162r24) in which the icon frame is white have a function of executing the terminal application A, and the mobile terminal 2 (162r23) and the mobile terminal 4 in which the frame is gray.
  • (162r25) indicates that the terminal application A is not provided with a function.
  • an example in which a picture is used for an icon to make it easier to understand visually is shown below.
  • FIG. 52C is an example of a launcher screen (162r31) showing a list of broadcast cooperation apps.
  • icons are shown for each type of portable information terminal 700.
  • 162r32 and 162r33 are icons indicating the broadcast receiving device 100
  • 162r34 and 162r35 are icons indicating the smart phone type portable information terminal 700
  • 162r36 is an icon indicating the head mounted display type portable information terminal 700.
  • Each app is for a device indicated by an icon.
  • a mark indicating that the application cannot be used is superimposed on the pattern of the device (in this embodiment, a hatched circle).
  • a mark indicating that in the present embodiment, a dot mark in a circle
  • the portable information terminal 700 it is also possible to display a mark indicating that the application is being executed when the application is being executed on all terminals that are communicable with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and can execute the application. is there.
  • FIG. 52D is a screen after the terminal application C is selected on the launcher screen of FIG. 52C.
  • the state of the portable information terminal 700 of the type corresponding to the terminal application C is shown. In this screen, if the portable information terminal 700 does not have the function of executing the terminal application C, if it is not in a state where it can communicate with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, or if the terminal application C is already being executed, this is indicated
  • the mark to represent is displayed over the icon.
  • a display method that shows that there is a broadcast cooperation app when the situation changes without having to start the launcher every time. For example, when the power is turned on, when the channel is changed, when the broadcast cooperation app is changed even at the beginning of the program or in the middle of the program, the communication state between the broadcast receiving device 100 and the portable information terminal 700 is changed. In such a case, an icon is displayed only for a predetermined time and the state at that time is displayed when the execution status of the application changes.
  • FIG. 52E shows an example in that case.
  • an icon indicating the type of each device is displayed (162r51 to 162r53), it indicates that there is a broadcast cooperation application corresponding to that type of device.
  • a circle with a diagonal line (162r53) indicates that there is no device that can execute the application in that type of device that is in a usable state.
  • a dot mark (162r51) in a circle indicates that the application is being executed on all or a part of the type of devices that are ready for use.
  • FIG. 52F is a screen display diagram illustrating an example of a broadcast cooperation application displayed on the display unit 741 of the portable information terminal 700.
  • FIG. 52F shows the list 741d1 displayed on the basic screen 741d of the cooperation control application.
  • This list 741d1 indicates which broadcast receiving device 100 in the home can use the broadcast cooperation application corresponding to the program to be checked.
  • the convenience is further enhanced particularly when the portable information terminal 700 is used outside the house.
  • This embodiment shows the state of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 such as receiving the program, receiving another program, vacant, and having another program reserved (when recording of another program is reserved in the middle of the program).
  • the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 includes a plurality of tuners
  • the convenience is further enhanced if the status is displayed for each of the plurality of tuners.
  • the branch numbers indicate the tuners in the same device.
  • the receiving device B-1 and the receiving device B-2 are one and the other of a plurality of tuners in the same broadcast receiving device 100.
  • the monitor unit 162 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 it is not necessary to use the monitor unit 162 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100. That is, if the tuner in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can be used, the broadcast can be used. Since it becomes possible, it is convenient to know the usage status of each tuner.
  • the functions and the like of the present invention described above may be realized by hardware by designing a part or all of them with, for example, an integrated circuit. Further, the microprocessor unit or the like may be realized by software by interpreting and executing an operation program that realizes each function or the like. Hardware and software may be used together.
  • the software that controls the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may be stored in advance in the ROM 103 and / or the storage (storage) unit 110 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 at the time of product shipment. It may be acquired from another application server 500 on the Internet 200 via the LAN communication unit 121 after product shipment. Further, the software stored in a memory card, an optical disk, or the like may be acquired via the expansion interface unit 124 or the like.
  • control lines and information lines shown in the figure are those that are considered necessary for the explanation, and not all control lines and information lines on the product are necessarily shown. Actually, it may be considered that almost all the components are connected to each other.
  • DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100,800 ... Broadcast receiving apparatus 100a ... Antenna, 101, 801 ... Main control part, 102, 802 ... System bus, 103, 803 ... ROM, 104, 804 ... RAM, 110, 810 ... Storage part, 121, 821 ... LAN communication unit, 124, 824 ... extended interface unit, 125, 825 ... digital interface unit, 131, 831, 832 ... tuner / demodulation unit, 132 ... separation unit, 141 ... video decoder, 142 ... video color gamut conversion unit, 143 ... Audio decoder, 144 ... Character super decoder, 145 ... Subtitle decoder, 146 ...
  • Subtitle synthesis unit 147 ... Subtitle color gamut conversion unit, 151 ... Data decoder, 152 ... Cache unit, 153 ... Application control unit, 154 ... Browser unit, 155 ... Application color gamut conversion unit, 156 ... Sound source unit 161,861 ... Video synthesis unit, 162,862 ... Monitor unit, 163,863 ... Video output unit, 164,864 ... Sound synthesis unit, 165,865 ... Speaker unit, 166,866 ... Audio output unit, 170,870 ... Operation input unit, 841... MMT decoding processing unit, 842... MPEG2-TS decoding processing unit, 200... Internet, 200r... Router device, 200a... Access point, 300t ... radio tower, 300s ... broadcasting satellite (or communication satellite) ... broadcast station server, 400 ... service provider server, 500 ... other application server, 600 ... mobile telephone communication server, 600b ... base station, 700 ... portable information terminal.

Abstract

The purpose of the present invention is to provide a digital broadcast receiver that is able to execute functions of higher added value. Provided is a broadcast receiving device capable of receiving a digital broadcast service of a broadcast system which employs a media transport protocol with which an application can be executed in a manner linked with a broadcast program, the broadcast receiving device being provided with: a broadcast reception unit that receives broadcast waves of the digital broadcast service; a separation unit that separates, from the received broadcast waves, at least application-related information, electronic program guide information, and a video of the broadcast program; a broadcast video reproduction unit that reproduces the video of the broadcast program; an electronic program guide creation unit that creates an electronic program guide screen on the basis of the electronic program guide information; an application acquisition unit that acquires a certain application on the basis of location information obtained by referring to the application-related information; an application execution unit that executes the acquired certain application and outputs an application execution video; and a display unit that is capable of displaying the video of the broadcast program, the electronic program guide screen, or the application execution video, wherein the digital broadcast service that can be received by this broadcast receiving device uses this broadcast receiving device which is capable of additionally setting, for each broadcast program, whether or not it is possible to perform a linking operation between a portable information terminal and the application executable in a manner linked with the broadcast program, and, in a display for the broadcast program displayed on the electronic program guide screen, the electronic program guide creation unit is capable of displaying that, in the application executable in a manner linked with the broadcast program, a presentation synchronization operation can be performed with respect to the portable information terminal, or that the application executable in a manner linked with the broadcast program can be executed even when the portable information terminal is outside home.

Description

放送受信装置Broadcast receiver
　本発明は、放送受信装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a broadcast receiving apparatus.
　デジタル放送サービスの拡張機能の１つに、放送波でデジタルデータを送信し、天気予報やニュース、おすすめ番組等の各種情報を表示するデータ放送がある。データ放送を受信可能なテレビ受信機は既に多数市販されており、また、データ放送受信に関する技術も下記特許文献１をはじめ多数が公表されている。 One of the extended functions of the digital broadcasting service is data broadcasting that transmits digital data using broadcast waves and displays various information such as weather forecasts, news, and recommended programs. Many television receivers capable of receiving data broadcasts are already on the market, and many techniques related to data broadcast reception have been disclosed, including Patent Document 1 below.
特開２００１－１８６４８６号公報JP 2001-186486 A
　近年のコンテンツ配信に関する環境変化に対して、テレビ受信機も様々な機能拡張を求められている。特にインターネット等のブロードバンドネットワーク環境を利用したコンテンツや連携アプリケーションの配信に対する要求、および、映像コンテンツの高解像度化／高精細化に対する要求、等が多い。しかしながら、現行のテレビ受信機が備えるデータ放送受信機能等のみの流用、あるいは、前記データ放送受信機能等の機能拡張のみでは、前記要求に応え得る高付加価値のテレビ受信機を提供することは難しい。 In response to recent environmental changes related to content distribution, TV receivers are also required to expand various functions. In particular, there are many requests for distribution of content and cooperative applications using a broadband network environment such as the Internet, and requests for high resolution / high definition of video content. However, it is difficult to provide a high-value-added television receiver that can meet the above requirements only by diverting only the data broadcast receiving function or the like provided in the current television receiver, or only by expanding the function of the data broadcast receiving function or the like. .
　本発明の目的は、より付加価値の高い機能を実行可能な放送受信装置を提供することである。 An object of the present invention is to provide a broadcast receiving apparatus that can execute a function with higher added value.
　前記課題を解決するための手段として、特許請求の範囲に記載の技術を用いる。 The techniques described in the claims are used as means for solving the above-mentioned problems.
　一例を挙げるならば、放送番組と連携してアプリケーションが実行可能なメディアトランスポート方式を採用した放送システムのデジタル放送サービスを受信可能な放送受信装置であって、前記デジタル放送サービスの放送波を受信する放送受信部と、前記受信した放送波から少なくとも放送番組についての映像と電子番組表情報とアプリケーション関連情報を分離する分離部と、前記放送番組についての映像を再生する放送映像再生部と、前記電子番組表情報に基づいて電子番組表画面を作成する電子番組表作成部と、前記アプリケーション関連情報を参照して取得したロケーション情報に基づいて所定のアプリケーションを取得するアプリケーション取得部と、前記取得した所定のアプリケーションを実行してアプリケーション実行映像を出力するアプリケーション実行部と、前記放送番組についての映像、前記電子番組表画面、または前記アプリケーション実行映像を表示可能な表示部と、を備え、前記放送受信装置で受信可能なデジタル放送サービスは、前記放送番組と連携して実行可能なアプリケーションと携帯情報端末との連携動作の可否を、放送番組毎に更に設定可能であって、前記電子番組表作成部は、前記電子番組表画面に表示する放送番組についての表示において、前記放送番組と連携して実行可能なアプリケーションにおいて前記携帯情報端末との提示同期動作が可能であることを示す表示、または、前記放送番組と連携して実行可能なアプリケーションが、前記携帯情報端末が宅外にある場合でも実行可能であることを示す表示を行うことが可能である、放送受信装置、
 
を用いる。 As an example, a broadcast receiving apparatus capable of receiving a digital broadcast service of a broadcast system adopting a media transport method capable of executing an application in cooperation with a broadcast program, and receiving a broadcast wave of the digital broadcast service A broadcast receiving unit, a separation unit that separates at least a video about a broadcast program, electronic program guide information, and application-related information from the received broadcast wave, a broadcast video reproduction unit that reproduces a video about the broadcast program, An electronic program guide creation unit that creates an electronic program guide screen based on electronic program guide information, an application acquisition unit that acquires a predetermined application based on location information acquired with reference to the application related information, and the acquired Application execution video by executing a predetermined application An application execution unit for outputting, and a display unit capable of displaying the video about the broadcast program, the electronic program guide screen, or the application execution video. Whether or not a cooperative operation between an application executable in cooperation with a broadcast program and a portable information terminal can be further set for each broadcast program, and the electronic program guide creation unit displays a broadcast to be displayed on the electronic program guide screen In a display about a program, an application that can be executed in cooperation with the broadcast program is a display indicating that a presentation synchronization operation with the portable information terminal is possible, or an application that can be executed in cooperation with the broadcast program. , It is possible to display that the portable information terminal can be executed even when it is outside the home, Transmitting and receiving apparatus,

Is used.
　本発明の技術を用いることにより、より付加価値の高い機能を実行可能な放送受信装置を提供することができる。 By using the technology of the present invention, it is possible to provide a broadcast receiving apparatus that can execute a function with higher added value.
実施例１に係る放送受信装置を含む放送通信システムの構成図である。1 is a configuration diagram of a broadcast communication system including a broadcast receiving apparatus according to Embodiment 1. FIG. ＭＭＴにおける符号化信号の構成要素の説明図である。It is explanatory drawing of the component of the encoding signal in MMT. ＭＭＴにおけるＭＰＵの構成図である。It is a block diagram of MPU in MMT. ＭＭＴにおけるＭＭＴＰパケットの構成図である。It is a block diagram of the MMTP packet in MMT. ＭＭＴを用いる放送システムのプロトコルスタックの概念図である。It is a conceptual diagram of the protocol stack of the broadcasting system using MMT. 放送システムで用いる制御情報の階層構成図である。It is a hierarchical block diagram of the control information used with a broadcast system. 放送システムのＴＬＶ－ＳＩで使用されるテーブルの一覧である。It is a list of tables used in the TLV-SI of the broadcasting system. 放送システムのＴＬＶ－ＳＩで使用される記述子の一覧である。It is a list of descriptors used in the TLV-SI of the broadcasting system. 放送システムのＭＭＴ－ＳＩで使用されるメッセージの一覧である。It is a list of messages used in the MMT-SI of the broadcasting system. 放送システムのＭＭＴ－ＳＩで使用されるテーブルの一覧である。It is a list of tables used in the MMT-SI of the broadcasting system. 放送システムのＭＭＴ－ＳＩで使用される記述子の一覧（１）である。It is a list (1) of descriptors used in the MMT-SI of the broadcasting system. 放送システムのＭＭＴ－ＳＩで使用される記述子の一覧（２）である。It is a list (2) of the descriptor used by MMT-SI of a broadcasting system. 放送システムのＭＭＴ－ＳＩで使用される記述子の一覧（３）である。It is a list (3) of the descriptor used by MMT-SI of a broadcasting system. 放送システムのコンポーネントと各テーブルの関係を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the relationship between the component of a broadcasting system, and each table. 放送システムのＭＰＴのデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of MPT of a broadcast system. 放送システムのロケーション情報のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of the location information of a broadcast system. 放送システムのＭＰＵタイムスタンプ記述子のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of the MPU time stamp descriptor of a broadcast system. 放送システムのＭＨ－ＥＩＴのデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of MH-EIT of a broadcast system. 放送システムのイベントパッケージ記述子のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of the event package descriptor of a broadcast system. 実施例１に係る放送受信装置のブロック図である。1 is a block diagram of a broadcast receiving apparatus according to Embodiment 1. FIG. 実施例１に係る放送受信装置の提示機能の論理的プレーン構造の構成図である。It is a block diagram of the logical plane structure of the presentation function of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 1. FIG. 実施例１に係る放送受信装置のソフトウェア構成図である。1 is a software configuration diagram of a broadcast receiving apparatus according to Embodiment 1. FIG. 実施例１に係る放送局サーバのブロック図である。1 is a block diagram of a broadcast station server according to Embodiment 1. FIG. 実施例１に係るサービス事業者サーバのブロック図である。1 is a block diagram of a service provider server according to Embodiment 1. FIG. 実施例１に係る携帯情報端末のブロック図である。1 is a block diagram of a portable information terminal according to Embodiment 1. FIG. 実施例１に係る携帯情報端末のソフトウェア構成図である。1 is a software configuration diagram of a portable information terminal according to Embodiment 1. FIG. 実施例１に係る放送受信装置のクロック同期／提示同期のシステム構成図である。1 is a system configuration diagram of clock synchronization / presentation synchronization of a broadcast receiving apparatus according to Embodiment 1. FIG. 放送システムのＮＴＰ形式のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of the NTP format of a broadcast system. 放送システムのＭＨ－ＴＯＴのデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of MH-TOT of a broadcast system. 放送システムのＪＳＴ＿ｔｉｍｅパラメータのフォーマットを示す図である。It is a figure which shows the format of the JST_time parameter of a broadcast system. 放送システムのＴＭＣＣ拡張情報領域の時刻情報のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of the time information of the TMCC extension information area | region of a broadcast system. 実施例１に係る放送受信装置のＭＪＤからの現在日付の算出方法を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the calculation method of the present date from MJD of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 1. FIG. 実施例１に係る放送受信装置のチャンネルスキャン時の動作シーケンス図である。It is an operation | movement sequence diagram at the time of the channel scan of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 1. FIG. 放送システムのＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴのデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of TLV-NIT of a broadcasting system. 放送システムの衛星分配システム記述子のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of the satellite distribution system descriptor of a broadcast system. 放送システムのサービスリスト記述子のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of the service list descriptor of a broadcast system. 放送システムのＡＭＴのデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of AMT of a broadcast system. 実施例１に係る放送受信装置の選局時の動作シーケンス図である。FIG. 3 is an operation sequence diagram at the time of channel selection of the broadcast receiving apparatus according to the first embodiment. 放送システムのＰＬＴによる各パッケージのＭＰＴの参照を説明する概念図である。It is a conceptual diagram explaining the reference of MPT of each package by PLT of a broadcasting system. 放送システムのＰＬＴのデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of PLT of a broadcast system. 実施例１に係る放送受信装置を制御可能なリモコンの外観図である。1 is an external view of a remote control capable of controlling a broadcast receiving device according to Embodiment 1. FIG. 放送システムのリモートコントロールキー記述子のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of the remote control key descriptor of a broadcasting system. マルチ編成チャンネルの選局処理を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the channel selection process of a multi organization channel. マルチビュー対応番組のアングル選択処理を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the angle selection process of a multi view corresponding program. 放送システムのＬＣＴのデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of LCT of a broadcast system. 放送システムのＭＰＵ提示領域指定記述子のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of the MPU presentation area | region designation | designated descriptor of a broadcasting system. ＬＣＴに基づくレイアウト番号へのレイアウトの割当を示す図である。It is a figure which shows allocation of the layout to the layout number based on LCT. ＬＣＴに基づくレイアウト番号へのレイアウトの割当を示す図である。It is a figure which shows allocation of the layout to the layout number based on LCT. ＬＣＴに基づくレイアウト番号へのレイアウトの割当を示す図である。It is a figure which shows allocation of the layout to the layout number based on LCT. ＬＣＴに基づくレイアウト番号へのレイアウトの割当を示す図である。It is a figure which shows allocation of the layout to the layout number based on LCT. ＬＣＴに基づく画面レイアウト制御の例外処理を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the exception process of the screen layout control based on LCT. ＬＣＴに基づく画面レイアウト制御の例外処理を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the exception process of the screen layout control based on LCT. 放送システムの映像コンポーネント記述子のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of the video component descriptor of a broadcast system. 映像コンポーネント記述子の映像信号アスペクト比の意味を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the meaning of the video signal aspect ratio of a video component descriptor. 実施例１に係る放送受信装置のアスペクト比変換処理を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the aspect-ratio conversion process of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 1. FIG. 実施例１に係る放送受信装置のアスペクト比変換処理を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the aspect-ratio conversion process of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 1. FIG. 実施例１に係る放送受信装置のＥＰＧ画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the EPG screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on Example 1. FIG. 実施例１に係る放送受信装置のＥＰＧ画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the EPG screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on Example 1. FIG. 実施例１に係る放送受信装置のＥＰＧ画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the EPG screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on Example 1. FIG. 実施例１に係る放送受信装置の緊急警報放送表示時の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure at the time of the emergency alert broadcast display of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 1. FIG. 放送システムのコンテンツコピー制御記述子のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of the content copy control descriptor of a broadcasting system. コンテンツコピー制御記述子のコピー制御情報の意味を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the meaning of the copy control information of a content copy control descriptor. 放送システムのコンテンツ利用制御記述子のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of the content utilization control descriptor of a broadcasting system. 実施例２に係る放送受信装置のブロック図である。6 is a block diagram of a broadcast receiving apparatus according to Embodiment 2. FIG. 放送サービス切り替え時の現在時刻表示の不整合を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining inconsistency of the present time display at the time of broadcast service switching. 実施例２に係る現在時刻情報参照元の選択制御の動作を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining operation | movement of selection control of the present time information reference source which concerns on Example 2. FIG. 実施例２に係る現在時刻情報の更新処理の動作シーケンス図である。FIG. 9 is an operation sequence diagram of current time information update processing according to the second embodiment. 実施例２に係る放送受信装置のＥＰＧ画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the EPG screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on Example 2. FIG. 実施例２に係る放送受信装置のＥＰＧ画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the EPG screen of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on Example 2. FIG. アプリケーション伝送方式を示す図である。It is a figure which shows an application transmission system. アセットの種類を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the kind of asset. アセット取得先のロケーション情報のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of the location information of an asset acquisition destination. アセット取得先の種別の意味を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the meaning of the classification of an asset acquisition destination. ＭＰＵ提示領域指定記述子のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of a MPU presentation area | region designation | designated descriptor. ＭＨ－ＡＩＴのデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of MH-AIT. アプリケーション形式の割り当てを示す図である。It is a figure which shows assignment of an application format. アプリケーション制御コードの規定を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the prescription | regulation of an application control code. アプリケーション識別子のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of an application identifier. ＭＨ－アプリケーション記述子のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of MH-application descriptor. ＭＨ－伝送プロトコル記述子のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of MH-transmission protocol descriptor. プロトコル識別の意味を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the meaning of protocol identification. セレクタ領域のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of a selector area | region. ＭＨ－簡易アプリケーションロケーション記述子のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of MH-simple application location descriptor. ＭＨ－アプリケーション境界権限設定記述子のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of MH-application boundary authority setting descriptor. ＭＨ－起動優先情報記述子のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of MH-starting priority information descriptor. ＭＨ－キャッシュ情報記述子のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of MH-cache information descriptor. ＭＨ－アプリケーション有効期限記述子のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of MH-application expiration date descriptor. ＭＨ－確率的適用遅延記述子のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of MH-stochastic application delay descriptor. 実施例３に係る放送受信装置のアプリケーション起動時の動作シーケンス図である。FIG. 10 is an operation sequence diagram of the broadcast receiving device according to the third embodiment when starting an application. 実施例３に係る放送受信装置のアプリケーション起動時の動作シーケンス図である。FIG. 10 is an operation sequence diagram of the broadcast receiving device according to the third embodiment when starting an application. 実施例３に係る放送受信装置のアプリケーション起動時の動作シーケンス図である。FIG. 10 is an operation sequence diagram of the broadcast receiving device according to the third embodiment when starting an application. 実施例３に係る携帯情報端末の連携時の動作シーケンス図である。FIG. 10 is an operation sequence diagram when the portable information terminal according to the third embodiment is linked. 実施例３に係る携帯情報端末の連携時の動作シーケンス図である。FIG. 10 is an operation sequence diagram when the portable information terminal according to the third embodiment is linked. 実施例３に係る放送受信装置および携帯情報端末のアプリケーション起動時の動作シーケンス図である。It is an operation | movement sequence diagram at the time of the application starting of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3, and a portable information terminal. 実施例３に係る携帯情報端末の連携制御アプリの基本画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the basic screen of the cooperation control application of the portable information terminal which concerns on Example 3. FIG. 実施例３に係る携帯情報端末の連携制御アプリの基本画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the basic screen of the cooperation control application of the portable information terminal which concerns on Example 3. FIG. 実施例３に係る放送受信装置の報知画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the alerting | reporting screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3. FIG. 実施例３に係る放送受信装置の放送連携アプリランチャの画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application launcher of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3. FIG. 実施例３に係る放送受信装置のデータ放送画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the data broadcast screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3. FIG. 実施例３に係る放送受信装置の放送連携アプリ実行画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application execution screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3. FIG. 実施例３に係る放送受信装置の放送連携アプリ実行画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application execution screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3. FIG. 実施例３に係る放送受信装置の放送連携アプリ実行画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application execution screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3. FIG. 実施例３に係る放送受信装置の放送連携アプリ実行画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application execution screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3. FIG. 実施例３に係る放送受信装置のエラー表示画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the error display screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3. FIG. 実施例３に係る携帯情報端末の放送連携アプリ実行画面の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application execution screen of the portable information terminal concerning Example 3. 実施例３に係る放送受信装置のＥＰＧ表示画面の詳細情報の図である。It is a figure of the detailed information of the EPG display screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3. FIG. 実施例３に係る放送受信装置のＥＰＧ表示画面の詳細情報の図である。It is a figure of the detailed information of the EPG display screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3. FIG. 実施例３に係る放送受信装置のＥＰＧ表示画面の詳細情報の図である。It is a figure of the detailed information of the EPG display screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3. FIG. 実施例３に係る放送受信装置のＥＰＧ表示画面の詳細情報の図である。It is a figure of the detailed information of the EPG display screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3. FIG. 実施例３に係る放送受信装置のＥＰＧ表示画面の詳細情報の図である。It is a figure of the detailed information of the EPG display screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3. FIG. 実施例３に係る放送受信装置のＥＰＧ表示画面の詳細情報の図である。It is a figure of the detailed information of the EPG display screen of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3. FIG. 実施例３に係る放送受信装置の放送連携アプリ取得時の動作シーケンス図である。It is an operation | movement sequence diagram at the time of the broadcast cooperation application acquisition of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 3. FIG. 実施例３に係る携帯情報端末の放送連携アプリ取得時の動作シーケンス図である。It is an operation | movement sequence diagram at the time of the broadcast cooperation application acquisition of the portable information terminal which concerns on Example 3. FIG. ＭＨ－アプリケーション記述子のデータ構造を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the data structure of MH-application descriptor. 実施例４に係る端末連携時の動作シーケンス図である。FIG. 10 is an operation sequence diagram in terminal cooperation according to the fourth embodiment. 実施例５に係る端末連携時の動作シーケンス図である。FIG. 10 is an operation sequence diagram during terminal cooperation according to the fifth embodiment. 実施例６に係る端末連携時の動作シーケンス図である。FIG. 10 is an operation sequence diagram in terminal cooperation according to the sixth embodiment. 実施例６に係る端末連携時の動作シーケンス図である。FIG. 10 is an operation sequence diagram in terminal cooperation according to the sixth embodiment. 実施例７に係る放送受信装置の放送連携アプリランチャの画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application launcher of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 7. FIG. 実施例７に係る放送受信装置の放送連携アプリランチャの画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application launcher of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 7. FIG. 実施例７に係る放送受信装置の放送連携アプリランチャの画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application launcher of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 7. FIG. 実施例７に係る放送受信装置の放送連携アプリランチャの画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application launcher of the broadcast receiver which concerns on Example 7. FIG. 実施例７に係る放送受信装置の画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the broadcast receiving apparatus which concerns on Example 7. FIG. 実施例７に係る携帯情報端末の放送連携アプリの画面表示図である。It is a screen display figure of the broadcast cooperation application of the portable information terminal concerning Example 7.
　以下、本発明の実施形態の例を、図面を用いて説明する。 Hereinafter, an example of an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
　（実施例１）
　［システム構成］
　図１は、本実施例の放送受信装置を含む放送通信システムの一例を示すシステム構成図である。本実施例の放送通信システムは、放送受信装置１００とアンテナ１００ａ、インターネット２００等のブロードバンドネットワークおよびルータ装置２００ｒとアクセスポイント２００ａ、放送局の電波塔３００ｔと放送衛星（または通信衛星）３００ｓ、放送局サーバ３００、サービス事業者サーバ４００、その他のアプリケーションサーバ５００、移動体電話通信サーバ６００と移動体電話通信網の基地局６００ｂ、携帯情報端末７００、で構成される。 Example 1
[System configuration]
FIG. 1 is a system configuration diagram illustrating an example of a broadcast communication system including a broadcast receiving apparatus according to the present embodiment. The broadcast communication system of this embodiment includes a broadcast receiver 100 and an antenna 100a, a broadband network such as the Internet 200, a router 200r and an access point 200a, a radio tower 300t and a broadcast satellite (or communication satellite) 300s, a broadcast station A server 300, a service provider server 400, other application servers 500, a mobile telephone communication server 600, a base station 600b of a mobile telephone communication network, and a portable information terminal 700.
　放送受信装置１００は、電波塔３００ｔから送出された放送波を、放送衛星（または通信衛星）３００ｓおよびアンテナ１００ａを介して受信する。あるいは、電波塔３００ｔから送出された放送波を、放送衛星（または通信衛星）３００ｓを介さずに、直接アンテナ１００ａから受信しても良い。また、放送受信装置１００は、ルータ装置２００ｒを介してインターネット２００と接続可能であり、インターネット２００上の各サーバ装置やその他の通信機器との通信によるデータの送受信が可能である。 The broadcast receiving apparatus 100 receives the broadcast wave transmitted from the radio tower 300t via the broadcast satellite (or communication satellite) 300s and the antenna 100a. Alternatively, the broadcast wave transmitted from the radio tower 300t may be received directly from the antenna 100a without passing through the broadcast satellite (or communication satellite) 300s. The broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can be connected to the Internet 200 via the router apparatus 200r, and can transmit and receive data by communication with each server apparatus and other communication devices on the Internet 200.
　ルータ装置２００ｒは、インターネット２００と有線通信により接続され、また、放送受信装置１００とは有線通信または無線通信で、携帯情報端末７００とは無線通信で接続される。前記無線通信は、Ｗｉ－Ｆｉ（登録商標）等の方式が使用されて良い。これにより、インターネット２００上の各サーバ装置やその他の通信機器と放送受信装置１００と携帯情報端末７００とが、ルータ装置２００ｒを介して、データの送受信を相互に行うことが可能となる。なお、放送受信装置１００と携帯情報端末７００との通信は、ルータ装置２００ｒを介さずに、ＢｌｕｅＴｏｏｔｈ（登録商標）やＮＦＣ（Ｎｅａｒ　Ｆｉｅｌｄ　Ｃｏｍｍｕｎｉｃａｔｉｏｎ）等の方式で直接通信を行っても良い。 The router device 200r is connected to the Internet 200 by wired communication, is connected to the broadcast receiving device 100 by wired communication or wireless communication, and is connected to the portable information terminal 700 by wireless communication. For the wireless communication, a method such as Wi-Fi (registered trademark) may be used. As a result, each server device and other communication devices on the Internet 200, the broadcast receiving device 100, and the portable information terminal 700 can mutually transmit and receive data via the router device 200r. Note that the communication between the broadcast receiving device 100 and the portable information terminal 700 may be performed directly using a method such as BlueTooth (registered trademark) or NFC (Near Field Communication) without using the router device 200r.
　電波塔３００ｔは、放送局の放送設備であり、放送番組の符号化データや字幕情報、その他のアプリケーション、汎用データ、等を含む放送波を送出する。放送衛星（または通信衛星）３００ｓは、放送局の電波塔３００ｔから送信された放送波を受信し、適宜周波数変換等を行った後に、放送受信装置１００に接続されたアンテナ１００ａに対して前記放送波を再送信する中継器である。また、前記放送局は放送局サーバ３００を備えるものとする。放送局サーバ３００は、放送番組（動画コンテンツ等）および各放送番組の番組タイトル、番組ＩＤ、番組概要、出演者情報、放送日時、等のメタデータを記憶し、前記動画コンテンツや各メタデータを、契約に基づいて、サービス事業者に対して提供することが可能であるものとする。なお、サービス事業者に対する前記動画コンテンツおよび各メタデータの提供は、放送局サーバ３００が備えるＡＰＩ（Ａｐｐｌｉｃａｔｉｏｎ　Ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍｉｎｇ　Ｉｎｔｅｒｆａｃｅ）を通して行われるものであって良い。 The radio tower 300t is a broadcasting facility of a broadcasting station, and transmits broadcast waves including encoded data of broadcast programs, caption information, other applications, general-purpose data, and the like. The broadcast satellite (or communication satellite) 300s receives the broadcast wave transmitted from the radio tower 300t of the broadcast station, performs appropriate frequency conversion, etc., and then broadcasts the antenna 100a connected to the broadcast receiving device 100 to the antenna 100a. It is a repeater that retransmits waves. The broadcasting station includes a broadcasting station server 300. The broadcast station server 300 stores metadata such as broadcast programs (video content, etc.) and program titles, program IDs, program outlines, performer information, broadcast date and time of each broadcast program, and the video content and each metadata are stored. Based on the contract, it can be provided to the service provider. The provision of the moving image content and each metadata to the service provider may be performed through an API (Application Programming Interface) included in the broadcast station server 300.
　サービス事業者サーバ４００は、サービス事業者が用意するサーバ装置であり、放送局から配信される放送番組に連携した各種サービスを提供することが可能であるものとする。また、サービス事業者サーバ４００は、放送局サーバ３００から提供された動画コンテンツおよびメタデータや、放送番組に連携する各種コンテンツおよびアプリケーション等の記憶、管理および配信等を行う。また、テレビ受信機等からの問い合わせに対して、提供可能なコンテンツやアプリケーション等の検索や一覧の提供を行う機能も有するものとする。なお、前記コンテンツおよびメタデータの記憶、管理および配信と、前記アプリケーションの記憶、管理および配信は、異なるサーバ装置が行うものであっても良い。前記放送局と前記サービス事業者は同一であっても良いし、異なっていても良い。サービス事業者サーバ４００は、異なるサービス毎に複数用意されても良い。また、サービス事業者サーバ４００の機能は、放送局サーバ３００が兼ね備えるものであっても良い。 Service provider server 400 is a server device prepared by a service provider, and is capable of providing various services linked to broadcast programs distributed from broadcast stations. The service provider server 400 also stores, manages, and distributes video content and metadata provided from the broadcast station server 300, various contents and applications linked to broadcast programs, and the like. In addition, in response to an inquiry from a television receiver or the like, it also has a function of searching for available contents and applications and providing a list. The storage, management and distribution of the content and metadata and the storage, management and distribution of the application may be performed by different server devices. The broadcasting station and the service provider may be the same or different. A plurality of service provider servers 400 may be prepared for different services. Moreover, the function of the service provider server 400 may be provided by the broadcast station server 300.
　その他のアプリケーションサーバ５００は、その他の一般的なアプリケーションや動作プログラム、コンテンツ、データ、等の記憶、管理および配信等を行う公知のサーバ装置である。その他のアプリケーションサーバ５００は、インターネット２００上に複数あっても良い。 Other application server 500 is a known server device that stores, manages, and distributes other general applications, operation programs, contents, data, and the like. There may be a plurality of other application servers 500 on the Internet 200.
　移動体電話通信サーバ６００は、インターネット２００と接続され、一方、基地局６００ｂを介して携帯情報端末７００と接続される。移動体電話通信サーバ６００は、携帯情報端末７００の移動体電話通信網を介した電話通信（通話）およびデータ送受信を管理し、携帯情報端末７００とインターネット２００上の各サーバ装置やその他の通信機器との通信によるデータの送受信を可能とする。基地局６００ｂと携帯情報端末７００との通信は、Ｗ－ＣＤＭＡ（Ｗｉｄｅｂａｎｄ　Ｃｏｄｅ　Ｄｉｖｉｓｉｏｎ　Ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅ　Ａｃｃｅｓｓ）（登録商標）方式やＧＳＭ（Ｇｌｏｂａｌ　Ｓｙｓｔｅｍ　ｆｏｒ　Ｍｏｂｉｌｅ　ｃｏｍｍｕｎｉｃａｔｉｏｎｓ）（登録商標）方式、ＬＴＥ（Ｌｏｎｇ　Ｔｅｒｍ　Ｅｖｏｌｕｔｉｏｎ）方式、あるいはその他の通信方式によって行われるものであって良い。 The mobile telephone communication server 600 is connected to the Internet 200, and is connected to the portable information terminal 700 via the base station 600b. The mobile telephone communication server 600 manages telephone communication (call) and data transmission / reception via the mobile telephone communication network of the portable information terminal 700, and each server device and other communication devices on the portable information terminal 700 and the Internet 200. Data can be sent and received through communication with the. The communication between the base station 600b and the portable information terminal 700 is W-CDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access) (registered trademark) method, GSM (Global System for Mobile communications) (registered trademark) method, LTE (LongTerm Term) method. Alternatively, it may be performed by other communication methods.
　携帯情報端末７００は、移動体電話通信網を介した電話通信（通話）およびデータ送受信の機能やＷｉ－Ｆｉ（登録商標）等による無線通信の機能を有するものとする。携帯情報端末７００は、ルータ装置２００ｒやアクセスポイント２００ａを介して、あるいは、移動体電話通信網の基地局６００ｂおよび移動体電話通信サーバ６００を介して、インターネット２００と接続可能であり、インターネット２００上の各サーバ装置やその他の通信機器との通信によるデータの送受信が可能である。アクセスポイント２００ａは、インターネット２００と有線通信により接続され、また、携帯情報端末７００とは無線通信で接続される。前記無線通信は、Ｗｉ－Ｆｉ（登録商標）等の方式が使用されて良い。なお、携帯情報端末７００と放送受信装置１００との通信は、アクセスポイント２００ａおよびインターネット２００とルータ装置２００ｒを介して、あるいは、基地局６００ｂと移動体電話通信サーバ６００およびインターネット２００とルータ装置２００ｒを介して行われるものであっても良い。 The portable information terminal 700 has a function of telephone communication (call) and data transmission / reception via a mobile telephone communication network and a function of wireless communication by Wi-Fi (registered trademark) or the like. The portable information terminal 700 can be connected to the Internet 200 via the router device 200r and the access point 200a, or via the mobile phone communication network base station 600b and the mobile phone communication server 600. It is possible to send and receive data by communication with each server device and other communication devices. The access point 200a is connected to the Internet 200 by wired communication, and is connected to the portable information terminal 700 by wireless communication. For the wireless communication, a method such as Wi-Fi (registered trademark) may be used. Communication between portable information terminal 700 and broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is performed via access point 200a and Internet 200 and router apparatus 200r, or through base station 600b and mobile telephone communication server 600, Internet 200 and router apparatus 200r. It may be carried out via.
　［ＭＭＴ方式の概要］
　図１に示した放送受信装置１００は、映像や音声等のデータを伝送するメディアトランスポート方式として、従来のデジタル放送システムで多く採用されているＭＰＥＧ（Ｍｏｖｉｎｇ　Ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅ　Ｅｘｐｅｒｔｓ　Ｇｒｏｕｐ）－２システムで規定されたＴＳ（Ｔｒａｎｓｐｏｒｔ　Ｓｔｒｅａｍ）（以下、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳと記述する。）に代替して、ＭＭＴ（ＭＰＥＧ　Ｍｅｄｉａ　Ｔｒａｎｓｐｏｒｔ）に対応可能なテレビ受信機であるものとする。ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳとＭＭＴの双方に対応可能なテレビ受信機であっても良い。 [Outline of MMT method]
The broadcast receiving apparatus 100 shown in FIG. 1 is defined by the MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group) -2 system, which is widely adopted in conventional digital broadcasting systems, as a media transport system for transmitting data such as video and audio. It is assumed that the television receiver is compatible with MMT (MPEG Media Transport) instead of TS (Transport Stream) (hereinafter referred to as MPEG2-TS). It may be a television receiver that can support both MPEG2-TS and MMT.
　ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳは、番組を構成する映像や音声等のコンポーネントを、制御信号やクロックと共に１つのストリームに多重することを特徴とする。クロックも含めて１つのストリームとして扱うため、伝送品質が確保された１つの伝送路で１つのコンテンツを伝送するのに適しており、従来の多くのデジタル放送システムで採用された。一方、近年のコンテンツの多様化、コンテンツを利用する機器の多様化、コンテンツを配信する伝送路の多様化、コンテンツ蓄積環境の多様化、等、コンテンツ配信に関する環境変化に対してＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳの機能に限界があることから、新たに策定されたメディアトランスポート方式がＭＭＴである。 MPEG2-TS is characterized in that components such as video and audio constituting a program are multiplexed into one stream together with a control signal and a clock. Since it is handled as one stream including a clock, it is suitable for transmitting one content through one transmission path in which transmission quality is ensured, and has been adopted in many conventional digital broadcasting systems. On the other hand, the function of MPEG2-TS in response to environmental changes related to content distribution, such as recent diversification of content, diversification of devices that use content, diversification of transmission paths for content distribution, diversification of content storage environment, etc. Therefore, MMT is a newly developed media transport system.
　図２Ａに、本実施例のＭＭＴにおける符号化信号の概要の一例を示す。同図に示したように、本実施例のＭＭＴは、符号化信号を構成する要素として、ＭＦＵ（Ｍｅｄｉａ　Ｆｒａｇｍｅｎｔ　Ｕｎｉｔ）、ＭＰＵ（Ｍｅｄｉａ　Ｐｒｏｃｅｓｓｉｎｇ　Ｕｎｉｔ）、ＭＭＴＰ（ＭＭＴ　Ｐｒｏｔｏｃｏｌ）ペイロード、ＭＭＴＰパケットを有するものとする。 FIG. 2A shows an example of an outline of the encoded signal in the MMT of the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, the MMT of this embodiment has an MFU (Media Fragment Unit), an MPU (Media Processing Unit), an MMTP (MMT Protocol) payload, and an MMTP packet as elements constituting the encoded signal. And
　ＭＦＵは、映像や音声等の伝送時の形式であり、ＮＡＬ（Ｎｅｔｗｏｒｋ　Ａｂｓｔｒａｃｔｉｏｎ　Ｌａｙｅｒ）ユニット単位やアクセスユニット単位で構成されて良い。ＭＰＵは、１つ以上のアクセスユニットを含み、ＭＰＵ単体で映像や音声の復号処理を行うことが可能であるものとする。ＭＰＵは、ＭＰＵ全体の構成に関する情報を含むＭＰＵメタデータと、符号化したメディアデータの情報を含むムービーフラグメントメタデータと、符号化したメディアデータであるサンプルデータと、で構成されて良い。１つのＭＰＵにムービーフラグメントデータとサンプルデータが複数存在しても良い。また、サンプルデータからはＭＦＵを取り出すことが可能であるものとする。図２Ｂに、ＭＰＵの構成の一例を示す。なお、同一のアセットに属するＭＰＵ毎にシーケンス番号を付加することにより、アセットを識別するアセットＩＤとＭＰＵのシーケンス番号で、任意のＭＰＵを他のＭＰＵと区別可能であるものとする。また、映像コンポーネントや音声コンポーネント等のメディアの場合、ＭＰＵ単位やアクセスユニット単位で提示時刻や復号時刻が指定されても良い。 MFU is a format when transmitting video or audio, and may be configured in units of NAL (Network Abstraction Layer) units or access units. The MPU includes one or more access units, and can perform video and audio decoding processing by the MPU alone. The MPU may be composed of MPU metadata including information on the configuration of the entire MPU, movie fragment metadata including information of encoded media data, and sample data that is encoded media data. A plurality of movie fragment data and sample data may exist in one MPU. Further, it is assumed that MFU can be extracted from the sample data. FIG. 2B shows an example of the configuration of the MPU. Note that, by adding a sequence number to each MPU belonging to the same asset, any MPU can be distinguished from other MPUs by the asset ID for identifying the asset and the MPU sequence number. In the case of media such as video components and audio components, the presentation time and decoding time may be specified in units of MPUs or access units.
　ＭＭＴＰパケットは、ヘッダ部とＭＭＴＰペイロードで構成され、ＭＦＵおよびＭＭＴの制御情報を伝送するものとする。ＭＭＴＰペイロードは、ペイロード部に格納する内容（データユニット）に応じたペイロードヘッダを備えるものとする。図２Ｃに、映像／音声信号からＭＦＵを構成し、更にＭＭＴＰペイロードに格納して、ＭＭＴＰパケットを構成するまでの概要の一例を示す。なお、フレーム間予測を用いて符号化を行う映像信号では、ＭＰＵをＧＯＰ（Ｇｒｏｕｐ　Ｏｆ　Ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅｓ）単位で構成することが望ましい。また、伝送するＭＦＵの大きさが小さい場合、１つのペイロード部に１つのＭＦＵを格納しても良いし、１つのペイロード部に同一種類の複数のＭＦＵを格納しても良い。また、伝送するＭＦＵの大きさが大きい場合には、１つのＭＦＵを複数のペイロード部に分割して格納しても良い。また、ＭＭＴＰパケットは、伝送路上におけるパケットロスを回復するために、ＡＬ－ＦＥＣ（Ａｐｐｌｉｃａｔｉｏｎ　Ｌａｙｅｒ　Ｆｏｒｗａｒｄ　Ｅｒｒｏｒ　Ｃｏｒｒｅｃｔｉｏｎ）やＡＲＱ（Ａｕｔｏｍａｔｉｃ　Ｒｅｐｅａｔ　Ｒｅｑｕｅｓｔ）等の技術を用いて保護されて良い。 The MMTP packet includes a header part and an MMTP payload, and transmits MFU and MMT control information. The MMTP payload includes a payload header corresponding to the content (data unit) stored in the payload portion. FIG. 2C shows an example of the outline from the construction of the MFU from the video / audio signal, further storing it in the MMTP payload, and configuring the MMTP packet. Note that, in a video signal that is encoded using inter-frame prediction, it is desirable to configure the MPU in GOP (Group Of Pictures) units. Further, when the size of the MFU to be transmitted is small, one MFU may be stored in one payload part, or a plurality of MFUs of the same type may be stored in one payload part. When the size of the MFU to be transmitted is large, one MFU may be divided into a plurality of payload parts and stored. Further, the MMTP packet may be protected using a technique such as AL-FEC (Application Layer Forward Error Correction) or ARQ (Automatic Repeat Request) in order to recover the packet loss on the transmission path.
　本実施例の放送システムにおいては、映像符号化方式としてＭＰＥＧ－Ｈ　ＨＥＶＣ（Ｈｉｇｈ　Ｅｆｆｉｃｉｅｎｃｙ　Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｃｏｄｉｎｇ）が用いられ、音声符号化方式としてＭＰＥＧ－４　ＡＡＣ（Ａｄｖａｎｃｅｄ　Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｃｏｄｉｎｇ）またはＭＰＥＧ－４　ＡＬＳ（Ａｕｄｉｏ　Ｌｏｓｓｌｅｓｓ　Ｃｏｄｉｎｇ）が用いられるものとする。前記各方式により符号化された、放送番組の映像や音声等の符号化データは、ＭＦＵやＭＰＵの形式とし、更にＭＭＴＰペイロードに乗せてＭＭＴＰパケット化して、ＩＰ（Ｉｎｔｅｒｎｅｔ　Ｐｒｏｔｏｃｏｌ）パケットで伝送するものとする。また、放送番組に関連するデータコンテンツに関してもＭＦＵやＭＰＵの形式とし、更にＭＭＴＰペイロードに乗せてＭＭＴＰパケット化して、ＩＰパケットで伝送して良い。データコンテンツの伝送方式としては、（１）放送に同期したデータのストリーミングに用いる字幕／文字スーパー伝送方式、（２）放送と非同期のデータ伝送サービスに用いるアプリケーション伝送方式、（３）放送局からのテレビ受信機上で動作するアプリケーションに対する同期／非同期のメッセージ通知に用いるイベントメッセージ伝送方式、（４）その他の汎用データを同期型／非同期型で伝送する汎用データ伝送方式、の四種類が用意されるものとする。 In the broadcasting system of the present embodiment, MPEG-H HEVC (High Efficiency Video Coding) is used as the video encoding method, and MPEG-4 AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) or MPEG-4 ALS (Audio Lossless) is used as the audio encoding method. Coding) is used. The encoded data such as video and audio of the broadcast program encoded by the above-mentioned methods is in the MFU or MPU format, is further carried on the MMTP payload, is converted into an MMTP packet, and is transmitted as an IP (Internet Protocol) packet. And Further, data contents related to a broadcast program may be in the MFU or MPU format, further MMTP packetized on the MMTP payload, and transmitted by IP packet. The data content transmission method includes (1) a caption / text super transmission method used for streaming data synchronized with broadcasting, (2) an application transmission method used for data transmission service asynchronous with broadcasting, and (3) from a broadcasting station. There are four types of event message transmission methods used for synchronous / asynchronous message notification to applications running on a television receiver, and (4) general-purpose data transmission methods for transmitting other general-purpose data in a synchronous / asynchronous manner. Shall.
　ＭＭＴＰパケットの伝送には、放送伝送路ではＵＤＰ／ＩＰ（Ｕｓｅｒ　Ｄａｔａｇｒａｍ　Ｐｒｏｔｏｃｏｌ／Ｉｎｔｅｒｎｅｔ　Ｐｒｏｔｏｃｏｌ）が用いられ、通信回線ではＵＤＰ／ＩＰまたはＴＣＰ／ＩＰ（Ｔｒａｎｓｍｉｓｓｉｏｎ　Ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ　Ｐｒｏｔｏｃｏｌ／Ｉｎｔｅｒｎｅｔ　Ｐｒｏｔｏｃｏｌ）が用いられるものとする。また、放送伝送路においては、ＩＰパケットの効率的な伝送のためにＴＬＶ（Ｔｙｐｅ　Ｌｅｎｇｔｈ　Ｖａｌｕｅ）多重化方式が用いられるものとする。本実施例の放送システムのプロトコルスタックの一例を図３に示す。図中、（Ａ）は放送伝送路におけるプロトコルスタックの一例であり、（Ｂ）は通信回線におけるプロトコルスタックの一例である。 For transmission of MMTP packets, UDP / IP (User Datagram Protocol / Internet Protocol) is used in the broadcast transmission path, and UDP / IP or TCP / IP (Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol) is used in the communication line. . In the broadcast transmission path, a TLV (Type Length Value) multiplexing scheme is used for efficient transmission of IP packets. An example of the protocol stack of the broadcasting system of the present embodiment is shown in FIG. In the figure, (A) is an example of a protocol stack in a broadcast transmission path, and (B) is an example of a protocol stack in a communication line.
　本実施例の放送システムでは、ＭＭＴ－ＳＩ（ＭＭＴ－Ｓｉｇｎａｌｉｎｇ　Ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ）とＴＬＶ－ＳＩ（ＴＬＶ－Ｓｉｇｎａｌｉｎｇ　Ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ）の二種類の制御情報を伝送する仕組みを用意するものとする。ＭＭＴ－ＳＩは、放送番組の構成等を示す制御情報である。ＭＭＴの制御メッセージの形式とし、ＭＭＴＰペイロードに乗せてＭＭＴＰパケット化して、ＩＰパケットで伝送するものとする。ＴＬＶ－ＳＩは、ＩＰパケットの多重に関する制御情報であり、選局のための情報やＩＰアドレスとサービスの対応情報を提供するものとする。 In the broadcasting system of this embodiment, a mechanism for transmitting two types of control information, MMT-SI (MMT-Signaling Information) and TLV-SI (TLV-Signaling Information), is prepared. MMT-SI is control information indicating the configuration of a broadcast program. It is assumed that the format of the MMT control message is MMTP packet on the MMTP payload, and is transmitted as an IP packet. TLV-SI is control information related to multiplexing of IP packets, and provides information for channel selection and correspondence information between IP addresses and services.
　また、ＭＭＴを用いた放送システムにおいても、絶対時刻を提供するために時刻情報を伝送するものとする。なお、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳがＴＳ毎に異なるクロックをベースとしてコンポーネントの表示時刻を示していたのに対し、ＭＭＴでは、協定世界時刻（Ｃｏｏｒｄｉｎａｔｅｄ　Ｕｎｉｖｅｒｓａｌ　Ｔｉｍｅ：ＵＴＣ）をベースとしてコンポーネントの表示時刻を示すものとする。これらの仕組みにより、異なる送信点から異なる伝送路で伝送されたコンポーネントを端末機器が同期して表示することが可能となる。ＵＴＣを提供するために、ＮＴＰ（Ｎｅｔｗｏｒｋ　Ｔｉｍｅ　Ｐｒｏｔｏｃｏｌ）形式のＩＰパケットを用いるものとする。 Also, in a broadcasting system using MMT, time information is transmitted in order to provide absolute time. In addition, while MPEG2-TS indicates the component display time based on a different clock for each TS, MMT indicates the component display time based on the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). To do. With these mechanisms, it is possible for the terminal device to synchronously display components transmitted from different transmission points through different transmission paths. In order to provide the UTC, an NTP (Network Time Protocol) format IP packet is used.
　［ＭＭＴを用いる放送システムの制御情報］
　本実施例の放送受信装置１００が対応する放送システムでは、前述したように、制御情報として、ＩＰパケットの多重のためのＴＬＶ多重化方式に関わるＴＬＶ－ＳＩと、メディアトランスポート方式であるＭＭＴに関わるＭＭＴ－ＳＩを用意する。ＴＬＶ－ＳＩは、放送伝送路に多重化されたＩＰパケットを、放送受信装置１００が多重解除するための情報を提供する。ＴＬＶ－ＳＩは、『テーブル』と『記述子』で構成される。『テーブル』はセクション形式で伝送され、『記述子』は『テーブル』内に配置されるものとする。ＭＭＴ－ＳＩは、ＭＭＴのパッケージの構成や放送サービスに関連する情報を示す伝送制御情報である。ＭＭＴ－ＳＩは、『テーブル』や『記述子』を格納する『メッセージ』、特定の情報を示す要素や属性を持つ『テーブル』、より詳細な情報を示す『記述子』の三階層で構成されるものとする。本実施例の放送システムで用いる制御情報の階層構成の一例を図４に示す。 [Control information of broadcasting system using MMT]
In the broadcast system supported by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the control information includes the TLV-SI related to the TLV multiplexing method for multiplexing IP packets and the MMT that is the media transport method. Prepare the relevant MMT-SI. The TLV-SI provides information for the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 to demultiplex the IP packet multiplexed on the broadcast transmission path. The TLV-SI is composed of a “table” and a “descriptor”. The “table” is transmitted in the section format, and the “descriptor” is arranged in the “table”. The MMT-SI is transmission control information indicating information related to the configuration of the MMT package and the broadcast service. MMT-SI is composed of three levels: “message” for storing “table” and “descriptor”, “table” having elements and attributes indicating specific information, and “descriptor” indicating more detailed information. Shall. An example of the hierarchical structure of the control information used in the broadcasting system of the present embodiment is shown in FIG.
　＜ＴＬＶ－ＳＩで使用されるテーブル＞
　図５Ａに、本実施例の放送受信装置１００が対応する放送システムのＴＬＶ－ＳＩで使用される『テーブル』の一覧を示す。本実施例では、ＴＬＶ－ＳＩの『テーブル』として以下に示すものが用いられるものとする。 <Table used in TLV-SI>
FIG. 5A shows a list of “tables” used in the TLV-SI of the broadcasting system supported by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment. In this embodiment, the following table is used as a “table” of TLV-SI.
　（１）ＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴ
　ＴＬＶ用ネットワーク情報テーブル（Ｎｅｔｗｏｒｋ　Ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ　Ｔａｂｌｅ　ｆｏｒ　ＴＬＶ：ＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴ）は、ネットワークにより伝送されるＴＬＶストリームの物理的構成に関する情報およびネットワーク自身の特性を表すものである。 (1) TLV-NIT
The network information table for TLV (Network Information Table for TLV: TLV-NIT) represents information on the physical configuration of the TLV stream transmitted by the network and the characteristics of the network itself.
　（２）ＡＭＴ
　アドレスマップテーブル（Ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ　Ｍａｐ　Ｔａｂｌｅ：ＡＭＴ）は、ネットワークにおいて伝送される各サービスを構成するＩＰパケットのマルチキャストグループの一覧を提供する。 (2) AMT
The address map table (Address Map Table: AMT) provides a list of multicast groups of IP packets constituting each service transmitted in the network.
　（３）事業者が設定するテーブル
　その他、サービス事業者等が独自に設定したテーブルを用意することが可能である。 (3) Table set by the operator It is also possible to prepare a table uniquely set by the service operator.
　＜ＴＬＶ－ＳＩで使用される記述子＞
　図５Ｂに、本実施例の放送受信装置１００が対応する放送システムのＴＬＶ－ＳＩに配置される『記述子』の一覧を示す。本実施例では、ＴＬＶ－ＳＩの『記述子』として以下に示すものが用いられるものとする。 <Descriptors used in TLV-SI>
FIG. 5B shows a list of “descriptors” arranged in the TLV-SI of the broadcasting system to which the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment corresponds. In this embodiment, the following are used as “descriptors” of TLV-SI.
　（１）サービスリスト記述子
　サービスリスト記述子は、サービス識別とサービス形式種別によるサービスの一覧を提供する。 (1) Service list descriptor The service list descriptor provides a list of services according to service identification and service type.
　（２）衛星分配システム記述子
　衛星分配システム記述子は、衛星伝送路の物理的条件を示す。 (2) Satellite distribution system descriptor The satellite distribution system descriptor indicates the physical conditions of the satellite transmission path.
　（３）システム管理記述子
　システム管理記述子は、放送と非放送を識別するために使用される。 (3) System management descriptor The system management descriptor is used to identify broadcast and non-broadcast.
　（４）ネットワーク名記述子
　ネットワーク名記述子は、文字符号によりネットワーク名を記述する。 (4) Network name descriptor The network name descriptor describes the network name using character codes.
　（５）リモートコントロールキー記述子
　リモートコントロールキー記述子は、受信機用リモコンのワンタッチ選局ボタンに割り当てるサービスを設定するために使用される。 (5) Remote control key descriptor The remote control key descriptor is used to set a service to be assigned to the one-touch channel selection button of the receiver remote control.
　（６）事業者が設定する記述子
　その他、サービス事業者等が独自に設定した記述子を用意することが可能である。 (6) Descriptors set by service providers In addition, it is possible to prepare descriptors uniquely set by service service providers.
　＜ＭＭＴ－ＳＩで使用されるメッセージ＞
　図６Ａに、本実施例の放送受信装置１００が対応する放送システムのＭＭＴ－ＳＩで使用される『メッセージ』の一覧を示す。本実施例では、ＭＭＴ－ＳＩの『メッセージ』として以下に示すものが用いられるものとする。 <Messages used in MMT-SI>
FIG. 6A shows a list of “messages” used in the MMT-SI of the broadcast system supported by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the following message is used as a “message” of MMT-SI.
　（１）ＰＡメッセージ
　Ｐａｃｋａｇｅ　Ａｃｃｅｓｓ（ＰＡ）メッセージは、種々のテーブルを伝送するために用いる。 (1) PA message The Package Access (PA) message is used to transmit various tables.
　（２）Ｍ２セクションメッセージ
　Ｍ２セクションメッセージは、ＭＰＥＧ－２　Ｓｙｓｔｅｍｓのセクション拡張形式を伝送するために用いる。 (2) M2 section message The M2 section message is used to transmit the section extension format of MPEG-2 Systems.
　（３）ＣＡメッセージ
　ＣＡメッセージは、限定受信方式の識別のためのテーブルを伝送するために用いる。 (3) CA message The CA message is used to transmit a table for identifying the conditional access system.
　（４）Ｍ２短セクションメッセージ
　Ｍ２短セクションメッセージは、ＭＰＥＧ－２　Ｓｙｓｔｅｍｓのセクション短形式を伝送するために用いる。 (4) M2 short section message The M2 short section message is used to transmit the section short format of MPEG-2 Systems.
　（５）データ伝送メッセージ
　データ伝送メッセージは、データ伝送に関するテーブルを格納するメッセージである。 (5) Data transmission message The data transmission message is a message for storing a table relating to data transmission.
　（６）事業者が設定するメッセージ
　その他、サービス事業者等が独自に設定したメッセージを用意することが可能である。 (6) Message set by the operator In addition, it is possible to prepare a message uniquely set by the service operator.
　＜ＭＭＴ－ＳＩで使用されるテーブル＞
　図６Ｂに、本実施例の放送受信装置１００が対応する放送システムのＭＭＴ－ＳＩで使用される『テーブル』の一覧を示す。テーブルは、特定の情報を示す要素や属性を持つ制御情報であり、メッセージに格納してＭＭＴＰパケットで伝送するものとする。なお、テーブルを格納するメッセージはテーブルに応じて決まっていても良い。本実施例では、ＭＭＴ－ＳＩの『テーブル』として以下に示すものが用いられるものとする。 <Table used in MMT-SI>
FIG. 6B shows a list of “tables” used in the MMT-SI of the broadcast system supported by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment. The table is control information having elements and attributes indicating specific information, and is stored in a message and transmitted by an MMTP packet. The message for storing the table may be determined according to the table. In this embodiment, the following table is used as the “table” of MMT-SI.
　（１）ＭＰＴ
　ＭＭＴパッケージテーブル（ＭＭＴ　Ｐａｃｋａｇｅ　Ｔａｂｌｅ：ＭＰＴ）は、アセットのリストやアセットのネットワーク上の位置などのパッケージを構成する情報を与える。ＭＰＴはＰＡメッセージに格納されて良い。 (1) MPT
The MMT package table (MPT) provides information constituting the package such as a list of assets and a position of the assets on the network. The MPT may be stored in the PA message.
　（２）ＰＬＴ
　パッケージリストテーブル（Ｐａｃｋａｇｅ　Ｌｉｓｔ　Ｔａｂｌｅ：ＰＬＴ）は、放送サービスとして提供されるＭＭＴパッケージのＰＡメッセージを伝送するＩＰデータフローおよびパケットＩＤ並びにＩＰサービスを伝送するＩＰデータフローの一覧を示す。ＰＬＴはＰＡメッセージに格納されて良い。 (2) PLT
A package list table (Packet List Table: PLT) shows a list of IP data flows and packet IDs that transmit PA messages of MMT packages provided as broadcasting services, and IP data flows that transmit IP services. The PLT may be stored in the PA message.
　（３）ＬＣＴ
　レイアウト設定テーブル（Ｌａｙｏｕｔ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇｕｒａｔｉｏｎ　Ｔａｂｌｅ：ＬＣＴ）は、提示のためのレイアウト情報をレイアウト番号に対応付けるために用いる。ＬＣＴはＰＡメッセージに格納されて良い。 (3) LCT
A layout setting table (Layout Configuration Table: LCT) is used to associate layout information for presentation with a layout number. The LCT may be stored in the PA message.
　（４）ＥＣＭ
　Ｅｎｔｉｔｌｅｍｅｎｔ　Ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ　Ｍｅｓｓａｇｅ（ＥＣＭ）は、番組情報および制御情報からなる共通情報であり、スクランブルを解除するための鍵情報などを配送する。ＥＣＭはＭ２セクションメッセージに格納されて良い。 (4) ECM
The Entity Control Message (ECM) is common information composed of program information and control information, and delivers key information for descrambling. The ECM may be stored in the M2 section message.
　（５）ＥＭＭ
　Ｅｎｔｉｔｌｅｍｅｎｔ　Ｍａｎａｇｅｍｅｎｔ　Ｍｅｓｓａｇｅ（ＥＭＭ）は、加入者毎の契約情報やＥＣＭ（共通情報）の暗号を解くための鍵情報などを含む個別情報を伝送する。ＥＭＭはＭ２セクションメッセージに格納されて良い。 (5) EMM
The Entity Management Message (EMM) transmits individual information including contract information for each subscriber and key information for decrypting ECM (common information). The EMM may be stored in the M2 section message.
　（６）ＣＡＴ（ＭＨ）
　ＣＡテーブル（Ｃｏｎｄｉｔｉｏｎａｌ　Ａｃｃｅｓｓ　Ｔａｂｌｅ：ＣＡＴ）（ＭＨ）は、限定受信方式の識別のための記述子を格納するために用いる。ＣＡＴ（ＭＨ）はＣＡメッセージに格納されて良い。 (6) CAT (MH)
A CA table (Conditional Access Table: CAT) (MH) is used to store a descriptor for identifying a conditional access system. CAT (MH) may be stored in the CA message.
　（７）ＤＣＭ
　Ｄｏｗｎｌｏａｄ　Ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ　Ｍｅｓｓａｇｅ（ＤＣＭ）は、ダウンロードのための伝送路暗号を復号するための鍵などからなる鍵関連情報を伝送する。ＤＣＭはＭ２セクションメッセージに格納されて良い。 (7) DCM
The Download Control Message (DCM) transmits key related information including a key for decrypting a transmission path cipher for downloading. The DCM may be stored in the M2 section message.
　（８）ＤＭＭ
　Ｄｏｗｎｌｏａｄ　Ｍａｎａｇｅｍｅｎｔ　Ｍｅｓｓａｇｅ（ＤＭＭ）は、ＤＣＭの暗号を解くためのダウンロード鍵などからなる鍵関連情報を伝送する。ＤＭＭはＭ２セクションメッセージに格納されて良い。 (8) DMM
Download Management Message (DMM) transmits key-related information including a download key for decrypting DCM. The DMM may be stored in the M2 section message.
　（９）ＭＨ－ＥＩＴ
　ＭＨ－イベント情報テーブル（ＭＨ－Ｅｖｅｎｔ　Ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ　Ｔａｂｌｅ：ＭＨ－ＥＩＴ）は、各サービスに含まれるイベントに関する時系列情報である。ＭＨ－ＥＩＴはＭ２セクションメッセージに格納されて良い。 (9) MH-EIT
The MH-event information table (MH-Event Information Table: MH-EIT) is time-series information regarding events included in each service. The MH-EIT may be stored in the M2 section message.
　（１０）ＭＨ－ＡＩＴ
　ＭＨ－アプリケーション情報テーブル（ＭＨ－Ａｐｐｌｉｃａｔｉｏｎ　Ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ　Ｔａｂｌｅ：ＭＨ－ＡＩＴ）は、アプリケーションに関する全ての情報およびアプリケーションに要求される起動状態等を格納する。ＭＨ－ＡＩＴはＭ２セクションメッセージに格納されて良い。 (10) MH-AIT
The MH-application information table (MH-Application Information Table: MH-AIT) stores all information related to the application, an activation state required for the application, and the like. The MH-AIT may be stored in the M2 section message.
　（１１）ＭＨ－ＢＩＴ
　ＭＨ－ブロードキャスタ情報テーブル（ＭＨ－Ｂｒｏａｄｃａｓｔｅｒ　Ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ　Ｔａｂｌｅ：ＭＨ－ＢＩＴ）は、ネットワーク上に存在するブロードキャスタの情報を提示するために用いる。ＭＨ－ＢＩＴはＭ２セクションメッセージに格納されて良い。 (11) MH-BIT
An MH-Broadcaster Information Table (MH-BIT) is used to present information on broadcasters existing on the network. The MH-BIT may be stored in the M2 section message.
　（１２）ＭＨ－ＳＤＴＴ
　ＭＨ－ソフトウェアダウンロードトリガテーブル（ＭＨ－Ｓｏｆｔｗａｒｅ　Ｄｏｗｎｌｏａｄ　Ｔｒｉｇｇｅｒ　Ｔａｂｌｅ：ＭＨ－ＳＤＴＴ）は、ダウンロードの告知情報のために用いる。ＭＨ－ＳＤＴＴはＭ２セクションメッセージに格納されて良い。 (12) MH-SDTT
The MH-software download trigger table (MH-Software Download Trigger Table: MH-SDTT) is used for download notification information. The MH-SDTT may be stored in the M2 section message.
　（１３）ＭＨ－ＳＤＴ
　ＭＨ－サービス記述テーブル（ＭＨ－Ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅ　Ｄｅｓｃｒｉｐｔｉｏｎ　Ｔａｂｌｅ：ＭＨ－ＳＤＴ）は、特定のＴＬＶストリームに含まれるサービスを表すサブテーブルを有し、編成チャンネルの名称、放送事業者の名称など、編成チャンネルに関する情報を伝送する。ＭＨ－ＳＤＴはＭ２セクションメッセージに格納されて良い。 (13) MH-SDT
MH-Service Description Table (MH-Service Description Table: MH-SDT) has a sub-table representing a service included in a specific TLV stream, and information related to the organization channel such as the name of the organization channel and the name of the broadcaster. Is transmitted. The MH-SDT may be stored in the M2 section message.
　（１４）ＭＨ－ＴＯＴ
　ＭＨ－タイムオフセットテーブル（ＭＨ－Ｔｉｍｅ　Ｏｆｆｓｅｔ　Ｔａｂｌｅ：ＭＨ－ＴＯＴ）は、ＪＳＴ時刻と日付（修正ユリウス日）情報を伝送する。ＭＨ－ＴＯＴはＭ２短セクションメッセージに格納されて良い。 (14) MH-TOT
The MH-Time Offset Table (MH-TOT) transmits JST time and date (modified Julian date) information. The MH-TOT may be stored in the M2 short section message.
　（１５）ＭＨ－ＣＤＴ
　ＭＨ－共通データテーブル（ＭＨ－Ｃｏｍｍｏｎ　Ｄａｔａ　Ｔａｂｌｅ：ＭＨ－ＣＤＴ）は、これを受信する全ての受信機を対象として、不揮発性メモリに格納すべき共通データをセクション形式で伝送するために用いる。ＭＨ－ＣＤＴはＭ２セクションメッセージに格納されて良い。 (15) MH-CDT
The MH-Common Data Table (MH-CDT) is used to transmit the common data to be stored in the non-volatile memory in a section format for all receivers that receive the MH-Common Data Table (MH-CDT). The MH-CDT may be stored in the M2 section message.
　（１６）ＤＤＭテーブル
　データディレクトリ管理テーブル（Ｄａｔａ　Ｄｉｒｅｃｔｏｒｙ　Ｍａｎａｇｅｍｅｎｔ　Ｔａｂｌｅ：ＤＤＭテーブル）は、アプリケーションのファイル構成とファイル伝送のための構成を分離するために、アプリケーションを構成するファイルのディレクトリ構成を提供する。ＤＤＭテーブルはデータ伝送メッセージに格納されて良い。 (16) DDM table The data directory management table (Data Directory Management Table: DDM table) provides a directory structure of files constituting an application in order to separate the file structure of the application from the structure for file transmission. The DDM table may be stored in the data transmission message.
　（１７）ＤＡＭテーブル
　データアセット管理テーブル（Ｄａｔａ　Ａｓｓｅｔ　Ｍａｎａｇｅｍｅｎｔ　Ｔａｂｌｅ：ＤＡＭテーブル）は、アセット内のＭＰＵの構成とＭＰＵ毎のバージョン情報を提供する。ＤＡＭテーブルはデータ伝送メッセージに格納されて良い。 (17) DAM table The data asset management table (Data Asset Management Table: DAM table) provides the configuration of the MPU in the asset and version information for each MPU. The DAM table may be stored in the data transmission message.
　（１８）ＤＣＣテーブル
　データコンテント管理テーブル（Ｄａｔａ　Ｃｏｎｔｅｎｔ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇｕｒａｔｉｏｎ　Ｔａｂｌｅ：ＤＣＣテーブル）は、柔軟で有効なキャッシュ制御を実現するため、データコンテンツとしてのファイルの構成情報を提供する。ＤＣＣテーブルはデータ伝送メッセージに格納されて良い。 (18) DCC Table The data content management table (Data Content Configuration Table: DCC table) provides file configuration information as data content in order to realize flexible and effective cache control. The DCC table may be stored in the data transmission message.
　（１９）ＥＭＴ
　イベントメッセージテーブル（Ｅｖｅｎｔ　Ｍｅｓｓａｇｅ　Ｔａｂｌｅ：ＥＭＴ）は、イベントメッセージに関する情報を伝送するために用いる。ＥＭＴはＭ２セクションメッセージに格納されて良い。 (19) EMT
An event message table (Event Message Table: EMT) is used to transmit information about event messages. The EMT may be stored in the M2 section message.
　（２０）事業者が設定するテーブル
　その他、サービス事業者等が独自に設定したテーブルを用意することが可能である。 (20) Table set by service provider In addition, it is possible to prepare a table uniquely set by the service service provider.
　＜ＭＭＴ－ＳＩで使用される記述子＞
　図６Ｃ、図６Ｄおよび図６Ｅに、本実施例の放送受信装置１００が対応する放送システムのＭＭＴ－ＳＩに配置される『記述子』の一覧を示す。記述子は、より詳細な情報を提供する制御情報であり、テーブルに配置されるものとする。なお、記述子を配置するテーブルは記述子に応じて決まっていても良い。本実施例では、ＭＭＴ－ＳＩの『記述子』として以下に示すものが用いられるものとする。 <Descriptors used in MMT-SI>
FIG. 6C, FIG. 6D and FIG. 6E show a list of “descriptors” arranged in the MMT-SI of the broadcasting system to which the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment corresponds. The descriptor is control information that provides more detailed information and is arranged in a table. Note that the table in which the descriptor is arranged may be determined according to the descriptor. In this embodiment, the following are used as “descriptors” of MMT-SI.
　（１）アセットグループ記述子
　アセットグループ記述子は、アセットのグループ関係とグループ内での優先度を提供する。アセットグループ記述子はＭＰＴに配置されて良い。 (1) Asset group descriptor The asset group descriptor provides asset group relationships and priorities within groups. The asset group descriptor may be located in the MPT.
　（２）イベントパッケージ記述子
　イベントパッケージ記述子は、番組を表すイベントとパッケージの対応を提供する。イベントパッケージ記述子はＭ２セクションメッセージにて伝送されるＭＨ－ＥＩＴに配置されて良い。 (2) Event package descriptor The event package descriptor provides a correspondence between an event representing a program and a package. The event package descriptor may be arranged in the MH-EIT transmitted in the M2 section message.
　（３）背景色指定記述子
　背景色指定記述子は、レイアウト指定における最背面の背景色を提供する。背景色指定記述子はＬＣＴに配置されて良い。 (3) Background Color Specification Descriptor The background color specification descriptor provides the backmost background color in the layout specification. The background color designation descriptor may be arranged in the LCT.
　（４）ＭＰＵ提示領域指定記述子
　ＭＰＵ提示領域指定記述子は、ＭＰＵを提示する位置を提供する。ＭＰＵ提示領域指定記述子はＭＰＴに配置されて良い。 (4) MPU presentation area designation descriptor The MPU presentation area designation descriptor provides a position for presenting an MPU. The MPU presentation area designation descriptor may be arranged in the MPT.
　（５）ＭＰＵタイムスタンプ記述子
　ＭＰＵタイムスタンプ記述子は、ＭＰＵにおいて提示順序で最初のアクセスユニットの提示時刻を示す。ＭＰＵタイムスタンプ記述子はＭＰＴに配置されて良い。 (5) MPU time stamp descriptor The MPU time stamp descriptor indicates the presentation time of the first access unit in the presentation order in the MPU. The MPU timestamp descriptor may be located in the MPT.
　（６）依存関係記述子
　依存関係記述子は、依存関係にあるアセットのアセットＩＤを提供する。依存関係記述子はＭＰＴに配置されて良い。 (6) Dependency Descriptor The dependency descriptor provides an asset ID of an asset having a dependency relationship. The dependency descriptor may be arranged in the MPT.
　（７）アクセス制御記述子
　アクセス制御記述子は、限定受信方式を識別するための情報を提供する。アクセス制御記述子はＭＰＴまたはＣＡＴ（ＭＨ）に配置されて良い。 (7) Access control descriptor The access control descriptor provides information for identifying the conditional access system. The access control descriptor may be located in MPT or CAT (MH).
　（８）スクランブル方式記述子
　スクランブル方式記述子は、スクランブル時の暗号化対象および暗号アルゴリズムの種別を識別するための情報を提供する。スクランブル方式記述子はＭＰＴまたはＣＡＴ（ＭＨ）に配置されて良い。 (8) Scramble method descriptor The scramble method descriptor provides information for identifying the type of encryption target and encryption algorithm at the time of scrambling. The scramble method descriptor may be arranged in MPT or CAT (MH).
　（９）メッセージ認証方式記述子
　メッセージ認証方式記述子は、メッセージ認証を行う場合にメッセージ認証方式を識別するための情報を提供する。メッセージ認証方式記述子はＭＰＴまたはＣＡＴ（ＭＨ）に配置されて良い。 (9) Message Authentication Scheme Descriptor The message authentication scheme descriptor provides information for identifying the message authentication scheme when performing message authentication. The message authentication scheme descriptor may be arranged in MPT or CAT (MH).
　（１０）緊急情報記述子（ＭＨ）
　緊急情報記述子（ＭＨ）は、緊急警報放送を行う場合に用いる。緊急情報記述子（ＭＨ）はＭＰＴに配置されて良い。 (10) Emergency information descriptor (MH)
The emergency information descriptor (MH) is used when emergency alert broadcasting is performed. The emergency information descriptor (MH) may be located in the MPT.
　（１１）ＭＨ－ＭＰＥＧ－４オーディオ記述子
　ＭＨ－ＭＰＥＧ－４オーディオ記述子は、ＩＳＯ／ＩＥＣ　１４４９６－３（ＭＰＥＧ－４オーディオ）のオーディオストリームの符号化パラメータを特定するための基本情報を記述するために用いる。ＭＨ－ＭＰＥＧ－４オーディオ記述子はＭＰＴに配置されて良い。 (11) MH-MPEG-4 Audio Descriptor The MH-MPEG-4 audio descriptor describes basic information for specifying an encoding parameter of an ISO / IEC 14496-3 (MPEG-4 audio) audio stream. Use for. The MH-MPEG-4 audio descriptor may be located in the MPT.
　（１２）ＭＨ－ＭＰＥＧ－４オーディオ拡張記述子
　ＭＨ－ＭＰＥＧ－４オーディオ拡張記述子は、ＭＰＥＧ－４オーディオストリームのプロファイルとレベルおよび符号化方式固有の設定を記述するために用いる。ＭＨ－ＭＰＥＧ－４オーディオ拡張記述子はＭＰＴに配置されて良い。 (12) MH-MPEG-4 Audio Extension Descriptor The MH-MPEG-4 audio extension descriptor is used to describe the profile and level of the MPEG-4 audio stream and the settings specific to the encoding method. The MH-MPEG-4 audio extension descriptor may be located in the MPT.
　（１３）ＭＨ－ＨＥＶＣビデオ記述子
　ＭＨ－ＨＥＶＣビデオ記述子は、ＩＴＵ－Ｔ勧告Ｈ．２６５｜ＩＳＯ／ＩＥＣ　２３００８－２の映像ストリーム（ＨＥＶＣストリーム）の基本的な符号化パラメータを記述するために用いる。ＭＨ－ＨＥＶＣビデオ記述子はＭＰＴに配置されて良い。 (13) MH-HEVC video descriptor The MH-HEVC video descriptor is an ITU-T recommendation H.264 standard. H.265 | Used to describe basic encoding parameters of ISO / IEC 23008-2 video stream (HEVC stream). The MH-HEVC video descriptor may be located in the MPT.
　（１４）ＭＨ－リンク記述子
　ＭＨ－リンク記述子は、番組配列情報システムに記載されているある特定のものに関連した追加情報を視聴者が要求した場合に提供されるサービスを識別する。ＭＨ－リンク記述子は、ＭＰＴ、ＭＨ－ＥＩＴ、ＭＨ－ＳＤＴ、等に配置されて良い。 (14) MH-Link Descriptor The MH-Link Descriptor identifies a service provided when a viewer requests additional information related to a certain thing described in the program sequence information system. The MH-link descriptor may be arranged in MPT, MH-EIT, MH-SDT, etc.
　（１５）ＭＨ－イベントグループ記述子
　ＭＨ－イベントグループ記述子は、複数のイベント間に関係がある場合にそれらのイベント群がグループ化されていることを示すために用いる。ＭＨ－イベントグループ記述子はＭＨ－ＥＩＴに配置されて良い。 (15) MH-event group descriptor The MH-event group descriptor is used to indicate that these event groups are grouped when there is a relationship between a plurality of events. The MH-event group descriptor may be located in the MH-EIT.
　（１６）ＭＨ－サービスリスト記述子
　ＭＨ－サービスリスト記述子は、サービス識別とサービス形式種別によるサービスの一覧を提供する。ＭＨ－サービスリスト記述子はＭＨ－ＢＩＴに配置されて良い。 (16) MH-Service List Descriptor The MH-Service List Descriptor provides a service list according to service identification and service type. The MH-service list descriptor may be located in the MH-BIT.
　（１７）ＭＨ－短形式イベント記述子
　ＭＨ－短形式イベント記述子は、イベント名およびそのイベントの短い記述をテキスト形式で表す。ＭＨ－短形式イベント記述子はＭＨ－ＥＩＴに配置されて良い。 (17) MH-short format event descriptor The MH-short format event descriptor represents an event name and a short description of the event in a text format. The MH-short form event descriptor may be located in the MH-EIT.
　（１８）ＭＨ－拡張形式イベント記述子
　ＭＨ－拡張形式イベント記述子は、ＭＨ－短形式イベント記述子に付け加えて使用され、イベントの詳細記述を提供する。ＭＨ－拡張形式イベント記述子はＭＨ－ＥＩＴに配置されて良い。 (18) MH-extended format event descriptor The MH-extended format event descriptor is used in addition to the MH-short format event descriptor to provide a detailed description of the event. The MH-extended event descriptor may be located in the MH-EIT.
　（１９）映像コンポーネント記述子
　映像コンポーネント記述子は、映像コンポーネントに関するパラメータや説明を示し、エレメンタリストリームを文字形式で表現するためにも利用される。映像コンポーネント記述子はＭＰＴまたはＭＨ－ＥＩＴに配置されて良い。 (19) Video Component Descriptor The video component descriptor indicates parameters and explanations related to the video component, and is also used to represent an elementary stream in a character format. The video component descriptor may be located in MPT or MH-EIT.
　（２０）ＭＨ－ストリーム識別記述子
　ＭＨ－ストリーム識別記述子は、サービスのコンポーネントストリームにラベルを付け、このラベルによってＭＨ－ＥＩＴ内の映像コンポーネント記述子で示される記述内容を参照できるために使用する。ＭＨ－ストリーム識別記述子はＭＰＴに配置されて良い。 (20) MH-stream identification descriptor The MH-stream identification descriptor is used to label the component stream of the service and to refer to the description content indicated by the video component descriptor in the MH-EIT. . The MH-stream identification descriptor may be arranged in the MPT.
　（２１）ＭＨ－コンテント記述子
　ＭＨ－コンテント記述子は、イベントのジャンルを示す。ＭＨ－コンテント記述子はＭＨ－ＥＩＴに配置されて良い。 (21) MH-content descriptor The MH-content descriptor indicates the genre of the event. The MH-content descriptor may be located in the MH-EIT.
　（２２）ＭＨ－パレンタルレート記述子
　ＭＨ－パレンタルレート記述子は、年齢に基づいた視聴制限を表し、また、他の制限条件に基づくよう拡張するために用いる。ＭＨ－パレンタルレート記述子はＭＰＴまたはＭＨ－ＥＩＴに配置されて良い。 (22) MH-Parental Rate Descriptor The MH-Parental Rate Descriptor represents viewing restrictions based on age, and is used to extend based on other restriction conditions. The MH-parental rate descriptor may be located in MPT or MH-EIT.
　（２３）ＭＨ－音声コンポーネント記述子
　ＭＨ－音声コンポーネント記述子は、音声エレメンタリストリームの各パラメータを示し、エレメンタリストリームを文字形式で表現するためにも利用される。ＭＨ－音声コンポーネント記述子はＭＰＴまたはＭＨ－ＥＩＴに配置されて良い。 (23) MH-voice component descriptor The MH-voice component descriptor indicates each parameter of the voice elementary stream, and is also used to represent the elementary stream in a character format. The MH-voice component descriptor may be located in MPT or MH-EIT.
　（２４）ＭＨ－対象地域記述子
　ＭＨ－対象地域記述子は、番組または番組を構成する一部のストリームが対象とする地域を記述するために使用される。ＭＨ－対象地域記述子はＭＰＴに配置されて良い。 (24) MH-Target Area Descriptor The MH-target area descriptor is used to describe a target area for a program or a part of streams constituting the program. The MH-target area descriptor may be located in the MPT.
　（２５）ＭＨ－シリーズ記述子
　ＭＨ－シリーズ記述子は、シリーズ番組を識別するために用いる。ＭＨ－シリーズ記述子はＭＨ－ＥＩＴに配置されて良い。 (25) MH-series descriptor The MH-series descriptor is used to identify a series program. The MH-series descriptor may be located in the MH-EIT.
　（２６）ＭＨ－ＳＩ伝送パラメータ記述子
　ＭＨ－ＳＩ伝送パラメータ記述子は、ＳＩの伝送パラメータを示すために用いる。ＭＨ－ＳＩ伝送パラメータ記述子はＭＨ－ＢＩＴに配置されて良い。 (26) MH-SI transmission parameter descriptor The MH-SI transmission parameter descriptor is used to indicate a transmission parameter of SI. The MH-SI transmission parameter descriptor may be arranged in the MH-BIT.
　（２７）ＭＨ－ブロードキャスタ名記述子
　ＭＨ－ブロードキャスタ名記述子は、ブロードキャスタの名称を記述する。ＭＨ－ブロードキャスタ名記述子はＭＨ－ＢＩＴに配置されて良い。 (27) MH-Broadcaster name descriptor The MH-Broadcaster name descriptor describes the name of the broadcaster. The MH-Broadcaster name descriptor may be located in the MH-BIT.
　（２８）ＭＨ－サービス記述子
　ＭＨ－サービス記述子は、編成チャンネル名とその事業者名をサービス形式種別と共に文字符号で表す。ＭＨ－サービス記述子はＭＨ－ＳＤＴに配置されて良い。 (28) MH-Service Descriptor The MH-Service Descriptor represents the organization channel name and its operator name with a character code together with the service type. The MH-service descriptor may be located in the MH-SDT.
　（２９）ＩＰデータフロー記述子
　ＩＰデータフロー記述子は、サービスを構成するＩＰデータフローの情報を提供する。ＩＰデータフロー記述子はＭＨ－ＳＤＴに配置されて良い。 (29) IP Data Flow Descriptor The IP data flow descriptor provides information on the IP data flow constituting the service. The IP data flow descriptor may be located in MH-SDT.
　（３０）ＭＨ－ＣＡ起動記述子
　ＭＨ－ＣＡ起動記述子は、ＣＡＳ基盤上のＣＡＳプログラムを起動するための起動情報を記載する。ＭＨ－ＣＡ起動記述子はＭＰＴまたはＣＡＴ（ＣＡ）に配置されて良い。 (30) MH-CA activation descriptor The MH-CA activation descriptor describes activation information for activating a CAS program on the CAS infrastructure. The MH-CA activation descriptor may be located in MPT or CAT (CA).
　（３１）ＭＨ－Ｔｙｐｅ記述子
　ＭＨ－Ｔｙｐｅ記述子は、アプリケーション伝送方式で伝送されるファイルの型を示す。ＭＨ－Ｔｙｐｅ記述子はＤＡＭテーブルに配置されて良い。 (31) MH-Type descriptor The MH-Type descriptor indicates the type of a file transmitted by the application transmission method. The MH-Type descriptor may be placed in the DAM table.
　（３２）ＭＨ－Ｉｎｆｏ記述子
　ＭＨ－Ｉｎｆｏ記述子は、ＭＰＵまたはアイテムに関する情報を記述する。ＭＨ－Ｉｎｆｏ記述子はＤＡＭテーブルに配置されて良い。 (32) MH-Info Descriptor The MH-Info descriptor describes information related to the MPU or item. The MH-Info descriptor may be placed in the DAM table.
　（３３）ＭＨ－Ｅｘｐｉｒｅ記述子
　ＭＨ－Ｅｘｐｉｒｅ記述子は、アイテムの有効期限を記述する。ＭＨ－Ｅｘｐｉｒｅ記述子はＤＡＭテーブルに配置されて良い。 (33) MH-Expire descriptor The MH-Expire descriptor describes the expiration date of an item. The MH-Expire descriptor may be placed in the DAM table.
　（３４）ＭＨ－Ｃｏｍｐｒｅｓｓｉｏｎ　Ｔｙｐｅ記述子
　ＭＨ－Ｃｏｍｐｒｅｓｓｉｏｎ　Ｔｙｐｅ記述子は、伝送するアイテムが圧縮されていることを意味し、その圧縮アルゴリズムと圧縮前のアイテムのバイト数を示す。ＭＨ－Ｃｏｍｐｒｅｓｓｉｏｎ　Ｔｙｐｅ記述子はＤＡＭテーブルに配置されて良い。 (34) MH-Compression Type Descriptor The MH-Compression Type descriptor means that the item to be transmitted is compressed, and indicates the compression algorithm and the number of bytes of the item before compression. The MH-Compression Type descriptor may be placed in the DAM table.
　（３５）ＭＨ－データ符号化方式記述子
　ＭＨ－データ符号化方式記述子は、データ符号化方式を識別するために使用される。ＭＨ－データ符号化方式記述子はＭＰＴに配置されて良い。 (35) MH-data encoding scheme descriptor The MH-data encoding scheme descriptor is used to identify a data encoding scheme. The MH-data encoding scheme descriptor may be arranged in the MPT.
　（３６）ＵＴＣ－ＮＰＴ参照記述子
　ＵＴＣ－ＮＰＴ参照記述子は、ＮＰＴ（Ｎｏｒｍａｌ　Ｐｌａｙ　Ｔｉｍｅ）とＵＴＣの関係を伝達するために用いる。ＵＴＣ－ＮＰＴ参照記述子はＥＭＴに配置されて良い。 (36) UTC-NPT Reference Descriptor The UTC-NPT reference descriptor is used to convey the relationship between NPT (Normal Play Time) and UTC. The UTC-NPT reference descriptor may be located in the EMT.
　（３７）イベントメッセージ記述子
　イベントメッセージ記述子は、イベントメッセージ一般に関する情報を伝達する。イベントメッセージ記述子はＥＭＴに配置されて良い。 (37) Event message descriptor The event message descriptor conveys information related to event messages in general. The event message descriptor may be located in the EMT.
　（３８）ＭＨ－ローカル時間オフセット記述子
　ＭＨ－ローカル時間オフセット記述子は、サマータイム実施時に実際の時刻（例えば、ＵＴＣ＋９時間）と人間系への表示時刻に一定のオフセット値を持たせるときに用いる。ＭＨ－ローカル時間オフセット記述子はＭＨ－ＴＯＴに配置されて良い。 (38) MH-local time offset descriptor The MH-local time offset descriptor is used to give a certain offset value to the actual time (for example, UTC + 9 hours) and the display time to the human system during the daylight saving time. The MH-local time offset descriptor may be located in the MH-TOT.
　（３９）ＭＨ－コンポーネントグループ記述子
　ＭＨ－コンポーネントグループ記述子は、イベント内のコンポーネントの組み合わせを定義して識別する。ＭＨ－コンポーネントグループ記述子はＭＨ－ＥＩＴに配置されて良い。 (39) MH-component group descriptor The MH-component group descriptor defines and identifies a combination of components in an event. The MH-component group descriptor may be located in the MH-EIT.
　（４０）ＭＨ－ロゴ伝送記述子
　ＭＨ－ロゴ伝送記述子は、簡易ロゴ用文字列、ＣＤＴ形式のロゴへのポインティングなどを記述するために用いる。ＭＨ－ロゴ伝送記述子はＭＨ－ＳＤＴに配置されて良い。 (40) MH-logo transmission descriptor The MH-logo transmission descriptor is used to describe a character string for a simple logo, pointing to a CDT format logo, and the like. The MH-logo transmission descriptor may be located in the MH-SDT.
　（４１）ＭＰＵ拡張タイムスタンプ記述子
　ＭＰＵ拡張タイムスタンプ記述子は、ＭＰＵ内のアクセスユニットの復号時刻を提供する。ＭＰＵ拡張タイムスタンプ記述子はＭＰＴに配置されて良い。 (41) MPU extended time stamp descriptor The MPU extended time stamp descriptor provides the decoding time of the access unit in the MPU. The MPU extended timestamp descriptor may be placed in the MPT.
　（４２）ＭＰＵダウンロードコンテンツ記述子
　ＭＰＵダウンロードコンテンツ記述子は、ＭＰＵを用いてダウンロードされるコンテンツの属性情報を記述するために用いる。ＭＰＵダウンロードコンテンツ記述子はＭＨ－ＳＤＴＴに配置されて良い。 (42) MPU download content descriptor The MPU download content descriptor is used to describe attribute information of content downloaded using the MPU. The MPU download content descriptor may be arranged in MH-SDTT.
　（４３）ＭＨ－ネットワークダウンロードコンテンツ記述子
　ＭＨ－ネットワークダウンロードコンテンツ記述子は、ネットワークを用いてダウンロードされるコンテンツの属性情報を記述するために用いる。ＭＨ－ネットワークダウンロードコンテンツ記述子はＭＨ－ＳＤＴＴに配置されて良い。 (43) MH-Network Download Content Descriptor The MH-Network Download Content Descriptor is used to describe attribute information of content downloaded using the network. The MH-network download content descriptor may be located in the MH-SDTT.
　（４４）ＭＨ－アプリケーション記述子
　ＭＨ－アプリケーション記述子は、アプリケーションの情報を記述する。ＭＨ－アプリケーション記述子はＭＨ－ＡＩＴに配置されて良い。 (44) MH-application descriptor The MH-application descriptor describes application information. The MH-application descriptor may be located in the MH-AIT.
　（４５）ＭＨ－伝送プロトコル記述子
　ＭＨ－伝送プロトコル記述子は、放送や通信等の伝送プロトコルの指定と伝送プロトコルに依存したアプリケーションのロケーション情報を示すために用いる。ＭＨ－伝送プロトコル記述子はＭＨ－ＡＩＴに配置されて良い。 (45) MH-Transmission Protocol Descriptor The MH-Transmission Protocol Descriptor is used for designating a transmission protocol such as broadcasting or communication and indicating location information of an application depending on the transmission protocol. The MH-Transmission Protocol Descriptor may be located in the MH-AIT.
　（４６）ＭＨ－簡易アプリケーションロケーション記述子
　ＭＨ－簡易アプリケーションロケーション記述子は、アプリケーションの取得先の詳細を指示するために記述する。ＭＨ－簡易アプリケーションロケーション記述子はＭＨ－ＡＩＴに配置されて良い。 (46) MH—Simple Application Location Descriptor The MH—Simple Application Location Descriptor is described to indicate details of an application acquisition destination. The MH-simple application location descriptor may be located in the MH-AIT.
　（４７）ＭＨ－アプリケーション境界権限設定記述子
　ＭＨ－アプリケーション境界権限設定記述子は、アプリケーションバウンダリを設定し、かつ領域（ＵＲＬ）毎に放送リソースアクセスの権限を設定するために記述する。ＭＨ－アプリケーション境界権限設定記述子はＭＨ－ＡＩＴに配置されて良い。 (47) MH-application boundary authority setting descriptor The MH-application boundary authority setting descriptor is described in order to set an application boundary and to set a broadcast resource access authority for each area (URL). The MH-application boundary authority setting descriptor may be arranged in the MH-AIT.
　（４８）ＭＨ－起動優先情報記述子
　ＭＨ－起動優先情報記述子は、アプリケーションの起動優先度を指定するために記述する。ＭＨ－起動優先情報記述子はＭＨ－ＡＩＴに配置されて良い。 (48) MH-Activation Priority Information Descriptor The MH-activation priority information descriptor is described for designating the application activation priority. The MH-activation priority information descriptor may be arranged in the MH-AIT.
　（４９）ＭＨ－キャッシュ情報記述子
　ＭＨ－キャッシュ情報記述子は、アプリケーションの再利用が想定される場合に、アプリケーションを構成するリソースをキャッシュし保持しておく場合のキャッシュ制御に用いるために記述する。ＭＨ－キャッシュ情報記述子はＭＨ－ＡＩＴに配置されて良い。 (49) MH-cache information descriptor The MH-cache information descriptor is described to be used for cache control when the resources constituting the application are cached and held when the application is assumed to be reused. . The MH-cache information descriptor may be located in the MH-AIT.
　（５０）ＭＨ－確率的適用遅延記述子
　ＭＨ－確率的適用遅延記述子は、アプリケーション取得のサーバアクセスの負荷分散を想定して、アプリケーション制御を行うタイミングを確率的に設定した遅延量だけ遅らせるために記述する。ＭＨ－確率的適用遅延記述子はＭＨ－ＡＩＴに配置されて良い。 (50) MH-Probabilistic Application Delay Descriptor The MH-Probabilistic Application Delay Descriptor is used to delay the application control timing by a stochastically set delay amount assuming load distribution of server access for application acquisition. Describe in. The MH-stochastic application delay descriptor may be placed in the MH-AIT.
　（５１）リンク先ＰＵ記述子
　リンク先ＰＵ記述子は、当該プレゼンテーションユニット（ＰＵ）から遷移する可能性のある他のプレゼンテーションユニットを記述する。リンク先ＰＵ記述子はＤＣＣテーブルに配置されて良い。 (51) Link destination PU descriptor The link destination PU descriptor describes another presentation unit that may transition from the presentation unit (PU). The link destination PU descriptor may be arranged in the DCC table.
　（５２）ロックキャッシュ指定記述子
　ロックキャッシュ指定記述子は、当該プレゼンテーションユニットにおいてキャッシュし、かつロックする対象のファイルの指定を記述する。ロックキャッシュ指定記述子はＤＣＣテーブルに配置されて良い。 (52) Lock cache specification descriptor The lock cache specification descriptor describes the specification of a file to be cached and locked in the presentation unit. The lock cache designation descriptor may be arranged in the DCC table.
　（５３）アンロックキャッシュ指定記述子
　アンロックキャッシュ指定記述子は、当該プレゼンテーションユニットにおいてロックされているファイルのうちのアンロックするファイルの指定を記述する。アンロックキャッシュ指定記述子はＤＣＣテーブルに配置されて良い。 (53) Unlock cache specification descriptor The unlock cache specification descriptor describes the specification of the file to be unlocked among the files locked in the presentation unit. The unlock cache specification descriptor may be arranged in the DCC table.
　（５４）ＭＨ－ダウンロード保護記述子
　ＭＨ－ダウンロード保護記述子は、ＤＣＭやＤＭＭを伝送するＭＭＴＰパケットのロケーション情報および伝送情報を記述する。ＭＨ－ダウンロード保護記述子はＭＰＴまたはＭＨ－ＳＤＴＴに配置されて良い。 (54) MH-Download Protection Descriptor The MH-Download Protection Descriptor describes the location information and transmission information of the MMTP packet that transmits DCM and DMM. The MH-download protection descriptor may be located in MPT or MH-SDTT.
　（５５）アプリケーションサービス記述子
　アプリケーションサービス記述子は、サービスに関連するアプリケーションのエントリー情報等を記述する。アプリケーションサービス記述子はＭＰＴに配置されて良い。 (55) Application service descriptor The application service descriptor describes entry information of an application related to the service. The application service descriptor may be located in the MPT.
　（５６）ＭＰＵノード記述子
　ＭＰＵノード記述子は、当該ＭＰＵがデータディレクトリ管理テーブルにて規定されるディレクトリノードに対応することを示す。ＭＰＵノード記述子はＤＡＭテーブルに配置されて良い。 (56) MPU node descriptor The MPU node descriptor indicates that the MPU corresponds to a directory node specified in the data directory management table. The MPU node descriptor may be placed in the DAM table.
　（５７）ＰＵ構成記述子
　ＰＵ構成記述子は、当該プレゼンテーションユニットと伝送単位とのマッピング情報として、プレゼンテーションユニットを構成するＭＰＵのリストを示す。ＰＵ構成記述子はＤＣＣテーブルに配置されて良い。 (57) PU configuration descriptor The PU configuration descriptor indicates a list of MPUs constituting the presentation unit as mapping information between the presentation unit and the transmission unit. The PU configuration descriptor may be placed in the DCC table.
　（５８）ＭＨ－階層符号化記述子
　ＭＨ－階層符号化記述子は、階層符号化された映像ストリームコンポーネントを識別するための情報を記述する。ＭＨ－階層符号化記述子はＭＰＴに配置されて良い。 (58) MH-hierarchical coding descriptor The MH-hierarchical coding descriptor describes information for identifying a video stream component subjected to hierarchical coding. The MH-hierarchical coding descriptor may be located in the MPT.
　（５９）コンテンツコピー制御記述子
　コンテンツコピー制御記述子は、サービス全体に対する、デジタル記録機器におけるコピー世代を制御する情報を示し、デジタル記録が行われることが想定される場合に、放送局（著作権者側）がコピーに関する情報あるいは最大伝送レートをデジタル記録機器に伝えるために用いられる。コンテンツコピー制御記述子はＭＰＴ、ＭＨ－ＥＩＴ、ＭＨ－ＳＤＴ、等に配置されて良い。 (59) Content copy control descriptor The content copy control descriptor indicates information for controlling the copy generation in the digital recording device for the entire service. When digital recording is assumed to be performed, the broadcast station (copyright) Used by the user) to communicate information about the copy or the maximum transmission rate to the digital recording device. The content copy control descriptor may be arranged in MPT, MH-EIT, MH-SDT, etc.
　（６０）コンテンツ利用制御記述子
　コンテンツ利用制御記述子は、番組に対して、ハードディスク等に蓄積する場合や受信機から映像／音声信号を出力する場合に、コピー制御、リモート視聴制御に関する情報を示すために用いられる。コンテンツ利用制御記述子はＭＰＴ、ＭＨ－ＥＩＴ、ＭＨ－ＳＤＴ、等に配置されて良い。 (60) Content usage control descriptor The content usage control descriptor indicates information related to copy control and remote viewing control when a program is stored in a hard disk or when a video / audio signal is output from a receiver. Used for. The content usage control descriptor may be arranged in MPT, MH-EIT, MH-SDT, or the like.
　（６１）事業者が設定する記述子
　その他、サービス事業者等が独自に設定した記述子を用意することが可能である。 (61) Descriptor set by the provider In addition, it is possible to prepare a descriptor uniquely set by the service provider.
　＜ＭＭＴ方式におけるデータ伝送と各制御情報の関係＞
　ここで、図７Ａを用いて、本実施例の放送受信装置１００が対応する放送システムにより伝送される映像や音声等の各コンポーネントとＭＭＴ－ＳＩの代表的なテーブルとの関係について説明する。なお、ＭＭＴ方式においては、コンポーネントをアセットと定義しており、以下では、コンポーネントをアセットと表記する場合がある。 <Relationship between data transmission and control information in MMT system>
Here, with reference to FIG. 7A, the relationship between each component such as video and audio transmitted by the broadcast system supported by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment and a typical table of MMT-SI will be described. In the MMT method, a component is defined as an asset, and in the following, the component may be expressed as an asset.
　本実施例の放送受信装置１００が対応する放送システムでは、放送伝送路を介したＴＬＶストリームや通信回線を介したＩＰデータフロー等、複数の経路でデータ伝送を行うことができる。ＴＬＶストリームには、ＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴやＡＭＴなどのＴＬＶ－ＳＩと、ＩＰパケットのデータフローであるＩＰデータフローが含まれている。ＩＰデータフロー内には一連の映像ＭＰＵを含む映像アセットや一連の音声ＭＰＵを含む音声アセットが含まれている。同様に、ＩＰデータフロー内には一連の字幕ＭＰＵを含む字幕アセット、一連の文字スーパーＭＰＵを含む文字スーパーアセット、一連のデータＭＰＵを含むデータアセットなどが含まれても良い。 In the broadcast system supported by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment, data transmission can be performed through a plurality of paths such as a TLV stream via a broadcast transmission path and an IP data flow via a communication line. The TLV stream includes a TLV-SI such as TLV-NIT or AMT, and an IP data flow that is a data flow of an IP packet. The IP data flow includes video assets including a series of video MPUs and audio assets including a series of audio MPUs. Similarly, a subtitle asset including a series of subtitle MPUs, a character super asset including a series of character super MPUs, a data asset including a series of data MPUs, and the like may be included in the IP data flow.
　これらの各種アセットは、ＰＡメッセージに格納されて伝送されるＭＰＴ（ＭＭＴパッケージテーブル）の記述により、『パッケージ』に関連付けられる。具体的には、ＭＰＴにパッケージを識別するパッケージＩＤと当該パッケージに含まれる各アセットを識別するアセットＩＤとを記述することにより、前記関連付けを行えば良い。図７ＢにＭＰＴのデータ構造の一例を示す。図中の『ＭＭＴ＿ｐａｃｋａｇｅ＿ｉｄ＿ｂｙｔｅ』パラメータが前記パッケージＩＤに対応し、『ａｓｓｅｔ＿ｉｄ＿ｂｙｔｅ』パラメータが前記アセットＩＤに対応する。 These various assets are associated with the “package” by the description of the MPT (MMT package table) transmitted in the PA message. Specifically, the association may be performed by describing a package ID for identifying a package in the MPT and an asset ID for identifying each asset included in the package. FIG. 7B shows an example of the data structure of MPT. The “MMT_package_id_byte” parameter in the figure corresponds to the package ID, and the “asset_id_byte” parameter corresponds to the asset ID.
　パッケージを構成するアセットはＴＬＶストリーム内のアセットのみとすることもできるが、図７Ａに示したように、通信回線のＩＰデータフローで伝送されるアセットを含めることもできる。これは、当該パッケージに含まれる各アセットを識別するアセットＩＤと共に前記アセットのロケーション情報をＭＰＴ内に記述して、本実施例の放送受信装置１００が各アセットの参照先を把握可能とすることにより実現できる。前記ロケーション情報は、図７Ｂに示したＭＰＴのデータ構造における『ＭＭＴ＿ｇｅｎｅｒａｌ＿ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｉｎｆｏ（）』により指定される。図７Ｃにロケーション情報のデータ構造の一例を示す。 Assets that make up the package can be only assets in the TLV stream, but as shown in FIG. 7A, assets transmitted in the IP data flow of the communication line can also be included. This is because the location information of the asset is described in the MPT together with the asset ID for identifying each asset included in the package so that the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment can grasp the reference destination of each asset. realizable. The location information is specified by “MMT_general_location_info ()” in the MPT data structure shown in FIG. 7B. FIG. 7C shows an example of the data structure of the location information.
　なお、前記ロケーション情報の『ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｔｙｐｅ』パラメータの値に応じて、
　(１)ＭＰＴと同一のＩＰデータフローに多重されているデータ
    （ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｔｙｐｅ＝０ｘ００）
　(２)ＩＰｖ４データフローに多重されているデータ
    （ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｔｙｐｅ＝０ｘ０１）
　(３)ＩＰｖ６データフローに多重されているデータ
    （ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｔｙｐｅ＝０ｘ０２）
　(４)放送のＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳに多重されているデータ
    （ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｔｙｐｅ＝０ｘ０３）
　(５)ＩＰデータフロー内にＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳ形式で多重されているデータ
    （ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｔｙｐｅ＝０ｘ０４）
　(６)指定するＵＲＬにあるデータ
    （ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｔｙｐｅ＝０ｘ０５）
など、様々な伝送経路で伝送される各種データを、放送受信装置１００が参照できるように構成することが可能となる。 Depending on the value of the “location_type” parameter of the location information,
(1) Data multiplexed in the same IP data flow as MPT (location_type = 0x00)
(2) Data multiplexed in IPv4 data flow (location_type = 0x01)
(3) Data multiplexed in the IPv6 data flow (location_type = 0x02)
(4) Data multiplexed in broadcast MPEG2-TS (location_type = 0x03)
(5) Data multiplexed in the MPEG2-TS format in the IP data flow (location_type = 0x04)
(6) Data at the specified URL (location_type = 0x05)
For example, the broadcast receiving device 100 can refer to various data transmitted through various transmission paths.
　前述の参照先のうち、（１）は、例えば、本実施例の放送受信装置１００がアンテナ１００ａを介して受信するデジタル放送信号のＴＬＶストリームに含まれるＩＰデータフローである。但し、ＭＰＴを通信回線側のＩＰデータフローにも含めて伝送する場合は、（１）の参照先が通信回線を介して受信するＩＰデータフローになる場合もある。また、前記（２）、（３）、（５）、（６）は本実施例の放送受信装置１００が通信回線を介して受信するＩＰデータフローである。また、前記（４）は、例えば、後述する実施例２の放送受信装置８００のように、ＭＭＴ方式を用いるデジタル放送信号を受信する受信機能と、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳ方式を用いるデジタル放送信号を受信する受信機能の両者を有する放送受信装置の場合に、ＭＭＴ方式を用いるデジタル放送信号に含まれるＭＰＴのロケーション情報に基づいて、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳ方式を用いるデジタル放送信号を受信する受信機能で受信するＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳに多重されているデータを参照する場合に用いることができる。 Among the above-mentioned reference destinations, (1) is, for example, an IP data flow included in a TLV stream of a digital broadcast signal received by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment via the antenna 100a. However, when the MPT is transmitted including the IP data flow on the communication line side, the reference destination in (1) may be an IP data flow received via the communication line. Also, (2), (3), (5), and (6) are IP data flows received by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment via a communication line. In (4), for example, a receiving function for receiving a digital broadcast signal using the MMT method and a digital broadcast signal using the MPEG2-TS method are received as in the broadcast receiving device 800 of Example 2 described later. In the case of a broadcast receiving apparatus having both reception functions, MPEG2-received by a reception function for receiving a digital broadcast signal using the MPEG2-TS system based on MPT location information included in the digital broadcast signal using the MMT system. It can be used when referring to data multiplexed in a TS.
　また、映像コンポーネントや音声コンポーネント等のメディアでは、ＭＰＵ単位やアクセスユニット単位で提示時刻や復号時刻を指定可能である。前記提示時刻や復号時刻に関する情報は、ＭＰＵタイムスタンプ記述子やＭＰＵ拡張タイムスタンプ記述子としてＭＰＴに記述される。図７Ｄに、前記提示時刻に関する情報を記述するＭＰＵタイムスタンプ記述子のデータ構造の一例を示す。各ＭＰＵの提示時刻情報は、前記ＭＰＵタイムスタンプ記述子の『ｍｐｕ＿ｐｒｅｓｅｎｔａｔｉｏｎ＿ｔｉｍｅ』パラメータで指定される。また、前記指定の対象となるＭＰＵは、『ｍｐｕ＿ｓｅｑｕｅｎｃｅ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ』パラメータにより識別可能である。本実施例の放送受信装置１００では、当該提示時刻情報を用いて、ＭＰＴが指定する複数のＭＰＵを、ＵＴＣ表記の時刻情報であるＮＴＰに基づくクロックを基準に、連動して提示（表示、出力など）することが可能となる。また、前記復号時刻に関する情報も、同様に、ＭＰＵ拡張タイムスタンプ記述子によって記述されるが、詳細説明は省略する。なお、当該ＮＴＰに基づくクロックを用いた各種データの提示制御については後述する。 Also, for media such as video components and audio components, presentation time and decoding time can be specified in units of MPUs and access units. Information regarding the presentation time and the decoding time is described in the MPT as an MPU time stamp descriptor or an MPU extended time stamp descriptor. FIG. 7D shows an example of a data structure of an MPU time stamp descriptor describing information on the presentation time. The presentation time information of each MPU is specified by the “mpu_presentation_time” parameter of the MPU time stamp descriptor. Further, the MPU to be designated can be identified by the “mpu_sequence_number” parameter. In the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment, using the presentation time information, a plurality of MPUs designated by the MPT are presented (displayed and output) in conjunction with a clock based on NTP, which is time information expressed in UTC. Etc.). Similarly, the information related to the decoding time is described by the MPU extended time stamp descriptor, but detailed description thereof is omitted. The presentation control of various data using a clock based on the NTP will be described later.
　本実施例の放送システムにおいて、前記『パッケージ』単位の一連のデータがデジタル放送の『サービス』に対応する。また、前記『サービス』は、スケジュールに従って送出される『番組』の連続である。前記『番組』は、ＭＭＴ方式において、『イベント』として扱われる。各イベントは、ＭＨ－ＥＩＴにより開始時刻や継続時間を指定される。また、ＭＨ－ＥＩＴに配置されるイベントパッケージ記述子により、各イベントが対応するＭＭＴパッケージのＩＤが指定される。図７Ｅに、ＭＨ－ＥＩＴのデータ構造の一例を示す。図中の『ｓｔａｒｔ＿ｔｉｍｅ』パラメータにより前記開始時刻が指定され、『ｄｕｒａｔｉｏｎ』パラメータにより前記継続時間が指定される。図７Ｆに、イベントパッケージ記述子のデータ構造の一例を示す。ＭＨ－ＥＩＴに配置される前記イベントパッケージ記述子の『ＭＭＴ＿ｐａｃｋａｇｅ＿ｉｄ＿ｂｙｔｅ』パラメータにより各イベントとＭＭＴパッケージの対応が指定可能となる。ＭＨ－ＥＩＴは、本実施例の放送受信装置１００において当該『イベント』単位での各種処理（例えば、電子番組表の生成処理や、録画予約や視聴予約の制御、一時蓄積などの著作権管理処理）などに用いることができる。 In the broadcasting system of this embodiment, a series of data in units of “packages” corresponds to “services” of digital broadcasting. The “service” is a series of “programs” sent according to a schedule. The “program” is treated as an “event” in the MMT system. Each event has a start time and duration specified by MH-EIT. Further, the ID of the MMT package corresponding to each event is specified by the event package descriptor arranged in the MH-EIT. FIG. 7E shows an example of the data structure of MH-EIT. The start time is specified by the “start_time” parameter in the figure, and the duration is specified by the “duration” parameter. FIG. 7F shows an example of the data structure of the event package descriptor. Correspondence between each event and the MMT package can be designated by the “MMT_package_id_byte” parameter of the event package descriptor arranged in the MH-EIT. The MH-EIT performs various processes in units of the “event” in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment (for example, electronic program guide generation processing, recording reservation and viewing reservation control, copyright management processing such as temporary storage, etc. ) And the like.
　［放送受信装置のハードウェア構成］
　図８Ａは、放送受信装置１００の内部構成の一例を示すブロック図である。放送受信装置１００は、主制御部１０１、システムバス１０２、ＲＯＭ１０３、ＲＡＭ１０４、ストレージ（蓄積）部１１０、ＬＡＮ通信部１２１、拡張インタフェース部１２４、デジタルインタフェース部１２５、チューナ／復調部１３１、分離部１３２、映像デコーダ１４１、映像色域変換部１４２、音声デコーダ１４３、文字スーパーデコーダ１４４、字幕デコーダ１４５、字幕合成部１４６、字幕色域変換部１４７、データデコーダ１５１、キャッシュ部１５２、アプリケーション制御部１５３、ブラウザ部１５４、アプリケーション色域変換部１５５、音源部１５６、映像合成部１６１、モニタ部１６２、映像出力部１６３、音声合成部１６４、スピーカ部１６５、音声出力部１６６、操作入力部１７０、で構成される。 [Hardware configuration of broadcast receiver]
FIG. 8A is a block diagram illustrating an example of an internal configuration of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100. The broadcast receiving apparatus 100 includes a main control unit 101, a system bus 102, a ROM 103, a RAM 104, a storage (storage) unit 110, a LAN communication unit 121, an expansion interface unit 124, a digital interface unit 125, a tuner / demodulation unit 131, and a separation unit 132. , Video decoder 141, video color gamut conversion unit 142, audio decoder 143, character super decoder 144, subtitle decoder 145, subtitle synthesis unit 146, subtitle color gamut conversion unit 147, data decoder 151, cache unit 152, application control unit 153, A browser unit 154, an application color gamut conversion unit 155, a sound source unit 156, a video synthesis unit 161, a monitor unit 162, a video output unit 163, a voice synthesis unit 164, a speaker unit 165, a voice output unit 166, and an operation input unit 170. Is done.
　主制御部１０１は、所定の動作プログラムに従って放送受信装置１００全体を制御するマイクロプロセッサユニットである。システムバス１０２は主制御部１０１と放送受信装置１００内の各動作ブロックとの間でデータ送受信を行うためのデータ通信路である。 The main control unit 101 is a microprocessor unit that controls the entire broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to a predetermined operation program. A system bus 102 is a data communication path for transmitting and receiving data between the main control unit 101 and each operation block in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
　ＲＯＭ（Ｒｅａｄ　Ｏｎｌｙ　Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ）１０３は、オペレーティングシステムなどの基本動作プログラムやその他の動作プログラムが格納された不揮発性メモリであり、例えばＥＥＰＲＯＭ（Ｅｌｅｃｔｒｉｃａｌｌｙ　Ｅｒａｓａｂｌｅ　Ｐｒｏｇｒａｍｍａｂｌｅ　ＲＯＭ）やフラッシュＲＯＭのような書き換え可能なＲＯＭが用いられる。ＲＯＭ１０３には、放送受信装置１００の動作に必要な動作設定値が記憶されても良い。ＲＡＭ（Ｒａｎｄｏｍ　Ａｃｃｅｓｓ　Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ）１０４は基本動作プログラムやその他の動作プログラム実行時のワークエリアとなる。ＲＯＭ１０３およびＲＡＭ１０４は主制御部１０１と一体構成であっても良い。また、ＲＯＭ１０３は、図８Ａに示したような独立構成とはせず、ストレージ（蓄積）部１１０内の一部記憶領域を使用するようにしても良い。 A ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 is a non-volatile memory in which a basic operation program such as an operating system and other operation programs are stored. For example, a rewritable ROM such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) or a flash ROM is provided. Used. The ROM 103 may store operation setting values necessary for the operation of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 serves as a work area for executing a basic operation program and other operation programs. The ROM 103 and the RAM 104 may be integrated with the main control unit 101. Further, the ROM 103 may not use an independent configuration as shown in FIG. 8A but may use a partial storage area in the storage (accumulation) unit 110.
　ストレージ（蓄積）部１１０は、放送受信装置１００の動作プログラムや動作設定値、放送受信装置１００のユーザの個人情報等を記憶する。また、インターネット２００を介してダウンロードした動作プログラムや前記動作プログラムで作成した各種データ等を記憶可能である。また、放送波から取得した、あるいは、インターネット２００を介してダウンロードした、動画、静止画、音声等のコンテンツも記憶可能である。ストレージ（蓄積）部１１０の一部領域を以ってＲＯＭ１０３の機能の全部または一部を代替しても良い。また、ストレージ（蓄積）部１１０は、放送受信装置１００に外部から電源が供給されていない状態であっても記憶している情報を保持する必要がある。従って、例えば、フラッシュＲＯＭやＳＳＤ（Ｓｏｌｉｄ　Ｓｔａｔｅ　Ｄｒｉｖｅ）などの不揮発性半導体素子メモリ、ＨＤＤ（Ｈａｒｄ　Ｄｉｓｃ　Ｄｒｉｖｅ）などの磁気ディスクドライブ、等のデバイスが用いられる。 The storage (accumulation) unit 110 stores an operation program and an operation setting value of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, personal information of the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, and the like. Further, it is possible to store an operation program downloaded via the Internet 200 and various data created by the operation program. It is also possible to store content such as moving images, still images, and audio obtained from broadcast waves or downloaded via the Internet 200. All or some of the functions of the ROM 103 may be replaced by a partial area of the storage (storage) unit 110. Further, the storage (accumulation) unit 110 needs to hold stored information even when power is not supplied to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 from the outside. Therefore, for example, a device such as a nonvolatile semiconductor element memory such as a flash ROM or SSD (Solid State Drive), a magnetic disk drive such as an HDD (Hard Disc Drive), or the like is used.
　なお、ＲＯＭ１０３やストレージ（蓄積）部１１０に記憶された前記各動作プログラムは、インターネット２００上の各サーバ装置からのダウンロード処理により、追加、更新および機能拡張することが可能であるものとする。 It should be noted that each operation program stored in the ROM 103 or the storage (accumulation) unit 110 can be added, updated, and expanded in function by download processing from each server device on the Internet 200.
　ＬＡＮ（Ｌｏｃａｌ　Ａｒｅａ　Ｎｅｔｗｏｒｋ）通信部１２１は、ルータ装置２００ｒを介してインターネット２００と接続され、インターネット２００上の各サーバ装置やその他の通信機器とデータの送受信を行う。また、通信回線を介して伝送される番組のＭＭＴデータ列（あるいは、その一部）の取得も行うものとする。ルータ装置２００ｒとの接続は有線接続であっても良いし、Ｗｉ－Ｆｉ（登録商標）等の無線接続であっても良い。ＬＡＮ通信部１２１は符号回路や復号回路等を備えるものとする。また、放送受信装置１００が、ＢｌｕｅＴｏｏｔｈ（登録商標）通信部やＮＦＣ通信部、赤外線通信部等、他の通信部を更に備えていても良い。 A LAN (Local Area Network) communication unit 121 is connected to the Internet 200 via the router device 200r, and transmits / receives data to / from each server device and other communication devices on the Internet 200. It is also assumed that an MMT data string (or a part thereof) of a program transmitted via a communication line is acquired. The connection with the router device 200r may be a wired connection or a wireless connection such as Wi-Fi (registered trademark). The LAN communication unit 121 includes an encoding circuit, a decoding circuit, and the like. The broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may further include other communication units such as a BlueTooth (registered trademark) communication unit, an NFC communication unit, and an infrared communication unit.
　チューナ／復調部１３１は、アンテナ１００ａを介して電波塔３００ｔから送信された放送波を受信し、主制御部１０１の制御に基づいてユーザの所望するサービスのチャンネルに同調（選局）する。更に、チューナ／復調部１３１は、受信した放送信号を復調してＭＭＴデータ列を取得する。なお、図８Ａに示した例では、チューナ／復調部が１つである構成を例示しているが、複数画面同時表示や裏番組録画等を目的として、放送受信装置１００がチューナ／復調部を複数搭載する構成としても良い。 The tuner / demodulator 131 receives the broadcast wave transmitted from the radio tower 300t via the antenna 100a, and tunes (tunes) to the channel of the service desired by the user based on the control of the main controller 101. Further, the tuner / demodulator 131 demodulates the received broadcast signal to obtain an MMT data string. In the example shown in FIG. 8A, a configuration with one tuner / demodulation unit is illustrated. However, for the purpose of simultaneous display of a plurality of screens, back program recording, and the like, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 includes a tuner / demodulation unit. It is good also as a structure mounted in multiple numbers.
　分離部１３２はＭＭＴデコーダであり、入力したＭＭＴデータ列中の制御信号に基づいてリアルタイム提示要素である映像データ列、音声データ列、文字スーパーデータ列、字幕データ列、等を、それぞれ映像デコーダ１４１、音声デコーダ１４３、文字スーパーデコーダ１４４、字幕デコーダ１４５、等に分配する。分離部１３２に入力されるデータは、放送伝送路を介して伝送されてチューナ／復調部１３１で復調されたＭＭＴデータ列や、通信回線を介して伝送されてＬＡＮ通信部１２１で受信したＭＭＴデータ列であって良い。また、分離部１３２は、マルチメディアアプリケーションやその構成要素であるファイル系データを再生し、キャッシュ部１５２で一時的に蓄積する。また、分離部１３２は、映像音声字幕以外のデータの提示を行うプレーヤで利用するデータ若しくはアプリケーションに対するデータのストリーミングに用いるために、汎用データを抽出してデータデコーダ１５１に出力する。また、分離部１３２は、主制御部１０１の制御に基づいて、前記入力したＭＭＴデータ列に対するエラー訂正やアクセス制限の制御等を行っても良い。 The separation unit 132 is an MMT decoder, and a video data sequence, an audio data sequence, a character super data sequence, a caption data sequence, etc., which are real-time presentation elements based on a control signal in the input MMT data sequence, are respectively converted into a video decoder 141. The voice decoder 143, the character super decoder 144, the subtitle decoder 145, etc. are distributed. The data input to the demultiplexing unit 132 includes an MMT data sequence transmitted through a broadcast transmission path and demodulated by the tuner / demodulation unit 131, or MMT data transmitted through a communication line and received by the LAN communication unit 121. It can be a line. In addition, the separation unit 132 reproduces the multimedia application and file system data that is a component of the multimedia application, and temporarily stores them in the cache unit 152. In addition, the separation unit 132 extracts general-purpose data and outputs the data to the data decoder 151 for use in streaming data for use with a player that presents data other than video / audio subtitles or data for an application. Further, the separation unit 132 may perform error correction, access restriction control, and the like on the input MMT data string based on the control of the main control unit 101.
　映像デコーダ１４１は、分離部１３２から入力した映像データ列を復号して映像情報を出力する。映像色域変換部１４２は、映像デコーダ１４１で復号した映像情報に対して、映像合成部１６１での映像合成処理のために、必要に応じて色空間変換処理を施す。音声デコーダ１４３は、分離部１３２から入力した音声データ列を復号して音声情報を出力する。また、映像デコーダ１４１および音声デコーダ１４３には、ＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介してインターネット２００上から取得した、例えば、ＭＰＥＧ－ＤＡＳＨ（ＭＰＥＧ－Ｄｙｎａｍｉｃ　Ａｄａｐｔｉｖｅ　Ｓｔｒｅａｍｉｎｇ　ｏｖｅｒ　ＨＴＴＰ）形式等のストリーミングデータが入力されても良い。また、映像デコーダ１４１、映像色域変換部１４２、音声デコーダ１４３、等は、複数種類の映像データ列や音声データ列を同時に復号処理するために、複数備えられても良い。 The video decoder 141 decodes the video data sequence input from the separation unit 132 and outputs video information. The video color gamut conversion unit 142 performs color space conversion processing on the video information decoded by the video decoder 141 as needed for video synthesis processing by the video synthesis unit 161. The audio decoder 143 decodes the audio data sequence input from the separation unit 132 and outputs audio information. Further, even when streaming data obtained from the Internet 200 via the LAN communication unit 121, for example, MPEG-DASH (MPEG-Dynamic Adaptive Streaming HTTP) format or the like is input to the video decoder 141 and the audio decoder 143. good. A plurality of video decoders 141, video color gamut conversion units 142, audio decoders 143, and the like may be provided in order to simultaneously decode a plurality of types of video data sequences and audio data sequences.
　文字スーパーデコーダ１４４は、分離部１３２から入力した文字スーパーデータ列を復号して文字スーパー情報を出力する。字幕デコーダ１４５は、分離部１３２から入力した字幕データ列を復号して字幕情報を出力する。文字スーパーデコーダ１４４から出力された文字スーパー情報と字幕デコーダ１４５から出力された字幕情報は、字幕合成部１４６において合成処理を施され、更に、字幕色域変換部１４７において、映像合成部１６１での映像合成処理のために、必要に応じて色空間変換処理を施される。なお、本実施例においては、放送番組の映像と同時に提示される、文字情報を中心とするサービスのうち、映像の内容と関連するものを字幕と呼称し、それ以外のものを文字スーパーと呼称する。また、それらを区別しない場合は、字幕と総称するものとする。 The character super decoder 144 decodes the character super data string input from the separation unit 132 and outputs character super information. The caption decoder 145 decodes the caption data string input from the separation unit 132 and outputs caption information. The superimposing information output from the character super decoder 144 and the subtitle information output from the subtitle decoder 145 are subjected to the synthesizing process in the subtitle synthesizing unit 146, and further, the subtitle color gamut converting unit 147 performs the synthesis in the video synthesizing unit 161. For the video composition process, a color space conversion process is performed as necessary. In the present embodiment, among the services centered on character information that are presented simultaneously with the broadcast program video, those related to the content of the video are referred to as subtitles, and other services are referred to as character supermarkets. To do. If they are not distinguished, they are collectively referred to as subtitles.
　ブラウザ部１５４は、キャッシュ部１５２若しくはＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介してインターネット２００上のサーバ装置から取得したマルチメディアアプリケーションファイルやその構成要素であるファイル系データを、ＭＭＴデータ列に含まれる制御情報やＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介してインターネット２００上のサーバ装置から取得した制御情報を解釈するアプリケーション制御部１５３の指示に従って提示する。なお、前記マルチメディアアプリケーションファイルは、ＨＴＭＬ（Ｈｙｐｅｒ　Ｔｅｘｔ　Ｍａｒｋｕｐ　Ｌａｎｇｕａｇｅ）文書やＢＭＬ（Ｂｒｏａｄｃａｓｔ　Ｍａｒｋｕｐ　Ｌａｎｇｕａｇｅ）文書等であって良い。ブラウザ部１５４から出力されたアプリケーション情報は、更に、アプリケーション色域変換部１５５において、映像合成部１６１での映像合成処理のために、必要に応じて色空間変換処理を施される。また、ブラウザ部１５４は、音源部１５６に働きかけることにより、アプリケーション音声情報の再生も行うものとする。 The browser unit 154 transmits the multimedia application file acquired from the server device on the Internet 200 via the cache unit 152 or the LAN communication unit 121 and the file system data that is a component of the multimedia application file to the control information or LAN included in the MMT data string. The control information acquired from the server device on the Internet 200 via the communication unit 121 is presented according to an instruction from the application control unit 153 that interprets the control information. The multimedia application file may be an HTML (Hyper Text Markup Language) document, a BML (Broadcast Markup Language) document, or the like. The application information output from the browser unit 154 is further subjected to color space conversion processing in the application color gamut conversion unit 155 as necessary for the video composition processing in the video composition unit 161. The browser unit 154 also plays the application audio information by acting on the sound source unit 156.
　映像合成部１６１は、映像色域変換部１４２から出力された映像情報と字幕色域変換部１４７から出力された字幕情報とアプリケーション色域変換部１５５から出力されたアプリケーション情報等を入力し、適宜選択および／または重畳等の処理を行う。映像合成部１６１は図示を省略したビデオＲＡＭを備え、前記ビデオＲＡＭに入力された映像情報等に基づいてモニタ部１６２等が駆動される。また、映像合成部１６１は、主制御部１０１の制御に基づいて、必要に応じて、スケーリング処理やＭＭＴ－ＳＩに含まれるＭＨ－ＥＩＴ等の情報に基づいて作成されたＥＰＧ（Ｅｌｅｃｔｒｏｎｉｃ　Ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ　Ｇｕｉｄｅ：電子番組表）画面情報の重畳処理等を行う。モニタ部１６２は、例えば液晶パネル等の表示デバイスであり、映像合成部１６１で選択および／または重畳処理を施された映像情報を放送受信装置１００のユーザに提供する。映像出力部１６３は、映像合成部１６１で選択および／または重畳処理を施された映像情報を出力する映像出力インタフェースである。 The video composition unit 161 receives the video information output from the video color gamut conversion unit 142, the caption information output from the subtitle color gamut conversion unit 147, the application information output from the application color gamut conversion unit 155, and the like. Processing such as selection and / or superposition is performed. The video composition unit 161 includes a video RAM (not shown), and the monitor unit 162 and the like are driven based on video information and the like input to the video RAM. In addition, the video composition unit 161 is based on the control of the main control unit 101, and an EPG (Electronic Program Guide) created based on information such as scaling processing and MH-EIT included in the MMT-SI as necessary. Electronic program guide) Superimposes screen information. The monitor unit 162 is a display device such as a liquid crystal panel, for example, and provides video information selected and / or superimposed by the video composition unit 161 to the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100. The video output unit 163 is a video output interface that outputs the video information that has been selected and / or superimposed by the video composition unit 161.
　なお、本実施例の放送受信装置１００の提示機能は、マルチメディアサービスを提供者の意図通りに表示させるために、論理的プレーン構造を備えるものとする。図８Ｂに、本実施例の放送受信装置１００の提示機能が備える論理的プレーン構造の構成の一例を示す。前記論理的プレーン構造では、最前面に文字スーパーの表示を行う文字スーパープレーンを配置し、次層に字幕の表示を行う字幕プレーンを配置する。三層目に放送映像やマルチメディアアプリケーション、またはその合成映像の表示を行うマルチメディアプレーンを配置し、最背面に背景プレーンを配置する。字幕合成部１４６および映像合成部１６１において、文字スーパー情報の文字スーパープレーンへの描画、字幕情報の字幕プレーンへの描画、映像情報やアプリケーション情報等のマルチメディアプレーンへの描画が行われる。また、ＭＭＴ－ＳＩに含まれるＬＣＴ等に基づいて背景色が背景プレーンに描画される。なお、三層目のマルチメディアプレーンは、映像デコーダ１４１の数に応じて複数用意することが可能であるものとする。但し、マルチメディアプレーンが複数ある場合でも、アプリケーション色域変換部１５５から出力されたアプリケーション情報等は、最前面のマルチメディアプレーンにのみ出力されるものとする。 Note that the presentation function of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment has a logical plane structure in order to display the multimedia service as intended by the provider. FIG. 8B shows an example of the configuration of the logical plane structure provided in the presentation function of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment. In the logical plane structure, a character super plane for displaying a character super is arranged on the foreground, and a subtitle plane for displaying a subtitle is arranged on the next layer. In the third layer, a multimedia plane for displaying a broadcast video, a multimedia application, or a composite video thereof is arranged, and a background plane is arranged on the backmost surface. In the caption synthesizing unit 146 and the video synthesizing unit 161, drawing of the character super information on the character super plane, drawing of the subtitle information on the subtitle plane, and drawing on the multimedia plane such as video information and application information are performed. In addition, the background color is drawn on the background plane based on LCT included in the MMT-SI. Note that a plurality of multimedia planes in the third layer can be prepared according to the number of video decoders 141. However, even when there are a plurality of multimedia planes, the application information and the like output from the application color gamut conversion unit 155 is output only to the foreground multimedia plane.
　音声合成部１６４は、音声デコーダ１４３から出力された音声情報および音源部１５６で再生されたアプリケーション音声情報を入力して、適宜選択および／またはミックス等の処理を行う。スピーカ部１６５は、音声合成部１６４で選択および／またはミックス処理を施された音声情報を放送受信装置１００のユーザに提供する。音声出力部１６６は、音声合成部１６４で選択および／またはミックス処理を施された音声情報を出力する音声出力インタフェースである。 The voice synthesizer 164 inputs the voice information output from the voice decoder 143 and the application voice information reproduced by the sound source unit 156, and performs processing such as selection and / or mixing as appropriate. The speaker unit 165 provides the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 with the audio information that has been selected and / or mixed by the voice synthesis unit 164. The audio output unit 166 is an audio output interface that outputs audio information that has been selected and / or mixed by the audio synthesis unit 164.
　拡張インタフェース部１２４は、放送受信装置１００の機能を拡張するためのインタフェース群であり、本実施例では、アナログ映像／音声インタフェース、ＵＳＢ（Ｕｎｉｖｅｒｓａｌ　Ｓｅｒｉａｌ　Ｂｕｓ）インタフェース、メモリインタフェース等で構成されるものとする。アナログ映像／音声インタフェースは、外部映像／音声出力機器からのアナログ映像信号／音声信号の入力、外部映像／音声入力機器へのアナログ映像信号／音声信号の出力、等を行う。ＵＳＢインタフェースは、ＰＣ等と接続してデータの送受信を行う。ＨＤＤを接続して放送番組やコンテンツの記録を行っても良い。また、キーボードやその他のＵＳＢ機器の接続を行っても良い。メモリインタフェースはメモリカードやその他のメモリ媒体を接続してデータの送受信を行う。 The extension interface unit 124 is an interface group for extending the function of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100. In this embodiment, the extension interface unit 124 includes an analog video / audio interface, a USB (Universal Serial Bus) interface, a memory interface, and the like. To do. The analog video / audio interface performs input of analog video signals / audio signals from external video / audio output devices, output of analog video signals / audio signals to external video / audio input devices, and the like. The USB interface is connected to a PC or the like to transmit / receive data. A broadcast program or content may be recorded by connecting an HDD. A keyboard or other USB device may be connected. The memory interface transmits and receives data by connecting a memory card and other memory media.
　デジタルインタフェース部１２５は、符号化されたデジタル映像データおよび／またはデジタル音声データを出力若しくは入力するインタフェースである。デジタルインタフェース部１２５は、チューナ／復調部１３１で復調して得たＭＭＴデータ列やＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介して取得したＭＭＴデータ列、あるいは、前記各ＭＭＴデータ列の混合データをそのまま出力可能であるものとする。また、デジタルインタフェース部１２５から入力したＭＭＴデータ列を分離部１３２に入力するように制御しても良い。ストレージ（蓄積）部１１０に記憶したデジタルコンテンツの出力、あるいは、ストレージ（蓄積）部１１０へのデジタルコンテンツの記憶を、デジタルインタフェース部１２５を介して行っても良い。 The digital interface unit 125 is an interface for outputting or inputting encoded digital video data and / or digital audio data. The digital interface unit 125 can output the MMT data sequence obtained by demodulation by the tuner / demodulation unit 131, the MMT data sequence acquired via the LAN communication unit 121, or the mixed data of the MMT data sequences as they are. Shall. Further, the MMT data string input from the digital interface unit 125 may be controlled to be input to the separation unit 132. Output of digital content stored in the storage (accumulation) unit 110 or storage of digital content in the storage (accumulation) unit 110 may be performed via the digital interface unit 125.
　デジタルインタフェース部１２５は、ＤＶＩ端子やＨＤＭＩ（登録商標）端子やＤｉｓｐｌａｙ　Ｐｏｒｔ（登録商標）端子等であって、ＤＶＩ仕様やＨＤＭＩ仕様やＤｉｓｐｌａｙ　Ｐｏｒｔ仕様等に準拠した形式でデータの出力あるいは入力がなされるものであって良い。ＩＥＥＥ１３９４仕様等に準拠したシリアルデータの形式で出力あるいは入力されても良い。また、イーサネット（登録商標）や無線ＬＡＮ等のハードウェアを介してデジタルインタフェース出力を行うＩＰインタフェースとして構成しても良い。この場合、デジタルインタフェース部１２５とＬＡＮ通信部１２１とはそのハードウェア構成を共有しても良い。 The digital interface unit 125 is a DVI terminal, an HDMI (registered trademark) terminal, a Display Port (registered trademark) terminal, or the like, and outputs or inputs data in a format compliant with the DVI specification, the HDMI specification, the Display Port specification, or the like. It may be a thing. It may be output or input in the form of serial data conforming to the IEEE 1394 specification or the like. Further, it may be configured as an IP interface that performs digital interface output via hardware such as Ethernet (registered trademark) or wireless LAN. In this case, the digital interface unit 125 and the LAN communication unit 121 may share the hardware configuration.
　操作入力部１７０は、放送受信装置１００に対する操作指示の入力を行う指示入力部であり、本実施例では、図示を省略したリモコンから送信されるコマンドを受信するリモコン受信部とボタンスイッチを並べた操作キーで構成されるものとする。何れか一方のみであっても良い。また、操作入力部１７０は、モニタ部１６２に重ねて配したタッチパネルで代替しても良い。拡張インタフェース部１２４に接続したキーボード等で代替しても良い。前記図示を省略したリモコンは、リモコンコマンド送信機能を備えた携帯情報端末７００で代替しても良い。 The operation input unit 170 is an instruction input unit that inputs an operation instruction to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100. In this embodiment, a remote control receiving unit that receives a command transmitted from a remote controller (not shown) and a button switch are arranged. It shall consist of operation keys. Either one may be sufficient. Further, the operation input unit 170 may be replaced with a touch panel arranged on the monitor unit 162. A keyboard connected to the extension interface unit 124 may be substituted. The remote controller (not shown) may be replaced with a portable information terminal 700 having a remote command transmission function.
　なお、前述のように、放送受信装置１００がテレビ受信機等である場合、映像出力部１６３および音声出力部１６６は本発明に必須の構成ではない。また、放送受信装置１００は、テレビ受信機の他、ＤＶＤ（Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ｖｅｒｓａｔｉｌｅ　Ｄｉｓｃ）レコーダなどの光ディスクドライブレコーダ、ＨＤＤレコーダなどの磁気ディスクドライブレコーダ、ＳＴＢ（Ｓｅｔ　Ｔｏｐ　Ｂｏｘ）等であっても良い。デジタル放送受信機能や放送通信連携機能を備えたＰＣ（Ｐｅｒｓｏｎａｌ　Ｃｏｍｐｕｔｅｒ）やタブレット端末、ナビゲーション装置、ゲーム機等であっても良い。放送受信装置１００がＤＶＤレコーダ、ＨＤＤレコーダ、ＳＴＢ等である場合、モニタ部１６２およびスピーカ部１６５は備えなくとも良い。映像出力部１６３および音声出力部１６６あるいはデジタルインタフェース部１２５に、外部モニタおよび外部スピーカを接続することにより、本実施例の放送受信装置１００と同様の動作が可能となる。 As described above, when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is a television receiver or the like, the video output unit 163 and the audio output unit 166 are not essential components of the present invention. In addition to the television receiver, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may be an optical disk drive recorder such as a DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) recorder, a magnetic disk drive recorder such as an HDD recorder, an STB (Set Top Box), or the like. It may be a PC (Personal Computer), a tablet terminal, a navigation device, a game machine or the like having a digital broadcast receiving function or a broadcast communication cooperation function. When the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is a DVD recorder, HDD recorder, STB, or the like, the monitor unit 162 and the speaker unit 165 may not be provided. By connecting an external monitor and an external speaker to the video output unit 163, the audio output unit 166, or the digital interface unit 125, an operation similar to that of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment is possible.
　［放送受信装置のソフトウェア構成］
　図８Ｃは、本実施例の放送受信装置１００のソフトウェア構成図であり、ＲＯＭ１０３、ＲＡＭ１０４およびストレージ（蓄積）部１１０におけるソフトウェアの構成を示す。本実施例においては、ＲＯＭ１０３に基本動作プログラム１００１およびその他の動作プログラムが記憶されており、ストレージ（蓄積）部１１０に受信機能プログラム１００２、連携機能プログラム１００３、録画再生機能プログラム１００４、およびその他の動作プログラムが記憶されている。また、ストレージ（蓄積）部１１０は、動画や静止画や音声等のコンテンツを記憶するコンテンツ記憶領域１２００、外部の携帯端末機器や各サーバ装置にアクセスする際に必要な認証情報等を記憶する認証情報記憶領域１３００、その他の各種情報を記憶する各種情報記憶領域を備えるものとする。 [Broadcast receiving device software configuration]
FIG. 8C is a software configuration diagram of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, and shows a software configuration in the ROM 103, the RAM 104, and the storage (storage) unit 110. In this embodiment, a basic operation program 1001 and other operation programs are stored in the ROM 103, and a reception function program 1002, a cooperation function program 1003, a recording / playback function program 1004, and other operations are stored in the storage (accumulation) unit 110. The program is stored. The storage unit 110 also stores a content storage area 1200 that stores content such as moving images, still images, and audio, and authentication information that is necessary when accessing an external mobile terminal device or each server device. It is assumed that an information storage area 1300 and various information storage areas for storing various other information are provided.
　ＲＯＭ１０３に記憶された基本動作プログラム１００１はＲＡＭ１０４に展開され、更に主制御部１０１が前記展開された基本動作プログラム１００１を実行することにより、基本動作実行部１１０１を構成する。また、ストレージ（蓄積）部１１０に記憶された受信機能プログラム１００２や連携機能プログラム１００３や録画再生機能プログラム１００４も同様にＲＡＭ１０４に展開され、更に主制御部１０１が前記展開された受信機能プログラム１００２や連携機能プログラム１００３や録画再生機能プログラム１００４を実行することにより、受信機能実行部１１０２や連携機能実行部１１０３や録画再生機能実行部１１０４を構成する。また、ＲＡＭ１０４は、各動作プログラム実行時に作成したデータを、必要に応じて一時的に保持する一時記憶領域を備えるものとする。 The basic operation program 1001 stored in the ROM 103 is expanded in the RAM 104, and the main control unit 101 executes the expanded basic operation program 1001 to constitute a basic operation execution unit 1101. Similarly, the reception function program 1002, the linkage function program 1003, and the recording / playback function program 1004 stored in the storage (accumulation) unit 110 are expanded in the RAM 104, and the main control unit 101 further expands the reception function program 1002 and By executing the linkage function program 1003 and the recording / playback function program 1004, the reception function execution unit 1102, the linkage function execution unit 1103, and the recording / playback function execution unit 1104 are configured. The RAM 104 is provided with a temporary storage area that temporarily holds data created when each operation program is executed as necessary.
　なお、以下では、説明を簡単にするために、主制御部１０１がＲＯＭ１０３に格納された基本動作プログラム１００１をＲＡＭ１０４に展開して実行することにより各動作ブロックの制御を行う処理を、基本動作実行部１１０１が各動作ブロックの制御を行うものとして記述する。他の動作プログラムに関しても同様の記述を行う。 In the following, in order to simplify the explanation, the main control unit 101 executes the basic operation processing to control each operation block by expanding the basic operation program 1001 stored in the ROM 103 into the RAM 104 and executing it. The unit 1101 is described as performing control of each operation block. The same description is made for other operation programs.
　受信機能実行部１１０２は、本実施例の放送システムで伝送される映像や音声等のコンポーネントを再生するために放送受信装置１００の各動作ブロックを制御する。特に、トランスポート処理部１１０２ａは、分離部１３２のＭＭＴデコーダ機能を主として制御し、ＭＭＴデータ列から分離した映像データ列や音声データ列等をそれぞれ対応するデコード処理部に分配する。ＡＶデコード処理部１１０２ｂは、映像デコーダ１４１や音声デコーダ１４３等を主として制御する。アプリケーション処理部１１０２ｃは、キャッシュ部１５２やアプリケーション制御部１５３やブラウザ部１５４や音源部１５６を主として制御する。文字スーパー処理部１１０２ｄは、文字スーパーデコーダ１４４を主として制御する。字幕処理部１１０２ｅは、字幕デコーダ１４５を主として制御する。汎用データ処理部１１０２ｆは、データデコーダ１５１を主として制御する。ＥＰＧ生成部１１０２ｇは、ＭＭＴ－ＳＩに含まれるＭＨ－ＥＩＴ等の記述内容を解釈してＥＰＧ画面を生成する。提示処理部１１０２ｈは、前記論理的プレーン構造に基づいて、映像色域変換部１４２や字幕合成部１４６や字幕色域変換部１４７やアプリケーション色域変換部１５５や映像合成部１６１や音声合成部１６４を主として制御する。 The reception function execution unit 1102 controls each operation block of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 in order to reproduce components such as video and audio transmitted in the broadcast system of the present embodiment. In particular, the transport processing unit 1102a mainly controls the MMT decoder function of the separation unit 132, and distributes the video data sequence, the audio data sequence, and the like separated from the MMT data sequence to the corresponding decoding processing units. The AV decoding processing unit 1102b mainly controls the video decoder 141, the audio decoder 143, and the like. The application processing unit 1102c mainly controls the cache unit 152, the application control unit 153, the browser unit 154, and the sound source unit 156. The character super processing unit 1102d mainly controls the character super decoder 144. The caption processing unit 1102e mainly controls the caption decoder 145. The general-purpose data processing unit 1102f mainly controls the data decoder 151. The EPG generation unit 1102g generates an EPG screen by interpreting description contents such as MH-EIT included in the MMT-SI. The presentation processing unit 1102h is based on the logical plane structure, and the video color gamut conversion unit 142, the subtitle synthesis unit 146, the subtitle color gamut conversion unit 147, the application color gamut conversion unit 155, the video synthesis unit 161, and the audio synthesis unit 164. Is mainly controlled.
　また、連携機能実行部１１０３は、放送受信装置１００が携帯情報端末７００等の外部装置との連携動作を行う際の、機器認証および接続、各データの送受信、等の管理を行う。録画再生機能実行部１１０４は、本放送システムのデジタル放送波から取得した放送番組やネットワーク上の各サーバ装置から取得したコンテンツ等を、ストレージ（蓄積）部１１０のコンテンツ記憶領域１２００や拡張インタフェース部１２４に接続された外部ストレージ等に記録する際の、あるいは、前記放送番組やコンテンツ等を再生する際の制御を行う。 Also, the cooperation function execution unit 1103 manages device authentication and connection, transmission / reception of each data, and the like when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 performs a cooperation operation with an external apparatus such as the portable information terminal 700. The recording / playback function execution unit 1104 stores a broadcast program acquired from a digital broadcast wave of this broadcast system, content acquired from each server device on the network, the content storage area 1200 of the storage (storage) unit 110, and the extended interface unit 124. Control is performed when recording in an external storage or the like connected to or when reproducing the broadcast program or content.
　前記各動作プログラムは、製品出荷の時点で、予めＲＯＭ１０３および／またはストレージ（蓄積）部１１０に格納された状態であっても良い。製品出荷後に、インターネット２００上のその他のアプリケーションサーバ５００等からＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介して取得するものであっても良い。また、メモリカードや光ディスク等に格納された前記各動作プログラムを、拡張インタフェース部１２４等を介して取得するものであっても良い。 The operation programs may be stored in advance in the ROM 103 and / or the storage (accumulation) unit 110 at the time of product shipment. It may be acquired from the other application server 500 on the Internet 200 via the LAN communication unit 121 after the product is shipped. Further, each operation program stored in a memory card, an optical disk or the like may be acquired via the expansion interface unit 124 or the like.
　［放送局サーバの構成］
　図９は、放送局サーバ３００の内部構成の一例を示すブロック図である。放送局サーバ３００は、主制御部３０１、システムバス３０２、ＲＡＭ３０４、ストレージ部３１０、ＬＡＮ通信部３２１、デジタル放送信号送出部３６０、で構成される。 [Broadcasting station server configuration]
FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating an example of the internal configuration of the broadcast station server 300. The broadcast station server 300 includes a main control unit 301, a system bus 302, a RAM 304, a storage unit 310, a LAN communication unit 321 and a digital broadcast signal transmission unit 360.
　主制御部３０１は、所定の動作プログラムに従って放送局サーバ３００全体を制御するマイクロプロセッサユニットである。システムバス３０２は主制御部３０１と放送局サーバ３００内の各動作ブロックとの間でデータ送受信を行うためのデータ通信路である。ＲＡＭ３０４は各動作プログラム実行時のワークエリアとなる。 The main control unit 301 is a microprocessor unit that controls the entire broadcast station server 300 in accordance with a predetermined operation program. A system bus 302 is a data communication path for performing data transmission / reception between the main control unit 301 and each operation block in the broadcast station server 300. The RAM 304 serves as a work area when executing each operation program.
　ストレージ部３１０は、基本動作プログラム３００１および放送コンテンツ管理／配信プログラム３００２と放送コンテンツ送出プログラム３００３を記憶し、更に、放送コンテンツ記憶領域３２００およびメタデータ記憶領域３３００を備える。放送コンテンツ記憶領域３２００は放送局が放送する各放送番組の番組コンテンツ等を記憶する。メタデータ記憶領域３３００は前記各放送番組の番組タイトル、番組ＩＤ、番組概要、出演者、放送日時、各番組コンテンツに係るコピー制御情報、等のメタデータを記憶する。 The storage unit 310 stores a basic operation program 3001, a broadcast content management / distribution program 3002, and a broadcast content transmission program 3003, and further includes a broadcast content storage area 3200 and a metadata storage area 3300. The broadcast content storage area 3200 stores program content and the like of each broadcast program broadcast by the broadcast station. The metadata storage area 3300 stores metadata such as the program title, program ID, program overview, performers, broadcast date and time, copy control information related to each program content, and the like of each broadcast program.
　また、ストレージ部３１０に記憶された基本動作プログラム３００１および放送コンテンツ管理／配信プログラム３００２と放送コンテンツ送出プログラム３００３はそれぞれＲＡＭ３０４に展開され、更に主制御部３０１が前記展開された各プログラムを実行することにより、基本動作実行部３１０１、放送コンテンツ管理／配信実行部３１０２、放送コンテンツ送出実行部３１０３を構成する。 The basic operation program 3001, the broadcast content management / distribution program 3002, and the broadcast content transmission program 3003 stored in the storage unit 310 are expanded in the RAM 304, and the main control unit 301 further executes the expanded programs. Thus, a basic operation execution unit 3101, a broadcast content management / distribution execution unit 3102, and a broadcast content transmission execution unit 3103 are configured.
　なお、以下では、説明を簡単にするために、主制御部３０１がストレージ部３１０に格納された基本動作プログラム３００１をＲＡＭ３０４に展開して実行することにより各動作ブロックの制御を行う処理を、基本動作実行部３１０１が各動作ブロックの制御を行うものとして記述する。他の動作プログラムに関しても同様の記述を行う。 In the following, in order to simplify the description, a process for controlling each operation block by causing the main control unit 301 to expand the basic operation program 3001 stored in the storage unit 310 to the RAM 304 and execute the basic operation program 3001 will be described. The operation execution unit 3101 is described as performing control of each operation block. The same description is made for other operation programs.
　放送コンテンツ管理／配信実行部３１０２は、放送コンテンツ記憶領域３２００およびメタデータ記憶領域３３００に蓄積された各放送番組の番組コンテンツ等および各メタデータの管理と、前記各放送番組の番組コンテンツ等および各メタデータを契約に基づいてサービス事業者に提供する際の制御を行う。更に、放送コンテンツ管理／配信実行部３１０２は、前記サービス事業者に対して前記各放送番組の番組コンテンツ等および各メタデータの提供を行う際に、必要に応じて前記契約に基づいたサービス事業者サーバ４００の認証処理等を行っても良い。 The broadcast content management / distribution execution unit 3102 manages the program content and the like of each broadcast program stored in the broadcast content storage area 3200 and the metadata storage area 3300, the program content of each broadcast program, and the like. Performs control when providing metadata to service providers based on contracts. Furthermore, the broadcast content management / distribution execution unit 3102 provides a service provider based on the contract as necessary when providing the service provider with the program content of each broadcast program and each metadata. Authentication processing of the server 400 may be performed.
　放送コンテンツ送出実行部３１０３は、放送コンテンツ記憶領域３２００に蓄積された放送番組の番組コンテンツや、メタデータ記憶領域３３００に蓄積された放送番組の番組タイトル、番組ＩＤ、番組コンテンツのコピー制御情報等を含むＭＭＴデータ列を、デジタル放送信号送出部３６０を介して電波塔３００ｔから送出する際のタイムスケジュール管理等を行う。 The broadcast content transmission execution unit 3103 displays the program content of the broadcast program stored in the broadcast content storage area 3200, the program title of the broadcast program stored in the metadata storage area 3300, the program ID, copy control information of the program content, and the like. Time schedule management and the like are performed when an MMT data string including the MMT data string is transmitted from the radio tower 300t via the digital broadcast signal transmission unit 360.
　ＬＡＮ通信部３２１は、インターネット２００と接続され、インターネット２００上のサービス事業者サーバ４００等と通信を行う。ＬＡＮ通信部３２１は符号回路や復号回路等を備えるものとする。デジタル放送信号送出部３６０は、放送コンテンツ記憶領域３２００に蓄積された各放送番組の番組コンテンツ等の映像データ列や音声データ列、番組情報データ列、等で構成されたＭＭＴデータ列を変調して、電波塔３００ｔを介して、デジタル放送波として送出する。 The LAN communication unit 321 is connected to the Internet 200 and communicates with the service provider server 400 on the Internet 200. The LAN communication unit 321 includes a coding circuit, a decoding circuit, and the like. The digital broadcast signal transmission unit 360 modulates the MMT data sequence composed of the video data sequence, the audio data sequence, the program information data sequence, etc. of the program content of each broadcast program stored in the broadcast content storage area 3200. The digital broadcast wave is transmitted through the radio tower 300t.
　［サービス事業者サーバの構成］
　図１０は、サービス事業者サーバ４００の内部構成の一例を示すブロック図である。サービス事業者サーバ４００は、主制御部４０１、システムバス４０２、ＲＡＭ４０４、ストレージ部４１０、ＬＡＮ通信部４２１、で構成される。 [Service provider server configuration]
FIG. 10 is a block diagram illustrating an example of the internal configuration of the service provider server 400. The service provider server 400 includes a main control unit 401, a system bus 402, a RAM 404, a storage unit 410, and a LAN communication unit 421.
　主制御部４０１は、所定の動作プログラムに従ってサービス事業者サーバ４００全体を制御するマイクロプロセッサユニットである。システムバス４０２は主制御部４０１とサービス事業者サーバ４００内の各動作ブロックとの間でデータ送受信を行うためのデータ通信路である。ＲＡＭ４０４は各動作プログラム実行時のワークエリアとなる。 The main control unit 401 is a microprocessor unit that controls the entire service provider server 400 according to a predetermined operation program. A system bus 402 is a data communication path for transmitting and receiving data between the main control unit 401 and each operation block in the service provider server 400. The RAM 404 becomes a work area when each operation program is executed.
　ストレージ部４１０は、基本動作プログラム４００１および映像コンテンツ管理／配信プログラム４００２とアプリケーション管理／配布プログラム４００４を記憶し、更に、映像コンテンツ記憶領域４２００およびメタデータ記憶領域４３００、アプリケーション記憶領域４４００、ユーザ情報記憶領域４５００を備える。映像コンテンツ記憶領域４２００は、放送局サーバ３００から提供された放送番組の番組コンテンツを映像コンテンツとして記憶する。また、前記サービス事業者が制作した映像コンテンツ等を記憶する。メタデータ記憶領域４３００は、放送局サーバ３００から提供された各メタデータや、前記サービス事業者が制作した映像コンテンツに関するメタデータ等を記憶する。アプリケーション記憶領域４４００は、各テレビ受信機からの要求に応じて配布するための、放送番組に連携したサービスを実現するための各種アプリケーション等を記憶する。ユーザ情報記憶領域４５００は、サービス事業者サーバ４００へのアクセスが許可されたユーザに関する情報（個人情報や認証情報等）を記憶する。 The storage unit 410 stores a basic operation program 4001, a video content management / distribution program 4002, and an application management / distribution program 4004, and further stores a video content storage area 4200, a metadata storage area 4300, an application storage area 4400, and user information storage. An area 4500 is provided. The video content storage area 4200 stores program content of a broadcast program provided from the broadcast station server 300 as video content. In addition, the video content produced by the service provider is stored. The metadata storage area 4300 stores each metadata provided from the broadcast station server 300, metadata about video content produced by the service provider, and the like. The application storage area 4400 stores various applications for realizing a service linked to a broadcast program for distribution in response to a request from each television receiver. The user information storage area 4500 stores information (such as personal information and authentication information) related to users who are permitted to access the service provider server 400.
　また、ストレージ部４１０に記憶された基本動作プログラム４００１および映像コンテンツ管理／配信プログラム４００２とアプリケーション管理／配布プログラム４００４はそれぞれＲＡＭ４０４に展開され、更に主制御部４０１が前記展開された基本動作プログラムおよび映像コンテンツ管理／配信プログラムとアプリケーション管理／配布プログラムを実行することにより、基本動作実行部４１０１、映像コンテンツ管理／配信実行部４１０２、アプリケーション管理／配布実行部４１０４を構成する。 The basic operation program 4001, the video content management / distribution program 4002 and the application management / distribution program 4004 stored in the storage unit 410 are expanded in the RAM 404, and the main control unit 401 further expands the basic operation program and the video. By executing the content management / distribution program and the application management / distribution program, a basic operation execution unit 4101, a video content management / distribution execution unit 4102, and an application management / distribution execution unit 4104 are configured.
　なお、以下では、説明を簡単にするために、主制御部４０１がストレージ部４１０に格納された基本動作プログラム４００１をＲＡＭ４０４に展開して実行することにより各動作ブロックの制御を行う処理を、基本動作実行部４１０１が各動作ブロックの制御を行うものとして記述する。他の動作プログラムに関しても同様の記述を行う。 In the following, in order to simplify the description, a process for controlling each operation block by the main control unit 401 by developing the basic operation program 4001 stored in the storage unit 410 in the RAM 404 and executing the basic operation program 4001 will be described. It is described that the operation execution unit 4101 controls each operation block. The same description is made for other operation programs.
　映像コンテンツ管理／配信実行部４１０２は、放送局サーバ３００からの放送番組の番組コンテンツ等およびメタデータの取得、映像コンテンツ記憶領域４２００およびメタデータ記憶領域４３００に蓄積された映像コンテンツ等および各メタデータの管理、および各テレビ受信機に対する前記映像コンテンツ等および各メタデータの配信の制御を行う。更に、映像コンテンツ管理／配信実行部４１０２は、前記各テレビ受信機に対して前記各映像コンテンツ等および各メタデータの配信を行う際に、必要に応じて前記各テレビ受信機の認証処理等を行っても良い。また、アプリケーション管理／配布実行部４１０４は、アプリケーション記憶領域４４００に蓄積された各アプリケーションの管理と、前記各アプリケーションを各テレビ受信機からの要求に応じて配布する際の制御と、を行う。更に、アプリケーション管理／配布実行部４１０４は、前記各テレビ受信機に対して前記各アプリケーションの配布を行う際に、必要に応じて前記各テレビ受信機の認証処理等を行っても良い。 The video content management / distribution execution unit 4102 obtains the program content and the metadata of the broadcast program from the broadcasting station server 300, the video content stored in the video content storage area 4200 and the metadata storage area 4300, and each metadata. And the distribution of the video content etc. and each metadata to each television receiver. Furthermore, the video content management / distribution execution unit 4102 performs authentication processing and the like of each television receiver as necessary when delivering each video content and each metadata to each television receiver. You can go. The application management / distribution execution unit 4104 performs management of each application stored in the application storage area 4400 and control when each application is distributed in response to a request from each television receiver. Furthermore, the application management / distribution execution unit 4104 may perform authentication processing of each television receiver as necessary when distributing each application to each television receiver.
　ＬＡＮ通信部４２１は、インターネット２００と接続され、インターネット２００上の放送局サーバ３００や、ルータ装置２００ｒを介して放送受信装置１００と通信を行う。ＬＡＮ通信部４２１は符号回路や復号回路等を備えるものとする。 The LAN communication unit 421 is connected to the Internet 200 and communicates with the broadcast receiving device 100 via the broadcast station server 300 on the Internet 200 and the router device 200r. The LAN communication unit 421 includes a coding circuit, a decoding circuit, and the like.
　［携帯情報端末のハードウェア構成］
　図１１Ａは、携帯情報端末７００の内部構成の一例を示すブロック図である。携帯情報端末７００は、主制御部７０１、システムバス７０２、ＲＯＭ７０３、ＲＡＭ７０４、ストレージ部７１０、通信処理部７２０、拡張インタフェース部７２４、操作部７３０、画像処理部７４０、音声処理部７５０、センサ部７６０、で構成される。 [Hardware configuration of portable information terminal]
FIG. 11A is a block diagram illustrating an example of an internal configuration of the portable information terminal 700. The portable information terminal 700 includes a main control unit 701, a system bus 702, a ROM 703, a RAM 704, a storage unit 710, a communication processing unit 720, an expansion interface unit 724, an operation unit 730, an image processing unit 740, an audio processing unit 750, and a sensor unit 760. , Is composed.
　主制御部７０１は、所定の動作プログラムに従って携帯情報端末７００全体を制御するマイクロプロセッサユニットである。システムバス７０２は主制御部７０１と携帯情報端末７００内の各動作ブロックとの間でデータ送受信を行うためのデータ通信路である。 The main control unit 701 is a microprocessor unit that controls the entire portable information terminal 700 according to a predetermined operation program. A system bus 702 is a data communication path for transmitting and receiving data between the main control unit 701 and each operation block in the portable information terminal 700.
　ＲＯＭ７０３は、オペレーティングシステムなどの基本動作プログラムやその他の動作プログラムが格納されたメモリであり、例えばＥＥＰＲＯＭやフラッシュＲＯＭのような書き換え可能なＲＯＭが用いられる。ＲＡＭ７０４は基本動作プログラムやその他の動作プログラム実行時のワークエリアとなる。ＲＯＭ７０３およびＲＡＭ７０４は主制御部７０１と一体構成であっても良い。また、ＲＯＭ７０３は、図１１Ａに示したような独立構成とはせず、ストレージ部７１０内の一部記憶領域を使用するようにしても良い。 The ROM 703 is a memory in which a basic operation program such as an operating system and other operation programs are stored. For example, a rewritable ROM such as an EEPROM or a flash ROM is used. The RAM 704 serves as a work area when the basic operation program and other operation programs are executed. The ROM 703 and the RAM 704 may be integrated with the main control unit 701. In addition, the ROM 703 does not have an independent configuration as illustrated in FIG.
　ストレージ部７１０は、携帯情報端末７００の動作プログラムや動作設定値、携帯情報端末７００のユーザの個人情報等を記憶する。また、インターネット２００を介してダウンロードした動作プログラムや前記動作プログラムで作成した各種データ等を記憶可能である。また、インターネット２００を介してダウンロードした、動画、静止画、音声等のコンテンツも記憶可能である。ストレージ部７１０の一部領域を以ってＲＯＭ７０３の機能の全部または一部を代替しても良い。また、ストレージ部７１０は、携帯情報端末７００に外部から電源が供給されていない状態であっても記憶している情報を保持する必要がある。従って、例えば、フラッシュＲＯＭやＳＳＤなどの不揮発性半導体素子メモリ、ＨＤＤなどの磁気ディスクドライブ、等のデバイスが用いられる。 The storage unit 710 stores an operation program and an operation setting value of the portable information terminal 700, personal information of the user of the portable information terminal 700, and the like. Further, it is possible to store an operation program downloaded via the Internet 200 and various data created by the operation program. In addition, contents such as moving images, still images, and audio downloaded via the Internet 200 can be stored. All or part of the functions of the ROM 703 may be replaced by a partial area of the storage unit 710. In addition, the storage unit 710 needs to hold stored information even when power is not supplied to the portable information terminal 700 from the outside. Therefore, for example, a device such as a nonvolatile semiconductor element memory such as a flash ROM or SSD, a magnetic disk drive such as an HDD, or the like is used.
　なお、ＲＯＭ７０３やストレージ部７１０に記憶された前記各動作プログラムは、インターネット２００上の各サーバ装置からのダウンロード処理により、追加、更新および機能拡張することが可能であるものとする。 It should be noted that the operation programs stored in the ROM 703 and the storage unit 710 can be added, updated, and expanded in function by download processing from each server device on the Internet 200.
　通信処理部７２０は、ＬＡＮ通信部７２１、移動体電話網通信部７２２、ＮＦＣ通信部７２３、で構成される。ＬＡＮ通信部７２１は、ルータ装置２００ｒやアクセスポイント２００ａを介してインターネット２００と接続され、インターネット２００上の各サーバ装置やその他の通信機器とデータの送受信を行う。ルータ装置２００ｒやアクセスポイント２００ａとの接続はＷｉ－Ｆｉ（登録商標）等の無線接続で行われるものとする。移動体電話網通信部７２２は、移動体電話通信網の基地局６００ｂとの無線通信により、電話通信（通話）およびデータの送受信を行う。ＮＦＣ通信部７２３は対応するリーダ／ライタとの近接時に無線通信を行う。ＬＡＮ通信部７２１、移動体電話網通信部７２２、ＮＦＣ通信部７２３は、それぞれ符号回路や復号回路、アンテナ等を備えるものとする。また、通信処理部７２０が、ＢｌｕｅＴｏｏｔｈ（登録商標）通信部や赤外線通信部等、他の通信部を更に備えていても良い。 The communication processing unit 720 includes a LAN communication unit 721, a mobile telephone network communication unit 722, and an NFC communication unit 723. The LAN communication unit 721 is connected to the Internet 200 via the router device 200r and the access point 200a, and transmits / receives data to / from each server device and other communication devices on the Internet 200. It is assumed that connection with the router device 200r and the access point 200a is performed by wireless connection such as Wi-Fi (registered trademark). The mobile telephone network communication unit 722 performs telephone communication (call) and data transmission / reception by wireless communication with the base station 600b of the mobile telephone communication network. The NFC communication unit 723 performs wireless communication when close to the corresponding reader / writer. The LAN communication unit 721, the mobile telephone network communication unit 722, and the NFC communication unit 723 are each provided with a coding circuit, a decoding circuit, an antenna, and the like. The communication processing unit 720 may further include another communication unit such as a BlueTooth (registered trademark) communication unit or an infrared communication unit.
　拡張インタフェース部７２４は、携帯情報端末７００の機能を拡張するためのインタフェース群であり、本実施例では、映像／音声インタフェース、ＵＳＢインタフェース、メモリインタフェース等で構成されるものとする。映像／音声インタフェースは、外部映像／音声出力機器からの映像信号／音声信号の入力、外部映像／音声入力機器への映像信号／音声信号の出力、等を行う。ＵＳＢインタフェースは、ＰＣ等と接続してデータの送受信を行う。また、キーボードやその他のＵＳＢ機器の接続を行っても良い。メモリインタフェースはメモリカードやその他のメモリ媒体を接続してデータの送受信を行う。 The extended interface unit 724 is an interface group for extending the functions of the portable information terminal 700, and in this embodiment, is configured by a video / audio interface, a USB interface, a memory interface, and the like. The video / audio interface performs input of video signals / audio signals from external video / audio output devices, output of video signals / audio signals to external video / audio input devices, and the like. The USB interface is connected to a PC or the like to transmit / receive data. A keyboard or other USB device may be connected. The memory interface transmits and receives data by connecting a memory card and other memory media.
　操作部７３０は、携帯情報端末７００に対する操作指示の入力を行う指示入力部であり、本実施例では、表示部７４１に重ねて配置したタッチパネル７３０ｔおよびボタンスイッチを並べた操作キー７３０ｋで構成されるものとする。何れか一方のみであっても良い。拡張インタフェース部７２４に接続したキーボード等を用いて携帯情報端末７００の操作を行っても良い。有線通信または無線通信により接続された別体の端末機器を用いて携帯情報端末７００の操作を行っても良い。即ち、放送受信装置１００から携帯情報端末７００の操作を行っても良い。また、前記タッチパネル機能は表示部７４１が備え持っているものであっても良い。 The operation unit 730 is an instruction input unit that inputs an operation instruction to the portable information terminal 700. In this embodiment, the operation unit 730 includes a touch panel 730t arranged on the display unit 741 and an operation key 730k in which button switches are arranged. Shall. Either one may be sufficient. The portable information terminal 700 may be operated using a keyboard or the like connected to the extension interface unit 724. The portable information terminal 700 may be operated using a separate terminal device connected by wired communication or wireless communication. That is, the portable information terminal 700 may be operated from the broadcast receiving device 100. The touch panel function may be provided in the display unit 741.
　画像処理部７４０は、表示部７４１、画像信号処理部７４２、第一画像入力部７４３、第二画像入力部７４４、で構成される。表示部７４１は、例えば液晶パネル等の表示デバイスであり、画像信号処理部７４２で処理した画像データを携帯情報端末７００のユーザに提供する。画像信号処理部７４２は図示を省略したビデオＲＡＭを備え、前記ビデオＲＡＭに入力された画像データに基づいて表示部７４１が駆動される。また、画像信号処理部７４２は、必要に応じてフォーマット変換、メニューやその他のＯＳＤ（Ｏｎ　Ｓｃｒｅｅｎ　Ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ）信号の重畳処理等を行う機能を有するものとする。第一画像入力部７４３および第二画像入力部７４４は、ＣＣＤ（Ｃｈａｒｇｅ　Ｃｏｕｐｌｅｄ　Ｄｅｖｉｃｅ）やＣＭＯＳ（Ｃｏｍｐｌｅｍｅｎｔａｒｙ　Ｍｅｔａｌ　Ｏｘｉｄｅ　Ｓｅｍｉｃｏｎｄｕｃｔｏｒ）センサ等の電子デバイスを用いてレンズから入力した光を電気信号に変換することにより、周囲や対象物の画像データを入力するカメラユニットである。 The image processing unit 740 includes a display unit 741, an image signal processing unit 742, a first image input unit 743, and a second image input unit 744. The display unit 741 is a display device such as a liquid crystal panel, for example, and provides the image data processed by the image signal processing unit 742 to the user of the portable information terminal 700. The image signal processing unit 742 includes a video RAM (not shown), and the display unit 741 is driven based on the image data input to the video RAM. In addition, the image signal processing unit 742 has a function of performing format conversion, menu and other OSD (On Screen Display) signal superimposing processing as necessary. The first image input unit 743 and the second image input unit 744 convert light input from a lens into an electric signal using an electronic device such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or a CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) sensor. A camera unit for inputting image data of surroundings and objects.
　音声処理部７５０は、音声出力部７５１、音声信号処理部７５２、音声入力部７５３、で構成される。音声出力部７５１はスピーカであり、音声信号処理部７５２で処理した音声信号を携帯情報端末７００のユーザに提供する。音声入力部７５３はマイクであり、ユーザの声などを音声データに変換して入力する。 The audio processing unit 750 includes an audio output unit 751, an audio signal processing unit 752, and an audio input unit 753. The audio output unit 751 is a speaker, and provides the audio signal processed by the audio signal processing unit 752 to the user of the portable information terminal 700. The voice input unit 753 is a microphone, and converts a user's voice and the like into voice data and inputs the voice data.
　センサ部７６０は、携帯情報端末７００の状態を検出するためのセンサ群であり、本実施例では、ＧＰＳ受信部７６１、ジャイロセンサ７６２、地磁気センサ７６３、加速度センサ７６４、照度センサ７６５、近接センサ７６６、で構成される。これらのセンサ群により、携帯情報端末７００の位置、傾き、方角、動き、および周囲の明るさ、周囲物の近接状況、等を検出することが可能となる。また、携帯情報端末７００が、気圧センサ等、他のセンサを更に備えていても良い。 The sensor unit 760 is a sensor group for detecting the state of the portable information terminal 700. In this embodiment, the GPS reception unit 761, the gyro sensor 762, the geomagnetic sensor 763, the acceleration sensor 764, the illuminance sensor 765, and the proximity sensor 766. , Composed of. With these sensor groups, it is possible to detect the position, tilt, direction, movement, ambient brightness, proximity of nearby objects, and the like of the portable information terminal 700. The portable information terminal 700 may further include other sensors such as a barometric pressure sensor.
　携帯情報端末７００は、携帯電話やスマートホン、タブレット端末等であって良い。ＰＤＡ（Ｐｅｒｓｏｎａｌ　Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ａｓｓｉｓｔａｎｔｓ）やノート型ＰＣであっても良い。また、デジタルスチルカメラや動画撮影可能なビデオカメラ、携帯型ゲーム機やナビゲーション装置等、またはその他の携帯用デジタル機器であっても良い。 The portable information terminal 700 may be a mobile phone, a smart phone, a tablet terminal, or the like. It may be a PDA (Personal Digital Assistant) or a notebook PC. Further, it may be a digital still camera, a video camera capable of shooting moving images, a portable game machine, a navigation device, or other portable digital devices.
　なお、図１１Ａに示した携帯情報端末７００の構成例は、センサ部７６０等、本実施例に必須ではない構成も多数含んでいるが、これらが備えられていない構成であっても本実施例の効果を損なうことはない。また、デジタル放送受信機能や電子マネー決済機能等、図示していない構成が更に加えられていても良い。 Note that the configuration example of the portable information terminal 700 illustrated in FIG. 11A includes a number of configurations that are not essential to the present embodiment, such as the sensor unit 760, but the present embodiment may be configured without these components. There is no loss of effect. Further, a configuration not shown in the figure such as a digital broadcast receiving function and an electronic money settlement function may be further added.
　［携帯情報端末のソフトウェア構成］
　図１１Ｂは、本実施例の携帯情報端末７００のソフトウェア構成図であり、ＲＯＭ７０３、ＲＡＭ７０４およびストレージ部７１０におけるソフトウェアの構成を示す。本実施例においては、ＲＯＭ７０３に基本動作プログラム７００１およびその他の動作プログラムが記憶されており、ストレージ部７１０に連携制御プログラム７００２およびその他の動作プログラムが記憶されている。また、ストレージ部７１０は、動画、静止画、音声等のコンテンツを記憶するコンテンツ記憶領域７２００、テレビ受信機や各サーバ装置にアクセスする際に必要な認証情報等を記憶する認証情報記憶領域７３００、その他の各種情報を記憶する各種情報記憶領域を備えるものとする。 [Software configuration of portable information terminal]
FIG. 11B is a software configuration diagram of the portable information terminal 700 of the present embodiment, and shows a software configuration in the ROM 703, the RAM 704, and the storage unit 710. In this embodiment, a basic operation program 7001 and other operation programs are stored in the ROM 703, and a cooperation control program 7002 and other operation programs are stored in the storage unit 710. In addition, the storage unit 710 includes a content storage area 7200 for storing contents such as moving images, still images, and audio, an authentication information storage area 7300 for storing authentication information necessary for accessing the television receiver and each server device, It is assumed that various information storage areas for storing other various information are provided.
　ＲＯＭ７０３に記憶された基本動作プログラム７００１はＲＡＭ７０４に展開され、更に主制御部７０１が前記展開された基本動作プログラムを実行することにより、基本動作実行部７１０１を構成する。また、ストレージ部７１０に記憶された連携制御プログラム７００２も同様にＲＡＭ７０４に展開され、更に主制御部７０１が前記展開された連携制御プログラムを実行することにより、連携制御実行部７１０２を構成する。また、ＲＡＭ７０４は、各動作プログラム実行時に作成したデータを、必要に応じて一時的に保持する一時記憶領域を備えるものとする。 The basic operation program 7001 stored in the ROM 703 is expanded in the RAM 704, and the main control unit 701 executes the expanded basic operation program to constitute a basic operation execution unit 7101. Similarly, the cooperative control program 7002 stored in the storage unit 710 is also expanded in the RAM 704, and the main control unit 701 executes the expanded cooperative control program to configure the cooperative control execution unit 7102. The RAM 704 includes a temporary storage area that temporarily stores data created when each operation program is executed as necessary.
　なお、以下では、説明を簡単にするために、主制御部７０１がＲＯＭ７０３に格納された基本動作プログラム７００１をＲＡＭ７０４に展開して実行することにより各動作ブロックの制御を行う処理を、基本動作実行部７１０１が各動作ブロックの制御を行うものとして記述する。他の動作プログラムに関しても同様の記述を行う。 In the following, in order to simplify the explanation, the main control unit 701 executes the basic operation execution by executing the basic operation program 7001 stored in the ROM 703 by expanding the basic operation program 7001 in the RAM 704 and executing it. It is described that the unit 7101 controls each operation block. The same description is made for other operation programs.
　連携制御実行部７１０２は、携帯情報端末７００がテレビ受信機との連携動作を行う際の、機器認証および接続、各データの送受信、等の管理を行う。また、連携制御実行部７１０２は、前記テレビ受信機と連動するアプリケーションを実行するためのブラウザエンジン機能を備えるものとする。 The cooperation control execution unit 7102 performs management such as device authentication and connection and transmission / reception of each data when the portable information terminal 700 performs a cooperation operation with the television receiver. In addition, the cooperation control execution unit 7102 includes a browser engine function for executing an application that works in conjunction with the television receiver.
　前記各動作プログラムは、製品出荷の時点で、予めＲＯＭ７０３および／またはストレージ部７１０に格納された状態であっても良い。製品出荷後に、インターネット２００上のその他のアプリケーションサーバ５００等からＬＡＮ通信部７２１または移動体電話網通信部７２２を介して取得するものであっても良い。また、メモリカードや光ディスク等に格納された前記各動作プログラムを、拡張インタフェース部７２４等を介して取得するものであっても良い。 The operation programs may be stored in advance in the ROM 703 and / or the storage unit 710 at the time of product shipment. After the product is shipped, it may be acquired from another application server 500 on the Internet 200 via the LAN communication unit 721 or the mobile telephone network communication unit 722. Further, each operation program stored in a memory card, an optical disk, or the like may be acquired via the expansion interface unit 724 or the like.
　［放送受信装置の時刻管理］
　本実施例の放送受信装置１００は二種類の時刻管理機能を備える。第一の時刻管理機能は、ＮＴＰに基づく時刻管理機能であり、第二の時刻管理機能は、ＭＨ－ＴＯＴに基づく時刻管理機能である。以下では、前記二種類の時刻管理機能について説明を行う。 [Time management of broadcast receivers]
The broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment has two types of time management functions. The first time management function is a time management function based on NTP, and the second time management function is a time management function based on MH-TOT. Hereinafter, the two types of time management functions will be described.
　＜ＮＴＰに基づく時刻管理機能＞
　まず、ＮＴＰに基づく時刻管理機能に関して説明する。 <Time management function based on NTP>
First, a time management function based on NTP will be described.
　図１２Ａは、本実施例の放送受信装置１００が対応する放送システムにおけるクロック同期／提示同期のためのシステム構成の一例である。本実施例の放送システムでは、ＵＴＣを６４ビット長のＮＴＰタイムスタンプ形式で、放送送出システムから受信機（本実施例の放送受信装置１００等）に伝送する。前記ＮＴＰタイムスタンプ形式においては、ＵＴＣの『秒以上』を３２ビットで表し、また、『秒未満』を３２ビットで表すものとする。しかしながら、実際には、１秒を３２ビット精度で再現することは困難である。このため、映像システムの同期をとるためのシステムクロックやＮＴＰ形式の時計を動作させるためのシステムクロックとしては、例えば同図に示したような、『２の２４乗』Ｈｚ（約１６．８ＭＨｚ）の周波数を用いるようにしても良い。なお、従来の放送システムにおけるシステムクロックが２７ＭＨｚであったことおよび受信機のハードウェア構成を簡便に構築できること等を考慮すると、『２の２４乗』～『２の２８乗』程度の、２のべき乗の周波数をシステムクロックとして採用することが望ましい。 FIG. 12A is an example of a system configuration for clock synchronization / presentation synchronization in a broadcast system supported by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment. In the broadcast system of the present embodiment, UTC is transmitted from the broadcast transmission system to a receiver (such as the broadcast receiving device 100 of the present embodiment) in the 64-bit NTP timestamp format. In the NTP timestamp format, “seconds or more” of UTC is represented by 32 bits, and “less than seconds” is represented by 32 bits. However, in practice, it is difficult to reproduce 1 second with 32-bit accuracy. For this reason, as a system clock for synchronizing the video system and a system clock for operating an NTP clock, for example, as shown in the figure, “2 24” Hz (about 16.8 MHz) The frequency may be used. In consideration of the fact that the system clock in the conventional broadcasting system is 27 MHz and the hardware configuration of the receiver can be easily constructed, the number of “2 24” to “2 28” is about 2 It is desirable to employ a power frequency as the system clock.
　なお、放送送出システム側や受信機側において、システムクロックを前述のように『２の２４乗』～『２の２８乗』程度の２のべき乗の周波数に設定した場合、放送送出システム側から受信機側に伝送されるＮＴＰタイムスタンプ形式における、前記システムクロックやＮＴＰ形式の時計を再生するためのＰＬＬ（Ｐｈａｓｅ　Ｌｏｃｋｅｄ　Ｌｏｏｐ）系に参照されない下位の８～４ビットは、『０』あるいは『１』に固定するようにしても良い。即ち、システムクロックが『２のｎ乗』Ｈｚ（図１２Ａの例ではｎ＝２４、以下同様）であれば、ＮＴＰタイムスタンプ形式の下位『３２－ｎ』ビットを『０』あるいは『１』に固定するようにしても良い。あるいは、受信機側において、前記ＮＴＰタイムスタンプ形式の下位『３２－ｎ』ビットを無視するように処理しても良い。 If the system clock is set to a power of 2 such as “2 24” to “2 28” as described above on the broadcast transmission system side or the receiver side, it is received from the broadcast transmission system side. The lower 8 to 4 bits that are not referred to in the PLL (Phase Locked Loop) system for reproducing the system clock or the NTP clock in the NTP timestamp format transmitted to the machine side are “0” or “1”. You may make it fix to. That is, if the system clock is “2 to the power of n” Hz (n = 24 in the example of FIG. 12A, the same applies hereinafter), the lower “32-n” bits of the NTP timestamp format are set to “0” or “1”. It may be fixed. Alternatively, the receiver may perform processing so as to ignore the lower “32-n” bits of the NTP timestamp format.
　放送送出システム側では、ＮＴＰ形式の時刻情報を外部から得ると、『２のｎ乗』ＨｚのＶＣＯ（Ｖｏｌｔａｇｅ　Ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌｌｅｄ　Ｏｓｃｉｌｌａｔｏｒ）による３２＋ｎビットカウンタでＰＬＬ系を構成し、外部から与えられた時刻情報に同期する送出システム時計を実現する。また、『２のｎ乗』Ｈｚのシステムクロックに同期して全体の信号処理系を動作させる。更に、前記送出システム時計の出力をＮＴＰ長形式の時刻情報として放送伝送路を介して受信機側に周期的に伝送する。なお、受信機側に伝送する前記ＮＴＰ長形式の時刻情報も、『秒未満』を表す３２ビットのうち、下位『３２－ｎ』ビットを『０』あるいは『１』に固定して良い。即ち、放送送出システム側のシステムクロックカウンタが３２＋ｎビットで構成されるためである。 On the broadcast transmission system side, when time information in NTP format is obtained from the outside, a PLL system is configured with a 32 + n-bit counter by a VCO (Voltage Controlled Oscillator) of “2 to the power of 2” Hz, and the time information given from the outside Realizing a synchronized sending system clock. Further, the entire signal processing system is operated in synchronization with a system clock of “2 to the power of n” Hz. Further, the output of the transmission system clock is periodically transmitted to the receiver side through the broadcast transmission path as time information in the NTP length format. In the time information in the NTP length format transmitted to the receiver side, the lower “32-n” bits may be fixed to “0” or “1” out of 32 bits representing “less than second”. That is, the system clock counter on the broadcast transmission system side is composed of 32 + n bits.
　受信機側では、放送伝送路を介してＮＴＰ長形式の時刻情報を受信し、放送送出システム側と同様に、『２のｎ乗』ＨｚのＶＣＯに基づくＰＬＬ系により受信システム時計を再生する。これにより、受信システム時計は、放送送出システム側と同期した時計となる。また、『２のｎ乗』Ｈｚのシステムクロックに同期して受信機の信号処理系を動作させることにより、放送送出システム側と受信機側のクロック同期が実現され、安定した信号再生が可能となる。 At the receiver side, time information in the NTP length format is received via the broadcast transmission path, and the reception system clock is reproduced by a PLL system based on a VCO of “2n” Hz, similarly to the broadcast transmission system side. Thereby, the reception system clock becomes a clock synchronized with the broadcast transmission system side. In addition, by operating the signal processing system of the receiver in synchronization with the system clock of “2 to the power of n” Hz, clock synchronization between the broadcast transmission system side and the receiver side is realized, and stable signal reproduction is possible. Become.
　また、映像／音声信号の提示単位毎の復号時刻および提示時刻が、放送送出システム側において、前記ＮＴＰ形式の時刻情報に基づいて設定される。前記復号時刻は、ＭＰＴに格納されたＭＰＵ拡張タイムスタンプ記述子（図示省略）により指定される。また、前記提示時刻は、ＭＰＴに格納されたＭＰＵタイムスタンプ記述子（図７Ｄ参照）により指定される。前記ＭＰＵタイムスタンプ記述子における『ｍｐｕ＿ｓｅｑｕｅｎｃｅ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ（ＭＰＵシーケンス番号）』パラメータがタイムスタンプを記述するＭＰＵのシーケンス番号を示し、『ｍｐｕ＿ｐｒｅｓｅｎｔａｔｉｏｎ＿ｔｉｍｅ（ＭＰＵ提示時刻）』パラメータがＭＰＵの提示時刻を６４ビットのＮＴＰタイムスタンプ形式で示している。即ち、受信機はＭＰＴに格納されるＭＰＵタイムスタンプ記述子を参照することにより、映像／音声信号や字幕、文字スーパー等のＭＰＵ毎の提示（表示、出力など）タイミングを制御することが可能となる。 Also, the decoding time and presentation time for each presentation unit of the video / audio signal are set on the broadcast transmission system side based on the time information in the NTP format. The decoding time is specified by an MPU extended time stamp descriptor (not shown) stored in the MPT. The presentation time is specified by an MPU time stamp descriptor (see FIG. 7D) stored in the MPT. The “mpu_sequence_number (MPU sequence number)” parameter in the MPU timestamp descriptor indicates the sequence number of the MPU describing the time stamp, and the “mpu_presentation_time (MPU presentation time)” parameter indicates the MPU presentation time as a 64-bit NTP timestamp. Shown in format. In other words, the receiver can control the presentation (display, output, etc.) timing of each MPU such as a video / audio signal, subtitles, and character superimpose by referring to the MPU time stamp descriptor stored in the MPT. Become.
　なお、前述の映像／音声信号等の提示単位毎の復号タイミングおよび提示タイミングの制御に着目した場合、『２の１６乗』Ｈｚ（約６５．５ＫＨｚ）程度のクロックによっても映像／音声信号の同期は確保可能であり、この場合は、ＭＰＵタイムスタンプ記述子等に記述されるＮＴＰタイムスタンプ形式の下位１６ビットは参照しなくとも良い。即ち、復号タイミングおよび提示タイミングの制御にシステムクロックの分周等により生成した『２のｍ乗』Ｈｚのクロックを用いた場合は、ＭＰＵタイムスタンプ記述子等に記述されるＮＴＰタイムスタンプ形式の下位『３２－ｍ』ビットは参照しなくとも良い。従って、ＭＰＵタイムスタンプ記述子等に記述されるＮＴＰタイムスタンプ形式の下位『３２－ｍ』ビットは『０』あるいは『１』に固定するようにしても良い。 When focusing on the decoding timing and presentation timing control for each presentation unit such as the video / audio signal described above, the video / audio signal is synchronized even with a clock of about "2 16" Hz (about 65.5 KHz). In this case, it is not necessary to refer to the lower 16 bits of the NTP timestamp format described in the MPU timestamp descriptor or the like. In other words, when a clock of “2 to the power of m” generated by dividing the system clock is used to control the decoding timing and presentation timing, the lower order of the NTP timestamp format described in the MPU timestamp descriptor etc. The “32-m” bit need not be referenced. Therefore, the lower “32-m” bits of the NTP timestamp format described in the MPU timestamp descriptor or the like may be fixed to “0” or “1”.
　＜ＭＨ－ＴＯＴに基づく時刻管理機能＞
　前述で説明したＮＴＰに基づく時刻管理機能における、ＮＴＰ形式で伝送する時刻情報の構成の一例を図１２Ｂに示す。前記ＮＴＰ形式における『ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ＿ｔｉｍｅｓｔａｍｐ』パラメータや『ｔｒａｎｓｍｉｔ＿ｔｉｍｅｓｔａｍｐ』パラメータ等は、６４ビット長のＮＴＰ長形式の時刻データであり、また、図７Ｄに示したＭＰＵタイムスタンプ記述子における『ｍｐｕ＿ｐｒｅｓｅｎｔａｔｉｏｎ＿ｔｉｍｅ』パラメータも６４ビット長のＮＴＰタイムスタンプ形式の時刻データである。前記ＮＴＰ長形式の時刻データや前記ＮＴＰタイムスタンプ形式の時刻データは、ＵＴＣの『秒以上』を３２ビットで、『秒未満』を３２ビットで表したデータである。即ち、ＮＴＰ形式の時刻情報は、『秒未満』までの時刻情報を伝送可能である。更にＮＴＰ形式の時刻情報はＵＴＣ表記であるため、従来のデジタル放送における時刻管理と異なり、図３に示したように、放送伝送路を介して送信されるデータフローと通信回線を介して配信されるデータフローの双方を前記ＮＴＰ形式の時刻情報で管理することにより、容易に前記双方のデータの整合をとることができる。 <Time management function based on MH-TOT>
FIG. 12B shows an example of the configuration of time information transmitted in the NTP format in the time management function based on NTP described above. The “reference_timestamp” parameter, the “transmit_timestamp” parameter, and the like in the NTP format are time data in a 64-bit NTP length format, and the “mpu_presentation_time” parameter in the MPU time stamp descriptor shown in FIG. 7D is also 64 bits long. Time data in the NTP timestamp format. The time data in the NTP length format and the time data in the NTP timestamp format are data in which “seconds or more” of UTC is represented by 32 bits and “sub-seconds” is represented by 32 bits. That is, time information up to “less than second” can be transmitted as time information in the NTP format. Furthermore, since the time information in the NTP format is expressed in UTC, unlike the time management in the conventional digital broadcasting, as shown in FIG. 3, it is distributed via the data flow and communication line transmitted through the broadcast transmission path. By managing both of the data flows using the time information in the NTP format, it is possible to easily match both the data.
　これに対し、ＭＨ－ＴＯＴで伝送される時刻情報は以下の通りである。 In contrast, the time information transmitted by MH-TOT is as follows.
　図１２Ｃに、ＭＨ－ＴＯＴのデータ構造の一例を示す。本実施例の放送受信装置１００は、前記ＭＨ－ＴＯＴの『ＪＳＴ＿ｔｉｍｅ』パラメータから現在日付および現在時刻を取得可能である。『ＪＳＴ＿ｔｉｍｅ』パラメータは、図１２Ｄに示すように、修正ユリウス日（Ｍｏｄｉｆｉｅｄ　Ｊｕｌｉａｎ　Ｄａｔｅ：ＭＪＤ）による現在日付の符号化データの下位１６ビットと、日本標準時（Ｊａｐａｎ　Ｓｔａｎｄａｒｄ　Ｔｉｍｅ：ＪＳＴ）を６個の４ビット２進化１０進数（Ｂｉｎａｒｙ－Ｃｏｄｅｄ　Ｄｅｃｉｍａｌ：ＢＣＤ）で表した２４ビットの情報を含むものとする。前記ＭＪＤの１６ビット符号化データに所定の演算を施すことにより、現在日付を算出することが可能である。また、６個の４ビット２進化１０進数は、最初の２個の４ビット２進化１０進数により１０進法２桁で『時』を表し、次の２個の４ビット２進化１０進数により１０進法２桁で『分』を表し、最後の２個の４ビット２進化１０進数により１０進法２桁で『秒』を表すものである。 Fig. 12C shows an example of the data structure of MH-TOT. The broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment can acquire the current date and the current time from the “JST_time” parameter of the MH-TOT. As shown in FIG. 12D, the “JST_time” parameter includes the lower 16 bits of the encoded data of the current date based on the modified Julian Date (Modified Julian Date: MJD) and six standard times (Japan Standard Time: JST). Assume that it includes 24-bit information expressed in binary-coded decimal (BCD). It is possible to calculate the current date by performing a predetermined operation on the 16-bit encoded data of MJD. In addition, six 4-bit binary-coded decimal numbers represent “hour” in two decimal digits by the first two 4-bit binary-coded decimal numbers, and 10 by the next two 4-bit binary-coded decimal numbers. “Minute” is represented by two decimal digits, and “second” is represented by two decimal digits by the last two 4-bit binary-coded decimal numbers.
　即ち、ＮＴＰ形式に基づく時刻管理とＭＨ－ＴＯＴに基づく時刻管理との相違点は、前者のＮＴＰ形式に基づく時刻管理が前述のように『秒未満』までの時刻情報を伝送できるのに対し、後者のＭＨ－ＴＯＴに基づく時刻管理では、ＪＳＴ表記の『秒単位』までの時刻情報のみを伝送できるという点である。 That is, the difference between the time management based on the NTP format and the time management based on the MH-TOT is that the time management based on the former NTP format can transmit time information up to “less than second” as described above. In the latter time management based on the MH-TOT, only time information up to “second unit” in JST can be transmitted.
　本実施例の放送受信装置１００は、ＵＴＣ表記の時刻情報であるＮＴＰに基づく時刻管理機能を、放送信号のコンテンツである映像、音声、字幕、文字スーパー、その他提示データのデコードおよび表示の同期処理に用いることにより、より高精度の同期処理を実現できる。更に放送局のクロック表記ではなく、ＵＴＣ表記の情報を参照することにより、放送信号で受信するコンテンツである映像、音声、字幕、文字スーパー、またはその他データと、通信回線経路で取得する映像、音声、字幕、文字スーパー、またはその他データとのデコードおよび表示の同期処理を行うこともできる。 The broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment has a time management function based on NTP, which is time information in UTC notation, and decoding and display synchronization processing of video, audio, subtitles, text super, and other presentation data that are broadcast signal contents. As a result, it is possible to realize a more accurate synchronization process. Furthermore, video, audio, subtitles, text super, or other data, which is content received as a broadcast signal, and video, audio acquired through a communication line path, by referring to information in UTC not the clock notation of the broadcasting station In addition, it is possible to perform decoding and display synchronization processing with subtitles, superimpose characters, or other data.
　更に、本実施例の放送受信装置１００では、ＭＨ－ＴＯＴの６個の４ビット２進化１０進数で表した２４ビットの情報を含む『ＪＳＴ＿ｔｉｍｅ』に基づく時刻管理機能を、ユーザへの現在時刻の提示処理または図７Ｅに示したＭＨ－ＥＩＴを扱う各処理に用いても良い。一般的に、放送受信装置におけるユーザへの現在時刻の提示処理においては、秒未満までの精度が要求されることはほとんどない。また、ＭＨ－ＥＩＴに記述される各時間情報は、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳ方式で伝送される従来のデジタル放送のＥＩＴと同様に、６個の４ビット２進化１０進数で表した２４ビットの情報で、１０進法２桁ずつの『時』、『分』、『秒』で格納されている。このため、本実施例の放送受信装置１００におけるＭＨ－ＴＯＴに基づく時刻管理機能は、ＭＨ－ＥＩＴを扱う各処理と整合し易いためである。ＭＨ－ＥＩＴを扱う各処理とは具体的には、例えば、電子番組表の生成処理や、録画予約や視聴予約の制御、一時蓄積などの著作権管理処理等である。何れの処理も秒未満までの精度が要求されることは稀であり、１秒単位の精度で十分だからである。 Furthermore, in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, a time management function based on “JST_time” including 24-bit information represented by 6 4-bit binary-coded decimal numbers of MH-TOT is provided. The present invention may be used for the presentation processing or each processing for handling the MH-EIT shown in FIG. 7E. In general, in the process of presenting the current time to the user in the broadcast receiving device, accuracy to less than a second is rarely required. Each time information described in the MH-EIT is 24-bit information represented by 6 4-bit binary-coded decimal numbers, like the EIT of the conventional digital broadcast transmitted by the MPEG2-TS system. Stored in “hour”, “minute”, and “second” in two decimal digits. For this reason, the time management function based on MH-TOT in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment is easy to match with each process that handles MH-EIT. Specifically, each process that handles the MH-EIT includes, for example, an electronic program guide generation process, a recording reservation / viewing reservation control, a copyright management process such as temporary storage, and the like. This is because the accuracy of subseconds is rarely required for any processing, and accuracy in units of one second is sufficient.
　また、当該電子番組表の生成処理や、録画予約や視聴予約の制御、一時蓄積などの著作権管理処理等は、従来のＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳ方式を用いたデジタル放送システムの受信機でも搭載される機能である。すると、本実施例の放送システムにおいても、電子番組表の生成処理や、録画予約や視聴予約の制御、一時蓄積などの著作権管理処理等の処理において、従来のＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳ方式のデジタル放送システムと整合性がある時刻管理処理で対応できるように構成しておけば、従来のＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳ方式のデジタル放送の受信機能とＭＭＴ方式のデジタル放送の受信機能との両者を有する放送受信装置を構成する際に、これらの処理（電子番組表の生成処理や、録画予約や視聴予約の制御、一時蓄積などの著作権管理処理等の処理）において、処理アルゴリズムを別々に設計する必要がなくなり、コストを低くすることができる。 In addition, copyright management processing such as electronic program guide generation processing, recording reservation and viewing reservation control, temporary storage, and the like are also installed in a receiver of a conventional digital broadcasting system using the MPEG2-TS system. It is. Then, in the broadcasting system of the present embodiment as well, the conventional MPEG2-TS digital broadcasting system in processing such as electronic program guide generation processing, recording reservation and viewing reservation control, copyright management processing such as temporary storage, etc. A broadcast receiving apparatus having both a conventional MPEG2-TS digital broadcast reception function and an MMT digital broadcast reception function. This eliminates the need to design processing algorithms separately in these processes (electronic program guide generation processing, recording reservation and viewing reservation control, copyright management processing such as temporary storage, etc.) Can be lowered.
　また、従来のＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳ方式のデジタル放送の受信機能を持たずＭＭＴ方式のデジタル放送の受信機能のみを有する受信機であっても、電子番組表の生成処理や、録画予約や視聴予約の制御、一時蓄積などの著作権管理処理等の処理のアルゴリズムを完全に新規に作成しなくとも、従来のＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳ方式を用いたデジタル放送システムの受信機でも搭載される機能のアルゴリズムを流用できるので、より低コストに開発することができる。 In addition, even a receiver having no conventional MPEG2-TS digital broadcast reception function and only an MMT digital broadcast reception function can generate an electronic program guide and control recording reservation and viewing reservation. Even if the algorithm for copyright management processing such as temporary storage is not completely newly created, the algorithm of the function installed in the receiver of the conventional digital broadcasting system using the MPEG2-TS system can be diverted. Can be developed at lower cost.
　よって、ＭＨ－ＴＯＴの『ＪＳＴ＿ｔｉｍｅ』パラメータに基づく時刻管理機能をこれらの処理（電子番組表の生成処理や、録画予約や視聴予約の制御、一時蓄積などの著作権管理処理等の処理）に用いる構成にすることにより、ＭＭＴ方式のデジタル放送の放送受信装置であっても、従来方式の放送システムとの整合性を高めることにより、より低コストに提供することが可能となる。 Therefore, the time management function based on the “JST_time” parameter of MH-TOT is used for these processes (electronic program guide generation process, recording reservation and viewing reservation control, copyright management process such as temporary storage). By adopting the configuration, even an MMT digital broadcast broadcast receiving apparatus can be provided at a lower cost by improving the consistency with the conventional broadcast system.
　以上説明した通り、本実施例の放送受信装置１００は、精度の異なる二種類の時刻情報を用いた時刻管理機能を備える。即ち、第一の時刻情報は従来のデジタル放送システムと整合性のある表記の時刻情報であり、第二の時刻情報は前記第一の時刻情報よりも分解能の高い時刻情報である。第二の時刻情報を放送信号の各コンテンツデータの同期処理に用いることにより従来の放送システムよりも高度な情報提示処理を実現し、第一の時刻情報を電子番組表の生成処理や、録画予約や視聴予約の制御、一時蓄積などの著作権管理処理等に用いることにより放送受信装置を安価に提供することができる。 As described above, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment has a time management function using two types of time information with different accuracy. That is, the first time information is notation time information consistent with the conventional digital broadcasting system, and the second time information is time information with higher resolution than the first time information. By using the second time information for the synchronization processing of each content data of the broadcast signal, the information presentation processing that is more advanced than the conventional broadcasting system is realized, and the first time information is generated by the electronic program guide generation process or the recording reservation. By using it for copyright management processing such as control of viewing reservations, temporary storage, etc., it is possible to provide a broadcast receiving apparatus at low cost.
　よって、本実施例の放送受信装置１００では、以上説明した二種類の時刻管理機能を備えることにより、より高度な情報提示処理の実現と低コスト化とを両立することが可能である。 Therefore, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment can achieve both higher-level information presentation processing and lower cost by providing the two types of time management functions described above.
　［時刻管理の第一の変形例］
　次に、本実施例の放送システムにおける時刻管理の第一の変形例を以下に説明する。 [First modification of time management]
Next, a first modification of time management in the broadcasting system of the present embodiment will be described below.
　第一の変形例では、図１２Ａを用いて既に説明したＮＴＰに基づく時刻管理機能の当該管理時刻の精度を高めるために、時刻管理サーバ（図示省略）または放送局サーバ３００から放送受信装置１００までの時刻情報伝送における想定遅延時間に関する情報を放送信号に含めて送信し、放送受信装置１００において、当該想定遅延時間に関する情報をＮＴＰに基づく時刻管理機能のシステム時計の修正に用いるように構成しても良い。 In the first modification, from the time management server (not shown) or the broadcast station server 300 to the broadcast receiving device 100 in order to increase the accuracy of the management time of the time management function based on NTP already described with reference to FIG. The information related to the estimated delay time in the time information transmission is transmitted by including in the broadcast signal, and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is configured to use the information related to the estimated delay time to correct the system clock of the time management function based on NTP. Also good.
　この際、当該想定遅延時間に関する情報は図３（Ａ）に示した放送伝送路におけるプロトコルスタックのＴＬＶ多重化ストリーム内ではなく、ＴＬＶ多重化ストリーム外のＴＭＣＣ（Ｔｒａｎｓｍｉｓｓｉｏｎ　ａｎｄ　Ｍｕｌｔｉｐｌｅｘｉｎｇ　Ｃｏｎｆｉｇｕｒａｔｉｏｎ　Ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ）領域内で伝送するように構成しても良い。ＴＭＣＣ領域内で伝送すれば、放送受信装置１００において、ＴＬＶ多重化ストリームの分離処理（デマックス処理）を経ることなしに当該想定遅延時間に関する情報を抽出することが可能となる。即ち、放送受信装置１００における前記分離処理による遅延の影響を受けにくい情報取得が可能であり、従って、高精度なシステム時計の修正処理を行うことができる。当該ＴＭＣＣ信号で伝送される時刻情報のデータ構造の一例を、図１２Ｅを用いて説明する。当該時刻情報は、例えば、ＴＭＣＣ拡張情報領域に格納して伝送すれば良い。同図に示したＴＭＣＣ拡張情報領域の時刻情報において、『ｄｅｌｔａ』パラメータは、ＵＴＣを配信する時刻管理サーバまたはＴＭＣＣ信号を作成するサーバ装置から一般的な放送受信装置までの伝送遅延の想定値を３２ビットの符号付き固定小数点で表す。なお、上位１６ビットは整数部を、下位１６ビットは小数点以下を記述するものである。『ｔｒａｎｓｍｉｔ＿ｔｉｍｅｓｔａｍｐ』パラメータは、送信タイムスタンプであり、本ＴＭＣＣ信号が前記サーバ装置から送出される時刻をＮＴＰタイムスタンプ長形式で記述するものである。上位３２ビットは整数部を、下位３２ビットは小数点以下を表す。 At this time, information on the estimated delay time is not in the TLV multiplexed stream of the protocol stack in the broadcast transmission path shown in FIG. 3A, but in the TMCC (Transmission and Multiplexing Configuration Control) area outside the TLV multiplexed stream. You may comprise so that it may transmit. If the transmission is performed in the TMCC area, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can extract information on the estimated delay time without going through a TLV multiplexed stream separation process (demux process). That is, it is possible to acquire information that is not easily affected by the delay caused by the separation process in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, and therefore it is possible to perform a highly accurate system clock correction process. An example of the data structure of time information transmitted by the TMCC signal will be described with reference to FIG. 12E. For example, the time information may be stored in the TMCC extended information area and transmitted. In the time information in the TMCC extended information area shown in the figure, the “delta” parameter is an estimated value of transmission delay from a time management server that delivers UTC or a server device that creates a TMCC signal to a general broadcast receiving device. Expressed in 32-bit signed fixed point. The upper 16 bits describe the integer part and the lower 16 bits describe the decimal part. The “transmit_timestamp” parameter is a transmission time stamp, and describes the time when the TMCC signal is transmitted from the server device in the NTP time stamp length format. The upper 32 bits represent the integer part, and the lower 32 bits represent the decimal part.
　当該第一の変形例では、本実施例の放送受信装置１００は、ＴＭＣＣ拡張情報領域に格納して伝送された当該時刻情報に記述された前記想定遅延時間に関する情報（例えば、前述の『ｄｅｌｔａ』パラメータおよび／または『ｔｒａｎｓｍｉｔ＿ｔｉｍｅｓｔａｍｐ』パラメータ）を用いて、放送信号の各コンテンツデータの同期処理に用いるＮＴＰに基づく時刻管理機能のシステム時計を、より高精度に修正することができる。 In the first modification, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment includes information on the estimated delay time described in the time information stored and transmitted in the TMCC extended information area (for example, the above-described “delta”). By using the parameter and / or “transmit_timestamp” parameter), the system clock of the time management function based on the NTP used for the synchronization processing of each content data of the broadcast signal can be corrected with higher accuracy.
　［時刻管理の第二の変形例］
　次に、本実施例の放送システムにおける時刻管理の第二の変形例を以下に説明する。 [Second modification of time management]
Next, a second modification of time management in the broadcasting system of the present embodiment will be described below.
　前述の通り、本実施例の放送受信装置１００においては、ＭＨ－ＴＯＴで伝送される情報により現在日付と日本標準時刻を取得して時刻を管理する時刻管理機能を有する。ＭＨ－ＴＯＴで伝送される情報により取得した現在日付と日本標準時刻は、放送受信装置１００の映像合成部１６１で映像情報やアプリケーション情報等に重畳することにより、モニタ部１６２や映像出力部１６３に出力してユーザに提供可能である。前述の通り、ＭＨ－ＴＯＴは図１２Ｃに示したデータ構造を有しており、放送受信装置１００は、前記ＭＨ－ＴＯＴの『ＪＳＴ＿ｔｉｍｅ』パラメータから現在日付および現在時刻を取得可能である。 As described above, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment has a time management function for acquiring the current date and the Japan standard time based on information transmitted by the MH-TOT and managing the time. The current date and Japan standard time acquired by the information transmitted by the MH-TOT are superimposed on the video information, application information, and the like by the video composition unit 161 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, thereby being displayed on the monitor unit 162 and the video output unit 163. It can be output and provided to the user. As described above, the MH-TOT has the data structure shown in FIG. 12C, and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can acquire the current date and the current time from the “JST_time” parameter of the MH-TOT.
　しかしながら、前述の『ＪＳＴ＿ｔｉｍｅ』パラメータでは、ＭＪＤの符号化データの下位１６ビットのみを使用しているため、『２０３８年４月２２日』を以って桁あふれを生じることとなり、前記所定の演算のみでは『２０３８年４月２３日』以降の日付を表現することができない。そこで、本実施例の第二の変形例では、ＭＪＤの値が所定値以上の場合と所定値未満の場合とで演算方法を切り替えることにより、『２０３８年４月２３日』以降の日付を表現できるように制御するものとする。 However, since the above-mentioned “JST_time” parameter uses only the lower 16 bits of the encoded data of MJD, an overflow occurs with “April 22, 2038”, and the predetermined calculation is performed. The date after “April 23, 2038” alone cannot be expressed. Therefore, in the second modification of the present embodiment, the date after “April 23, 2038” is expressed by switching the calculation method between the case where the value of MJD is greater than or equal to the predetermined value and the case where it is less than the predetermined value. It shall be controlled as possible.
　図１２Ｆに、ＭＪＤの値が所定値以上の場合に使用する第一の演算方法と、ＭＪＤの値が所定値未満の場合に使用する第二の演算方法の一例を示す。例えば、前記所定値を『３２７６８（０ｘ８０００）』とした場合、ＭＪＤが『３２７６８』以上の場合には前記第一の演算方法を用いて現在日付を算出し、ＭＪＤが『３２７６８』未満の場合には前記第二の演算方法を用いて現在日付を算出する。なお、ＭＪＤが『３２７６８』未満の場合とは、ＭＪＤの１６ビットデータの最上位ビットが『０』の場合と等価である。これにより、本実施例の放送受信装置１００においては、『２０３８年４月２３日』以降の日付を表現することが可能となる。但し、前記所定値は任意に設定することが可能であり、前記所定値を『１６３８４（０ｘ４０００）』や『４９１５２（０ｘＣ０００）』等と設定しても良い。前記演算方法の切り替え条件は、ＭＪＤの１６ビットデータの上位２ビットが『００』の場合、ＭＪＤの１６ビットデータの上位２ビットが『１１』ではない場合、としても良い。なお、前記所定値を『３２７６８』として前述の手段を用いた場合、『１９４８年９月４日』以前の日付を表現できなくなるが、テレビ受信機としての実用上、特に問題となることはない。 FIG. 12F shows an example of a first calculation method used when the MJD value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value and a second calculation method used when the MJD value is less than the predetermined value. For example, when the predetermined value is “32768 (0x8000)”, when the MJD is “32768” or more, the current date is calculated using the first calculation method, and when the MJD is less than “32768”. Calculates the current date using the second calculation method. The case where MJD is less than “32768” is equivalent to the case where the most significant bit of 16-bit data of MJD is “0”. Thereby, in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to represent dates after “April 23, 2038”. However, the predetermined value can be arbitrarily set, and the predetermined value may be set to “16384 (0x4000)”, “49152 (0xC000)”, or the like. The calculation method switching condition may be that the upper 2 bits of the 16-bit data of MJD are “00” and the upper 2 bits of the 16-bit data of MJD are not “11”. When the above-mentioned means is used with the predetermined value being “32768”, dates before “September 4, 1948” cannot be expressed, but there is no particular problem in practical use as a television receiver. .
　また、ＭＪＤと前記所定値との比較結果に応じて前記第一の演算方法と前記第二の演算方法を切り替えるのではなく、図１２Ｃに示したＭＨ－ＴＯＴのデータ構造における『ｒｅｓｅｒｖｅｄ』パラメータの一部または全部を置き換えたフラグあるいは新たに追加したフラグに応じて前記第一の演算方法と前記第二の演算方法を切り替えるようにしても良い。例えば、前記フラグは、ＭＪＤの１６ビット符号化データの最上位ビットが『０』である場合に、前記ＭＪＤが『２０３８年４月２３日』以降を示すものであるならば『１』をセットし、『２０３８年４月２３日』以降を示すものでないならば『０』をセットするようにすれば良い。そして、前記フラグが『１』の場合には図１２Ｆに示した前記第二の演算方法を用い、前記フラグが『０』の場合には前記第一の演算方法を用いるようにすれば良い。または、前記フラグと同様の意味を有する記述子を新たに用意して、ＭＨ－ＴＯＴ内に配置しても良い。 Also, instead of switching between the first calculation method and the second calculation method according to the comparison result between MJD and the predetermined value, the “reserved” parameter in the MH-TOT data structure shown in FIG. You may make it switch said 1st calculation method and said 2nd calculation method according to the flag which replaced a part or all, or the newly added flag. For example, when the most significant bit of MJD 16-bit encoded data is “0”, the flag is set to “1” if the MJD indicates “April 23, 2038” or later. If it does not indicate “April 23, 2038” or later, “0” may be set. When the flag is “1”, the second calculation method shown in FIG. 12F may be used, and when the flag is “0”, the first calculation method may be used. Alternatively, a descriptor having the same meaning as the flag may be newly prepared and placed in the MH-TOT.
　また、本実施例の放送システムでは、前述の通り、ＮＴＰ形式の絶対時刻を伝送し、本実施例の放送受信装置１００は、当該ＮＴＰに基づく時刻管理機能を有する。更に、本実施例の放送受信装置１００では、ＭＰＵ単位に設定されるＭＰＵタイムスタンプ記述子に記載されたＮＴＰタイムスタンプ等を参照することにより、映像／音声信号の提示単位毎の復号タイミングおよび提示タイミングを制御している。前述の通り、前記ＮＴＰ形式の時刻情報は、図１２Ｂに示した構成を有している。また、前記ＭＰＵタイムスタンプ記述子は図７Ｄに示した構成を有している。 Further, as described above, the broadcast system of this embodiment transmits NTP format absolute time, and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment has a time management function based on the NTP. Furthermore, in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment, the decoding timing and presentation for each presentation unit of the video / audio signal are referred to by referring to the NTP timestamps described in the MPU timestamp descriptor set for each MPU. The timing is controlled. As described above, the time information in the NTP format has the configuration shown in FIG. 12B. The MPU time stamp descriptor has the configuration shown in FIG. 7D.
　このため、本実施例の放送受信装置１００においては、前記『ｒｅｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ＿ｔｉｍｅｓｔａｍｐ』パラメータや『ｔｒａｎｓｍｉｔ＿ｔｉｍｅｓｔａｍｐ』パラメータ、あるいは、『ｍｐｕ＿ｐｒｅｓｅｎｔａｔｉｏｎ＿ｔｉｍｅ』パラメータ等を参照し、前記参照した時刻データ等の値に応じて、前記第一の演算方法と前記第二の演算方法の何れを使用するかを選択するようにしても良い。即ち、例えば、前記６４ビット長のＮＴＰ長形式の時刻データの最上位ビットが『０』の場合は前記第二の演算方法を使用し、『０』でない場合は前記第一の演算方法を使用する、等とすれば良い。 For this reason, in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment, the “reference_timestamp” parameter, the “transmit_timestamp” parameter, the “mpu_presentation_time” parameter, or the like is referred to, and the first reference is made according to the value of the referenced time data or the like. Either one of the calculation methods and the second calculation method may be selected. That is, for example, when the most significant bit of the 64-bit time data in the NTP length format is “0”, the second calculation method is used, and when it is not “0”, the first calculation method is used. And so on.
　前記何れの方法によっても、本実施例の放送受信装置１００においては、『２０３８年４月２３日』以降の日付を表現することが可能となる。 In any of the above methods, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment can represent dates after “April 23, 2038”.
　［放送受信装置の選局処理（初期スキャン）］
　本実施例の放送システムのＡＭＴは、ＴＬＶ多重化方式で伝送されるＩＰパケットを通信回線で伝送されるＩＰパケットと可能な限り区別なく受信するための、ＩＰパケットのマルチキャストグループの一覧を提供するものとする。１つのサービス識別には、複数のＩＰマルチキャストグループをリストすることが可能である。また、連続するＩＰアドレスを効率的に記述するために、アドレスマスクを用いることが可能である。 [Broadcast receiving device channel selection processing (initial scan)]
The AMT of the broadcasting system according to the present embodiment provides a list of multicast groups of IP packets for receiving IP packets transmitted by the TLV multiplexing method as distinctly as possible from IP packets transmitted through a communication line. Shall. It is possible to list a plurality of IP multicast groups in one service identification. In addition, an address mask can be used to efficiently describe successive IP addresses.
　本実施例の放送受信装置１００では、初期設定の際のチャンネルスキャン時に、あるいは、設定変更のための再スキャン時に、ＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴから取得したサービスの一覧をＲＯＭ１０３やストレージ部１１０等の不揮発性メモリに記憶させることが可能であり、更に、前記各サービスに対応するＩＰマルチキャストグループの一覧を、ＩＰ関連情報として、前記各サービスに関連付けて、前記不揮発性メモリに記憶させることが可能であるものとする。前記サービスの一覧およびＩＰ関連情報を不揮発性メモリに記憶させ、常時参照可能とすることにより、チャンネル切り替え時等に、ＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴやＡＭＴを取得し直す必要がなくなり、放送コンテンツの取得を効率よく行うことが可能となる。 In the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, a list of services acquired from the TLV-NIT is stored in a nonvolatile memory such as the ROM 103 or the storage unit 110 at the time of channel scanning at the time of initial setting or at the time of rescanning for setting change. And a list of IP multicast groups corresponding to the services can be stored in the nonvolatile memory in association with the services as IP related information. To do. By storing the list of services and IP related information in a non-volatile memory so that they can always be referenced, there is no need to re-acquire TLV-NIT or AMT when switching channels, etc., and broadcast content can be acquired efficiently. Can be done.
　図１３Ａは、本実施例の放送受信装置１００におけるチャンネルスキャン（再スキャン）時の動作シーケンスの一例を示す図である。 FIG. 13A is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation sequence at the time of channel scanning (rescanning) in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment.
　チャンネルスキャンが開始されると、受信機能実行部１１０２は、チューナ／復調部１３１に対して周波数初期値を設定し、前記周波数値へのチューニングを行うように指示する（Ｓ１０１）。チューナ／復調部１３１において、前記設定された周波数値へのロックに成功する（Ｓ１０２：Ｙｅｓ）と、次に、受信機能実行部１１０２は、受信信号からＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴを取得する（Ｓ１０３）。 When the channel scan is started, the reception function execution unit 1102 sets an initial frequency value to the tuner / demodulation unit 131 and instructs the tuner / demodulation unit 131 to perform tuning to the frequency value (S101). When the tuner / demodulation unit 131 succeeds in locking to the set frequency value (S102: Yes), the reception function execution unit 1102 next acquires TLV-NIT from the received signal (S103).
　Ｓ１０３の処理で取得したＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴが有効なデータである場合（Ｓ１０４：Ｙｅｓ）、受信機能実行部１１０２は、前記取得したＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴからＴＬＶストリームＩＤ、オリジナルネットワークＩＤ、等の情報を取得する（Ｓ１０５）。図１３Ｂに、ＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴのデータ構造の一例を示す。前記ＴＬＶストリームＩＤの情報は『ｔｌｖ＿ｓｔｒｅａｍ＿ｉｄ』パラメータから、前記オリジナルネットワークＩＤの情報は『ｏｒｉｇｉｎａｌ＿ｎｅｔｗｏｒｋ＿ｉｄ』パラメータから、それぞれ取得可能であるものとする。更に、分配システム記述子から、各ＴＬＶストリームＩＤ／オリジナルネットワークＩＤに対応する放送伝送路の物理的条件に関する分配システム情報を取得し（Ｓ１０６）、サービスリスト記述子からサービスＩＤの一覧を取得する（Ｓ１０７）。 When the TLV-NIT acquired in the process of S103 is valid data (S104: Yes), the reception function execution unit 1102 acquires information such as a TLV stream ID and an original network ID from the acquired TLV-NIT. (S105). FIG. 13B shows an example of the data structure of TLV-NIT. The TLV stream ID information can be acquired from the “tlv_stream_id” parameter, and the original network ID information can be acquired from the “original_network_id” parameter. Furthermore, distribution system information regarding the physical conditions of the broadcast transmission path corresponding to each TLV stream ID / original network ID is acquired from the distribution system descriptor (S106), and a list of service IDs is acquired from the service list descriptor ( S107).
　図１３Ｃに、衛星分配システム記述子のデータ構造の一例を示す。図１３Ｄに、サービスリスト記述子のデータ構造の一例を示す。なお、ＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴが、ＴＬＶストリームＩＤ、オリジナルネットワークＩＤ、分配システム情報、サービスＩＤの一覧、等の異なるデータを複数有している場合は、Ｓ１０５～Ｓ１０７の処理を繰り返す。次に、受信機能実行部１１０２は、Ｓ１０５～Ｓ１０７の処理で取得したＴＬＶストリームＩＤ、オリジナルネットワークＩＤ、分配システム情報、サービスＩＤの一覧、等のデータに基づいてサービスリストを作成し、前記作成したサービスリストをＲＯＭ１０３またはストレージ部１１０等に記憶（再スキャン時は更新）する（Ｓ１０８）。 FIG. 13C shows an example of the data structure of the satellite distribution system descriptor. FIG. 13D shows an example of the data structure of the service list descriptor. If the TLV-NIT has a plurality of different data such as a TLV stream ID, original network ID, distribution system information, and service ID list, the processes of S105 to S107 are repeated. Next, the reception function execution unit 1102 creates a service list based on data such as the TLV stream ID, original network ID, distribution system information, and service ID list acquired in the processes of S105 to S107. The service list is stored in the ROM 103 or the storage unit 110 (updated when rescanning) (S108).
　次に、受信機能実行部１１０２は、受信信号からＡＭＴを取得し（Ｓ１０９）、更に、前記サービスリストに記憶された各サービスＩＤに関するＩＰマルチキャストグループの一覧を取得する（Ｓ１１０）。図１３Ｅに、ＡＭＴのデータ構造の一例を示す。なお、ＡＭＴが複数のサービスＩＤに関するＩＰマルチキャストグループの一覧を有している場合は、Ｓ１１０の処理を繰り返す。異なるサービスＩＤに関するＩＰマルチキャストグループの一覧を有するＡＭＴが複数ある場合には、Ｓ１０９～Ｓ１１０の処理を繰り返す。次に、受信機能実行部１１０２は、Ｓ１１０の処理で取得したＩＰマルチキャストグループの一覧を、ＩＰ関連情報として、前記サービスＩＤと関連付けて、ＲＯＭ１０３またはストレージ部１１０等に記憶（再スキャン時は更新）する（Ｓ１１１）。 Next, the reception function execution unit 1102 acquires the AMT from the received signal (S109), and further acquires a list of IP multicast groups related to each service ID stored in the service list (S110). FIG. 13E shows an example of the data structure of AMT. If the AMT has a list of IP multicast groups related to a plurality of service IDs, the process of S110 is repeated. If there are a plurality of AMTs having a list of IP multicast groups related to different service IDs, the processes of S109 to S110 are repeated. Next, the reception function execution unit 1102 stores the IP multicast group list acquired in the process of S110 as IP related information in association with the service ID in the ROM 103 or the storage unit 110 (updated when rescanning). (S111).
　なお、Ｓ１０２の処理で、チューナ／復調部１３１が前記設定された周波数値へのロックに成功しなかった場合（Ｓ１０２：Ｎｏ）、および、Ｓ１０３の処理で取得したＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴが有効なデータでない場合（Ｓ１０４：Ｎｏ）、Ｓ１０５～Ｓ１１１の処理は行わない。 If the tuner / demodulation unit 131 has not succeeded in locking to the set frequency value in the process of S102 (S102: No), and the TLV-NIT acquired in the process of S103 is not valid data. In the case (S104: No), the processing of S105 to S111 is not performed.
　Ｓ１１１の処理を終えると、受信機能実行部１１０２は、チューナ／復調部１３１に設定されている周波数値がチャンネルスキャン範囲の最終周波数値であれば（Ｓ１１２：Ｙｅｓ）、処理を終了する。一方、前記設定されている周波数値がチャンネルスキャン範囲の最終周波数値でなければ（Ｓ１１２：Ｎｏ）、チューナ／復調部１３１に設定された周波数値をアップさせて（Ｓ１１３）、Ｓ１０２～Ｓ１１１の処理を繰り返す。なお、１つのＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴで、当該放送ネットワークを構成する全てのサービスに関するサービスＩＤを取得でき、更に、前記サービスＩＤに関するＩＰマルチキャストグループの一覧を有するＡＭＴを取得できる場合には、Ｓ１１２～Ｓ１１３の処理が不要である。 When the processing of S111 is completed, the reception function execution unit 1102 ends the processing if the frequency value set in the tuner / demodulation unit 131 is the final frequency value in the channel scan range (S112: Yes). On the other hand, if the set frequency value is not the final frequency value in the channel scan range (S112: No), the frequency value set in the tuner / demodulator 131 is increased (S113), and the processing of S102 to S111 is performed. repeat. Note that if one TLV-NIT can acquire service IDs for all the services constituting the broadcast network and further can acquire an AMT having a list of IP multicast groups related to the service IDs, S112 to S113 No processing is required.
　前述の一連の処理により、本実施例の放送受信装置１００は、初期設定の際のチャンネルスキャン時に、あるいは、設定変更のための再スキャン時に、放送ネットワークを構成するサービスの一覧（サービスリスト）の作成／更新と同時に、前記各サービスに対応するＩＰマルチキャストグループの一覧（ＩＰ関連情報）の作成／更新を行い、更に、ＲＯＭ１０３やストレージ部１１０等の不揮発性メモリに記憶させることが可能となる。 Through the series of processes described above, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present exemplary embodiment can store a list of services (service list) constituting the broadcast network at the time of channel scanning at the time of initial setting or at the time of rescanning for setting change. Simultaneously with the creation / update, a list of IP multicast groups (IP related information) corresponding to each service can be created / updated, and further stored in a non-volatile memory such as the ROM 103 or the storage unit 110.
　なお、前記設定変更のための再スキャンは、ＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴやＡＭＴの『ｖｅｒｓｉｏｎ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ』パラメータを参照することにより、テーブル内の情報に変化があったことを検出した場合に、自動的に行うようにしても良い。ＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴとＡＭＴの一方の『ｖｅｒｓｉｏｎ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ』パラメータの変化を検出した場合に、前記パラメータの変化が検出されたテーブルに関する情報のみを自動的に更新するようにしても良い。但し、前述の自動更新を行った場合、再スキャンを自動的に行った旨をユーザに通知することが望ましい。また、前記テーブル内の情報に変化があったことをユーザに報知し、ユーザに前記再スキャンを行うか否かを選択させるようにしても良い。 The rescan for changing the setting is automatically performed when it is detected that the information in the table has changed by referring to the “version_number” parameter of TLV-NIT or AMT. May be. When a change in the “version_number” parameter of one of TLV-NIT and AMT is detected, only information relating to the table in which the change in the parameter is detected may be automatically updated. However, when the above-described automatic update is performed, it is desirable to notify the user that the rescan has been automatically performed. In addition, the user may be notified that information in the table has changed, and the user may be allowed to select whether or not to perform the rescan.
　［放送受信装置の選局処理（チャンネル切り替え）］
　図１４Ａは、本実施例の放送受信装置１００における選局（チャンネル切り替え）時の動作シーケンスの一例を示す図である。 [Broadcast receiving device channel selection processing (channel switching)]
FIG. 14A is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation sequence at the time of channel selection (channel switching) in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment.
　ユーザが図示を省略したリモコン等を操作してチャンネルの切り替えを指示すると、受信機能実行部１１０２が前記リモコンから送信されたコマンドを解釈して目的のサービスのサービスＩＤを指定する（Ｓ２０１）。次に、受信機能実行部１１０２は、チューナ／復調部１３１の受信信号からのＡＭＴの取得を開始する。所定時間以内にＡＭＴの取得に成功した場合（Ｓ２０２：Ｙｅｓ）、前記取得したＡＭＴから前記サービスＩＤに対応するＩＰマルチキャストグループの一覧に関する情報を取得する（Ｓ２０４）。一方、所定時間以内にＡＭＴの取得に成功しなかった場合（Ｓ２０２：Ｎｏ）、ＲＯＭ１０３またはストレージ部１１０等に記憶されたＩＰ関連情報を参照することにより（Ｓ２０３）、前記サービスＩＤに対応するＩＰマルチキャストグループの一覧に関する情報を取得する（Ｓ２０４）。なお、Ｓ２０２の判断処理を行わず、常にＲＯＭ１０３またはストレージ部１１０等に記憶されたＩＰ関連情報を参照するようにしても良い。 When the user operates a remote controller (not shown) to instruct channel switching, the reception function execution unit 1102 interprets the command transmitted from the remote controller and designates the service ID of the target service (S201). Next, reception function execution section 1102 starts acquiring AMT from the received signal of tuner / demodulation section 131. If acquisition of the AMT is successful within a predetermined time (S202: Yes), information on a list of IP multicast groups corresponding to the service ID is acquired from the acquired AMT (S204). On the other hand, if acquisition of the AMT is not successful within a predetermined time (S202: No), the IP corresponding to the service ID is referred to by referring to the IP related information stored in the ROM 103 or the storage unit 110 (S203). Information on the list of multicast groups is acquired (S204). Note that the IP-related information stored in the ROM 103 or the storage unit 110 may be always referred to without performing the determination process in S202.
　次に、受信機能実行部１１０２は、チューナ／復調部１３１の受信信号からのＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴの取得を開始する。所定時間以内にＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴの取得に成功した場合（Ｓ２０５：Ｙｅｓ）、前記取得したＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴから前記サービスＩＤに対応するＩＰデータフローを取得するための分配システム情報を取得する（Ｓ２０７）。一方、所定時間以内にＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴの取得に成功しなかった場合（Ｓ２０５：Ｎｏ）、ＲＯＭ１０３またはストレージ部１１０等に記憶されたサービスリストを参照することにより（Ｓ２０６）、前記サービスＩＤに対応するＩＰデータフローを取得するための分配システム情報を取得する（Ｓ２０７）。なお、Ｓ２０５の判断処理を行わず、常にＲＯＭ１０３またはストレージ部１１０等に記憶されたサービスリストを参照するようにしても良い。 Next, the reception function execution unit 1102 starts acquiring TLV-NIT from the reception signal of the tuner / demodulation unit 131. When acquisition of TLV-NIT is successful within a predetermined time (S205: Yes), distribution system information for acquiring an IP data flow corresponding to the service ID is acquired from the acquired TLV-NIT (S207). On the other hand, when the acquisition of TLV-NIT is not successful within a predetermined time (S205: No), the service ID stored in the ROM 103 or the storage unit 110 is referred to (S206), and the service ID is supported. Distribution system information for acquiring an IP data flow is acquired (S207). Note that the service list stored in the ROM 103 or the storage unit 110 may always be referred to without performing the determination process of S205.
　Ｓ２０７の処理で分配システム情報を取得すると、次に、受信機能実行部１１０２は、前記取得した分配システム情報にて指示される周波数値を以ってチューナ／復調部１３１を制御し、前記サービスＩＤに対応するＩＰデータフローを受信し（Ｓ２０８）、前記受信したＩＰデータフローからＭＭＴデータ列を抽出して、分離部１３２に出力する。 When the distribution system information is acquired in the process of S207, the reception function execution unit 1102 next controls the tuner / demodulation unit 131 with the frequency value indicated by the acquired distribution system information, and the service ID (S208), an MMT data string is extracted from the received IP data flow and output to the separation unit 132.
　分離部１３２において、トランスポート処理部１１０２ａは、前記入力したＭＭＴデータ列からパケットＩＤが『０』であるＭＭＴＰパケットを取得し（Ｓ２０９）、更に、前記取得したＭＭＴＰパケットに含まれるＭＰＴを取得する（Ｓ２１０）。次に、トランスポート処理部１１０２ａは、前記取得したＭＰＴが有する『ＭＭＴ＿ｐａｃｋａｇｅ＿ｉｄ＿ｂｙｔｅ』パラメータを参照し、前記『ＭＭＴ＿ｐａｃｋａｇｅ＿ｉｄ＿ｂｙｔｅ』パラメータの下位１６ビットが前記サービスＩＤと同一値か否かを確認する。図７Ｂに示したＭＰＴのデータ構造の一例において、前記『ＭＭＴ＿ｐａｃｋａｇｅ＿ｉｄ＿ｂｙｔｅ』パラメータの下位１６ビットが前記サービスＩＤと同一値である場合（Ｓ２１１：Ｙｅｓ）、前記パケットＩＤが『０』であるＭＭＴＰパケットが前記サービスＩＤに対応する番組のデータを有するＭＭＴＰパケットであるものと判断し、前記取得したＭＰＴの有する情報に基づいてＭＦＵの取得処理に移行する。 In the separation unit 132, the transport processing unit 1102a acquires an MMTP packet with a packet ID “0” from the input MMT data string (S209), and further acquires an MPT included in the acquired MMTP packet. (S210). Next, the transport processing unit 1102a refers to the “MMT_package_id_byte” parameter of the acquired MPT, and confirms whether the lower 16 bits of the “MMT_package_id_byte” parameter have the same value as the service ID. In the example of the MPT data structure shown in FIG. 7B, when the lower 16 bits of the “MMT_package_id_byte” parameter have the same value as the service ID (S211: Yes), the MMTP packet with the packet ID “0” It is determined that the packet is an MMTP packet having program data corresponding to the service ID, and the process proceeds to MFU acquisition processing based on the information of the acquired MPT.
　一方、前記『ＭＭＴ＿ｐａｃｋａｇｅ＿ｉｄ＿ｂｙｔｅ』パラメータの下位１６ビットが前記サービスＩＤと同一値でない場合（Ｓ２１１：Ｎｏ）、前記パケットＩＤが『０』であるＭＭＴＰパケットは前記サービスＩＤに対応する番組のデータを有するＭＭＴＰパケットではないと判断する。この場合、トランスポート処理部１１０２ａは、あらためてＰＬＴを取得し（Ｓ２１２）、前記取得したＰＬＴを確認することにより、前記サービスＩＤに対応する『ＭＭＴ＿ｐａｃｋａｇｅ＿ｉｄ＿ｂｙｔｅ』パラメータを有するＭＰＴを伝送するＭＭＴＰパケットのパケットＩＤ（ｘとする）を確認する（Ｓ２１３）。更に、トランスポート処理部１１０２ａは、前記入力したＭＭＴデータ列からパケットＩＤが『ｘ』であるＭＭＴＰパケットを取得し（Ｓ２１４）、前記取得したＭＭＴＰパケットに含まれるＭＰＴを取得する（Ｓ２１５）。更に、前記取得したＭＰＴの有する情報に基づいて、ＭＦＵの取得処理を開始する。 On the other hand, if the lower 16 bits of the “MMT_package_id_byte” parameter are not the same value as the service ID (S211: No), the MMTP packet whose packet ID is “0” has the program data corresponding to the service ID. Judge that it is not a packet. In this case, the transport processing unit 1102a acquires the PLT again (S212), and checks the acquired PLT, thereby checking the packet ID of the MMTP packet that transmits the MPT having the “MMT_package_id_byte” parameter corresponding to the service ID. (X is assumed) is confirmed (S213). Further, the transport processing unit 1102a acquires an MMTP packet whose packet ID is “x” from the input MMT data string (S214), and acquires the MPT included in the acquired MMTP packet (S215). Furthermore, the MFU acquisition process is started based on the information that the acquired MPT has.
　なお、Ｓ２０９～Ｓ２１１の処理を行わず、常にＳ２１２～Ｓ２１５の処理を行うようにしても良い。この場合、前記サービスＩＤに対応する番組のデータがパケットＩＤ『０』以外のＭＭＴＰパケットに格納されている際に、処理時間の短縮が可能となる。 Note that the processing of S212 to S215 may always be performed without performing the processing of S209 to S211. In this case, when the program data corresponding to the service ID is stored in the MMTP packet other than the packet ID “0”, the processing time can be shortened.
　ここで、前述の、ＰＬＴを確認することにより、前記サービスＩＤに対応する番組のデータを有するＭＭＴＰパケットのパケットＩＤを特定して、ＭＰＴを取得する処理に関して説明する。パケットＩＤが『０』のＭＭＴＰパケットは、ＰＡメッセージを伝送することを示すものとする。複数のパッケージを多重する場合、図１４Ｂに示すように、このＰＡメッセージにＰＬＴ（パッケージリストテーブル）が含まれる。ＰＬＴは、他のパッケージのＭＰＴを含むＰＡメッセージを伝送するＭＭＴＰパケットのパケットＩＤのリストを有しており、ＰＬＴを確認することにより、パッケージＩＤから各サービスのエントリーポイントとなるＭＰＴを含むＰＡメッセージを伝送するＭＭＴＰパケットを特定することが可能となる。図１４ＣにＰＬＴのデータ構造の一例を示す。『ＭＭＴ＿ｐａｃｋａｇｅ＿ｉｄ＿ｂｙｔｅ』パラメータで示されるパッケージのＰＡメッセージを伝送するロケーション情報が、『ＭＭＴ＿ｇｅｎｅｒａｌ＿ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｉｎｆｏ（）』で指定されるものとする。 Here, the process for specifying the packet ID of the MMTP packet having the program data corresponding to the service ID by confirming the PLT and acquiring the MPT will be described. The MMTP packet with the packet ID “0” indicates that a PA message is transmitted. When a plurality of packages are multiplexed, as shown in FIG. 14B, this PA message includes a PLT (package list table). The PLT has a list of packet IDs of MMTP packets that transmit PA messages including MPTs of other packages, and by checking the PLT, the PA message including the MPT that is the entry point of each service from the package ID. It is possible to specify the MMTP packet that transmits. FIG. 14C shows an example of the data structure of PLT. It is assumed that the location information for transmitting the PA message of the package indicated by the “MMT_package_id_byte” parameter is specified by “MMT_general_location_info ()”.
　図１４Ａに示した動作シーケンスの説明に戻る。前記ＭＦＵの取得処理では、まず、トランスポート処理部１１０２ａが、Ｓ２１０またはＳ２１５の処理で取得したＭＰＴを参照し、所望のＭＦＵを伝送するＩＰデータフローのＩＰアドレスおよびパケットＩＤを取得する（Ｓ２１６）。また、前記ＭＰＴに配置されたＭＰＵタイムスタンプ記述子からＭＰＵの提示時刻を、前記ＭＰＴに配置されたＭＰＵ提示領域指定記述子からＭＰＵのレイアウト番号を、それぞれ取得し（Ｓ２１７、Ｓ２１８）、更に、前記取得したＩＰデータフローのＩＰアドレスおよびパケットＩＤに基づいてＭＦＵを取得する（Ｓ２１９）。次に、前記取得したＭＦＵから符号化映像データや符号化音声データ等を抽出し、ＡＶデコード処理部１１０２ｂの制御に基づく映像／音声デコード処理を行い、提示処理部１１０２ｈの制御により、前記取得した提示時刻に関する情報やレイアウト制御に関する情報に基づく提示処理が行われる（Ｓ２２０）。 Returning to the description of the operation sequence shown in FIG. 14A. In the MFU acquisition process, first, the transport processing unit 1102a refers to the MPT acquired in the process of S210 or S215, and acquires the IP address and packet ID of the IP data flow that transmits the desired MFU (S216). . Further, the MPU presentation time is obtained from the MPU time stamp descriptor arranged in the MPT, and the MPU layout number is obtained from the MPU presentation area designation descriptor arranged in the MPT (S217, S218). An MFU is acquired based on the IP address and packet ID of the acquired IP data flow (S219). Next, encoded video data, encoded audio data, and the like are extracted from the acquired MFU, video / audio decoding processing is performed based on the control of the AV decoding processing unit 1102b, and the acquisition is performed under the control of the presentation processing unit 1102h. A presentation process based on information on presentation time and information on layout control is performed (S220).
　なお、Ｓ２１２の処理でＰＬＴを取得できなかった場合、Ｓ２１３の処理で前記サービスＩＤに一致する『ＭＭＴ＿ｐａｃｋａｇｅ＿ｉｄ＿ｂｙｔｅ』パラメータを確認できなかった場合、Ｓ２１５の処理でパケットＩＤが『ｘ』であるＭＭＴＰパケットを取得できなかった場合、等は、Ｓ２１０の処理で取得したパケットＩＤが『０』であるＭＭＴＰパケットのデータに基づいた番組出画処理（即ち、Ｓ２１６～Ｓ２２０の処理）を行うようにしても良い。また、この場合、ユーザが選択したサービスＩＤに対応する番組を表示できなかった旨のメッセージを表示するようにすると良い。 If the PLT cannot be acquired in the process of S212, and the “MMT_package_id_byte” parameter that matches the service ID cannot be confirmed in the process of S213, the MMTP packet whose packet ID is “x” is processed in the process of S215. If it cannot be obtained, etc., the program output processing (that is, the processing of S216 to S220) based on the data of the MMTP packet with the packet ID “0” acquired in the processing of S210 may be performed. . In this case, a message indicating that the program corresponding to the service ID selected by the user could not be displayed may be displayed.
　以上の一連の処理により、本実施例の放送受信装置１００は、選局（チャンネル切り替え）動作を実行することが可能である。特に、図１３Ａおよび図１４Ａを用いて説明したように、初期設定の際のチャンネルスキャン時に、あるいは、設定変更のための再スキャン時に、サービスリストやＩＰ関連情報を作成して、ＲＯＭ１０３やストレージ部１１０等の不揮発性メモリに記憶させて常時参照可能とし、選局（チャンネル切り替え）時に、ＲＯＭ１０３やストレージ部１１０等の不揮発性メモリに記憶させた前記サービスリストやＩＰ関連情報を参照することにより、選局（チャンネル切り替え）時の動作の効率向上を可能とする。即ち、選局（チャンネル切り替え）時にＡＭＴやＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴの再取得を行う場合と比較して、選局（チャンネル切り替え）開始から選局（チャンネル切り替え）終了までの時間を短縮することが可能となる。 Through the series of processes described above, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment can execute a channel selection (channel switching) operation. In particular, as described with reference to FIGS. 13A and 14A, a service list and IP-related information are created at the time of channel scanning at the time of initial setting or at the time of re-scanning for setting change, and the ROM 103 and the storage unit 110, which is stored in a non-volatile memory such as 110, and can always be referred to, and at the time of channel selection (channel switching), by referring to the service list and IP related information stored in the non-volatile memory such as the ROM 103 and the storage unit 110, This makes it possible to improve the efficiency of operation during channel selection (channel switching). That is, it is possible to shorten the time from the start of channel selection (channel switching) to the end of channel selection (channel switching), compared to the case where AMT and TLV-NIT are reacquired during channel selection (channel switching). Become.
　［放送受信装置のリモコンキー設定処理］
　本実施例の放送受信装置１００に対する操作指示の入力に用いるリモコン（リモートコントローラ）１００Ｒの外観の一例を図１５Ａに示す。リモコン１００Ｒは、少なくとも電源キー１００Ｒ１、テンキー１００Ｒ２、チャンネルアップ／ダウンキー１００Ｒ３、メニューキー１００Ｒ４、ＥＰＧキー１００Ｒ５、カーソルキー１００Ｒ６、決定キー１００Ｒ７、カラーキー１００Ｒ８、を備えるものとする。音量アップ／ダウンキーやネットワーク切替キー、入力切替キー、録画キー、再生キー、等を、更に備えても良い。 [Remote control key setting process of broadcast receiver]
FIG. 15A shows an example of the appearance of a remote control (remote controller) 100R used for inputting operation instructions to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment. The remote controller 100R includes at least a power key 100R1, a numeric keypad 100R2, a channel up / down key 100R3, a menu key 100R4, an EPG key 100R5, a cursor key 100R6, an enter key 100R7, and a color key 100R8. A volume up / down key, a network switching key, an input switching key, a recording key, a playback key, and the like may be further provided.
　例えば、図１４Ａに示した選局時の動作シーケンスのＳ２０１の処理において、リモコン１００Ｒを用いて、本実施例の放送受信装置１００に対してチャンネルの切り替えを指示する場合、以下の三通りの方法が用いられて良い。第一の方法は、テンキー１００Ｒ２を複数回押下することにより、所望のチャンネル（サービス）のサービスＩＤを直接入力して指定する方法である。第二の方法は、チャンネルアップ／ダウンキー１００Ｒ３の押下を必要に応じて繰り返すことにより、所望のチャンネル（サービス）が表示されるまでチャンネルの順送り（または逆送り）を行う方法である。第三の方法は、テンキー１００Ｒ２を一回のみ押下することにより、テンキー１００Ｒ２の各キーに関連付けられた所定のチャンネル（サービス）を呼び出す、いわゆるワンタッチ選局を行う方法である。前記第三の方法であるワンタッチ選局は使い勝手の良い選局方法であるが、テンキー１００Ｒ２の各キーへの所定のチャンネル（サービス）の関連付けの設定を予め放送受信装置１００に行っておく必要がある。 For example, in the process of S201 of the operation sequence at the time of channel selection shown in FIG. 14A, when the remote control 100R is used to instruct the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment to switch channels, the following three methods are used. May be used. The first method is to directly input and specify a service ID of a desired channel (service) by pressing the numeric keypad 100R2 a plurality of times. The second method is a method of performing forward (or backward) channel transmission until a desired channel (service) is displayed by repeatedly pressing the channel up / down key 100R3 as necessary. The third method is a method of performing so-called one-touch tuning, in which a predetermined channel (service) associated with each key of the numeric keypad 100R2 is called by pressing the numeric keypad 100R2 only once. The one-touch channel selection which is the third method is an easy-to-use channel selection method, but it is necessary to set the association of a predetermined channel (service) to each key of the numeric keypad 100R2 in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 in advance. is there.
　本実施例の放送システムに対応する放送受信装置１００は、前記関連付けの設定を、チューナ／復調部１３１で受信したデジタル放送波に含まれる制御情報に基づいて自動的に行うことが可能であるものとする。即ち、本実施例の放送システムは、ＴＬＶ－ＳＩの記述子としてリモートコントロールキー記述子を用意している。前記関連付けの設定は、リモートコントロールキー記述子を参照することにより行えば良い。 The broadcast receiving apparatus 100 corresponding to the broadcast system of this embodiment can automatically perform the association setting based on control information included in the digital broadcast wave received by the tuner / demodulator 131. And That is, the broadcasting system of this embodiment provides a remote control key descriptor as a TLV-SI descriptor. The association may be set by referring to the remote control key descriptor.
　図１５Ｂに、リモートコントロールキー記述子のデータ構造の一例を示す。図中の『ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅ＿ｉｄ』パラメータがチャンネル（サービス）を識別するサービスＩＤである。『ｒｅｍｏｔｅ＿ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ＿ｋｅｙ＿ｉｄ』パラメータが前記サービスＩＤで識別されるチャンネル（サービス）を割り当てるリモコンボタン番号の推奨値である。前記各パラメータの値に応じて、テンキー１００Ｒ２の『ｒｅｍｏｔｅ＿ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ＿ｋｅｙ＿ｉｄ』パラメータの値で指定されるキーに『ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅ＿ｉｄ』パラメータで識別されるチャンネル（サービス）を関連付けるようにすれば良い。 FIG. 15B shows an example of the data structure of the remote control key descriptor. The “service_id” parameter in the figure is a service ID for identifying a channel (service). The “remote_control_key_id” parameter is a recommended value of a remote control button number for assigning a channel (service) identified by the service ID. In accordance with the value of each parameter, the channel (service) identified by the “service_id” parameter may be associated with the key specified by the “remote_control_key_id” parameter value of the numeric keypad 100R2.
　なお、同一ネットワーク内におけるチャンネル（サービス）の数が多い場合、前記チャンネル（サービス）をテンキー１００Ｒ２以外のキーに割り当てるようにしても良い。例えば、カラーキー１００Ｒ８に所定のチャンネル（サービス）を割り当てる、等である。この場合、予めカラーキー１００Ｒ８の各キーにも『ｒｅｍｏｔｅ＿ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ＿ｋｅｙ＿ｉｄ』パラメータに対応する数値を割り当てておけば良い。 If the number of channels (services) in the same network is large, the channels (services) may be assigned to keys other than the numeric keypad 100R2. For example, a predetermined channel (service) is assigned to the color key 100R8. In this case, a numerical value corresponding to the “remote_control_key_id” parameter may be assigned to each key of the color key 100R8 in advance.
　リモートコントロールキー記述子は、ＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴの記述子として記述されて良い。従って、例えば、図１３Ａに示したチャンネルスキャン時の動作シーケンスのＳ１０３の処理で取得したＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴが有効なデータである場合に、Ｓ１０５～Ｓ１０７の処理と併せて、リモートコントロールキー記述子の記述内容を放送受信装置１００のＲＯＭ１０３またはストレージ部１１０等の不揮発メモリに記憶させることにより、前記関連付けの設定を行えば良い。 The remote control key descriptor may be described as a TLV-NIT descriptor. Therefore, for example, when the TLV-NIT acquired in the processing of S103 in the operation sequence at the time of channel scanning shown in FIG. 13A is valid data, the description of the remote control key descriptor is combined with the processing of S105 to S107. The association may be set by storing the contents in a ROM 103 or a non-volatile memory such as the storage unit 110 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
　なお、前記関連付けの設定は、前述のようにリモートコントロールキー記述子の記述内容に応じて行う方法の他、ユーザが自らの好みに応じてテンキー１００Ｒ２の各キーに任意のチャンネルのサービスを適宜割り当てることにより行っても良い。また、放送受信装置１００の不揮発メモリに前記リモートコントロールキー記述子の記述内容に応じた関連付けの設定とユーザが好みに応じて割り当てた関連付けの設定の双方を同時に記憶しておき、メニュー操作等の選択により、一方の設定のみを使用するようにしても良い。また、この場合、前記ユーザが好みに応じて割り当てた関連付けの設定が優先的に使用されて良い。また、リモートコントロールキー記述子に記述された優先フラグの値に応じて、前記ユーザが好みに応じて割り当てた関連付けの設定よりも前記リモートコントロールキー記述子の記述内容に応じた関連付けの設定を優先して使用するようにしても良い。前記優先フラグは、図１５Ｂに示したリモートコントロールキー記述子の『ｒｅｓｅｒｖｅｄ』パラメータの一部あるいは全部を用いることにより設定しても良いし、新たなパラメータを追加することにより設定しても良い。なお、この場合、サービスＩＤ毎に前記優先フラグの値を制御可能であって良い。 In addition to the method of setting the association according to the description content of the remote control key descriptor as described above, the user appropriately assigns a service of an arbitrary channel to each key of the numeric keypad 100R2 according to his / her preference. It may be done by. Further, both the association setting according to the description content of the remote control key descriptor and the association setting assigned by the user according to preference are stored in the nonvolatile memory of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 at the same time. Depending on the selection, only one setting may be used. In this case, the association setting assigned by the user according to preference may be preferentially used. Further, according to the value of the priority flag described in the remote control key descriptor, the association setting according to the description content of the remote control key descriptor is prioritized over the association setting assigned by the user according to preference. And may be used. The priority flag may be set by using a part or all of the “reserved” parameter of the remote control key descriptor shown in FIG. 15B, or may be set by adding a new parameter. In this case, the priority flag value may be controllable for each service ID.
　また、前記不揮発メモリにユーザが好みに応じて割り当てた関連付けの設定が記憶されている場合には、前記リモートコントロールキー記述子の記述内容に応じた関連付けの設定を前記不揮発メモリに記憶させないようにしても良い。また、放送受信装置１００の不揮発メモリには前記ユーザが好みに応じて割り当てた関連付けの設定のみを記憶しておき、受信中のＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴにリモートコントロールキー記述子が記述されている場合には前記リモートコントロールキー記述子の記述内容に応じた関連付けの設定を使用し、受信中のＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴにリモートコントロールキー記述子が記述されていない場合には前記ユーザが好みに応じて割り当てた関連付けの設定を使用するようにしても良い。 In addition, when the association setting assigned by the user according to preference is stored in the nonvolatile memory, the association setting according to the description content of the remote control key descriptor is not stored in the nonvolatile memory. May be. Further, in the nonvolatile memory of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, only the association setting assigned by the user according to the preference is stored, and when the remote control key descriptor is described in the receiving TLV-NIT. If the remote control key descriptor is not described in the receiving TLV-NIT using the association setting according to the description content of the remote control key descriptor, the association assigned by the user according to preference is used. You may make it use a setting.
　なお、リモートコントロールキー記述子の記述内容に応じてテンキー１００Ｒ２の各キーに所定のチャンネル（サービス）を関連付けを変更する処理は、ＴＬＶ－ＮＩＴで指定されるネットワークにおいてサービスリスト記述子に記述される全てのサービスに対して同時に行われても良いし、一部のサービスに対してのみ行われても良い。前記処理を一部のサービスに対してのみ行う場合、その他のサービスに関しては旧設定をそのまま保持するようにしても良い。また、前記『ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅ＿ｉｄ』パラメータが所定の値（例えば、９９９等）である場合には、放送受信装置１００の不揮発メモリに記憶されている設定済み内容のうち、『ｒｅｍｏｔｅ＿ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ＿ｋｅｙ＿ｉｄ』パラメータで指定される設定に関してのみ消去するようにしても良い。 The process of changing the association of a predetermined channel (service) with each key of the numeric keypad 100R2 according to the description content of the remote control key descriptor is described in the service list descriptor in the network specified by TLV-NIT. It may be performed for all services at the same time, or may be performed only for some services. When the above process is performed only for a part of services, the old setting may be held as it is for other services. Further, when the “service_id” parameter is a predetermined value (for example, 999), the setting designated by the “remote_control_key_id” parameter among the set contents stored in the nonvolatile memory of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 You may make it erase only about.
　即ち、本実施例の放送受信装置１００では、テンキー１００Ｒ２の各キーへの所定のチャンネル（サービス）の関連付けの設定を行うことが可能となる。 That is, in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to set association of a predetermined channel (service) to each key of the numeric keypad 100R2.
　［マルチ編成チャンネルの選局処理］
　本実施例の放送システムにおいても、一つのチャンネル（サービス）で複数の番組を並行して放送するマルチ編成が可能であるものとする。マルチ編成による複数番組の同時放送を行う場合、前述のワンタッチ選局はマルチ編成のメインチャンネルに対してのみ可能であって、マルチ編成のサブチャンネルに対しては可能ではないことが考えられる。即ち、マルチ編成のサブチャンネルを選局する場合、サービスＩＤを直接入力して指定する方法を用いるか、あるいはワンタッチ選局により一旦マルチ編成のメインチャンネルを選局した後にチャンネルアップ／ダウンキー１００Ｒ３の押下により所望のサブチャンネルを選局する方法を用いる必要があり、操作が煩雑となる問題がある。 [Multi-channel selection processing]
Also in the broadcasting system of the present embodiment, it is assumed that multi-organization in which a plurality of programs are broadcast in parallel on one channel (service) is possible. When simultaneous broadcasting of a plurality of programs by multi-organization is performed, it is conceivable that the above-described one-touch channel selection is possible only for a main channel of multi-organization and not for a sub-channel of multi-organization. That is, when selecting a multi-organization sub-channel, a method of directly inputting and specifying a service ID is used, or after selecting a multi-organization main channel by one-touch tuning, the channel up / down key 100R3 is used. It is necessary to use a method of selecting a desired subchannel by pressing, and there is a problem that the operation becomes complicated.
　前記問題を解決するために、本実施例の放送受信装置１００においては、ワンタッチ選局の機能を拡張し、所定のサービスＩＤを割り当てたテンキー１００Ｒ２を、所定時間内に複数回繰り返して押下することにより、マルチ編成のサブチャンネルの直接選局を可能としている。 In order to solve the above problem, in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, the one-touch channel selection function is expanded, and the numeric keypad 100R2 assigned with a predetermined service ID is repeatedly pressed within a predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to directly select multi-channel sub-channels.
　図１６Ａを用いて説明する。例えば、リモコン１００Ｒのテンキー１００Ｒ２の『１』キーに０１１チャンネルのサービスが予め割り当てられているものとする。この場合、マルチ編成を行っていない状態（図中（Ａ）参照）での選局操作であれば、前記『１』キーの押下回数によらず、０１１チャンネルが選局される。一方、マルチ編成を行っている状態（図中（Ｂ）参照）での選局操作の場合、前記『１』キーを一回のみ押下すると０１１チャンネルが選局され、一回目の『１』キー押下から所定時間以内に再度『１』キーを押下すると０１２チャンネルが選局されるようにする。同様に、所定時間内に『１』キーが三回押下された場合には、０１３チャンネルが選局されるようにする。なお、一回目の『１』キー押下から所定時間を超えて再度『１』キーが押下された場合には、０１１チャンネルが選局されたままとして良い。 This will be described with reference to FIG. 16A. For example, it is assumed that the 011 channel service is assigned in advance to the “1” key of the numeric keypad 100R2 of the remote controller 100R. In this case, if the channel selection operation is in a state where multi-knitting is not performed (see (A) in the figure), the 011 channel is selected regardless of the number of times the “1” key is pressed. On the other hand, in the case of a channel selection operation in a multi-knitting state (see (B) in the figure), pressing the “1” key only once selects channel 011 and the first “1” key. If the “1” key is pressed again within a predetermined time from the pressing, the 012 channel is selected. Similarly, when the “1” key is pressed three times within a predetermined time, the 013 channel is selected. If the “1” key is pressed again after a predetermined time from the first pressing of the “1” key, the 011 channel may remain selected.
　前述のような操作を可能とすることにより、本実施例の放送受信装置１００においては、より簡単な操作でマルチ編成時のサブチャンネルの直接選局を可能としている。 By enabling the operation as described above, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment enables direct channel selection of subchannels during multi-organization with a simpler operation.
　同様に、マルチビュー対応番組のアングル選択や複数の映像アセットからの所定の映像アセットの選択をテンキー１００Ｒ２の複数回繰り返し押下により行う様にしても良い。図１６Ｂに示すように、マルチビュー対応番組のサービスＩＤがリモコン１００Ｒのテンキー１００Ｒ２の『１』キーに割り当てられている場合、前記『１』キーを一回のみ押下すると前記マルチビュー対応番組が選局されてメインビューが表示されるものとする。また、一回目の『１』キー押下から所定時間以内に再度『１』キーを押下すると前記マルチビュー対応番組のサブビュー１が表示されるものとする。同様に、所定時間内に『１』キーが三回押下された場合には、前記マルチビュー対応番組のサブビュー２が表示されるものとする。なお、一回目の『１』キー押下から所定時間を超えて再度『１』キーが押下された場合には、前記マルチビュー対応番組のメインビューが表示されたままとして良い。複数の映像アセットからの所定の映像アセットの選択も前述と同様の操作により可能であって良い。 Similarly, angle selection of a multi-view compatible program and selection of a predetermined video asset from a plurality of video assets may be performed by repeatedly pressing the ten key 100R2 a plurality of times. As shown in FIG. 16B, when the service ID of the multi-view compatible program is assigned to the “1” key of the numeric keypad 100R2 of the remote controller 100R, the multi-view compatible program is selected by pressing the “1” key only once. Assume that the main view is displayed. Further, when the “1” key is pressed again within a predetermined time after the first “1” key is pressed, the subview 1 of the multi-view compatible program is displayed. Similarly, when the “1” key is pressed three times within a predetermined time, the subview 2 of the multi-view compatible program is displayed. If the “1” key is pressed again after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first “1” key is pressed, the main view of the multi-view compatible program may remain displayed. Selection of a predetermined video asset from a plurality of video assets may be possible by the same operation as described above.
　前述のような操作を可能とすることにより、本実施例の放送受信装置１００においては、より簡単な操作でマルチビュー対応番組のアングル選択や複数の映像アセットからの所定の映像アセットの選択を可能としている。 By enabling the operations as described above, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment can select the angle of a multi-view compatible program or select a predetermined video asset from a plurality of video assets with a simpler operation. It is said.
　なお、マルチ編成時の一つ以上の番組がマルチビュー対応番組や複数アセットを有する番組である場合は、前述の操作の一方のみを有効とし、他方を無効とすれば良い。例えば、マルチ編成時の一つ以上の番組がマルチビュー対応番組や複数アセットを有する番組である場合は、同一キーの所定時間内の複数回押下の操作をマルチ編成時のサブチャンネルの直接選局の処理に割り当てるようにする。何れの操作を有効とし、また、無効とするかは、予め定めておいても良いし、ユーザが選択するようにしても良い。 In addition, when one or more programs at the time of multi-organization are multi-view compatible programs or programs having a plurality of assets, only one of the above-described operations may be validated and the other may be invalidated. For example, if one or more programs at the time of multi-organization are multi-view compatible programs or programs having a plurality of assets, direct channel selection of sub-channels at the time of multi-organization is performed by pressing the same key multiple times within a predetermined time. To be assigned to the process. Which operation is valid or invalid may be determined in advance or may be selected by the user.
　［放送受信装置の画面レイアウト制御］
　本実施例の放送受信装置１００では、ＬＣＴの記述に基づいた画面レイアウト制御が可能であるものとする。図１７ＡにＬＣＴのデータ構造の一例を示す。図１７ＢにＭＰＵ提示領域指定記述子のデータ構造の一例を示す。 [Screen layout control of broadcast receiver]
In the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, it is assumed that screen layout control based on the description of LCT is possible. FIG. 17A shows an example of the data structure of LCT. FIG. 17B shows an example of the data structure of the MPU presentation area designation descriptor.
　前記ＬＣＴのデータ構造において、特に、『ｌｅｆｔ＿ｔｏｐ＿ｐｏｓ＿ｘ』パラメータと『ｒｉｇｈｔ＿ｄｏｗｎ＿ｐｏｓ＿ｘ』パラメータは、全画面表示の左側を『０』／右側を『１００』とした場合の、領域の左上の水平位置と右下の水平位置を、それぞれ水平方向の全画素数に対する割合で示すものとする。『ｌｅｆｔ＿ｔｏｐ＿ｐｏｓ＿ｙ』パラメータと『ｒｉｇｈｔ＿ｄｏｗｎ＿ｐｏｓ＿ｙ』パラメータは、全画面表示の上側を『０』／下側を『１００』とした場合の、領域の左上の垂直位置と右下の垂直位置を、それぞれ垂直方向の全画素数に対する割合で示すものとする。また、『ｌａｙｅｒ＿ｏｒｄｅｒ』パラメータは、領域の奥行き方向の相対位置を示すものとする。 In the LCT data structure, in particular, the “left_top_pos_x” parameter and the “right_down_pos_x” parameter are the horizontal position at the upper left and the lower right when the left side of the full screen display is “0” / the right side is “100”. The horizontal position is indicated by a ratio to the total number of pixels in the horizontal direction. The “left_top_pos_y” parameter and the “right_down_pos_y” parameter indicate the vertical position at the upper left and the lower right of the area when the upper side of the full screen display is “0” / lower side is “100”. It shall be shown by the ratio with respect to the total number of pixels. The “layer_order” parameter indicates the relative position in the depth direction of the region.
　前記各パラメータの設定に基づいた、レイアウト番号へのレイアウトの割当の例を、前記各パラメータの設定値と共に、以下で説明する。 An example of layout allocation to layout numbers based on the setting of each parameter will be described below together with the setting values of each parameter.
　図１７Ｃは、本実施例の放送受信装置１００のデフォルトのレイアウト設定であり、全画面に１つの領域のみを設定する例である。図１７Ｄは、全画面を三つの領域に分割し、それぞれの領域を『領域０』、『領域１』、『領域２』とした場合の例である。例えば、全画面の画素数を水平７６８０画素／垂直４３２０画素とした場合、『領域０』は、『ｌｅｆｔ＿ｔｏｐ＿ｐｏｓ＿ｘ』パラメータが『０』、『ｌｅｆｔ＿ｔｏｐ＿ｐｏｓ＿ｙ』パラメータが『０』、『ｒｉｇｈｔ＿ｄｏｗｎ＿ｐｏｓ＿ｘ』パラメータが『８０』、『ｒｉｇｈｔ＿ｄｏｗｎ＿ｐｏｓ＿ｙ』パラメータが『８０』であることから、（０，０）－（６１４３，３４５５）の範囲に設定される。同様に、『領域１』は、（６１４４，０）－（７６７９，４３１９）の範囲に設定され、『領域２』は、（０，３４５６）－（６１４３，４３１９）の範囲に設定される。 FIG. 17C shows a default layout setting of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, in which only one area is set on the entire screen. FIG. 17D shows an example in which the entire screen is divided into three areas, and the areas are “area 0”, “area 1”, and “area 2”. For example, when the number of pixels on the whole screen is 7680 horizontal / vertical 4320 pixels, “area 0” has “left_top_pos_x” parameter of “0”, “left_top_pos_y” parameter of “0”, and “right_down_pos_x” parameter of “80” ”And“ right_down_pos_y ”parameters are“ 80 ”, and are set in the range of (0, 0) − (6143, 3455). Similarly, “area 1” is set in the range of (6144,0) − (7679,4319), and “area 2” is set in the range of (0,3456) − (6143,4319).
　図１７Ｅは、図１７Ｄと同様に三つの領域を設定する例であるが、『領域０』は、（０，０）－（７６７９，４３１９）の範囲に設定され、『領域１』と『領域２』は前述と同様の範囲で、『ｌａｙｅｒ＿ｏｒｄｅｒ』パラメータの設定に応じて、『領域０』の前面に配置される。図１７Ｆは、デバイス０（デフォルトのデバイス：本実施例では放送受信装置１００）に『領域０』が設定され、デバイス１（本実施例においては、携帯情報端末７００）に『領域１』が設定される場合の例である。 FIG. 17E is an example in which three areas are set in the same manner as FIG. 17D, but “area 0” is set in the range of (0,0) − (7679,4319), “area 1” and “area “2” is in the same range as described above, and is arranged in front of “area 0” according to the setting of the “layer_order” parameter. FIG. 17F shows that “area 0” is set in device 0 (default device: broadcast receiving apparatus 100 in this embodiment), and “area 1” is set in device 1 (mobile information terminal 700 in this embodiment). This is an example of the case.
　前述のように、本実施例の放送システムにおいては、ＬＣＴを用いることにより、マルチメディアサービスを受信機上でサービス提供者の意図通りに表示するための画面レイアウト制御を行うことが可能となる。 As described above, in the broadcasting system of this embodiment, by using the LCT, it is possible to perform screen layout control for displaying a multimedia service on the receiver as intended by the service provider.
　なお、前述の画面レイアウト制御により番組映像やデータ画面が表示されない領域は、ＬＣＴ内に記述された背景色指定記述子により指定された所定の背景色が表示されて良い。また、ＬＣＴに前記背景色指定記述子が含まれていない場合、放送受信装置１００が前記背景色指定記述子を正しく取得できなかった場合、背景色指定記述子により指定された所定の背景色がハードウェア制限により表示できないものである場合、等には、映像表示装置１００が予め定めた所定のパターンを前記領域に表示するようにしても良い。また、映像表示装置１００からユーザに対してのお知らせ表示領域として前記領域を使用しても良い。なお、前記お知らせは任意の情報であって良い。 It should be noted that a predetermined background color designated by the background color designation descriptor described in the LCT may be displayed in an area where the program video or data screen is not displayed by the screen layout control described above. Further, when the background color designation descriptor is not included in the LCT, when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 cannot correctly obtain the background color designation descriptor, the predetermined background color designated by the background color designation descriptor is If the display is not possible due to hardware restrictions, the video display device 100 may display a predetermined pattern in the area. Further, the region may be used as a notification display region from the video display device 100 to the user. The notice may be arbitrary information.
　なお、前記『ｌｅｆｔ＿ｔｏｐ＿ｐｏｓ＿ｘ』等のパラメータの設定値に応じて画面を分割する際に生じた小数点以下の端数は、切り上げ若しくは切り捨て等の処理を行えば良い。四捨五入（あるいは、二進数における零捨一入）の処理でも良い。例えば、全画面の画素数が７６８０画素／垂直４３２０画素で、『領域０』の『ｌｅｆｔ＿ｔｏｐ＿ｐｏｓ＿ｘ』パラメータが『０』、『ｌｅｆｔ＿ｔｏｐ＿ｐｏｓ＿ｙ』パラメータが『０』、『ｒｉｇｈｔ＿ｄｏｗｎ＿ｐｏｓ＿ｘ』パラメータが『５１』、『ｒｉｇｈｔ＿ｄｏｗｎ＿ｐｏｓ＿ｙ』パラメータが『５１』の場合、切り上げ処理により（０，０）－（３９１６，２２０３）の範囲に『領域０』を設定しても良いし、切り捨て処理により（０，０）－（３９１５，２２０２）の範囲に『領域０』を設定しても良い。また、映像圧縮処理の際のマクロブロックを考慮して、８画素単位や１６画素単位等での切り上げ／切り捨て処理を行うようにしても良い。前記処理により、ＬＣＴに基づく領域設定や、前記領域におけるマルチメディアコンテンツの解像度変換処理を効率的に行うことが可能となる。 It should be noted that fractions after the decimal point generated when the screen is divided according to the set value of the parameter such as “left_top_pos_x” may be rounded up or down. Rounding off (or rounding to zero in a binary number) may be used. For example, the number of pixels of the entire screen is 7680 pixels / vertical 4320 pixels, the “left_top_pos_x” parameter of “region 0” is “0”, the “left_top_pos_y” parameter is “0”, the “right_down_pos_x” parameter is “51”, “right_down_pos_y_ When the parameter is “51”, “Region 0” may be set in the range of (0,0) − (3916,2203) by rounding up processing, or (0,0) − (3915, 2202) may be set to “area 0”. Further, rounding up / down processing in units of 8 pixels or 16 pixels may be performed in consideration of a macroblock in video compression processing. By the processing, it is possible to efficiently perform region setting based on LCT and resolution conversion processing of multimedia content in the region.
　あるいは、前記『ｌｅｆｔ＿ｔｏｐ＿ｐｏｓ＿ｘ』等のパラメータの設定値を、『０』から『１００』の範囲の『５の倍数』若しくは『１０の倍数』のみに制限するようにしても良い。この場合も、前記領域設定を好適に行うことが可能となる。 Alternatively, the setting value of the parameter such as “left_top_pos_x” may be limited to “multiple of 5” or “multiple of 10” in the range of “0” to “100”. Also in this case, the region setting can be suitably performed.
　なお、前記各領域に表示されるコンテンツは、図１７Ｂに示したＭＰＵ提示領域指定記述子により指定される。図中の『ｍｐｕ＿ｓｅｑｕｅｎｃｅ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ』パラメータでシーケンス番号を指定されるＭＰＵのコンテンツが、『ｌａｙｏｕｔ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ』パラメータおよび『ｒｅｇｉｏｎ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ』パラメータにより、前記ＬＣＴの記述に関連付けられるものとする。 The content displayed in each area is specified by the MPU presentation area specification descriptor shown in FIG. 17B. It is assumed that the content of the MPU whose sequence number is specified by the “mpu_sequence_number” parameter in the figure is related to the LCT description by the “layout_number” parameter and the “region_number” parameter.
　また、ＭＰＵ提示領域指定記述子の記述の第一の『ｆｏｒ』ループ内において、一つの『ｍｐｕ＿ｓｅｑｕｅｎｃｅ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ』パラメータに対して複数の『ｌａｙｏｕｔ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ』パラメータおよび『ｒｅｇｉｏｎ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ』パラメータを記述し、何れの記述に従ってレイアウト制御を行うかをユーザに選択させるようにしても良い。例えば、第一の『ｆｏｒ』ループ内において、所定の『ｍｐｕ＿ｓｅｑｕｅｎｃｅ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ』パラメータに対して『ｌａｙｏｕｔ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ１』パラメータ、『ｒｅｇｉｏｎ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ１』パラメータ、『ｌａｙｏｕｔ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ２』パラメータ、『ｒｅｇｉｏｎ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ２』パラメータ、が記述されている場合、前記『ｍｐｕ＿ｓｅｑｕｅｎｃｅ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ』パラメータで指定されるＭＰＵのレイアウト制御を、『ｌａｙｏｕｔ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ１』パラメータおよび『ｒｅｇｉｏｎ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ１』パラメータに基づいて行うか、『ｌａｙｏｕｔ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ２』パラメータおよび『ｒｅｇｉｏｎ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ２』パラメータに基づいて行うか、をユーザに選択させる、等である。このようにすれば、ユーザは映像番組に関するレイアウト制御を好みに応じて行うことが可能となる。 In addition, in the first “for” loop of the description of the MPU presentation area specification descriptor, a plurality of “layout_number” parameters and “region_number” parameters are described for one “mpu_sequence_number” parameter, and layout is performed according to any description. The user may be allowed to select whether to perform control. For example, in the first “for” loop, when the “layout_number1” parameter, the “region_number1” parameter, the “layout_number2” parameter, and the “region_number2” parameter are described for a predetermined “mpu_sequence_number” parameter, Let the user select whether to perform layout control of the MPU specified by the “mpu_sequence_number” parameter based on the “layout_number1” parameter and the “region_number1” parameter, or based on the “layout_number2” parameter and the “region_number2” parameter, etc. It is. In this way, the user can perform layout control related to the video program according to his / her preference.
　［放送受信装置の画面レイアウト制御の例外処理］
　本実施例の放送受信装置１００においては、前述のＬＣＴにより画面レイアウトの領域制御が行われている場合であっても、ユーザによりＥＰＧ画面の表示が指示された場合等には、例外処理として、前記ＬＣＴの記述内容を無視した画面レイアウト制御を行うことが可能であるものとする。図１８Ａに、ＬＣＴに基づく画面レイアウト制御の例外処理の動作の一例を示す。 [Exceptional processing for screen layout control of broadcast receivers]
In the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, even when the area control of the screen layout is performed by the above-described LCT, when the display of the EPG screen is instructed by the user, as an exception process, It is possible to perform screen layout control ignoring the description content of the LCT. FIG. 18A shows an example of the operation of exception processing for screen layout control based on LCT.
　ＬＣＴの記述により図１７Ｄと同様の画面レイアウト制御が行われ、『領域０』に放送番組映像が表示され、『領域１』および『領域２』に前記放送番組に連携する番組連携データ等の放送コンテンツが表示されている状態で、ユーザが図示を省略したリモコンによりＥＰＧ画面の表示を指示した場合、本実施例の放送受信装置１００では、図１８Ａ（Ａ）に示したように、ＬＣＴの記述内容に関わらず画面レイアウト設定をデフォルトの設定（即ち、図１７Ｃと同様の画面レイアウト制御が行われている状態）に戻し、ＥＰＧ画面を画面全体に表示するように制御するものとする。更に、ユーザがＥＰＧ画面の表示終了を指示した場合に、ＬＣＴの記述内容に従った画面レイアウト制御を再実行するようにする。 The screen layout control similar to that of FIG. 17D is performed by the description of LCT, the broadcast program video is displayed in “Area 0”, and the program linkage data linked to the broadcast program is broadcasted in “Area 1” and “Area 2”. When the user instructs display of the EPG screen with a remote controller (not shown) while the content is displayed, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment describes the LCT description as shown in FIG. 18A (A). Regardless of the content, the screen layout setting is returned to the default setting (that is, the screen layout control similar to that in FIG. 17C is performed), and the EPG screen is controlled to be displayed on the entire screen. Further, when the user instructs the display end of the EPG screen, the screen layout control according to the description content of the LCT is re-executed.
　前述の制御を行うことにより、図１８Ａ（Ｂ）に示したような、画面レイアウトの領域制御を維持したままＥＰＧ画面の表示を行う場合と比較して、ＥＰＧ画面を大きく表示することができ、見易さを向上させることが可能である。 By performing the above-described control, the EPG screen can be displayed larger than the case where the EPG screen is displayed while maintaining the area control of the screen layout as shown in FIG. 18A (B). It is possible to improve visibility.
　なお、前記画面レイアウト制御の例外処理は、ＥＰＧ画面の表示を行う際にのみ適用されるものではなく、図１８Ｂに示すように、放送受信装置１００の各種設定画面（図示の例では録画設定画面）の子画面表示時や二画面表示時に適用されても良い。 Note that the exception process of the screen layout control is not applied only when the EPG screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. ) May be applied when a sub-screen is displayed or when a two-screen is displayed.
　同図（Ａ）に示した録画設定画面の場合、放送コンテンツの表示エリアは画面全体から画面右下の子画面部分のみに変更される。同様に、同図（Ｂ）に示した二画面表示の場合、放送コンテンツの表示エリアは画面全体から画面中段左側の分割画面部分のみに変更される。何れの場合も、放送コンテンツを表示するための表示エリアが、画面全体を使用する場合と比較して狭くなるため、前記表示エリア内で画面レイアウトの領域制御を維持したまま（即ち、領域分割を行って複数の放送コンテンツを同時に表示したまま）とすることは視認上好ましくはない。従って、本実施例の放送受信装置１００においては、前記状況の際には、前記表示エリアに『領域０』の放送コンテンツのみを選択して表示するようにする。なお、直前の領域選択状況に応じて、『領域１』や『領域２』の放送コンテンツを選択して表示するようにしても良い。 In the case of the recording setting screen shown in FIG. 4A, the broadcast content display area is changed from the entire screen to only the sub-screen portion at the lower right of the screen. Similarly, in the case of the two-screen display shown in FIG. 5B, the broadcast content display area is changed from the entire screen to only the divided screen portion on the left side of the middle stage of the screen. In any case, the display area for displaying the broadcast content is narrower than the case where the entire screen is used. Therefore, the area control of the screen layout is maintained in the display area (that is, the area division is performed). It is not preferable from the viewpoint of visual recognition that a plurality of broadcast contents are displayed at the same time. Therefore, in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment, in the above situation, only the broadcast content of “area 0” is selected and displayed in the display area. Note that the broadcast content of “region 1” or “region 2” may be selected and displayed according to the immediately preceding region selection situation.
　前述の制御を行うことにより、画面レイアウトの領域制御を維持したまま各種放送コンテンツの表示を行う場合と比較して、前記放送コンテンツの見易さを向上させることが可能となる。録画番組一覧画面における子画面表示やインターネットコンテンツのブラウザ表示時、等においても同様である。 By performing the above-described control, it is possible to improve the visibility of the broadcast content as compared with the case where various broadcast content is displayed while maintaining the area control of the screen layout. The same applies to the sub-screen display on the recorded program list screen and the browser display of Internet content.
　［映像信号のアスペクト比変換処理］
　テレビ放送サービスにおける映像信号のアスペクト比には、従来のＳＤＴＶで用いられた『４：３』、近年のＨＤＴＶで用いられている『１６：９』の他、映画コンテンツに適した『２１：９』、等がある。前記映像信号のアスペクト比の情報は、本実施例の放送システムにおいては、映像コンポーネント記述子により記述されて良い。図１９Ａに、映像コンポーネント記述子のデータ構造の一例を示す。図中、『ｖｉｄｅｏ＿ａｓｐｅｃｔ＿ｒａｔｉｏ』パラメータが前記映像信号のアスペクト比に関する情報である。図１９Ｂに、前記『ｖｉｄｅｏ＿ａｓｐｅｃｔ＿ｒａｔｉｏ』パラメータの意味の一例を示す。図示とは異なるアスペクト比を更に割り当てても良い。 [Video signal aspect ratio conversion processing]
The aspect ratio of the video signal in the TV broadcasting service includes “4: 3” used in the conventional SDTV, “16: 9” used in the recent HDTV, and “21: 9” suitable for movie contents. ”, Etc. Information on the aspect ratio of the video signal may be described by a video component descriptor in the broadcasting system of the present embodiment. FIG. 19A shows an example of the data structure of the video component descriptor. In the figure, the “video_aspect_ratio” parameter is information relating to the aspect ratio of the video signal. FIG. 19B shows an example of the meaning of the “video_aspect_ratio” parameter. An aspect ratio different from that shown may be further assigned.
　一方、前記テレビ放送サービスを受信可能なテレビ受信機（本実施例の放送受信装置１００、等）の表示部のアスペクト比は『１６：９』であることが一般的である。即ち、アスペクト比が『４：３』や『２１：９』の映像コンテンツを一般的なテレビ受信機に表示する際には、アスペクト比変換処理を行って良い。 On the other hand, the aspect ratio of the display unit of a television receiver (such as the broadcast receiving device 100 of this embodiment) that can receive the television broadcast service is generally “16: 9”. That is, when displaying video content with an aspect ratio of “4: 3” or “21: 9” on a general television receiver, an aspect ratio conversion process may be performed.
　前記アスペクト比変換処理を行うか否かは、放送受信装置１００のモニタ部１６２の仕様と映像コンポーネント記述子の『ｖｉｄｅｏ＿ａｓｐｅｃｔ＿ｒａｔｉｏ』パラメータとを比較することにより、判断すれば良い。例えば、放送受信装置１００のモニタ部１６２のアスペクト比が『１６：９』（横３８４０画素×縦２１６０画素、等）の場合、前記『ｖｉｄｅｏ＿ａｓｐｅｃｔ＿ｒａｔｉｏ』パラメータの値が『０』や『２』や『３』ならばアスペクト比変換処理を行わないようにし、『１』や『５』ならばアスペクト比変換処理を行うようにすれば良い。また、例えば、放送受信装置１００のモニタ部１６２のアスペクト比が『２１：９』（横５０４０画素×縦２１６０画素、等）の場合、前記『ｖｉｄｅｏ＿ａｓｐｅｃｔ＿ｒａｔｉｏ』パラメータの値が『０』や『５』ならばアスペクト比変換処理を行わないようにし、『１』や『２』や『３』ならばアスペクト比変換処理を行うようにすれば良い。 Whether or not to perform the aspect ratio conversion process may be determined by comparing the specification of the monitor unit 162 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 with the “video_aspect_ratio” parameter of the video component descriptor. For example, when the aspect ratio of the monitor unit 162 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is “16: 9” (3840 pixels × 2160 pixels, etc.), the value of the “video_aspect_ratio” parameter is “0”, “2”, “ If “3”, the aspect ratio conversion process is not performed, and if “1” or “5”, the aspect ratio conversion process is performed. For example, when the aspect ratio of the monitor unit 162 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is “21: 9” (width 5040 pixels × length 2160 pixels, etc.), the value of the “video_aspect_ratio” parameter is “0” or “5”. Then, the aspect ratio conversion process is not performed, and if “1”, “2”, or “3”, the aspect ratio conversion process may be performed.
　放送受信装置１００のモニタ部１６２のアスペクト比が『１６：９』で前記『ｖｉｄｅｏ＿ａｓｐｅｃｔ＿ｒａｔｉｏ』パラメータの値が『５』の場合のアスペクト比変換処理の一例を図１９Ｃおよび図１９Ｄに示す。アスペクト比『２１：９』の映像コンテンツをアスペクト比『１６：９』のモニタ部１６２に表示する場合、アスペクト比『２１：９』の映像コンテンツの上下に黒帯を追加することにより、アスペクト比を『１６：９』に変換しても良い（図中の表示Ａ）。このようにすれば、オリジナルの映像コンテンツの全域を歪なく表示することが可能となる。また、アスペクト比『２１：９』の映像コンテンツの中央部分のみを切り出してモニタ部１６２に表示するようにしても良い（図中の表示Ｂ）。このようにすれば、オリジナルの映像コンテンツの主要部分を大きく表示することが可能となる。また、アスペクト比『２１：９』の映像コンテンツの上下に黒帯を少し追加して、更に中央部分を切り出すようにしても良い（図中の表示Ｃ）。このようにすれば、オリジナルの映像コンテンツの大部分を大きく表示することが可能となる。また、アスペクト比『２１：９』の映像コンテンツの左右端を圧縮して全域を表示するようにしても良い（図中の表示Ｄ）。このようにすれば、オリジナルの映像コンテンツの全域を大きく、更に主要部分は歪なく表示することが可能となる。また、アスペクト比『２１：９』の映像コンテンツの上下に黒帯を少し追加して、更に左右端を圧縮して全域を表示するようにしても良い（図中の表示Ｅ）。このようにすれば、オリジナルの映像コンテンツの全域を大きく、更に左右端の歪を少なく表示することが可能となる。 An example of the aspect ratio conversion process when the aspect ratio of the monitor unit 162 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is “16: 9” and the value of the “video_aspect_ratio” parameter is “5” is shown in FIGS. 19C and 19D. When video content having an aspect ratio of “21: 9” is displayed on the monitor unit 162 having an aspect ratio of “16: 9”, by adding black bands above and below the video content having an aspect ratio of “21: 9”, the aspect ratio May be converted to “16: 9” (display A in the figure). In this way, the entire area of the original video content can be displayed without distortion. Alternatively, only the central portion of the video content having the aspect ratio “21: 9” may be cut out and displayed on the monitor unit 162 (display B in the figure). In this way, it is possible to display a large part of the original video content. Further, a little black band may be added to the top and bottom of the video content having the aspect ratio “21: 9” to further cut out the center portion (display C in the figure). In this way, it is possible to display a large portion of the original video content. Further, the left and right ends of the video content having the aspect ratio “21: 9” may be compressed to display the entire area (display D in the figure). In this way, the entire area of the original video content can be enlarged and the main part can be displayed without distortion. Further, a little black band may be added to the top and bottom of the video content having the aspect ratio “21: 9”, and the entire area may be displayed by further compressing the left and right ends (display E in the figure). In this way, the entire area of the original video content can be enlarged and displayed with less distortion at the left and right ends.
　アスペクト比変換処理をどのように行うかは、メニュー等の設定によりユーザが選択可能として良い。あるいは、リモコン等の所定のキーの押下により切り換えられるようにしても良い。なお、前述のアスペクト比『２１：９』は、いわゆるシネマスコープの『２．３５：１』等、概略で『２１：９』となる縦横比率のものを含むものとする。他のアスペクト比の数値に関しても同様である。 ¡How the aspect ratio conversion process is performed may be selectable by the user by setting the menu or the like. Alternatively, it may be switched by pressing a predetermined key on a remote controller or the like. Note that the aspect ratio “21: 9” includes an aspect ratio of approximately “21: 9” such as a so-called cinemascope “2.35: 1”. The same applies to other aspect ratio values.
　［放送受信装置のＥＰＧ表示］
　本実施例の放送システムでは、放送ネットワークを構成する各サービスに含まれるイベント（いわゆる番組）に関する時系列情報をＭＨ－ＥＩＴで伝送するものとする。図７Ｅに示したＭＨ－ＥＩＴは、テーブルＩＤ（図中の『ｔａｌｂｅ＿ｉｄ』パラメータに対応）により２つのクラスに識別され、自ＴＬＶストリームの現在／次のイベントの情報と自ＴＬＶストリームの各イベントのスケジュール情報を示すことが可能であるものとする。本実施例の放送受信装置１００は、前記ＭＨ－ＥＩＴ等を参照してサービスＩＤ（図中の『ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅ＿ｉｄ』パラメータに対応）による識別を行うことにより、各イベントの開始時間や放送時間等の情報を取得してＥＰＧ画面を作成することが可能であり、前記作成したＥＰＧを映像合成部１６１で映像情報等に重畳してモニタ部１６２に表示することが可能であるものとする。 [EPG display of broadcast receiver]
In the broadcasting system of the present embodiment, it is assumed that time-series information regarding events (so-called programs) included in each service constituting the broadcasting network is transmitted by MH-EIT. The MH-EIT shown in FIG. 7E is identified into two classes by the table ID (corresponding to the “talbe_id” parameter in the figure), and information on the current / next event of the own TLV stream and each event of the own TLV stream. It is possible to show schedule information. The broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment refers to the MH-EIT or the like, and performs identification by service ID (corresponding to the “service_id” parameter in the figure), so that information such as the start time and broadcast time of each event is obtained. The EPG screen can be created by acquiring the EPG, and the created EPG can be displayed on the monitor unit 162 by superimposing the created EPG on the video information or the like by the video composition unit 161.
　図２０Ａは、本実施例の放送受信装置１００におけるＥＰＧ画面の一例を示す図である。ＥＰＧ画面１６２ａは、縦軸を時間表示、横軸をサービスＩＤ（チャンネル）表示としたマトリクス形状で、各時間帯に各チャンネルで放送される放送番組の詳細情報を表示するものとする。また、各放送番組の詳細情報１６２ａ１は、主としてタイトル領域１６２ａ２と詳細説明領域１６２ａ３で構成される。各放送番組の詳細情報１６２ａ１には、ＭＨ－短形式イベント記述子やＭＨ－拡張形式イベント記述子に記述されて配信された番組情報等が表示されて良い。前記各記述子に記述された番組情報等の容量が多い場合には、通常時には省略表示を行い、図示を省略したリモコンの操作による選択時にはポップアップ等で全番組情報を表示するようにしても良い。あるいは、選択時には前記各記述子に記述された番組情報等を連携動作中の携帯情報端末７００に送信し、表示部７４１に表示させるように携帯情報端末７００に指示しても良い。 FIG. 20A is a diagram illustrating an example of an EPG screen in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment. The EPG screen 162a has a matrix shape with the vertical axis representing time and the horizontal axis representing service ID (channel), and displays detailed information of broadcast programs broadcast on each channel in each time slot. The detailed information 162a1 of each broadcast program is mainly composed of a title area 162a2 and a detailed description area 162a3. The detailed information 162a1 of each broadcast program may display program information described in the MH-short format event descriptor or the MH-extended event descriptor and distributed. When there is a large amount of program information or the like described in each of the descriptors, abbreviated display is normally performed, and all program information may be displayed by a pop-up or the like when selection is performed by operating a remote controller (not shown). . Alternatively, at the time of selection, the program information described in each descriptor may be transmitted to the portable information terminal 700 that is operating in cooperation, and the portable information terminal 700 may be instructed to be displayed on the display unit 741.
　各放送番組の詳細情報１６２ａ１のタイトル領域１６２ａ２には、前記放送番組の番組タイトルおよび前記放送番組の属性を表す記号等を表示する。前記放送番組の属性を表す記号等とは、例えば、新番組であることを示す記号／文字や、再放送番組であることを示す記号／文字、等である。あるいは、放送サービスによるデータ放送に対応していることを意味する『ｄａｔａ』を記号化した印等でも良い。また、前記放送番組に関連するコンテンツやアプリケーション等をネットワーク上から取得可能であることを意味する『ＮｅｔＷｏｒｋ』を記号化した印１６２ａ４等であっても良い。また、詳細情報１６２ａ１の背景色を他と差別化することにより、あるいは、太枠で詳細情報１６２ａ１の表示領域を囲むことにより、前記放送番組の属性を表す記号等を代替しても良い。 In the title area 162a2 of the detailed information 162a1 of each broadcast program, the program title of the broadcast program, symbols representing the attributes of the broadcast program, and the like are displayed. The symbol or the like indicating the attribute of the broadcast program is, for example, a symbol / character indicating a new program, a symbol / character indicating a re-broadcast program, or the like. Alternatively, it may be a sign or the like that symbolizes “data” meaning that it corresponds to data broadcasting by a broadcasting service. Moreover, the mark 162a4 etc. which symbolized "NetWork" which means that the content, application, etc. relevant to the said broadcast program are acquirable from a network may be sufficient. Further, by distinguishing the background color of the detailed information 162a1 from others, or by surrounding the display area of the detailed information 162a1 with a thick frame, symbols or the like representing the attributes of the broadcast program may be substituted.
　なお、本実施例の放送システムにおける各制御情報（メッセージ、テーブル、記述子、等）が、前記放送番組に関連するコンテンツやアプリケーション等がネットワーク上から取得可能であることを示している場合であっても、放送受信装置１００のＬＡＮ通信部１２１にＬＡＮケーブルが接続されていない等、ネットワーク上の各サーバ装置へのアクセスができない状態である場合には、前記『ＮｅｔＷｏｒｋ』を記号化した印１６２ａ４等を表示しないように制御しても良い。 This is a case where each control information (message, table, descriptor, etc.) in the broadcasting system of the present embodiment indicates that content, application, etc. related to the broadcast program can be acquired from the network. However, if the LAN communication unit 121 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is not connected to the LAN communication unit 121 and cannot access each server apparatus on the network, the mark 162a4 symbolized “NetWork” is used. Etc. may be controlled so as not to be displayed.
　また、前記放送番組がインターネット２００を介して配信される配信番組であり、放送波のみからの取得ができない場合であって、更に、前述と同様に、放送受信装置１００がネットワーク上の各サーバ装置へアクセスできない状態である場合等には、図２０Ｂに示すように、ＥＰＧ画面１６２ｂ上に表示される詳細情報１６２ｂ１の部分をグレーアウトするように制御しても良い。即ち、視聴できない配信番組の詳細情報は表示しないように制御する。また、詳細情報１６２ｂ１の背景色を他と差別化することにより、前記グレーアウト処理の代替としても良い。あるいは、前記配信番組の詳細説明領域１６２ａ３に、『この番組は視聴できません』等のメッセージを表示するようにしても良い。図示を省略したリモコンの操作により詳細情報１６２ｂ１を選択した場合に、放送受信装置１００がネットワーク上の各サーバ装置へアクセスできない状態である旨を、あるいは、詳細情報１６２ｂ１に関連付けられた配信番組を視聴できない旨を、ポップアップ等によりユーザに報知するようにしても良い。 In addition, the broadcast program is a distribution program distributed via the Internet 200 and cannot be obtained only from the broadcast wave. Further, as described above, the broadcast receiving device 100 is connected to each server device on the network. For example, when it is in an inaccessible state, the detailed information 162b1 displayed on the EPG screen 162b may be grayed out as shown in FIG. 20B. That is, control is performed so as not to display the detailed information of the distribution program that cannot be viewed. Further, the background color of the detailed information 162b1 may be differentiated from the others to replace the grayout process. Alternatively, a message such as “This program cannot be viewed” may be displayed in the detailed explanation area 162a3 of the distributed program. When the detailed information 162b1 is selected by operating a remote controller (not shown), the broadcast receiving device 100 is in a state where it cannot access each server device on the network, or a distribution program associated with the detailed information 162b1 is viewed. You may make it alert | report to a user by a popup etc. that it cannot do.
　前述の各制御により、放送受信装置１００は、ネットワーク接続状況に応じて、ユーザに対してより違和感のない形式で各放送番組の番組情報を提供することが可能となる。 According to each control described above, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can provide program information of each broadcast program in a format that is less uncomfortable to the user according to the network connection status.
　図２０Ｃは、本実施例の放送受信装置１００におけるＥＰＧ画面の別の一例を示す図である。図中、『Ｍ１テレビ』、『Ｍ２放送』、『Ｍ３チャンネル』、『Ｍ４ＴＶ』、『テレビＭ５』等は、各チャンネルの放送局名称であり、特に、『Ｍ２放送』局は、放送波により配信される放送番組とインターネット２００を介して配信される配信番組（図中の『ネット放送』で示される枠の情報１６２ｃ１）を同時に提供しているものとする。 FIG. 20C is a diagram illustrating another example of the EPG screen in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment. In the figure, “M1 TV”, “M2 Broadcast”, “M3 Channel”, “M4TV”, “TV M5”, etc. are broadcast station names of each channel. It is assumed that a broadcast program to be distributed and a distribution program distributed via the Internet 200 (frame information 162c1 indicated by “net broadcast” in the figure) are provided simultaneously.
　同図に示したように、インターネット２００を介して配信する配信番組のみを有するチャンネルがある場合、通常時は同図（Ａ）のＥＰＧ画面１６２ｃに示すように（情報１６２ｃ１を含む）全てのチャンネルの情報を表示するように制御する。一方、放送受信装置１００がネットワーク上の各サーバ装置へアクセスできない状態である場合等には、同図（Ｂ）のＥＰＧ画面１６２ｄに示すように、インターネット２００を介して配信する配信番組のみを有する『Ｍ２放送（ネット放送）』のチャンネルの情報（同図（Ａ）における情報１６２ｃ１）を表示しないように制御しても良い。 As shown in the figure, when there is a channel having only a distribution program distributed via the Internet 200, all channels (including information 162c1) are normally displayed as shown in the EPG screen 162c of FIG. Control to display the information. On the other hand, when the broadcast receiving device 100 cannot access each server device on the network, as shown in the EPG screen 162d of FIG. Control may be performed so as not to display the channel information (information 162c1 in FIG. 1A) of “M2 broadcast (net broadcast)”.
　前述の各制御により、放送受信装置１００のユーザは、自分の視聴できないチャンネルの情報の確認を不要とすることが可能となる。 The above-described controls make it possible for the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 to make it unnecessary to check information on channels that he / she cannot view.
　［放送受信装置の緊急警報放送表示］
　本実施例の放送受信装置１００は、ＴＬＶストリームを含む伝送データに含まれるＴＭＣＣ信号の緊急警報放送起動制御信号ビットが『０』から『１』になった場合に、緊急警報放送の受信処理を行うことが可能であるものとする。 [Emergency warning broadcast display of broadcast receiver]
The broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment performs emergency alert broadcast reception processing when the emergency alert broadcast activation control signal bit of the TMCC signal included in the transmission data including the TLV stream changes from “0” to “1”. It shall be possible to do.
　前記緊急警報放送は、専用のチャンネル（サービスＩＤ）の放送番組として提供されても良いし、全画面表示のアプリケーションとして提供されても良いし、文字情報として文字スーパーで提供されても良い。前記緊急警報放送が文字情報として文字スーパーで提供されている場合、緊急警報放送の受信直前の放送受信装置１００の状態に関わらず、前記文字スーパーの文字情報を表示することが好ましい。即ち、図２１に示すように、ユーザが通常の放送番組を視聴し、モニタ部１６２に前記放送番組の番組画面１６２ｅが表示されている状態で緊急警報放送を受信した場合、前記緊急警報放送による文字情報１６２ｅ１を番組画面１６２ｅに重畳して表示するようにする。同様に、ユーザがＥＰＧ画面の表示を指示し、モニタ部１６２にＥＰＧ画面１６２ｆが表示されている状態で緊急警報放送を受信した場合、前記緊急警報放送による文字情報１６２ｆ１をＥＰＧ画面１６２ｆに重畳して表示するように制御する。 The emergency alert broadcast may be provided as a broadcast program of a dedicated channel (service ID), may be provided as a full-screen display application, or may be provided at a character supermarket as character information. When the emergency alert broadcast is provided as text information at the text superimpose, it is preferable to display the text information of the text supermarket regardless of the state of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 immediately before receiving the emergency alert broadcast. That is, as shown in FIG. 21, when a user views a normal broadcast program and receives an emergency alert broadcast in a state where the program screen 162e of the broadcast program is displayed on the monitor unit 162, the emergency alert broadcast The character information 162e1 is displayed superimposed on the program screen 162e. Similarly, when the user gives an instruction to display the EPG screen and the emergency warning broadcast is received while the EPG screen 162f is displayed on the monitor unit 162, the character information 162f1 by the emergency warning broadcast is superimposed on the EPG screen 162f. Control to display.
　前述の制御により、本実施例の放送受信装置１００においては、ユーザがＥＰＧ画面や各種設定画面、録画番組一覧画面、インターネットブラウザ等を選択して表示させている場合であっても、緊急警報放送を受信した際には、前記緊急警報放送に基づく重要な文字情報の見逃しを回避することが可能となる。なお、この制御は、緊急警報放送によらない通常の文字スーパーの文字情報に対して行われても良い。 By the above-described control, in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, even when the user selects and displays an EPG screen, various setting screens, a recorded program list screen, an Internet browser, etc., an emergency warning broadcast Is received, it is possible to avoid overlooking important text information based on the emergency alert broadcast. Note that this control may be performed on character information of a normal character supermarket that is not based on emergency alert broadcasting.
　また、前記緊急警報放送が専用のチャンネル（サービスＩＤ）の放送番組として提供される場合、現在視聴している番組のチャンネル（サービスＩＤ）に関わらず、前記緊急警報放送のチャンネル（サービスＩＤ）を自動選局するようにしても良い。また、前記緊急警報放送が専用のチャンネル（サービスＩＤ）の放送番組として提供される場合やアプリケーションとして提供される場合、連携機能実行部１１０３の制御により、連携する外部の携帯端末機器（本実施例においては、携帯情報端末７００等）に前記緊急警報放送の放送番組やアプリケーションを配信するようにしても良い。 Further, when the emergency alert broadcast is provided as a broadcast program of a dedicated channel (service ID), the emergency alert broadcast channel (service ID) is set regardless of the channel (service ID) of the currently viewed program. Automatic tuning may be performed. Further, when the emergency alert broadcast is provided as a broadcast program of a dedicated channel (service ID) or as an application, an external portable terminal device (in this embodiment) is linked under the control of the linkage function execution unit 1103. , The emergency warning broadcast program or application may be distributed to the portable information terminal 700 or the like.
　また、前記緊急警報放送が配信された際に放送受信装置１００の電源がオンでない場合、自動的に放送受信装置１００の電源をオンするように制御を行っても良い。あるいは、放送受信装置１００との連携動作の履歴がある携帯情報端末７００に対して緊急警報放送が開始された旨の通知を送信するように制御を行っても良い。 Also, when the broadcast receiving device 100 is not turned on when the emergency alert broadcast is delivered, the broadcast receiving device 100 may be automatically turned on. Alternatively, control may be performed so as to transmit a notification that emergency warning broadcasting has started to the portable information terminal 700 that has a history of cooperation with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
　前述の制御により、本実施例の放送受信装置１００においては、前記緊急警報放送に基づく重要な放送番組やアプリケーションの映像の表示の見逃しを回避することが可能となる。 By the above-described control, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment can avoid overlooking display of important broadcast programs and application images based on the emergency warning broadcast.
　［表示制御の例外処理］
　本実施例の放送受信装置１００は、同一のパッケージを構成する各データのうち、ＴＬＶストリーム以外の経路で伝送されるデータが取得できない場合、例えば、下記の様な例外処理を行っても良い。 [Display control exception handling]
The broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment may perform exception processing as described below, for example, when data transmitted through a route other than the TLV stream cannot be acquired among the data configuring the same package.
　図７Ａを用いて説明した通り、本実施例の放送受信装置１００が対応する放送システムにおいては、ＭＰＴに格納されるロケーション情報（図７Ｃ参照）に基づいて、ＴＬＶストリームから取得するデータとＴＬＶストリーム以外の経路から取得するデータとを同一のパッケージに含めることができる。しかしながら、ロケーション情報が指し示す、ＴＬＶストリーム以外のデータ伝送経路（例えば、通信回線のＩＰｖ４データフローやＩＰｖ６データフロー、放送のＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳなど）で伝送されるデータは、ＴＬＶ／ＭＭＴストリームの受信機能とは別の受信機能で取得するデータある。よって、放送受信装置１００の動作中であっても、これらの伝送経路の受信機能が動作していない状況や、受信機能自体は動作していても前記伝送経路上の中継装置等が動作していない状況や、これらの伝送経路の有線または無線接続がされていない状況や、そもそもこれらの伝送経路を接続できない環境に放送受信装置１００が設置されている状況など、これらの伝送経路からのデータ取得ができない状況もありうる。 As described with reference to FIG. 7A, in the broadcast system supported by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, the data acquired from the TLV stream and the TLV stream based on the location information stored in the MPT (see FIG. 7C). Data acquired from other routes can be included in the same package. However, data transmitted via a data transmission path other than the TLV stream (for example, IPv4 data flow or IPv6 data flow of a communication line, MPEG2-TS of broadcasting, etc.) indicated by the location information has a TLV / MMT stream reception function. Is data acquired by another receiving function. Therefore, even when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is in operation, the reception function of these transmission paths is not operating, or the relay apparatus on the transmission path is operating even though the receiving function itself is operating. Data acquisition from these transmission paths, such as a situation where there is no wired or wireless connection of these transmission paths, or a situation where the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is installed in an environment where these transmission paths cannot be connected in the first place There may be situations where you can't.
　このような状況下で、ＭＰＴに格納されるロケーション情報が、ＴＬＶストリームから取得するデータとＴＬＶストリーム以外の経路から取得するデータとを同一のパッケージに含めるように対応付けることを示しているイベントを受信した場合、本実施例の放送受信装置１００は、以下のような動作を行っても良い。 Under such circumstances, the location information stored in the MPT receives an event indicating that data acquired from the TLV stream and data acquired from a route other than the TLV stream are associated with each other so as to be included in the same package. In this case, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment may perform the following operation.
　例えば、ＬＣＴが、図１７Ｄや図１７Ｅのように、画面内に複数の領域を設定しており、『領域０』にＴＬＶストリームから取得したデータに基づく番組映像を表示し、『領域１』や『領域２』にＴＬＶストリーム以外の伝送経路から取得したデータに基づくコンテンツが表示されるように対応付けられている場合であって、『領域１』や『領域２』に表示すべきＴＬＶストリーム以外の伝送経路のデータが取得できない場合、ＬＣＴが指定する複数領域のレイアウト表示を禁止しても良い。具体的には、当該ＬＣＴを受信しても図１７Ｃに示したデフォルトレイアウト表示の『領域０』にＴＬＶストリームから取得したデータに基づく番組映像を表示した状態のままとし、図１７Ｄや図１７Ｅのような複数領域のレイアウト表示に移行しないようにすれば良い。また、更にこの状態で、デフォルトレイアウトからＬＣＴの示すレイアウトへの変更指示が放送受信装置１００の操作入力部１７０に入力されたとしても、図１７Ｃに示したデフォルトレイアウト表示のままとしたり、その他のデータ放送画面に切り替えるなどして、図１７Ｄや図１７Ｅのような複数領域のレイアウト表示に移行しないようにしても良い。 For example, as shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E, the LCT sets a plurality of areas in the screen, displays a program video based on the data acquired from the TLV stream in “area 0”, and displays “area 1” and When “area 2” is associated with content based on data acquired from a transmission path other than the TLV stream, other than the TLV stream to be displayed in “area 1” or “area 2” If the transmission path data cannot be acquired, the layout display of a plurality of areas designated by the LCT may be prohibited. Specifically, even if the LCT is received, the program video based on the data acquired from the TLV stream is displayed in “area 0” of the default layout display shown in FIG. What is necessary is just not to shift to the layout display of such multiple areas. Further, in this state, even if an instruction to change from the default layout to the layout indicated by the LCT is input to the operation input unit 170 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, the default layout display illustrated in FIG. Switching to a data broadcasting screen may be performed so as not to shift to a layout display of a plurality of areas as shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E.
　また、ＬＣＴが、図１７Ｄや図１７Ｅのように、画面内に複数の領域を設定しており、『領域０』にＴＬＶストリームから取得したデータに基づく番組映像を表示し、『領域１』や『領域２』にＴＬＶストリーム以外の伝送経路で取得したデータに基づくコンテンツが表示されるように対応付けられている場合であって、『領域１』や『領域２』に表示すべきＴＬＶストリーム以外の伝送経路のデータが取得できない場合の別の動作例としては、一旦、ＬＣＴが示す図１７Ｄや図１７Ｅの複数領域の表示枠を表示し、『領域１』や『領域２』については背景色や所定の静止画を表示しておき、所定時間を経過してもＭＰＴのロケーション情報が示すＴＬＶストリーム以外の伝送経路のデータが取得できない場合は、図１７Ｃに示したデフォルトレイアウト表示の状態に戻す表示切り替えを行っても良い。この場合は、図１７Ｃのレイアウトから図１７Ｄや図１７Ｅのレイアウトへの変更時および図１７Ｄや図１７Ｅのレイアウトから図１７Ｃのレイアウトへの変更時も、それぞれのレイアウトの『領域０』にＴＬＶストリームから取得したデータに基づく番組映像が継続して表示されるように動作すれば、ユーザの番組映像視聴自体は継続可能なので好ましい。 Also, as shown in FIG. 17D and FIG. 17E, the LCT sets a plurality of areas in the screen, displays a program video based on the data acquired from the TLV stream in “area 0”, and displays “area 1” and When “area 2” is associated with content based on data acquired through a transmission path other than the TLV stream, other than the TLV stream to be displayed in “area 1” or “area 2” As another example of the operation when the data of the transmission path cannot be acquired, the display frames of the plurality of areas shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E indicated by the LCT are temporarily displayed, and the background colors of “area 1” and “area 2” are displayed. If the data of the transmission path other than the TLV stream indicated by the MPT location information cannot be acquired even after a predetermined time is displayed, the default still picture shown in FIG. 17C is displayed. It may be subjected to a display switching back to the tray-out display of the state. In this case, the TLV stream is also transferred to “area 0” of each layout when the layout of FIG. 17C is changed to the layout of FIG. 17D or 17E and when the layout of FIG. 17D or 17E is changed to the layout of FIG. 17C. If it operates so that the program video based on the data acquired from can be continuously displayed, it is preferable because the user can continue watching the program video.
　また、『領域１』や『領域２』に表示すべきＴＬＶストリーム以外の伝送経路のデータが取得できないことにより、図１７Ｃに示したデフォルトレイアウト表示の『領域０』にＴＬＶストリームから取得したデータに基づく番組映像を表示した状態となっているときに、本実施例の放送受信装置１００の各種通信機能や各種受信機能の動作が開始したり、各種通信機能の通信環境／通信状況や各種受信機能の受信環境／受信状況が変化したことにより、『領域１』や『領域２』に表示すべきＴＬＶストリーム以外の伝送経路のデータが取得できる状況になることもありうる。この場合、本実施例の放送受信装置１００は、ただちに、図１７Ｃに示したデフォルトレイアウト表示から、ＬＣＴが示す図１７Ｄや図１７Ｅに示したような複数領域のレイアウトに切り替えて、『領域０』にＴＬＶストリームから取得したデータに基づく番組映像を表示し、『領域１』や『領域２』にＴＬＶストリーム以外の伝送経路から取得したデータに基づくコンテンツを表示するように切り替えても良い。あるいは、当該レイアウト変更をすぐには行わずに、デフォルトレイアウトからＬＣＴの示すレイアウトへの変更指示が操作入力部１７０から入力されてから当該レイアウト変更を実行しても良い。この場合、レイアウト変更が可能となった旨をＯＳＤ表示等によりユーザに報知するようにすることが好ましい。 In addition, since the data of the transmission path other than the TLV stream to be displayed in “area 1” or “area 2” cannot be acquired, the data acquired from the TLV stream in “area 0” of the default layout display illustrated in FIG. The operation of various communication functions and various reception functions of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment is started when the program video based on the program is displayed, and the communication environment / communication status and various reception functions of the various communication functions are started. As the reception environment / reception status of the network changes, there may be a situation where data on a transmission path other than the TLV stream to be displayed in “area 1” or “area 2” can be acquired. In this case, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment immediately switches from the default layout display shown in FIG. 17C to the layout of a plurality of areas shown in FIG. 17D and FIG. The program video based on the data acquired from the TLV stream may be displayed, and the content based on the data acquired from the transmission path other than the TLV stream may be displayed in “area 1” or “area 2”. Alternatively, the layout change may be executed after an instruction to change from the default layout to the layout indicated by the LCT is input from the operation input unit 170 without performing the layout change immediately. In this case, it is preferable to notify the user by OSD display or the like that the layout can be changed.
　［著作権保護機能］
　本実施例の放送受信装置１００が対応するデジタル放送システムにおいて、ＭＰＴ等にコピー制御情報を含めて伝送することにより、例えば、『無制限にコピー可』（『無制限にコピー可かつ蓄積および出力時に暗号化処理要』と『無制限にコピー可かつ蓄積および出力時に暗号化処理不要』の２種類に分けても良い）、『１世代のみコピー可』、『所定複数回数コピー可』（例えば、９回コピー可＋ムーブ１回可ならいわゆる『ダビング１０』）、『コピー禁止』など、ＭＰＴ等が参照するコンテンツのコピー制御状態を示しても良い。この場合、本実施例の放送受信装置１００は、当該コピー制御情報に応じて、当該コンテンツのストレージ（蓄積）部１１０への蓄積、リムーバブル記録媒体への記録、外部機器への出力、外部機器へのコピー、外部機器へのムーブ処理などを制御するように構成しても良い。 [Copyright protection function]
In the digital broadcasting system supported by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment, by transmitting the MPT or the like including the copy control information, for example, “unlimited copying is possible” (“unlimited copying is possible and encryption is performed during storage and output. Can be divided into two types: “copying required without limitation and encryption processing not required during storage and output”), “copying for only one generation”, “copying a predetermined number of times” (for example, 9 times) The copy control state of the content referred to by the MPT or the like may be indicated, such as “copy possible + movable once”, so-called “dubbing 10”) or “copy prohibited”. In this case, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment stores the content in the storage (storage) unit 110, records it on a removable recording medium, outputs it to an external device, and sends it to an external device according to the copy control information. It may be configured to control copying, moving processing to an external device, and the like.
　なお、蓄積処理の対象は、放送受信装置１００内部のストレージ（蓄積）部１１０のみならず、放送受信装置１００のみで再生可能となるような暗号化処理等の保護処理を施したリムーバブル記録媒体や外部機器等を含んでも良い。具体的には、例えば、拡張インタフェース部１２４に接続されたＨＤＤ等の外付けの記録装置などのうち、放送受信装置１００のみで記録再生可能な状態にしたものなどが含まれる。 The target of the accumulation process is not only the storage (accumulation) unit 110 inside the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 but also a removable recording medium subjected to a protection process such as an encryption process that can be reproduced only by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, An external device etc. may be included. Specifically, for example, an external recording device such as an HDD connected to the extension interface unit 124 that can be recorded and reproduced only by the broadcast receiving device 100 is included.
　＜コンテンツコピー制御＞
　当該コピー制御情報に基づくコンテンツコピー制御の処理の具体例を以下に説明する。 <Content copy control>
A specific example of content copy control processing based on the copy control information will be described below.
　まず、ＭＰＴ等に含まれるコピー制御情報が『無制限にコピー可』を示す場合は、本実施例の放送受信装置１００は、ストレージ（蓄積）部１１０への蓄積、リムーバブル記録媒体への記録、外部機器への出力、外部機器へのコピー、外部機器へのムーブ処理等を制限なしに行って構わない。但し、前記コピー制御情報に基づく制御が『無制限にコピー可かつ蓄積および出力時に暗号化処理要』と『無制限にコピー可かつ蓄積および出力時に暗号化処理不要』とに分かれている場合であって、『無制限にコピー可かつ蓄積および出力時に暗号化処理要』を示す場合には、ストレージ（蓄積）部１１０への蓄積、リムーバブル記録媒体への記録、外部機器への出力、外部機器へのコピー、外部機器へのムーブ処理等を制限なしに行うことができるが、何れも暗号化処理を施す必要がある。 First, when the copy control information included in the MPT or the like indicates “unlimited copying is possible”, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment accumulates in the storage (accumulation) unit 110, records in a removable recording medium, and externally. The output to the device, the copy to the external device, the move process to the external device, etc. may be performed without limitation. However, the control based on the copy control information is divided into “unlimited copy is possible and encryption processing is required for storage and output” and “unlimited copy is possible and encryption processing is not required for storage and output”. , When “Unlimited copy is possible and encryption is required during storage and output”, storage in the storage (storage) unit 110, recording on a removable recording medium, output to an external device, copy to an external device The move processing to the external device can be performed without limitation, but all of them need to be encrypted.
　また、ＭＰＴ等に含まれるコピー制御情報が『１世代のみコピー可』を示す場合は、本実施例の放送受信装置１００は、ストレージ（蓄積）部１１０への暗号化しての蓄積や、放送受信装置１００のみで再生可能となるような暗号化処理等の保護処理を施したリムーバブル記録媒体への記録を可能として良い。また、蓄積後のコンテンツを外部機器へ視聴用に出力する場合には、『コピー禁止』のコピー制御情報とともに暗号化して出力することとする。また、外部機器へのいわゆるムーブ処理（外部機器へコンテンツをコピーし、放送受信装置１００のストレージ（蓄積）部１１０等のコンテンツは消去処理などにより再生不能化する処理）は可能とする。 When the copy control information included in the MPT or the like indicates “copying is possible for only one generation”, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment stores encrypted data in the storage (storage) unit 110 or receives broadcast data. Recording on a removable recording medium that has been subjected to protection processing such as encryption processing that can be reproduced only by the apparatus 100 may be possible. In addition, when the stored content is output to an external device for viewing, the content is encrypted and output together with copy control information of “copy prohibited”. In addition, a so-called move process to an external device (a process of copying content to the external device and making the content in the storage (storage) unit 110 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 unplayable by an erasure process or the like) is possible.
　また、ＭＰＴ等に含まれるコピー制御情報が『所定複数回数コピー可』を示す場合は、本実施例の放送受信装置１００は、ストレージ（蓄積）部１１０へ暗号化して蓄積する処理や、放送受信装置１００のみで再生可能となるような暗号化処理等の保護処理を施したリムーバブル記録媒体への記録する処理を可能として良い。また、蓄積後のコンテンツを外部機器へ視聴用に出力する場合には、『コピー禁止』のコピー制御情報とともに暗号化して出力することとする。また、外部機器への予め定められた所定回数のコピーとムーブ処理を可能として良い。いわゆる『ダビング１０』規定の場合は、外部機器への９回のコピーと１回のムーブ処理を行うことが可能である。 When the copy control information included in the MPT or the like indicates “copying is allowed a predetermined number of times”, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment performs processing for encrypting and storing in the storage (storage) unit 110, Processing for recording on a removable recording medium subjected to protection processing such as encryption processing that can be reproduced only by the apparatus 100 may be possible. In addition, when the stored content is output to an external device for viewing, the content is encrypted and output together with copy control information of “copy prohibited”. Further, a predetermined number of times of copying and moving to an external device may be possible. In the case of so-called “dubbing 10”, it is possible to perform nine copies to an external device and one move process.
　また、ＭＰＴ等に含まれるコピー制御情報が『コピー禁止』を示す場合は、本実施例の放送受信装置１００は、ストレージ（蓄積）部１１０等への蓄積（コピー）を禁止する。但し、放送受信装置１００は、予め定められた所定時間または放送信号に含まれる制御情報（例えば、ＭＨ－Ｅｘｐｉｒｅ記述子やコンテンツ利用制御記述子等による）により指定される所定時間のみ、ストレージ（蓄積）部１１０等への保持を可能とする『一時蓄積』モードを有するように構成して良い。この場合には、放送受信装置１００は、ＭＰＴ等に含まれるコピー制御情報が『コピー禁止』を示す場合であっても、ストレージ（蓄積）部１１０等への当該コンテンツの一時的な保持を可能とする。ＭＰＴ等に含まれるコピー制御情報が『コピー禁止』の当該コンテンツを外部機器へ視聴用として出力する場合には、『コピー禁止』のコピー制御情報とともに暗号化して出力することとする。 Further, when the copy control information included in the MPT or the like indicates “copy prohibited”, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment prohibits accumulation (copying) in the storage (accumulation) unit 110 or the like. However, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 stores (accumulates) only for a predetermined time determined in advance or for a predetermined time specified by control information included in the broadcast signal (for example, according to an MH-Expire descriptor, a content use control descriptor, etc.). ) It may be configured to have a “temporary storage” mode that enables holding in the unit 110 or the like. In this case, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can temporarily hold the content in the storage (storage) unit 110 or the like even when the copy control information included in the MPT or the like indicates “copy prohibited”. And When the content whose copy control information included in MPT or the like is “copy prohibited” is output to an external device for viewing, the content is encrypted and output together with the copy control information “copy prohibited”.
　なお、前述の外部機器への視聴用の出力は、本実施例の放送受信装置１００の映像出力部１６３と音声出力部１６６、あるいは、デジタルＩ／Ｆ部１２５やＬＡＮ通信部１２１などを介して行えば良い。前述の外部機器へのコピーまたはムーブ処理は、デジタルＩ／Ｆ部１２５やＬＡＮ通信部１２１などを介して行えば良い。 Note that the output for viewing to the external device described above is transmitted via the video output unit 163 and the audio output unit 166 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, the digital I / F unit 125, the LAN communication unit 121, or the like. Just do it. The copying or moving process to the external device described above may be performed via the digital I / F unit 125, the LAN communication unit 121, or the like.
　図２２Ａに、本実施例の放送システムにおけるコンテンツコピー制御記述子のデータ構造の一例を示す。図中の『ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ＿ｒｅｃｏｒｄｉｎｇ＿ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ＿ｄａｔａ』パラメータがデジタルコピー制御情報であり、コンテンツのコピー世代を制御する情報を示すものとする。また、図２２Ｂに前記デジタルコピー制御情報のパラメータ値とその意味の一例を示す。例えば、前記パラメータが『００』の場合には『無制限にコピー可』を示し、前記パラメータが『０１』の場合には事業者による定義が可能であり、前記パラメータが『１０』の場合には『１世代のみコピー可』を示し、前記パラメータが『１１』の場合には『コピー禁止』を示すものとする。また、図２３に、本実施例の放送システムにおけるコンテンツ利用制御記述子のデータ構造の一例を示す。図中の『ｃｏｐｙ＿ｒｅｓｔｒｉｃｔｉｏｎ＿ｍｏｄｅ』パラメータがコピー制限モードであり、個数制限コピーが可能か否かを示すものとする。 FIG. 22A shows an example of the data structure of the content copy control descriptor in the broadcasting system of the present embodiment. The “digital_recording_control_data” parameter in the figure is digital copy control information, and indicates information for controlling the copy generation of the content. FIG. 22B shows an example of parameter values of the digital copy control information and their meanings. For example, when the parameter is “00”, it indicates “unlimited copying is possible”, when the parameter is “01”, definition by the operator is possible, and when the parameter is “10” “Copying only one generation” is indicated, and when the parameter is “11”, “copy prohibited” is indicated. FIG. 23 shows an example of the data structure of the content usage control descriptor in the broadcasting system of this embodiment. It is assumed that the “copy_restriction_mode” parameter in the figure is the copy restriction mode and indicates whether or not the number-limited copy is possible.
　本実施例の放送受信装置１００においては、前記デジタルコピー制御情報が『０１』の場合に予め放送事業者によって定められた所定回数のコピーが可能な蓄積処理を実行可能であるものとする。あるいは、前記デジタルコピー制御情報が『１１』ではなくかつ前記コピー制限モードが個数制限コピー可を示している場合に予め放送事業者によって定められた所定回数のコピーが可能な蓄積処理を実行可能としても良い。または、この場合、デジタルコンテンツ利用記述子の『ｒｅｓｅｒｖｅｄ＿ｆｕｔｕｒｅ＿ｕｓｅ』パラメータの一部または全部を用いる等によりコンテンツ毎のコピー可能回数を指定しても良い。 In the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, it is assumed that when the digital copy control information is “01”, it is possible to execute a storage process that allows a predetermined number of copies to be made by a broadcaster in advance. Alternatively, when the digital copy control information is not “11” and the copy restriction mode indicates that the number-restricted copy is permitted, it is possible to execute a storage process that allows a predetermined number of copies to be made in advance determined by the broadcaster Also good. Alternatively, in this case, the number of copies that can be made for each content may be specified by using a part or all of the “reserved_future_use” parameter of the digital content usage descriptor.
　以上の処理により、本実施例の放送受信装置１００は、前述の『所定複数回数コピー可』のコンテンツコピー制御を実現することが可能となる。 Through the above processing, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment can realize the content copy control of “copying a predetermined number of times” described above.
　また、図２３に示したコンテンツ利用制御記述子における『ｒｅｔｅｎｔｉｏｎ＿ｍｏｄｅ』パラメータが一時蓄積制御ビットであり、前記デジタルコピー制御情報が『コピー禁止』を示している場合に対象コンテンツの一時的な蓄積を許容するか否かを示すものである。また、『ｒｅｔｅｎｔｉｏｎ＿ｓｔａｔｅ』パラメータが一時蓄積許容時間であり、前記一時蓄積許容ビットが対象コンテンツの一時的な蓄積の許容をしている場合の一時蓄積許容時間を示すものである。 Further, when the “retention_mode” parameter in the content usage control descriptor shown in FIG. 23 is a temporary storage control bit and the digital copy control information indicates “copy prohibited”, temporary storage of the target content is permitted. It indicates whether or not to do. Further, the “retention_state” parameter is a temporary storage allowable time, and the temporary storage allowable bit indicates a temporary storage allowable time when the target content is temporarily stored.
　本実施例の放送受信装置１００においては、前記一時蓄積制御ビットおよび一時蓄積許容時間の各情報を参照することにより、各コンテンツのデジタルコピー制御情報が『コピー禁止』を示している場合の一時的な蓄積の可否およびその蓄積時間を制御することが可能となる。 In the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment, the temporary copy when the digital copy control information of each content indicates “copy prohibited” by referring to the information of the temporary storage control bit and the temporary storage allowable time. It is possible to control whether or not the data can be stored and its storage time.
　以上説明した処理によれば、コンテンツと対応付けられたコピー制御情報に応じて、適切なコンテンツ保護を実現することができる。 According to the processing described above, appropriate content protection can be realized according to the copy control information associated with the content.
　＜コンテンツ出力制御＞
　次に、コンテンツの外部機器への出力制御の処理の具体例を以下に説明する。 <Content output control>
Next, a specific example of processing for controlling output of content to an external device will be described below.
　図２３に示したコンテンツ利用制御記述子において、『ｉｍａｇｅ＿ｃｏｎｓｔｒａｉｎｔ＿ｔｏｋｅｎ』パラメータは解像度制限ビットであり、コンテンツを外部機器に出力する際に画質制限が必要か否かを示すものである。前記解像度制限ビットが画質制限が必要であることを示している場合、本実施例の放送受信装置１００は、対象コンテンツを外部機器に出力する際に前記対象コンテンツの画質制限を行うものとする。なお、ストレージ（蓄積）部１１０等への蓄積を行う際には前記画質制限は必要ないものとして良い。前記画質制限は、例えば、受信した（あるいは、蓄積した）ＵＨＤ（７６８０画素×４３２０画素）映像コンテンツをＳＨＤ（３８４０画素×２１６０画素）映像に変換して出力する、あるいは、ＨＤ（１９２０画素×１０８０画素）映像をＳＤ（６４０画素×４８０画素）映像に変換して出力する、等である。なお、対象コンテンツの画質制限をどの程度まで行うか、即ち、画質制限後の画質をどの解像度にするかは、デジタルコンテンツ利用記述子の『ｒｅｓｅｒｖｅｄ＿ｆｕｔｕｒｅ＿ｕｓｅ』パラメータの一部または全部を用いる等により指定するようにしても良い。 In the content usage control descriptor shown in FIG. 23, the “image_constraint_token” parameter is a resolution restriction bit, and indicates whether or not image quality restriction is necessary when outputting content to an external device. When the resolution restriction bit indicates that image quality restriction is necessary, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment performs image quality restriction on the target content when outputting the target content to an external device. It should be noted that the image quality restriction is not necessary when storing in the storage (storage) unit 110 or the like. The image quality limitation is, for example, converted from received (or accumulated) UHD (7680 pixels × 4320 pixels) video content to SHD (3840 pixels × 2160 pixels) video, or output HD (1920 pixels × 1080). Pixel) video is converted into SD (640 pixels × 480 pixels) video and output, and so on. It should be noted that to what extent the image quality of the target content is restricted, that is, to which resolution the image quality after the image quality restriction is to be specified is specified by using a part or all of the “reserved_future_use” parameter of the digital content usage descriptor. You may do it.
　前述と同様に、例えば『ｒｅｓｅｒｖｅｄ＿ｆｕｔｕｒｅ＿ｕｓｅ』パラメータの一部または全部を用いてフレームレート制限ビットや画素分解能制限ビットを用意し、コンテンツを外部機器に出力する際にフレームレートの制限や画素分解能の制限を制御するようにしても良い。前記フレームレート制限ビットがフレームレートの制限が必要であることを示している場合、本実施例の放送受信装置１００は、対象コンテンツを外部機器に出力する際に前記対象コンテンツのフレームレートの制限を行うものとする。例えば、フレームレート１２０Ｈｚの映像コンテンツをフレームレート６０Ｈｚに変換して出力する、等である。また、前記画素分解能制限ビットが画素分解能の制限が必要であることを示している場合、本実施例の放送受信装置１００は、対象コンテンツを外部機器に出力する際に前記対象コンテンツの各画素の分解能の制限を行うものとする。例えば、各画素が１２ビットで構成された映像コンテンツの各画素を８ビットに変換して出力する、等である。 Similar to the above, for example, a frame rate limit bit and a pixel resolution limit bit are prepared using part or all of the “reserved_future_use” parameter, and when outputting content to an external device, the frame rate limit and the pixel resolution limit are set. You may make it control. When the frame rate limit bit indicates that the frame rate needs to be limited, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment limits the frame rate of the target content when outputting the target content to an external device. Assumed to be performed. For example, video content with a frame rate of 120 Hz is converted to a frame rate of 60 Hz and output. In addition, when the pixel resolution limit bit indicates that the pixel resolution needs to be limited, the broadcast receiving device 100 according to the present embodiment, when outputting the target content to the external device, each pixel of the target content. The resolution is limited. For example, each pixel of video content in which each pixel is composed of 12 bits is converted into 8 bits and output.
　また、更に、『ｒｅｓｅｒｖｅｄ＿ｆｕｔｕｒｅ＿ｕｓｅ』パラメータの一部または全部を用いる等により解像度制限制御フラグやフレームレート制限制御フラグや画素分解能制限制御フラグを用意し、前記解像度制限制御フラグやフレームレート制限制御フラグや画素分解能制限制御フラグに応じて前記画質制限やフレームレートの制限や画素分解能の制限を行うか否かを制御するようにしても良い。例えば、前記解像度制限制御フラグが解像度制限制御をインタフェース仕様に応じて行うことを示している場合、対象コンテンツを出力するインタフェースが所定のコンテンツ保護技術を備えていれば前記画質制限を行わず、所定のコンテンツ保護技術を備えていなければ前記画質制限を行うように、制御を行っても良い。 Further, a resolution limiting control flag, a frame rate limiting control flag, and a pixel resolution limiting control flag are prepared by using a part or all of the “reserved_future_use” parameter, and the resolution limiting control flag, the frame rate limiting control flag, the pixel Whether the image quality limitation, the frame rate limitation, or the pixel resolution limitation is performed may be controlled according to a resolution limitation control flag. For example, when the resolution restriction control flag indicates that the resolution restriction control is performed according to the interface specification, the image quality restriction is not performed if the interface for outputting the target content has a predetermined content protection technology. If the content protection technology is not provided, control may be performed so as to perform the image quality restriction.
　具体的には、例えば、デジタルインタフェース部１２５がＨＤＭＩインタフェースであって、前記ＨＤＭＩインタフェースに接続された外部機器に対象コンテンツの出力を行う場合、前記外部機器の有するＨＤＭＩインタフェースがＨＤＣＰ（Ｈｉｇｈ－ｂａｎｄｗｉｄｔｈ　Ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ　Ｃｏｎｔｅｎｔ　Ｐｒｏｔｅｃｔｉｏｎ）バージョン２．２以降に対応していれば前記画質制限を行わずに対象コンテンツの出力を行い、前記外部機器のＨＤＭＩインタフェースのＨＤＣＰバージョンが２．２未満であれば前記画質制限を行って対象コンテンツの出力を行うようにする。即ち、対象コンテンツの出力を行うインタフェースが予め定めた所定のコンテンツ保護技術を備えているか否かに応じて、あるいは、前記コンテンツ保護技術を備えている場合には前記コンテンツ保護技術のバージョンに応じて、前記対象コンテンツの画質制限を行うか否かを制御するようにすれば良い。なお、前記解像度制限制御フラグが解像度制限制御をインタフェース仕様に応じて行うことを示していない場合には、前記解像度制限ビットのみに応じて前記画質制限の有無を制御して良い。前記フレームレート制限制御フラグや画素分解能制限制御フラグに関しても同様の処理を行って良い。 Specifically, for example, when the digital interface unit 125 is an HDMI interface and the target content is output to an external device connected to the HDMI interface, the HDMI interface of the external device is HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital). (Content Protection) version 2.2 or later, the target content is output without performing the image quality restriction, and if the HDMI interface HDCP version of the external device is less than 2.2, the image quality restriction is performed. To output the target content. That is, depending on whether the interface for outputting the target content is provided with a predetermined content protection technology, or depending on the version of the content protection technology if the content protection technology is provided. It is sufficient to control whether or not to limit the image quality of the target content. When the resolution restriction control flag does not indicate that the resolution restriction control is performed according to the interface specification, the presence / absence of the image quality restriction may be controlled according to only the resolution restriction bit. Similar processing may be performed for the frame rate limiting control flag and the pixel resolution limiting control flag.
　また、前述のコピー制御情報が、『１世代のみコピー可』、『所定複数回数コピー可』、『コピー禁止』などのコピー制限を示しているコンテンツのＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介した外部機器へのコピー処理については、放送受信装置１００からの送信パケットの宛先である外部機器のＩＰアドレスが、放送受信装置１００のＩＰアドレスと同一サブネット内にある場合のみ可能とし、外部機器のＩＰアドレスが、放送受信装置１００のＩＰアドレスと同一サブネット外にある場合は、禁止しても良い。コピー制御情報が『無制限にコピー可かつ蓄積および出力時に暗号化処理要』のコンテンツも同様に扱っても良い。 In addition, the above-described copy control information indicates that content that indicates copy restrictions such as “copying is allowed for only one generation”, “copying for a predetermined number of times”, “copying prohibited”, etc., to the external device via the LAN communication unit 121. Copy processing is possible only when the IP address of the external device that is the destination of the transmission packet from the broadcast receiving device 100 is in the same subnet as the IP address of the broadcast receiving device 100, and the IP address of the external device is broadcast. If the IP address of the receiving apparatus 100 is outside the same subnet, it may be prohibited. Content whose copy control information is “unlimited copy is possible and encryption processing is required during storage and output” may be handled in the same manner.
　同様に、前述のコピー制御情報が、『１世代のみコピー可』、『所定複数回数コピー可』、『無制限にコピー可かつ蓄積および出力時に暗号化処理要』などのコピー制限を示しているコンテンツを一度ストレージ（蓄積）部１１０へ蓄積した後の、ＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介して外部機器へのムーブ処理やコピー処理等についても、放送受信装置１００からの送信パケットの宛先である外部機器のＩＰアドレスが、放送受信装置１００のＩＰアドレスと同一サブネット内にある場合のみ可能とし、外部機器のＩＰアドレスが、放送受信装置１００のＩＰアドレスと同一サブネット外にある場合は、禁止しても良い。 Similarly, the content in which the above-mentioned copy control information indicates copy restrictions such as “copying is possible for only one generation”, “copying is allowed a predetermined number of times”, “unlimited copying is possible and encryption processing is required during storage and output”, etc. Is stored in the storage (storage) unit 110, and the IP address of the external device that is the destination of the transmission packet from the broadcast receiving device 100 is also used for the move processing and copy processing to the external device via the LAN communication unit 121. This is possible only when the address is within the same subnet as the IP address of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, and may be prohibited when the IP address of the external device is outside the same subnet as the IP address of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
　また、放送受信装置１００のストレージ（蓄積）部１１０へ蓄積したコンテンツについての視聴用映像出力および音声出力は、原則として、放送受信装置１００からの送信パケットの宛先である外部機器のＩＰアドレスが、放送受信装置１００のＩＰアドレスと同一サブネット内にある場合のみ可能とし、外部機器のＩＰアドレスが、放送受信装置１００のＩＰアドレスと同一サブネット外にある場合は禁止する。但し、当該外部機器が所定期間以内に、放送受信装置１００のＩＰアドレスと同一サブネット内で接続されており、かつ、放送受信装置１００のＩＰアドレスと同一サブネット外でも視聴可能な機器としての登録処理（ペアリング）がなされた機器である場合には、外部機器のＩＰアドレスが、放送受信装置１００のＩＰアドレスと同一サブネット外であっても、当該外部機器への放送受信装置１００のストレージ（蓄積）部１１０へ蓄積したコンテンツについての視聴用映像出力および音声出力を可能とするように構成しても良い。この場合、当該視聴用映像出力および音声出力はコンテンツに暗号化を施して行う。 In addition, viewing video output and audio output for content stored in the storage (storage) unit 110 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 are, in principle, the IP address of the external device that is the destination of the transmission packet from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, This is possible only when the IP address of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is within the same subnet, and is prohibited when the IP address of the external device is outside the same subnet as the IP address of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100. However, registration processing as a device in which the external device is connected within the same subnet as the IP address of the broadcast receiving device 100 within a predetermined period and can be viewed outside the same subnet as the IP address of the broadcast receiving device 100 In the case of a (paired) device, even if the IP address of the external device is outside the same subnet as the IP address of the broadcast receiving device 100, storage (accumulation) of the broadcast receiving device 100 to the external device is performed. ) Unit 110 may be configured to enable viewing video output and audio output for content stored in unit 110. In this case, the viewing video output and audio output are performed by encrypting the content.
　但し、前記暗号化の処理は、図２３に示したコンテンツ利用制御記述子の『ｅｎｃｒｙｐｔｉｏｎ＿ｍｏｄｅ』パラメータの値に応じて制御されても良い。即ち、前記『ｅｎｃｒｙｐｔｉｏｎ＿ｍｏｄｅ』パラメータの値がＩＰインタフェース出力の出力保護を要することを示している場合には前記暗号化処理を行うこととし、ＩＰインタフェース出力の出力保護を要しないことを示している場合には前記暗号化処理を行わずに前記視聴用映像出力および音声出力を行うこととして良い。また、前記『ｅｎｃｒｙｐｔｉｏｎ＿ｍｏｄｅ』パラメータの値がＩＰインタフェース出力の出力保護を要することを示している場合には、コンテンツ利用制御記述子の『ｒｅｓｅｒｖｅｄ＿ｆｕｔｕｒｅ＿ｕｓｅ』パラメータの一部または全部を用いる等により、暗号化処理を施さずに前記視聴用映像出力および音声出力を行うことが可能な外部機器のＩＰアドレスの範囲を指定するようにしても良い。即ち、予め定められた所定のＩＰアドレスに対しては、前記ＩＰアドレスが放送受信装置１００のＩＰアドレスと同一のサブネット内でなくとも、視聴用映像出力および音声出力を行うことが可能となる。 However, the encryption process may be controlled according to the value of the “encryption_mode” parameter of the content use control descriptor shown in FIG. That is, when the value of the “encryption_mode” parameter indicates that the output protection of the IP interface output is required, the encryption process is performed, and the output protection of the IP interface output is not required The viewing video output and audio output may be performed without performing the encryption process. Further, when the value of the “encryption_mode” parameter indicates that output protection of the IP interface output is required, an encryption process is performed by using a part or all of the “reserved_future_use” parameter of the content usage control descriptor. An IP address range of an external device that can perform the viewing video output and audio output without performing the above may be designated. That is, for a predetermined IP address determined in advance, even if the IP address is not in the same subnet as the IP address of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, it is possible to perform viewing video output and audio output.
　また、コンテンツ利用制御記述子の『ｒｅｓｅｒｖｅｄ＿ｆｕｔｕｒｅ＿ｕｓｅ』パラメータの一部または全部を用いる等により前記登録処理（ペアリング）を有効とする期間を指定するようにしても良い。この場合、外部機器の登録処理（ペアリング）を実行した日時が前記指定された期間以内であれば、前記外部機器が放送受信装置１００のＩＰアドレスと同一のサブネット外にある場合でも、前記外部機器に対する視聴用映像出力および音声出力を許容し、前記指定された期間外であれば許容しないように制御して良い。 Also, a period during which the registration process (pairing) is valid may be specified by using a part or all of the “reserved_future_use” parameter of the content usage control descriptor. In this case, if the date and time when the external device registration processing (pairing) is performed is within the specified period, the external device is included even if the external device is outside the same subnet as the IP address of the broadcast receiving device 100. Control may be performed so that viewing video output and audio output to the device are allowed and not allowed outside the specified period.
　また、前述の、コンテンツのＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介した外部機器へのムーブ処理、コピー処理、出力処理、等は、コンテンツ利用制御記述子の『ｒｅｍｏｔｅ＿ｖｉｅｗ＿ｍｏｄｅ』パラメータの値に応じて制御されても良い。即ち、前記『ｒｅｍｏｔｅ＿ｖｉｅｗ＿ｍｏｄｅ』パラメータの値が対象コンテンツのリモート視聴を許容していない場合には、コンテンツのＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介した外部機器へのムーブ処理、コピー処理、出力処理、等の一切を禁止するように制御しても良い。 Further, the above-described move processing, copy processing, output processing, and the like of content to the external device via the LAN communication unit 121 may be controlled according to the value of the “remote_view_mode” parameter of the content usage control descriptor. . That is, if the value of the “remote_view_mode” parameter does not permit remote viewing of the target content, all of the content move processing, copy processing, output processing, etc. to the external device via the LAN communication unit 121 are performed. You may control to prohibit.
　以上説明した処理によれば、コンテンツを外部機器に出力する際にも、適切なコンテンツ保護を実現することができる。 According to the processing described above, appropriate content protection can be realized even when content is output to an external device.
　＜コンテンツコピー制御の例外処理１＞
　図２２Ａに示したコンテンツコピー制御記述子のデータ構造において、第一のデジタルコピー制御情報（『ｄｅｓｃｒｉｐｔｏｒ＿ｌｅｎｇｔｈ』の直後に位置する『ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ＿ｒｅｃｏｒｄｉｎｇ＿ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ＿ｄａｔａ』パラメータ）は、コンテンツ全体に関するコピー世代の制御情報であり、第二のデジタルコピー制御情報（『ｃｏｍｐｏｎｅｎｔ＿ｔａｇ』の直後に位置する『ｄｉｇｉｔａｌ＿ｒｅｃｏｒｄｉｎｇ＿ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ＿ｄａｔａ』パラメータ）は、前記コンテンツを構成する各コンポーネントのそれぞれに関するコピー世代の制御情報である。なお、各コンポーネントの指定は、『ｃｏｍｐｏｎｅｎｔ＿ｔａｇ』パラメータによって為されるものとする。 <Exception processing for content copy control 1>
In the data structure of the content copy control descriptor shown in FIG. 22A, the first digital copy control information (the “digital_recording_control_data” parameter located immediately after “descriptor_length”) is copy generation control information related to the entire content. The second digital copy control information (the “digital_recording_control_data” parameter located immediately after “component_tag”) is copy generation control information for each component constituting the content. Note that each component is specified by a “component_tag” parameter.
　本実施例の放送システムでは、コンテンツ（番組）全体のコピー世代の制御を行う場合には、前記第一のデジタルコピー制御情報のみを前記コンテンツコピー制御記述子に記述し、前記第一のデジタルコピー制御情報によりコピー世代の制御を行う。一方、前記コンテンツを構成するコンポーネント毎にコピー世代の制御を行う場合には、前記第一のデジタルコピー制御情報と前記第二のデジタルコピー制御情報の双方を前記コンテンツコピー制御記述子に記述し、コピー世代の制御を行う。更に、前記コンテンツを構成するコンポーネント毎にコピー世代の制御を行う場合、前記コンテンツコピー制御記述子に記述された前記第一のデジタルコピー制御情報と前記第二のデジタルコピー制御情報の記述が一致しない状況が考えられる。前述の状況においては、本実施例の放送受信装置１００は、以下に示すような動作を行う様にすれば良い。 In the broadcasting system of the present embodiment, when the copy generation of the entire content (program) is controlled, only the first digital copy control information is described in the content copy control descriptor, and the first digital copy The copy generation is controlled by the control information. On the other hand, when performing copy generation control for each component constituting the content, describe both the first digital copy control information and the second digital copy control information in the content copy control descriptor, Control copy generation. Further, when copy generation control is performed for each component constituting the content, the descriptions of the first digital copy control information and the second digital copy control information described in the content copy control descriptor do not match. The situation is possible. In the situation described above, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment may perform the following operation.
　まず、第一の動作例は、前記第一のデジタルコピー制御情報と前記第二のデジタルコピー制御情報の記述が一致しない場合には、前記第一のデジタルコピー制御情報に示されたコピー世代制御に基づいて動作するように制御を行う方法である。この場合、同一のコンテンツを構成する各コンポーネントに共通した簡便なコピー世代制御が可能となる。 First, in the first operation example, when the descriptions of the first digital copy control information and the second digital copy control information do not match, the copy generation control indicated in the first digital copy control information is performed. This is a method of performing control based on the above. In this case, simple copy generation control common to each component constituting the same content can be performed.
　次に、第二の動作例は、前記第一のデジタルコピー制御情報と前記第二のデジタルコピー制御情報の記述が一致しない場合には、前記第二のデジタルコピー制御情報に示されたコピー世代制御に基づいて動作するように制御を行う方法である。この場合、同一のコンテンツを構成するコンポーネントであっても、コンポーネント毎に異なるコピー世代制御が可能となり、即ち、より精緻なコピー世代制御が可能となる。 Next, in the second operation example, when the descriptions of the first digital copy control information and the second digital copy control information do not match, the copy generation indicated in the second digital copy control information is displayed. In this method, control is performed so as to operate based on the control. In this case, even for components constituting the same content, different copy generation control is possible for each component, that is, more precise copy generation control is possible.
　更に、第三の動作例は、前記第一のデジタルコピー制御情報と前記第二のデジタルコピー制御情報の記述が一致しない場合には、前記２つの異なるデジタルコピー制御情報のうちのより厳しい条件のデジタルコピー制御情報に基づいて動作するように制御を行う方法である。例えば、一方が『無制限にコピー可』で他方が『１世代のみコピー可』の場合、『１世代のみコピー可』の情報に従う。または、一方が『所定複数回数コピー可』で他方が『コピー禁止』の場合、『コピー禁止』の情報に従う。または、双方ともに『所定複数回数コピー可』の場合、別途指定されるコピー可能回数の少ない方の情報に従う。この場合、より厳密なコピー世代制御が可能となる。 Further, in the third operation example, when the descriptions of the first digital copy control information and the second digital copy control information do not match, the stricter condition of the two different digital copy control information This is a method for performing control based on digital copy control information. For example, when one side is “unlimited copy is permitted” and the other is “only one generation can be copied”, the information of “one generation can be copied” is followed. Or, when one is “copying a predetermined number of times” and the other is “copy prohibited”, the information of “copy prohibited” is followed. Or, in the case of both “copying a predetermined number of times”, the information of the smaller number of times that can be copied is specified separately. In this case, stricter copy generation control is possible.
　以上の処理を行うことにより、本実施例の放送受信装置１００においては、コンテンツコピー制御記述子に異なる２つのデジタルコピー制御情報が記載されている場合においても好適に動作することが可能となる。 By performing the above processing, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment can operate favorably even when two different digital copy control information are described in the content copy control descriptor.
　＜コンテンツコピー制御の例外処理２＞
　図７Ａを用いて説明したように、本実施例の放送受信装置１００が対応するデジタル放送システムでは、ＭＰＴ内のロケーション情報（図７Ｃ参照）により、放送経路のＴＬＶストリームで取得したデータと違う経路（ＩＰｖ４、ＩＰｖ６、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳ、ＵＲＬ、等）で取得したデータもＴＬＶストリームで取得したデータと同一パッケージかつ同一イベントに含まれることがありうるが、このときＭＰＴ等にコピー制御情報が含められている場合のコンテンツ保護について説明する。 <Exception processing for content copy control 2>
As described with reference to FIG. 7A, in the digital broadcasting system supported by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, a path different from the data acquired in the TLV stream of the broadcast path is determined by the location information in the MPT (see FIG. 7C). Data acquired by (IPv4, IPv6, MPEG2-TS, URL, etc.) can also be included in the same package and the same event as the data acquired by the TLV stream, but at this time, copy control information is included in the MPT etc. Content protection in the case of
　まず、ＭＰＴ等にコピー制御情報が含まれる場合、ロケーション情報で同一パッケージかつ同一イベントに含まれるデータは、放送経路のＴＬＶストリームで取得したデータと違う経路（ＩＰｖ４、ＩＰｖ６、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳ、ＵＲＬ、等）で取得したデータであっても、ＴＬＶストリームに含まれるコピー制御情報に従って、制御するようにしても良い。これらのコピー制御情報によって、指定されるコンテンツのコピー制御状態としては、前述の通り、『無制限にコピー可』（『無制限にコピー可かつ蓄積および出力時に暗号化処理要』と『無制限にコピー可かつ蓄積および出力時に暗号化処理不要』の２種類に分けても良い）、『１世代のみコピー可』、『所定複数回数コピー可』（例えば、９回コピー可＋ムーブ１回可ならいわゆる『ダビング１０』)、『コピー禁止』などを指定可能とする。 First, when copy control information is included in MPT or the like, the data included in the same package and the same event in the location information is different from the data acquired by the TLV stream of the broadcast route (IPv4, IPv6, MPEG2-TS, URL, Etc.) may be controlled according to the copy control information included in the TLV stream. As described above, the copy control status of the specified content based on these copy control information is “Unlimited copy allowed” (“Unlimited copy allowed and encryption required during storage and output”) and “Unlimited copy allowed” In addition, it may be divided into two types, “no encryption processing is required at the time of storage and output”), “copying is possible for only one generation”, “copying for a predetermined number of times” (for example, copying is possible 9 times + movement is allowed once) “Dubbing 10”), “copy prohibited”, etc. can be specified.
　ここで、ロケーション情報が示すデータの位置が、他のデジタル放送信号で伝送されるＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳのデータを含む場合、当該ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳのデータは、他のデジタル放送信号でもコピー制御情報と対応付けられて放送されている。すると、当該ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳのデータのコピー制御をどの情報に従ってどのように行うか（ＴＬＶ／ＭＭＴストリームに含まれるコピー制御情報に従うのか、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳに含まれるコピー制御情報に従うのか）が問題となる。 Here, when the data position indicated by the location information includes MPEG2-TS data transmitted by another digital broadcast signal, the MPEG2-TS data is associated with the copy control information even in another digital broadcast signal. Being broadcast. Then, according to which information the copy control of the MPEG2-TS data is performed (whether it follows the copy control information included in the TLV / MMT stream or the copy control information included in the MPEG2-TS) becomes a problem. .
　本実施例のデジタル放送システムでは、この課題の解決策として、放送受信装置１００において、下記複数の解決策の何れかの動作を行うようにすれば良い。 In the digital broadcasting system of this embodiment, as a solution to this problem, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may perform any one of the following solutions.
　＜動作例１＞
　第一の動作例では、ＭＰＴ等にコピー制御情報が含まれ、ロケーション情報で同一パッケージかつ同一イベントに含まれるデータに他のデジタル放送信号で伝送されるＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳのデータを含む場合に、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳに含まれるコピー制御情報により示されるコピー制御状態よりも、ＴＬＶストリームに含まれるコピー制御情報により示されるコピー制御状態を優先して制御する。 <Operation example 1>
In the first operation example, when the copy control information is included in the MPT or the like, and the data included in the same package and location in the location information includes MPEG2-TS data transmitted by another digital broadcast signal, the MPEG2 -The copy control state indicated by the copy control information included in the TLV stream is controlled with priority over the copy control state indicated by the copy control information included in the TS.
　例えば、ＴＬＶストリームに含まれるコピー制御情報により示されるコピー制御状態が『１世代コピー可』であり、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳに含まれるコピー制御情報により示されるコピー制御状態が『所定複数回コピー可』であれば、ＴＬＶストリームで取得したデータと違う経路（ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳ伝送形式のデジタル放送）で取得したデータであっても、『１世代コピー可』のコンテンツとしてコピー制御を行っても良い。例えば、ＴＬＶストリームに含まれるコピー制御情報により示されるコピー制御状態が『無制限にコピー可』であり、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳに含まれるコピー制御情報により示されるコピー制御状態が『所定複数回コピー可』であれば、ＴＬＶストリームで取得したデータと違う経路（ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳ伝送形式のデジタル放送）で取得したデータであっても、『無制限にコピー可』のコンテンツとしてコピー制御を行っても良い。 For example, the copy control status indicated by the copy control information included in the TLV stream is “1 generation copy is permitted”, and the copy control status indicated by the copy control information included in the MPEG2-TS is “predetermined to be copied a predetermined number of times”. If there is, even if the data is acquired through a different route (MPEG2-TS transmission format digital broadcasting) from the data acquired by the TLV stream, the copy control may be performed as the content of “one generation copy is possible”. For example, the copy control state indicated by the copy control information included in the TLV stream is “unlimited copying is permitted”, and the copy control state indicated by the copy control information included in the MPEG2-TS is “predetermined to allow multiple times of copying”. If there is, even if the data is acquired through a different route (MPEG2-TS transmission format digital broadcasting) from the data acquired by the TLV stream, the copy control may be performed as the content of “unlimited copying”.
　この動作の場合、ＴＬＶストリーム以外の経路で取得したデータについても本実施例の放送受信装置１００が対応する放送システムにおいて管理したいコピー状態にすることができる。 In the case of this operation, the data acquired through a route other than the TLV stream can be set to a copy state that the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment wants to manage in the broadcasting system.
　＜動作例２＞
　第二の動作例では、ＭＰＴ等にコピー制御情報が含まれ、ロケーション情報で同一パッケージかつ同一イベントに含まれるデータに他のデジタル放送信号で伝送されるＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳのデータを含む場合に、ＴＬＶストリームに含まれるコピー制御情報により示されるコピー制御状態とＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳに含まれるコピー制御情報により示されるコピー制御状態とを比較し、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳに含まれるコピー制御情報により示されるコピー制御状態の方がＴＬＶストリームに含まれるコピー制御情報により示されるコピー制御状態よりも厳しい場合は、ストレージ（蓄積）部１１０などへの蓄積処理、リムーバブル記録媒体への記録処理、またはデジタルインタフェースからの出力処理をする際に、当該ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳのデータを処理対象コンテンツから除外するように動作する。 <Operation example 2>
In the second operation example, when the copy control information is included in the MPT or the like, and the data included in the same package and the same event in the location information includes MPEG2-TS data transmitted by another digital broadcast signal, the TLV The copy control state indicated by the copy control information included in the stream is compared with the copy control state indicated by the copy control information included in the MPEG2-TS, and the copy control state indicated by the copy control information included in the MPEG2-TS is compared. If this is stricter than the copy control state indicated by the copy control information included in the TLV stream, the storage process to the storage (storage) unit 110, the recording process to the removable recording medium, or the output process from the digital interface is performed. Process the MPEG2-TS data It operates to exclude the elephants content.
　この動作の場合、ＴＬＶストリーム以外の経路で取得したデータについては、当該データを伝送する放送システムで設定されたオリジナルのコピー制御情報を尊重しながら、本実施例の放送受信装置１００上でのコピー制御状態の重複を解消することができる。 In the case of this operation, for data acquired through a route other than the TLV stream, copying on the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment is performed while respecting the original copy control information set in the broadcast system that transmits the data. Duplicate control states can be eliminated.
　また、当該比較の結果、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳに含まれるコピー制御情報により示されるコピー制御状態が、ＴＬＶストリームに含まれるコピー制御情報により示されるコピー制御状態と同じ状態または、より緩いコピー制御状態の場合は、当該ロケーション情報で同一パッケージかつ同一イベントに含まれるＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳのデータについても、ＴＬＶストリームに含まれるコピー制御情報により示されるコピー制御状態のコンテンツとしてコピー制御を行えば良い。 Further, as a result of the comparison, when the copy control state indicated by the copy control information included in the MPEG2-TS is the same as the copy control state indicated by the copy control information included in the TLV stream or a looser copy control state For the MPEG2-TS data included in the same package and the same event in the location information, copy control may be performed as content in the copy control state indicated by the copy control information included in the TLV stream.
　この動作の場合、ＴＬＶストリーム以外の経路で取得したデータについては、当該データを伝送する放送システムで設定されたオリジナルのコピー制御情報を尊重しながら、本実施例の放送受信装置１００上でのコピー制御状態の重複を解消することができる。 In the case of this operation, for data acquired through a route other than the TLV stream, copying on the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of this embodiment is performed while respecting the original copy control information set in the broadcast system that transmits the data. Duplicate control states can be eliminated.
　以上の説明において、本実施例の放送受信装置１００の著作権保護機能は、ＭＰＴに含まれるコピー制御情報に基づいて行うこととして説明した。しかし、コピー制御情報を配置するテーブルはＭＰＴに限定されない。ＭＰＴ以外にも、図６Ｂで説明したＭＨ－サービス記述テーブル（ＭＨ－ＳＤＴ）やＭＨ－イベント情報テーブル（ＭＨ－ＥＩＴ）、あるいはその他のテーブルに配置して伝送し、放送受信装置１００はこれらに従って著作権保護処理を行っても良い。 In the above description, the copyright protection function of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment has been described as being performed based on the copy control information included in the MPT. However, the table for arranging copy control information is not limited to MPT. In addition to MPT, the MH-service description table (MH-SDT), MH-event information table (MH-EIT) described in FIG. You may perform a copyright protection process.
　以上説明した本実施例によれば、ＭＭＴのデジタル放送に対応した放送受信機を提供することができる。 According to the present embodiment described above, it is possible to provide a broadcast receiver that supports MMT digital broadcasting.
　（実施例２）
　以下では、本発明の実施例２に関して説明する。なお、本実施例における構成、処理および効果等は特に断りのない限り実施例１と同様であるものとする。このため、以下では、本実施例と実施例１との相違点を主に説明し、共通する点については重複を避けるため極力説明を省略する。また、本実施例の放送受信装置は、メディアトランスポート方式として、ＭＭＴ方式とＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳ方式の双方に対応するテレビ受信機であるものとして、以下、説明を行う。 (Example 2)
Hereinafter, Example 2 of the present invention will be described. Note that the configuration, processing, effects, and the like in this embodiment are the same as those in the first embodiment unless otherwise specified. For this reason, below, the difference between a present Example and Example 1 is mainly demonstrated, and in order to avoid duplication about a common point, description is abbreviate | omitted as much as possible. In the following description, the broadcast receiving apparatus of this embodiment is a television receiver that supports both the MMT system and the MPEG2-TS system as the media transport system.
　［放送受信装置のハードウェア構成］
　図２４は、放送受信装置８００の内部構成の一例を示すブロック図である。放送受信装置８００は、主制御部８０１、システムバス８０２、ＲＯＭ８０３、ＲＡＭ８０４、ストレージ部８１０、ＬＡＮ通信部８２１、拡張インタフェース部８２４、デジタルインタフェース部８２５、第一チューナ／復調部８３１、第二チューナ／復調部８３２、ＭＭＴデコード処理部８４１、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳデコード処理部８４２、映像合成部８６１、モニタ部８６２、映像出力部８６３、音声合成部８６４、スピーカ部８６５、音声出力部８６６、操作入力部８７０、で構成される。 [Hardware configuration of broadcast receiver]
FIG. 24 is a block diagram illustrating an example of an internal configuration of the broadcast receiving apparatus 800. The broadcast receiving apparatus 800 includes a main control unit 801, a system bus 802, a ROM 803, a RAM 804, a storage unit 810, a LAN communication unit 821, an expansion interface unit 824, a digital interface unit 825, a first tuner / demodulation unit 831, a second tuner / Demodulator 832, MMT decode processor 841, MPEG2-TS decode processor 842, video synthesizer 861, monitor 862, video output 863, audio synthesizer 864, speaker 865, audio output 866, operation input 870 , Is composed.
　主制御部８０１、システムバス８０２、ＲＯＭ８０３、ＲＡＭ８０４、ストレージ部８１０、拡張インタフェース部８２４、デジタルインタフェース部８２５、モニタ部８６２、映像出力部８６３、スピーカ部８６５、音声出力部８６６、操作入力部８７０、等は、実施例１の放送受信装置１００における主制御部１０１、システムバス１０２、ＲＯＭ１０３、ＲＡＭ１０４、ストレージ（蓄積）部１１０、拡張インタフェース部１２４、デジタルインタフェース部１２５、モニタ部１６２、映像出力部１６３、スピーカ部１６５、音声出力部１６６、操作入力部１７０、等とそれぞれ同等の機能を有するものとし、詳細な説明を省略する。 Main control unit 801, system bus 802, ROM 803, RAM 804, storage unit 810, expansion interface unit 824, digital interface unit 825, monitor unit 862, video output unit 863, speaker unit 865, audio output unit 866, operation input unit 870, Are the main control unit 101, system bus 102, ROM 103, RAM 104, storage (storage) unit 110, expansion interface unit 124, digital interface unit 125, monitor unit 162, video output unit 163 in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the first embodiment. The speaker unit 165, the audio output unit 166, the operation input unit 170, and the like have the same functions, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
　第一チューナ／復調部８３１は、図示を省略したアンテナを介して、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＭＴを採用した放送サービスの放送波を受信し、主制御部８０１の制御に基づいてユーザの所望するサービスのチャンネルに同調（選局）する。更に、第一チューナ／復調部８３１は、受信した放送信号を復調してＭＭＴデータ列を取得し、ＭＭＴデコード処理部８４１に出力する。第二チューナ／復調部８３２は、図示を省略したアンテナを介して、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスの放送波を受信し、主制御部８０１の制御に基づいてユーザの所望するサービスのチャンネルに同調（選局）する。更に、第二チューナ／復調部８３２は、受信した放送信号を復調してＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳデータ列を取得し、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳデコード処理部８４２に出力する。 The first tuner / demodulator 831 receives a broadcast wave of a broadcast service that employs MMT as a media transport method via an antenna (not shown), and a service desired by the user based on the control of the main controller 801. (Tune to) the selected channel. Further, the first tuner / demodulator 831 demodulates the received broadcast signal to acquire an MMT data string, and outputs it to the MMT decode processor 841. The second tuner / demodulation unit 832 receives a broadcast wave of a broadcast service that employs MPEG2-TS as a media transport method via an antenna (not shown), and receives a user's request based on the control of the main control unit 801. Tune in (tune to) the channel of the service you want to use. Further, the second tuner / demodulation unit 832 demodulates the received broadcast signal to obtain an MPEG2-TS data sequence, and outputs the MPEG2-TS data sequence to the MPEG2-TS decode processing unit 842.
　ＭＭＴデコード処理部８４１は、第一チューナ／復調部８３１から出力されたＭＭＴデータ列を入力し、前記ＭＭＴデータ列に含まれる制御信号に基づいてリアルタイム提示要素である映像データ列、音声データ列、文字スーパーデータ列、字幕データ列、等の分離処理、および復号処理等を行う。ＭＭＴデコード処理部８４１は、実施例１の放送受信装置１００における、分離部１３２、映像デコーダ１４１、映像色域変換部１４２、音声デコーダ１４３、文字スーパーデコーダ１４４、字幕デコーダ１４５、字幕合成部１４６、字幕色域変換部１４７、データデコーダ１５１、キャッシュ部１５２、アプリケーション制御部１５３、ブラウザ部１５４、アプリケーション色域変換部１５５、音源部１５６、等に相当する機能を備えるものとする。ＭＭＴデコード処理部８４１は、実施例１で説明した各種処理を行うことが可能である。なお、前記各種処理の詳細は実施例１で説明した通りであるので、説明を省略する。 The MMT decoding processing unit 841 receives the MMT data sequence output from the first tuner / demodulation unit 831 and, based on the control signal included in the MMT data sequence, a video data sequence, an audio data sequence, which are real-time presentation elements, Separation processing, decoding processing, and the like of the character super data sequence and the caption data sequence are performed. The MMT decoding processing unit 841 includes a separation unit 132, a video decoder 141, a video color gamut conversion unit 142, an audio decoder 143, a character super decoder 144, a subtitle decoder 145, a subtitle synthesis unit 146, in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the first embodiment. It is assumed that functions equivalent to a caption color gamut conversion unit 147, a data decoder 151, a cache unit 152, an application control unit 153, a browser unit 154, an application color gamut conversion unit 155, a sound source unit 156, and the like are provided. The MMT decoding processing unit 841 can perform various processes described in the first embodiment. The details of the various processes are the same as those described in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.
　ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳデコード処理部８４２は、第二チューナ／復調部８３２から出力されたＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳデータ列を入力し、前記ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳデータ列に含まれる制御信号に基づいてリアルタイム提示要素である映像データ列、音声データ列、文字スーパーデータ列、字幕データ列、等の分離処理、および復号処理等を行う。ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳデコード処理部８４２は、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスの放送波を受信する従来のテレビ受信機のＩＲＤ（Ｉｎｔｅｇｒａｔｅｄ　Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅｒ　Ｄｅｃｏｄｅｒ）部と同等の機能を備えるものとし、詳細な説明を省略する。 The MPEG2-TS decoding processing unit 842 receives the MPEG2-TS data sequence output from the second tuner / demodulation unit 832 and, based on the control signal included in the MPEG2-TS data sequence, video data that is a real-time presentation element Separation processing, decoding processing, and the like of columns, audio data sequences, character super data sequences, subtitle data sequences, and the like are performed. The MPEG2-TS decoding processing unit 842 has the same function as an IRD (Integrated Receiver Decoder) unit of a conventional television receiver that receives broadcast waves of a broadcasting service that employs MPEG2-TS as a media transport method. Detailed description is omitted.
　映像合成部８６１は、ＭＭＴデコード処理部８４１から出力された映像情報や字幕情報やアプリケーション情報と、ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳデコード処理部８４２から出力された映像情報や字幕情報やアプリケーション情報と、を入力し、適宜選択および／または重畳等の処理を行う。映像合成部８６１は図示を省略したビデオＲＡＭを備え、前記ビデオＲＡＭに入力された映像情報等に基づいてモニタ部８６２等が駆動される。また、映像合成部８６１は、主制御部８０１の制御に基づいて、必要に応じて、スケーリング処理やＥＰＧ画面情報の重畳処理等を行う。音声合成部１６４は、ＭＭＴデコード処理部８４１から出力された音声情報とＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳデコード処理部８４２から出力された音声情報を入力し、適宜選択および／またはミックス等の処理を行う。 The video composition unit 861 receives the video information, subtitle information, and application information output from the MMT decode processing unit 841, and the video information, subtitle information, and application information output from the MPEG2-TS decode processing unit 842. Processing such as selection and / or superimposition is performed as appropriate. The video composition unit 861 includes a video RAM (not shown), and the monitor unit 862 and the like are driven based on video information and the like input to the video RAM. In addition, the video composition unit 861 performs scaling processing, EPG screen information superimposition processing, and the like as necessary based on the control of the main control unit 801. The voice synthesis unit 164 receives the voice information output from the MMT decoding processing unit 841 and the voice information output from the MPEG2-TS decoding processing unit 842, and appropriately performs processing such as selection and / or mixing.
　ＬＡＮ通信部８２１は、ルータ装置２００ｒを介してインターネット２００と接続され、インターネット２００上の各サーバ装置やその他の通信機器とデータの送受信を行う。また、通信回線を介して伝送される番組のＭＭＴデータ列（あるいは、その一部）やＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳデータ列（あるいは、その一部）を取得し、適宜、ＭＭＴデコード処理部８４１やＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳデコード処理部８４２に出力する。 The LAN communication unit 821 is connected to the Internet 200 via the router device 200r, and transmits / receives data to / from each server device and other communication devices on the Internet 200. Also, an MMT data string (or part thereof) and an MPEG2-TS data string (or part thereof) of a program transmitted via a communication line are acquired, and the MMT decoding processing unit 841 and MPEG2-TS are appropriately selected. The data is output to the decoding processing unit 842.
　［放送受信装置の時刻表示］
　本実施例の放送受信装置８００では、ＥＰＧ画面や各種設定画面等において、現在日付や現在時刻を表示可能であるものとする。前記現在日付や現在時刻に関する情報は、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＭＴを採用した放送サービスにおいてはＭＨ－ＴＯＴ等により送信され、また、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスにおいてはＭＰＥＧ－２システムに規定されたＳＩ（Ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅ　Ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ）が備えるＴＯＴ（Ｔｉｍｅ　Ｏｆｆｓｅｔ　Ｔａｂｌｅ）等により送信される。放送受信装置８００は、前記ＭＨ－ＴＯＴや前記ＴＯＴを参照することにより、前記現在日付や現在時刻に関する情報を取得可能である。 [Time display of broadcast receiver]
In the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 of the present embodiment, the current date and the current time can be displayed on the EPG screen and various setting screens. The information on the current date and current time is transmitted by MH-TOT or the like in a broadcast service that employs MMT as a media transport system, and MPEG- in a broadcast service that employs MPEG2-TS as a media transport system. 2 is transmitted by TOT (Time Offset Table) or the like provided in SI (Service Information) defined in the system. The broadcast receiving apparatus 800 can acquire information on the current date and current time by referring to the MH-TOT and the TOT.
　また、一般的には、映像合成部８６１がＭＭＴデコード処理部８４１から出力された映像情報等を主として選択している場合には、前記ＭＨ－ＴＯＴから取得した現在日付や現在時刻に関する情報を前記映像情報等に重畳し、映像合成部８６１がＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳデコード処理部８４２から出力された映像情報等を主として選択している場合には、前記ＴＯＴから取得した現在日付や現在時刻に関する情報を前記映像情報等に重畳するように制御すれば良い。 In general, when the video composition unit 861 mainly selects the video information output from the MMT decoding processing unit 841, the information on the current date and the current time acquired from the MH-TOT is displayed. When the video composition unit 861 mainly selects the video information and the like output from the MPEG2-TS decode processing unit 842, the information related to the current date and the current time obtained from the TOT is superposed on the video information. What is necessary is just to control so that it may superimpose on image | video information etc.
　しかしながら、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＭＴを採用した放送サービスとメディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスとでは、符号化処理／復号処理や伝送経路等に差異があるため、特に現在時刻表示において、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＭＴを採用した放送サービスの選択時とメディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスの選択時とで、不整合を生じる可能性がある。例えば、図２５に示すように、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＭＴを採用した放送サービスのチャンネル情報を表示するＥＰＧ画面１６２ｇからメディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスのチャンネル情報を表示するＥＰＧ画面１６２ｈに画面表示を切り替えた際に、現在時刻の表示が現在時刻表示１６２ｇ１から現在時刻表示１６２ｈ１に切り替わることによる不整合によって、視覚的違和感をユーザに覚えさせる可能性を有するものである。 However, there is a difference in encoding processing / decoding processing, transmission path, etc. between a broadcasting service that employs MMT as a media transport method and a broadcasting service that employs MPEG2-TS as a media transport method. However, there is a possibility of inconsistency between the selection of a broadcast service that employs MMT as the media transport method and the selection of a broadcast service that employs MPEG2-TS as the media transport method. For example, as shown in FIG. 25, from an EPG screen 162g that displays channel information of a broadcast service that employs MMT as a media transport method, an EPG that displays channel information of a broadcast service that employs MPEG2-TS as a media transport method. When the screen display is switched to the screen 162h, there is a possibility of causing the user to feel a visual discomfort due to inconsistency due to switching of the current time display from the current time display 162g1 to the current time display 162h1.
　本実施例の放送受信装置８００では、前記ユーザの視覚的違和感を防止するために、映像合成部８６１がＭＭＴデコード処理部８４１から出力された映像情報等を主として選択している場合であっても、前記ＴＯＴから取得した現在日付や現在時刻に関する情報を前記映像情報等に重畳するように制御する。即ち、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＭＴを採用した放送サービスのコンテンツに、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスで提供される現在時刻情報を重畳するように制御するものである。 In the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 according to the present embodiment, even when the video composition unit 861 mainly selects video information output from the MMT decoding processing unit 841 in order to prevent the user from having a visual discomfort. , Control is performed so that information relating to the current date and the current time acquired from the TOT is superimposed on the video information and the like. That is, control is performed so as to superimpose the current time information provided by the broadcast service adopting MPEG2-TS as the media transport method on the content of the broadcast service adopting MMT as the media transport method.
　前記制御を行うことにより、本実施例の放送受信装置８００は、現在時刻を表示する際に、常に前記ＴＯＴを参照して取得した現在時刻情報を表示するようになる。従って、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＭＴを採用した放送サービスとメディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスとを切り替えた際にも、現在時刻の表示の不整合による視覚的違和感をユーザに覚えさせることを防止することが可能となる。 By performing the control, the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 of the present embodiment always displays the current time information acquired by referring to the TOT when displaying the current time. Therefore, even when switching between a broadcast service that employs MMT as the media transport method and a broadcast service that employs MPEG2-TS as the media transport method, the user feels a visual discomfort due to inconsistencies in the display of the current time. Can be prevented.
　なお、図２６Ａに、本実施例の放送受信装置８００における、各放送サービスの受信状況に応じた現在時刻情報参照元の選択制御の一例を示す。本実施例の放送受信装置８００では、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスの受信が可能な状態にある場合には、常に前記ＴＯＴを参照して現在時刻情報を取得するようにし、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスの受信が不可の状態で、かつメディアトランスポート方式としてＭＭＴを採用した放送サービスの受信が可能な状態にある場合にのみ、前記ＭＨ－ＴＯＴを参照して現在時刻情報を取得するように制御する。 FIG. 26A shows an example of selection control of the current time information reference source in accordance with the reception status of each broadcast service in the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 of the present embodiment. In the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 of this embodiment, when the broadcast service adopting MPEG2-TS as a media transport system is in a state capable of being received, the current time information is always obtained by referring to the TOT. The MH-TOT can be used only when the broadcast service using MPEG2-TS as a media transport system cannot be received and when the broadcast service using MMT as a media transport system can be received. To obtain the current time information.
　また、前述の制御とは逆に、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスのコンテンツに、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＭＴを採用した放送サービスで提供される現在時刻情報を重畳するように制御しても、前述と同様の効果が得られる。 Contrary to the control described above, the current time information provided by the broadcast service adopting MMT as the media transport method is superimposed on the content of the broadcast service adopting MPEG2-TS as the media transport method. Even if controlled, the same effect as described above can be obtained.
　なお、前述のように、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＭＴを採用した放送サービスのコンテンツに、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスで提供される現在時刻情報を重畳するように制御する場合と、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスのコンテンツに、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＭＴを採用した放送サービスで提供される現在時刻情報を重畳するように制御する場合の、何れの場合においても、実施例１の［放送受信装置の時刻管理］での説明と同様に、前記ＴＭＣＣ拡張情報領域の時刻情報の『ｄｅｌｔａ』パラメータを参照することにより、前記現在時刻情報を補正することが可能である。 In addition, as described above, when control is performed so that the current time information provided by the broadcast service adopting MPEG2-TS as the media transport method is superimposed on the content of the broadcast service adopting MMT as the media transport method. And any case of controlling to superimpose the current time information provided by the broadcast service adopting MMT as the media transport method on the content of the broadcast service adopting MPEG2-TS as the media transport method In the same manner as in the description of [Broadcast receiving apparatus time management] in the first embodiment, the current time information can be corrected by referring to the “delta” parameter of the time information in the TMCC extended information area. Is possible.
　また、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＭＴを採用した放送サービスとメディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスの何れの場合においても、ネットワークを構成する各放送サービスが伝送するＭＨ－ＴＯＴまたはＴＯＴが送信側システムの不具合や伝送エラー等による誤りを有する可能性が考えられる。本実施例の放送受信装置８００では、前記ＭＨ－ＴＯＴまたはＴＯＴの前記誤りに対する対策として、受信中のサービスから取得したＭＨ－ＴＯＴまたはＴＯＴが誤りを有すると判断した場合には、同一ネットワークの他の放送サービスから、あるいは、他のネットワークの任意の放送サービスから、ＭＨ－ＴＯＴまたはＴＯＴを取得して現在時刻情報を参照することにより、内蔵クロックの時刻情報の更新処理を行うよう機能を有するものとする。 Also, in any case of a broadcast service that employs MMT as a media transport system and a broadcast service that employs MPEG2-TS as a media transport system, the MH-TOT or TOT transmitted by each broadcast service constituting the network is There is a possibility that the transmission side system has an error due to a malfunction or a transmission error. In the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 of the present embodiment, as a countermeasure against the error of the MH-TOT or TOT, when it is determined that the MH-TOT or TOT acquired from the service being received has an error, Has a function to update the time information of the built-in clock by acquiring the MH-TOT or TOT from any broadcasting service of any other network or referring to the current time information And
　図２６Ｂに、本実施例の放送受信装置８００における、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスを受信している際の、現在時刻情報の更新処理の一例を示す。なお、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＭＴを採用した放送サービスを受信している際であっても、同図に示した処理と同様の処理が可能である。 FIG. 26B shows an example of update processing of current time information when the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 of this embodiment receives a broadcast service that employs MPEG2-TS as the media transport method. Even when a broadcast service that employs MMT as the media transport method is being received, the same processing as that shown in FIG.
　本実施例の放送受信装置８００において内蔵クロックの時刻情報を更新する場合、まず、受信機能実行部１１０２が現在受信中の放送サービス（メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービス）のＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳデータ列からＴＯＴを取得し（Ｓ３０１）、更に、前記取得したＴＯＴを参照することにより、現在時刻情報を取得する（Ｓ３０２）。次に、受信機能実行部１１０２はＳ３０２の処理で取得した前記現在時刻情報と内蔵クロックの時刻情報を比較する処理を行う。 When the time information of the built-in clock is updated in the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 of the present embodiment, first, the MPEG2 of the broadcast service (the broadcast service adopting MPEG2-TS as the media transport system) currently being received by the reception function execution unit 1102 is received. -A TOT is acquired from the TS data string (S301), and the current time information is acquired by referring to the acquired TOT (S302). Next, the reception function execution unit 1102 performs a process of comparing the current time information acquired in the process of S302 with the time information of the built-in clock.
　前記比較処理の結果、Ｓ３０２の処理で取得した前記現在時刻情報と内蔵クロックの時刻情報の差が所定値以内（例えば、３分以内）の場合（Ｓ３０３：Ｙｅｓ）、受信機能実行部１１０２は、Ｓ３０２の処理で取得した前記現在時刻情報を以って、内蔵クロックの時刻情報の更新を行う（Ｓ３０６）。一方、前記比較処理の結果、Ｓ３０２の処理で取得した前記現在時刻情報と内蔵クロックの時刻情報の差が所定値以内ではない場合（Ｓ３０３：Ｎｏ）、あるいは、Ｓ３０１で取得したＴＯＴがデータ内にエラーがあることを示すフラグ等を有している場合、受信機能実行部１１０２は、同一ネットワーク内の他の放送サービスのＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳデータ列からＴＯＴを取得し、あるいは、他のネットワークの任意の放送サービス（メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＭＴを採用した放送サービス）のＭＭＴデータ列からＭＨ－ＴＯＴを取得し（Ｓ３０４）、更に、前記取得したＴＯＴまたはＭＨ－ＴＯＴから現在時刻情報を取得する（Ｓ３０５）。受信機能実行部１１０２は、Ｓ３０５の処理で取得した現在時刻情報を以って、再度Ｓ３０３の比較処理を行うようにすれば良い。 As a result of the comparison process, when the difference between the current time information acquired in the process of S302 and the time information of the internal clock is within a predetermined value (for example, within 3 minutes) (S303: Yes), the reception function execution unit 1102 The time information of the built-in clock is updated using the current time information acquired in the process of S302 (S306). On the other hand, if the difference between the current time information acquired in the process of S302 and the time information of the built-in clock is not within a predetermined value as a result of the comparison process (S303: No), or the TOT acquired in S301 is included in the data When it has a flag or the like indicating that there is an error, the reception function execution unit 1102 acquires the TOT from the MPEG2-TS data sequence of another broadcast service in the same network, or any other network MH-TOT is acquired from the MMT data string of the broadcast service (broadcast service adopting MMT as the media transport system) (S304), and further, current time information is acquired from the acquired TOT or MH-TOT (S305). . The reception function execution unit 1102 may perform the comparison process of S303 again using the current time information acquired in the process of S305.
　以上の処理により、本実施例の放送受信装置８００は、受信中のサービスから取得したＭＨ－ＴＯＴまたはＴＯＴが誤りを有すると判断した場合には、同一ネットワークの他の放送サービスから、あるいは、他のネットワークの任意の放送サービスから、ＭＨ－ＴＯＴまたはＴＯＴを取得して現在時刻情報を参照することにより、内蔵クロックの時刻情報の更新処理を行うことが可能となる。 Through the above processing, when the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 of this embodiment determines that the MH-TOT or TOT acquired from the service being received has an error, the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 receives another broadcast service from the same network or other By acquiring MH-TOT or TOT from any broadcasting service of the network and referring to the current time information, it is possible to update the time information of the built-in clock.
　なお、工場出荷後の初期設定時等、Ｓ３０４～Ｓ３０５の処理の繰り返しで内蔵クロックの時刻情報との差が所定範囲内となる現在時刻情報を取得できなかった場合には、Ｓ３０２の処理で取得した現在時刻情報を以って、あらためて内蔵クロックの時刻情報を設定するようにすれば良い。このようにすれば、本実施例の放送受信装置８００の内蔵クロックの時刻情報側に誤りがある場合も対応することが可能となる。 If the current time information in which the difference from the time information of the built-in clock is within the predetermined range cannot be acquired by repeating the processing of S304 to S305, such as at the time of initial setting after factory shipment, it is acquired in the processing of S302. The time information of the built-in clock may be set again with the current time information. In this way, it is possible to cope with a case where there is an error in the time information side of the built-in clock of the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 of this embodiment.
　［放送受信装置のＥＰＧ表示］
　メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＭＴを採用した放送サービスのイベントスケジュール情報はＭＨ－ＥＩＴ等により伝送される。一方、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスのイベントスケジュール情報はＭＰＥＧ－２システムに規定されたＳＩが備えるＥＩＴ（Ｅｖｅｎｔ　Ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ　Ｔａｂｌｅ）等により伝送される。従って、一般的には、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＭＴを採用した放送サービスで提供される映像情報等の表示を行っている際には、前記ＭＭＴを採用した放送サービスのイベントスケジュール情報（ＭＨ－ＥＩＴ）が取得可能であり、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスで提供される映像情報等の表示を行っている際には、前記ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスのイベントスケジュール情報（ＥＩＴ）が取得可能である。 [EPG display of broadcast receiver]
Event schedule information of a broadcast service that employs MMT as a media transport method is transmitted by MH-EIT or the like. On the other hand, event schedule information of a broadcast service that employs MPEG2-TS as a media transport system is transmitted by an EIT (Event Information Table) included in SI defined in the MPEG-2 system. Therefore, in general, when displaying video information or the like provided by a broadcast service adopting MMT as a media transport method, event schedule information (MH-EIT) of the broadcast service adopting the MMT is displayed. ) Can be obtained, and when displaying video information provided by a broadcast service employing MPEG2-TS as a media transport method, event schedule information of the broadcast service employing MPEG2-TS is displayed. (EIT) can be acquired.
　しかしながら、本実施例の放送受信装置８００は、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＭＴを採用した放送サービスで提供される映像情報等の表示を行っている際にも、あるいは、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスで提供される映像情報等の表示を行っている際にも、前記ＭＨ－ＥＩＴと前記ＥＩＴの双方を取得可能とし、ユーザにとっての使い勝手を向上させている。 However, the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 according to the present embodiment displays the video information provided by the broadcast service adopting the MMT as the media transport system, or the MPEG2-TS as the media transport system. Even when displaying video information and the like provided by a broadcasting service that adopts the above, both the MH-EIT and the EIT can be acquired, improving usability for the user.
　図２７Ａに、本実施例の放送受信装置８００におけるＥＰＧ画面の一例を示す。図中、ＥＰＧ画面１６２ｉはメディアトランスポート方式としてＭＭＴを採用した放送サービスのＭＨ－ＥＩＴに基づいて作成されたＥＰＧ画面であり、『Ｍ１テレビ』、『Ｍ２放送』、『Ｍ３チャンネル』、『Ｍ４ＴＶ』、『テレビＭ５』等は、それぞれメディアトランスポート方式としてＭＭＴを採用した放送サービスの放送局名称であるものとする。また、ＥＰＧ画面１６２ｊはメディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスのＥＩＴに基づいて作成されたＥＰＧ画面であり、『Ｔ６テレビ』、『Ｔ７放送』、『Ｔ８チャンネル』、『Ｔ９ＴＶ』、『テレビＴＡ』等は、それぞれメディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスの放送局名称であるものとする。 FIG. 27A shows an example of an EPG screen in the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 of the present embodiment. In the figure, an EPG screen 162i is an EPG screen created based on the MH-EIT of a broadcast service adopting MMT as a media transport system, and is “M1 TV”, “M2 broadcast”, “M3 channel”, “M4TV”. ”,“ TV M5 ”, and the like are broadcast station names of broadcast services that employ MMT as the media transport method. The EPG screen 162j is an EPG screen created based on the EIT of a broadcast service that employs MPEG2-TS as a media transport system. “T6 TV”, “T7 Broadcast”, “T8 Channel”, “T9TV” “TV TA” and the like are broadcast station names of broadcast services that employ MPEG2-TS as the media transport system.
　例えば、ユーザがメディアトランスポート方式としてＭＭＴを採用した放送サービスで提供される放送番組を視聴中に、図示を省略したリモコンを操作してＥＰＧ画面の表示を指示すると、ＥＰＧ画面の初期画面（図示省略）が表示される。前記ＥＰＧ画面の初期画面は、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＭＴを採用した放送サービスのＭＨ－ＥＩＴに基づいて作成されたＥＰＧ画面であり、『２０１４年１０月７日（今日）』の『１７時～（現在時刻の近隣）』の各チャンネルの放送番組の詳細情報が表示される。次に、ユーザが『２０１４年１０月９日』の『２０時～』の各チャンネルの放送番組の詳細情報を確認したいと所望し、図示を省略したリモコンを操作してＥＰＧ画面の更新を指示すると、ＥＰＧ画面１６２ｉが表示される。 For example, when a user operates a remote controller (not shown) to instruct display of an EPG screen while viewing a broadcast program provided by a broadcast service that employs MMT as a media transport method, an initial screen of the EPG screen (shown) (Omitted) is displayed. The initial screen of the EPG screen is an EPG screen created based on the MH-EIT of a broadcasting service that employs MMT as a media transport method. Detailed information on the broadcast program of each channel “Nearby current time” is displayed. Next, the user desires to check the detailed information of the broadcast program of each channel “October 9th” of “October 9, 2014”, and operates the remote controller (not shown) to instruct to update the EPG screen. Then, the EPG screen 162i is displayed.
　更に、ユーザがメディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスで提供される放送番組の詳細情報を確認したいと所望し、図示を省略したリモコンを操作してネットワークの切り替えを指示すると、ＥＰＧ画面１６２ｊが表示される。この際、本実施例の放送受信装置８００においては、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスのＥＩＴに基づいて作成されたＥＰＧ画面の初期画面（即ち、『２０１４年１０月７日』の『１７時～』の各チャンネルの放送番組の詳細情報）ではなく、直前に表示されていたＥＰＧ画面１６２ｉと同日同時間帯（即ち、『２０１４年１０月９日』の『２０時～』）の各チャンネルの放送番組の詳細情報を表示するように制御する。 Further, when the user desires to confirm detailed information of a broadcast program provided by a broadcast service adopting MPEG2-TS as a media transport method and operates a remote controller (not shown) to instruct network switching, the EPG A screen 162j is displayed. At this time, in the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 of the present embodiment, the initial screen of the EPG screen created based on the EIT of the broadcast service adopting MPEG2-TS as the media transport system (ie, “October 7, 2014 ”17: 00 ~” (detailed information on the broadcast program of each channel), but the same time zone as the EPG screen 162i displayed immediately before (ie, “October 9, 2014” ]) To display the detailed information of the broadcast program of each channel.
　前述の制御により、ユーザは、メディアトランスポート方式の異なる複数のネットワークの同日同時間帯の放送番組に関する詳細情報を、簡便な操作で、連続的に、確認することが可能となる。即ち、放送受信装置８００の使い勝手が向上する。 The above-described control allows the user to continuously check detailed information regarding broadcast programs on the same day and the same time zone of a plurality of networks with different media transport methods by a simple operation. That is, the usability of the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 is improved.
　図２７Ｂは、本実施例の放送受信装置８００におけるＥＰＧ画面の前述とは異なる一例を示す図である。ＥＰＧ画面１６２ｋは、図２７Ａに示したＥＰＧ画面１６２ｉが表示された状態から、図示を省略したリモコンの操作により、チャンネル方向（横方向）にスクロールさせた状態を示している。即ち、図２７Ｂに示した例では、ＥＰＧ画面をチャンネル方向（横方向）にスクロールさせることにより、メディアトランスポート方式としてＭＭＴを採用した放送サービスのＭＨ－ＥＩＴに基づいて作成されたチャンネル情報とメディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスのＥＩＴに基づいて作成されたチャンネル情報とが、同一時間軸上でシームレスに表示される。 FIG. 27B is a diagram showing an example different from the above-described EPG screen in the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 of the present embodiment. The EPG screen 162k shows a state where the EPG screen 162i shown in FIG. 27A is scrolled in the channel direction (lateral direction) by operating the remote controller (not shown). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 27B, the channel information and media created based on the MH-EIT of the broadcast service adopting MMT as the media transport method by scrolling the EPG screen in the channel direction (lateral direction). Channel information created based on EIT of a broadcast service that employs MPEG2-TS as a transport method is displayed seamlessly on the same time axis.
　従って、ユーザがメディアトランスポート方式としてＭＭＴを採用した放送サービスのＭＨ－ＥＩＴに基づいて作成されたチャンネル情報の確認中にメディアトランスポート方式としてＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳを採用した放送サービスのＥＩＴに基づいて作成されたチャンネル情報を確認したいと所望した場合においても、図示を省略したリモコンの操作によるネットワークの切り替えの指示等を不要とすることができる。更に、ユーザは、メディアトランスポート方式の異なる複数のネットワークの同日同時間帯の放送番組に関する詳細情報を、同時に確認することが可能となる。即ち、放送受信装置８００の使い勝手が向上する。 Therefore, created based on the EIT of the broadcast service adopting MPEG2-TS as the media transport method while the user confirms the channel information created based on the MH-EIT of the broadcast service adopting MMT as the media transport method. Even when it is desired to confirm the channel information, an instruction to switch the network by operating a remote controller (not shown) can be made unnecessary. Furthermore, the user can simultaneously confirm detailed information regarding broadcast programs in the same day and same time zone of a plurality of networks having different media transport methods. That is, the usability of the broadcast receiving apparatus 800 is improved.
　（実施例３）
　以下では、本発明の実施例３に関して説明する。なお、本実施例における構成および効果等は特に断りのない限り実施例１または実施例２と同様であるものとする。このため、以下では、本実施例と実施例１または実施例２との相違点を主に説明し、共通する点については重複を避けるため極力説明を省略する。また、本実施例では、放送受信装置と携帯情報端末との連携動作について説明する。 (Example 3)
Hereinafter, Example 3 of the present invention will be described. Note that the configuration, effects, and the like in this example are the same as those in Example 1 or Example 2 unless otherwise specified. Therefore, in the following, differences between the present embodiment and the first embodiment or the second embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of common points will be omitted as much as possible to avoid duplication. In the present embodiment, a cooperative operation between the broadcast receiving device and the portable information terminal will be described.
　［アプリケーション伝送方式の概要］
　本実施例のアプリケーション伝送方式に関して、図２８を用いて説明する。 [Overview of application transmission method]
The application transmission method of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
　本実施例の放送システムでは、一般的なデジタル放送で行われているデータカルーセル伝送方式と同等の伝送方式が可能であるものとする。即ち、受信機に対するデータダウンロードやマルチメディアサービスにおけるコンテンツの伝送などでは、データを繰り返し送信することで、受信機は放送時間中の任意の時点で必要なデータを取得可能であるものとしている。データは、ファイル単位で非同期型ＭＰＵにカプセル化され伝送される。アプリケーションの伝送に関する制御情報は、データ伝送メッセージを用いて伝送されて良い。データ伝送メッセージには、データディレクトリ管理テーブル、データアセット管理テーブル、データコンテント管理テーブルが格納されるものとする。 In the broadcasting system of the present embodiment, it is assumed that a transmission system equivalent to a data carousel transmission system performed in general digital broadcasting is possible. In other words, when data is downloaded to a receiver or content is transmitted in a multimedia service, the receiver can acquire necessary data at an arbitrary point in the broadcast time by repeatedly transmitting data. Data is encapsulated in an asynchronous MPU and transmitted on a file basis. Control information related to application transmission may be transmitted using a data transmission message. It is assumed that a data directory management table, a data asset management table, and a data content management table are stored in the data transmission message.
　アプリケーションを構成するファイルは、ＨＴＭＬ５等のアプリケーション記述内でパス名を指定される。パス名は、ディレクトリノード名とファイル名の組み合わせで記述されて良い。また、ディレクトリノードとファイルを統合した識別子としてノードタグを規定し、各テーブルをリンクする情報として適用する。 • The path name is specified in the application description such as HTML5 for the files that make up the application. The path name may be described by a combination of a directory node name and a file name. In addition, a node tag is defined as an identifier integrating a directory node and a file, and is applied as information for linking each table.
　アプリケーションからパス名を指定された受信機は、データ伝送メッセージ内のデータディレクトリ管理テーブルから、指定されたパス名のファイルのノードタグを得る。次に、同じくデータ伝送メッセージ内のデータアセット管理テーブルから、前記得られたノードタグを持つアイテムが伝送されるアセットのコンポーネントタグ、ダウンロードＩＤ、ＭＰＵシーケンス番号、およびアイテムＩＤを得る。更に、ＭＰテーブルを参照することで、前記得られたコンポーネントタグを持つアセットのロケーション情報を取得し、ファイルが実際に伝送されるアセットを特定する。前記特定されたアセット内で、前記得られたダウンロードＩＤとアイテムを伝送するＭＭＴＰパケットのマルチ拡張ヘッダ領域に記載されたダウンロードＩＤとにより、カルーセルに対応するファイルの繰り返し伝送の単位を一意に識別でき、繰り返し伝送されるアイテムのうち、前記得られたＭＰＵシーケンス番号およびアイテムＩＤを持つアイテムを所望のファイルとして取得可能である。 The receiver whose path name is specified by the application obtains the node tag of the file with the specified path name from the data directory management table in the data transmission message. Next, the component tag, download ID, MPU sequence number, and item ID of the asset to which the item having the obtained node tag is transmitted are also obtained from the data asset management table in the data transmission message. Further, the location information of the asset having the obtained component tag is obtained by referring to the MP table, and the asset to which the file is actually transmitted is specified. Within the identified asset, the unit of repetitive transmission of the file corresponding to the carousel can be uniquely identified by the obtained download ID and the download ID described in the multi-extension header area of the MMTP packet that transmits the item. Among the items repeatedly transmitted, the item having the obtained MPU sequence number and item ID can be acquired as a desired file.
　なお、前記ノードタグはデータ伝送メッセージ内で、前記ＭＰＵシーケンス番号はアセット内で、前記アイテムＩＤはサービス事業者内で、それぞれ一意であるものとする。 The node tag is unique within the data transmission message, the MPU sequence number is unique within the asset, and the item ID is unique within the service provider.
　更に、受信機は、データアセット管理テーブルを常に監視することで、アプリケーションを構成するファイルが更新されたことを検知可能であり、アプリケーションを常に最新の状態で提示することが可能である。更新検知は、アセット単位、ＭＰＵ単位、ファイル単位と、各段階で可能であって良い。データアセット管理テーブルにより、更新されたファイルのコンポーネントタグとＭＰＵシーケンス番号およびアイテムＩＤを得る。前述のファイル取得と同様に、ＭＰテーブルを参照してアセットを特定し、前記得られたＭＰＵシーケンス番号およびアイテムＩＤを持つアイテムを所望の更新されたファイルとして取得可能である。 Furthermore, the receiver can detect that the file constituting the application has been updated by constantly monitoring the data asset management table, and can always present the application in the latest state. Update detection may be possible at each stage: asset unit, MPU unit, file unit. The component tag, MPU sequence number, and item ID of the updated file are obtained from the data asset management table. Similar to the above-described file acquisition, an asset can be specified by referring to the MP table, and an item having the obtained MPU sequence number and item ID can be acquired as a desired updated file.
　データコンテント管理テーブルは、柔軟で有効なキャッシュ制御を実現するため、データコンテンツとしてのファイルの構成情報を提供する。データコンテンツ内で提示する単位（例えばページ）をプレゼンテーションユニットと定義し、その単位で、どのアイテムが関係し、どのプレゼンテーションユニットとリンク関係になっているか等の情報を示す。これらの情報により、最初に要求されたアイテムと同じプレゼンテーションユニットに含まれる他のアイテムを知ることが可能となる。また、プレゼンテーションユニット単位のキャッシュ制御等の情報を得ることもできる。その結果、受信機は、ページ全体の取得時間短縮と、次のページの優先的なキャッシュ等を実現することが可能となる。 The data content management table provides file configuration information as data content in order to realize flexible and effective cache control. A unit (for example, a page) to be presented in the data content is defined as a presentation unit, and indicates information such as which item is related and which presentation unit is linked in that unit. With these pieces of information, it is possible to know other items included in the same presentation unit as the first requested item. It is also possible to obtain information such as cache control for each presentation unit. As a result, the receiver can reduce the acquisition time of the entire page and preferentially cache the next page.
　前述のように、アプリケーションやデータもアセットとして伝送されるが、アセットの種類（ａｓｓｅｔ＿ｔｙｐｅ）はＭＰテーブル（ＭＰＴ：図７Ｂ参照）に記載される。アセットの種類を図２９にまとめる。放送映像、音声、字幕データの他、アプリケーションやアプリケーションで使用するデータがアセットとして伝送される。また、前記アプリケーションやアプリケーションで使用するデータのアセットの取得先は、放送波でも構わないし、通信回線経由でも構わない。前記アセットの取得先を記載するロケーション情報（ＭＭＴ＿ｇｅｎｅｒａｌ＿ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｉｎｆｏ）のデータ構造の一例を図３０Ａに示す。このロケーション情報に取得先の種別（ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｔｙｐｅ）と取得先が記載される。前記取得先の種別の意味を図３０Ｂに示す。 As described above, applications and data are also transmitted as assets, but the asset type (asset_type) is described in the MP table (MPT: see FIG. 7B). The types of assets are summarized in FIG. In addition to broadcast video, audio, and caption data, applications and data used in the applications are transmitted as assets. Further, the acquisition destination of the application or the asset of data used in the application may be a broadcast wave or via a communication line. An example of the data structure of the location information (MMT_general_location_info) describing the acquisition source of the asset is shown in FIG. 30A. In this location information, the type (location_type) of the acquisition destination and the acquisition destination are described. The meaning of the type of acquisition destination is shown in FIG. 30B.
　［アプリケーションの提示形式］
　アプリケーションの提示も、放送映像や音声と同様に、レイアウト設定テーブル（ＬＣＴ：図１７Ａ参照）で定義された領域で行われる。どの領域を使用するかは、ＭＰＵ提示領域指定記述子（ＭＰＵ＿Ｐｒｅｓｅｎｔａｔｉｏｎ＿Ｒｅｇｉｏｎ＿Ｄｅｓｃｒｉｐｔｏｒ）において、レイアウト番号（ｌａｙｏｕｔ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ）と領域番号（ｒｅｇｉｏｎ＿ｎｕｍｂｅｒ）により指定する。ＭＰＵ提示領域指定記述子のデータ構造の一例を図３１に示す。 [Application presentation format]
Application presentation is also performed in the area defined in the layout setting table (LCT: see FIG. 17A), similarly to broadcast video and audio. Which area is used is specified by a layout number (layout_number) and an area number (region_number) in the MPU presentation area specification descriptor (MPU_Presentation_Region_Descriptor). An example of the data structure of the MPU presentation area designation descriptor is shown in FIG.
　［アプリケーション制御情報の概要］
　本実施例のアプリケーション制御情報は、放送受信装置１００が対応する放送通信連携機能において、テレビ受信機等（本実施例では、放送受信装置１００）に対して放送サービスに連携するアプリケーション（以下、放送連携アプリと称する場合がある。）の存在を周知し、その制御を指示することを目的とする情報である。なお、本実施例におけるアプリケーション制御情報は、放送システムにおけるＭＨ－アプリケーション情報テーブル（ＭＨ－ＡＩＴ：図６Ｂ参照）の形式で伝送されるものとする。 [Overview of application control information]
The application control information of the present embodiment is an application (hereinafter referred to as broadcast) that is linked to a broadcast service for a television receiver or the like (in the present embodiment, the broadcast receiver 100) in the broadcast communication cooperation function supported by the broadcast receiver 100. It is information intended to inform the existence of the application and sometimes to instruct its control. It is assumed that the application control information in this embodiment is transmitted in the format of the MH-application information table (MH-AIT: see FIG. 6B) in the broadcasting system.
　また、前記放送連携アプリは、（１）放送信号に含まれる起動／終了などの制御信号に基づいて放送受信状態においてのみ動作し、制御信号に基づいて放送リソースへのアクセスが許可される放送マネージドアプリケーションと、（２）起動／終了などを放送信号に制御されない動作形態で、アプリケーション認証などの手段に基づいて放送リソースへのアクセスが許可される放送外マネージドアプリケーションと、（３）放送リソースへのアクセスが許可されない、その他の一般アプリケーションと、に区別されて良い。 In addition, the broadcast cooperative application operates only in a broadcast reception state based on a control signal such as start / end included in a broadcast signal, and is a broadcast managed app that is allowed to access a broadcast resource based on the control signal. An application, (2) a non-broadcast managed application in which access to the broadcast resource is permitted based on means such as application authentication in an operation mode in which activation / termination is not controlled by the broadcast signal, and (3) broadcast resource It can be distinguished from other general applications where access is not permitted.
　ＭＨ－ＡＩＴはＭ２セクションメッセージ（図６Ａ参照）に格納されて伝送される。ＭＨ－ＡＩＴのデータ構造の一例を図３２Ａに示す。 MH-AIT is stored in the M2 section message (see FIG. 6A) and transmitted. An example of the data structure of the MH-AIT is shown in FIG. 32A.
　ＭＨ－ＡＩＴの制御対象となるアプリケーションの形式は、『ａｐｐｌｉｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｔｙｐｅ（アプリケーション形式）』パラメータで示される。アプリケーション形式の割り当てを図３２Ｂに示す。また、アプリケーションの状態を制御する制御コードは、『ａｐｐｌｉｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｃｏｎｔｒｏｌ＿ｃｏｄｅ（アプリケーション制御コード）』パラメータで示される。アプリケーション制御コードは、アプリケーション形式毎に規定されて良い。アプリケーション形式毎の規定がない場合は、図３２Ｃの意味で用いられるものとする。 The format of the application to be controlled by the MH-AIT is indicated by the “application_type (application format)” parameter. The application format assignment is shown in FIG. 32B. A control code for controlling the state of the application is indicated by an “application_control_code (application control code)” parameter. The application control code may be defined for each application format. When there is no specification for each application format, it is used in the meaning of FIG. 32C.
　アプリケーションの識別は、アプリケーション識別子（ａｐｐｌｉｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｉｄｅｎｔｉｆｉｅｒ）でなされる。アプリケーション識別子のデータ構造の一例を図３２Ｄに示す。アプリケーション識別子は、アプリケーション形式毎に規定された、各アプリケーションを一意に識別する値である。アプリケーション識別子は、事業者を識別する組織識別（ｏｒｇａｎｉｚａｔｉｏｎ＿ｉｄ）と事業者毎に採番されるアプリケーション識別（ａｐｐｌｉｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｉｄ）から構成されて良い。事業者毎のアプリケーション識別は、時間を隔てることにより異なるアプリケーションに同じ値を再利用して良いが、その場合は、アプリケーションのキャッシュの有効期限（ＭＨ－キャッシュ情報記述子：図６Ｄ参照）を考慮して、受信機内で異なるアプリケーションに同じ識別値が指定されることがないようにすることが望ましい。 The application is identified by an application identifier (application_identifier). An example of the data structure of the application identifier is shown in FIG. 32D. The application identifier is a value that uniquely defines each application and is defined for each application format. The application identifier may be composed of an organization identification (organization_id) for identifying a business operator and an application identification (application_id) assigned to each business operator. For the application identification for each business operator, the same value may be reused for different applications by separating the time, but in this case, the expiration date of the cache of the application (MH-cache information descriptor: see FIG. 6D) is considered. Thus, it is desirable that the same identification value is not specified for different applications in the receiver.
　［ＭＨ－ＡＩＴに記載される記述子］
　各アプリケーションに関する情報は、前述の各パラメータの他、記述子（ｄｅｓｃｒｉｐｔｏｒ）にも記載される。図６Ｃおよび図６Ｄに本放送システムの記述子の一覧を記載したが、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴに関する主要なものにつき、以下に、詳細を説明する。 [Descriptor described in MH-AIT]
Information on each application is described in a descriptor as well as the above-described parameters. FIG. 6C and FIG. 6D list the descriptors of this broadcasting system. Details of the main ones related to MH-AIT will be described below.
　（１）ＭＨ－アプリケーション記述子
　ＭＨ－アプリケーション記述子は、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴのアプリケーション情報記述子ループにおいて、アプリケーション毎に必ず一つ配置するものとする。ＭＨ－アプリケーション記述子のデータ構造の一例を図３３に示す。『ａｐｐｌｉｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｐｒｏｆｉｌｅ（アプリケーションプロファイル）』パラメータは、対象アプリケーションが実行可能である受信機のアプリケーションプロファイルを示す。受信機がこのプロファイルを実装していれば、対象アプリケーションを実行する能力を持つことを示す。プロファイルの内容は、アプリケーション形式毎に定義される。 (1) MH-application descriptor One MH-application descriptor is necessarily arranged for each application in the application information descriptor loop of MH-AIT. An example of the data structure of the MH-application descriptor is shown in FIG. The “application_profile (application profile)” parameter indicates an application profile of a receiver that can execute the target application. If the receiver implements this profile, it indicates that it has the ability to execute the target application. The contents of the profile are defined for each application format.
　（２）ＭＨ－伝送プロトコル記述子
　アプリケーションの伝送手段として、放送・通信等の伝送プロトコルの指定と伝送プロトコルに依存したアプリケーションのロケーション情報を示すことを目的とし、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴの共通記述子ループまたはアプリケーション情報記述子ループにおいて、アプリケーション記述子の伝送プロトコルラベルの数分配置するものとする。ＭＨ－伝送プロトコル記述子のデータ構造の一例を図３４Ａに示す。『ｐｒｏｔｏｃｏｌ＿ｉｄ（プロトコル識別）』パラメータは、対象アプリケーションを伝送するプロトコルを設定する。プロトコル識別の意味を図３４Ｂに示す。更に、『ｓｅｌｅｃｔｏｒ＿ｂｙｔｅ（セレクタ領域）』に、プロトコル識別毎に規定される補足情報を格納する。ＨＴＴＰ／ＨＴＴＰＳ伝送およびＭＭＴ　ｎｏｎ－ｔｉｍｅｄ伝送の場合のセレクタ領域のデータ構造の一例を図３４Ｃに示す。『ＵＲＬ＿ｂａｓｅ＿ｂｙｔｅ（ＵＲＬベース）』パラメータ、『ＵＲＬ＿ｅｘｔｅｎｓｉｏｎ＿ｂｙｔｅ（ＵＲＬ拡張）』パラメータ等により、対象アプリケーションを取得するためのＵＲＬに関する情報を得ることが可能であるものとする。 (2) MH-Transmission Protocol Descriptor As an application transmission means, the MH-AIT Common Descriptor Loop or the MH-AIT Common Descriptor Loop is used for the purpose of indicating a transmission protocol such as broadcasting / communication and the location information of the application depending on the transmission protocol. In the application information descriptor loop, the same number of transmission protocol labels as application descriptors are arranged. An example of the data structure of the MH-transmission protocol descriptor is shown in FIG. 34A. The “protocol_id (protocol identification)” parameter sets the protocol for transmitting the target application. The meaning of protocol identification is shown in FIG. 34B. Further, supplementary information defined for each protocol identification is stored in “selector_byte (selector area)”. An example of the data structure of the selector area in the case of HTTP / HTTPS transmission and MMT non-timed transmission is shown in FIG. 34C. It is assumed that information on the URL for acquiring the target application can be obtained by the “URL_base_byte (URL base)” parameter, the “URL_extension_byte (URL extension)” parameter, and the like.
　（３）ＭＨ－簡易アプリケーションロケーション記述子
　ＭＨ－簡易アプリケーションロケーション記述子は、アプリケーションの取得先の詳細を指示することを目的とし、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴのアプリケーション情報記述子ループにおいて、アプリケーション毎に必ず一つ配置するものとする。ＭＨ－簡易アプリケーションロケーション記述子のデータ構造の一例を図３５に示す。『ｉｎｉｔｉａｌ＿ｐａｔｈ＿ｂｙｔｅ（アプリケーションＵＲＬ）』パラメータに、対象アプリケーションのエントリーポイントとなるＵＲＬを示す。伝送プロトコル記述子に記述された、対象アプリケーションを取得可能なロケーションをルートとした相対パスで示して良い。 (3) MH-Simple Application Location Descriptor The MH-Simple Application Location Descriptor is intended to indicate the details of the application acquisition destination, and is always one for each application in the MH-AIT Application Information Descriptor Loop. Shall be placed. An example of the data structure of the MH-simple application location descriptor is shown in FIG. The “initial_path_byte (application URL)” parameter indicates a URL that is an entry point of the target application. It may be indicated by a relative path whose root is a location where the target application can be acquired, described in the transmission protocol descriptor.
　（４）ＭＨ－アプリケーション境界権限設定記述子
　ＭＨ－アプリケーション境界権限設定記述子は、アプリケーションバウンダリを設定し、かつ、領域（ＵＲＬ）毎に放送リソースアクセスの権限を設定することを目的とし、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴのアプリケーション情報記述子ループにおいて、一つまたは複数配置するものとする。本記述子を配置しない場合には、アプリケーションバウンダリは無限大となり、かつ、放送リソースへのアクセスも全て許可されるものとする。ＭＨ－アプリケーション境界権限設定記述子のデータ構造の一例を図３６に示す。『ｐｅｒｍｉｓｓｉｏｎ＿ｂｉｔｍａｐ（アクセス権限ビットマップ）』パラメータに、各放送リソースへのアクセス可否を、機能毎のビットマップで構成する。『ｍａｎａｇｅｄ＿ＵＲＬ＿ｂｙｔｅ（アクセス権限管理領域設定情報）』パラメータは、アクセスビットマップで示されるアクセス権限の設定が適用される領域のＵＲＬを示す。アクセス権限管理領域設定情報は、ドメインまたはそのサブディレクトリで指定される。 (4) MH-application boundary authority setting descriptor The MH-application boundary authority setting descriptor is for setting the application boundary and setting the broadcasting resource access authority for each area (URL). One or more are arranged in the application information descriptor loop of the AIT. When this descriptor is not arranged, the application boundary is infinite, and access to all broadcast resources is permitted. An example of the data structure of the MH-application boundary authority setting descriptor is shown in FIG. In the “permission_bitmap (access authority bitmap)” parameter, whether or not each broadcast resource is accessible is configured by a bitmap for each function. The “managed_URL_byte (access authority management area setting information)” parameter indicates the URL of the area to which the access authority setting indicated by the access bitmap is applied. The access authority management area setting information is specified in the domain or its subdirectory.
　（５）ＭＨ－起動優先情報記述子
　ＭＨ－起動優先情報記述子は、アプリケーション起動優先度を指定することを目的とし、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴのアプリケーション情報記述子ループにおいて、アプリケーション毎に最大一つ配置するものとする。但し、アプリケーション制御コードがアプリケーションの自動起動を指示するもの（『ＡＵＴＯＳＴＡＲＴ』等）を示すアプリケーション情報記述にのみ本記述子を配置するようにして良い。また、本記述子を配置しない場合は、データ放送も含めて最も優先度が低いと見做して良い。ＭＨ－起動優先情報記述子のデータ構造の一例を図３７に示す。『ａｕｔｏｓｔａｒｔ＿ｐｒｉｏｒｉｔｙ（起動優先順位）』パラメータは、現在受信中のサービスに連動するデータ放送および全てのアプリケーションの中で、対象アプリケーションの起動優先順位を示す。 (5) MH-Activation Priority Information Descriptor The MH-Activation Priority Information Descriptor is intended to specify the application activation priority, and is arranged at most for each application in the MH-AIT application information descriptor loop. Shall. However, this descriptor may be arranged only in the application information description indicating that the application control code instructs the automatic activation of the application (such as “AUTOSTART”). Further, when this descriptor is not arranged, it may be considered that the priority is lowest including data broadcasting. An example of the data structure of the MH-activation priority information descriptor is shown in FIG. The “autostart_priority (activation priority)” parameter indicates the activation priority of the target application among the data broadcasting and all applications linked to the currently received service.
　（６）ＭＨ－キャッシュ情報記述子
　ＭＨ－キャッシュ情報記述子は、アプリケーションの再利用が想定される場合にアプリケーションを構成するリソースをキャッシュして保持しておく場合のキャッシュ制御に用いることを目的とし、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴのアプリケーション情報記述子ループにおいて、アプリケーション毎に最大一つ配置するものとする。本記述子を配置しない場合には、受信機はアプリケーション終了時に、アプリケーションを構成するリソースを保持せずに削除するようにして良い。ＭＨ－キャッシュ情報記述子のデータ構造の一例を図３８Ａに示す。『ｃａｃｈｅ＿ｐｒｉｏｒｉｔｙ（キャッシュ優先度）』パラメータは、対象アプリケーションのキャッシュを保持する優先度を示す。値が大きいほど優先度が高いと見做すこととする。キャッシュ容量を超える場合には、本情報に基づいてアプリケーション単位でのキャッシュ削除を行うものとする。優先度を指定しない場合は、このパラメータを『０ｘＦＦ』とする。『ａｐｐｌｉｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｖｅｒｓｉｏｎ（アプリケーションバージョン）』パラメータは、対象アプリケーションのバージョン番号を示す。 (6) MH-cache information descriptor The MH-cache information descriptor is intended to be used for cache control when resources constituting an application are cached and held when application reuse is assumed. In the application information descriptor loop of MH-AIT, a maximum of one is arranged for each application. If this descriptor is not arranged, the receiver may delete the resource that does not hold the resource that constitutes the application when the application ends. An example of the data structure of the MH-cache information descriptor is shown in FIG. 38A. The “cache_priority (cache priority)” parameter indicates the priority for holding the cache of the target application. The higher the value, the higher the priority. When the cache capacity is exceeded, the cache is deleted in units of applications based on this information. If no priority is specified, this parameter is set to “0xFF”. The “application_version (application version)” parameter indicates the version number of the target application.
　受信機は、キャッシュしたアプリケーションに対応するアプリケーションバージョンを記憶しておき、その後のアプリケーション起動時にアプリケーションバージョンが更新されている場合には、キャッシュに保持したアプリケーションを用いずに、指定されたＵＲＬから新たにアプリケーションを取得して利用し、また、キャッシュの内容も書き換える。『ｅｘｐｉｒｅ＿ｄａｔｅ（キャッシュ有効期限）』パラメータは、対象アプリケーションのキャッシュ有効期限をＭＪＤの下位１６ビットで年月日として示す。受信機は、対象アプリケーションをこの期限日までキャッシュすることが可能である。期限を超えた場合にはキャッシュから削除する。無期限とする場合には、このパラメータを『０ｘＦＦＦＦ』とする。このキャッシュ有効期限パラメータが設定されていない場合は、アプリケーションの動作安定性を重要視して、番組終了後のキャッシュ保持を禁止しても良いし、視聴者の利便性を考えて無期限のキャッシュ保持を行っても良いし、両者のバランスをとり、予め定められた一定期間、キャッシュを保持するようにしても良い。 The receiver stores the application version corresponding to the cached application, and if the application version is updated when the application is subsequently started, a new URL is specified from the specified URL without using the application stored in the cache. The application is acquired and used, and the contents of the cache are rewritten. The “expire_date (cache expiration date)” parameter indicates the cache expiration date of the target application as the date in the lower 16 bits of the MJD. The receiver can cache the target application until this expiration date. When the time limit is exceeded, it is deleted from the cache. In the case of an indefinite period, this parameter is set to “0xFFFF”. If this cache expiration parameter is not set, the operation stability of the application may be emphasized, and retention of the cache after the end of the program may be prohibited. In consideration of the convenience of the viewer, an indefinite cache You may hold | maintain and you may make both balance and hold | maintain a cache for a predetermined fixed period.
　また、キャッシュ期限ではなく、アプリケーション毎の使用可能期限を設定しても良い。アプリケーション毎の有効期限を記述する、ＭＨ－アプリケーション有効期限記述子のデータ構造一例を図３８Ｂに示す。この期限を超える場合は、そのアプリケーションの使用を禁止する。長期間のキャッシュは認めないが、一定期間は使用時に取得し直して使用する形態を許可することができ、多様なアプリケーション利用の形態を可能にすることができる。 Also, you may set the expiration date for each application instead of the cache expiration date. FIG. 38B shows an example of the data structure of the MH-application expiration date descriptor that describes the expiration date for each application. If this time limit is exceeded, use of the application is prohibited. Although a long-term cache is not allowed, it is possible to permit a form that is re-obtained and used during a certain period of time, thereby enabling various forms of application usage.
　（７）ＭＨ－確率的適用遅延記述子
　ＭＨ－確率的適用遅延記述子は、アプリケーション取得のサーバアクセスの負荷分散を想定して、アプリケーション制御を行うタイミングを確率的に設定した遅延量だけ遅らせることを目的とし、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴのアプリケーション情報記述子ループにおいて、アプリケーション毎に最大一つ配置するものとする。本記述子を配置しない場合には、特定のバージョンのＭＨ－ＡＩＴを最初に受信したタイミングで制御コードに示される制御動作を行うこととする。ＭＨ－確率的適用遅延記述子のデータ構造の一例を図３９に示す。『ｒａｎｇｅ（遅延時間幅）』パラメータは、制御コード適用までの現在時刻からの最大遅延時間を秒数で示す。『ｒａｔｅ（分散数）』パラメータは、確率的に設定する制御コード適用までの遅延時間の段階数を示す。受信機は、『０』から『ｒａｔｅ』までの整数のうちからランダムに選択した値『Ｎ』を基に、『Ｎ×ｒａｎｇｅ÷ｒａｔｅ』の計算式で遅延時間を算出し、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴ受信時よりも前記遅延時間分だけ遅延させて制御コードを適用する。『ｒａｎｄｏｍｉｚａｔｉｏｎ＿ｅｎｄ＿ｔｉｍｅ（確率的適用終了時刻）』パラメータは、確率的適用遅延処理を行うべき時間の期限を示す。このパラメータに示される時刻の後にＭＨ－ＡＩＴを受信した場合には、即時に制御コードを適用する。日付をＭＪＤの下位１６ビットで、時刻をＪＳＴの時分秒をＢＣＤの２４ビットで符号化する。 (7) MH-Probabilistic Application Delay Descriptor The MH-Probabilistic Application Delay Descriptor delays application control timing by a stochastically set delay amount assuming load distribution of server access for application acquisition. In the application information descriptor loop of MH-AIT, a maximum of one is arranged for each application. When this descriptor is not arranged, the control operation indicated in the control code is performed at the timing when a specific version of MH-AIT is first received. An example of the data structure of the MH-stochastic application delay descriptor is shown in FIG. The “range (delay time width)” parameter indicates the maximum delay time from the current time until application of the control code in seconds. The “rate (dispersion number)” parameter indicates the number of stages of delay time until the control code to be set stochastically. The receiver calculates the delay time using the formula “N × range ÷ rate” based on the value “N” randomly selected from the integers “0” to “rate”, and receives the MH-AIT. The control code is applied after being delayed by the delay time. The “randomization_end_time (probabilistic application end time)” parameter indicates a time limit for performing the stochastic application delay process. When MH-AIT is received after the time indicated by this parameter, the control code is applied immediately. The date is encoded with the lower 16 bits of MJD, and the time is encoded with JST hours, minutes and seconds using BCD 24 bits.
　また、本実施例のＭＨ－ＡＩＴが、前述とは異なるパラメータや記述子等を更に含んでいても良い。 In addition, the MH-AIT of the present embodiment may further include parameters, descriptors, and the like different from those described above.
　以下では、本実施例の放送受信装置１００の動作に関して説明する。 Hereinafter, the operation of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.
　［アプリケーション起動時の動作シーケンス］
　まず、本実施例の放送受信装置１００における、放送波で送信されるＭＨ－ＡＩＴに基づいた放送連携アプリの自動起動処理に関して、図４０Ａを用いて、説明を行う。これは、選局したチャンネルに関連する放送連携アプリが自動的に起動する場合の例である。 [Operation sequence at application startup]
First, with reference to FIG. 40A, an explanation will be given on the automatic activation processing of the broadcast cooperative app based on the MH-AIT transmitted by the broadcast wave in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment. This is an example of a case where a broadcast cooperation application related to a selected channel is automatically activated.
　放送受信装置１００のチューナ／復調部１３１がユーザの所望するチャンネルの選局処理を行ってＭＭＴデータ列を取得すると、アプリケーション制御部１５３がＭ２セクションメッセージに格納されたＭＨ－ＡＩＴの確認を行う（Ｓ１００１）。なお、Ｍ２セクションメッセージにＭＨ－ＡＩＴが格納されていない場合には、前記選局したチャンネルに関連する放送連携アプリが存在しないものとして、自動起動処理を終了して良い。次に、前記ＭＨ－ＡＩＴに記載された各放送連携アプリのアプリケーション形式およびアプリケーション制御コードの確認を行う（Ｓ１００２）。Ｓ１００２の処理の結果、『自動起動（ＡＵＴＯＳＴＡＲＴ）』のアプリケーション制御コードを有する放送連携アプリがない場合（Ｓ１００３：Ｎｏ）には、自動起動処理を終了して良い。この場合、あらためてランチャ処理が可能であるが、このランチャ処理に関しては後述する。 When the tuner / demodulation unit 131 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 selects a channel desired by the user and acquires the MMT data string, the application control unit 153 confirms the MH-AIT stored in the M2 section message ( S1001). If MH-AIT is not stored in the M2 section message, the automatic activation process may be terminated assuming that there is no broadcast cooperation application related to the selected channel. Next, the application format and application control code of each broadcast cooperative application described in the MH-AIT are confirmed (S1002). As a result of the process of S1002, when there is no broadcast cooperation application having the application control code of “automatic start (AUTOSTART)” (S1003: No), the automatic start process may be terminated. In this case, launcher processing can be performed again. This launcher processing will be described later.
　一方、Ｓ１００２の処理の結果、『自動起動』のアプリケーション制御コードを有する放送連携アプリがある場合（Ｓ１００３：Ｙｅｓ）には、前記放送連携アプリに係るＭＨ－ＡＩＴのＭＨ－起動優先情報記述子の確認を行う（Ｓ１００４）。次に、『自動起動』のアプリケーション制御コードを有する放送連携アプリのうち最も優先度の高い放送連携アプリを選択し（Ｓ１００５）、前記選択した放送連携アプリに係るＭＨ－ＡＩＴのＭＨ－アプリケーション記述子の確認を行う（Ｓ１００６）。前記ＭＨ－アプリケーション記述子に記載されたアプリケーションプロファイルを放送受信装置１００が満足する場合（Ｓ１００７：Ｙｅｓ）には、次の処理に進む。前記ＭＨ－アプリケーション記述子に記載されたアプリケーションプロファイルを放送受信装置１００が満足しない場合（Ｓ１００７：Ｎｏ）には、前記選択した放送連携アプリは放送受信装置１００にて起動不能と判断する。この場合、次優先の放送連携アプリがあるか否かを確認し（Ｓ１００８）、次優先の放送連携アプリがない場合には、自動起動処理を終了して良い。次優先の放送連携アプリがある場合には、前記次優先の放送連携アプリを選択して（Ｓ１００９）、Ｓ１００６～Ｓ１００７の処理を繰り返す。 On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1002, when there is a broadcast cooperative app having an application control code of “automatic start” (S1003: Yes), the MH-start priority information descriptor of the MH-AIT related to the broadcast cooperative app is set. Confirmation is performed (S1004). Next, the broadcast cooperative app having the highest priority is selected from the broadcast cooperative apps having the application control code of “automatic start” (S1005), and the MH-application descriptor of the MH-AIT related to the selected broadcast cooperative app. Is confirmed (S1006). When the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 satisfies the application profile described in the MH-application descriptor (S1007: Yes), the process proceeds to the next process. If the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 does not satisfy the application profile described in the MH-application descriptor (S1007: No), it is determined that the selected broadcast cooperative application cannot be activated by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100. In this case, it is confirmed whether or not there is a next-priority broadcast cooperation app (S1008). If there is no next-priority broadcast cooperation app, the automatic activation process may be terminated. If there is a next-priority broadcast cooperation app, the next-priority broadcast cooperation app is selected (S1009), and the processing of S1006 to S1007 is repeated.
　Ｓ１００７の処理で、前記ＭＨ－アプリケーション記述子に記載されたアプリケーションプロファイルを放送受信装置１００が満足すると判断した場合には、前記選択した放送連携アプリに係るＭＨ－ＡＩＴのＭＨ－伝送プロトコル記述子の確認を行う（Ｓ１０１０）。Ｓ１０１０の処理の結果、前記ＭＨ－伝送プロトコル記述子に記載されたプロトコル識別により、前記選択した放送連携アプリがＨＴＴＰ／ＨＴＴＰＳ伝送により取得可能である場合（Ｓ１０１１：Ｙｅｓ）には、更に、前記選択した放送連携アプリに係るＭＨ－ＡＩＴのＭＨ－簡易アプリケーションロケーション記述子の確認を行い（Ｓ１０１２）、前記選択した放送連携アプリのエントリーポイントのＵＲＬを取得する。 If it is determined in step S1007 that the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 satisfies the application profile described in the MH-application descriptor, the MH-transmission protocol descriptor of the MH-AIT related to the selected broadcast cooperative application is set. Confirmation is performed (S1010). As a result of the processing of S1010, when the selected broadcast cooperation application can be acquired by HTTP / HTTPS transmission by the protocol identification described in the MH-transmission protocol descriptor (S1011: Yes), the selection is further performed. The MH-Simple application location descriptor of the MH-AIT related to the broadcast cooperation application is confirmed (S1012), and the URL of the entry point of the selected broadcast cooperation application is acquired.
　Ｓ１０１２の処理で前記選択した放送連携アプリのエントリーポイントのＵＲＬを取得すると、次に、ＬＡＮ通信部１２１がインターネット２００上の前記ＵＲＬで指定されるサーバ（本実施例では、サービス事業者サーバ４００）に対して、放送連携アプリの配信要求を行う（Ｓ１０１３）。前記配信要求を受信したサービス事業者サーバ４００は、適宜放送受信装置１００の認証処理等を行った後に、要求された放送連携アプリの配信を行う（Ｓ１０１４）。ＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介して、サービス事業者サーバ４００から放送連携アプリを受信すると、放送受信装置１００は、アプリケーション制御部１５３の制御に基づき、ブラウザ部１５４にて前記受信した放送連携アプリの起動を実行する（Ｓ１０１８）。なお、サービス事業者サーバ４００で行われる放送受信装置１００の認証処理は公知の処理であって良く、詳細の説明を省略する。 When the URL of the entry point of the selected broadcast cooperation application is acquired in the process of S1012, next, the LAN communication unit 121 is a server specified by the URL on the Internet 200 (in this embodiment, the service provider server 400). In response to this, a broadcast cooperation application distribution request is made (S1013). The service provider server 400 that has received the distribution request distributes the requested broadcast cooperative app after appropriately performing authentication processing of the broadcast receiving device 100 or the like (S1014). When receiving the broadcast cooperative app from the service provider server 400 via the LAN communication unit 121, the broadcast receiving device 100 activates the received broadcast cooperative app in the browser unit 154 based on the control of the application control unit 153. Execute (S1018). Note that the authentication process of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 performed by the service provider server 400 may be a known process, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
　一方、Ｓ１０１０の処理の結果、前記ＭＨ－伝送プロトコル記述子に記載されたプロトコル識別により、前記選択した放送連携アプリがデータカルーセル伝送により取得可能である場合（Ｓ１０１１：Ｎｏ）には、アプリケーション制御部１５３は、データ伝送メッセージに格納されたＤＤＭテーブルおよびＤＡＭテーブルの確認を行い（Ｓ１０１５、Ｓ１０１６）、前述の［アプリケーション伝送方式の概要］で説明した手順で、前記選択した放送連携アプリが伝送されるアセットを特定する。更に、放送波の前記特定されたアセットから放送連携アプリを取得する（Ｓ１０１７）と、放送受信装置１００は、アプリケーション制御部１５３の制御に基づき、ブラウザ部１５４にて前記受信した放送連携アプリの起動を実行する（Ｓ１０１８）。 On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1010, when the selected broadcast cooperation application can be acquired by data carousel transmission based on the protocol identification described in the MH-transmission protocol descriptor (S1011: No), the application control unit 153 confirms the DDM table and the DAM table stored in the data transmission message (S1015, S1016), and the selected broadcast cooperation application is transmitted in the procedure described in [Overview of application transmission method]. Identify assets. Further, when the broadcast cooperative app is acquired from the specified asset of the broadcast wave (S1017), the broadcast receiving device 100 activates the received broadcast cooperative app in the browser unit 154 based on the control of the application control unit 153. Is executed (S1018).
　以上の一連の処理により、本実施例の放送受信装置１００において、放送波で送信されるＭＨ－ＡＩＴに基づいた放送連携アプリの自動起動処理が可能となる。なお、Ｓ１００４、Ｓ１００６、Ｓ１０１０、Ｓ１０１２、の各処理におけるＭＨ－ＡＩＴの確認処理は、都度放送波からＭＨ－ＡＩＴを取得して確認するようにしても良いし、Ｓ１００１の処理で取得したＭＨ－ＡＩＴをキャッシュしておき、前記キャッシュしたＭＨ－ＡＩＴを確認するようにしても良い。また、前記動作シーケンスは、あくまでも一例であり、異なる処理手順を用いても良い。 Through the series of processes described above, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment can automatically start the broadcast cooperative application based on the MH-AIT transmitted by the broadcast wave. Note that the MH-AIT confirmation process in each of the processes of S1004, S1006, S1010, and S1012, may be performed by acquiring the MH-AIT from the broadcast wave each time and confirming the MH-AIT acquired in the process of S1001. The AIT may be cached and the cached MH-AIT may be confirmed. The operation sequence is merely an example, and different processing procedures may be used.
　次に、本実施例の放送受信装置１００における、放送波で送信されるＭＨ－ＡＩＴに基づいた放送連携アプリのランチャ処理に関して、図４０Ｂを用いて、説明を行う。これは、選局したチャンネルに関連する放送連携アプリを、ユーザの指示に基づいて起動する場合の例である。 Next, with reference to FIG. 40B, the launcher process of the broadcast cooperative application based on the MH-AIT transmitted by the broadcast wave in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment will be described. This is an example of a case where a broadcast cooperation application related to a selected channel is activated based on a user instruction.
　放送受信装置１００のチューナ／復調部１３１がユーザの所望するチャンネルの選局処理を行ってＭＭＴデータ列を取得すると、アプリケーション制御部１５３がＭ２セクションメッセージに格納されたＭＨ－ＡＩＴの確認を行う（Ｓ１１０１）。なお、Ｍ２セクションメッセージにＭＨ－ＡＩＴが格納されていない場合には、前記選局したチャンネルに関連する放送連携アプリが存在しないものとして、自動起動処理を終了して良い。次に、前記ＭＨ－ＡＩＴに記載された各放送連携アプリのアプリケーション形式およびアプリケーション制御コードの確認を行う（Ｓ１１０２）。Ｓ１１０２の処理の結果、『自動起動（ＡＵＴＯＳＴＡＲＴ）』のアプリケーション制御コードを有する放送連携アプリがある場合（Ｓ１１０３：Ｙｅｓ）には、図４０Ａに示した自動起動処理が可能である。 When the tuner / demodulation unit 131 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 selects a channel desired by the user and acquires the MMT data string, the application control unit 153 confirms the MH-AIT stored in the M2 section message ( S1101). If MH-AIT is not stored in the M2 section message, the automatic activation process may be terminated assuming that there is no broadcast cooperation application related to the selected channel. Next, the application format and application control code of each broadcast cooperative application described in the MH-AIT are confirmed (S1102). As a result of the processing of S1102, when there is a broadcast cooperative app having an application control code of “automatic start (AUTOSTART)” (S1103: Yes), the automatic start processing shown in FIG. 40A is possible.
　一方、Ｓ１１０２の処理の結果、『自動起動』のアプリケーション制御コードを有する放送連携アプリがない場合（Ｓ１１０３：Ｎｏ）には、再度、『実行可能（ＰＲＥＳＥＮＴ）』のアプリケーション制御コードを有する放送連携アプリがあるか否かを確認し、『実行可能』のアプリケーション制御コードを有する放送連携アプリがない場合（Ｓ１１０４：Ｎｏ）には、ランチャ処理を終了して良い。『実行可能』のアプリケーション制御コードを有する放送連携アプリがある場合（Ｓ１１０４：Ｙｅｓ）には、前記『実行可能』のアプリケーション制御コードを有する放送連携アプリのそれぞれに係るＭＨ－ＡＩＴのＭＨ－アプリケーション記述子の確認を行う（Ｓ１１０５）。Ｓ１１０５の処理の結果、前記ＭＨ－アプリケーション記述子に記載されたアプリケーションプロファイルを放送受信装置１００が満足する放送連携アプリが一つもない場合（Ｓ１１０６：Ｎｏ）には、ランチャ処理を終了して良い。前記ＭＨ－アプリケーション記述子に記載されたアプリケーションプロファイルを放送受信装置１００が満足する放送連携アプリが一つでもある場合（Ｓ１１０６：Ｙｅｓ）には、次の処理に進む。 On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1102, if there is no broadcast cooperation application having the application control code of “automatic start” (S1103: No), the broadcast cooperation application having the application control code of “executable (PRESENT)” again. If there is no broadcast cooperation app having an “executable” application control code (S1104: No), the launcher process may be terminated. When there is a broadcast cooperation application having an “executable” application control code (S1104: Yes), the MH-AIT MH-application description for each of the broadcast cooperation applications having the “executable” application control code. The child is confirmed (S1105). As a result of the process of S1105, if there is no broadcast cooperative app that satisfies the application profile described in the MH-application descriptor (S1106: No), the launcher process may be terminated. If there is at least one broadcast cooperative app that satisfies the application profile described in the MH-application descriptor (S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to the next process.
　Ｓ１１０１～Ｓ１１０３およびＳ１１０４～Ｓ１１０６の処理を終えた状態で、放送受信装置１００は未だ放送連携アプリを実行しておらず、モニタ部１６２には通常の放送番組映像が表示されているものとする。この状態で、ユーザが、放送受信装置１００を操作可能なリモコンや携帯情報端末を用いて、放送連携アプリランチャの起動指示を行う（Ｓ１１０７）と、モニタ部１６２に放送受信装置１００で実行可能な放送連携アプリの一覧がＯＳＤ表示される（Ｓ１１０８）。更に、ユーザが、前記リモコンや携帯情報端末を操作して、前記放送連携アプリの一覧からの所望の放送連携アプリの選択を指示する（Ｓ１１０９）と、アプリケーション制御部１５３は、前記ユーザの指示に基づいた放送連携アプリの選択を行い（Ｓ１１１０）、前記選択した放送連携アプリを取得して起動する（Ｓ１１１１～Ｓ１１１９）。なお、Ｓ１１１１～Ｓ１１１９の処理は、図４０Ａに示したＳ１０１０～Ｓ１０１８の処理と同様であって良い。 In the state where the processing of S1101 to S1103 and S1104 to S1106 has been completed, it is assumed that the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 has not yet executed the broadcast cooperation app, and the normal broadcast program video is displayed on the monitor unit 162. In this state, when the user gives an instruction to start the broadcast cooperative app launcher using a remote control or portable information terminal capable of operating the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S1107), the monitor 162 can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100. A list of broadcast cooperative applications is displayed in OSD (S1108). Furthermore, when the user operates the remote controller or the portable information terminal to instruct selection of a desired broadcast cooperative app from the list of broadcast cooperative apps (S1109), the application control unit 153 responds to the user instruction. Based on the selected broadcast cooperation app, the selected broadcast cooperation app is acquired and activated (S1111 to S1119). Note that the processing of S1111 to S1119 may be the same as the processing of S1010 to S1018 shown in FIG. 40A.
　以上の一連の処理により、本実施例の放送受信装置１００において、放送波で送信されるＭＨ－ＡＩＴに基づいた放送連携アプリのランチャ処理が可能となる。なお、Ｓ１１０５、Ｓ１１１１、Ｓ１１１３、の各処理におけるＭＨ－ＡＩＴの確認処理は、都度放送波からＭＨ－ＡＩＴを取得して確認するようにしても良いし、Ｓ１１０１の処理で取得したＭＨ－ＡＩＴをキャッシュしておき、前記キャッシュしたＭＨ－ＡＩＴを確認するようにしても良い。また、Ｓ１１０４～Ｓ１１０６の処理とＳ１１０７～Ｓ１１１０の処理は順序を入れ替えても良い。この場合、Ｓ１１０４～Ｓ１１０６のプロファイル確認処理は、Ｓ１１１０の処理で選択された放送連携アプリに対してのみ行われるものであっても良い。また、Ｓ１１０８の処理で表示される放送連携アプリの一覧は、アプリケーションプロファイルの状況に応じて放送受信装置１００で実行可能なもののみを表示するようにしても良いし、アプリケーションプロファイルの状況によらず全ての放送連携アプリを表示して、放送受信装置１００で実行不可能なものは無効化するようにしても良い。また、前記動作シーケンスは、あくまでも一例であり、異なる処理手順を用いても良い。 Through the series of processes described above, the broadcast receiving device 100 according to the present embodiment enables launcher processing of a broadcast cooperative application based on the MH-AIT transmitted by broadcast waves. Note that the MH-AIT confirmation process in each process of S1105, S1111 and S1113 may be performed by acquiring the MH-AIT from the broadcast wave each time, or confirming the MH-AIT acquired in the process of S1101. It may be cached and the cached MH-AIT may be confirmed. Further, the order of the processes of S1104 to S1106 and the processes of S1107 to S1110 may be interchanged. In this case, the profile confirmation processing in S1104 to S1106 may be performed only for the broadcast cooperative app selected in the processing in S1110. In addition, the list of broadcast cooperative apps displayed in the processing of S1108 may be displayed only for those that can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the status of the application profile, or regardless of the status of the application profile. All broadcast cooperative apps may be displayed, and those that cannot be executed by the broadcast receiving device 100 may be invalidated. The operation sequence is merely an example, and different processing procedures may be used.
　次に、本実施例の放送受信装置１００における、放送波で送信されるＭＨ－ＡＩＴに基づいた放送連携アプリをデータ放送画面から起動する処理に関して、図４０Ｃを用いて、説明を行う。 Next, with reference to FIG. 40C, a description will be given of processing for starting a broadcast cooperative app based on MH-AIT transmitted by broadcast waves from the data broadcast screen in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment.
　放送受信装置１００のチューナ／復調部１３１がユーザの所望するチャンネルの選局処理を行ってＭＭＴデータ列を取得すると、アプリケーション制御部１５３がＭ２セクションメッセージに格納されたＭＨ－ＡＩＴの確認を行い、『自動起動（ＡＵＴＯＳＴＡＲＴ）』または『実行可能（ＰＲＥＳＥＮＴ）』のアプリケーション制御コードを有する放送連携アプリがあるか否かを確認する（Ｓ１２０１～Ｓ１２０６）。なお、Ｓ１２０１～Ｓ１２０６の処理は、図４０Ｂに示したＳ１１０１～Ｓ１１０６の処理と同様であって良い。 When the tuner / demodulation unit 131 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 selects a channel desired by the user and acquires the MMT data string, the application control unit 153 checks the MH-AIT stored in the M2 section message, It is confirmed whether there is a broadcast cooperation application having an application control code of “automatic start (AUTOSTART)” or “executable (PRESENT)” (S1201 to S1206). Note that the processing of S1201 to S1206 may be the same as the processing of S1101 to S1106 shown in FIG. 40B.
　Ｓ１２０１～Ｓ２１０６の処理を終えた状態で、放送受信装置１００は未だ放送連携アプリを実行しておらず、モニタ部１６２には通常の放送番組映像が表示されているものとする。この状態で、ユーザが、放送受信装置１００を操作可能なリモコンや携帯情報端末を用いて、データ放送画面の起動指示を行う（Ｓ１２０７）と、（データ放送画面の表示が可能な場合には、）データデコーダ１５１が前記ＭＭＴデータ列のデータカルーセルからＢＭＬ文書等を取得し、前記取得したＢＭＬ文書等を解釈することによりデータ放送画面を作成して、モニタ部１６２に表示する（Ｓ１２０８）。なお、Ｓ１２０８の処理で表示されたデータ放送画面には、Ｓ１２０６の処理で確認したアプリケーションプロファイルを放送受信装置１００が満足する放送連携アプリが一つでもある場合には、前記放送連携アプリに係るエントリーボタンが表示される。Ｓ１２０６の処理で確認したアプリケーションプロファイルを放送受信装置１００が満足する放送連携アプリが一つもない場合には、前記放送連携アプリに係るエントリーボタンは表示されなくとも良いし、無効状態で表示されても良い。 Suppose that the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 has not yet executed the broadcast cooperation application after the processing of S1201 to S2106 has been completed, and the normal broadcast program video is displayed on the monitor unit 162. In this state, when the user issues a start instruction for the data broadcast screen using a remote control or portable information terminal that can operate the broadcast receiving device 100 (S1207), (if the data broadcast screen can be displayed, The data decoder 151 acquires a BML document or the like from the data carousel of the MMT data string, creates a data broadcast screen by interpreting the acquired BML document or the like, and displays it on the monitor unit 162 (S1208). In addition, in the data broadcast screen displayed in the process of S1208, if there is at least one broadcast cooperative app that satisfies the broadcast receiver 100 with the application profile confirmed in the process of S1206, the entry related to the broadcast cooperative app is displayed. A button is displayed. If there is no broadcast cooperation app that satisfies the application profile confirmed in the processing of S1206, the entry button related to the broadcast cooperation app may not be displayed or may be displayed in an invalid state. good.
　更に、ユーザが、前記リモコンや携帯情報端末を操作して、前記データ放送画面に表示された所望の放送連携アプリのエントリーボタンの選択（起動）を指示する（Ｓ１２０９）と、アプリケーション制御部１５３は、前記ユーザの指示に基づいた放送連携アプリの選択を行い（Ｓ１２１０）、前記選択した放送連携アプリの取得を行う（Ｓ１２１１～Ｓ１２１８）。なお、Ｓ１２１１～Ｓ１２１８の処理は、図４０Ａに示したＳ１０１０～Ｓ１０１７の処理と同様であって良い。Ｓ１２１１～Ｓ１２１８の処理で前記選択した放送連携アプリの取得を終えると、データ放送画面の表示を終了して（Ｓ１２１９）、アプリケーション制御部１５３が前記選択した放送連携アプリを起動する（Ｓ１２２０）。 Further, when the user operates the remote controller or the portable information terminal to instruct selection (activation) of an entry button of a desired broadcast cooperation application displayed on the data broadcast screen (S1209), the application control unit 153 The broadcast cooperative app is selected based on the user's instruction (S1210), and the selected broadcast cooperative app is acquired (S1211 to S1218). Note that the processing of S1211 to S1218 may be the same as the processing of S1010 to S1017 shown in FIG. 40A. When the acquisition of the selected broadcast cooperative app is completed in the processing of S1211 to S1218, the display of the data broadcast screen is terminated (S1219), and the application control unit 153 activates the selected broadcast cooperative app (S1220).
　以上の一連の処理により、本実施例の放送受信装置１００において、放送波で送信されるＭＨ－ＡＩＴに基づいた放送連携アプリをデータ放送画面から起動する処理が可能となる。なお、Ｓ１２０５、Ｓ１２１１、Ｓ１２１３、の各処理におけるＭＨ－ＡＩＴの確認処理は、都度放送波からＭＨ－ＡＩＴを取得して確認するようにしても良いし、Ｓ１２０１の処理で取得したＭＨ－ＡＩＴをキャッシュしておき、前記キャッシュしたＭＨ－ＡＩＴを確認するようにしても良い。また、Ｓ１２０４～Ｓ１２０６の処理とＳ１２０７の処理は順序を入れ替えても良い。また、Ｓ１２１９の処理は、Ｓ１２０９の処理の直後に行っても良い。あるいは、Ｓ１２１９の処理を行わず、ＬＣＴの記述に基づいて、モニタ部１６２の表示領域を分割したそれぞれの領域に、放送連携アプリ、データ放送画面、放送番組映像、等が、同時に表示されても良い。また、前記動作シーケンスは、あくまでも一例であり、異なる処理手順を用いても良い。 Through the series of processes described above, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment can perform a process of starting a broadcast cooperative application based on the MH-AIT transmitted by broadcast waves from the data broadcast screen. Note that the MH-AIT confirmation process in each process of S1205, S1211, and S1213 may be performed by acquiring the MH-AIT from the broadcast wave each time, or confirming the MH-AIT acquired in the process of S1201. It may be cached and the cached MH-AIT may be confirmed. Further, the order of the processes of S1204 to S1206 and the process of S1207 may be interchanged. Further, the process of S1219 may be performed immediately after the process of S1209. Alternatively, the broadcast cooperation application, the data broadcast screen, the broadcast program video, and the like may be simultaneously displayed in the respective areas obtained by dividing the display area of the monitor unit 162 based on the description of the LCT without performing the process of S1219. good. The operation sequence is merely an example, and different processing procedures may be used.
　なお、図４０Ａ～図４０Ｃを用いて説明した放送連携アプリの起動シーケンスでは、何れも放送波からＭＨ－ＡＩＴを取得する例を説明しているが、ロケーション情報（ＭＭＴ＿ｇｅｎｅｒａｌ＿ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ＿ｉｎｆｏ）等により指定された所定のサーバ装置（放送局サーバ３００等）からＭＨ－ＡＩＴファイルを取得するようにしても良い。 Note that in the broadcast cooperative app activation sequence described with reference to FIGS. 40A to 40C, all examples of acquiring the MH-AIT from the broadcast wave are described. However, the predetermined sequence specified by the location information (MMT_general_location_info) or the like is used. The MH-AIT file may be acquired from the server device (such as the broadcast station server 300).
　また、Ｓ１０１３、Ｓ１１１４、Ｓ１２１４で放送連携アプリの配信要求を行った際にサービス事業者サーバ４００等からのレスポンスが所定時間以上ない場合には、『しばらくお待ちください』等のメッセージをモニタ部１６２に表示するようにしても良い。または、この場合、前記放送連携アプリの実行中止をユーザに問い合わせるメッセージを表示しても良い。 In addition, when a response from the service provider server 400 or the like is not received for a predetermined time or more when a broadcast cooperation application distribution request is made in S1013, S1114, or S1214, a message such as “Please wait for a while” is displayed on the monitor unit 162. It may be displayed. Alternatively, in this case, a message for inquiring the user to cancel the execution of the broadcast cooperative app may be displayed.
　また、放送連携アプリの起動シーケンスは前述の三パターンに限られるものではなく、異なるシーケンスによって起動されるものであっても良い。 In addition, the activation sequence of the broadcast cooperative application is not limited to the above three patterns, and may be activated by a different sequence.
　［携帯情報端末の連携時の動作シーケンス］
　本実施例の放送受信装置１００では、放送受信装置１００と携帯情報端末７００との連携動作による放送通信連携サービスの機能拡張が可能であるものとする。例えば、テレビ受信機のメーカが用意するアプリケーション（連携制御アプリ）をインストールすることにより、携帯情報端末７００を放送受信装置１００の高機能リモコンとして使用することが可能となる。また、携帯情報端末７００上でも放送連携アプリを実行し、例えば、放送受信装置１００で表示中の放送番組に連動するサービスを携帯情報端末７００上でも表示することが可能となる。なお、放送受信装置１００と携帯情報端末７００との連携動作による機能拡張を行うためには、前記連携制御アプリが携帯情報端末７００上で起動していることが望ましく、携帯情報端末７００上で動作する放送連携アプリは前記連携制御アプリに制御されて動作するものとする。 [Operation sequence when linking portable information terminals]
In the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment, it is assumed that the function of the broadcast communication cooperation service can be expanded by the cooperative operation between the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700. For example, by installing an application (cooperation control application) prepared by a TV receiver manufacturer, the portable information terminal 700 can be used as a high-function remote controller for the broadcast receiving apparatus 100. Also, the broadcast cooperation application can be executed on the portable information terminal 700, and for example, a service linked to the broadcast program being displayed on the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can be displayed on the portable information terminal 700. In addition, in order to perform a function expansion by a cooperative operation between the broadcast receiving device 100 and the portable information terminal 700, it is desirable that the cooperation control application is activated on the portable information terminal 700, and operates on the portable information terminal 700. The broadcast cooperation app to be operated is controlled by the cooperation control app.
　図４１Ａは、前記連携制御アプリを携帯情報端末７００で起動する際の動作の一例を示す動作シーケンス図である。同図は、携帯情報端末７００が放送受信装置１００との認証処理を行い、連携動作が可能となるまでの一連の流れを示すものである。なお、前記連携制御アプリは、連携制御プログラム７００２として、予め携帯情報端末７００のストレージ部７１０にインストールされているものとする。前記連携制御プログラム７００２がインストールされていない場合には、まず前記連携制御プログラム７００２のインストールを行うものとする。 FIG. 41A is an operation sequence diagram illustrating an example of an operation when the cooperation control application is activated on the portable information terminal 700. This figure shows a series of flows from when the portable information terminal 700 performs an authentication process with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 until a cooperative operation is possible. It is assumed that the cooperation control application is installed in the storage unit 710 of the portable information terminal 700 in advance as the cooperation control program 7002. If the cooperation control program 7002 is not installed, the cooperation control program 7002 is first installed.
　ユーザが、携帯情報端末７００の操作部７３０を操作して、連携制御アプリの起動を指示する（Ｓ１３０１）と、携帯情報端末７００の連携制御実行部７１０２が、まず、ネットワーク上の通信（連携動作）可能なテレビ受信機の検索を行い（Ｓ１３０２）、検索結果をテレビ受信機一覧として表示部７４１に表示する（Ｓ１３０３）。前記表示されるテレビ受信機一覧は、過去に携帯情報端末７００との連係動作を行った履歴を有するものと有しないものが混在していても良く、その場合、表示書式により過去の連係動作履歴の有無が判別可能であることが望ましい。また、通信可能なテレビ受信機が発見できない場合は、その旨を表示して処理を終了して良い。 When the user operates the operation unit 730 of the portable information terminal 700 to instruct the activation of the cooperation control application (S1301), the cooperation control execution unit 7102 of the portable information terminal 700 first performs communication on the network (cooperation operation). ) A search for possible television receivers is performed (S1302), and the search results are displayed on the display unit 741 as a list of television receivers (S1303). The list of TV receivers displayed may include a list of records that have been linked with the portable information terminal 700 in the past and a list of records that have not been linked. It is desirable to be able to determine whether or not there is. Further, when a communicable television receiver cannot be found, the fact may be displayed and the process may be terminated.
　ユーザが、携帯情報端末７００の操作部７３０を操作して、前記テレビ受信機一覧から所定のテレビ受信機（本実施例の放送受信装置１００）を選択する（Ｓ１３０４）と、放送受信装置１００が過去に携帯情報端末７００との連係動作を行った履歴を有する場合（Ｓ１３０５：Ｙｅｓ）には、ストレージ部７１０の認証情報記憶領域７３００から、放送受信装置１００に係る認証情報（放送受信装置１００により指定されたログイン名およびパスワード、等）を読み出して（Ｓ１３０６）、次の処理に進む。 When the user operates the operation unit 730 of the portable information terminal 700 to select a predetermined television receiver (broadcast receiving device 100 of the present embodiment) from the television receiver list (S1304), the broadcast receiving device 100 In the case where there is a history of performing a linking operation with the portable information terminal 700 in the past (S1305: Yes), authentication information related to the broadcast receiving device 100 (by the broadcast receiving device 100) from the authentication information storage area 7300 of the storage unit 710. The designated login name and password are read out (S1306), and the process proceeds to the next process.
　一方、放送受信装置１００が過去に携帯情報端末７００との連係動作を行った履歴を有しない場合（Ｓ１３０５：Ｎｏ）には、連携制御実行部７１０２が、放送受信装置１００に対してログイン画面情報要求を送信する（Ｓ１３０７）。Ｓ１３０７の処理に応じて放送受信装置１００からログイン画面情報が送信される（Ｓ１３０８）と、連携制御実行部７１０２は、前記ログイン画面情報を受信して、ログイン画面を表示部７４１に表示する（Ｓ１３０９）。なお、前記連携制御アプリが予め放送受信装置１００に係るログイン画面情報を有している場合には、Ｓ１３０７～Ｓ１３０８の処理は省略して良い。ユーザが、前記表示されたログイン画面に対して認証情報を入力する（Ｓ１３１０）と、前記入力された認証情報をストレージ部７１０の認証情報記憶領域７３００に記憶して、次の処置に進む。 On the other hand, when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 does not have a history of performing a cooperative operation with the portable information terminal 700 in the past (S1305: No), the cooperation control execution unit 7102 provides login screen information to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100. A request is transmitted (S1307). When the login screen information is transmitted from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the processing of S1307 (S1308), the cooperation control execution unit 7102 receives the login screen information and displays the login screen on the display unit 741 (S1309). ). If the cooperation control application has login screen information related to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 in advance, the processing of S1307 to S1308 may be omitted. When the user inputs authentication information to the displayed login screen (S1310), the input authentication information is stored in the authentication information storage area 7300 of the storage unit 710, and the process proceeds to the next procedure.
　なお、前記連携動作を行った履歴の有無の判別は、ストレージ部７１０の認証情報記憶領域７３００に、放送受信装置１００に係る認証情報が記憶されているか否かの確認により行われるものであっても良いし、その他の方法によっても良い。 Note that the presence / absence of the history of the cooperative operation is determined by checking whether the authentication information related to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is stored in the authentication information storage area 7300 of the storage unit 710. It is also possible to use other methods.
　次に、連携制御実行部７１０２は、Ｓ１３０６の処理で読み出した認証情報、若しくは、Ｓ１３１０の処理で入力された認証情報を、放送受信装置１００に送信する（Ｓ１３１１）。なお、前記認証情報の放送受信装置１００への送信処理は、ＬＡＮ通信部７２１およびルータ装置２００ｒを介して行っても良いし、ＮＦＣ通信部７２３を介して放送受信装置１００に直接行っても良い。 Next, the cooperation control execution unit 7102 transmits the authentication information read out in the process of S1306 or the authentication information input in the process of S1310 to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S1311). The transmission process of the authentication information to the broadcast receiving device 100 may be performed via the LAN communication unit 721 and the router device 200r, or may be directly performed to the broadcast receiving device 100 via the NFC communication unit 723. .
　放送受信装置１００では、携帯情報端末７００から送信された前記認証情報を、ストレージ部１１０の認証情報記憶領域１３００に記憶された認証情報と比較することにより、前記受信した認証情報が正しいか否かの確認を行う（Ｓ１３１２）。Ｓ１３１２の処理により、前記受信した認証情報が正しいと確認された場合には、携帯情報端末７００を識別可能な情報を認証情報記憶領域１３００に記憶するとともに、認証結果（認証ＯＫ）を携帯情報端末７００に送信する（Ｓ１３１３）。Ｓ１３１２の処理により、前記受信した認証情報が正しくないと確認された場合には、携帯情報端末７００を識別可能な情報を認証情報記憶領域１３００に記憶せずに、認証結果（認証ＮＧ）を携帯情報端末７００に送信する。 In the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, the authentication information transmitted from the portable information terminal 700 is compared with the authentication information stored in the authentication information storage area 1300 of the storage unit 110 to determine whether the received authentication information is correct. Is confirmed (S1312). If the received authentication information is confirmed to be correct by the processing of S1312, information that can identify the mobile information terminal 700 is stored in the authentication information storage area 1300, and the authentication result (authentication OK) is stored in the mobile information terminal. It transmits to 700 (S1313). If the received authentication information is confirmed to be incorrect by the processing of S1312, the authentication result (authentication NG) is stored in the authentication information storage area 1300 without storing information that can identify the mobile information terminal 700. It transmits to the information terminal 700.
　携帯情報端末７００の連係制御実行部７１０２は、放送受信装置１００から認証結果（認証ＯＫ）を受信すると、表示部７４１に前記連携制御アプリの基本画面（例えば、高機能リモコン画面）を表示する（Ｓ１３１４）。一方、認証結果（認証ＮＧ）を受信した場合には、前記連携制御アプリの基本画面を表示せずに、前記連携制御アプリの動作を終了する。この場合は、認証ＮＧの旨を報知するエラーメッセージ等を表示することが望ましい。 When the association control execution unit 7102 of the portable information terminal 700 receives the authentication result (authentication OK) from the broadcast receiving device 100, the display unit 741 displays a basic screen (for example, a high-function remote control screen) of the cooperation control application ( S1314). On the other hand, when the authentication result (authentication NG) is received, the operation of the cooperation control application is terminated without displaying the basic screen of the cooperation control application. In this case, it is desirable to display an error message or the like for informing that the authentication is NG.
　以上の一連の処理により、携帯情報端末７００と放送受信装置１００との間の連携動作が可能な状態となる。 Through the series of processes described above, a cooperative operation between the portable information terminal 700 and the broadcast receiving device 100 is possible.
　なお、前述の処理に引き続き、放送受信装置１００において放送連携アプリを起動する場合には、前述の処理の後に、図４０Ａ～図４０Ｃの処理を行えば良い。 Note that when the broadcast cooperative app is activated in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 following the above-described processing, the processing shown in FIGS. 40A to 40C may be performed after the above-described processing.
　図４１Ｂは、前記連携制御アプリを携帯情報端末７００で起動する際の動作の一例を示す動作シーケンス図である。同図は、放送連携アプリの起動シーケンスを実行する放送受信装置１００により、携帯情報端末７００上での連携制御アプリの起動が要求される場合の、連携動作が可能となるまでの一連の流れを示すものである。 FIG. 41B is an operation sequence diagram illustrating an example of an operation when the cooperation control application is activated on the portable information terminal 700. This figure shows a series of flow until the cooperative operation becomes possible when the broadcast receiving device 100 that executes the start sequence of the broadcast cooperative app requests the start of the cooperative control app on the portable information terminal 700. It is shown.
　放送受信装置１００のチューナ／復調部１３１がユーザの所望するチャンネルの選局処理を行ってＭＭＴデータ列を取得すると、アプリケーション制御部１５３がＭ２セクションメッセージに格納されたＭＨ－ＡＩＴの確認を行い、『自動起動（ＡＵＴＯＳＴＡＲＴ）』のアプリケーション制御コードを有する放送連携アプリがあるか否の確認、および、前記『自動起動』のアプリケーション制御コードを有する放送連携アプリのプロファイルの確認を行う（Ｓ１４０１）。なお、Ｓ１４０１の処理は、図４０Ａに示したＳ１００１～Ｓ１００９の処理と同様であって良い。 When the tuner / demodulation unit 131 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 selects a channel desired by the user and acquires the MMT data string, the application control unit 153 checks the MH-AIT stored in the M2 section message, It is confirmed whether there is a broadcast cooperative app having an “automatic start (AUTOSTART)” application control code, and the broadcast cooperative app profile having the “automatic start” application control code is checked (S1401). Note that the processing of S1401 may be the same as the processing of S1001 to S1009 shown in FIG. 40A.
　Ｓ１４０１での最優先アプリのプロファイル確認処理において、前記最優先アプリのアプリケーションプロファイルを放送受信装置１００が満足し、更に、携帯端末機器との連携動作が必要であると判断された場合には、ストレージ部１１０の認証情報記憶領域１３００を参照することにより、過去に放送受信装置１００との連係動作を行った履歴を有する携帯端末機器（本実施例の携帯情報端末７００）を選択する（Ｓ１４０２）。Ｓ１４０１での最優先アプリのプロファイル確認処理において、前記最優先アプリのアプリケーションプロファイルを放送受信装置１００が満足し、携帯端末機器との連携動作が必要ではないと判断された場合には、そのまま図４０Ａと同様の処理を行えば良い。Ｓ１４０１での最優先アプリのプロファイル確認処理において、前記最優先アプリのアプリケーションプロファイルを放送受信装置１００が満足しない場合には、放送連携アプリの起動処理および連携制御アプリの起動処理を終了して良い。 In the profile confirmation process of the highest priority application in S1401, if it is determined that the broadcast reception device 100 satisfies the application profile of the highest priority application and further requires a cooperative operation with the mobile terminal device, By referring to the authentication information storage area 1300 of the unit 110, the portable terminal device (the portable information terminal 700 of the present embodiment) having a history of performing the linking operation with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 in the past is selected (S1402). In the profile confirmation process of the highest priority application in S1401, if the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 satisfies the application profile of the highest priority application and it is determined that the cooperative operation with the mobile terminal device is not necessary, the process is directly performed as shown in FIG. The same processing as that described above may be performed. When the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 does not satisfy the application profile of the highest priority application in the profile confirmation process of the highest priority application in S1401, the broadcast cooperation application activation process and the cooperation control application activation process may be terminated.
　なお、認証情報記憶領域１３００を参照することによる携帯情報端末７００の選択は、最新の連携動作履歴を有する携帯端末機器、若しくは、最も使用頻度の高い携帯端末機器を選択するようにすれば良い。また、連携動作履歴を有する複数の携帯端末機器に関する情報をモニタ部１６２に表示し、ユーザに連携する携帯端末機器を選択させるようにしても良い。また、連携動作履歴が存在しない場合には、その旨をモニタ部１６２に表示し、携帯情報端末７００側の操作により連携制御アプリの起動を行わせるようにすれば良い。この場合の処理は図４１Ａに示した通りである。 Note that the selection of the portable information terminal 700 by referring to the authentication information storage area 1300 may be performed by selecting a portable terminal device having the latest cooperative operation history or a portable terminal device that is used most frequently. In addition, information regarding a plurality of portable terminal devices having a cooperative operation history may be displayed on the monitor unit 162 to allow the user to select a portable terminal device to cooperate with. Further, if there is no cooperative operation history, that fact may be displayed on the monitor unit 162 and the cooperative control application may be activated by an operation on the portable information terminal 700 side. The processing in this case is as shown in FIG. 41A.
　放送受信装置１００の連携制御実行部（但し、図示省略）は、Ｓ１４０２の処理で選択した携帯情報端末７００に対して連携制御アプリ起動要求を送信する（Ｓ１４０３）。 The cooperation control execution unit (not shown) of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 transmits a cooperation control application activation request to the portable information terminal 700 selected in the process of S1402 (S1403).
　携帯情報端末７００の主制御部７０１は、放送受信装置１００から送信された前記連携制御アプリ起動要求に応じて連携制御アプリ（連携制御実行部７１０２）を起動させる（Ｓ１４０４）と、連携制御実行部７１０２が、ストレージ部７１０の認証情報記憶領域７３００からの放送受信装置１００に係る認証情報の読み出し、前記認証情報の放送受信装置１００への送信、放送受信装置１００における携帯情報端末の認証、等の一連の処理を実行する（Ｓ１４０５～Ｓ１４０８）。なお、Ｓ１４０５～Ｓ１４０８の処理は、図４１Ａに示したＳ１３０６およびＳ１３１１～Ｓ１３１３の処理と同様であって良い。 When the main control unit 701 of the portable information terminal 700 activates the cooperation control application (cooperation control execution unit 7102) in response to the cooperation control application activation request transmitted from the broadcast receiving device 100 (S1404), the cooperation control execution unit 7102 reads out the authentication information related to the broadcast receiving device 100 from the authentication information storage area 7300 of the storage unit 710, transmits the authentication information to the broadcast receiving device 100, authenticates the portable information terminal in the broadcast receiving device 100, etc. A series of processing is executed (S1405 to S1408). Note that the processing of S1405 to S1408 may be the same as the processing of S1306 and S1311 to S1313 shown in FIG. 41A.
　携帯情報端末７００の連係制御実行部７１０２は、放送受信装置１００から認証結果（認証ＯＫ）を受信すると、表示部７４１に前記連携制御アプリの基本画面（例えば、高機能リモコン画面）を表示し（Ｓ１４０９）、連携制御アプリの起動成功応答を放送受信装置１００に送信する（Ｓ１４１０）。一方、認証結果（認証ＮＧ）を受信した場合には、前記連携制御アプリの基本画面を表示せずに、連携制御アプリの起動失敗応答を放送受信装置１００に送信し、前記連携制御アプリの動作を終了する。 When the association control execution unit 7102 of the portable information terminal 700 receives the authentication result (authentication OK) from the broadcast receiving device 100, the display unit 741 displays a basic screen (for example, a high-function remote control screen) of the cooperation control application ( (S1409), a response to the activation of the cooperation control application is transmitted to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S1410). On the other hand, when the authentication result (authentication NG) is received, the activation failure response of the cooperation control application is transmitted to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 without displaying the basic screen of the cooperation control application, and the operation of the cooperation control application is performed. Exit.
　放送受信装置１００は、携帯情報端末７００から起動成功応答を受信すると、Ｓ１４０１の処理で選択した放送連携アプリの取得および起動を行う（Ｓ１４１１）。なお、Ｓ１４１１の処理は、図４０Ａに示したＳ１０１０～Ｓ１０１８の処理と同様であって良い。一方、携帯情報端末７００から起動失敗応答を受信した場合、放送受信装置１００は、Ｓ１４０１の処理で選択した放送連携アプリの取得および起動を行わなくとも良い。前記放送連携アプリが携帯端末機器との連携動作を必要としない動作形態が可能である場合には、前記動作形態での起動を行う様にしても良い。 When receiving the activation success response from the portable information terminal 700, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 acquires and activates the broadcast cooperative app selected in the process of S1401 (S1411). Note that the processing of S1411 may be the same as the processing of S1010 to S1018 shown in FIG. 40A. On the other hand, when the activation failure response is received from the portable information terminal 700, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 does not have to acquire and activate the broadcast cooperative app selected in the process of S1401. When the broadcast cooperation application is capable of an operation form that does not require a cooperation operation with the mobile terminal device, it may be activated in the operation form.
　以上の一連の処理により、携帯情報端末７００と放送受信装置１００との間の連携動作が可能な状態となる。 Through the series of processes described above, a cooperative operation between the portable information terminal 700 and the broadcast receiving device 100 is possible.
　なお、前述の処理に引き続き、携帯情報端末においても放送連携アプリ（端末側）を起動する場合には、前述の処理の後に、図４１Ｃの処理を行えば良い。 If the broadcast cooperative app (terminal side) is also activated in the portable information terminal following the above-described processing, the processing in FIG. 41C may be performed after the above-described processing.
　図４１Ｃは、放送受信装置１００からの送信情報に基づいて、携帯情報端末７００で放送連携アプリ（端末側）を起動する際の動作の一例を示す動作シーケンス図である。 FIG. 41C is an operation sequence diagram illustrating an example of an operation when the broadcast cooperative app (terminal side) is activated on the portable information terminal 700 based on transmission information from the broadcast receiving device 100.
　即ち、図４１ＢのＳ１４０１～Ｓ１４１１の処理を実行した（Ｓ１５０１）後、放送受信装置１００のアプリケーション制御部１５３は、次に、端末側放送連携アプリに係るＭＨ－ＡＩＴのＭＨ－伝送プロトコル記述子の確認を行う（Ｓ１５０２）。Ｓ１５０２の処理の結果、前記ＭＨ－伝送プロトコル記述子に記載されたプロトコル識別により、前記端末側放送連携アプリがＨＴＴＰ／ＨＴＴＰＳ伝送により取得可能である場合（Ｓ１５０３：Ｙｅｓ）には、更に、前記端末側放送連携アプリに係るＭＨ－ＡＩＴのＭＨ－簡易アプリケーションロケーション記述子の確認を行い（Ｓ１５０４）、前記端末側放送連携アプリのエントリーポイントのＵＲＬを取得する。Ｓ１５０４の処理で前記端末側放送連携アプリのエントリーポイントのＵＲＬを取得すると、前記ＵＲＬの情報を携帯情報端末７００に送信する（Ｓ１５０５）。 That is, after executing the processing of S1401 to S1411 of FIG. 41B (S1501), the application control unit 153 of the broadcast receiving device 100 next stores the MH-transmission protocol descriptor of the MH-AIT related to the terminal-side broadcast cooperation application. Confirmation is performed (S1502). As a result of the processing in S1502, when the terminal-side broadcast cooperative app can be acquired by HTTP / HTTPS transmission by the protocol identification described in the MH-transmission protocol descriptor (S1503: Yes), the terminal further The MH-AIT MH-simplified application location descriptor of the MH-AIT related to the side broadcast cooperative application is confirmed (S1504), and the entry point URL of the terminal side broadcast cooperative application is acquired. When the URL of the entry point of the terminal-side broadcast cooperative app is acquired in the process of S1504, the URL information is transmitted to the portable information terminal 700 (S1505).
　前記ＵＲＬの情報を放送受信装置１００から受信した携帯情報端末７００は、次に、ＬＡＮ通信部７２１がインターネット２００上の前記ＵＲＬで指定されるサーバ（本実施例では、サービス事業者サーバ４００）に対して、端末側放送連携アプリの配信要求を行う（Ｓ１５０６）。前記配信要求を受信したサービス事業者サーバ４００は、適宜携帯情報端末７００の認証処理等を行った後に、要求された端末側放送連携アプリの配信を行う（Ｓ１５０７）。ＬＡＮ通信部７２１を介して、サービス事業者サーバ４００から端末側放送連携アプリを受信すると、携帯情報端末７００は、起動済みの連係制御アプリ（連携制御実行部７１０２）の制御に基づき、ブラウザエンジンにて前記受信した端末側放送連携アプリの起動を実行する（Ｓ１５１２）。なお、サービス事業者サーバ４００で行われる携帯情報端末７００の認証処理は公知の処理であって良く、詳細の説明を省略する。 The portable information terminal 700 that has received the URL information from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 then sends the LAN communication unit 721 to the server (in this embodiment, the service provider server 400) designated by the URL on the Internet 200. On the other hand, a distribution request for the terminal-side broadcast cooperation application is made (S1506). The service provider server 400 that has received the distribution request, after appropriately performing authentication processing of the portable information terminal 700 or the like, distributes the requested terminal-side broadcast cooperative app (S1507). When the terminal-side broadcast cooperative app is received from the service provider server 400 via the LAN communication unit 721, the portable information terminal 700 uses the browser engine based on the control of the started linkage control app (cooperation control execution unit 7102). Then, the terminal-side broadcast cooperative application received is activated (S1512). Note that the authentication process of the portable information terminal 700 performed by the service provider server 400 may be a known process, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
　一方、Ｓ１５０２の処理の結果、前記ＭＨ－伝送プロトコル記述子に記載されたプロトコル識別により、前記端末側放送連携アプリがデータカルーセル伝送により取得可能である場合（Ｓ１５０３：Ｎｏ）には、放送受信装置１００のアプリケーション制御部１５３は、データ伝送メッセージに格納されたＤＤＭテーブルおよびＤＡＭテーブルの確認を行い（Ｓ１５０８、Ｓ１５０９）、前述の［アプリケーション伝送方式の概要］で説明した手順で、前記端末側放送連携アプリが伝送されるアセットを特定する。更に、放送波の前記特定されたアセットから端末側放送連携アプリを取得する（Ｓ１５１０）と、放送受信装置１００は、前記取得した端末側放送連携アプリを携帯情報端末７００に送信する（Ｓ１５１１）。更に、携帯情報端末７００において、放送受信装置１００から送信された前記端末側放送連携アプリを、起動済みの連係制御アプリ（連携制御実行部７１０２）の制御に基づき、ブラウザエンジンにて実行する（Ｓ１５１２）。 On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S1502, if the terminal-side broadcast cooperative app can be acquired by data carousel transmission based on the protocol identification described in the MH-transmission protocol descriptor (S1503: No), the broadcast receiving device The application control unit 153 of 100 confirms the DDM table and the DAM table stored in the data transmission message (S1508, S1509), and performs the terminal-side broadcast cooperation in accordance with the procedure described in [Overview of application transmission method]. Identify assets to which the app is transmitted. Further, when the terminal-side broadcast cooperative app is acquired from the identified asset of the broadcast wave (S1510), the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 transmits the acquired terminal-side broadcast cooperative app to the portable information terminal 700 (S1511). Further, in the portable information terminal 700, the terminal-side broadcast cooperative app transmitted from the broadcast receiving device 100 is executed by the browser engine based on the control of the started linkage control app (cooperation control execution unit 7102) (S1512). ).
　なお、Ｓ１５１０で取得した端末側放送連携アプリをストレージ部１１０のコンテンツ情報記憶領域１２００に記憶させ、Ｓ１５１１の処理で、端末側放送連携アプリの送信処理に代替して前記コンテンツ情報記憶領域１２００のＵＲＬを送信し、携帯情報端末７００に前記コンテンツ情報記憶領域１２００へのアクセスを実行させることにより、携帯情報端末７００に端末側放送連携アプリの取得を行わせるようにしても良い。携帯情報端末７００がデジタル放送の受信機能を有していれば、携帯情報端末７００が放送波からの端末側放送連携アプリの取得を行っても良い。 Note that the terminal-side broadcast cooperative app acquired in S1510 is stored in the content information storage area 1200 of the storage unit 110, and the URL of the content information storage area 1200 is substituted in place of the terminal-side broadcast cooperative application transmission process in S1511. , And causing the portable information terminal 700 to access the content information storage area 1200 to cause the portable information terminal 700 to acquire the terminal-side broadcast cooperative app. If the portable information terminal 700 has a digital broadcast receiving function, the portable information terminal 700 may acquire the terminal-side broadcast cooperative app from the broadcast wave.
　また、Ｓ１５０２～Ｓ１５１２の処理は、Ｓ１５０１の後に、携帯情報端末７００から放送受信装置１００に送信された端末側放送連携アプリ送信要求（但し、図示省略）をトリガとして、実行されるものであっても良い。 Further, the processing of S1502 to S1512 is executed with a terminal side broadcast cooperative application transmission request (not shown) transmitted from the portable information terminal 700 to the broadcast receiving device 100 as a trigger after S1501. Also good.
　また、図４０Ａ～図４０Ｃおよび図４１Ａ～図４１Ｃの各動作シーケンスは適宜部分的に組み合わせることが可能であり、更に、一部動作ステップは他の動作ステップと、適宜、順序入れ替え、同時動作、等が可能であるものとする。 40A to 40C and FIGS. 41A to 41C can be partially combined as appropriate. Furthermore, some operation steps can be appropriately reordered with other operation steps, reordering, simultaneous operation, Etc. are possible.
　［携帯情報端末の連携制御アプリ基本画面］
　図４２Ａは、図４１ＡのＳ１３１４の処理、図４１ＢのＳ１４０９の処理、等により表示される連携制御アプリの基本画面の一例を示す画面表示図である。本実施例においては、連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａは、放送受信装置１００に対応した高機能リモコンとしての機能を備えるものとする。 [Basic screen for cooperative control application of portable information terminal]
FIG. 42A is a screen display diagram illustrating an example of a basic screen of the cooperation control app displayed by the process of S1314 of FIG. 41A, the process of S1409 of FIG. 41B, and the like. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application has a function as a high-function remote controller corresponding to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
　連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａは、電源キー７４１ａ１、ネットワーク選択キー（地デジ、ＢＳ、ＣＳ）７４１ａ２、数字キー（１～１２）７４１ａ３、音量ＵＰ／ＤＯＷＮキー７４１ａ４、チャンネルＵＰ／ＤＯＷＮキー７４１ａ５、入力切替キー７４１ａ６、番組表キー７４１ａ７、ｄａｔａキー７４１ａ８、連携アプリキー７４１ａ９、メニューキー７４１ａａ、戻るキー７４１ａｂ、カーソルキー（上、下、左、右）７４１ａｃ、決定キー７４１ａｄ、カラーキー（青、赤、緑、黄）７４１ａｅ、で構成される。その他の操作キーが更に表示されていても良い。 The basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application includes a power key 741a1, a network selection key (terrestrial digital, BS, CS) 741a2, a numeric key (1-12) 741a3, a volume UP / DOWN key 741a4, a channel UP / DOWN key 741a5, an input Switch key 741a6, program guide key 741a7, data key 741a8, linkage application key 741a9, menu key 741aa, return key 741ab, cursor key (up, down, left, right) 741ac, enter key 741ad, color key (blue, red, (Green, yellow) 741ae. Other operation keys may be further displayed.
　前記各操作キーは、放送受信装置１００に付属する専用リモコンと同様のキー配置／動作とすると使い勝手が良い。また、電源キー７４１ａ１、ネットワーク選択キー７４１ａ２、数字キー７４１ａ３、等は、一般的なテレビリモコンの各操作キーと同様の機能を有するものとして、詳細の説明を省略する。連携アプリキー７４１ａ９は、本実施例の放送通信連携機能のために用意される操作キーである。 The above-mentioned operation keys are easy to use if the same key arrangement / operation as the dedicated remote control attached to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is used. The power key 741a1, the network selection key 741a2, the numeric key 741a3, and the like have the same functions as the operation keys of a general television remote controller, and detailed description thereof is omitted. The cooperation application key 741a9 is an operation key prepared for the broadcast communication cooperation function of the present embodiment.
　なお、図４０ＢのＳ１１０７の処理では、連携アプリキー７４１ａ９を選択することにより放送連携アプリランチャの起動要求が可能であるものとする。また、図４０ＣのＳ１２０７の処理では、ｄａｔａキー７４１ａ８を選択することによりデータ放送の起動要求が可能であるものとする。また、図４０ＢのＳ１１０９の処理および図４０ＣのＳ１２０９の処理では、カーソルキー７４１ａｃおよび決定キー７４１ａｄの操作により前記実行可能な放送連携アプリの選択が可能であるものとする。 In the process of S1107 in FIG. 40B, it is assumed that the broadcast cooperative application launcher can be requested by selecting the cooperative application key 741a9. In the processing of S1207 in FIG. 40C, it is assumed that a data broadcast activation request can be made by selecting the data key 741a8. Also, in the process of S1109 in FIG. 40B and the process of S1209 in FIG. 40C, the executable broadcast cooperation application can be selected by operating the cursor key 741ac and the enter key 741ad.
　このように連携アプリキー７４１ａ９若しくは同様の機能を有する他の操作キーを前記連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａ上に用意すれば、本実施例の放送連携システムで用いる各放送連携アプリを簡単に選択／起動することが可能となる。また、連携アプリキー７４１ａ９若しくは同様の機能を有する他の操作キーを放送受信装置１００に付属する専用リモコンに備えるようにしても良い。 Thus, if the cooperative application key 741a9 or another operation key having the same function is prepared on the basic screen 741a of the cooperative control application, each broadcast cooperative application used in the broadcast cooperative system of this embodiment can be easily selected / It becomes possible to start. Further, the cooperative application key 741a9 or another operation key having a similar function may be provided in a dedicated remote controller attached to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
　図４２Ｂは、図４１ＡのＳ１３１４の処理、図４１ＢのＳ１４０９の処理、等により表示される連携制御アプリの基本画面の一例を示す画面表示図であり、図４２Ａとは異なる例である。 FIG. 42B is a screen display diagram illustrating an example of a basic screen of the cooperation control application displayed by the processing of S1314 of FIG. 41A, the processing of S1409 of FIG. 41B, and the like, which is an example different from FIG. 42A.
　連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ｂは、連携制御中メッセージ７４１ｂ１、連携制御アプリ動作画面７４１ｂ２、で構成される。その他のオブジェクトが更に表示されていても良い。連携制御中メッセージ７４１ｂ１は、携帯情報端末７００が放送受信装置１００と連携動作中である旨をユーザに報知するためのメッセージ表示である。連携制御アプリ動作画面７４１ｂ２は、連携制御アプリにより任意の画面表示が行われる領域であり、本実施例では詳細の説明を省略する。例えば、連携制御アプリ動作画面７４１ｂ２内の構成が前述の連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａと同様の構成となっていて良い。放送受信装置１００で表示されている放送番組のサブ画面等が表示されていても良い。 The basic screen 741b of the cooperation control application includes a message 741b1 during cooperation control and a cooperation control application operation screen 741b2. Other objects may be further displayed. The cooperation control in-progress message 741b1 is a message display for notifying the user that the portable information terminal 700 is operating in cooperation with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100. The cooperation control application operation screen 741b2 is an area where arbitrary screen display is performed by the cooperation control application, and detailed description thereof is omitted in the present embodiment. For example, the configuration in the cooperation control application operation screen 741b2 may be the same as that of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control app described above. A sub screen or the like of the broadcast program displayed on the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may be displayed.
　図４２Ｂに示したように、連携制御中メッセージ７４１ｂ１を表示することにより、携帯情報端末７００のユーザは携帯情報端末７００が放送受信装置１００と連携動作中であることを簡単に把握することができるようになる。なお、連携制御中メッセージ７４１ｂ１は文字表示に限らず、記号表示、図形表示等であっても良い。背景色の差異等により連携制御中メッセージ７４１ｂ１の代替としても良い。 As shown in FIG. 42B, by displaying the cooperation control in-progress message 741b1, the user of the portable information terminal 700 can easily grasp that the portable information terminal 700 is in cooperation with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100. It becomes like this. Note that the cooperative control in-progress message 741b1 is not limited to character display, but may be symbol display, graphic display, or the like. The message 741b1 during cooperation control may be substituted for the background color difference or the like.
　［放送受信装置の放送連携アプリランチャ画面］
　図４３Ａは、本実施例の放送受信装置１００において、起動可能な放送連携アプリがあることをユーザに報知するための報知画面の一例を示す画面表示図である。 [Broadcast cooperation app launcher screen of broadcast receiving device]
FIG. 43A is a screen display diagram illustrating an example of a notification screen for notifying the user that there is a startable broadcast cooperation app in the broadcast receiving device 100 of the present embodiment.
　例えば、図４０Ｂに示した動作シーケンスでは、Ｓ１１０６の処理の後、放送サービスによるデータ放送と放送連携アプリの何れも起動せずに、放送番組映像の表示を継続する。一方、この場合、起動可能な放送連携アプリがあることをユーザに報知するために、放送番組画面１６２ｍ上に図４３Ａに示したようなアイコン１６２ｍ０を表示すれば、放送受信装置１００の使い勝手が向上する。即ち、アイコン１６２ｍ０を表示することにより、ユーザが起動可能な放送連携アプリの存在を見逃すことを防ぐことが可能となる。 For example, in the operation sequence shown in FIG. 40B, after the process of S1106, the display of the broadcast program video is continued without starting either the data broadcast by the broadcast service or the broadcast cooperative app. On the other hand, in this case, if an icon 162m0 as shown in FIG. 43A is displayed on the broadcast program screen 162m in order to notify the user that there is a broadcast cooperative app that can be activated, the usability of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is improved. To do. In other words, by displaying the icon 162m0, it is possible to prevent the user from overlooking the presence of the broadcast cooperative app that can be activated.
　なお、アイコン１６２ｍ０の表示位置は画面上の任意の位置で良いが、放送番組の視聴の邪魔にならない場所とすることが望ましい。例えば、画面の四隅等である。前記表示位置は、ＬＣＴの記述により制御されても良い。また、アイコン１６２ｍ０は、図４３Ａに示したような文字表示であっても良いし、記号、図形等であっても良い。また、アイコン１６２ｍ０は、常に表示しておくようにしても良いし、電源をオンした後やチャンネル切り替え後に所定の時間だけ表示するようにしても良い。または、番組情報やチャンネル番号等を表示した際に同時に表示されるようにしても良い。 Note that the display position of the icon 162m0 may be an arbitrary position on the screen, but it is desirable that the icon 162m0 be a place that does not interfere with the viewing of the broadcast program. For example, the four corners of the screen. The display position may be controlled by a description of LCT. The icon 162m0 may be a character display as shown in FIG. 43A, or may be a symbol, a figure, or the like. The icon 162m0 may be always displayed, or may be displayed for a predetermined time after the power is turned on or after channel switching. Alternatively, the program information, channel number, etc. may be displayed at the same time.
　図４３Ｂは、図４０ＢのＳ１１０８の処理により表示される放送連携アプリランチャの一例を示す画面表示図である。本実施例においては、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴの記述等により、連携アプリＡ、連携アプリＢ、連携アプリＣ、の三つの放送連携アプリが放送受信装置１００で実行可能な状態であるものとする。この場合、放送番組画面１６２ｎ上の任意の位置に放送連携アプリランチャ１６２ｎ１が表示され、更に、放送連携アプリランチャ１６２ｎ１内に連携アプリＡのエントリーボタン１６２ｎ２、連携アプリＢのエントリーボタン１６２ｎ３、連携アプリＣのエントリーボタン１６２ｎ４、および戻るボタン１６２ｎ５が表示される。前記放送連携アプリランチャ１６２ｎ１が表示される位置は、ＬＣＴの記述により制御されても良い。 FIG. 43B is a screen display diagram illustrating an example of the broadcast cooperative app launcher displayed by the process of S1108 of FIG. 40B. In this embodiment, it is assumed that three broadcast cooperative apps, that is, the cooperative app A, the cooperative app B, and the cooperative app C, can be executed by the broadcast receiving device 100 based on the description of the MH-AIT. In this case, the broadcast cooperative app launcher 162n1 is displayed at an arbitrary position on the broadcast program screen 162n, and further, an entry button 162n2 of the cooperative app A, an entry button 162n3 of the cooperative app B, and a cooperative app C are included in the broadcast cooperative app launcher 162n1. The entry button 162n4 and the return button 162n5 are displayed. The position where the broadcast cooperation application launcher 162n1 is displayed may be controlled by the description of the LCT.
　図４３Ｂに示したような放送連携アプリランチャ１６２ｎ１が表示されている状態で、連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａのカーソルキー７４１ａｃおよび決定キー７４１ａｄを用いてエントリーボタン１６２ｎ２、エントリーボタン１６２ｎ３、エントリーボタン１６２ｎ４、等を選択すると、アプリケーション制御部１５３の制御により、連携アプリＡ、連携アプリＢ、連携アプリＣ、等が起動して良い。戻るボタン１６２ｎ５が選択された場合には、放送連携アプリランチャ１６２ｎ１の表示が終了して良い。 In the state where the broadcast cooperation application launcher 162n1 as shown in FIG. 43B is displayed, using the cursor key 741ac and the decision key 741ad of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application, the entry button 162n2, the entry button 162n3, the entry button 162n4, Or the like, the linked application A, the linked application B, the linked application C, or the like may be activated under the control of the application control unit 153. When the return button 162n5 is selected, the display of the broadcast cooperative application launcher 162n1 may be terminated.
　なお、放送番組画面１６２ｎ上に放送連携アプリランチャ１６２ｎ１を表示する際に、各放送連携アプリの種類やセキュリティ状況等に応じて、各エントリーボタンの枠色、内部色、形状、字体、大きさ、点滅状況、等を適宜変更するようにしても良い。例えば、前記連携アプリＡが放送マネージドアプリケーションである場合にはエントリーボタン１６２ｎ２の枠色を青色にし、前記連携アプリＢが放送外マネージドアプリケーションである場合にはエントリーボタン１６２ｎ３の枠色を黄色にし、前記連携アプリＣが一般アプリケーションである場合にはエントリーボタン１６２ｎ４の枠色を赤色にする、等である。あるいは、前記連携アプリＡがセキュリティ上信頼できると判断される場合にはエントリーボタン１６２ｎ２の枠色を青色にし、前記連携アプリＢがセキュリティ上信頼できるとは限らないと判断される場合にはエントリーボタン１６２ｎ３の枠色を黄色にし、前記連携アプリＣがセキュリティ上危険であると判断される場合にはエントリーボタン１６２ｎ４の枠色を赤色にする、等である。 In addition, when displaying the broadcast cooperation application launcher 162n1 on the broadcast program screen 162n, the frame color, internal color, shape, font, size, etc. of each entry button according to the type and security status of each broadcast cooperation application, You may make it change a blinking condition etc. suitably. For example, when the cooperative application A is a broadcast managed application, the frame color of the entry button 162n2 is blue, and when the cooperative application B is a non-broadcast managed application, the frame color of the entry button 162n3 is yellow. If the cooperative application C is a general application, the frame color of the entry button 162n4 is changed to red. Alternatively, when it is determined that the cooperative application A is reliable for security, the frame color of the entry button 162n2 is blue, and when it is determined that the cooperative application B is not always reliable for security, the entry button For example, the frame color of 162n3 is set to yellow, and the frame color of the entry button 162n4 is set to red when it is determined that the cooperative application C is dangerous in terms of security.
　その他、前記放送連携アプリの機能やジャンルに応じて、または、各放送連携アプリの使用有効期限等に応じて、各エントリーボタンの枠色、内部色、形状、字体、大きさ、点滅状況、等を適宜変更するようにしても良い。前記放送連携アプリをネットワーク上から取得済みであるか否か等に応じて、各エントリーボタンの枠色、内部色、形状、字体、大きさ、点滅状況、等を適宜変更するようにしても良い。例えば、前記連携アプリＡが既にネットワーク上から取得済み（キャッシュ１５２等にキャッシュ済み）である場合にはエントリーボタン１６２ｎ２の枠色を青色にし、前記連携アプリＢが取得中である場合にはエントリーボタン１６２ｎ３の枠色を黄色にし、前記連携アプリＣが未取得である場合にはエントリーボタン１６２ｎ４の枠色を赤色にする、等である。 In addition, the frame color, internal color, shape, font, size, flashing status, etc. of each entry button, depending on the function and genre of the broadcast cooperative app or the expiration date of use of each broadcast cooperative app May be appropriately changed. Depending on whether or not the broadcast cooperation application has been acquired from the network, the frame color, internal color, shape, font, size, blinking status, etc. of each entry button may be changed as appropriate. . For example, if the cooperative app A has already been acquired from the network (cached in the cache 152 etc.), the frame color of the entry button 162n2 is blue, and if the cooperative app B is being acquired, the entry button The frame color of 162n3 is set to yellow, and the frame color of the entry button 162n4 is set to red when the cooperative application C has not been acquired.
　このようにすれば、放送受信装置１００のユーザは、放送受信装置１００で実行可能な放送連携アプリの種類やセキュリティ状況等を簡単に把握することが可能となる。 In this way, the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can easily grasp the types of broadcast cooperative apps that can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, the security status, and the like.
　また、放送受信装置１００で実行可能な放送連携アプリがない場合には、放送連携アプリランチャ１６２ｎ１を表示しないようにしても良い。または、この場合、放送連携アプリランチャ１６２ｎ１の内部に『使用可能なアプリケーションが有りません』等のメッセージを表示するようにしても良い。 Further, when there is no broadcast cooperative app that can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, the broadcast cooperative app launcher 162n1 may not be displayed. Alternatively, in this case, a message such as “There is no usable application” may be displayed in the broadcast cooperation application launcher 162n1.
　［放送受信装置のデータ放送画面］
　図４４は、図４０ＣのＳ１２０８の処理により表示されるデータ放送画面の一例を示す画面表示図である。本実施例においては、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴの記述等により、連携アプリＡ、連携アプリＢ、連携アプリＣ、の三つの放送連携アプリが放送受信装置１００で実行可能な状態であるものとする。この場合、データ放送画面１６２ｏ上の任意の位置に連携アプリＡのエントリーボタン１６２ｏ２、連携アプリＢのエントリーボタン１６２ｏ３、連携アプリＣのエントリーボタン１６２ｏ４が表示される。なお、データ放送画面１６２ｏにおける、番組映像１６２ｏ１や各エントリーボタン１６２ｏ２～１６２ｏ４やその他のコンテンツの表示位置は、それぞれを領域毎にまとめた上で、ＬＣＴの記述により制御されても良い。 [Data broadcast screen of broadcast receiver]
FIG. 44 is a screen display diagram illustrating an example of a data broadcast screen displayed by the processing of S1208 in FIG. 40C. In this embodiment, it is assumed that three broadcast cooperative apps, that is, the cooperative app A, the cooperative app B, and the cooperative app C, can be executed by the broadcast receiving device 100 based on the description of the MH-AIT. In this case, the entry button 162o2 of the cooperation application A, the entry button 162o3 of the cooperation application B, and the entry button 162o4 of the cooperation application C are displayed at arbitrary positions on the data broadcast screen 162o. Note that the display positions of the program video 162o1, the entry buttons 162o2 to 162o4, and other contents on the data broadcast screen 162o may be controlled according to the description of the LCT after being grouped for each area.
　図４４に示したようなデータ放送画面１６２ｏにおいて、連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａのカーソルキー７４１ａｃおよび決定キー７４１ａｄを用いてエントリーボタン１６２ｏ２、エントリーボタン１６２ｏ３、エントリーボタン１６２ｏ４、等を選択すると、データ放送画面１６２ｏの表示を終了するとともに、アプリケーション制御部１５３の制御により、連携アプリＡ、連携アプリＢ、連携アプリＣ、等が起動して良い。 When the entry button 162o2, the entry button 162o3, the entry button 162o4, etc. are selected using the cursor key 741ac and the enter key 741ad on the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application on the data broadcast screen 162o as shown in FIG. While the display of the screen 162o is terminated, the cooperative application A, the cooperative application B, the cooperative application C, and the like may be activated under the control of the application control unit 153.
　なお、データ放送画面１６２ｏを表示する際、放送連携アプリの種類やセキュリティ状況、放送連携アプリの機能やジャンル、放送アプリのネットワーク上からの取得状況、等に応じて、各エントリーボタンの枠色、内部色、形状、字体、大きさ、点滅状況、等を適宜変更するようにしても良いことは、図４３Ｂの放送連携アプリランチャ１６２ｎ上に各放送連携アプリのエントリーボタンを表示する場合と同様である。 When displaying the data broadcast screen 162o, depending on the type and security status of the broadcast cooperative app, the function and genre of the broadcast cooperative app, the acquisition status of the broadcast app from the network, the frame color of each entry button, The internal color, shape, font, size, blinking status, etc. may be changed as appropriate, as in the case where the entry buttons of each broadcast cooperative app are displayed on the broadcast cooperative app launcher 162n of FIG. 43B. is there.
　このようにすれば、放送受信装置１００のユーザは、放送受信装置１００で実行可能な放送連携アプリの種類やセキュリティ状況等を簡単に把握することが可能となる。 In this way, the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can easily grasp the types of broadcast cooperative apps that can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, the security status, and the like.
　［放送受信装置の放送連携アプリ実行画面］
　図４５Ａは、図４０ＡのＳ１０１８の処理、図４０ＢのＳ１１１９の処理、図４０ＣのＳ１２２０の処理、等で表示される放送連携アプリ実行画面の一例を示す画面表示図である。本実施例の放送連携アプリはＨＴＭＬ５記述によるグラフィクス性能やエフェクト性能等を備えており、モニタ部１６２上における放送番組画面とのオーバーレイ表示が可能であるものとする。例えば、図４５Ａに示したように、放送番組画面１６２ｐ上の任意の位置に天気予報やニュース等の情報を表示する放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐ１がオーバーレイ表示される。放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐ１の表示位置は、ＬＣＴの記述により制御されても良い。放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐ１は、第一主オブジェクト１６２ｐ２、第二主オブジェクト１６２ｐ３、第三主オブジェクト１６２ｐ４、および背景オブジェクト１６２ｐ５、等で構成される。他のオブジェクトが更に表示されていても良い。 [Broadcast cooperation application execution screen of broadcast receiving device]
FIG. 45A is a screen display diagram illustrating an example of a broadcast cooperative application execution screen displayed in the process of S1018 of FIG. 40A, the process of S1119 of FIG. 40B, the process of S1220 of FIG. 40C, and the like. It is assumed that the broadcast cooperative application of the present embodiment has graphics performance and effect performance based on HTML5 description, and can display an overlay on the broadcast program screen on the monitor unit 162. For example, as shown in FIG. 45A, a broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1 that displays information such as weather forecasts and news is displayed in an overlay at an arbitrary position on the broadcast program screen 162p. The display position of the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1 may be controlled by the description of the LCT. The broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1 includes a first main object 162p2, a second main object 162p3, a third main object 162p4, a background object 162p5, and the like. Other objects may be further displayed.
　放送番組画面１６２ｐ上に放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐ１がオーバーレイ表示されている状態で、連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａのｄａｔａキー７４１ａ８を選択することにより、前記放送連携アプリの実行を終了してデータ放送画面に移行することが可能であるものとする。また、連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａの連携アプリキー７４１ａ９を選択することにより、前記放送連携アプリの実行を終了して放送番組画面１６２ｐのみの表示に戻すことが可能であるものとする。前記処理は、異なる操作キーにより実現されるものであっても良い。 By selecting the data key 741a8 of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application in a state where the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1 is displayed as an overlay on the broadcast program screen 162p, the execution of the broadcast cooperation application is terminated and the data broadcast screen is displayed. It is possible to transition to Further, by selecting the cooperation application key 741a9 on the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application, it is possible to end the execution of the broadcast cooperation application and return to the display of only the broadcast program screen 162p. The processing may be realized by different operation keys.
　また、放送番組画面１６２ｐ上に放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐ１がオーバーレイ表示されている状態で、連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａの各操作キーを操作することにより、放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐ１の透過度を変更することが可能であるものとする。前記透過度の変更処理は、放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐ１全体を一括して行うものであっても良いし、第一主オブジェクト１６２ｐ２、第二主オブジェクト１６２ｐ３、第三主オブジェクト１６２ｐ４、背景オブジェクト１６２ｐ５をそれぞれ単独で行うものであっても良い。所定のグループ（例えば、同一のグラフィクスレイヤに存在する複数のオブジェクト）毎に行うものであっても良い。 Further, the transparency of the broadcast cooperative application unit 162p1 is changed by operating each operation key on the basic screen 741a of the cooperative control application in a state where the broadcast cooperative application unit 162p1 is displayed as an overlay on the broadcast program screen 162p. It shall be possible. The change processing of the transparency may be performed collectively for the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1, or the first main object 162p2, the second main object 162p3, the third main object 162p4, and the background object 162p5 are respectively performed. It may be performed alone. It may be performed for each predetermined group (for example, a plurality of objects existing in the same graphics layer).
　前記透過度の変更処理を行う際は、例えば、連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａのカーソルキー７４１ａｃを用いてオブジェクトの選択を行い、カラーキー７４１ａｅの『青』キーでオブジェクトの透過度を増加させ、『黄』キーでオブジェクトの透過度を減少させたりする。異なる操作キーを用いて前記透過度の変更処理を行っても良い。放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐ１全体を一括して透過度１００％とすれば、放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐ１を一時的に非表示とすることができる。例えば、放送波にて緊急放送が配信された場合、放送連携アプリ部全体を透過度１００％として、緊急放送の放送番組画面のみをモニタ部１６２に表示させるようにすることも可能となる。あるいは、図示を省略したＣＭ検知部が、放送番組が本編映像からＣＭ映像になったことを検知して、放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐ１全体を一括して透過度１００％（若しくは放送番組映像を明瞭に確認できる透過度）とするように制御しても良い。 When performing the transparency changing process, for example, an object is selected using the cursor key 741ac of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application, and the transparency of the object is increased with the “blue” key of the color key 741ae. Use the “Yellow” key to decrease the transparency of the object. The transparency changing process may be performed using different operation keys. If the entire broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1 is collectively set to 100% transparency, the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1 can be temporarily hidden. For example, when an emergency broadcast is distributed by a broadcast wave, it is possible to display only the broadcast program screen of the emergency broadcast on the monitor unit 162 with the entire broadcast cooperation application unit as 100% transparency. Alternatively, the CM detection unit (not shown) detects that the broadcast program has changed from the main video to the CM video, and the entire broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1 is collectively set to 100% transparency (or to clarify the broadcast program video). It may be controlled so that the transparency can be confirmed).
　放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐ１の表示制御がＬＣＴの記述により為されている場合、放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐ１の『ｌａｙｅｒ＿ｏｒｄｅｒ』パラメータを制御して、放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐ１を放送番組画面１６２ｐの背面に移動させることで、放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐ１を一時的に非表示にするようにしても良い。この場合、モニタ部１６２における映像表示状態は、放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐ１全体を一括して透過度１００％とした場合と同様となる。 When the display control of the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1 is performed by the description of the LCT, the “layer_order” parameter of the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1 is controlled to move the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1 to the back of the broadcast program screen 162p. Thus, the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1 may be temporarily hidden. In this case, the video display state on the monitor unit 162 is the same as that when the entire broadcast cooperation application unit 162p1 is set to 100% transparency.
　前述の処理を行うことにより、放送連携アプリの実行中にバックグラウンドにある放送番組画面の確認を行いたい場合に、前記放送連携アプリを終了させずに放送番組画面の確認を行うことが可能となる。 By performing the above-described processing, it is possible to check the broadcast program screen without ending the broadcast cooperative app when it is desired to check the broadcast program screen in the background while the broadcast cooperative app is being executed. Become.
　図４５Ｂは、図４０ＡのＳ１０１８の処理、図４０ＢのＳ１１１９の処理、図４０ＣのＳ１２２０の処理、等で表示される放送連携アプリ実行画面の、前述とは異なる例を示す画面表示図である。図４５Ｂに示した例では、放送番組画面１６２ｐ上の任意の位置に推薦番組を紹介する放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐ６がオーバーレイ表示される。放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐ６の表示位置は、ＬＣＴの記述により制御されても良い。放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐ６には、第一推薦番組情報１６２ｐ７、第二推薦番組情報１６２ｐ８、第三推薦番組情報１６２ｐ９、等が表示される。更に多くの推薦番組情報がスクロールやページ切り替え等により表示されても良い。 FIG. 45B is a screen display diagram illustrating an example different from the above-described broadcast cooperation application execution screen displayed in the process of S1018 of FIG. 40A, the process of S1119 of FIG. 40B, the process of S1220 of FIG. 40C, and the like. In the example illustrated in FIG. 45B, the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p6 that introduces the recommended program is displayed in an overlay at an arbitrary position on the broadcast program screen 162p. The display position of the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p6 may be controlled by the description of the LCT. The broadcast cooperation application unit 162p6 displays first recommended program information 162p7, second recommended program information 162p8, third recommended program information 162p9, and the like. Further, more recommended program information may be displayed by scrolling, switching pages, or the like.
　前記各推薦番組情報は、表示中の放送番組（放送番組画面１６２ｐ）に関連して推薦される番組の情報であっても良いし、ユーザの視聴履歴に基づいて推薦される番組の情報であっても良いし、インターネット等で話題となっている番組の情報であっても良い。放送受信装置１００のユーザの友人が前記ユーザに対して送付した推薦番組の情報であっても良い。また、前記推薦される番組は、デジタル放送サービスの放送波で送信される番組であっても良いし、インターネット２００上の各サーバ装置から配信されるＶＯＤ（Ｖｉｄｅｏ　Ｏｎ　Ｄｅｍａｎｄ）番組等であっても良い。インターネット２００上のサーバ装置に用意されたホームページ等の情報画面であっても良い。 Each recommended program information may be information on a program recommended in relation to a broadcast program being displayed (broadcast program screen 162p), or information on a program recommended based on a user's viewing history. It may be information on a program that is a hot topic on the Internet or the like. It may be information on a recommended program sent by a friend of the user of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 to the user. Further, the recommended program may be a program transmitted by a broadcast wave of a digital broadcasting service, or a VOD (Video On Demand) program distributed from each server device on the Internet 200. good. An information screen such as a homepage prepared in a server device on the Internet 200 may be used.
　放送番組画面１６２ｐ上に放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐ６がオーバーレイ表示されている状態で、連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａのカーソルキー７４１ａｃおよび決定キー７４１ａｄを用いて、第一推薦番組情報１６２ｐ７、第二推薦番組情報１６２ｐ８、第三推薦番組情報１６２ｐ９、等を選択することにより、それらで推薦される各番組の映像がモニタ部１６２に表示される。 The first recommended program information 162p7 and the second recommended program are used by using the cursor key 741ac and the decision key 741ad of the basic screen 741a of the cooperative control application in a state where the broadcast cooperative application unit 162p6 is overlaid on the broadcast program screen 162p. By selecting the information 162p8, the third recommended program information 162p9, etc., the video of each program recommended by them is displayed on the monitor unit 162.
　また、言うまでもなく、図４５Ｂに示した放送連携アプリ実行画面においても、前述と同様に放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐ６の透過度を変更できるようにして良い。 Needless to say, the transparency of the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p6 may be changed on the broadcast cooperation application execution screen shown in FIG. 45B as described above.
　図４５Ｃは、推薦番組を紹介する放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐ６で推薦される番組映像が表示された場合の例を示す画面表示図である。例えば、連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａのカーソルキー７４１ａｃおよび決定キー７４１ａｄを用いて、放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐ６の第一推薦番組情報１６２ｐ７を選択した場合、モニタ部１６２に第一推薦番組情報１６２ｐ７で推薦される番組の番組映像１６２ｐａが表示される。番組映像１６２ｐａは、ユーザによる操作端末の操作により、一時停止や時間指定ジャンプ等が可能であって良い。また、番組映像１６２ｐａを表示する際に、元の放送番組画面１６２ｐをＰＩＰ（Ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅ　Ｉｎ　Ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅ）形式等で任意の位置に表示するようにしても良い。元の放送番組画面１６２ｐのＰＩＰ形式等での表示位置は、ＬＣＴの記述により制御されても良い。また、この場合、ユーザの操作端末に対する操作により、前記推薦番組の番組映像１６２ｐａと元の放送番組画面１６２ｐの何れを主画面とするかを変更できて良い。ユーザの操作端末に対する操作により、元の放送番組画面１６２ｐのウィンドウの大きさを調整できるようにしても良い。 FIG. 45C is a screen display diagram illustrating an example of a case where a program video recommended by the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p6 that introduces a recommended program is displayed. For example, when the first recommended program information 162p7 of the broadcast cooperative application unit 162p6 is selected using the cursor key 741ac and the enter key 741ad of the basic screen 741a of the cooperative control application, the first recommended program information 162p7 is recommended to the monitor unit 162. The program video 162pa of the program to be played is displayed. The program video 162pa may be capable of being paused, time-designated jumps, and the like by a user operating the operation terminal. Further, when displaying the program video 162pa, the original broadcast program screen 162p may be displayed at an arbitrary position in the PIP (Picture In Picture) format or the like. The display position of the original broadcast program screen 162p in the PIP format or the like may be controlled by the description of the LCT. In this case, it may be possible to change which of the recommended program's program video 162pa and the original broadcast program screen 162p is the main screen by the user's operation on the operation terminal. The size of the window of the original broadcast program screen 162p may be adjusted by a user operation on the operation terminal.
　また、前記推薦番組の番組映像１６２ｐａが、放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐ６に表示された何れかの推薦番組情報を選択したことにより表示された映像である旨を示すアイコン表示１６２ｐｂを画面上の任意の位置に表示すれば、ユーザの利便性を向上させることができる。 In addition, an icon display 162pb indicating that the program video 162pa of the recommended program is a video displayed by selecting any recommended program information displayed in the broadcast cooperation application unit 162p6 is displayed at an arbitrary position on the screen. If it is displayed, it is possible to improve user convenience.
　図４５Ｄは、図４０ＡのＳ１０１８の処理、図４０ＢのＳ１１１９の処理、図４０ＣのＳ１２２０の処理、等で表示される放送連携アプリ実行画面の、前述とは異なる例を示す画面表示図である。図４５Ｄに示した例では、放送番組画面１６２ｐ上の任意の位置にＳＮＳ（Ｓｏｃｉａｌ　Ｎｅｔｗｏｒｋｉｎｇ　Ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅ）サービスのポータルとなる放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐｃがオーバーレイ表示される。放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐｃの表示位置は、ＬＣＴの記述により制御されても良い。放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐｃには、第一ＳＮＳサービスのエントリーボタン１６２ｐｄ、第二ＳＮＳサービスのエントリーボタン１６２ｐｅ、第三ＳＮＳサービスのエントリーボタン１６２ｐｆ、等が表示される。更に多くのＳＮＳサービスのエントリーボタンがスクロールやページ切り替え等により表示されても良い。 FIG. 45D is a screen display diagram illustrating an example different from the above-described broadcast cooperation application execution screen displayed in the process of S1018 of FIG. 40A, the process of S1119 of FIG. 40B, the process of S1220 of FIG. 40C, and the like. In the example illustrated in FIG. 45D, a broadcast cooperation application unit 162pc serving as a portal for an SNS (Social Networking Service) service is displayed in an overlay at an arbitrary position on the broadcast program screen 162p. The display position of the broadcast cooperation application unit 162pc may be controlled by the description of the LCT. The broadcast cooperation application unit 162pc displays an entry button 162pd for the first SNS service, an entry button 162pe for the second SNS service, an entry button 162pf for the third SNS service, and the like. Further, many SNS service entry buttons may be displayed by scrolling, switching pages, or the like.
　放送番組画面１６２ｐ上に放送連携アプリ部１６２ｐｃがオーバーレイ表示されている状態で、連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａのカーソルキー７４１ａｃおよび決定キー７４１ａｄを用いて、第一ＳＮＳサービスのエントリーボタン１６２ｐｄ、第二ＳＮＳサービスのエントリーボタン１６２ｐｅ、第三ＳＮＳサービスのエントリーボタン１６２ｐｆ、等を選択することにより、チャット機能や掲示板機能、インターネット電話機能等の各エントリーボタンに割り当てられた機能が有効化される。これにより、他者と情報交換を行いながら表示中の放送番組（放送番組画面１６２ｐ）を楽しむことが可能となる。また、同時に、携帯情報端末７００上の連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａが、ソフトウェアキーボード等の文字入力画面や音声入力によりチャットや掲示板書き込みを行うための音声入力画面等に変更されるようにしても良い。 In the state where the broadcast cooperation application unit 162pc is displayed as an overlay on the broadcast program screen 162p, using the cursor key 741ac and the determination key 741ad of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application, the second SNS service entry button 162pd, By selecting the entry button 162pe of the SNS service, the entry button 162pf of the third SNS service, etc., the functions assigned to the entry buttons such as the chat function, the bulletin board function, and the Internet telephone function are validated. Thereby, it is possible to enjoy the broadcast program being displayed (broadcast program screen 162p) while exchanging information with others. At the same time, the basic screen 741a of the cooperative control application on the portable information terminal 700 may be changed to a character input screen such as a software keyboard or a voice input screen for chatting or bulletin board writing by voice input. good.
　また、本実施例の放送受信装置１００で実行可能な放送連携アプリとしては、前述の例の他、放送受信装置１００と携帯情報端末７００との連携機能を用いて、更にＣＭの放送タイミングと同期して、関連するＣＭアプリが放送受信装置１００と携帯情報端末７００の双方に提示されるようなものであっても良い。あるいは、放送受信装置１００で利用可能な有料サービスにおいて、放送連携アプリにより放送受信装置１００のユーザの有料サービス加入の有無を確認し、その結果に応じて放送受信装置１００および／または携帯情報端末７００の表示を変更するようなものであっても良い。本実施例の放送受信装置１００においては、何れの放送連携アプリを実行した場合であっても、図４５Ａや図４５Ｂ等を用いて説明した効果を得ることが可能である。 Further, as a broadcast cooperation application that can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the above-described example, a cooperation function between the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700 is used to further synchronize with CM broadcast timing. Then, the related CM application may be presented on both the broadcast receiving device 100 and the portable information terminal 700. Alternatively, in the pay service that can be used in the broadcast receiving device 100, the broadcast cooperative app confirms whether the user of the broadcast receiving device 100 has subscribed to the pay service, and according to the result, the broadcast receiving device 100 and / or the portable information terminal 700 is used. It is also possible to change the display of. In the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment, the effects described with reference to FIGS. 45A and 45B can be obtained regardless of which broadcast cooperation application is executed.
　［放送受信装置のエラー表示画面］
　図４６は、図４０ＡのＳ１００７の処理、図４０ＢのＳ１１０６の処理、図４０ＣのＳ１２０６の処理、等で、取得したＭＨ－ＡＩＴのＭＨ－アプリケーション記述子に記載されたアプリケーションプロファイルの確認等により放送連携アプリの実行が可能ではないと判断された場合のエラー表示画面の一例を示す画面表示図である。これは、放送受信装置１００のプロファイルに不足がある場合、あるいはＭＨ－ＡＩＴの取得に失敗した場合、等に表示されるようにして良い。 [Error display screen of broadcast receiver]
FIG. 46 is broadcasted by confirming the application profile described in the MH-Application Descriptor of the MH-AIT obtained in S1007 in FIG. 40A, S1106 in FIG. 40B, S1206 in FIG. 40C, and the like. It is a screen display figure which shows an example of an error display screen when it is judged that execution of a cooperation application is not possible. This may be displayed when there is a shortage in the profile of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 or when acquisition of the MH-AIT has failed.
　本実施例の放送受信装置１００においては、前記放送連携アプリの実行が可能ではないと判断された場合に、アプリケーションプロファイルの確認結果等の、前記放送連携アプリの実行が可能ではない理由を、エラーメッセージ１６２ｑ１に表示するようにする。例えば、アプリケーションプロファイルの確認の結果、所定のオプション機能がテレビ受信機側に不足している場合、その旨をエラーメッセージ１６２ｑ１に表示する。エラーコードと、前記エラーコードの説明が記述されたテレビ受信機メーカのホームページの案内（ＵＲＬ等）を表示しても良い。 In the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the execution of the broadcast cooperative application is not possible, an error such as the confirmation result of the application profile that is not possible to execute the broadcast cooperative application is indicated. The message 162q1 is displayed. For example, as a result of checking the application profile, if a predetermined optional function is insufficient on the television receiver side, the fact is displayed in the error message 162q1. An error code and a guidance (URL, etc.) on the homepage of the television receiver manufacturer describing the error code may be displayed.
　あるいは、放送連携アプリの取得をネットワーク上から行う場合には、当然ながらネットワークの接続状況の確認を事前に行うが、この際に、例えば、ＬＡＮケーブルの接続不備等により前記放送連携アプリの取得が可能でない場合に、その旨をエラーメッセージ１６２ｑ１に表示する。また、ネットワーク接続は確立しているが、エラー状況が劣悪なために放送連携アプリの取得が正しく行えない場合等もエラーメッセージ１６２ｑ１を表示して良い。放送連携アプリの取得を実行中で未だ前記放送連携アプリの実行を行える状態にない場合にエラーメッセージ１６２ｑ１を表示しても良い。また、放送波の受信状況が安定せず、当初はＭＨ－ＡＩＴ等の情報を受信できていたにも関わらず、途中からＭＨ－ＡＩＴ等の情報を受信できなくなった場合等にもエラーメッセージ１６２ｑ１を表示して良い。なお、このような場合、各サーバ装置から取得した放送連携アプリはそのままキャッシュしておくようにすれば、放送波の受信状況回復後にそのまま使用可能となる。 Alternatively, when acquiring the broadcast cooperation application from the network, naturally, the connection status of the network is confirmed in advance. At this time, for example, the acquisition of the broadcast cooperation application may be performed due to incomplete LAN cable connection or the like. If not possible, this is displayed in the error message 162q1. Further, the error message 162q1 may be displayed even when the network connection is established but the error situation is inferior and the broadcast cooperative app cannot be acquired correctly. The error message 162q1 may be displayed when the broadcast cooperative app is being acquired and the broadcast cooperative app is not yet ready to be executed. In addition, the error message 162q1 may also be used when the reception status of the broadcast wave is not stable and information such as MH-AIT can be received in the middle, but information such as MH-AIT cannot be received midway. May be displayed. In such a case, if the broadcast cooperation application acquired from each server device is cached as it is, it can be used as it is after the reception state of the broadcast wave is recovered.
　また、アプリケーションプロファイルの確認の結果、所定のオプション機能がテレビ受信機側に不足している場合に、エラーメッセージ１６２ｑ１に、最新のテレビ受信機用ファームウェアの確認若しくはアップデートを勧める旨の表示を行うようにしても良い。あるいは、前記最新のファームウェアの確認若しくはアップデートを、放送受信装置１００が自動的に行うようにしても良い。あるいは、テレビ受信機に有料のオプションハードウェアまたはオプションソフトウェアを追加することにより前記放送連携アプリを実行可能とできる場合には、前記有料のオプションハードウェアまたはオプションソフトウェアの案内を表示するようにしても良い。なおエラーメッセージ１６２ｑ１は、放送受信装置１００にではなく、携帯情報端末７００に表示するようにしても良い。 In addition, when a predetermined optional function is insufficient on the TV receiver side as a result of checking the application profile, an error message 162q1 is displayed to confirm that the latest TV receiver firmware is to be checked or updated. Anyway. Alternatively, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may automatically check or update the latest firmware. Alternatively, when the broadcast cooperative application can be executed by adding paid optional hardware or optional software to the television receiver, a guide to the paid optional hardware or optional software may be displayed. good. The error message 162q1 may be displayed not on the broadcast receiving device 100 but on the portable information terminal 700.
　［携帯情報端末の放送連携アプリ実行画面］
　図４７は、図４１ＣのＳ１５１２の処理で表示される放送連携アプリ（端末側）実行画面の一例を示す画面表示図である。図４７に示した放送連携アプリ実行画面７４１ｃは、メインウィンドウ７４１ｃ１、サブウィンドウ７４１ｃ２、選択マーカ７４１ｃ３、カーソルキー７４１ｃ４、７４１ｃ５、解説表示部７４１ｃ６、終了ボタン７４１ｃ７、で構成される。その他のオブジェクトが更に追加されていても良い。 [Broadcast-linked application execution screen of portable information terminal]
FIG. 47 is a screen display diagram illustrating an example of a broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) execution screen displayed in the process of S1512 of FIG. 41C. 47 includes a main window 741c1, a sub window 741c2, a selection marker 741c3, cursor keys 741c4 and 741c5, an explanation display unit 741c6, and an end button 741c7. Other objects may be further added.
　本実施例における、携帯情報端末７００で実行される前記放送連携アプリ（端末側）は、放送受信装置１００で表示中の放送番組の詳細を確認するためのアプリケーションであるものとする。また、メインウィンドウ７４１ｃ１には放送受信装置１００で表示されている放送番組画面と同じ映像が、サブウィンドウ７４１ｃ２には選択マーカ７４１ｃ３で指定される位置の拡大映像が、それぞれ表示される。カーソルキー７４１ｃ４および７４１ｃ５を選択することにより、選択マーカ７４１ｃ３の位置を変更することが可能であるものとする。解説表示部７１４ｃ６には、メインウィンドウ７４１ｃ１に表示中の前記放送番組に関する解説字幕文や前記放送番組に関して他のユーザが投稿したコメント等が表示されるものとする。終了ボタン７４１ｃ７は前記放送連携アプリ（端末側）の動作を終了させるためのボタンである。 In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the broadcast cooperative app (terminal side) executed on the portable information terminal 700 is an application for confirming the details of the broadcast program being displayed on the broadcast receiving device 100. The main window 741c1 displays the same video as the broadcast program screen displayed on the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, and the subwindow 741c2 displays an enlarged video at a position specified by the selection marker 741c3. It is assumed that the position of the selection marker 741c3 can be changed by selecting the cursor keys 741c4 and 741c5. The comment display section 714c6 displays comment captions regarding the broadcast program being displayed on the main window 741c1, comments posted by other users regarding the broadcast program, and the like. The end button 741c7 is a button for ending the operation of the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side).
　前記放送連携アプリ（端末側）を携帯情報端末７００上で動作させることにより、放送受信装置１００と携帯情報端末７００との連携動作による放送通信連携サービスの機能拡張が可能となる。 By operating the broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) on the portable information terminal 700, it is possible to expand the function of the broadcast communication cooperation service by the cooperative operation of the broadcast receiving device 100 and the portable information terminal 700.
　［放送受信装置のＥＰＧ画面］
　図４８Ａは、本実施例の放送受信装置１００におけるＥＰＧ画面１６２ａの各放送番組の詳細情報１６２ａ１の、実施例１の説明とは異なる一例を示す図である。 [EPG screen of broadcast receiver]
FIG. 48A is a diagram showing an example of detailed information 162a1 of each broadcast program on the EPG screen 162a in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment, which is different from the description of the first embodiment.
　タイトル領域１６２ａ２には、実施例１で説明した記号／文字、印、等の他、本実施例の放送受信装置１００で実行可能な放送連携アプリが用意されている放送番組であることを意味する『Ｌｉｎｋａｇｅ』を記号化した印１６２ａ５等を表示するようにしても良い。また、この場合、詳細説明領域１６２ａ３に、前記放送連携アプリに関する情報（取得先ＵＲＬ等）を表示するようにしても良い。 In the title area 162a2, in addition to the symbols / characters, marks, and the like described in the first embodiment, it means that the program is a broadcast program for which a broadcast cooperation application that can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment is prepared. A mark 162a5 or the like symbolized “Linkage” may be displayed. In this case, information (such as an acquisition URL) regarding the broadcast cooperative app may be displayed in the detailed description area 162a3.
　なお、タイトル領域１６２ａ２に表示される前記『Ｌｉｎｋａｇｅ』を記号化した印１６２ａ５等は、前記放送番組に放送連携アプリが用意されている場合であっても、アプリケーションプロファイルの確認の結果、放送受信装置１００での実行が不可の場合には表示しないようにしても良い。また、タイトル領域１６２ａ２に表示される、前記実行可能な放送連携アプリが用意されている放送番組であることを示す『Ｌｉｎｋａｇｅ』を記号化した印１６２ａ５は、更に、携帯端末機器（携帯情報端末７００等）との連携動作が可能であるか否かで、その色、形状、字体、等を変更しても良い。携帯端末機器との連携動作が可能な場合には、前記『Ｌｉｎｋａｇｅ』を記号化した印１６２ａ５と併せて『Ｍｏｂｉｌｅ』を記号化した印１６２ａ７を更に表示するようにしても良い（図４８Ｂ）。 Note that the mark 162a5 or the like symbolized “Linkage” displayed in the title area 162a2 indicates that, as a result of the confirmation of the application profile, even if a broadcast cooperative app is prepared for the broadcast program, If execution at 100 is not possible, it may not be displayed. In addition, a mark 162a5 symbolized “Linkage” displayed in the title area 162a2 and indicating the broadcast program for which the executable broadcast cooperation application is prepared is further displayed on the mobile terminal device (the mobile information terminal 700). Etc.), the color, shape, font, etc. may be changed depending on whether or not the cooperative operation is possible. When a cooperative operation with a portable terminal device is possible, a mark 162a7 symbolized “Mobile” may be displayed together with the mark 162a5 symbolized “Linkage” (FIG. 48B).
　また更に、携帯端末機器（携帯情報端末７００等）を含む外部機器との連携動作において、外部機器とのアセットの提示同期を行う番組の場合には、『Ｓｙｎｃｈｒｏｎｉｚａｔｉｏｎ』を記号化した印１６２ａ８を更に表示するようにしても良い（図４８Ｃ）。 Furthermore, in the case of a program that synchronizes the presentation of assets with an external device in a cooperative operation with an external device including a portable terminal device (such as the portable information terminal 700), a mark 162a8 that symbolizes “Synchronization” is further added. You may make it display (FIG. 48C).
　なお、前記『Ｌｉｎｋａｇｅ』を記号化した印１６２ａ５や『Ｍｏｂｉｌｅ』を記号化した印１６２ａ７や『Ｓｙｎｃｈｒｏｎｉｚａｔｉｏｎ』を記号化した印１６２ａ８の表示の有無は、各放送番組の詳細情報等を含むＭＨ－ＥＩＴ等に予め記載しておいた、各放送番組が本実施例の放送受信装置１００で実行可能な放送連携アプリが用意されている放送番組であるか否か、前記実行可能な放送連携アプリが携帯端末機器との連携動作が可能であるか否か、等の情報を取得することにより制御されるようにすれば良い。特に、外部機器とのアセットの提示同期を行う場合は、外部機器が図１２Ａで示されるようなＮＴＰ形式のクロックカウンタか同等の機能を持つカウンタを備えているか否かの情報も参照して『Ｓｙｎｃｈｒｏｎｉｚａｔｉｏｎ』を記号化した印１６２ａ８の表示が制御されることが望ましい。例えば提示同期を行うことができる外部機器を認識できない場合、図４８Ｄの印１６２ａ９のように、提示同期ができない状態にあることを示す表示を行っても良い。また、提示同期が行えない状態にある場合は、当該アプリケーションの使用を禁止しても良いし、更に、当該アプリケーションがあることを電子番組表に表示しないようにしても良い。 Whether or not the mark 162a5 symbolized “Linkage”, the mark 162a7 symbolized “Mobile”, or the symbol 162a8 symbolized “Synchronization” is displayed is MH-EIT including detailed information of each broadcast program. Whether or not each broadcast program is a broadcast program for which a broadcast cooperative app that can be executed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment is prepared, the executable broadcast cooperative app is portable. What is necessary is just to make it control by acquiring information, such as whether cooperation operation | movement with a terminal device is possible. In particular, when performing asset presentation synchronization with an external device, refer to information on whether the external device has an NTP format clock counter as shown in FIG. 12A or a counter having an equivalent function. It is desirable to control the display of the mark 162a8 symbolizing "Synchronization". For example, when an external device that can perform presentation synchronization cannot be recognized, a display indicating that presentation synchronization is not possible may be performed as indicated by a mark 162a9 in FIG. 48D. Further, when the presentation synchronization cannot be performed, the use of the application may be prohibited, and the presence of the application may not be displayed on the electronic program guide.
　あるいは、インターネット２００上の所定のサーバ装置に用意されたデジタル放送番組の番組配信情報から取得した前記情報を、デジタル放送サービスの放送波から取得した番組情報データ列に基づいて作成したＥＰＧに付加するようにしても良い。 Alternatively, the information acquired from the program distribution information of the digital broadcast program prepared in a predetermined server device on the Internet 200 is added to the EPG created based on the program information data string acquired from the broadcast wave of the digital broadcast service. You may do it.
　前述のように、ＥＰＧ画面１６２ａ上に、実行可能な放送連携アプリが用意されている放送番組であることを示す『Ｌｉｎｋａｇｅ』を記号化した印１６２ａ５や携帯端末機器との連携動作が可能なことを示す『Ｍｏｂｉｌｅ』を記号化した印１６７ａ７や『Ｓｙｎｃｈｒｏｎｉｚａｔｉｏｎ』を記号化した印１６２ａ８を表示することにより、ユーザは、放送受信装置１００における各放送番組の放送通信連携サービスへの対応状況を簡単に把握することが可能となる。なお、言うまでもなく、前記各放送番組の属性を表す所定の文字を記号化した印は、文字そのものや文章等と代替しても良い。各放送番組の詳細情報１６２ａ１の背景色を変更することにより、各放送番組の放送通信連携サービスへの対応状況を示しても良い。また、前記『Ｌｉｎｋａｇｅ』を記号化した印１６２ａ５や『Ｍｏｂｉｌｅ』を記号化した印１６２ａ７や『Ｓｙｎｃｈｒｏｎｉｚａｔｉｏｎ』を記号化した印１６２ａ８等は、通常はタイトル領域１６２ａ２には表示せず、各放送番組が選択された場合にのみポップアップ表示されるようにしても良い。 As described above, the EPG screen 162a can be linked to the sign 162a5, which symbolizes “Linkage” indicating that the executable broadcast cooperation application is prepared, and the portable terminal device. By displaying the mark 167a7 symbolizing “Mobile” and the symbol 162a8 symbolizing “Synchronization”, the user can easily determine the status of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 corresponding to the broadcast communication cooperation service. It becomes possible to grasp. Needless to say, a mark obtained by symbolizing a predetermined character representing the attribute of each broadcast program may be replaced with the character itself or a sentence. By changing the background color of the detailed information 162a1 of each broadcast program, the corresponding status of the broadcast program to the broadcast communication cooperation service may be indicated. In addition, the mark 162a5 symbolized “Linkage”, the symbol 162a7 symbolized “Mobile”, the symbol 162a8 symbolized “Synchronization”, etc. are not normally displayed in the title area 162a2, and each broadcast program is displayed. A pop-up may be displayed only when selected.
　本実施例の放送受信装置１００はＥＰＧ画面１６２ａ上から放送番組毎の視聴予約および／または録画予約を行う機能を有する。例えば、ＥＰＧ画面１６２ａが表示されている状態で、連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ａのカーソルキー７４１ａｃを用いてＥＰＧ画面１６２ａ上の番組選択カーソルを移動させ、決定キー７４１ａｄにより任意の放送番組を選択することにより、前記選択した放送番組の視聴予約および／または録画予約を行うことが可能であるものとする。 The broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment has a function of performing viewing reservation and / or recording reservation for each broadcast program from the EPG screen 162a. For example, in a state where the EPG screen 162a is displayed, the program selection cursor on the EPG screen 162a is moved using the cursor key 741ac of the basic screen 741a of the cooperation control application, and an arbitrary broadcast program is selected using the decision key 741ad. Thus, it is possible to make a viewing reservation and / or a recording reservation for the selected broadcast program.
　前述の処理において、前記視聴予約および／または録画予約を行った放送番組が放送通信連携サービスへ対応する放送番組である場合、前記視聴予約および／または録画予約を行ったことをトリガとして、前記放送番組の放送開始時間を待たずに、前記放送番組用に用意された放送連携アプリの取得を開始するようにしても良い。即ち、各放送番組の詳細情報等を含むＭＨ－ＥＩＴ等に前記放送連携アプリの取得先を指定する情報（ＵＲＬ等のロケーション情報）等を記載しておくようにする。このようにすれば、放送受信装置１００は、各放送番組用に用意された前記放送連携アプリの取得先の情報等を、前記放送番組を番組選択カーソルで選択した時点で把握することが可能となる。このため、放送受信装置１００は、前記放送番組の放送開始時間となる前に前記放送連携アプリの取得を開始することが可能となる。 In the above-described processing, when the broadcast program for which the viewing reservation and / or recording reservation has been made is a broadcast program corresponding to the broadcasting / communication cooperation service, the broadcast is triggered by the viewing reservation and / or recording reservation being made You may make it start acquisition of the broadcast cooperation application prepared for the said broadcast programs, without waiting for the broadcast start time of a program. That is, information (location information such as URL) for specifying the acquisition destination of the broadcast cooperative application is described in MH-EIT including detailed information of each broadcast program. In this way, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can grasp the information on the acquisition destination of the broadcast cooperative app prepared for each broadcast program when the broadcast program is selected with the program selection cursor. Become. Therefore, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can start acquiring the broadcast cooperative app before the broadcast start time of the broadcast program is reached.
　なお、前記視聴予約および／または録画予約を行った放送番組が放送通信連携サービスへ対応する放送番組であり、かつ、携帯端末機器との連携動作が可能な放送番組である場合、携帯端末機器用に用意された放送連携アプリ（端末側）も、前述と同様の処理で、前記放送番組の放送開始時間となる前に取得開始するようにしても良い。また、図４８Ｂに示すように、前記携帯端末機器用に用意された放送連携アプリ（端末側）の取得先の情報（ＵＲＬ等のロケーション情報）を示す二次元バーコード１６２ａ６等をＥＰＧ画面１６２ａの詳細説明領域１６２ａ３に表示して、ユーザに携帯端末機器用に用意された放送連携アプリ（端末側）のダウンロードを促すようにしても良い。 If the broadcast program for which the viewing reservation and / or the recording reservation has been made is a broadcast program corresponding to the broadcasting / communication cooperation service and is a broadcast program capable of cooperative operation with the mobile terminal device, The broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) prepared in the above may be started before the broadcast start time of the broadcast program by the same processing as described above. Further, as shown in FIG. 48B, a two-dimensional barcode 162a6 and the like indicating acquisition destination information (location information such as URL) of the broadcast cooperative app (terminal side) prepared for the mobile terminal device is displayed on the EPG screen 162a. It may be displayed in the detailed description area 162a3 so as to prompt the user to download the broadcast cooperation app (terminal side) prepared for the mobile terminal device.
　このように、放送受信装置１００が、ＭＨ－ＥＩＴ等に含まれる放送連携アプリの取得先情報等を参照して、前記放送連携アプリの取得を放送番組の放送開始時間となる前に開始するようにすれば、放送連携アプリを記憶するサービス事業者サーバ４００の負荷を分散させることが可能となる。また、サービス事業者サーバ４００と放送受信装置１００の間のネットワークの通信速度が不十分な場合であっても、前記放送番組の放送開始直後から前記放送連携アプリを有効に活用することができるようになる。 As described above, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 refers to the acquisition destination information of the broadcast cooperative application included in the MH-EIT or the like so as to start the acquisition of the broadcast cooperative application before the broadcast start time of the broadcast program is reached. By doing so, it becomes possible to distribute the load of the service provider server 400 that stores the broadcast cooperation application. Further, even when the network communication speed between the service provider server 400 and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is insufficient, the broadcast cooperative app can be effectively used immediately after the broadcast of the broadcast program starts. become.
　図４９Ａは、ＥＰＧ画面１６２ａ上から放送番組の視聴予約および／または録画予約を行った場合の放送連携アプリの取得動作の一例を示す動作シーケンス図である。 FIG. 49A is an operation sequence diagram illustrating an example of an acquisition operation of the broadcast cooperative app when a broadcast program viewing reservation and / or recording reservation is made from the EPG screen 162a.
　放送受信装置１００のチューナ／復調部１３１がユーザの所望するチャンネルの選局処理を行ってＭＭＴデータ列を取得すると、受信機能実行部１１０２のＥＰＧ生成部１１０２ｇがＭ２セクションメッセージに格納されたＭＨ－ＥＩＴの取得を行う（Ｓ１６０１）。更に、前記取得したＭＨ－ＥＩＴを解釈することにより、本実施例の放送サービスのＥＰＧ画面を生成する（Ｓ１６０２）。なお、Ｓ１６０１～Ｓ１６０２の処理は、前記選局処理を行ったチャンネルの放送番組映像がモニタ部１６２に表示されている間のバックグラウンドで行われるものであって良い。 When the tuner / demodulation unit 131 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 performs channel selection processing of the channel desired by the user and acquires the MMT data string, the EPG generation unit 1102g of the reception function execution unit 1102 stores the MH− stored in the M2 section message. EIT is acquired (S1601). Further, by interpreting the acquired MH-EIT, an EPG screen of the broadcasting service of this embodiment is generated (S1602). Note that the processing of S1601 to S1602 may be performed in the background while the broadcast program video of the channel for which the channel selection processing has been performed is displayed on the monitor unit 162.
　ここで、ユーザが、放送受信装置１００を操作可能なリモコンや携帯情報端末を用いて、ＥＰＧ画面の表示（起動）を指示する（Ｓ１６０３）と、モニタ部１６２に前記生成したＥＰＧ画面がＯＳＤ表示される（Ｓ１６０４）。Ｓ１６０４の処理で表示されるＥＰＧ画面は、図２０Ａに示したようなＥＰＧ画面１６２ａのような形式であって良い。ＥＰＧ画面１６２ａ上で、ユーザが、前記リモコンや携帯情報端末を操作して、所望の放送番組の選択を指示し（Ｓ１６０５）、続いて、前記選択した放送番組の視聴予約および／または録画予約を指示する（Ｓ１６０６）と、受信機能実行部１１０２の図示を省略した番組予約処理部が前記選択した放送番組の視聴予約および／または録画予約の処理を実行する（Ｓ１６０７）。なお、前記視聴予約および／または録画予約の処理は、公知の放送によって行われて良く、詳細の説明を省略する。 Here, when the user instructs display (activation) of the EPG screen using a remote controller or a portable information terminal capable of operating the broadcast receiving device 100 (S1603), the generated EPG screen is displayed on the monitor unit 162 as an OSD display. (S1604). The EPG screen displayed in the process of S1604 may have a format such as the EPG screen 162a as shown in FIG. 20A. On the EPG screen 162a, the user operates the remote controller or the portable information terminal to instruct selection of a desired broadcast program (S1605), and then makes a reservation for viewing and / or recording of the selected broadcast program. When instructed (S 1606), the program reservation processing unit (not shown) of the reception function execution unit 1102 executes viewing reservation and / or recording reservation processing of the selected broadcast program (S 1607). Note that the viewing reservation and / or recording reservation processing may be performed by publicly known broadcasting, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
　Ｓ１６０７の処理の後、アプリケーション制御部が前記選択した放送番組に係るＭＨ－ＥＩＴを確認し（Ｓ１６０８）、前記選択した放送番組に関連する放送連携アプリが存在するか否かを確認し、更に、前記選択した放送番組に関連する放送連携アプリが存在する場合には、前記放送連携アプリの取得先（ＵＲＬ）の確認を行う（Ｓ１６０９）。Ｓ１６０９の処理において、更に、前記放送連携アプリのアプリケーションプロファイルの確認を行っても良い。次に、アプリケーション制御部１５３は、前記取得したＵＲＬに基づき、ＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介して、前記ＵＲＬで指定されるサーバ（本実施例では、サービス事業者サーバ４００）に対して、放送連携アプリの配信要求を行う（Ｓ１６１０）。前記配信要求を受信したサービス事業者サーバ４００は、適宜放送受信装置１００の認証処理等を行った後に、要求された放送連携アプリの配信を行う（Ｓ１６１１）。ＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介して、サービス事業者サーバ４００から放送連携アプリを受信すると、放送受信装置１００は、前記受信した放送連携アプリを、アプリケーション制御部１５３の制御に基づき、キャッシュ部１５２にキャッシュする（Ｓ１６１２）。 After the process of S1607, the application control unit confirms the MH-EIT related to the selected broadcast program (S1608), confirms whether there is a broadcast cooperation application related to the selected broadcast program, If there is a broadcast cooperation application related to the selected broadcast program, the acquisition destination (URL) of the broadcast cooperation application is confirmed (S1609). In the processing of S1609, the application profile of the broadcast cooperative app may be further confirmed. Next, based on the acquired URL, the application control unit 153 sends a broadcast cooperation application to the server (in this embodiment, the service provider server 400) specified by the URL via the LAN communication unit 121. The distribution request is made (S1610). The service provider server 400 that has received the distribution request distributes the requested broadcast cooperative app after appropriately performing an authentication process or the like of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S1611). When receiving the broadcast cooperative app from the service provider server 400 via the LAN communication unit 121, the broadcast receiving device 100 caches the received broadcast cooperative app in the cache unit 152 based on the control of the application control unit 153. (S1612).
　以上の一連の処理により、本実施例の放送受信装置１００において、ＥＰＧ画面１６２ａ上から放送番組の視聴予約および／または録画予約を行った際に、放送連携アプリの取得を行うことが可能となる。なお、Ｓ１６０８の処理におけるＭＨ－ＥＩＴの確認処理は、都度放送波からＭＨ－ＥＩＴを取得して確認するようにしても良いし、Ｓ１６０１の処理で取得したＭＨ－ＥＩＴをキャッシュしておき、前記キャッシュしたＭＨ－ＥＩＴを確認するようにしても良い。また、前記動作シーケンスは、あくまでも一例であり、異なる処理手順を用いても良い。 Through the series of processes described above, when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 according to the present embodiment makes a broadcast program viewing reservation and / or recording reservation from the EPG screen 162a, it is possible to acquire a broadcast cooperation application. . Note that the MH-EIT confirmation processing in the processing of S1608 may be performed by acquiring the MH-EIT from the broadcast wave every time, or by caching the MH-EIT acquired in the processing of S1601 The cached MH-EIT may be confirmed. The operation sequence is merely an example, and different processing procedures may be used.
　図４９Ｂは、携帯情報端末７００等の携帯端末機器が、ＥＰＧ画面１６２ａの詳細説明領域１６２ａ３に表示された二次元バーコード１６２ａ６により、携帯端末機器用に用意された放送連携アプリ（端末側）の取得動作の一例を示す動作シーケンス図である。
　まず、放送受信装置１００では、図４９ＡのＳ１６０１～Ｓ１６０４と同様の処理により、ＥＰＧ画面を生成して表示する（Ｓ１７０１）。 FIG. 49B shows a case where a mobile terminal device such as the mobile information terminal 700 uses a two-dimensional barcode 162a6 displayed in the detailed description area 162a3 of the EPG screen 162a to display a broadcast cooperation application (terminal side) prepared for the mobile terminal device. It is an operation | movement sequence diagram which shows an example of acquisition operation | movement.
First, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 generates and displays an EPG screen by the same processing as S1601 to S1604 in FIG. 49A (S1701).
　次に、ユーザが、携帯情報端末７００の操作部７３０を操作して、連携制御アプリの起動を指示して、連携制御アプリを起動し（Ｓ１７０２）、図４８に示すような、ＥＰＧ画面１６２ａの詳細説明領域１６２ａ３に表示された二次元バーコード１６２ａ６を撮影する（Ｓ１７０３）。 Next, the user operates the operation unit 730 of the portable information terminal 700 to instruct the activation of the cooperation control application, activates the cooperation control application (S1702), and the EPG screen 162a as illustrated in FIG. 48 is displayed. The two-dimensional barcode 162a6 displayed in the detailed description area 162a3 is photographed (S1703).
　次に、二次元バーコード１６２ａ６で示されている放送連携アプリの取得先（ＵＲＬ）の確認を行い（Ｓ１７０４）、前記取得したＵＲＬに基づき、ＬＡＮ通信部７２１または電話網通信部７２２を介して、前記ＵＲＬで指定されるサーバ（本実施例では、サービス事業者サーバ４００）に対して、放送連携アプリの配信要求を行う（Ｓ１７０５）。前記配信要求を受信したサービス事業者サーバ４００は、適宜携帯情報端末７００の認証処理等を行った後に、要求された放送連携アプリの配信を行う（Ｓ１７０７）。 Next, the acquisition destination (URL) of the broadcast cooperative application indicated by the two-dimensional barcode 162a6 is confirmed (S1704), and based on the acquired URL, via the LAN communication unit 721 or the telephone network communication unit 722. Then, a broadcast cooperation application distribution request is made to the server specified in the URL (in this embodiment, the service provider server 400) (S1705). The service provider server 400 that has received the distribution request distributes the requested broadcast cooperative app after appropriately performing authentication processing of the portable information terminal 700 or the like (S1707).
　次に、ＬＡＮ通信部７２１または電話網通信部７２２を介して、サービス事業者サーバ４００から放送連携アプリを受信すると、携帯情報端末７００は、前記受信した放送連携アプリを、ストレージ部７１０等にキャッシュする（Ｓ１７０７）。 Next, when the broadcast cooperative app is received from the service provider server 400 via the LAN communication unit 721 or the telephone network communication unit 722, the portable information terminal 700 caches the received broadcast cooperative app in the storage unit 710 or the like. (S1707).
　以上説明した本実施例の放送受信装置１００によれば、より付加価値の高い機能を実行することが可能となる。 According to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 of the present embodiment described above, it is possible to execute a function with higher added value.
　（実施例４）
　以下では、本発明の実施例４に関して説明する。なお、本実施例における構成および効果等は特に断りのない限り実施例３と同様であるものとする。このため、以下では、本実施例と実施例３との相違点を主に説明し、共通する点については重複を避けるため極力説明を省略する。また、本実施例では、放送受信装置と携帯情報端末の連携処理（以下、端末連携と称する）を行う場合の、更に詳細な実施態様について説明する。 Example 4
Hereinafter, Example 4 of the present invention will be described. The configuration, effects, and the like in this example are the same as those in Example 3 unless otherwise specified. For this reason, below, the difference between a present Example and Example 3 is mainly demonstrated, and in order to avoid duplication about a common point, description is abbreviate | omitted as much as possible. Further, in the present embodiment, a more detailed embodiment in the case of performing a cooperation process (hereinafter referred to as terminal cooperation) between the broadcast receiving device and the portable information terminal will be described.
　携帯情報端末の連携処理を行う際に、放送受信装置１００と同じ宅内にある携帯情報端末７００のみに端末連携の利用を制限したい場合がある（以下、この制限を同一宅内制限と称する）。例えば、放送連携サービスを利用するためのアプリケーション（以下、放送連携アプリと称する）において、放送受信装置１００の表示画面と携帯情報端末７００の表示画面が密接に関係している場合や、放送受信装置１００に表示される広告映像を携帯情報端末７００の利用者に確実に視聴して欲しい場合、等である。 When performing cooperation processing of portable information terminals, there is a case where it is desired to restrict the use of terminal cooperation only to portable information terminals 700 in the same house as the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (hereinafter, this restriction is referred to as the same house restriction). For example, in an application for using a broadcast cooperation service (hereinafter referred to as a broadcast cooperation application), when the display screen of the broadcast receiving device 100 and the display screen of the portable information terminal 700 are closely related, 100 when the user of the portable information terminal 700 is surely viewing the advertisement video displayed on the screen.
　なお、手順として考えておかなければならない点は、対象となる放送連携アプリが同一宅内制限を課すものか否かの判断である。あらゆる放送連携アプリが同一宅内制限を課すことを前提とする場合は、この判断は不要であるが、同一宅内制限を課さない放送連携アプリもある場合には、同一宅内制限の有無に関する制御情報を放送受信装置１００が取得し、操作手順を変更する必要がある。この同一宅内制限の有無に関する制御情報は、放送信号から取得しても良いし（例えば、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴ等にパラメータや記述子として記載しておく、等）、放送局指定のサーバから取得しても良い。 It should be noted that the point that must be considered as a procedure is whether or not the target broadcast cooperation application imposes the same in-house restrictions. This judgment is not necessary if all broadcast-linked apps impose the same in-house restrictions, but if there are broadcast-linked apps that do not impose the same in-house restrictions, control information regarding the presence or absence of the same in-house restrictions is provided. The broadcast receiving apparatus 100 needs to acquire and change the operation procedure. The control information regarding the presence or absence of the same home restriction may be acquired from a broadcast signal (for example, described as a parameter or descriptor in MH-AIT, etc.) or acquired from a server designated by the broadcast station. Also good.
　一例として、コンテンツ利用制御記述子（図２３）においてリモート視聴を不可とする場合（ｒｅｍｏｔｅ＿ｖｉｅｗ＿ｍｏｄｅが０の場合）には、その放送番組に係る全ての放送連携アプリを同一宅内制限があるものとして扱い、リモート視聴が可の場合（ｒｅｍｏｔｅ＿ｖｉｅｗ＿ｍｏｄｅが１の場合）にはその放送番組に係る全ての放送連携アプリを同一宅内制限がないとして扱っても良い。 As an example, when remote viewing is disabled in the content usage control descriptor (FIG. 23) (when remote_view_mode is 0), all broadcast cooperation apps related to the broadcast program are treated as having the same in-home restriction, When remote viewing is possible (when remote_view_mode is 1), all the broadcast cooperative apps related to the broadcast program may be treated as having no same in-home restriction.
　あるいは、リモート視聴が可の場合であっても、ＭＨ－アプリケーション記述子（図５０）において、『ｌｏｃａｌ＿ｍｏｄｅ＿ｆｌａｇ』パラメータを設け、このパラメータの値が１の場合は、そのアプリケーションに同一宅内制限があるものとして扱い、パラメータの値が０の場合は、同一宅内制限がないものとして扱うことでも構わない。このようにすれば、アプリケーション毎に同一宅内制限の制御を行うことができ、よりきめ細かい制御が可能となる。 Alternatively, even if remote viewing is possible, a “local_mode_flag” parameter is provided in the MH-application descriptor (FIG. 50), and if this parameter value is 1, the application has the same home restrictions If the parameter value is 0, it may be handled as having no same in-home restriction. In this way, it is possible to control the same in-house restriction for each application, and finer control is possible.
　なお、リモート視聴の可否のフラグが無かった場合には、著作権保護を重要視してリモート視聴を禁止しても良いし、視聴者の利便性を優先してリモート視聴を許可することにしても良い。 If there is no flag for whether or not remote viewing is possible, remote viewing may be prohibited with emphasis on copyright protection, or remote viewing is permitted with priority given to viewer convenience. Also good.
　更に、『ｌｏｃａｌ＿ｍｏｄｅ＿ｆｌａｇ』が無かった場合には、ライセンス保護を重要視して宅外からのアプリケーションの利用を禁止しても良いし、視聴者の利便性を優先して宅外からのアプリケーションの利用を許可することにしても良い。 In addition, when there is no “local_mode_flag”, the use of applications from outside the house may be prohibited with an emphasis on license protection, and the use of applications from outside the house is given priority to the convenience of the viewer. May be allowed.
　また、リモート視聴の可否あるいはアプリケーションの宅外からの実行の可否は、電子番組表に表示されていても良い。一例を挙げれば、リモート視聴が許可されているか、宅外から利用が許可されているアプリケーションがある場合に、『ｒｅｍｏｔｅ』を記号化した印１６２ａ１０（図４８Ｅ）を、当該番組の欄に表示する。更に、リモート視聴が許可されていない、あるいは宅外からのアプリケーションの利用が許可されていない場合に、１６２ａ１１のような印を表示するようにしても良い（図４８Ｆ）。 Further, whether or not remote viewing is possible or whether or not the application can be executed from outside the house may be displayed in the electronic program guide. For example, when remote viewing is permitted or there is an application permitted to be used from outside the house, a mark 162a10 (FIG. 48E) in which “remote” is symbolized is displayed in the column of the program. . Further, when remote viewing is not permitted or use of an application from outside the house is not permitted, a mark such as 162a11 may be displayed (FIG. 48F).
　以上の手順も含め、本実施例では、携帯情報端末７００が放送受信装置１００と同一宅内に存在することを保証する手順について説明する。 In the present embodiment, including the above-described procedure, a procedure for ensuring that the portable information terminal 700 exists in the same home as the broadcast receiving device 100 will be described.
　通常、同一宅内に存在する機器は、同じルータ装置２００ｒに接続されているローカルネットワーク上に存在する。従って、携帯情報端末７００が放送受信装置１００と同じローカルネットワークに接続されていることで、同一宅内に存在すると判断することができる。なお、対象機器がローカルネットワークに接続されているか否かは、公知の方法を用いて確認すれば良く、詳細な説明を省略する。 Usually, devices existing in the same house exist on a local network connected to the same router device 200r. Therefore, since the portable information terminal 700 is connected to the same local network as the broadcast receiving device 100, it can be determined that the portable information terminal 700 exists in the same home. Note that whether or not the target device is connected to the local network may be confirmed using a known method, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
　また、放送受信装置１００と同じローカルネットワーク上にない携帯情報端末７００であっても、ＮＦＣ、ＢｌｕｅＴｏｏｔｈ、赤外線通信等により放送受信装置１００と直接通信を行う携帯情報端末７００であれば、同一宅内に存在すると判定することもできる。この場合、放送連携アプリ等の取得のための通信は、上記直接通信によるものでも構わないし、移動体電話通信によるものでも構わない。 Even if the portable information terminal 700 is not on the same local network as the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, the portable information terminal 700 that directly communicates with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 by NFC, BlueTooth, infrared communication, etc. It can also be determined that it exists. In this case, the communication for acquiring the broadcast cooperation application or the like may be performed by the direct communication or by mobile phone communication.
　上記のように同一宅内に存在することの確認方法は複数考えられるが、どの方法を使用するかは、例えばＭＨ－ＡＩＴ等に記述しておき、放送受信装置１００が前記ＭＨ－ＡＩＴ等の記述を読み取ることにより、選択すれば良い。 As described above, there can be a plurality of methods for confirming the presence in the same home. However, which method is used is described in, for example, MH-AIT, and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 describes the MH-AIT. Can be selected by reading.
　また、一度同一宅内に携帯情報端末７００が存在することが確認できれば、番組が終わるまでは同一宅内に存在すると見做すようにしても良いし、ある有効時間（例えば、１０分）を設け、有効時間内は同一宅内に存在すると見做すが、有効時間が過ぎた後は、再度確認しなければ同一宅内に存在すると見做さないとする方法を使用することもできる。この有効時間は、例えばＭＨ－ＡＩＴ等に記述しておき、放送受信装置１００で読み取れば良い。 Further, once it can be confirmed that the portable information terminal 700 exists in the same home, it may be assumed that the mobile information terminal 700 exists in the same home until the end of the program, or a certain valid time (for example, 10 minutes) is provided, It is also possible to use a method in which it is assumed that it exists in the same house during the effective time, but after the effective time has passed, it is not assumed that it exists in the same house unless it is confirmed again. The effective time may be described in, for example, MH-AIT and read by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
　更に、例えば、番組進行中の任意の時点で、放送信号にイベント信号を設定しておき、このイベント信号を受信する毎に携帯情報端末７００が同一宅内に存在することを確認するという方法をとることもできる。更に、前述の各方法を適宜組み合わせて使用することも可能である。 Further, for example, an event signal is set in the broadcast signal at an arbitrary time during the program, and the portable information terminal 700 is confirmed to exist in the same house every time the event signal is received. You can also Further, the above-described methods can be used in appropriate combination.
　次に、同一宅内に存在する携帯情報端末７００のみに端末連携を許可する具体的手順について説明する。この実施例では、携帯情報端末７００が放送連携アプリを取得する際、あるいは、放送連携アプリで使用する情報を取得する際に、制限を設ける。（なお、以下では、前記放送連携アプリと放送連携アプリで使用する情報、具体的にはＨＴＭＬ文書やストリーミング映像等、をまとめて放送連携情報と称する。）放送連携情報の取得方法には、放送局サーバ３００または事業者サーバ４００等から取得する通信取得と、放送波から取得する放送取得の２種類がある。 Next, a specific procedure for permitting terminal cooperation only for the portable information terminal 700 existing in the same house will be described. In this embodiment, restrictions are provided when the portable information terminal 700 acquires a broadcast cooperative app or when information used in the broadcast cooperative app is acquired. (Hereinafter, the broadcast cooperation application and information used in the broadcast cooperation application, specifically, HTML document, streaming video, etc. will be collectively referred to as broadcast cooperation information.) There are two types: communication acquisition acquired from the station server 300 or the operator server 400, and broadcast acquisition acquired from broadcast waves.
　また、通信取得の場合、放送受信開始後に取得する場合と放送受信開始前に取得しておく方法の２種類がある。更に、通信取得の場合、一旦放送受信装置１００が取得し、携帯情報端末７００が放送受信装置１００から取得する場合と、携帯情報端末７００が直接放送局サーバ３００または事業者サーバ４００等から取得する場合がある。種々の方法があるが、携帯情報端末７００から見ると、放送受信装置１００から取得する場合と、放送局サーバ３００または事業者サーバ４００等から取得する場合の２つに大別できる。 Also, there are two types of communication acquisition: acquisition after the start of broadcast reception and acquisition methods before the start of broadcast reception. Furthermore, in the case of communication acquisition, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 acquires once, the portable information terminal 700 acquires from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, and the portable information terminal 700 acquires directly from the broadcast station server 300 or the operator server 400 or the like. There is a case. There are various methods, but when viewed from the portable information terminal 700, it can be broadly divided into two cases: obtaining from the broadcast receiving device 100 and obtaining from the broadcast station server 300 or the operator server 400.
　本実施例では、携帯情報端末７００が放送受信装置１００から放送連携情報を取得する場合を説明し、放送局サーバ３００または事業者サーバ４００等から取得する場合は後述の実施例で説明する。 In the present embodiment, the case where the portable information terminal 700 acquires broadcast cooperation information from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 will be described, and the case where the mobile information terminal 700 acquires from the broadcast station server 300 or the provider server 400 will be described in the following embodiment.
　図５１Ａに、本実施例の手順を示す。 FIG. 51A shows the procedure of this example.
　まず、端末連携を行う前に、携帯情報端末７００と放送受信装置１００のそれぞれで、端末連携を制御するアプリケーションである連携制御アプリを起動しておく（Ｓ１０００１、Ｓ１０００２）。この状態で、携帯情報端末７００から放送受信装置１００に対して端末連携要求を行う（Ｓ１０００３）。次に、放送信号のＭ２セクションメッセージに格納されたＭＨ－ＡＩＴを取得する（Ｓ１０００４）。このＭＨ－ＡＩＴの情報から、対象となる携帯情報端末用のアプリが同一宅内制限を課すものか否かを判断し（Ｓ１０００６）、同一宅内制限を課すものである場合はＳ１０００８の手順に進み、端末連携要求のあった最初の段階では、Ｓ１０００９のステップに進み、端末連携要求のあった携帯情報端末７００が放送受信機１００と同一宅内にあるか否かを判定する（Ｓ１０００９）。判定の結果、同一宅内にないと判定された場合は、携帯情報端末側の連携制御アプリに連携不許可の応答を行い、処理を終了する（Ｓ１００１１）。 First, before performing terminal cooperation, the mobile information terminal 700 and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 each activate a cooperation control application that is an application for controlling terminal cooperation (S10001, S10002). In this state, the mobile information terminal 700 makes a terminal cooperation request to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S10003). Next, MH-AIT stored in the M2 section message of the broadcast signal is acquired (S10004). From this MH-AIT information, it is determined whether or not the target mobile information terminal application imposes the same in-house restriction (S10006). If the same in-house restriction is imposed, the procedure proceeds to S10008. In the first stage when the terminal cooperation request is made, the process proceeds to step S10009, and it is determined whether or not the portable information terminal 700 for which the terminal cooperation request is made is in the same house as the broadcast receiver 100 (S10009). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that they are not in the same home, a response indicating that the cooperation is not permitted is sent to the cooperation control application on the portable information terminal side, and the process is terminated (S10011).
　ここで、そもそも、放送連携アプリは全て同一宅内制限を課すとする前提の場合には、Ｓ１０００６の判定は行わずにスキップして良い。同一宅内制限を課すアプリと同一宅内制限を課さないアプリとが両方有りうる場合にＳ１０００６の判定を行うものとする。 Here, in the first place, if it is assumed that all broadcast cooperation apps impose the same in-house restriction, the determination in S10006 may be skipped. If there is both an application that imposes the same home restriction and an application that does not impose the same home restriction, the determination in S10006 is performed.
　Ｓ１０００９の処理で携帯情報端末７００が同一宅内にあると判定されるか、または、Ｓ１０００６の処理で同一宅内制限を課さないアプリであると判断された場合、Ｓ１００１２に進み、放送連携アプリ関連サービスを行う。この放送連携アプリ関連サービス（Ｓ１００１２）では、携帯情報端末７００からの放送連携情報配信要求（Ｓ１００１３）を処理し、携帯情報端末７００に放送連携情報を配信する（Ｓ１００１８）。この放送連携情報には、放送受信装置１００が放送局サーバ３００や事業者サーバ４００等である配信サーバから配信を受けたもの（Ｓ１００１４～Ｓ１００１６）、放送信号から取得したもの（Ｓ１００１７）、放送受信装置１００に記憶（キャッシュ）してあるもの、等があって良い。放送受信装置１００による放送連携情報の受信処理（Ｓ１００１６またはＳ１００１７）は、携帯情報端末７００からの放送連携情報配信要求（Ｓ１００１３）に応じて取得する場合のみではなく、放送受信装置１００が自律的に取得する場合や、放送信号からのイベント発生に基づく取得の場合があっても構わない。そして、携帯情報端末７００への放送連携情報の配信（Ｓ１００１８）も、放送受信装置１００側からの自発的なものがあっても構わない。 If it is determined in step S10009 that the portable information terminal 700 is in the same house, or if it is determined in step S10006 that the application does not impose the same in-home restriction, the process proceeds to step S10012, and the broadcast cooperative application related service is provided. Do. In this broadcast cooperation application-related service (S10012), the broadcast cooperation information distribution request (S10013) from the portable information terminal 700 is processed, and the broadcast cooperation information is distributed to the portable information terminal 700 (S10018). The broadcast cooperation information includes information received by the broadcast receiving device 100 from a distribution server such as the broadcast station server 300 or the operator server 400 (S10014 to S10016), acquired from a broadcast signal (S10017), broadcast reception There may be stored in the apparatus 100 (cache). The broadcast cooperative information receiving process (S10016 or S10017) by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is not only acquired in response to the broadcast cooperative information distribution request (S10013) from the portable information terminal 700, but the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 autonomously There may be a case of acquisition or acquisition based on the occurrence of an event from a broadcast signal. And broadcast cooperation information distribution (S10018) to the portable information terminal 700 may be spontaneous from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 side.
　放送連携情報の受信（取得）および配信に関する一連の処理が終わった後、放送受信装置１００が同一番組の視聴を続けているか否かを判定し（Ｓ１００１９）、もし続けていない場合は、携帯情報端末側の連携制御アプリに連携不許可の応答を行い、処理を終了する（Ｓ１００２０）。 After a series of processing related to reception (acquisition) and distribution of broadcast cooperation information is completed, it is determined whether or not the broadcast receiving device 100 continues to view the same program (S10019). A response indicating that the cooperation is not permitted is sent to the terminal-side cooperation control application, and the process ends (S10020).
　一方、同一番組の視聴を続けている場合は、Ｓ１０００５の手順に戻り、同一宅内制限を課すアプリの場合には、携帯情報端末７００が同一宅内にあるか否かを確認する（Ｓ１０００９）。但し、前回の確認から予め設定された有効時間が経過しているか、あるいは前回の確認以降、放送信号や配信サーバからの確認要求（Ｓ１０００７）が発生しているか、等を判断し（Ｓ１０００８）、何れの条件も満たしていなければ、同一宅内にあるか否かの確認（Ｓ１０００９）は行わず、Ｓ１００１０を経由し、次の放送連携アプリ関連サービス（Ｓ１００１２）の実行に移って良い。ここで、放送信号からの確認要求（Ｓ１０００７）は放送連携情報から取得するように記載してあるが、ここではイベントメッセージも放送連携情報に含まれるものとして記載している。更に、この確認要求がＭＨ－ＡＩＴに記載されても構わない。 On the other hand, if the user continues to watch the same program, the process returns to the procedure of S10005, and in the case of an application that imposes the same in-home restriction, it is confirmed whether or not the portable information terminal 700 is in the same home (S10009). However, it is determined whether a preset valid time has passed since the previous confirmation or whether a broadcast signal or a confirmation request from the distribution server (S10007) has been generated since the previous confirmation (S10008). If neither condition is satisfied, confirmation of whether or not the user is in the same home (S10009) is not performed, and the next broadcast cooperation application related service (S10012) may be executed via S10010. Here, the confirmation request from the broadcast signal (S10007) is described as being acquired from the broadcast cooperation information, but here, the event message is also described as being included in the broadcast cooperation information. Further, this confirmation request may be described in the MH-AIT.
　なお、上記で説明した手順は、Ｓ１００２２の矢印で示される区間において、放送信号、放送受信装置１００、携帯情報端末７００、配信サーバ全体でのループ処理手順である。Ｓ１０００７の確認要求は、ループ内のどのタイミングであっても構わない。 The procedure described above is a loop processing procedure for the broadcast signal, the broadcast receiving device 100, the portable information terminal 700, and the entire distribution server in the section indicated by the arrow in S10022. The confirmation request in S10007 may be at any timing in the loop.
　更に、配信サーバでの認証処理（Ｓ１００１５）に使用する認証キーに、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴに記述された認証情報等を組み込んでも構わない。これにより、正当な認証要求であることが確認できる。また、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴに記述される認証情報等を、番組の進行に伴い変更し、配信サーバにおいて、番組の進行に同期した情報が組み込まれた認証キーでなければ認証を行わないようにすれば、同一番組を視聴し続けていることを確認できる。この場合、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴの情報は適宜読み込み更新を行うこととする（Ｓ１００２１）。なお、放送信号に組み込む認証情報等はＭＨ－ＡＩＴに記載する他に、放送連携情報として組み込むことでも構わない。更にまた、実質的に認証情報等を変更することになる方法として、配信サーバのＵＲＬ自体を番組の進行に従って変更してゆく、という方法を使用することもできる。 Further, the authentication information described in the MH-AIT may be incorporated in the authentication key used for the authentication process (S10015) in the distribution server. Thereby, it can confirm that it is a legitimate authentication request. In addition, if the authentication information described in the MH-AIT is changed as the program progresses, and the distribution server does not perform authentication unless the authentication key incorporates information synchronized with the progress of the program. , You can confirm that you continue to watch the same program. In this case, the MH-AIT information is appropriately read and updated (S10021). Note that the authentication information incorporated into the broadcast signal may be incorporated as broadcast cooperation information in addition to being described in the MH-AIT. Furthermore, as a method for substantially changing the authentication information or the like, a method in which the URL of the distribution server itself is changed according to the progress of the program can be used.
　このように、放送連携アプリ関連サービス（Ｓ１００１２）を実行しながら、予め設定された有効時間毎、あるいは、放送信号や、配信サーバからの確認要求がある毎に、携帯情報端末７００が、放送受信装置１００と同一宅内にあるか否かを確認することにより、適切に同一宅内制限を課す放送関連アプリの実行を行うことができる。更に、放送信号に組み込まれた認証情報を配信サーバでの認証に使用することにより、配信要求の正当性を確保することができ、放送信号の認証情報を適宜変更するようにすれば、同一番組を視聴し続けていることの確認もできる。 As described above, the portable information terminal 700 receives a broadcast signal every time a preset valid time is executed or a confirmation request is received from a broadcast signal or a distribution server while executing the broadcast cooperation application related service (S10012). By checking whether or not the device 100 is in the same home, it is possible to execute a broadcast-related app that appropriately imposes the same home restriction. Furthermore, by using the authentication information incorporated in the broadcast signal for authentication at the distribution server, the validity of the distribution request can be ensured, and if the authentication information of the broadcast signal is appropriately changed, the same program You can also confirm that you are watching
　以上説明した本実施例に係る携帯情報端末連携技術によれば、放送受信装置と連携する携帯情報端末について同一宅内制限を実現することが可能となる。 According to the portable information terminal cooperation technology according to the present embodiment described above, it is possible to realize the same in-home restriction for the portable information terminal that cooperates with the broadcast receiving apparatus.
　（実施例５）
　本実施例では、携帯情報端末７００が放送局サーバ３００または事業者サーバ４００等の配信サーバから放送連携情報を取得する場合に関して説明する。
　図５１Ｂに、本実施例の手順を示す。 (Example 5)
In the present embodiment, a case where the portable information terminal 700 acquires broadcast cooperation information from a distribution server such as the broadcast station server 300 or the operator server 400 will be described.
FIG. 51B shows the procedure of this example.
　まず、端末連携を行う前に、携帯情報端末７００と放送受信装置１００のそれぞれで、端末連携を制御するアプリケーションである連携制御アプリを起動しておく（Ｓ１０１０１、Ｓ１０１０２）。この状態で、携帯情報端末７００から放送受信装置１００に対して端末連携要求を行う（Ｓ１０１０３）。次に、放送信号のＭ２セクションメッセージに格納されたＭＨ－ＡＩＴを取得する（Ｓ１０１０４）。このＭＨ－ＡＩＴの情報から配信サーバに関するＵＲＬ等の情報を取得し、前記取得した情報を携帯情報端末７００に送信する（Ｓ１０１０５）。次に、放送受信装置１００は、配信サーバに対して時刻確認要求を送信する。（Ｓ１０１０６）。前記時刻確認要求に基づき、配信サーバは、放送受信装置１００に対して時刻情報を送信する（Ｓ１０１０７）。 First, before performing terminal cooperation, the mobile information terminal 700 and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 each activate a cooperation control application that is an application for controlling terminal cooperation (S10101, S10102). In this state, the portable information terminal 700 makes a terminal cooperation request to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S10103). Next, MH-AIT stored in the M2 section message of the broadcast signal is acquired (S10104). Information such as a URL related to the distribution server is acquired from the MH-AIT information, and the acquired information is transmitted to the portable information terminal 700 (S10105). Next, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 transmits a time confirmation request to the distribution server. (S10106). Based on the time confirmation request, the distribution server transmits time information to the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S10107).
　放送受信装置１００は、配信サーバから取得した時刻情報により、内部クロックの動作を配信サーバに同期させることが可能である。また、これにより、配信サーバの時刻に合わせて後段のステップ（Ｓ１０１１５）において認証キー発行を行うことが可能である。なお、配信サーバと放送受信装置１００との時刻のずれが問題ない程度である場合には、Ｓ１０１０６～Ｓ１０１０７の処理は省略しても構わない。また、配信サーバ側もＵＴＣに同期して動作するものである場合には、Ｓ１０１０６～Ｓ１０１０７の処理は省略しても構わない。また、Ｓ１０１０７の処理で送信される前記時刻情報は、ＮＴＰ形式であっても良いし、その他の形式であっても良い。以降、Ｓ１０１２７の矢印で示されるループ制御に入る。 The broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can synchronize the operation of the internal clock with the distribution server based on the time information acquired from the distribution server. In addition, this makes it possible to issue an authentication key in a later step (S10115) in accordance with the time of the distribution server. If the time difference between the distribution server and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is not a problem, the processing of S10106 to S10107 may be omitted. If the distribution server also operates in synchronization with UTC, the processing of S10106 to S10107 may be omitted. Further, the time information transmitted in the process of S10107 may be in the NTP format or in other formats. Thereafter, the loop control indicated by the arrow in S10127 is entered.
　まず、携帯情報端末７００から放送受信装置１００に対し、認証キー発行要求または放送連携情報配信要求を送信する（Ｓ１０１０９）。なお、認証キーは、後段のステップ（Ｓ１０１２５）において、配信サーバへの放送連携情報配信要求で用いるものである。また、放送連携情報配信要求は、放送信号から取得した情報の配信要求であり、後段のステップ（Ｓ１０１２６）における放送連携情報配信のトリガとなる。 First, an authentication key issue request or a broadcast cooperation information distribution request is transmitted from the portable information terminal 700 to the broadcast receiving device 100 (S10109). The authentication key is used in a broadcast cooperation information distribution request to the distribution server in the subsequent step (S10125). The broadcast cooperation information distribution request is a distribution request for information acquired from a broadcast signal, and serves as a trigger for broadcast cooperation information distribution in a later step (S10126).
　何れにせよ、Ｓ１０１０９の各要求が携帯情報端末７００から送信されると、放送受信装置１００側において、同一宅内制限を課す放送連携アプリか否かを判定し（Ｓ１０１１１）、同一宅内制限を課す放送連携アプリであれば、次のステップ（Ｓ１０１１２）に進み、同一宅内制限を課す放送連携アプリでなければ、Ｓ１０１１２の手順はスキップして、後段のステップ（Ｓ１０１１４）に進む。全ての放送連携アプリが同一宅内制限を課すものである場合は、Ｓ１０１１１の判定は行わず、Ｓ１０１１２に進む。Ｓ１０１１２では、前記各要求を出した携帯情報端末７００が同一宅内にあるか否かの判定を行い、携帯情報端末７００が同一宅内にないと判定した場合には、端末連携を終了させる（Ｓ１０１１３）。携帯情報端末７００が同一宅内にあると判定した場合には、前記各要求に応じた次の手順、即ち、配信サーバからの放送連携情報の取得（Ｓ１０１２５）または放送信号からの放送連携情報の取得（Ｓ１０１２６）を行う。 In any case, when each request of S10109 is transmitted from the portable information terminal 700, the broadcast receiving device 100 determines whether or not the application is a broadcast cooperation application that imposes the same in-home restriction (S10111), and broadcasts that impose the same in-home restriction. If it is a cooperative application, the process proceeds to the next step (S10112). If it is not a broadcast cooperative application that imposes the same in-home restriction, the procedure of S10112 is skipped and the process proceeds to the subsequent step (S10114). If all the broadcast cooperative apps impose the same in-house restriction, the determination in S10111 is not performed and the process proceeds to S10112. In S10112, it is determined whether or not the portable information terminal 700 that issued each request is in the same house. If it is determined that the portable information terminal 700 is not in the same house, terminal cooperation is terminated (S10113). . If it is determined that the portable information terminal 700 is in the same house, the next procedure according to each request, that is, acquisition of broadcast cooperation information from the distribution server (S10125) or acquisition of broadcast cooperation information from the broadcast signal (S10126) is performed.
　なお、Ｓ１０１２５の処理とＳ１０１２６の処理は、実際には、何れか一方が実行されれば良いが、放送連携情報の取得処理が配信サーバからの取得および放送信号からの取得の何れであっても良いことを示すために、Ｓ１０１２５の処理とＳ１０１２６の処理の両手順を同時に図示している。
　まず、配信サーバからの放送連携情報の取得手順（Ｓ１０１２５）について説明する。 It should be noted that either one of the processing in S10125 and the processing in S10126 may actually be executed, but the acquisition processing of the broadcast cooperation information is either acquisition from the distribution server or acquisition from the broadcast signal. In order to show that it is good, both procedures of the process of S10125 and the process of S10126 are illustrated simultaneously.
First, the acquisition procedure (S10125) of the broadcast cooperation information from a delivery server is demonstrated.
　最初に、放送受信機１００は、Ｓ１０１０９の処理（認証キー発行要求）に応じて、情報連携端末７００に対して、認証キーを発行する（Ｓ１０１１５）。なお、前記発行した認証キーには発行時点の時刻情報を含めるものとし、また、予め定められた有効時間内（例えば、１０分間）だけ有効であるものとする。携帯情報端末７００は、前記認証キーの情報を含めた放送連携情報配信要求を配信サーバに対して行う（Ｓ１０１１６）。配信サーバでは有効時間内の認証キーであるか否かも含めて認証情報を確認し（Ｓ１０１１７）、認証がＯＫであれば放送連携情報の配信を許可する（Ｓ１０１１８）。以後、有効時間内であれば放送連携情報の配信を許可するが、有効時間を過ぎた時点で放送連携情報の配信を停止する。これにより、例えば、ストリーミング映像が有効時間を過ぎると視聴不可となるように制御することができる。 First, the broadcast receiver 100 issues an authentication key to the information cooperation terminal 700 in accordance with the processing of S10109 (authentication key issuance request) (S10115). It is assumed that the issued authentication key includes time information at the time of issuance and is valid only within a predetermined valid time (for example, 10 minutes). The portable information terminal 700 makes a broadcast cooperation information distribution request including the authentication key information to the distribution server (S10116). The distribution server confirms the authentication information including whether it is an authentication key within the valid time (S10117), and if the authentication is OK, the distribution of broadcast cooperation information is permitted (S10118). Thereafter, the distribution of the broadcast cooperation information is permitted within the valid time, but the distribution of the broadcast cooperation information is stopped when the effective time has passed. Thereby, for example, it is possible to control the streaming video so that it cannot be viewed after the valid time has passed.
　前記有効時間は、配信サーバが予め保持していても良いし、放送受信装置１００が放送信号（例えば、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴ等）から取得し、前記認証キーに有効時間情報として組み込んでも構わない。また、携帯情報端末７００には予め前記有効時間の情報を通知しておき、有効時間が切れる前に認証キーの発行を放送受信装置１００に要求するようにする。あるいは、前記有効時間は放送受信装置１００で管理しておき、有効時間が切れる前に、携帯情報端末７００が同一宅内にあることを確認した上で、放送受信装置１００から自動的に携帯情報端末７００に対し認証キーを発行しても構わない。 The effective time may be held in advance by the distribution server, or may be acquired from the broadcast signal (for example, MH-AIT) by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and incorporated as effective time information in the authentication key. Further, the mobile information terminal 700 is notified in advance of the information on the effective time, and requests the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 to issue an authentication key before the effective time expires. Alternatively, the effective time is managed by the broadcast receiving device 100, and it is automatically confirmed from the broadcast receiving device 100 after confirming that the portable information terminal 700 is in the same house before the effective time expires. An authentication key may be issued to 700.
　また、前記有効時間は、一つの番組の中で同一であっても構わないし、番組の進行に合わせて変化させても構わない。また、有効時間の設定がなければ一度認証を行えば番組視聴中は認証が有効である、という取扱でも構わない。 Further, the valid time may be the same in one program or may be changed according to the progress of the program. Further, if there is no valid time setting, it may be handled that once authentication is performed, the authentication is valid during program viewing.
　更に、配信サーバでの認証処理（Ｓ１０１１７）に使用する認証キーに、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴに記述された認証情報等を組み込んでも構わない。これにより、正当な認証要求であることが確認できる。また、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴに記述される認証情報等を、番組の進行に伴い変更し、配信サーバにおいて、番組の進行に同期した情報が組み込まれた認証キーでなければ認証を行わないようにすれば、同一番組を視聴し続けていることを確認できる。この場合、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴの情報は適宜読み込み更新を行うこととする（Ｓ１０１２４）。 Furthermore, the authentication information described in the MH-AIT may be incorporated in the authentication key used for the authentication process (S10117) in the distribution server. Thereby, it can confirm that it is a legitimate authentication request. In addition, if the authentication information described in the MH-AIT is changed as the program progresses, and the distribution server does not perform authentication unless the authentication key incorporates information synchronized with the progress of the program. , You can confirm that you continue to watch the same program. In this case, the MH-AIT information is appropriately read and updated (S10124).
　なお、放送信号に組み込む認証情報等はＭＨ－ＡＩＴに記載する他に、放送連携情報として組み込むことでも構わない。更にまた、実質的に認証情報等を変更することになる方法として、配信サーバのＵＲＬ自体を番組の進行に従って変更してゆく、という方法を使用することもできる。なお、この場合のＵＲＬ変更は、配信サーバは同一でＵＲＬのみが異なる場合であっても良いし、放送連携アプリの変更等により新しい配信サーバに変更することであっても良い。この場合は、変更の都度、配信サーバ情報送信（Ｓ１０１０５）、時刻確認要求（Ｓ１０１０６）、時刻情報送信（Ｓ１０１０７）の手順を行う。次に、放送信号から放送連携情報の取得手順（Ｓ１０１２６）について説明する。 Note that the authentication information incorporated in the broadcast signal may be incorporated as broadcast cooperation information in addition to being described in the MH-AIT. Furthermore, as a method for substantially changing the authentication information or the like, a method in which the URL of the distribution server itself is changed according to the progress of the program can be used. Note that the URL change in this case may be a case where the distribution server is the same and only the URL is different, or may be a change to a new distribution server by changing the broadcast cooperation application or the like. In this case, every time a change is made, the procedure of distribution server information transmission (S10105), time confirmation request (S10106), and time information transmission (S10107) is performed. Next, a procedure for acquiring broadcast cooperation information from a broadcast signal (S10126) will be described.
　この場合は、携帯情報端末７００が同一宅内にあることが確認された後、放送受信装置１００が、放送信号から放送連携情報を取得し（Ｓ１０１１９）、続いて前記取得した放送連携情報を携帯情報端末７００に配信する（Ｓ１０１２０）。 In this case, after it is confirmed that the portable information terminal 700 is in the same home, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 acquires broadcast cooperation information from the broadcast signal (S10119), and then acquires the acquired broadcast cooperation information as the portable information. Distribute to the terminal 700 (S10120).
　なお、番組の進行に伴って放送連携情報を変更する場合、放送信号から変更通知を出し（Ｓ１０１１０）、前記変更通知をトリガとして、放送連携情報を取得することがあっても構わない。その場合、配信サーバからの取得であれば、放送受信装置１００から携帯情報端末７００に認証キーを発行し（Ｓ１０１１５）、更に、変更通知があったことを通知する。有効時間内であれば認証キーの発行を省略し、変更通知の通知のみでも構わない。放送信号からの取得の場合は、放送受信装置１００が放送連携情報を取得し（Ｓ１０１１９）、携帯情報端末に配信する（Ｓ１０１２０）。なお、放送信号からの取得の場合は、変更通知毎に携帯情報端末７００が同一宅内にあることを確認しても構わないし、実施例４のように、有効時間内であればその確認を省略しても構わない。ここで、放送信号からの変更通知（Ｓ１０１１０）は放送連携情報から取得するように記載してあるが、ここではイベントメッセージも放送連携情報に含まれるものとして記載している。更に、この変更通知がＭＨ－ＡＩＴに記載されても構わない。 Note that, when the broadcast cooperation information is changed as the program progresses, a change notification may be issued from the broadcast signal (S10110), and the broadcast cooperation information may be acquired using the change notification as a trigger. In that case, if it is acquisition from a delivery server, an authentication key will be issued to the portable information terminal 700 from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S10115), and it will be further notified that there was a change notification. If it is within the valid time, the authentication key issuance may be omitted and only the notification of the change notification may be given. In the case of acquisition from a broadcast signal, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 acquires broadcast cooperation information (S10119) and distributes it to a portable information terminal (S10120). In the case of acquisition from a broadcast signal, it may be confirmed that the portable information terminal 700 is in the same home for each change notification, and the confirmation is omitted if it is within the valid time as in the fourth embodiment. It doesn't matter. Here, the change notification from the broadcast signal (S10110) is described as being acquired from the broadcast cooperation information, but here, the event message is also described as being included in the broadcast cooperation information. Further, this change notification may be described in the MH-AIT.
　放送連携情報の受信（取得）および配信に関する一連の処理が終わった後、放送受信装置１００が同一番組の視聴を続けているか否かを判定し（Ｓ１０１２１）、もし続けていない場合は、携帯情報端末側の連携制御アプリに連携不許可の応答を行い、処理を終了する（Ｓ１０１２３）。一方、同一の番組の視聴を続けている場合は、Ｓ１０１０８の手順に戻り、ループ処理Ｓ１０１２７を継続する。 After a series of processing related to reception (acquisition) and distribution of broadcast cooperation information is completed, it is determined whether or not the broadcast receiving device 100 continues to view the same program (S10121). A response indicating that the cooperation is not permitted is sent to the terminal-side cooperation control application, and the process is terminated (S10123). On the other hand, when viewing the same program is continued, the process returns to the procedure of S10108 and the loop processing S10127 is continued.
　このように、配信サーバでの認証処理に使用する認証キーに時刻情報を含め、有効時間の管理を行うことにより、定期的に携帯情報端末７００が放送受信装置１００と同一宅内にあることが確認でき、適切に同一宅内制限を課す放送連携アプリの実行を行うことができる。更に、放送信号に組み込まれた認証情報を配信サーバでの認証処理に使用することにより、配信要求の正当性を確保することができ、放送信号の認証情報を適宜変更するようにすれば、同一番組を視聴し続けていることの確認もできる。 As described above, the time information is included in the authentication key used for the authentication processing in the distribution server, and the validity time is managed, thereby confirming that the portable information terminal 700 is regularly in the same house as the broadcast receiving device 100. It is possible to execute a broadcast cooperation application that appropriately imposes the same in-house restriction. Furthermore, by using the authentication information embedded in the broadcast signal for authentication processing at the distribution server, the validity of the distribution request can be ensured. If the authentication information of the broadcast signal is appropriately changed, the same information can be obtained. You can also confirm that you are watching the program.
　以上説明した本実施例に係る携帯情報端末連携技術によれば、放送受信装置と連携する携帯情報端末が配信サーバから放送連携情報を取得する場合でも、同一宅内制限を実現することが可能となる。 According to the portable information terminal cooperation technology according to the present embodiment described above, even when the portable information terminal that cooperates with the broadcast receiving apparatus acquires the broadcast cooperation information from the distribution server, it is possible to realize the same in-home restriction. .
　（実施例６）
　実施例４および実施例５では、端末連携において同一宅内制限を実現する手順について説明したが、放送連携アプリによっては宅外からの使用を許可しても構わない。本実施例では、そのような場合につき説明する。 (Example 6)
In the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment, the procedure for realizing the same in-home restriction in terminal cooperation has been described. However, depending on the broadcast cooperation application, use from outside the house may be permitted. In this embodiment, such a case will be described.
　例えば、テレビショッピング等の番組自体が広報・宣伝になっている場合には、宅内／宅外に関わらず放送連携アプリが使用できた方が放送事業者にとっても望ましい。このような番組の場合、一度放送受信装置１００に登録しておけば、携帯情報端末７００が宅内にあるか否かに関わらず、放送連携アプリの使用を許可するようにしても構わない。この際、放送映像自体をストリーミングデータにして、放送受信装置１００からインターネット経由で携帯情報端末７００に配信する放送連携アプリがあると利便性がより高まる。前記ストリーミングデータは著作権保護のため、放送受信装置１００にて暗号化しておいても構わない。宅外への放送映像の配信を含め、放送連携アプリが宅外からの利用を許可しているか否かは放送信号内のデータ（例えばＭＨ－ＡＩＴ等）に記載しておけば良い。 For example, if the program itself such as TV shopping is publicity / advertising, it is desirable for broadcasters to be able to use the broadcast-linked app regardless of whether it is inside or outside the house. In the case of such a program, once registered in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, the use of the broadcast cooperative application may be permitted regardless of whether the portable information terminal 700 is in the house. At this time, if there is a broadcast cooperative application that uses the broadcast video itself as streaming data and distributes it from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 to the portable information terminal 700 via the Internet, the convenience is further enhanced. The streaming data may be encrypted by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 for copyright protection. Whether or not the broadcast cooperative app permits use from outside the home, including the distribution of broadcast video outside the home, may be described in the data (for example, MH-AIT) in the broadcast signal.
　図５１Ｃに、本実施例の具体的な手順を示す。なお、当該手順の一部は実施例４や実施例５と共通であるので、実施例４や実施例５と重複する部分に関しては適宜説明を省略する。 FIG. 51C shows a specific procedure of this example. In addition, since a part of the procedure is common to the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment, the description overlapping with the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment is appropriately omitted.
　まず、携帯情報端末７００で、端末連携を制御するアプリケーションである連携制御アプリを起動する（Ｓ１０２０２）。一方、放送受信装置１００の連携制御アプリは、予め起動（Ｓ１０２０１）しておいても良いし、後述の携帯情報端末７００からの端末連携要求の受信（Ｓ１０２０３）をトリガとして、前記連携制御アプリが起動しても良い。 First, in the portable information terminal 700, a cooperation control application that is an application for controlling terminal cooperation is activated (S10202). On the other hand, the cooperation control application of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may be activated in advance (S10201), or triggered by reception of a terminal cooperation request from the portable information terminal 700 described later (S10203). It may be activated.
　放送受信装置１００は、宅外の携帯情報端末７００からの端末連携要求（Ｓ１０２０３）があった場合、まず、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴを確認（Ｓ１０２０４）することにより放送連携アプリが宅外の利用を許可しているか否かの確認を行い、宅外利用が許可されている放送連携アプリであれば、要求元が登録済の携帯情報端末７００であるかを確認した上（Ｓ１０２０５）で、連携を許可するようにする。一方、宅外利用が許可されている放送連携アプリでない場合には、処理を終了する（Ｓ１０２０６）。 When there is a terminal cooperation request (S10203) from the portable information terminal 700 outside the home, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 first confirms the MH-AIT (S10204) to allow the broadcast cooperation app to permit use outside the home. If it is a broadcast cooperation application that is permitted to be used outside the house, it is confirmed whether the request source is the registered portable information terminal 700 (S10205), and then cooperation is permitted. Like that. On the other hand, if it is not a broadcast cooperation application that is permitted to be used outside the house, the process ends (S10206).
　宅外利用が許可されている放送連携アプリの場合、次に、必要に応じて、放送映像や放送連携情報の著作権保護のために、携帯情報端末７００と放送受信装置１００との間で認証処理を行っても構わない（Ｓ１０２０７）。また、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴの情報から配信サーバに関するＵＲＬ等の情報を取得し、前記取得した情報を携帯情報端末７００に送信する（Ｓ１０２０８）。 In the case of a broadcast cooperative application that is permitted to be used outside the house, next, authentication is performed between the portable information terminal 700 and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 in order to protect the copyright of broadcast video and broadcast cooperative information, as necessary. Processing may be performed (S10207). Further, information such as a URL related to the distribution server is acquired from the MH-AIT information, and the acquired information is transmitted to the portable information terminal 700 (S10208).
　前記認証処理は、配信サーバにおける認証であっても構わない。前記著作権保護の要不要についての情報や前記著作権保護のための認証方法についての情報は、放送信号（例えば、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴ等に記載しておく）から取得し、それに応じた制御を行えば良い。放送信号にこれらの情報が格納されていない場合は、放送受信装置１００において予め定められた所定の方法に従う。例えば、予め定められた所定の著作権保護処理を行えば良い。また、放送信号にこれらの情報が格納されていない場合は、放送受信装置１００において著作権保護処理を行わないことを予め定めておいても良い。 The authentication process may be authentication at the distribution server. Information on whether copyright protection is necessary or not and information on an authentication method for copyright protection are obtained from a broadcast signal (for example, described in MH-AIT, etc.), and control is performed accordingly. Just do it. When such information is not stored in the broadcast signal, a predetermined method predetermined in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is followed. For example, a predetermined predetermined copyright protection process may be performed. Further, when such information is not stored in the broadcast signal, it may be determined in advance that the copyright protection processing is not performed in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
　著作権保護のための認証処理の具体例を次に示す。以下の認証処理はそれぞれ一つだけ行っても良い。または、以下に例示された複数の認証処理を組み合わせて行っても良い。また、以下に例示された認証処理と、以下に例示されていない他の認証処理を組み合わせて行っても良い。 Specific examples of authentication processing for copyright protection are shown below. Only one of the following authentication processes may be performed. Alternatively, a plurality of authentication processes exemplified below may be combined. Moreover, you may perform combining the authentication process illustrated below and the other authentication process which is not illustrated below.
　［ＩＤとパスワードによる認証］
　携帯情報端末７００を放送受信装置１００に登録する際に、ＩＤとパスワードを発行し、放送受信装置１００はこのＩＤとパスワードの確認により連携を許可する。 [ID and password authentication]
When the portable information terminal 700 is registered in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, an ID and a password are issued, and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 permits cooperation by confirming the ID and password.
　［暗号鍵の使用］
　上記のＩＤとパスワードによる認証に加え、暗号化した映像データ等を復号するための暗号鍵を放送受信装置１００から携帯情報端末７００に送信する。この暗号鍵は放送信号（例えば、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴ等に記載しておく）から取得することでも構わない。 [Use encryption key]
In addition to the authentication using the ID and password, an encryption key for decrypting encrypted video data and the like is transmitted from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 to the portable information terminal 700. This encryption key may be obtained from a broadcast signal (for example, described in MH-AIT or the like).
　［配信サーバの利用］
　暗号化した映像データ等を復号するための暗号鍵の発行を、配信サーバから行う方法として、携帯情報端末７００は配信サーバに対してＩＤとパスワードを送信し、暗号鍵を取得する。この場合、配信サーバのロケーション情報（具体的にはＵＲＬ等）を放送信号（例えば、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴ等に記載しておく）から取得し、このロケーション情報を放送受信装置１００が携帯情報端末７００に送信することにより、より安全性が高まる。携帯情報端末７００が暗号鍵を入手できなければ映像等の復号はできないので、放送受信装置１００から配信サーバでの認証を要求することで、著作権保護の認証としても良いし、携帯情報端末７００から放送受信装置１００に暗号鍵を取得できたことを通知することにより認証を完了することにしても良い。なお、配信サーバによる課金が行われても構わない。 [Use of distribution server]
As a method of issuing an encryption key for decrypting encrypted video data and the like from the distribution server, the portable information terminal 700 transmits an ID and a password to the distribution server, and acquires the encryption key. In this case, location information of the distribution server (specifically, URL or the like) is acquired from a broadcast signal (for example, described in MH-AIT or the like), and the broadcast receiving device 100 sends the location information to the portable information terminal 700. By sending, the security is further increased. Since the video or the like cannot be decrypted unless the portable information terminal 700 obtains the encryption key, it is possible to authenticate the copyright by requesting authentication from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 at the distribution server, or the portable information terminal 700. Authentication may be completed by notifying the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 that the encryption key has been acquired. Note that the distribution server may be charged.
　［暗号鍵の相互認証］
　放送受信装置１００と携帯情報端末７００がそれぞれ持つ暗号鍵を相互に認証し、確認を取ることで著作権保護の認証とする。 [Mutual authentication of encryption key]
The encryption keys possessed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700 are mutually authenticated, and the copyright protection is authenticated by taking the confirmation.
　図５１Ｃの動作シーケンスの説明に戻る。
　Ｓ１０２０７の処理で、放送信号に格納された情報が、所定の方法での著作権保護が必要であること示している場合で、当該所定の方法での著作権保護の認証処理ができない場合は、端末連携を許可しない。また、放送信号に著作権保護に関する指定がなく、放送受信装置１００の既定の方法により認証処理を行う場合でも、当該既定の方法での著作権保護の認証処理ができない場合は、端末連携を許可しない。 Returning to the description of the operation sequence of FIG.
If the information stored in the broadcast signal in the process of S10207 indicates that copyright protection by a predetermined method is necessary, and the copyright protection authentication process by the predetermined method cannot be performed, Do not allow device linkage. Also, even if the broadcast signal is not specified for copyright protection and authentication processing is performed by the default method of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, if the copyright protection authentication processing cannot be performed by the default method, terminal cooperation is permitted. do not do.
　Ｓ１０２０１～Ｓ１０２０７の処理で、端末連携が許可された場合は、以後、携帯情報端末７００が同一宅内に存在するか否かの確認は行わず、携帯情報端末７００からの認証キー発行要求または放送連携情報配信要求（Ｓ１０２１１）に応じて、後段のＳ１０２２１の処理やＳ１０２２２の処理が実行される。なお、Ｓ１０２２１の処理におけるＳ１０２１２～Ｓ１０２１５の各ステップの処理は、図５１ＢにおけるＳ１０１１５～Ｓ１０１１８の各ステップの処理と同様で良い。但し、有効時間を設定した制御は行わなくとも構わない。また、Ｓ１０２２２の処理におけるＳ１０２１６～Ｓ１０２１７の各ステップの処理も、図５１ＢにおけるＳ１０１１９～Ｓ１０１２０の各ステップの処理と同様で良い。なお、前記Ｓ１０２２１やＳ１０２２２の処理等は、番組の進行に伴って放送信号から出される変更通知（Ｓ１０２１０）に応じて行われても良い。あるいは、放送受信装置１００の自発的制御により、前記Ｓ１０２２１やＳ１０２２２の処理等が実行されても良い。 If terminal cooperation is permitted in the processes of S10201 to S10207, then it is not confirmed whether the portable information terminal 700 exists in the same house, and an authentication key issuance request or broadcast cooperation from the portable information terminal 700 is not performed. In response to the information distribution request (S10211), the subsequent processing of S10221 and the processing of S10222 are executed. Note that the processing in steps S10212 to S10215 in the processing in S10221 may be the same as the processing in steps S10115 to S10118 in FIG. 51B. However, the control that sets the valid time may not be performed. Further, the processing of each step of S10216 to S10217 in the processing of S10222 may be the same as the processing of each step of S10119 to S10120 in FIG. 51B. Note that the processing in S10221 and S10222 may be performed according to a change notification (S10210) issued from a broadcast signal as the program progresses. Alternatively, the processes of S10221 and S10222 may be executed by the spontaneous control of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
　また、前記Ｓ１０２２１やＳ１０２２２の処理に続くＳ１０２１８～Ｓ１０２２０各ステップの処理も、図５１ＢにおけるＳ１０１２１～Ｓ１０１２４の各ステップの処理と同様で良い。 Further, the processing of each step S10218 to S10220 following the processing of S10221 and S10222 may be the same as the processing of each step of S10121 to S10124 in FIG. 51B.
　宅外にある携帯情報端末７００は、放送連携情報を、放送受信装置１００から取得可能である（Ｓ１０２１７）。あるいは、放送受信装置１００から発行された認証キーを用いて、配信サーバから取得可能である（Ｓ１０２１５）。また、放送受信装置１００が発行する認証キーに放送信号から取得した認証情報（例えば、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴに記載されている）を組み込み、配信サーバは、放送信号から取得した認証情報が組み込まれた認証キーであればアクセスを許可するようにすれば、より宅外利用の適正化を図ることができる。 The portable information terminal 700 outside the home can acquire the broadcast cooperation information from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S10217). Alternatively, it can be acquired from the distribution server using the authentication key issued from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 (S10215). In addition, the authentication information obtained from the broadcast signal (for example, described in MH-AIT) is incorporated into the authentication key issued by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, and the distribution server authenticates the authentication information obtained from the broadcast signal. If access is permitted for a key, it is possible to further optimize use outside the home.
　更に、番組視聴のプレミアムとしてディスカウントをする場合等、無制限に放送連携アプリの使用を許可しない方が良い場合もある。このような場合では、一度は同一宅内に携帯情報端末がある状態で認証を行い、その後は同一宅内でなくても配信サーバの利用を許可する方法が好ましい。この場合は携帯情報端末７００が放送受信装置１００に登録されていなくても構わない。 Furthermore, there are cases where it is better not to allow unlimited use of broadcast-linked apps, such as when discounting as a program viewing premium. In such a case, it is preferable to perform the authentication once with the portable information terminal in the same house, and thereafter permit the use of the distribution server even if it is not in the same house. In this case, the portable information terminal 700 may not be registered in the broadcast receiving device 100.
　この場合の具体的な手順を、図５１Ｄに示す。当該手順は、一部の手順が上記図５１Ｃと共通であるので、重複する部分については説明を省略する。 The specific procedure in this case is shown in FIG. 51D. Since this procedure is the same as that in FIG. 51C described above, the description of the overlapping portion is omitted.
　まず、端末連携を行う前に、携帯情報端末７００と放送受信装置１００のそれぞれで、端末連携を制御するアプリケーションである連携制御アプリを起動しておく（Ｓ１０３０１、Ｓ１０３０２）。次に、携帯情報端末７００が放送受信装置１００と同一宅内にある状態で、携帯情報端末７００から放送受信装置１００に対して端末連携要求を行う（Ｓ１０３０３）。また、放送受信装置１００は、当該携帯情報端末７００が同一宅内にあることを確認した（Ｓ１０３０５）上で、端末連携を許可する。ここで、必要に応じて、放送映像や放送連携情報の著作権保護のために、携帯情報端末７００と放送受信装置１００との間で認証処理を行っても構わない（Ｓ１０３０７）。 First, before performing terminal cooperation, the mobile information terminal 700 and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 each activate a cooperation control application that is an application for controlling terminal cooperation (S10301, S10302). Next, in a state where the portable information terminal 700 is in the same house as the broadcast receiving device 100, the portable information terminal 700 makes a terminal cooperation request to the broadcast receiving device 100 (S10303). Also, the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 confirms that the portable information terminal 700 is in the same home (S10305), and permits terminal cooperation. Here, if necessary, an authentication process may be performed between the portable information terminal 700 and the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 in order to protect the copyright of the broadcast video or the broadcast cooperation information (S10307).
　前記認証処理は、外部の配信サーバにおける認証であっても構わない。前記著作権保護の要不要についての情報や前記著作権保護のための認証方法についての情報は、放送信号（例えば、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴ等に記載しておく）から取得し、それに応じた制御を行えば良い。放送信号にこれらの情報が格納されていない場合は、放送受信装置１００において予め定められた所定の方法に従う。例えば、予め定められた所定の著作権保護処理を行えば良い。また、放送信号にこれらの情報が格納されていない場合は、放送受信装置１００において著作権保護処理を行わないことを予め定めておいても良い。 The authentication process may be authentication in an external distribution server. Information on whether copyright protection is necessary or not and information on an authentication method for copyright protection are obtained from a broadcast signal (for example, described in MH-AIT, etc.), and control is performed accordingly. Just do it. When such information is not stored in the broadcast signal, a predetermined method predetermined in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is followed. For example, a predetermined predetermined copyright protection process may be performed. Further, when such information is not stored in the broadcast signal, it may be determined in advance that the copyright protection processing is not performed in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100.
　著作権保護のための認証処理の具体例を次に示す。以下の認証処理はそれぞれ一つだけ行っても良い。または、以下に例示された複数の認証処理を組み合わせて行っても良い。また、以下に例示された認証処理と、以下に例示されていない他の認証処理を組み合わせて行っても良い。 Specific examples of authentication processing for copyright protection are shown below. Only one of the following authentication processes may be performed. Alternatively, a plurality of authentication processes exemplified below may be combined. Moreover, you may perform combining the authentication process illustrated below and the other authentication process which is not illustrated below.
　［暗号鍵の使用］
　携帯情報端末７００が同一宅内にいる状態で、暗号化した映像データ等を復号するための暗号鍵を放送受信装置１００から携帯情報端末７００に送信する。この暗号鍵は放送信号（例えば、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴ等に記載しておく）から取得することでも構わない。この暗号鍵を同一宅内で引き渡すことをもって認証とする。更に、番組のある時点でないと暗号鍵が放送信号から取得できないようにし、暗号鍵の携帯情報端末７００への受け渡しを同一宅内に限定すれば、その時点で同一宅内にいなければならない、という制限を設けることができ、視聴に対するプレミアム付与にも利用できる。 [Use encryption key]
While the portable information terminal 700 is in the same home, an encryption key for decrypting encrypted video data and the like is transmitted from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 to the portable information terminal 700. This encryption key may be obtained from a broadcast signal (for example, described in MH-AIT or the like). Authentication is performed by handing over this encryption key in the same house. Further, if the encryption key cannot be obtained from the broadcast signal only at a certain point in time of the program and the delivery of the encryption key to the portable information terminal 700 is limited to the same home, the restriction that the user must be at the same home at that time. Can be provided, and can also be used for providing premiums for viewing.
　［配信サーバの利用］
　暗号化した映像データ等を復号するための暗号鍵の発行を、配信サーバから行う方法として、携帯情報端末７００は配信サーバに対してＩＤとパスワードを送信し、暗号鍵を取得する。この場合、配信サーバのロケーション情報（具体的にはＵＲＬ等）を放送信号（例えば、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴ等に記載しておく）から取得し、このロケーション情報を放送受信装置１００が携帯情報端末７００に送信することにより、より安全性が高まる。携帯情報端末７００が暗号鍵を入手できなければ映像等の復号はできないので、放送受信装置１００から配信サーバでの認証を要求することで、著作権保護の認証としても良いし、携帯情報端末７００から放送受信装置１００に暗号鍵を取得できたことを通知することにより認証を完了することにしても良い。配信サーバへのアクセスは宅内で行っても宅外で行っても構わないが、番組のある時点でないと配信サーバのロケーション情報が放送信号から取得できないようにし、ロケーション情報の携帯情報端末７００への受け渡しを同一宅内に限定すれば、その時点で同一宅内にいなければならない、という制限を設けることができ、視聴に対するプレミアム付与にも利用できる。なお、配信サーバによる課金が行われても構わない。 [Use of distribution server]
As a method of issuing an encryption key for decrypting encrypted video data and the like from the distribution server, the portable information terminal 700 transmits an ID and a password to the distribution server, and acquires the encryption key. In this case, location information of the distribution server (specifically, URL or the like) is acquired from a broadcast signal (for example, described in MH-AIT or the like), and the broadcast receiving device 100 sends the location information to the portable information terminal 700. By sending, the security is further increased. Since the video or the like cannot be decrypted unless the portable information terminal 700 obtains the encryption key, it is possible to authenticate the copyright by requesting authentication from the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 at the distribution server, or the portable information terminal 700. Authentication may be completed by notifying the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 that the encryption key has been acquired. Access to the distribution server may be performed inside or outside the house, but the location information of the distribution server can be acquired from the broadcast signal only at a certain point in time of the program, and the location information to the portable information terminal 700 can be obtained. If delivery is limited to the same home, a restriction that the user must be in the same home at that time can be set, and this can also be used for providing premiums for viewing. Note that the distribution server may be charged.
　［暗号鍵の相互認証］
　放送受信装置１００と携帯情報端末７００がそれぞれ持つ暗号鍵を相互に認証し、確認を取ることで著作権保護の認証とする。この認証も宅内で行っても宅外で行っても構わない。 [Mutual authentication of encryption key]
The encryption keys possessed by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and the portable information terminal 700 are mutually authenticated, and the copyright protection is authenticated by taking the confirmation. This authentication may be performed inside or outside the house.
　図５１Ｄの動作シーケンスの説明に戻る。
　Ｓ１０３０７の処理で、放送信号に格納された情報が、所定の方法での著作権保護が必要であること示している場合で、当該所定の方法での著作権保護の認証処理ができない場合は、端末連携を許可しない。また、放送信号に著作権保護に関する指定がなく、放送受信装置１００の既定の方法により認証処理を行う場合でも、当該既定の方法での著作権保護の認証処理ができない場合は、端末連携を許可しない。 Returning to the description of the operation sequence of FIG.
If the information stored in the broadcast signal in the process of S10307 indicates that copyright protection by a predetermined method is necessary and the copyright protection authentication process by the predetermined method cannot be performed, Do not allow device linkage. Also, even if the broadcast signal is not specified for copyright protection and authentication processing is performed by the default method of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, if the copyright protection authentication processing cannot be performed by the default method, terminal cooperation is permitted. do not do.
　端末連携が許可された場合の、以降の手順は図５１Ｃの手順と共通であるので、説明を省略する。 The subsequent procedure when terminal cooperation is permitted is the same as the procedure in FIG.
　以上説明した本実施例に係る携帯情報端末連携技術によれば、放送受信装置と連携する携帯情報端末について、著作権保護に留意しつつ宅外からの利用を実現することが可能となる。 According to the portable information terminal cooperation technique according to the present embodiment described above, it is possible to realize use of the portable information terminal linked with the broadcast receiving apparatus from outside the house while paying attention to copyright protection.
　（実施例７）
　実際の使用状況においては、番組による端末連携アプリの有無や、どの端末連携アプリが利用可能か、等が、簡便に分かる方がより望ましい。本実施例では、端末連携アプリの利用可能状況等の表示方法につき説明する。なお、前記端末連携アプリとは、端末連携で使用される放送連携アプリを指す。 (Example 7)
In an actual usage situation, it is more desirable to easily know whether or not there is a terminal cooperation application based on a program and which terminal cooperation application can be used. In this embodiment, a method for displaying the availability status of the terminal cooperation application will be described. In addition, the said terminal cooperation application points out the broadcast cooperation application used by terminal cooperation.
　図５２Ａは、端末連携アプリがある場合の放送連携アプリのランチャ画面の一例を示す画面表示図である。図５２Ａにおいては、放送番組画面１６２ｒ上の任意の位置に放送連携アプリランチャ１６２ｒ１１が表示され、放送連携アプリが枠付き文字のアイコンで表示されている。視聴中の番組に連携した放送受信装置１００用の放送連携アプリ（１６２ｒ１２～１６２ｒ１４）と携帯情報端末７００用の放送連携アプリ（１６２ｒ１５～１６２ｒ１７）が表示されている。また、放送連携アプリランチャ１６２ｒ１１を終了させる戻るボタン１６２ｒ１８も表示されている。 FIG. 52A is a screen display diagram illustrating an example of a launcher screen of a broadcast cooperative app when there is a terminal cooperative app. In FIG. 52A, the broadcast cooperation application launcher 162r11 is displayed at an arbitrary position on the broadcast program screen 162r, and the broadcast cooperation application is displayed as a framed character icon. A broadcast cooperation application (162r12 to 162r14) for the broadcast receiving device 100 and a broadcast cooperation application (162r15 to 162r17) for the portable information terminal 700 that are linked to the program being viewed are displayed. Further, a return button 162r18 for ending the broadcast cooperative application launcher 162r11 is also displayed.
　この例の場合は、文字列を囲む枠線の太さと枠内の色でアプリの状況を示している。本体アプリＡ、Ｂ（１６２ｒ１２、１６２ｒ１３）と端末アプリＡ、Ｂ（１６２ｒ１５、１６２ｒ１６）が利用可能な状態である。本体アプリＣ（１６２ｒ１４）と端末アプリＣ（１６２ｒ１７）が利用不可能な状態である。なお、端末アプリが利用不可能な状態とは、放送受信装置１００と通信可能な状態にある携帯情報端末７００の中で、当該アプリを実行する機能を持つものがないことを意味する。 In the case of this example, the status of the application is indicated by the thickness of the frame line surrounding the character string and the color in the frame. The main body applications A and B (162r12, 162r13) and the terminal applications A and B (162r15, 162r16) are available. The main application C (162r14) and the terminal application C (162r17) are unavailable. The state in which the terminal application cannot be used means that none of the portable information terminals 700 that are communicable with the broadcast receiving device 100 have a function of executing the application.
　図５２Ｂは、図５２Ａのランチャ画面で端末アプリＡを選択した後の画面である。端末アプリＡに関した各携帯情報端末７００の状態を示している。この画面で表示されている携帯情報端末７００は、過去に放送受信装置１００と連携を行ったか登録されている端末であるものとする。 FIG. 52B is a screen after selecting the terminal application A on the launcher screen of FIG. 52A. The state of each portable information terminal 700 regarding the terminal application A is shown. The portable information terminal 700 displayed on this screen is assumed to be a terminal that has been linked or registered with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 in the past.
　アイコンの枠線が実線になっている携帯端末１（１６２ｒ２２）と携帯端末２（１６２ｒ２３）は放送受信装置１００と通信可能な状態にあり、枠線が点線になっている携帯端末３（１６２ｒ２４）と携帯端末４（１６２ｒ２５）は放送受信装置１００と通信可能な状態にないことを示している。また、アイコンの枠内が白である携帯端末１（１６２ｒ２２）と携帯端末３（１６２ｒ２４）は端末アプリＡを実行する機能を持ち、枠内が灰色である携帯端末２（１６２ｒ２３）と携帯端末４（１６２ｒ２５）は端末アプリＡを実行する機能を持たないことを示している。更に、当該端末でアプリが既に実行中である場合、そのことを表すデザインのアイコンを使用しても構わない。
　また、アイコンに絵柄を利用して、より視覚的に分かり易くする例を、次に示す。 The mobile terminal 1 (162r22) and the mobile terminal 2 (162r23) whose icon frame line is a solid line are in a state where they can communicate with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, and the mobile terminal 3 (162r24) whose frame line is a dotted line The mobile terminal 4 (162r25) is not in a communicable state with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100. Further, the mobile terminal 1 (162r22) and the mobile terminal 3 (162r24) in which the icon frame is white have a function of executing the terminal application A, and the mobile terminal 2 (162r23) and the mobile terminal 4 in which the frame is gray. (162r25) indicates that the terminal application A is not provided with a function. Furthermore, when an application is already being executed on the terminal, an icon with a design indicating that may be used.
In addition, an example in which a picture is used for an icon to make it easier to understand visually is shown below.
　図５２Ｃは、放送連携アプリの一覧を示すランチャ画面（１６２ｒ３１）の例である。放送受信装置１００の他、携帯情報端末７００のタイプ別にアイコンが示されている。１６２ｒ３２と１６２ｒ３３が放送受信装置１００を示すアイコンであり、１６２ｒ３４と１６２ｒ３５がスマートホン型の携帯情報端末７００を示すアイコンであり、１６２ｒ３６がヘッドマウントディスプレイ型の携帯情報端末７００を示すアイコンである。それぞれのアプリはアイコンで示される装置用のものである。 FIG. 52C is an example of a launcher screen (162r31) showing a list of broadcast cooperation apps. In addition to the broadcast receiving device 100, icons are shown for each type of portable information terminal 700. 162r32 and 162r33 are icons indicating the broadcast receiving device 100, 162r34 and 162r35 are icons indicating the smart phone type portable information terminal 700, and 162r36 is an icon indicating the head mounted display type portable information terminal 700. Each app is for a device indicated by an icon.
　図５２Ｃにおいては、当該アプリの利用ができない場合は、装置の絵柄に重ねて利用不可を示すマーク（本実施例では、丸に斜線のマーク）を表示させている。また、放送受信装置１００に関しては、既に当該アプリが実行中の場合は、そのことを示すマーク（本実施例では、丸に点のマーク）を重ねて表示しても構わない。この表示により、既に実行をしているにも関わらず、ランチャの手順を先に進める、という無駄な動作を防ぐことができる。携帯情報端末７００の場合は、放送受信装置１００と通信可能な状態にあり当該アプリが実行可能な端末全てで当該アプリが実行中のときに実行中を示すマークを表示する、という方法も可能である。 In FIG. 52C, when the application cannot be used, a mark indicating that the application cannot be used is superimposed on the pattern of the device (in this embodiment, a hatched circle). As for the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, when the application is already being executed, a mark indicating that (in the present embodiment, a dot mark in a circle) may be displayed in an overlapping manner. By this display, it is possible to prevent a useless operation of proceeding with the launcher procedure even though it has already been executed. In the case of the portable information terminal 700, it is also possible to display a mark indicating that the application is being executed when the application is being executed on all terminals that are communicable with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 and can execute the application. is there.
　図５２Ｄは、図５２Ｃのランチャ画面で端末アプリＣを選択した後の画面である。端末アプリＣに対応したタイプの携帯情報端末７００の状態が示されている。この画面においては、携帯情報端末７００が端末アプリＣの実行機能を持たない場合、放送受信装置１００と通信可能な状態にない場合、既に当該端末アプリＣを実行中の場合に、それぞれそのことを表すマークをアイコンに重ねて表示する。本実施例では、実行機能を持たない場合は丸に斜線のマーク（１６２ｒ４４、１６２ｒ４６）、通信可能な状態にない場合は三角に感嘆符のマーク（１６２ｒ４５、１６２ｒ４６）、既に実行中の場合は丸に点のマーク（１６２ｒ４３）を表示している。 FIG. 52D is a screen after the terminal application C is selected on the launcher screen of FIG. 52C. The state of the portable information terminal 700 of the type corresponding to the terminal application C is shown. In this screen, if the portable information terminal 700 does not have the function of executing the terminal application C, if it is not in a state where it can communicate with the broadcast receiving apparatus 100, or if the terminal application C is already being executed, this is indicated The mark to represent is displayed over the icon. In this embodiment, if there is no execution function, a circle with a hatched mark (162r44, 162r46), if not in a communicable state, a triangle with an exclamation mark (162r45, 162r46), if already running, a circle A dot mark (162r43) is displayed on the screen.
　更に、いちいちランチャを起動させなくても、状況が変化したときに放送連携アプリがあることが分かる表示方法があると望ましい。例えば、電源を入れたとき、チャンネルを変えたとき、番組の初め、番組の途中でも放送連携アプリに変更があったとき、放送受信装置１００と携帯情報端末７００の間の通信状態に変化があった場合、アプリの実行状況が変わった場合、等に、予め定められた時間だけアイコンを表示し、そのときの状態を表示するようにする。 Furthermore, it is desirable that there is a display method that shows that there is a broadcast cooperation app when the situation changes without having to start the launcher every time. For example, when the power is turned on, when the channel is changed, when the broadcast cooperation app is changed even at the beginning of the program or in the middle of the program, the communication state between the broadcast receiving device 100 and the portable information terminal 700 is changed. In such a case, an icon is displayed only for a predetermined time and the state at that time is displayed when the execution status of the application changes.
　図５２Ｅに、その場合の例を示す。それぞれの装置のタイプを示すアイコンが表示されている場合（１６２ｒ５１～１６２ｒ５３）は、そのタイプの装置に対応した放送連携アプリがあることを示す。本実施例では、丸に斜線のマーク（１６２ｒ５３）は、使用可能な状態になっているそのタイプの装置において当該アプリを実行できるものがないことを表す。丸に点のマーク（１６２ｒ５１）は使用可能な状態になっているそのタイプの装置の全てあるいは一部において当該アプリが実行中であることを示す。 FIG. 52E shows an example in that case. When an icon indicating the type of each device is displayed (162r51 to 162r53), it indicates that there is a broadcast cooperation application corresponding to that type of device. In this embodiment, a circle with a diagonal line (162r53) indicates that there is no device that can execute the application in that type of device that is in a usable state. A dot mark (162r51) in a circle indicates that the application is being executed on all or a part of the type of devices that are ready for use.
　図５２Ｆは、携帯情報端末７００の表示部７４１に表示される放送連携アプリの一例を示す画面表示図である。携帯情報端末７００から端末連携を要求する際に、どの放送受信装置１００でどの放送連携アプリが利用可能か一覧表で分かった方が利用に便利である。図５２Ｆは、連携制御アプリの基本画面７４１ｄに表示された前記一覧表７４１ｄ１を示すものである。この一覧表７４１ｄ１では、調べたい番組に対応した放送連携アプリが、自宅内にあるどの放送受信装置１００で利用可能かを示している。また、各放送受信装置１００の状態も表示してあると、特に宅外で携帯情報端末７００を利用するときに、利便性がより高まる。本実施例では、当該番組を受信中、他番組を受信中、空き、他番組予約有（番組の途中から他番組の録画を予約してある場合）、といった放送受信装置１００の状態を示す。 FIG. 52F is a screen display diagram illustrating an example of a broadcast cooperation application displayed on the display unit 741 of the portable information terminal 700. When requesting terminal cooperation from the portable information terminal 700, it is more convenient for use to know which broadcast cooperation app is available in which broadcast receiving apparatus 100 from the list. FIG. 52F shows the list 741d1 displayed on the basic screen 741d of the cooperation control application. This list 741d1 indicates which broadcast receiving device 100 in the home can use the broadcast cooperation application corresponding to the program to be checked. Further, when the status of each broadcast receiving apparatus 100 is also displayed, the convenience is further enhanced particularly when the portable information terminal 700 is used outside the house. This embodiment shows the state of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 such as receiving the program, receiving another program, vacant, and having another program reserved (when recording of another program is reserved in the middle of the program).
　なお、ここで、放送受信装置１００が複数のチューナを備えている場合、前記複数のチューナ毎に状態を表示してあると更に利便性が高まる。一覧表７４１ｄ１においては、枝番号で同一装置内のチューナの区別を示している。例えば受信装置Ｂ－１と受信装置Ｂ－２が、同一放送受信装置１００内の複数のチューナの一方と他方である。端末連携の場合、ストリーミングデータとして放送映像と音声の配信を受けられれば、放送受信装置１００のモニタ部１６２を使用する必要はなく、即ち、放送受信装置１００内のチューナが使用できれば放送の利用が可能になるので、チューナ毎の使用状況が分かると便利である。 Here, when the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 includes a plurality of tuners, the convenience is further enhanced if the status is displayed for each of the plurality of tuners. In the list 741d1, the branch numbers indicate the tuners in the same device. For example, the receiving device B-1 and the receiving device B-2 are one and the other of a plurality of tuners in the same broadcast receiving device 100. In the case of terminal cooperation, if broadcast video and audio can be received as streaming data, it is not necessary to use the monitor unit 162 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100. That is, if the tuner in the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 can be used, the broadcast can be used. Since it becomes possible, it is convenient to know the usage status of each tuner.
　なお、本実施例で説明した表示を行うためには、放送連携アプリ毎に、放送受信装置１００に対応したアプリであるのか、あるいは、どういうタイプの携帯情報端末７００に対応したアプリであるのかの情報がなければならない。また、放送受信装置１００や携帯情報端末７００で、対応したアプリを実行するための情報が必要である。これらの情報は、例えば、ＭＨ－ＡＩＴ等に記載しておくことにより、放送受信装置１００で取得することができる。 In addition, in order to perform the display described in the present embodiment, for each broadcast cooperation app, whether the app is compatible with the broadcast receiving device 100 or what type of mobile information terminal 700 is compatible. There must be information. In addition, information for executing the corresponding application in the broadcast receiving device 100 or the portable information terminal 700 is necessary. Such information can be acquired by the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 by describing it in, for example, MH-AIT.
　以上、本発明の実施形態の例を、実施例１～７を用いて説明したが、本発明の技術を実現する構成は前記実施例に限られるものではなく、様々な変形例が考えられる。例えば、ある実施例の構成の一部を他の実施例の構成と置き換えることが可能であり、また、ある実施例の構成に他の実施例の構成を加えることも可能である。これらは全て本発明の範疇に属するものである。また、文中や図中に現れる数値やメッセージ等もあくまでも一例であり、異なるものを用いても本発明の効果を損なうことはない。 As mentioned above, although the example of embodiment of this invention was demonstrated using Examples 1-7, the structure which implement | achieves the technique of this invention is not restricted to the said Example, Various modifications can be considered. For example, a part of the configuration of one embodiment can be replaced with the configuration of another embodiment, and the configuration of another embodiment can be added to the configuration of one embodiment. These all belong to the category of the present invention. In addition, numerical values, messages, and the like appearing in sentences and drawings are merely examples, and the use of different ones does not impair the effects of the present invention.
　前述した本発明の機能等は、それらの一部または全部を、例えば集積回路で設計する等によりハードウェアで実現しても良い。また、マイクロプロセッサユニット等がそれぞれの機能等を実現する動作プログラムを解釈して実行することによりソフトウェアで実現しても良い。ハードウェアとソフトウェアを併用しても良い。 The functions and the like of the present invention described above may be realized by hardware by designing a part or all of them with, for example, an integrated circuit. Further, the microprocessor unit or the like may be realized by software by interpreting and executing an operation program that realizes each function or the like. Hardware and software may be used together.
　なお、放送受信装置１００を制御する前記ソフトウェアは、製品出荷の時点で予め放送受信装置１００のＲＯＭ１０３および／またはストレージ（蓄積）部１１０等に格納された状態であっても良い。製品出荷後にインターネット２００上のその他のアプリケーションサーバ５００等からＬＡＮ通信部１２１を介して取得するものであっても良い。また、メモリカードや光ディスク等に格納された前記ソフトウェアを、拡張インタフェース部１２４等を介して取得しても良い。 Note that the software that controls the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 may be stored in advance in the ROM 103 and / or the storage (storage) unit 110 of the broadcast receiving apparatus 100 at the time of product shipment. It may be acquired from another application server 500 on the Internet 200 via the LAN communication unit 121 after product shipment. Further, the software stored in a memory card, an optical disk, or the like may be acquired via the expansion interface unit 124 or the like.
　また、図中に示した制御線や情報線は説明上必要と考えられるものを示しており、必ずしも製品上の全ての制御線や情報線を示しているとは限らない。実際にはほとんど全ての構成が相互に接続されていると考えても良い。 Also, the control lines and information lines shown in the figure are those that are considered necessary for the explanation, and not all control lines and information lines on the product are necessarily shown. Actually, it may be considered that almost all the components are connected to each other.
　１００，８００…放送受信装置、１００ａ…アンテナ、１０１，８０１…主制御部、１０２，８０２…システムバス、１０３，８０３…ＲＯＭ、１０４，８０４…ＲＡＭ、１１０，８１０…ストレージ部、１２１，８２１…ＬＡＮ通信部、１２４，８２４…拡張インタフェース部、１２５，８２５…デジタルインタフェース部、１３１，８３１，８３２…チューナ／復調部、１３２…分離部、１４１…映像デコーダ、１４２…映像色域変換部、１４３…音声デコーダ、１４４…文字スーパーデコーダ、１４５…字幕デコーダ、１４６…字幕合成部、１４７…字幕色域変換部、１５１…データデコーダ、１５２…キャッシュ部、１５３…アプリケーション制御部、１５４…ブラウザ部、１５５…アプリケーション色域変換部、１５６…音源部、１６１，８６１…映像合成部、１６２，８６２…モニタ部、１６３，８６３…映像出力部、１６４，８６４…音声合成部、１６５，８６５…スピーカ部、１６６，８６６…音声出力部、１７０，８７０…操作入力部、８４１…ＭＭＴデコード処理部、８４２…ＭＰＥＧ２－ＴＳデコード処理部、２００…インターネット、２００ｒ…ルータ装置、２００ａ…アクセスポイント、３００ｔ…電波塔、３００ｓ…放送衛星（または通信衛星）、３００…放送局サーバ、４００…サービス事業者サーバ、５００…その他のアプリケーションサーバ、６００…移動体電話通信サーバ、６００ｂ…基地局、７００…携帯情報端末。 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100,800 ... Broadcast receiving apparatus, 100a ... Antenna, 101, 801 ... Main control part, 102, 802 ... System bus, 103, 803 ... ROM, 104, 804 ... RAM, 110, 810 ... Storage part, 121, 821 ... LAN communication unit, 124, 824 ... extended interface unit, 125, 825 ... digital interface unit, 131, 831, 832 ... tuner / demodulation unit, 132 ... separation unit, 141 ... video decoder, 142 ... video color gamut conversion unit, 143 ... Audio decoder, 144 ... Character super decoder, 145 ... Subtitle decoder, 146 ... Subtitle synthesis unit, 147 ... Subtitle color gamut conversion unit, 151 ... Data decoder, 152 ... Cache unit, 153 ... Application control unit, 154 ... Browser unit, 155 ... Application color gamut conversion unit, 156 ... Sound source unit 161,861 ... Video synthesis unit, 162,862 ... Monitor unit, 163,863 ... Video output unit, 164,864 ... Sound synthesis unit, 165,865 ... Speaker unit, 166,866 ... Audio output unit, 170,870 ... Operation input unit, 841... MMT decoding processing unit, 842... MPEG2-TS decoding processing unit, 200... Internet, 200r... Router device, 200a... Access point, 300t ... radio tower, 300s ... broadcasting satellite (or communication satellite) ... broadcast station server, 400 ... service provider server, 500 ... other application server, 600 ... mobile telephone communication server, 600b ... base station, 700 ... portable information terminal.

Claims (6)

  1. 　放送番組と連携してアプリケーションが実行可能なメディアトランスポート方式を採用した放送システムのデジタル放送サービスを受信可能な放送受信装置であって、
    　前記デジタル放送サービスの放送波を受信する放送受信部と、
    　前記受信した放送波から少なくとも放送番組についての映像と電子番組表情報とアプリケーション関連情報を分離する分離部と、
    　前記放送番組についての映像を再生する放送映像再生部と、
    　前記電子番組表情報に基づいて電子番組表画面を作成する電子番組表作成部と、
    　前記アプリケーション関連情報を参照して取得したロケーション情報に基づいて所定のアプリケーションを取得するアプリケーション取得部と、
    　前記取得した所定のアプリケーションを実行してアプリケーション実行映像を出力するアプリケーション実行部と、
    　前記放送番組についての映像、前記電子番組表画面、または前記アプリケーション実行映像を表示可能な表示部と、
    を備え、
    　前記放送受信装置で受信可能なデジタル放送サービスは、前記放送番組と連携して実行可能なアプリケーションと携帯情報端末との連携動作の可否を、放送番組毎に更に設定可能であって、
    　前記電子番組表作成部は、前記電子番組表画面に表示する放送番組についての表示において、前記放送番組と連携して実行可能なアプリケーションにおいて前記携帯情報端末との提示同期動作が可能であることを示す表示、または、前記放送番組と連携して実行可能なアプリケーションが、前記携帯情報端末が宅外にある場合でも実行可能であることを示す表示を行うことが可能である、放送受信装置。     A broadcast receiving apparatus capable of receiving a digital broadcast service of a broadcast system adopting a media transport method capable of executing an application in cooperation with a broadcast program,
    A broadcast receiver for receiving broadcast waves of the digital broadcast service;
    A separation unit that separates at least a video about a broadcast program, electronic program guide information, and application-related information from the received broadcast wave;
    A broadcast video playback unit for playing back video about the broadcast program;
    An electronic program guide creation unit for creating an electronic program guide screen based on the electronic program guide information;
    An application acquisition unit that acquires a predetermined application based on location information acquired by referring to the application-related information;
    An application execution unit that executes the acquired predetermined application and outputs an application execution video;
    A display unit capable of displaying the video about the broadcast program, the electronic program guide screen, or the application execution video;
    With
    The digital broadcast service receivable by the broadcast receiving device can further set for each broadcast program whether or not a cooperative operation between an application that can be executed in cooperation with the broadcast program and a portable information terminal is performed,
    The electronic program guide creation unit is capable of performing a presentation synchronization operation with the portable information terminal in an application that can be executed in cooperation with the broadcast program in displaying the broadcast program displayed on the electronic program guide screen. A broadcast receiving apparatus capable of performing display indicating that an application that can be executed in cooperation with the broadcast program is executable even when the portable information terminal is outside the home.
  2. 　前記提示同期動作を行うアプリケーションがある場合において、前記提示同期動作を実行可能な携帯情報端末が認識できない場合には、前記提示同期動作を行うアプリケーションの実行を禁止する、請求項１に記載の放送受信装置。 The broadcast according to claim 1, wherein when there is an application that performs the presentation synchronization operation and the portable information terminal that can execute the presentation synchronization operation cannot be recognized, execution of the application that performs the presentation synchronization operation is prohibited. Receiver device.
  3. 　前記提示同期動作を行うアプリケーションがある場合において、前記提示同期動作を実行可能な携帯情報端末が認識できない場合には、前記提示同期動作を行うアプリケーションが無いものとして前記電子番組表画面を作成する、請求項１に記載の放送受信装置。 If there is an application that performs the presentation synchronization operation and the portable information terminal that can execute the presentation synchronization operation cannot be recognized, the electronic program guide screen is created assuming that there is no application that performs the presentation synchronization operation. The broadcast receiving apparatus according to claim 1.
  4. 　宅外にある端末からのリモート視聴が許可されていない放送番組の場合に、前記放送番組と連携して実行可能なアプリケーションも、宅外にある携帯情報端末からの実行を許可しない、請求項１に記載の放送受信装置。 2. In the case of a broadcast program in which remote viewing from a terminal outside the home is not permitted, an application that can be executed in cooperation with the broadcast program is not permitted to be executed from a portable information terminal outside the home. The broadcast receiving apparatus described in 1.
  5. 　宅外にある端末からのリモート視聴が許可されている放送番組の場合に、前記放送番組と連携して実行可能なアプリケーションの宅外にある携帯情報端末からの実行可否を前記デジタル放送サービスにおいて当該放送番組に対応付けられた制御情報従って判断する、請求項１に記載の放送受信装置。 In the case of a broadcast program that allows remote viewing from a terminal outside the home, whether or not the application that can be executed in cooperation with the broadcast program can be executed from the portable information terminal outside the home is determined in the digital broadcasting service. The broadcast receiving apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the determination is made according to control information associated with a broadcast program.
  6. 　前記デジタル放送サービスにおいて前記放送番組について、宅外にある端末からのリモート視聴の可否を指定する制御情報が対応付けられていない場合に、宅外にある端末からのリモート視聴を許可しない、請求項１に記載の放送受信装置。 The remote viewing from a terminal outside the home is not permitted when the broadcast program in the digital broadcasting service is not associated with control information that specifies whether remote viewing from a terminal outside the home is associated. The broadcast receiving apparatus according to 1.
PCT/JP2016/083951 2015-11-19 2016-11-16 Broadcast receiving device WO2017086341A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2015-226588 2015-11-19
JP2015226588A JP2017098656A (en) 2015-11-19 2015-11-19 Broadcast receiver
JP2015227854A JP2017098702A (en) 2015-11-20 2015-11-20 Broadcast receiver
JP2015-227854 2015-11-20
JP2015228489A JP2017098736A (en) 2015-11-24 2015-11-24 Broadcast receiver
JP2015-228489 2015-11-24

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2017086341A1 true WO2017086341A1 (en) 2017-05-26

Family

ID=58719010

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2016/083951 WO2017086341A1 (en) 2015-11-19 2016-11-16 Broadcast receiving device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2017086341A1 (en)

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2015072493A1 (en) * 2013-11-13 2015-05-21 日立マクセル株式会社 Broadcast receiver and method for displaying broadcast program video and application video in broadcast receiver

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2015072493A1 (en) * 2013-11-13 2015-05-21 日立マクセル株式会社 Broadcast receiver and method for displaying broadcast program video and application video in broadcast receiver

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
BABA, A. ET AL.: "Seamless, Synchronous, and Supportive: Welcome to Hybridcast", IEEE CONSUMER ELECTRONICS MAGAZINE, vol. 1, no. 2, 22 March 2012 (2012-03-22), pages 43 - 52, XP011440218, ISSN: 2162-2248, DOI: doi:10.1109/MCE.2011.2182469 *
OHMATA, H. ET AL.: "HYBRIDCAST: A NEW MEDIA EXPERIENCE BY INTEGRATION OF BROADCASTING AND BROADBAND", PROCEEDINGS OF ITL KALEIDOSCOPE: BUILDING SUSTAINABLE COMMUNITIES (K-2013, 24 April 2013 (2013-04-24), XP032427822, ISBN: 978-92-61-14061-8 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP2017098736A (en) Broadcast receiver
JP6301849B2 (en) Display and temporary storage processing method
JP2016144020A (en) Broadcast reception device and broadcast reception method
WO2017022281A1 (en) Broadcast receiving device, output video information generating method, broadcast receiving method and video recording method
US20230224543A1 (en) Broadcast receiving apparatus and portable information terminal
JP7239763B2 (en) Copy control method in broadcast receiver
JP7239762B2 (en) Copy control method in broadcast receiver
JP2017038313A (en) Broadcast receiver and recording method
WO2017212983A1 (en) Broadcast reception device
JP7065218B2 (en) Broadcast receiver
JP7200326B2 (en) Broadcast receiver
JP7197661B2 (en) Broadcast receiver
JP6833325B2 (en) Mobile information terminal
JP2018121363A (en) Method for transmission, reception and storage control of broadcast program content
WO2017086341A1 (en) Broadcast receiving device
JP2017220786A (en) Broadcast reception device
JP6560643B2 (en) Broadcast receiving apparatus and content protection processing method
JP6560160B2 (en) Broadcast receiver
JP2017038288A (en) Broadcast receiver and output video information generation method
JP2017034618A (en) Broadcast receiver and output video information generation method
JP2017098702A (en) Broadcast receiver
JP2023067939A (en) Content protection processing method
JP2022107670A (en) Display method in broadcast reception device
JP2022107669A (en) Broadcast reception method
JP2022191436A (en) Content protection processing method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 16866342

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 16866342

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1